SEO-OPTIMIZED MANUAL SECTION TITLE

00/10/27 13:32:20 61S5N000_000_0002
Pour avoir le supplement des models 2002-2005 contactez moi b_i_h_3_2@hotmail.com

Introduction
General Info
How to Use This Manual
This manual is divided into 23 sections. The first page of each
section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover. Specifications
You can quickly find the first page of each section without
looking through a full table of contents. The symbols printed at
the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick
reference system.
Each section includes: Maintenance
1. A table of contents, or an exploded view index showing:
• Parts disassembly sequence.
• Bolt torques and thread sizes.
• Page references to descriptions in text.
2. Disassembly/assembly procedures and tools.
Engine Electrical
3. Inspection.
4. Testing/troubleshooting.
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments. Engine
Safety Messages
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help Cooling
you make informed decisions, we have provided safety
messages, and other safety information throughout this manual.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You must use
your own good judgment. Fuel and Emissions
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms
including:
• Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
• Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and
one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. *Transaxle
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if

you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
*Steering
you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
• Instructions − how to service this vehicle correctly and safely. Suspension
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest
product information available at the time of printing. We reserve
the right to make changes at any time without notice. No part of
*Brakes
this publication may be reproduced, stored in retrieval system, (Including ABS )
or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text,
figures and tables. *Body
As you read this manual, you will find information that is
preceded by a symbol. The purpose of this message is
to help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the *Heating, Ventilation
environment. and Air Conditioning
First Edition 11/2000 1,332 pages HONDA MOTOR CO.,
All Rights Reserved LTD.
Specifications apply to U.S.A. and Canada Service Publication
*Body Electrical
Office
As sections with *include SRS components;
special precautions are required when
servicing. *Restraints
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/27 13:32:20 61S5N000_000_0001
A Few Words About Safety

Service Information
The service and repair information contained in this IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
manual is intended for use by qualified, professional
technicians. Attempting service or repairs without the • Make sure you have a clear understanding of all basic
proper training, tools, and equipment could cause shop safety practices and that you are wearing
injury to you or others. It could also damage the vehicle appropriate clothing and using safety equipment.
or create an unsafe condition. When performing any service task, be especially
This manual describes the proper methods and careful of the following:
procedures for performing service, maintenance, and – Read all of the instructions before you begin, and
repairs. Some procedures require the use of specially make sure you have the tools, the replacement or
designed tools and dedicated equipment. Any person repair parts, and the skills required to perform the
who intends to use a replacement part, service tasks safely and completely.
procedure, or a tool that is not recommended by Honda, – Protect your eyes by using proper safety glasses,
must determine the risks to their personal safety and goggles or face shields any time you hammer, drill,
the safe operation of the vehicle. grind, or work around pressurized air or liquids,
If you need to replace a part, use genuine Honda parts and springs, or other stored-energy components. If
with the correct part number or an equivalent part. We there is any doubt, put on eye protection.
strongly recommend that you do not use replacement – Use other protective wear when necessary, for
parts of inferior quality. example gloves or safety shoes. Handling hot or
sharp parts can cause severe burns or cuts. Before
FOR YOUR CUSTOMER’S SAFETY you grab something that looks like it can hurt you,
stop and put on gloves.
Proper service and maintenance are essential to the – Protect yourself and others whenever you have the
customer’s safety and the reliability of the vehicle. Any vehicle up in the air. Any time you lift the vehicle,
error or oversight while servicing a vehicle can result in either with a hoist or a jack, make sure that it is
faulty operation, damage to the vehicle, or injury to always securely supported. Use jack stands.
others.
• Make sure the engine is off before you begin any
servicing procedures, unless the instruction tells you
Improper service or repairs can create an unsafe to do otherwise. This will help eliminate several
condition that can cause your customer or others to potential hazards:
be seriously hurt or killed. – Carbon monoxide poisoning from engine exhaust.
Follow the procedures and precautions in this Be sure there is adequate ventilation whenever you
manual and other service materials carefully. run the engine.
– Burns from hot parts or coolant. Let the engine and
exhaust system cool before working in those areas.
FOR YOUR SAFETY – Injury from moving parts. If the instruction tells you
to run the engine, be sure your hands, fingers, and
Because this manual is intended for the professional clothing are out of the way.
service technician, we do not provide warnings about
many basic shop safety practices (e.g., Hot parts - wear • Gasoline vapors and hydrogen gases from batteries
gloves). If you have not received shop safety training or are explosive. To reduce the possibility of a fire or
do not feel confident about your knowledge of safe explosion, be careful when working around gasoline
servicing practices, we recommend that you do not or batteries.
attempt to perform the procedures described in this – Use only a nonflammable solvent, not gasoline to
manual. clean parts.
– Never drain or store gasoline in an open container.
– Keep all cigarettes, sparks and flames away from
Failure to properly follow instructions and the battery and all fuel-related parts.
precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or
killed.
Follow the procedures and precautions in this
manual carefully.
Some of the most important general service safety

precautions are given below. However, we cannot warn
you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing service and repair procedures. Only you
can decide whether or not you should perform a given
task.
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/27 13:32:21 61S5N000_000_0003
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

The Acura 1.7EL SRS includes a driver’s airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger’s airbag in the dashboard
above the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, seat belt buckle tensioners in the front seat
belt buckles, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in
this Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk ( ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS
components. Servicing, disassembling or replacing these items will require special precautions and tools, and should
be done only by an authorized Acura dealer.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Acura dealer.
• Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags and/or side airbags.
• Do not bump the SRS unit. Otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or airbags may deploy when the ignition
switch is ON (II).
• SRS electrical wiring harnesses are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the
steering column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the
front seats, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/27 09:16:27 61S5N000_010_0002
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes

Vehicle Identification Number Engine Number
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

2HH: HONDA OF CANADA MFG., a. Engine Type
HONDA CANADA ING., D17A2: 1.7 SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
ACURA Passenger vehicle Fuel-injected engine
b. Line, Body and Engine Type b. Serial Number
ES3: ACURA 1.7 EL/D17A2
c. Body Type and Transmission Type Transmission Number
5: 4-door Sedan/5-speed Manual
6: 4-door Sedan/4-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
3: STD
6: Touring
8: Premium
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
1: 2001 a. Transmission Type
g. Factory Code BMXA: 4-speed Automatic
H: Ontario Factory in Canada SLW: 5-speed Manual
h. Serial Number b. Serial Number
BMXA: 5000001−
SLW: 1000001−
Paint Code
Code Color
B-92P Nighthawk Black Pearl
G-96P Eternal Blue Pearl
G-504M Wind Veil Mettalic
NH-623M Satin Silver Metallic
RP-32P Vintage Plum Pearl
YP-525M Titanium Metallic
COLOR LABEL
Vehicle Identification Number

and Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard Cartification.
1-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/27 09:16:28 61S5N000_010_0003
Identification Number Locations
Vehicle Identification Engine Number

Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Transmission Number Transmission Number

(Automatic) (Manual)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-3

00/10/27 09:16:28 61S5N000_010_0004
General Information
Warning/Caution Label Locations
SRS WARNING INFORMATION
FRONT PASSENGER MODULE DANGER
STEERING COLUMN NOTICE
SEAT BELT BUCKLE

WARNING
SIDE AIRBAG INFORMATION
Located on driver’s and passenger’s
doorjamb (not shown)
FRONT SEATBELT TENSIONER
MONITOR NOTICE WARNING
CABLE REEL CAUTION
DRIVER MODULE DANGER
1-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/27 09:16:28 61S5N000_010_0005
ENGINE COOLANT INFORMATION

and SERVICE INFORMATION
(Under-hood Emission Control Canadian Tier1 Label)
SRS WARNING LABEL
VEHICLE EMISSION
CONTROL
INFORMATION
LABEL
TIRE INFORMATION
BATTERY
CAUTION RADIATOR CAP AIR CONDITIONING
CAUTION INFORMATION
-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-5

00/10/27 09:16:37 61S5N000_010_0006
General Information
Under-hood Emission Control Label

Emission Group Identification Engine and Evaporative Families:
Example: Engine Family:
a. Model Year
1: 2001
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
CANADIAN TIER 1 c. Family Type
THIS VEHICLE CONFIRMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV V: LDV
REGULATIONS AND CANADIAN TIER 1 STANDARDS d. Displacement
FOR 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW PASSENGER CARS. e. Sequence Characters
Evaporative Family:
a. Model Year
1: 2001
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
R: EVAP/ORVR
d. Canister Work Capacity
e. Sequence Characters
1-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/27 09:16:38 61S5N000_010_0007
Lift and Support Points

NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components Floor Jack
such as suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the
vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall 1. Set the parking brake.
safety stands. When substantial weight is removed
from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
change and cause the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist.
3. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the
Frame Hoist gearshift lever in reverse (or the automatic
transmission in Park position).
1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A), or safety stands,
under the vehicle’s front support points (B) and rear 4. Position the floor jack under the front jacking
support points (C). bracket (A) or rear jacking bracket (B), center the
jacking bracket in the jack lift platform (C), and jack
up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands
under it.
A B
B A C
2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle

gently to be sure it is firmly supported.
3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift

points (B) for solid contact with the lift blocks.
Safety Stands
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same
support points (B and C) as for a frame hoist. Always
use safety stands when working on or under any
vehicle that is supported only by a Jack. C
5. Position the safety stands under the support points

and adjust them so the vehicle will level.
6. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-7

00/10/27 09:16:39 61S5N000_010_0008
General Information
Towing
If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional Wheel Lift Equipment − The tow truck uses two
towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and
vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous. lift them off the ground. The other two wheels remain
on the ground.
Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle. Sling-type Equipment − The tow truck uses metal
cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator loads the vehicle parts of the frame or suspension and the cables lift that
on the back of a truck. This is the best way of end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle’s
transporting the vehicle. suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this
method of towing is attempted.
To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is
equipped with towing hooks (A) and tie down hooks (B). If the vehicle cannot be transported by flat-bed, it
should be towed with the front wheels off the ground. If
The towing hook can be used with a winch to pull the due to damage, the vehicle must be towed with the
vehicle onto the truck, and the tie down hooks slots can front wheels on the ground, do the following:
be used to secure the vehicle to truck.
Manual Transmission
• Release the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission in Neutral.
Automatic Transmission
• Release the parking brake.
• Start the engine.
• Shift to position, then position.
• Turn off the engine.
It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80

A km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
• Improper towing preparation will damage the

transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If
you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine
(automatic transmission), the vehicle must be
transported on a flat-bed.
• Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not
B designed to support the vehicle’s weight.
1-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/27 09:16:39 61S5N000_010_0009
Parts Marking
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN). Original
parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement body parts will have self-adhesive labels, and a replacement engine and
transmission will have the VIN plate attached with a break-off bolt.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the part.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-9

00/10/27 09:17:46 61S5N000_020_0001
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits

Engine Electrical .................................................... 2-2
Engine Assembly .................................................. 2-2
Cylinder Head ........................................................ 2-3
Engine Block .......................................................... 2-4
Engine Lubrication ................................................ 2-4
Cooling ................................................................... 2-5
Fuel and Emissions ............................................... 2-5
Clutch ..................................................................... 2-5
Manual Transmission and Differential ................ 2-6
Automatic Transmission and Differential ........... 2-8
Steering .................................................................. 2-14
Suspension ............................................................ 2-14
Brakes ..................................................................... 2-15
Air Conditioning .................................................... 2-15
Design Specifications
Dimensions ............................................................ 2-16
Weight .................................................................... 2-16
Engine .................................................................... 2-16
Starter .................................................................... 2-16
Clutch ..................................................................... 2-16
Manual Transmission ........................................... 2-17
Automatic Transmission ...................................... 2-17
Steering .................................................................. 2-17
Suspension ............................................................ 2-17
Wheel Alignment .................................................. 2-17
Brakes ..................................................................... 2-17
Tires ........................................................................ 2-17
Air Conditioning .................................................... 2-17
Electrical Ratings ................................................... 2-18
Body Specifications
Illustration .............................................................. 2-19
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/27 09:17:46 61S5N000_020_0002

Engine Electrical
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Ignition coil Rated voltage 12 V
Firing order 1−3−4−2
Spark plug Type NGK: PZFR6F-11
DENSO: PKJ20CR-M11
Gap 1.0−1.1 mm (0.039−0.043 in.) 1.3 mm (0.05 in.)
Ignition timing At idle (check the M/T (in neutral): 8±2° BTDC at 700±50 rpm
red mark) A/T (in or ): 8±2° BTDC at 700±50 rpm
Alternator belt Deflection with 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbs) Without A/C Used belt: 8.5−11.0 mm (0.33−0.43 in.)
NOTE: Adjust a applied midway between pulleys (with A/C, see New belt: 6.5−8.5 mm (0.26−0.33 in.)
new belt to the ‘‘Compressor
new belt spec., belt’’ in the A/C
run the engine table)
for 5 minutes, Tension (measured with belt tension Without A/C Used belt: 340−490 N (35−55 kgf, 77−110 lbs)
then readjust it gauge) (with A/C, see New belt: 540−740 N (55−75 kgf, 120−170 lbs)
to the used belt ‘‘Compressor
spec. belt’’ in the A/C
table)
Alternator Output At 13.5 V and 70 A
normal engine
temperature
Coil (rotor) resistance at 68°F (20°C) 1.84−2.10
Slip ring O.D. 22.7 mm (0.89 in.) 21.7 mm (0.85 in.)
Brush length 19.0 mm (0.75 in.) 5 mm (0.20 in.)
Brush spring tension 3.3−4.1 N (1.6−1.8 kgf, 3.5−4.0 lbs)
Starter for M/T Output 1.0 kW
(DENSO) Commutator mica depth 0.45−0.75 mm (0.018−0.030 in.) 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
Commutator runout 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Commutator O.D. 27.9−28.0 mm (1.098−1.102 in.) 27.0 mm (1.063 in.)
Brush length 14.0−14.5 mm (0.55−0.57 in.) 9.0 mm (0.35 in)
Starter for A/T Output 1.2 kW
(MITSUBA) Commutator mica depth 0.4−0.5 mm (0.016−0.020 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Commutator runout 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Commutator O.D. 28.0−28.1 mm (1.102−1.106 in.) 27.5 mm (1.083 in.)
Brush length 15.8−16.2 mm (0.62−0.64 in.) 11.0 mm (0.43 in.)
Engine Assembly
Compression Pressure check at 200 rpm with wide Minimum 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi) ―――
open throttle. (See Design Specs for Maximum 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) ―――
ratio.) variation
2-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/27 09:17:46 61S5N000_020_0003
Cylinder Head
Head Warpage ――― 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Height 92.95−93.05 mm ―――
(3.659−3.663 in.)
Camshaft End play 0.05−0.15 mm 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
(0.002−0.006 in.)
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance 0.050−0.089 mm 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
(0.0020−0.0035 in.)
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
Cam lobe height VTEC intake, 38.604 mm (1.5198 in.) ―――
primary
VTEC intake, 32.848 mm (1.2932 in.) ―――
secondary
VTEC exhaust 38.784 mm (1.5269 in.) ―――
Valves Clearance (cold) Intake 0.18−0.22 mm (0.007−0.009 in.) ―――
Exhaust 0.23−0.27 mm (0.009−0.01 in.) ―――
Stem O.D. Intake 5.48−5.49 mm 5.45 mm (0.215 in.)
(0.2157−0.2161 in.)
Exhaust 5.45−5.46 mm 5.42 mm (0.213 in.)
(0.2146−0.2150 in.)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0.02−0.05 mm 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
(0.0008−0.0020 in.)
Exhaust 0.05−0.08 mm 0.11 mm (0.004 in.)
(0.0020−0.0031 in.)
Valve seats Width Intake 0.85−1.15 mm 1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
(0.033−0.045 in.)
Exhaust 1.25−1.55 mm 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
(0.049−0.061 in.)
Stem installed height Intake 53.17−53.64 mm 53.89 mm (2.122 in.)
(2.093−2.112 in.)
Exhaust 53.17−53.64 mm 53.89 mm (2.112 in.)
(2.093−2.112 in.)
Valve springs Free length VTEC intake 56.49 mm (2.224 in.) ―――
VTEC exhaust 58.70 mm (2.31 in.) ―――
Valve guides I.D. Intake 5.51−5.53 mm 5.55 mm (0.219 in.)
(0.217−0.218 in.)
Exhaust 5.51−5.53 mm 5.55 mm (0.219 in.)
(0.217−0.218 in.)
Installed height Intake 17.85−18.35 mm ―――
(0.703−0.722 in.)
Exhaust 18.65−19.15 mm ―――
(0.734−0.754 in.)
Rocker arms Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake 0.017−0.050 mm 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
(0.0007−0.0020 in.)
Exhaust 0.018−0.054 mm 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
(0.0007−0.0021 in.)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-3

00/10/27 09:17:47 61S5N000_020_0004

Engine Block
Block Warpage of deck 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Bore diameter 75.00−75.02 mm (2.9528−2.9535 in.) 75.07 mm (2.9555 in.)
Bore taper ――― 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Reboring limit ――― 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Piston Skirt O.D. at 13 mm (0.5 in.) from 74.98−74.99 mm (2.9520−2.9524 in.) 74.97 mm (2.9516 in.)
bottom of skirt
Clearance in cylinder 0.010−0.040 mm (0.0004−0.0016 in.) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Ring groove width Top 1.020−1.030 mm (0.0402−0.0406 in.) 1.05 mm (0.041 in.)
Second 1.220−1.230 mm (0.0481−0.0484 in.) 1.25 mm (0.049 in)
Oil 2.005−2.020 mm (0.0789−0.0795 in) 2.05 mm (0.081 in.)
Piston rings Ring-to-groove clearance Top 0.035−0.060 mm (0.0014−0.024 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Second 0.030−0.055 mm (0.0012−0.0022 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Ring end gap Top 0.15−0.30 mm (0.006−0.012 in.) 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Second 0.30−0.45 mm (0.012−0.018 in.) 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Oil 0.20−0.70 mm (0.008−0.028 in.) 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
Piston pin O.D. 18.996−19.000 mm (0.7479−0.7480 in.) ―――
Pin-to-piston clearance 0.010−0.020 mm ―――
(0.0004−0.0008 in.)
Connecting rod Pin-to-rod clearance 0.016−0.036 mm (0.0006−0.0014 in.) ―――
Small-end bore diameter 18.96−18.98 mm (0.746−0.747 in.) ―――
Large-end bore diameter Nominal 48.0 mm (1.89 in.) ―――
End play installed on crankshaft 0.15−0.30 mm (0.006−0.012 in.) 0.40 mm (0.016 in.)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter 54.976−55.000 mm (2.1644−2.1654 in.) ―――
Rod journal diameter 44.976−45.000 mm (1.7707−1.7717 in.) ―――
Rod/main journal taper 0.0025 mm (0.0001 in.) 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.0025 mm (0.0001 in.) 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.)
End play 0.10−0.35 mm (0.004−0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
Crankshaft Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance No. 1 journal 0.018−0.036 mm (0.0007−0.0014 in.) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
bearings No. 5 journal
No. 2 journal 0.024−0.042 mm (0.0009−0.0017 in.) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
No. 3 journal
No. 4 journal
Rod bearing clearance 0.024−0.042 mm (0.0009−0.0017 in.) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Engine Lubrication
Engine oil Capacity 4.2 (4.4 US qt, 3.7 lmp qt) for engine overhaul
3.5 (3.7 US qt, 3.1 lmp qt) for oil change, including filter
3.3 (3.5 US qt, 2.9 lmp qt) for oil change, without filter
Oil pump Inner-to-outer rotor clearance 0.06−0.18 mm (0.002−0.007 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor clearance 0.10−0.18 mm (0.004−0.007 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor axial 0.02−0.07 mm (0.001−0.003 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
clearance
Oil pressure with oil temperature at at idle 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min
176°F (80°C) at 3,000 rpm 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi) min
2-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/27 09:17:47 61S5N000_020_0005
Cooling
Radiator Coolant capacity (Includes engine, M/T: engine 5.1 (5.4 US qt, 4.5 lmp qt)
heater, hoses, and reservoir) overhaul
M/T: coolant 4.0 (4.2 US qt, 3.5 lmp qt)
change
A/T: engine 5.0 (5.3 US qt, 4.4 lmp qt)
overhaul
A/T: coolant 3.9 (4.1 US qt, 3.4 lmp qt)
change
Reservoir Coolant capacity 0.4 (0.4 US qt, 0.4 lmp qt)
Radiator cap Opening pressure 93−123 kPa (0.95−1.25 kgf/cm2, 14−18 psi)
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open 169−176°F (76−80°C)
Fully open 194°F (90°C)
Valve lift at fully open 8.0 mm (0.31 in.) min.
Radiator fan Thermoswitch ‘‘ON’’ temperature 196−203°F (91−95°C)
switch Thermoswitch ‘‘OFF’’ temperature Subtract 5−15°F (3−8°C) from actual ‘‘ON’’ temperature
Fuel and Emissions

Fuel pressure Pressure with fuel pressure gauge 270−320 kPa (2.8−3.3 kgf/cm2, 40−47 psi)
connected
Fuel tank Capacity 50 (13.2 US gal, 11.0 lmp gal)
Engine idle Idle speed with headlights and radiator M/T in neutral 700±50 rpm
fan off A/T in or 700±50 rpm
Fast idle M/T in neutral 1,300±50 rpm
A/T in or 1,300±50 rpm
Idle CO % 0.1 max.
Clutch
Clutch pedal Height from the floor 198 mm (7.8 in.) ―――
Stroke 130−140 mm (5.1−5.5 in.) ―――
Play 8−18 mm (0.3−0.7 in.) ―――
Disengagement height from the floor 113 mm (4.4 in.) min. ―――
Flywheel Runout on clutch mating surface 0.06 mm (0.002 in.) max. 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Clutch disc Rivet head depth 1.65−2.25 mm 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
(0.065−0.089 in.)
Thickness 8.3−9.0 mm (0.33−0.35 in.) 5.7 mm (0.22 in.)
Pressure plate Warpage 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Height of diaphragm spring fingers Measure with 0.6 mm (0.02 in.) max. 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
feeler gauge and
special tool
-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-5

00/10/27 09:17:47 61S5N000_020_0006

Manual Transmission and Differential
Transmission Capacity For fluid change: 1.5 (1.6 US qt, 1.3
oil lmp qt)
For overhaul: 1.6 (1.7 US qt, 1.4 lmp qt)
Mainshaft End play 0.11−0.18 mm Adjust
(0.004−0.007 in.)
Diameter of ball bearing contact area 25.977−25.990 mm 25.92 mm
(clutch housing side) (1.0227−1.0232 in.) (1.021 in.)
Diameter of spacer collar contact area 28.980−28.993 mm 28.93 mm
(1.1409−1.1415 in.) (1.139 in.)
Diameter of needle bearing contact 34.984−35.000 mm 34.93 mm
area (1.3773−1.3780 in.) (1.375 in.)
(transmission housing side) (1.0231−1.0236 in.) (1.0209 in.)
Runout 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Mainshaft 3rd I.D. 39.009−39.025 mm 39.070 mm
and 4th gears (1.5358−1.5364 in.) (1.5382 in.)
End play 3rd gear 0.06−0.21 mm 0.33 mm
(0.002−0.008 in.) (0.013 in.)
4rd gear 0.06−0.19 mm 0.31 mm
(0.002−0.007 in.) (0.012 in.)
Thickness 3rd gear 27.92−27.97 mm 27.85 mm
(1.099−1.101 in.) (1.096 in.)
4th gear 27.02−27.07 mm 26.95 mm
(1.064−1.066 in.) (1.061 in.)
Mainshaft 5th I.D. 39.009−39.025 mm 39.070 mm
gear (1.5358−1.5364 in.) (1.5382 in.)
End play 0.06−0.19 mm 0.31 mm
(0.002−0.007 in.) (0.012 in.)
Thickness 28.92−28.97 mm 28.85 mm
(1.139−1.141 in.) (1.136 in.)
Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact 34.000−34.015 mm 33.95 mm
area (clutch housing side) (1.3386−1.3392 in.) (1.3366 in.)
(transmission housing side) (0.9835−0.9840 in.) (0.981 in.)
Diameter of 1st gear contact area 37.984−38.000 mm 37.934 mm
(1.4954−1.4961 in.) (1.493 in.)
Runout 0.02 mm 0.05 mm
(0.001 in.) max. (0.002 in.)
Countershaft I.D. 43.009−43.025 mm 43.070 mm
1st gear (1.6932−1.6939 in.) (1.6957 in.)
End play 0.03−0.10 mm 0.22 mm
(0.001−0.004 in.) (0.009 in.)
2nd gear (1.7720−1.7726 in.) (1.7744 in.)
End play 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) 0.24 mm
(0.009 in.)
2nd gear (1.3386−1.3390 in.) (1.3402 in.)
spacer collar O.D. 39.989−40.000 mm 39.930 mm
(1.5744−1.5748 in.) (1.5720 in.)
Length 27.53−27.56 mm 27.51 mm
(1.084−1.085 in.) (1.083 in.)
2-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/27 09:17:48 61S5N000_020_0007

Mainshaft 4th I.D. 29.002−29.012 mm 29.060 mm
and 5th gears (1.1418−1.1422 in.) (1.1441 in.)
spacer collar O.D. 34.989−35.000 mm 34.930 mm
(1.3775−1.3780 in.) (1.3752 in.)
Length A 51.97−52.03 mm ―――
(2.046−2.048 in.)
B
B 24.03−24.06 mm ―――
A
B (0.946−0.947 in.)
Reverse idler I.D. 15.016−15.043 mm 15.080 mm

gear (0.5912−0.5922 in.) (0.5937 in.)
Gear-to-reverse gear shaft clearance 0.032−0.077 mm 0.140 mm
(0.0012−0.0030 in.) (0.0055 in.)
Synchro ring Ring-to-gear clearance Ring pushed 0.85−1.10 mm 0.4 mm
against gear (0.033−0.043 in.) (0.016 in.)
Dual cone Outer synchro ring-to-synchro cone Ring pushed 0.5−1.0 mm 0.3 mm
synchro clearance against gear (0.02−0.04 in.) (0.01 in.)
Synchro cone-to-gear clearance Ring pushed 0.5−1.0 mm 0.3 mm
against gear (0.02−0.04 in.) (0.01 in.)
Outer synchro ring-to-gear cone Ring pushed 0.95−1.68 mm 0.6 mm
clearance against gear (0.037−0.066 in.) (0.02 in.)
Shift fork Finger thickness 1st-2nd and 7.4−7.6 mm ―――
3rd-4th forks (0.29−0.30 in.)
5th forks 6.7−6.9 mm ―――
(0.26−0.27 in.)
Fork-to-synchro sleeve clearance 0.35−0.65 mm 1.00 mm
(0.014−0.026 in.) (0.039 in.)
Reverse shift Pawl groove width 13.8−14.1 mm 15.5 mm (0.610 in.)
fork (0.543−0.555 in.)
Fork-to-reverse idler gear clearance 1.6−2.2 mm 2.8 mm
(0.06−0.09 in.) (0.11 in.)
Shift arm I.D. 13.973−14.000 mm (0.5501−0.5512 in.) ―――
Shift fork diameter at contact area 12.9−13.0 mm (0.508−0.512 in.) ―――
Shift arm-to-shaft lever clearance 0.2−0.5 mm 0.62 mm
(0.008−0.020 in.) (0.024 in.)
Select lever Finger width 14.75−14.95 mm (0.581−0.589 in.) ―――
Shift lever Shaft-to-select lever clearance 0.05−0.40 mm 0.6 mm
(0.002−0.016 in.) (0.024 in.)
Groove (to select lever) 15.00−15.15 mm ―――
(0.591−0.596 in.)
Shaft-to-shift arm clearance 0.013−0.07 mm 0.1 mm
(0.0005−0.003 in.) (0.004 in.)
M/T Pinion shaft contact area I.D. 18.010−18.028 mm ―――
differential (0.7091−0.7098 in.)
carrier Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.027−0.057 mm 0.100 mm
(0.0011−0.0022 in.) (0.0039 in.)
Driveshaft contact area I.D. 26.025−26.045 mm ―――
(1.0246−1.0254 in.)
M/T Backlash 0.05−0.15 mm ―――
differential (0.002−0.006 in.)
pinion gear I.D. 18.042−18.066 mm ―――
(0.7103−0.7113 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.059−0.095 mm 0.150 mm
(0.0023−0.0037 in.) (0.0059 in.)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-7

00/10/27 09:17:48 61S5N000_020_0008

Automatic Transmission and Differential
ATF (Automatic Capacity Use Honda For fluid change: 2.7 (2.9 US qt, 2.4 lmp qt)
Transmission ATF-Z1 For overhaul: 6.0 (6.3 US qt, 5.3 lmp qt)
Fluid)
ATF pressure Line pressure At 2,000 rpm in 880−930 kPa 830 kPa
or position (9.0−9.5 kgf/cm2, 120−130 psi) (8.5 kgf/cm2, 120 psi)
4th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 850−900 kPa 800 kPa
position (8.7−9.2 kgf/cm2, 120−130 psi) (8.2 kgf/cm2, 120 psi)
3rd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 850−900 kPa 800 kPa
2nd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 850−900 kPa 800 kPa
1st clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 880−930 kPa 830 kPa
Torque converter Stall speed 2,800 rpm 2,600−2,900 rpm
Check with vehicle on level ground
Clutch Clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance 1st and 2nd 0.65−0.85 mm
(0.026−0.033 in.)
3rd and 4th 0.4−0.6 mm
(0.015−0.024 in.)
Clutch return spring free length 30.5 mm (1.20 in.) 28.5 mm (1.12 in.)
Clutch disc thickness 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) ―――
Clutch plate thickness 1st 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) When discolored
2nd, 3rd, and 4th 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) When discolored
Clutch end plate thickness Mark 1 2.1 mm (0.083 in.) When discolored
Mark 2 2.2 mm (0.087 in.) When discolored
2-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/27 09:17:48 61S5N000_020_0009

Valve body Stator shaft needle bearing contact I.D. Torque converter 27.000−27.021 mm (1.063−1.064 in.) When worn or damaged
side
ATF pump side 29.000−29.013 mm (1.1417−1.1422 in.) When worn or damaged
ATF pump gear thrust clearance 0.03−0.06 mm (0.001−0.002 in.) 0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
ATF pump gear-to-body clearance Drive gear 0.105−0.1325 mm (0.004−0.005 in.) ―――
Driven gear 0.0350−0.625 mm (0.001−0.002 in.) ―――
ATF pump driven gear I.D. 14.016−14.034 mm (0.5518−0.5525 in.) When worn or damaged
ATF pump driven gear shaft O.D. 13.980−13.990 mm (0.5504−0.5508 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse shift fork Fork finger thickness 5.90−6.00 mm (0.232−0.236 in.) 5.40 mm (0.213 in.)
Park gear and pawl When worn or damaged
Servo body Shift fork shaft bore I.D. 14.000−14.010 mm (0.5512−0.5516 in.) ―――
Shift fork shaft valve bore I.D. 37.000−37.039 mm (1.4567−1.4582 in.) 37.045 mm (1.4585 in.)
Regulator valve Sealing ring contact I.D. 35.000−35.025 mm (1.3780−1.3782 in.) 35.050 mm (1.3799 in.)
body
Stator shaft Diameter of needle bearing contact ATF pump side 29.000−29.013 mm (1.1417−1.1422 in.) When worn or
area damaged
Torque converter 27.000−27.021 mm (1.0630−1.0638 in.) When worn or
side damaged
Mainshaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at stator shaft 22.980−22.993 mm (0.9047−0.9052 in.) When worn or damaged
area at 2nd gear 35.975−35.991 mm (1.4163−1.4169 in.) When worn or damaged
at 4th gear collar 31.975−31.991 mm (1.2589−1.2595 in.) When worn damaged
at 1st gear collar 30.975−30.991 mm (1.2195−1.2201 in.) When worn damaged
I.D. of gears 1st gear 35.000−35.016 mm (1.3780−1.3786 in.) When worn or
damaged
2st gear 41.000−41.016 mm (1.6142−1.6148 in.) When worn or
damaged
4th gear 38.000−38.016 mm (1.4961−1.4967 in.) When worn or
damaged
End play of gears 1st gear 0.08−0.19 mm (0.003−0.007 in.) ―――
2nd gear 0.05−0.13 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) ―――
4th gear 0.075−0.185 mm (0.003−0.007 in.) ―――
4th gear collar length 49.50−49.55 mm (1.9488−1.9508 in.) ―――
4th gear collar flange thickness 4.435−4.525 mm (0.1746−0.1781 in.) ―――
1st gear collar length 27.00−27.05 mm (1.063−1.065 in.) ―――
-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-9

00/10/27 09:17:48 61S5N000_020_0010

Automatic Transmission and Differential (cont’d)
Mainshaft 36.5 x 55 mm thrust washer thickness No. 1 4.00 mm (0.157 in.) When worn or damaged
(cont’d) No. 2 4.05 mm (0.159 in.) When worn or damaged
No. 3 4.10 mm (0.161 in.) When worn or damaged
Thrust washer thickness 26 x 45 x 3 mm 2.95−3.05 mm (0.116−0.120 in.) When worn or damaged
1st gear, 26 mm 2.43−2.50 mm (0.096−0.098 in.) When worn or damaged
Clutch feed pipe O.D. 1st clutch feed 8.97−8.98 mm (0.535−0.354 in.) 8.95 mm (0.352 in.)
pipe at 15 mm
(0.6 in.) from end
4th clutch feed 5.97−5.98 mm (0.2350−0.2354 in.) 5.95 mm (0.234 in.)
pipe at 30 mm
(1.2 in.) from end
Sealing ring thickness 35 mm sealing 1.87−1.97 mm (0.074−0.078 in.) 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
ring
29 mm sealing 1.87−1.97 mm (0.074−0.078 in.) 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
ring
Clutch feed pipe bushing I.D. 1st clutch 9.000−9.015 mm (0.3543−0.3549 in.) 9.03 mm (0.356 in.)
4th clutch 6.018−6.030 mm (0.2369−0.2374 in.) 6.045 mm (0.2380 in.)
Width of sealing ring groove 2.025−2.075 mm (0.0797−0.0811 in.) 2.095 mm (0.082 in.)
2-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/27 09:17:49 61S5N000_020_0011

Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at left end 36.004−36.017 mm When worn or
area (1.4175−1.4180 in.) damaged
at 3rd gear 35.980−35.996 mm When worn or
(1.4165−1.4172 in.) damaged
at 4th gear 27.980−27.993 mm When worn or
(1.1016−1.1021 in.) damaged
at reverse gear 31.975−31.991 mm When worn or
collar (1.2589−1.2595 in.) damaged
at 1st gear collar 31.975−31.991 mm When worn or
(1.2589−1.2595 in.) damaged
I.D. of gears 1st gear 38.000−38.016 mm When worn or
(1.4961−1.4967 in.) damaged
3rd gear 41.000−41.016 mm When worn or
(1.6142−1.6148 in.) damaged
4th gear 33.000−33.016 mm When worn or
(1.2992−1.2998 in.) damaged
Reverse gear 38.000−38.016 mm When worn or
(1.4961−1.4967 in.) damaged
End play of gears 1st gear 0.1−0.5 mm (0.004−0.020 in.) ―――
3rd gear 0.05−0.17 mm (0.002−0.007 in.) ―――
4th gear 0.10−0.18 mm (0.004−0.007 in.) ―――
Reverse gear 0.10−0.25 mm (0.004−0.010 in.) ―――
28 mm distance collar length No. 1 39.00 mm (1.535 in.) ―――
No. 2 39.10 mm (1.539 in.) ―――
No. 3 39.20 mm (1.543 in.) ―――
No. 4 39.30 mm (1.547 in.) ―――
No. 5 39.05 mm (1.537 in.) ―――
No. 6 39.15 mm (1.541 in.) ―――
No. 7 39.25 mm (1.545 in.) ―――
No. 8 38.90 mm (1.531 in.) ―――
No. 9 38.95 mm (1.533 in.) ―――
3rd gear collar length 20.65−20.70 mm (0.8130−0.8150 in.) ―――
Reverse gear collar length 14.5−14.6 mm (0.571−0.575 in.) ―――
Reverse gear collar flange thickness 2.4−2.6 mm (0.094−0.102 in.) When worn or
damaged
1st gear collar length 14.5−14.6 mm (0.571−0.575 in.) ―――
1st gear collar flange thickness 2.4−2.6 mm (0.094−0.102 in.) When worn or
damaged
3rd gear splined washer thickness 4.95−5.00 mm (0.195−0.197 in.) When worn or
damaged
3rd clutch feed pipe O.D. At 15 mm (0.6 in.) 7.97−7.98 mm (0.3138−0.3142 in.) 7.95 mm (0.313 in.)
from end
3rd clutch feed pipe bushing I.D. 8.000−8.022 mm (0.3150−0.3158 in.) 8.03 mm (0.316 in.)
Reverse selector hub O.D. 51.87−51.90 mm (2.042−2.043 in.) When worn or
damaged
1st gear I.D. of one-way clutch contact 83.339−83.365 mm (3.2810−3.2821 in.) When worn or
area damaged
Park gear diameter of one-way clutch 66.685−66.698 mm (2.6254−2.6259 in.) When worn or
contact area damaged
-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-11

00/10/27 09:17:49 61S5N000_020_0012

Automatic Transmission and Differential (cont’d)
Reverse idler Reverse idler gear shaft diameter at 13.990−14.000 mm When worn or
gear needle bearing contact area (0.5508−0.5512 in.) damaged
I.D. 18.007−18.020 mm When worn or
(0.7089−0.7094 in.) damaged
End play 0.05−0.18 mm (0.002−0.007 in.) ―――
I.D. of reverse idler gear shaft holder 14.416−14.434 mm When worn or
(0.5676−0.5683 in.) damaged
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New

Wire Diameter O.D. Free Length No. of Coils
Main valve body Relief valve spring 1.1 mm 8.6 mm 37.1 mm 13.4
springs (see (0.043 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.4161 in.)
page 14-148) Modulator valve spring 1.4 mm 9.4 mm 33.8 mm 10.9
(0.055 in.) (0.370 in.) (1.331 in.)
CPB valve spring 1.0 mm 8.1 mm 40.9 mm 16.2
(0.039 in.) (0.319 in.) (1.610 in.)
1-2 shift valve spring 0.9 mm 7.6 mm 41.3 mm 16.3
(0.035 in.) (0.299 in.) (1.626 in.)
2nd orifice control valve spring 0.7 mm 6.6 mm 34.8 mm 22.0
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.370 in.)
Servo control valve spring 1.0 mm 8.1 mm 52.1 mm 20.8
(0.039 in.) (0.319 in.) (2.051 in.)
Regulator valve Stator reaction spring 4.5 mm 35.4 mm 30.3 mm 1.9
body springs (0.177 in.) (1.394 in.) (1.193 in.)
(see page 14- Regulator valve spring A 1.9 mm 14.7 mm 77.4 mm 15.2
151) (0.075 in.) (0.579 in.) (3.047 in.)
Regulator valve spring B 1.8 mm 9.6 mm 44.0 mm 12.6
(0.071 in.) (0.378 in.) (1.732 in.)
Cooler relief valve spring 1.0 mm 8.4 mm 33.8 mm 8.2
(0.039 in.) (0.331 in.) (1.331 in.)
Torque converter check valve spring 1.0 mm 8.4 mm 33.8 mm 8.2
(0.039 in.) (0.331 in.) (1.331 in.)
Lock-up control valve spring 0.8 mm 6.0 mm 38.4 mm 30.3
(0.031 in.) (0.236 in.) (1.512 in.)
Secondary valve 3-4 shift valve spring 0.9 mm 7.6 mm 57.0 mm 26.8
(see page 14- 2-3 shift valve spring 0.9 mm 7.6 mm 57.0 mm 26.8
152) (0.035 in.) (0.299 in.) (2.244 in.)
4th exhaust valve spring 0.9 mm 6.1 mm 36.4 mm 19.5
(0.035 in.) (0.240 in.) (1.433 in.)
3-4 orifice control valve spring 0.7 mm 6.6 mm 37.5 mm 24.6
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.476 in.)

00/10/27 09:17:49 61S5N000_020_0013

Wire Diameter O.D. Free Length No. of Coils
Servo body 1st accumulator spring 2.1 mm 16.0 mm 89.1 mm 16.2
springs (see (0.083 in.) (0.630 in.) (3.508 in.)
page 14-153) 4th accumulator spring A 2.6 mm 17.0 mm 88.4 mm 14.2
(0.102 in.) (0.669 in.) (3.480 in.)
4th accumulator spring B 2.3 mm 10.2 mm 51.6 mm 13.8
(0.091 in.) (0.402 in.) (2.031 in.)
3rd accumulator spring A 2.8 mm 17.5 mm 94.3 mm 15.9
(0.110 in.) (0.689 in.) (3.713 in.)
3rd accumulator spring B 2.1 mm 31.0 mm 38.2 mm 2.6
(0.083 in.) (1.220 in.) (1.504 in.)
2nd accumulator spring C 2.2 mm 14.5 mm 68.0 mm 13.9
(0.087 in.) (0.571 in.) (2.677 in.)
2nd accumulator spring A 2.4 mm 29.0 mm 39.0 mm 2.9
(0.094 in.) (1.142 in.) (1.535 in.)
Lock-up valve Lock-up shift valve spring 0.9 mm 7.6 mm 73.7 mm 32.0
(see page 14- Lock-up timing valve spring 0.9 mm 8.1 mm 80.7 mm 54.2
154) (0.035 in.) (0.318 in.) (3.177 in.)

A/T differential Pinion shaft contact area I.D. 18.010−18.028 mm ―――
carrier (0.709−0.710 in.)
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.023−0.057 mm 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
(0.001−0.002 in.)
Driveshaft shaft contact area I.D. 26.025−26.045 mm ―――
(1.0246−1.0254 in.)
Carrier-to-driveshaft clearance 0.045−0.086 mm 0.12 mm
(0.002−0.003 in.) (0.005 in.)
Set ring-to-carrier bearing outer race 0−0.15 mm Adjust
clearance (0−0.006 in)
A/T differential Backlash 0.05−0.15 mm ―――
pinion gear (0.002−0.006 in.)
I.D. 18.042−18.066 mm ―――
(0.7103−0.7113 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.055−0.095 mm 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
(0.0022−0.0037 in.)

00/10/27 09:17:50 61S5N000_020_0014

Steering
Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside With engine 0−10 mm (0−0.39 in.) ―――
edge running
Starting load measured at outside With engine 30 N (3.1 kgf, 6.8 lbs) ―――
edge running
Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened 20° Max.
from locked position
Pump Output pressure with shut-off valve 7,600−8,300 kPa (78−85 kgf/cm2, 1,110−1,210 psi)
closed
Power steering Capacity Use Genuine For fluid change: 0.4 (0.42 US qt, 0.35 lmp qt)
fluid Honda power For system overhaul: 1.0 (1.06 US qt, 0.88 lmp qt)
steering fluid
Power steering Deflection with 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbs) Used belt: 13.0−16.5 mm (0.51−0.65 in.)
pump belt applied mid-way between pulleys New belt: 9.0−11.0 mm (0.35−0.43 in.)
NOTE: Adjust a Tension (measured with belt tension Used belt: 390−540 N (40−55 kgf, 88−121 lbs)
new belt to the gauge) New belt: 740−880 N (75−90 kgf, 165−198 lbs)
new belt spec,
run the engine
for 5 minutes,
then readjust it
to the used belt
spec.
Suspension
Wheel alignment Camber Front 0°00’±45°
Rear −0°45’±45’
Caster Front 1°33’±1°
Total Toe Front 0±3 mm (0±0.12 in.)
Rear IN 2＋2−1 mm (0.08＋0.08−0.04 in.)
Front wheel turning angle Inside wheel 40°00’±2°
Outside wheel 31°00’ (Reference)
Aluminum wheel Runout Axial 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Steel wheel Runout Axial 0−1.0 mm (0−0.04 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0−1.0 mm (0−0.04 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Wheel bearings End play Front 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
Rear 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)

00/10/27 09:17:50 61S5N000_020_0015
Brakes
Parking brake Distance travelled when pulled with 6−7 clicks
lever 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbs) of force
Brake pedal Pedal height (Carpet removed) M/T 184 mm (7 4/16 in.)
A/T 188 mm (7 6/16 in.)
Free play 0.4−3.0 mm (0.016−0.118 in.)
Master cylinder Piston-to-pushrod clearance 0−0.4 mm (0−0.02 in.)
Brake disc Thickness Front 20.9−21.8 mm (0.82−0.86 in.) 19.0 mm (0.75 in.)
Rear 8.9−9.1 mm (0.350−0.358 in.) 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Runout ――― 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Parallelism ――― 0.015 mm
(0.0006 in.)
Brake pads Thickness Front 9.5−10.5 mm (0.37−0.41 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Rear 8.5−9.5 mm (0.33−0.37 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Type HFC-134 a (R-134 a)
Capacity or system 500−550 g (17.6−19.4 oz)
Refrigerant oil Type SANDEN: SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-A01AH or 38899-P13-A01)
Capacity of components Condenser 25 m (5/6 fl oz, 0.9 lmp oz)
Evaporator 45 m (1 1/2 fl oz, 1.3 lmp oz)
Each line and 10 m (1/3 fl oz, 0.4 lmp oz)
hose
Receiver 10 m (1/3 fl oz, 0.4 lmp oz)
Compressor 130−150 m (4 1/3 fl oz, 3.7 lmp oz−5 fl oz, 4.5 lmp oz)
Compressor Starter coil resistance at 68°F (20°C) 3.05−3.35
(DENSO) Pulley-to-pressure plate clearance 0.5±0.15 mm (0.02±0.006 in.)
Compressor belt Deflection with 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbs) Used belt: 8.5−11.0 mm (0.33−0.43 in.)
NOTE: Adjust a applied mid-way between pulleys New belt: 5.0−6.5 mm (0.20−0.26 in.)
new belt to the Tension (measured with belt tension Used belt: 390−540 N (40−55 kgf, 88−120 lbs)
new belt spec., gauge) New belt: 830−980 N (85−100 kgf, 190−220 lbs)
run the engine
for 5 minutes,
then readjust it
to the used belt
spec.

00/10/27 09:17:50 61S5N000_020_0016
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
DIMENSIONS Overall length 4,490 mm (176.8 in.)
Overall width 1,715 mm (67.5 in.)
Overall height 1,440 mm (56.7 in.)
Wheelbase 2,620 mm (103.1 in.)
Track Front 1,470 mm (57.8 in.)
Rear 1,470 mm (57.8 in.)
Ground clearance 104 mm (4.10 in.)
Seating capacity Five
WEIGHT Gross Vehicle Weight Rating STD (M/T) without A/C 1,580 kg, with A/C 1,600 kg
(GVWR) STD (A/T) without A/C 1,600kg, with A/C 1,620 kg
Touring (M/T) 1,600 kg
Premium (M/T)
Touring (A/T) 1,620 kg
Premium (A/T)
ENGINE Type Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC VTEC gasoline engine
Cylinder arrangement Inline 4-cylinder, transverse
Bore and stroke 75.0 x 94.4 mm (2.95 x 3.72 in.)
Displacement 1,668 cm3 (m ) (101.7 cu in.)
Compression ratio 9.9
Valve train Belt driven, SOHC VTEC 4 valves per cylinder
Lubrication system Forced, wet sump, with trochoid pump
Oil pump displacement at 6,000 engine rpm 36.4 (38.5 US qt, 32.0 lmp qt)/minute
Water pump displacement at 6,000 engine rpm 130 (137 US qt, 114 lmp qt)/minute
Fuel required UNLEADED gasoline with 86 pump octane number or higher
STARTER Type Gear reduction
Normal output M/T 1.0 kW
A/T 1.2 kW
Nominal voltage 12 V
Hour rating 30 seconds
Direction of rotation Clockwise as viewed from gear end
CLUTCH Clutch M/T Single plate dry, diaphragm spring
A/T Torque converter
Clutch friction material surface area M/T 176 cm2 (24.8 sq in.)

00/10/27 09:17:50 61S5N000_020_0017

MANUAL Type Synchronized, 5-speed forward, 1 reverse
TRANSMISSION Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio 1st 3.142
2nd 1.869
3rd 1.241
4th 0.969
5th 0.756
Reverse 3.230
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 4.411
AUTOMATIC Type Electronically controlled automatic, 4-speed forward, 1 reverse
TRANSMISSION Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio 1st 2.722
2nd 1.469
3rd 0.975
4th 0.674
Reverse 1.955
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 4.357
STEERING Type Power-assisted rack and pinion
Overall ratio 14.49
Turns, lock-to-lock 2.83
Steering wheel diameter 380 mm (15.0 in.)
SUSPENSION Type Front Independent strut with stabilizer, coil spring
Rear Double wishbone
Shock absorber Front and rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
WHEEL Camber Front 0°
ALIGNMENT Rear − 0°45’
Caster Front 1°33’
Total toe Front 0 mm (0 in.)
Rear In 2 mm (1/16 in.)
BRAKES Type of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Type of parking brake Mechanical actuating, rear wheels
Pad friction surface area Front 35 cm2 x 2 (5.4 sq in. x 2)
Rear 27 cm2 x 2 (4.2 sq in. x 2)
TIRES Size of front and rear tires STD P185/65R15 86H
Size of spare tires STD without T115/70D14 88M
ABS
Touring, T125/70D15 95M
Premium,
STD with ABS
AIR Cooling capacity 3,870 kcal/h (15,400 BTU/h)
CONDITIONING Compressor Type/manufacturer Scroll/SANDEN
Number of cylinders ―――
Capacity 85.7 m /rev. (5.23 cu in./rev.)
Maximum speed 12,000 rpm
Lubricant 130 m (4 1/3 fl oz)
capacity
Lubricant type SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-A01AH or 38899-P13-A01)
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin

00/10/27 09:17:51 61S5N000_020_0018
(cont’d)
AIR Blower Type Radial fan
CONDITIONING Motor input 190 W/12 V
Speed control 9-speed
Maximum capacity 480 m3/h (16,900 cu ft/h)
Temperature control Air-mix type
Compressor clutch Type Dry, single plate, Poly-V belt drive
Electrical power 42 W maximum at 12 V
consumption at
68°F (20°C)
Refrigerant Type HFC-134 a (R-134 a)
Quantity 500−550 g (17.5−19.5 oz)
ELECTRICAL Battery 12 V−36 AH/5 hours
RATINGS Starter DENSO 12 V−1.0 kW
MITSUBA 12 V−1.2 kW
Alternator 12 V−70 A
Fuses Under-hood fuse/ 80 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 7.5 A
relay box
Under-dash fuse/ 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
relay box
Light bulbs Headlight high 12 V−60 W
beam
Headlight low 12 V−55 W
beam
Front turn signal/ 12 V−21 W/5 W
Front side marker
lights
Front parking lights 12 V−5 W
Rear turn signal 12 V−21 W
lights
Brake/Taillights 12 V−21/5 W
Inner taillight 12 V−5 W
High mount 12 V−21 W
brake light
Back-up lights 12 V−21 W
License plate light 12 V−5 W
Ceiling light 12 V−8 W
Trunk lights 12 V−5 W
Spotlights 14 V−8 W
Gauge lights 14 V−1.4 W
Indicator lights 12 V−1.12 W

00/10/27 09:17:51 61S5N000_020_0019
Body Specifications
Unit: mm (in)
1,440 (56.7)
1,470 (57.8)
1,715 (67.5)
1,470 (57.8)
2,620 (103.1)
4,490 (176.8)

00/10/27 09:18:58 61S5N000_030_0001
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids ....................................... 3-2

Maintenance Schedule for Normal
Conditions
Listed by Distance/Time ............................................... 3-4
Maintenance Schedule for Severe

Conditions
Listed by Distance/Time ............................................... 3-6
Maintenance Schedule for Normal

Conditions
Listed by Maintenance Item ........................................ 3-8
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions
Listed by Maintenance Item ........................................ 3-9
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/27 09:18:58 61S5N000_030_0002
Lubricants and Fluids
For details of lubrication points and type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and various work
procedures (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each section.
NO. LUBRICATION POINTS LUBRICANT
1 Engine API Service Grade: Use SJ ‘‘Energy Conserving’’ grade
oil. The oil container may also display the API
Certification seal shown below. Make sure it says ‘‘For
Gasoline Engines.’’ SAE Viscosity: See chart below.
2 Transmission Manual Honda MTF*1
Automatic Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF)*2
Transmission
3 Brake system (includes ABS line) Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid*3
4 Clutch line Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid*3
5 Power steering gearbox Steering grease P/N 08733-B070E
6 Release fork (manual transmission) Super High Temp Urea Grease (P/N 08798-9002)
7 Shift and select cable ends (manual
transmission)
8 Throttle cable end (dashboard lower panel hole) Silicone grease
9 Throttle cable end (throttle link) Multi-purpose grease
10 Brake master cylinder pushrod
11 Clutch master cylinder pushrod
12 Shift lever
13 Pedal linkage
14 Battery terminals
15 Fuel fill lid
16 Hinges, latches and locks Honda White Lithium Grease
17 Door hinges, upper and lower
18 Door opening detent
19 Caliper piston boot, caliper pins and boots Silicone grease
20 Brake line joints (front and rear wheelhouse) Rust preventives
21 Power steering system Honda Power Steering Fluid*4
22 Air conditioning compressor Compressor oil: SANDEN: SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-A01AH
or 38899-P13-A01)
For refrigerant: HFC-134 a (R-134 a)
API CERTIFICATION SEAL Recommended Engine Oil
Engine oil viscosity for ambient temperature ranges
*1: Always use Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does
not contain the proper additives.
*2: Always use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
*3: Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of
the system.
*4: Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission
fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather.
3-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/27 09:18:58 61S5N000_030_0003
NOTE:
Lubricate all hinges, latches, and locks once a year.
In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary.
We recommend Honda White Lithium Grease.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 3-3

00/10/27 09:18:59 61S5N000_030_0004
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Listed by Distance/Time
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first.
Use the maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions if the vehicle is driven MAINLY in Canada (see page 3-6).
10,000 mi/ 16,000 km/ 1 year □ Do items in A.

20,000 mi/ 32,000 km/ 1 year □ Do items in A and B.
30,000 mi/ 48,000 km/ 2 years □ Do items in A, C and D
40,000 mi/ 64,000 km/ 2 years □ Do items in A and B.
50,000 mi/ 80,000 km/ 3 years □ Do items in A and E.
60,000 mi/ 96,000 km/ 3 years □ Do items in A, B, C and D.
70,000 mi/ 112,000 km/ 4 years □ Do items in A.
90,000 mi/ 144,000 km/ 5 years □ Do items in A, C and D.
110,000 mi/ 176,000 km/ ―
□ Inspect valve clearance. (cold) (see page 6-33) intake: 0.18−0.22 mm (0.007−0.009 in.) Exhaust: 0.23−0.27 mm (0.009−0.011 in.).
□ Replace spark plugs. Use NGK (PZFR6F-11) or DENSO (PKJ20CR-M11).
Gap: 1.0−1.1 mm (0.039−0.043 in.)
110,000 mi/ 176,000 km/ 6 years □ Do items in A and E.
110,000 mi/ 176,000 km/ 7 years
□ Replace timing belt Removal: (see page 6-12), Installation: (see page 6-15) and inspect water pump (see page 10-7).
□ Inspect idle speed.* Should be 700±50 rpm in neutral (Automatic transmission or position) (see page 11-124).
120,000 mi/ 192,000 km/ 6 years
□ Replace transmission fluid. Use Honda MTF (see page 13-3) or Honda (ATF) (see page 14-100).
□ Do items in A,B,C and D.
120,000 mi/ 192,000 km/ 10 years
□ Replace coolant (see page 10-8). Capacity: M/T: 4.0 (4.2 Us qt, 3.5 lmp qt), A/T: 3.9 (4.1 Us qt, 3.4 lmp qt). Use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type2.
3-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/27 09:18:59 61S5N000_030_0005
Do the items in parts A, B, C, D and E as required for mileage/time interval listed.
A
□ Replace engine oil (see page 8-5). −Capacity without filter change: 3.3 (3.5 US qt, 2.9 Imp qt)
□ Rotate tires. Follow the pattern shown in the Owner’s Manual −Check tire information and condition.
B
□ Replace engine oil filter (see page 8-6).
□ Inspect front and rear brakes (see page 19-4).
• Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
• Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mount bolts.
□ Check parking brake adjustment. Should be fully applied within 6 to 9 clicks (disc brake) or within 4 to 7 clicks (drum brake).
□ Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots (see page 17-8).
• Check rack grease and steering linkage.
• Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
• Check fluid line for damage and leaks.
□ Inspect suspension components.
• Check bolts for tightness.
• Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
□ Inspect driveshaft boots. Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness (see page 16-3).
□ Inspect brake hoses and lines. (including ABS). −Check the master cylinder, proportioning control valve, and ABS modulator for damage
and leakage.
□ Check all fluid levels and condition of fluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-99) or MTF (see page 13-3), engine coolant,
brake fluid, and windshield washer fluid.
□ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
□ Inspect exhaust system*. Check catalytic converter heat shield, exhaust pipe and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness (see page 9-4).
□ Inspect fuel lines and connections*. Check for loose connections, cracks and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
damage parts (see page 11-131).
C
□ Inspect and adjust drive belts.
• Look for cracks and damage, then check belt deflection by pushing on it (about 22 lbs) midway between the pulleys.
– Alternator belt: 8.5−11.0 mm (0.33−0.43 in.) (see page 4-33)
– P/S pump belt: 13.0−16.5 mm (0.51−0.65 in.) (see page 17-12)
– A/C compressor belt: 8.5−11.0 mm (0.33−0.43 in.) (see page 4-32)
□ Replace the air conditioning filter (see page 21-25).
• Replace it twice as often (at 15,000 mile interval) if the vehicle is driven mostly in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the
air from industry and diesel-powered vehicle.
• Replace it whenever airflow from the climate control system is less than normal.
D
□ Replace air cleaner element every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) (independent of time).
E
□ Replace brake fluid every 3 years (independent of mileage).
According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform the maintenance items marked with asterisk( ) will not void customer’s
emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance service be performed at the recommended interval to ensure long-
term reliability.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 3-5

00/10/27 09:18:59 61S5N000_030_0006
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
Listed by Distance/Time
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Use this schedule if the vehicle is driven MAINLY in Canada or in any of the
following conditions; if only OCCASIONALLY driven in these conditions, use the Normal Conditions schedule (see page 3-4).
Severe Driving Conditions
• Driving less than 5 miles (8 km) per trip or, in freezing temperatures, driving less than 10 miles (16 km) per trip
• Driving in extremely hot (over 90°F/32°C) conditions
• Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving
• Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads
• Driving with a roof rack, or driving in mountinous conditions
5,000 mi/ 8,000 km/ 6 months □ Do item in A.

10,000 mi/ 16,000 km/ 1 year □ Do items in A and B.
15,000 mi/ 24,000 km/ 1-1/2 years □ Do items in A and E.
20,000 mi/ 32,000 km/ 1 year □ Do items in A, B and C.
25,000 mi/ 40,000 km/ 2 years □ Do item in A.
30,000 mi/ 48,000 km/ 2 years □ Do items in A, B, D and E.
35,000 mi/ 56,000 km/ 2-1/2 years □ Do item in A.
40,000 mi/ 64,000 km/ 2 years □ Do items in A, B and C.
45,000 mi/ 72,000 km/ 3 years □ Do items in A, E and F.
60,000 mi/ 96,000 km/ 3 year
□ Replace transmission fluid. Use Honda MTF (see page 13-3) or Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF) (see page 14-100).
□ Do items in A, B, C, D, E and F.
70,000mi/ 112,000 km/ 4 years □ Do items in A and B.
75,000 mi/ 120,000 km/ 4-1/2 years □ Do items in A and E.
80,000 mi/ 128,000 km/ 4 years □ Do items in A, B and C.
90,000 mi/ 144,000 km/ 5 years
□ Replace automatic transmission fluid. Use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF) (see page 14-100).
□ Do items in A, B, D and E.
95,000 mi/ 152,000 km/ 5-1/2 years □ Do items in A.
100,000 mi/ 160,000 km/ 5 years □ Do items in A, Band C.
105,000 mi/ 168,000 km/ ― □ Do items in A and E.
110,000 mi/ 176,000 km/ ―
□ Inspect valve clearance. (cold) (see page 6-9) intake: 0.18−0.22 mm (0.007−0.009 in.) Exhaust: 0.23−0.27 mm (0.009−0.011 in.).
□ Replace spark plugs. Use NGK (PZFR6F-11) or DENSO (PKJ20CR-M11).
Gap: 1.0−1.1 mm (0.039−0.043 in.)
110,000 mi/ 176,000 km/ 6 years □ Do items in A, B and F.
110,000 mi/ 176,000 km/ 7 years
□ Replace timing belt Removal: (see page 6-12), Installation: (see page 6-12) and inspect water pump (see page 10-7). Replace this belt
at 6,000 miles (100,000 kw) if the vehicle is driven regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F/43°C) and/or in very low
temperatures (under −20°F −29°C).
□ Inspect idle speed. Should be 700 ± 50 rpm in neutral (Automatic transmission or position) (see page 11-124).
120,000 mi/ 192,000 km/ 6 years
□ Replace transmission fluid. Use Honda MTF (see page 13-3) or Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF) (see page 14-100).
□ Do items in A, B, C, D and E.
120,000 mi/ 192,000 km/ 10 years
□ Replace coolant (see page 10-8). Capacity: M/T: 4.0 (4.2 US qt, 3.5 lmp qt), A/T: 3.9 (4.1 US qt, 3.4 lmp qt) Use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/coolant Type 2.
3-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/27 09:19:00 61S5N000_030_0007
Do the items in parts A, B, C, D, E, and F as required for mileage/time interval listed.
A
□ Replace engine oil (see page 8-5). ― Capacity with filter change: 3.5 (3.7 US qt, 3.1 lmp qt)
B
□ Replace engine oil filter (see page 8-5).
□ Inspect front and rear brakes.
• Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
• Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mount bolts.
□ Lubricate door locks, latches and hinges with Honda white lithium grease.
□ Rotate tires, if the vehicle has been driven the distance listed. Follow the pattern shown in the Owner’s Manual−Check tire inflation and
condition.
□ Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots (see page 17-8).
• Check rack grease and steering linkage.
• Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
• Check fluid line for damage and leaks.
□ Inspect suspension components
• Check bolts for tightness.
• Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
□ Inspect driveshaft boots. Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness (see page 16-3).
C
□ Check parking brake adjustment. Should be fully applied within 6 to 7 clicks.
□ Inspect brake hoses and lines. (including ABS). −Check the master cylinder, proportioning control valve, and ABS modulator for damage
and leakage (see page 19-23).
□ Check all fluid levels and condition of fluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-98) or MTF (see page 13-3), engine coolant,
brake fluid, and windshield washer fluid.
□ Inspect exhaust system*. Check catalytic converter heat shield, exhaust pipe and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness (see page 9-4).
□ Inspect fuel lines and connections*. Check for loose connections, cracks and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
damage parts (see page 11-135).
□ Check all lights. Check function of all interior and exterior lights, and the position of the headlights (see page 22-66).
□ Inspect the vehicle underbody. Check the paint for damage, scratches, stone chipping, and dents.
D
□ Inspect and adjust drive belts.
• Look for cracks and damage, then check belt deflection by pushing on it (about 22lbs) midway between the pulleys.
– Alternator belt: 8.5−11.0 mm (0.33−0.43 in) (see page 4-33).
– P/S pump belt: 13.0−16.5 mm (0.51−0.65 in.) (see page 17-12).
– A/C compressor belt: 8.5−11.0 mm (0.33−0.43 in) (see page 4-32).
□ Replace the air conditioning filter, every 15,000 miles if vehicle is driven mostly where air has high concentration of soot from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles; also replace it anytime airflow is less than usual (see page 21-25).
E
□ Replace air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (independent of time). (see page 11-146).
F
□ Replace brake fluid every 3 years (independent of mileage).
According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform the maintenance items marked with asterisk (*) will not void customer’s
emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the recommended interval to ensure long-
term reliability.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 3-7

00/10/27 09:19:00 61S5N000_030_0008
Maintenance Schedule for Normal and Severe Conditions
Listed by Maintenance Item
Service at the indicated distance or time, miles x 1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
whichever comes first.
km x 1,000 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192
months 12 24 36 48 60 72
Replace engine oil ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Rotate tires
(Check tire inflation and condition at leaset once per month)
Check engine oil and coolant Check engine oil coolant at each fuel stop
Replace engine oil filter ● ● ● ● ● ●
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Visually inspect the following items:

• Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox and boots
• Suspension components
• Driveshaft boots, brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
• Brake house and line (Including ABS)
• All fluid levels and condition of fluids
• Cooling system hoses and connections
• Exhaust system*
• Fuel lines and connections*
Inspect and adjust drive belts ● ● ● ●

NOTE 1
Replace air conditioning filter
Replace transmission fluid MT ●

NOTE2
AT
●
Service the following items at the recommended intervals
Replace air cleaner element Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
Replace spark plugs Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)
Inspect valve clearance Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy.
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km) or 84 months
Inspect idle speed*
Replace engine coolant At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or
60 months
Replace brake fluid Every 36 months
: According to state and federal regulations, failure perform do the maintenance items marked with asterisk (*) will not void customer’s
emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance service be perform at the recommended interval to ensure long-term
reliability.
NOTE 1: Replace the air conditioning filter as often (at 15,000 miles/24,000 km) if the vehicle is driven mostly in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and diesel-powered vehicle.
NOTE 2: Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 72 months, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 60 months.
3-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:46:49 61S5N000_040_0001
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical Cruise Control

Special Tools ................................ 4-2 Component Location Index ........ 4-34
Circuit Diagram ............................ 4-35
Starting System Symptom Troubleshooting
Component Location Index ........ 4-3 Index ......................................... 4-36
Circuit Diagram ............................ 4-4 Cruise Control
Starter Circuit Communication Circuit
Troubleshooting ...................... 4-5 Troubleshooting (A/T) ......... 4-38
Clutch Interlock Control Unit Input Test ................ 4-39
Switch Test ............................... 4-6 Main Switch
Starter Solenoid Test .................. 4-7 Test/Replacement .................... 4-41
Starter Performance Test ............ 4-8 Set/Resume/Cancel Switch
Starter Replacement ................... 4-9 Test/Replacement .................... 4-41
Starter Overhaul .......................... 4-10 Actuator Test ................................ 4-42
Actuator/Cable
Ignition System Replacement ............................ 4-43
Component Location Index ........ 4-17 Actuator Cable Adjustment ........ 4-44
Circuit Diagram ............................ 4-18 Clutch Pedal
Ignition Timing Inspection .......... 4-19 Position Switch Test ................ 4-44
Ignition Coil
Removal/Installation ................ 4-20
Spark Plug Inspection ................. 4-21
Charging System
Component Location Index ........ 4-22
Circuit Diagram ............................ 4-23
Charging Circuit
Troubleshooting ...................... 4-24
Alternator Replacement .............. 4-26
Alternator Overhaul .................... 4-27
Alternator-Compressor Belt
Inspection and Adjustment ..... 4-32
Alternator Belt Inspection and
Adjustment ............................... 4-33
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 13:46:49 61S5N000_040_0002
Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Number Tool Number Description Qty
* 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge 1
07746-0010400 Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
*Included in the Belt Tension Gauge Set, T/N 07JGG−001000A
4-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:46:51 61S5N000_040_0003
Starting System
Component Location Index
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
STARTER CUT RELAY

Test, page 22-51
CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH (M/T)

Test, page 4-5
Switch Position Adjustment,
TRANSMISSION RANGE page 12-4
SWITCH (A/T) STARTER
Test, page 14-127 Starter Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-5
Replacement, page 14-128 Solenoid Test, page 4-7
Performance Test, page 4-8
Replacement, page 4-9
Overhaul, page 4-10
-DYNOMITE 2009- 4-3

00/10/26 13:46:53 61S5N000_040_0004
Starting System
Circuit Diagram
4-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:46:54 61S5N000_040_0005
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting

NOTE: 4. Check the battery condition. Check electrical
• Air temperature must be between 59° and 100°F (15° connections at the battery and the starter for
and 38°C) during this procedure. looseness and corrosion. Then check the starter
• After this test, or any subsequent repair, reset the again.
Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) to clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes Did the starter crank the engine?
(DTCs) (see page 11-4).
YES−The starting system is OK.
Recommended Procedure:
• Use a starter system tester. NO−Go to step 5.
• Connect and operate the equipment in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Make sure the transmission is in neutral, then
disconnect the BLK/WHT wire (A) from the starter
Alternate Procedure solenoid (B). Connect a jumper wire from the
battery positive terminal to the solenoid terminal.
1. Hook up the following equipment:
• Ammeter, 0−400 A M/T:
• Voltmeter, 0−20 V (accurate within 0.1 volt)
• Tachometer, 0−1200 rpm
B
A/T:
2. Remove the No. 46 (15 A) fuse from the under-dash

fuse/relay box.
3. With the shift lever in or (A/T), or the clutch

pedal pressed (M/T), turn the ignition switch to start
(III).
Did the starter crank the engine normally?
YES−The starting system is OK.

B
NO−If the starter won’t crank at all, go to step 4. If A
it cranks the engine erratically or too slowly, go to
step 7. If it won’t disengage from the flywheel or Did the starter crank the engine?
torque converter ring gear when you release the
key, check for the following until you find the cause. YES−Go to step 6.
• Solenoid plunger and switch malfunction NO−Remove the starter, and diagnose its internal
• Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch problems.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 4-5

00/10/26 13:46:54 61S5N000_040_0006
Starting System
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting Clutch Interlock Switch Test

(cont’d)
1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector.
6. Check the following items in the order listed until A

you find the open circuit.
• Check the BLK/WHT wire and connectors

between the starter cut relay and the ignition
switch, and between the starter cut relay and the
starter.
• Check the ignition switch (see page 22-53).
• With A/T, check the transmission range switch
and connector. With M/T, check the clutch
interlock switch and connector.
7. Check engine speed during cranking.
Is engine speed above 100 rpm?
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Remove and disassemble the starter, and

check for the following until you find the cause.
2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (A).
• Excessively worn starter brushes
• Open circuit in commutator brushes 3. Check for continuity between the terminals
• Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear according to the table.
• Faulty drive gear clutch
Terminal
1 2
8. Check the cranking voltage and current draw.
Clutch Interlock Switch
Is cranking voltage no less than 8.5 volts ( with PRESSED

A/ T ) or 8.0 volts ( with M/ T ), and current draw no RELEASED
more than 350 amps ( with A/ T ) or 200 amps ( with
M/ T )?
4. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust the padal
YES−Go to step 9. height (see page 12-4).
NO−Remove and disassemble the starter, and

check for the following until you find the cause.
• Open circuit in starter armature commutator

segments
• Starter armature dragging
• Shorted armature winding
• Excessive drag in engine
9. Remove the starter and inspect its drive gear and

the flywheel or torque converter ring gear for
damage. Replace any damaged parts.
4-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:46:54 61S5N000_040_0007
Starter Solenoid Test

1. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S
terminal (A) and the armature housing (ground).
There should be continuity.
• If there is continuity, go to step 2.

• If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
M/T:
A/T:
B A
2. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S

terminal (A) and M terminal (B). There should be
continuity.
• If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK.

• If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 4-7

00/10/26 13:46:55 61S5N000_040_0008
Starting System
Starter Performance Test

1. Disconnect the wires from the S terminal and the M 5. Disconnect the battery also from the body. If the
terminal. pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly.
To avoid damaging the starter, do not leave the
battery connected for more than 10 seconds.
S
M S
12V
BATTERY
M
12V
BATTERY
BODY
(GROUND)
BODY
(GROUND)
2. Make a connection as described below using as

heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to
the wire used for the vehicle). 6. Clamp the starter firmly in a vise.
3. Connect the battery as shown. If the starter pinion 7. Connect the starter to the battery as described in
pops out, it is working properly. To avoid damaging the diagram below, and confirm that the motor
the starter, do not leave the battery connected for starts and keeps rotating.
more than 10 seconds.
4. Disconnect the battery from the M terminal. If the S

pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil is working M B
properly. To avoid damaging the starter, do not
leave the battery connected for more than 10
seconds. STARTER
M S
12V
BATTERY BATTERY
12V
BODY 8. If the electric current and motor speed meet the

(GROUND) specifications when the battery voltage is at 11.5 V,
the starter is working properly.
Specifications:
Maker Electric current Motor speed
DENSO 90 A or less 3,000 rpm or

more
MITSUBA 80 A or less 2,600 rpm or

more
4-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:46:55 61S5N000_040_0009
Starter Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, A/T:
then write down the frequencies for the radio’s
10 x 1.25 mm
preset buttons. 44 N·m
8 x 1.25 mm
9 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then (0.9 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3
minutes.
3. Remove the resonator.
4. Disconnect the starter cable (A) from the B terminal

on the solenoid, then disconnect the BLK/WHT wire
(B) from the S terminal.
M/T:
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
A B
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
5. Remove the two bolts holding the starter, then

remove the starter.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make sure

the crimped side of the ring terminal (A) is facing
out.
A
8 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
9 N·m 44 N·m
(0.9 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
7. Connect the battery positive cable and negative

cable to the battery.
8. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter

the customer’s radio station presets.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 4-9

00/10/26 13:46:56 61S5N000_040_0010
Starting System
Starter Overhaul
Disassembly/Reassembly - M/T
STARTER SOLENOID
MOLYBDENUM
DISULFIDE
SOLENOID LEVER
OVERRUNNING
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY GEAR HOUSING
ARMATURE
ARMATURE HOUSING
MOLYBDENUM
DISULFIDE
MOLYBDENUM
DISULFIDE
END COVER BRUSH HOLDER

00/10/26 13:46:56 61S5N000_040_0011
Disassembly/Reassembly - A/T
END COVER
BRUSH HOLDER
BRUSH
ARMATURE HOUSING
ARMATURE
GEAR HOUSING
MOLYBDENUM
DISULFIDE OVERRUNNING
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
GEAR HOUSING
COVER
STARTER
SOLENOID
MOLYBDENUM SOLENOID LEVER

DISULFIDE
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:46:57 61S5N000_040_0012
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont’d)

Armature Inspection and Test 5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is
below the service limit, replace the armature.
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-9).
Commutator Diameter
2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning Standard (New):
of this procedure. M/T: 27.9−28.0 mm (1.098−1.102 in.)
A/T: 28.0 mm−28.1 mm (1.102−1.106 in.)
3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from Service Limit:
contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear M/T: 27.0 mm (1.063 in.)
or damage, replace the armature. A/T: 27.5 mm (1.083 in.)
4. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is 6. Measure the commutator (A) runout.
dirty or burnt, resurface with emery cloth or a lathe
within the following specifications, or recondition • If the commutator runout is within the service
with ＃500 or ＃600 sandpaper (B). limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or
brass chips between the segments.
• If the commutator runout is not within the service
A
limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)

00/10/26 13:46:57 61S5N000_040_0013
7. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), 9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B).
undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while
the commutator segments. The undercut should the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace
not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D). the armature.
Commutator Mica Depth

B
Standard (New): C
M/T: 0.45−0.75 mm (0.018−0.030 in.)
A/T: 0.4−0.5 mm (0.016−0.020 in.)
Service Limit:
M/T: 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
A/T: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
B D
C
A 10. Check with an ohmmeter that no continuity exists

between the commutator (A) and armature coil
core (B), and between the commutator and
armature shaft (C). If continuity exists, replace the
armature.
8. Check for continuity between the segments of the

commutator. If an open circuit exists between any
segments, replace the armature.
B
A
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:46:58 61S5N000_040_0014
Starting System

Starter Brush Inspection Starter Brush Holder Test
11. Measure the brush length. If it is not within the 14. Check that there is no continuity between the (＋)
service limit, replace the armature housing brush holder (A) and (−) brush holder (B). If there
assembly (M/T), or the brush holder assembly (A/T). is no continuity, replace the brush holder assembly.
Brush Length M/T:

Standard (New):
M/T: 14.0−14.5 mm (0.55−0.57 in.)
B
A/T: 15.8−16.2 mm (0.62−0.64 in.) A
Service Limit:
M/T: 9.0 mm (0.35 in.)
A/T: 11.0 mm (0.43 in.)
A/T:
B B
Starter Field Winding Test (M/T)
12. Check for continuity between the brushes (A). If

there is no continuity, replace the armature
housing (B).
A
A
A
13. Check for continuity between each brush (A) and

the armature housing (B). If there is continuity,
replace the armature housing.

00/10/26 13:46:58 61S5N000_040_0015
15. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring 17. Install the armature in the housing, and install the
the brush into contact with the commutator, then brush holder. Next, pry back each brush spring
attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (C). Measure again, and push the brush down until it seats
the spring tension at the moment the spring lifts off against the commutator, then release the spring
the brush. against the end of the brush.
Spring Tension: NOTE: To seat new brushes, slip a strip of ＃500 or

M/T: 13.7−17.7 N (1.4−1.8 kgf, 3.09−3.97 lbf) ＃600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between the
A/T: 15.7−17.7 N (1.6−1.8 kgf, 3.53−3.97 lbf) commutator and each brush, and smoothly rotate
the armature. The contact surface of the brushes
will be sanded to the same contour as the
B
commutator.
16. Pry back each brush spring with a screwdriver, then

position the brush about halfway out of its holder,
and release the spring to hold it there.
18. Install the starter end cover (A) to retain the brush
holder (B).
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:46:58 61S5N000_040_0016
Starting System

Overrunning Clutch Inspection
19. Slide the overrunning clutch along the shaft.

Replace it if it does not slide smoothly.
20. Rotate the overrunning clutch (A) both ways.

Does it lock in one direction and rotate smoothly in
reverse ? If it does not lock in either direction or it
locks in both directions, replace it.
M/T:
B
A/T:
B
21. If the starter drive gear (B) is worn or damaged,

replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear
is not available separately.
Check the condition of the flywheel or torque

converter ring gear if the starter drive gear teeth
are damaged.
22. Reassemble the starter in reverse order of

disassembly.

00/10/26 13:46:59 61S5N000_040_0017
Ignition System
SPARK PLUG IGNITION COIL

Inspection, page 4-21 Removal/Installation, page 4-20

00/10/26 13:47:02 61S5N000_040_0018
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram

00/10/26 13:47:03 61S5N000_040_0019
Ignition Timing Inspection

1. Check the idle speed, and adjust it if necessary (see 5. Point the light toward the pointers (A) on the timing
page 11-124). belt cover. Check the ignition timing under no load
conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear window
2. Connect the Honda PGM Tester to the Data Link defogger, and air conditioner are not operating. If
Connector (DLC), and follow the tester’s prompts in the ignition timing differs from the specification
the ‘‘SCS’’ menu (see the Honda PGM Tester below, replace the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4).
Operator’s Manual).
Ignition Timing:
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with M/T: 8°±2° BTDC (RED mark (B)) at idle in neutral
no load (in Neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, A/T: 8°±2° BTDC (RED mark (B)) at idle in or
then let it idle.
A
4. Remove the ignition coil cover, then connect the
timing light to the No. 1 ignition coil wire.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Disconnect the Honda PGM tester and timing light.

00/10/26 13:47:03 61S5N000_040_0020
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Removal/Installation

1. Remove the ignition coil cover (A), then remove the
ignition coils (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
A (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
2. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of

removal.

00/10/26 13:47:03 61S5N000_040_0021
Spark Plug Inspection

1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. 2. Do not adjust the gap of platinum tip plugs (A);
replace the spark plug if the gap is out of
Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: specification.
• Advanced ignition timing Electrode Gap:

• Loose spark plug Standard (New): 1.0−1.1 mm (0.039−0.043 in.)
• Plug heat range too hot Service Limit: 1.3 mm (0.05 in.)
• Insufficient cooling
Fouled plug may be caused by:
• Retarded ignition timing A

• Oil in combustion chamber
• Incorrect spark plug gap
• Plug heat range too cold
• Excessive idling/low speed running
• Clogged air cleaner element
• Deteriorated ignition coils
Worn or deformed
electrodes
• Improper gap
• Oil-fouling
• Carbon deposits 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the
• Cracked center
electrode insulator center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark
Damaged plugs listed below.
gasket
Spark Plugs:
NGK: PZFR6F-11
DENSO: PKJ20CR-M11
Cracked
insulator
4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to

the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to
18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft).

00/10/26 13:47:05 61S5N000_040_0022
Charging System
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

(In the gauge assembly)
BATTERY
Test, page 22-50
ALTERNATOR-COMPRESSOR BELT
ALTERNATOR Inspection and Adjustment, page 4-32
Troubleshooting, page 4-24
Overhaul, page 4-27

00/10/26 13:47:06 61S5N000_040_0023
Circuit Diagram

00/10/26 13:47:06 61S5N000_040_0024
Charging System
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting

If the charging system indicator does not come on or Is there battery voltage?
does not go off, or the battery is dead or low, test the
following items in the order listed below: YES−Go to step 7.
Battery (see page 22-50)
Charging system indicator NO−Check for a blown No.4(10A) fuse. If the fuse
Alternator and regulator circuit is OK, repair open in the wire between the
alternator and the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Charging System Indicator Test
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
Does the charging system indicator come on?
9. Check continuity between the ECM/PCM connector
YES−Go to step 2. terminal B10 and alternator 4P connector terminal
No. 3.
NO−Go to step 3. ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (24P)
2. Start the engine.
Does the charging system indicator go of f ?

ACGL
(WHT/BLU)
YES−Charging system indicator circuit is OK.
ALTERNATOR
4P CONNECTOR
NO−Go to step 3. L
(WHT/BLU)
Wire side of female terminals
4. Troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see Is there continuity?

page 22-173)
YES−Go to step 10.
Is the multiplex control system OK ?
NO−Repair open in the wire between the
YES−Go to step 5. alternator and the ECM/PCM.
NO−Check the multiplex control system as 10. Check continuity between the ECM/PCM connector
indicated by the DTC (see step 8 on page 22-174). terminal B10 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (24P)
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the
alternator.
6. Measure the voltage at the No. 1 terminal of the

alternator 4P connector with the ignition switch ON ACGL
(II). (WHT/BLU)
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
IG
(BLK/YEL) Wire side of female terminals
Is there continuity?
YES−Repair short in the wire between the

alternator and the ECM/PCM.
Wire side of female terminals NO−Go to alternator and regulator test.

00/10/26 13:47:07 61S5N000_040_0025
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Test 5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine
idle.
1. Be sure the battery is sufficiently charged (see page
22-50). 6. Make sure all accessories are turned off. Turn the
selector switch to position 2 (charging).
2. Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and turn
the selector switch to position 1 (starting). 7. Remove the inductive pick-up, and zero the
ammeter.
LOAD ADJUSTER FULL FIELD
VOLT (CARBON PILE) TESTER LEAD (BLU)
SELECTOR 8. Place the inductive pick-up over the B terminal wire
VOLTMETER
NEGATIVE of the alternator so that the arrow points away from
LEAD (BLK) the alternator.
VOLTMETER
POSITIVE 9. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it
LEAD (RED) there.
Is there voltage less than 13.5 V ?

TEST SELECTOR
SWITCH YES−Repair the alternator (see page 4-27).
FIELD
SELECTOR
NO−Go to step 10.
INDUCTIVE NEGATIVE TESTER
PICK-UP CABLE (BLK)
(GRN) 10. Apply a load with the VAT-40 until the battery
POSITIVE TESTER
CABLE (RED) voltage drops to between 12−13.5 V.
Is the amperage 60 A or more?

INDUCTIVE PICK-UP
YES−The charging system is OK.
B TERMINAL
NO−Repair the alternator (see page 4-27).
3. Shift to Park or Neutral, and start the engine. Hold

the engine at 3,000 rpm, with no load until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
4. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it

there.
Is there voltage over 15.1 V ?
YES−Replace the voltage regulator.
NO−Go to step 5.

00/10/26 13:47:07 61S5N000_040_0026
Charging System
Alternator Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, 5. Loosen the adjusting bolt (A), and remove the lock
then write down the frequencies for the radio’s bolt (B) and mounting bolt (C), then remove the
preset buttons. alternator belt and alternator.
2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.

C
3. Remove the adjust plate mounting bolt (A), locknut
(B), and mounting bolt (C), then remove the power
steering (P/S) pump belt (D) and pump without
disconnecting the P/S hoses.
A D
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
7. Adjust the alternator belt tension (see page 4-33) or

the alternator compressor belt tension (see page 4-
32).

B
C
4. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and alternator

cable (B) from the alternator.
A
8 N·m
(0.8 kgf·m, 6 lbf·ft)

00/10/26 13:47:08 61S5N000_040_0027
Alternator Overhaul
Exploded View
BEARING RETAINER
DRIVE-END HOUSING
FRONT BEARING
PULLEY LOCKNUT
PULLEY
TERMINAL INSULATOR
REAR HOUSING
ASSEMBLY
REAR BEARING
ROTOR
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:47:08 61S5N000_040_0028
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont’d)

Special Tools Required 5. Separate the rear housing from the drive-end
• Driver 07749-0010000 housing by inserting a flat tip screwdriver into the
• Driver attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 openings and prying them a part.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during NOTE: Be careful not to damage the stator with the
this procedure. tip of the screwdriver.
1. Test the alternator and regulator before you

remove them (see page 4-24).
2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-26).
3. Remove the four through bolts.
6. Separate the rear housing (A) and drive-end

housing (B) with the stator (C) attached to the rear
housing.
A
4. Heat the rear bearing seat with a 1,000 W hair drier
for about 5 minutes (129−140°F, 50−60°C).

00/10/26 13:47:09 61S5N000_040_0029
7. If you are not replacing the front bearing and/or 10. Remove the rear bearing using the puller as shown.
rear bearing, go to step 15. Clamp the rotor in a
soft-jawed vise, then remove the pulley locknut.
11. Use a hand press to install the new rear bearing.

Apply pressure only on the inner race to avoid
8. Remove the rotor using a puller as shown. damaging the bearing.
9. Inspect the rotor shaft for galling, and inspect the

bearing journal surface in the drive-end housing for
seizure marks.
• If either the rotor or drive-end housing is

damaged, replace the alternator.
• If both the rotor and the drive-end housing are
OK, go to step 10.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:47:09 61S5N000_040_0030
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont’d)

12. Remove the front bearing retainer plate. 14. With a hammer and the special tools, install a new
front bearing in the drive-end housing.
07749-0010000
07746-0010400
13. Support the drive-end housing in a vise, and drive

out the front bearing with a brass drift (A) and
hammer. Alternator Brush Inspection
15. Measure the length of both brushes with a vernier

caliper.
• If either brush is shorter than the service limit,

replace the rear housing assembly.
• If brush length is OK, go to step 16.
A Alternator Brush Length:

Standard (New): 19.0 mm (0.75 in.)
Service Limit: 5 mm (0.2 in.)

00/10/26 13:47:10 61S5N000_040_0031
Rotor Slip Ring Test 21. Heat the rear bearing seat with a 1,000 W hair drier
for about 5 minutes (129−140°F, 50−60°C).
16. Check that there is continuity between the slip
rings (A). 22. Put the rear housing assembly (A) and drive-end
housing/rotor assembly (B) together, tighten the
• If there is continuity, go to step 17. four through bolts (C) and pull put the pin (D).
• If there is no continuity, replace the rotor
C
assembly.
B
B
A C
17. Check that there is no continuity between each slip

ring (A) and the rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C).
A D
• If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing
assembly, go to step 18.
• If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly. 23. After assembling the alternator, turn the pulley by
hand to make sure the rotor rotates smoothly and
Alternator Reassembly without noise.
18. If you removed the pulley, put the rotor in the drive- 24. Reinstall the alternator, and adjust its belt tension
end housing, then tighten its locknut to 111 N·m (see page 4-32).
(11.3 kgf·m, 81.7 lbf·ft).
19. Remove any grease or any oil from the slip rings.
20. Push the brushes (A) in, then insert a pin or drill bit
(B) (about 1.8 mm (0.71 in.) diameter) to hold them
there.
B A

00/10/26 13:47:10 61S5N000_040_0032
Charging System
Alternator-A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment

Special Tools Required Deflection Method
Belt Tension Gauge 07JGG-001010A
Inspection
Belt Tension Gauge Method
1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure
Inspection the deflection at the mid point (A) between the
alternator and crankshaft pulley. If the belt is worn
1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment,
measure the tension. Follow the gauge go to step 2.
manufacturer’s instructions. If the belt is worn or
damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, Deflection:
go to step 2. Used Belt: 8.5−11.0 mm (0.33−0.43 in.)
New Belt: 5.0−6.5 mm (0.20−0.26 in.)
Tension:
B
Used Belt: 390−540 N (40−55 kgf, 88−120 lbf) 10 x 1.25 mm
New Belt: 830−980 N (85−100 kgf, 190−220 44 N·m
lbf) (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
A
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m A
C
8 x 1.25 mm
C 24 N·m
B
8 x 1.25 mm Adjustment
24 N·m
2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B) and lock bolt (C), then
retighten the mounting bolt to 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14
07JGG-001010A lbf·ft).
Adjustment 3. Turn the adjusting bolt (D) to obtain the proper belt
tension, then retighten the lock bolt and mounting
2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A) and lock bolt (B), then bolt to the specified torque.
retighten the mounting bolt to 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14
lbf·ft). 4. Recheck the belt tension.
3. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to obtain the proper belt 5. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5
tension, then retighten the lock bolt and mounting minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt
bolt to the specified torque. specification.
4. Recheck the belt tension. 6. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment
(see page 17-12).
5. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5
minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt
specification.
6. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment

(see page 17-12).

00/10/26 13:47:11 61S5N000_040_0033
Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment

Special Tools Required Deflection Method
Belt Tension Gauge 07JGG-001010A
Inspection
1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure
Inspection the deflection at the mid point (A) between the
alternator and crankshaft pulley. If the belt is worn
1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment,
measure the tension. Follow the gauge go to step 2.
damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment, Deflection:
go to step 2. Used Belt: 8.5−11.0 mm (0.33−0.43 in.)
New Belt: 6.5−8.5 mm (0.26−0.33 in.)
Tension:
Used Belt: 340−490 N (35−50 kgf, 77−110 lbf) B
10 x 1.25 mm
New Belt: 540−740 N (55−75 kgf, 120−170 lbf) 44 N·m
A
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) A
C
D
C
8 x 1.25 mm
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)
Adjustment
07JGG-001010A
B 2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B) and lock bolt (C), then
8 x 1.25 mm retighten the mounting bolt to 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)
lbf·ft).
Adjustment
3. Turn the adjusting bolt (D) to obtain the proper belt
2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A) and lock bolt (B), then tension, then retighten the lock bolt and mounting
retighten the mounting bolt to 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 bolt to the specified torque.
lbf·ft).
4. Recheck the belt tension.
3. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to obtain the proper belt
tension, then retighten the lock bolt and mounting 5. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5
bolt to the specified torque. minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt
specification.
4. Recheck the belt tension.
5. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 (see page 17-12).
specification.

(see page 17-12).

00/10/26 13:47:13 61S5N000_040_0034
Cruise Control
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

(Built into gauge assembly)
Bulb Locations, page 22-61
SET/RESUME/CANCEL SWITCH
Test/Replacement, page 4-41
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT

CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH (M/T) Input Test, page 4-39
Test, page 4-44 BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Clutch Pedal Adjustment, page 12-4 Test, page 22-80
Pedal Height Adjustment, page 19-5
MAIN SWITCH
ACTUATOR CABLE
Adjustment, page 4-44
ACTUATOR
Test, page 4-42
Relacement, page 4-43
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (A/T)
Test, page 14-127

00/10/26 13:47:18 61S5N000_040_0035
Circuit Diagram

00/10/26 13:47:18 61S5N000_040_0036
Cruise Control
Symptom Troubleshooting Index

NOTE:
• The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence.
• Before troubleshooting.
– check the No. 10 (7.5A) and No. 4 (10A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box, and the No. 7 (15A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box.
– check that the horn sounds.
– check the tachometer to see if it works properly.
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

Cruise control cannot be 1. Check main switch (see page 4-41) • Poor ground:
set 2. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-41) G101(A/T),
3. Check brake pedal position switch and mounting (see page G401(M/T), G501
22-80) • Open circuit,
4. Check clutch pedal position switch and mounting (M/T) (see loose or
page 4-44) disconnected
5. Check transmission range switch (A/T) (see page 14-127) terminals:
6. Check cruise control unit (see page 4-39) LT GRN,
BLK/ORN,
GRY/RED, BLU,
LT BLU,
BLU/WHT, BRN,
BRN/YEL,
BRN/WHT
Cruise control can be set 1. Check dimming circuit in gauge (see page 22-56) • Poor ground:
but indicator light does 2. Check cruise control unit (see page 4-39) G501
not go on • Open circuit,
loose or
disconnected
terminals:
YEL, BLU/YEL
Cruise speed is 1. Check vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (see page 22-63)
noticeably higher or 2. Check actuator (see page 4-42)
lower than what was set 3. Check cruise control unit (see page 4-39)
Excessive overshooting 1. Check actuator (see page 4-42)
or undershooting when 2. Check vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (see page 22-63)
trying to set speed 3. Check cruise control unit (see page 4-39)
Speed fluctuation on a 1. Check vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (see page 22-63)
flat road with cruise 2. Check actuator (see page 4-42)
control set 3. Check cruise control unit (see page 4-39)
Vehicle does not 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-41) Open circuit, loose
decelerate or accelerate 2. Check cruise control unit (see page 4-39) or disconnected
accordingly when SET/ terminals:
RESUME/CANCEL button GRY/RED,
is pushed LT GRN/BLK
Set speed not cancelled 1. Check clutch pedal position switch and mounting (see page Short to ground in
(engine rpm stays high) 4-44) the LT BLU wire
when clutch pedal is 2. Check cruise control unit (see page 4-39)
pushed (M/T)
Set speed not cancelled 1. Check transmission range switch (see page 14-127) Short to ground in
when shift lever is moved 2. Check cruise control unit (see page 4-39) the LT BLU wire
to Neutral position (A/T)
Set speed not cancelled 1. Check brake pedal position switch and mounting (see page Open circuit, loose
when brake pedal is 22-80) or disconnected
pushed 2. Check cruise control unit (see page 4-39) terminals:
WHT/BLK

00/10/26 13:47:18 61S5N000_040_0037

Set speed, does not 1. Check main switch (see page 4-41) Short to power in
cancel when main switch 2. Check cruise control unit (see page 4-39) the LT GRN wire.
is pushed OFF
Set speed, does not 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-41) Open circuit, loose
cancel when CANCEL 2. Check cruise control unit (see page 4-39) or disconnected
button is pushed terminals:
GRY/RED,
LT GRN/BLK
Set speed will not 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-41) Open circuit, loose
resume when RESUME 2. Check cruise control unit (see page 4-39) or disconnected
button is pushed (with terminals:
main switch on, when set LT GRN/BLK
speed is temporarily
cancelled)
The transmission shifts 1. Troubleshoot the cruise control communication circuit (see Open circuit, loose
down slower than normal page 4-38) or disconnected
when going up a hill with terminals:
the cruise control on BLU/ORN
(A/T)

00/10/26 13:47:18 61S5N000_040_0038
Cruise Control
Cruise Control Communication Circuit Troubleshooting (A/T)

1. Start the engine. 7. Connect a voltmeter between the No. 8 terminal of
the cruise control unit 14P connector and body
2. Turn on the cruise control main switch, then drive ground. Test-drive the vehicle at speeds over 25
the vehicle to speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h) with mph (40 km/h) with the cruise control set, and
the cruise control. watch the voltmeter.
Does the cruise control operate? CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 14P CONNECTOR
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Check the cruise control unit (see page 4-39)

or cruise control actuator. BLU/ORN
4. Disconnect PCM connector E (31P) and cruise

control unit 14P connector. Wire side of female terminals
5. Check for continuity between PCM connector

terminal E12 and body ground. Is there about 1 V ?
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Replace the cruise control unit.
8. Connect a voltmeter between PCM connector

terminal E12 and body ground. Drive the vehicle at
BLU/ORN speeds over 25mph (40 km/h) with the cruise
control set, and watch the voltmeter.
Is there continuity? BLU/ORN
YES−Repair short to ground in the wire between

PCM connector terminal E12 and the cruise control
unit 14P connector terminal No. 8.
NO−Go to step 6. Wire side of female terminals
6. Reconnect PCM connector E (31P) and the cruise Is there about 1 V ?

control unit 14P connector.
YES−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have
the latest software, or substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-4). If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM.
NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM

connector terminal E12 and the control unit 14P
connector terminal No. 8.

00/10/26 13:47:19 61S5N000_040_0039
Control Unit Input Test

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-3), precautions, and
procedures (see page 23-11). in the SRS before performing repairs or service.
1. Remove the driver’s dashboard lower cover.
2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the control unit.
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
• If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
14P CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
4. With the 14P connector disconnected, make these input tests.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
1 BRN/ Connect battery power Check the operation of the • Faulty actuator
WHT magnetic clutch: Clutch • Poor ground (G301)
should click and output link • An open in the wire
should be locked.
2 BLU Ignition switch ON (II), Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty brake pedal position
main switch ON and There should be 0 V with the switch
brake pedal pressed, then pedal pressed and battery • An open in the wire
released voltage with the pedal
released.
3 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G501)
ground: • An open in the wire
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:47:19 61S5N000_040_0040
Cruise Control
Control Unit Input Test (cont’d)

4 BLK/ Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 4 (10 A) fuse in the under-
ORN There should be battery voltage. dash driver’s fuse/relay box
• An open in the wire
5 WHT/ Brake pedal pressed, then Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 7 (15 A) fuse in the under-
BLK released There should be battery voltage with the pedal hood fuse/relay box
pressed, and 0 V with the pedal released. • Faulty brake pedal position switch
6 GRY/ Set button pushed Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 7 (15 A) fuse in the under-
RED There should be battery voltage. hood fuse/relay box
When testing terminal No. 6, there should be • Faulty horn relay
no voltage on terminal No. 7. • Faulty set/resume/cancel switch
Cancel button pushed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty cable reel
There should be battery voltage. • An open in the wire
When testing terminal No. 6, there should be
battery voltage on terminal No. 7.
7 LT Resume button pushed Check for voltage to ground:
GRN/ There should be battery voltage.
BLK When testing terminal No. 7, there should be
no voltage on terminal No. 6.
Cancel button pushed Check for voltage to ground:
There should be battery voltage.
When testing terminal No. 7, there should be
no voltage on terminal No. 6.
8 BLU/ Reconnect the cruise Check for voltage to ground: There should be • Fauty cruise control unit
ORN control unit 14P about 1V • Short to ground
connector, start the
engine, turn the main
switch ON and drive the
vehicle to speeds over 25
mph (40 km/h) with the
cruise control set.
9 BRN Connect battery power to Check the operation of the actuator motor: You • Fauty actuator
11 BRN/ the BRN terminal and should be able to hear the motor • An open in the wire
YEL ground to the BRN/YEL
terminal
10 BLU/ Ignition switch ON (II) Attach to ground: • Blown bulb
YEL Cruise indicator light in the gauge assembly • Blown No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
should comes on. under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty dimming circuit in the gauge
assembly
12 BLU/ Ignition switch ON (II) and Check for voltage between the BLU/WHT (＋) • Faulty ECM/PCM
WHT main switch ON; raise the and BLK (−) terminals: • An open in the wire
front of the vehicle, and There should be 0−5 V or battery voltage
rotate one wheel slowly repeatedly.
while holding the other
wheel
13 LT Ignition switch ON (II) and Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 4 (10 A) fuse in the under-
GRN main switch ON There should be battery voltage. dash dfuse/relay box
• Faulty main switch
14 LT A/T:Shift lever in or Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty transmission range switch
BLU M/T:Clutch pedal There should be continuity. • Faulty clutch pedal position switch
released NOTE:There should be no continuity when the • Poor ground (G101, G401)
clutch pedal is pressed or when the shift lever • An open in the wire
is in other positions.
5. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be
faulty; replace it.

00/10/26 13:47:20 61S5N000_040_0041
Main Switch Test/Replacement Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/

Replacement
1. Carefully pry the switch panel assembly out of the
instrument panel.
1. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch.
Terminal side of
male terminals
Terminal side of male

2. Disconnect the 5P connector from the main switch, terminals
then remove the switch.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each

switch position according to the table. If there is no
continuity, replace the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in
switch position according to the table.
Terminal
2 5 1 3 4 • If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but
Position
switch failure is occurred on the cruise control
OFF unit input test, check and repair the wire harness
ON on the switch circuit.
• If there is no continuity in one or both positions,
replace the switch.
Terminal
1 2 3
Position
SET (ON)
RESUME (ON)
CANCEL (ON)

00/10/26 13:47:20 61S5N000_040_0042
Cruise Control
Actuator Test
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the actuator 6. Check the operation of the actuator motor in each
(B). output linkage position according to the table. You
should be able to hear the motor.
A
B
Battery power Output linkage position
polarities
(＋) (−) FULL MIDDLE FULL
CLOSE POSITION OPEN
No. 4 No. 3 The motor The motor The motor
Terminal Terminal runs. runs. stops.
No. 3 No. 4 The motor The motor The motor
Terminal Terminal stops. runs. runs.
OUTPUT LINKAGE
FULL OPEN
Terminal side of male terminals

MIDDLE
POSITION
2. Remove the cover (A), and check the output linkage
(B) for smooth movement.
A
FULL CLOSE
3. Connect the battery power to the No. 2 terminal

and ground to the No. 1 terminal.
4. Check for a clicking sound from the magnetic clutch.

The output linkage should be locked.
5. If the output linkage is not locked, replace the

actuator assembly.

00/10/26 13:47:21 61S5N000_040_0043
Actuator/Cable Replacement
1. Loosen the locknut (A), then disconnect the 4. Remove the actuator cover (A) from the actuator.
actuator cable (B) from the throttle linkage.
A
B
2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the actuator.

5. Remove the actuator cable from the actuator.
6 x 1.0 mm B
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
6. Install the reverse order of removal, and adjust the

free play at the throttle linkage after connecting the
A actuator cable.
3. Remove the two mounting bolts, and remove the

actuator assembly (B).

00/10/26 13:47:21 61S5N000_040_0044
Cruise Control
Actuator Cable Adjustment Clutch Pedal Position Switch Test

1. Check that the actuator cable (A) moves smoothly 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the clutch pedal
with no binding or sticking. position switch (A).
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
Terminal side of
D male terminals
B A
2. Measure the amount of movement of the output

linkage (B) until the engine speed starts to increase.
At first, the output linkage should be located at the
fully closed position (C). The free play (D) should be
3.75±0.5 mm (0.15±0.02 in.). 2. Remove the clutch pedal position switch.
3. If the free play is not within specs, loosen the 3. Check for continuity between the terminals
locknut, and turn the adjusting nut until the free according to the table.
play is as specified, then retighten the locknut.
Terminal
Clutch Pedal 1 2
Position Switch
PRESSED
RELEASED
4. If necessary, replace the clutch pedal position

switch or adjust the pedal height (see page 12-4).

00/10/26 13:48:05 61S5N000_050_0001
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal .................................................... 5-2
Engine Installation ................................................ 5-10
Cylinder Head ............................................. 6-1

Engine Block ............................................... 7-1
Engine Lubrication ..................................... 8-1

Intake Manifold/Exhaust System ............. 9-1
Engine Cooling ........................................... 10-1
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 13:48:06 61S5N000_050_0002
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal
NOTE: 5. Remove the battery and battery base.
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces. 6. Remove the battery cables (A) from the fuse box,
• To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors and remove the harness clamps (B).
carefully while holding the connector portion.
• Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
1. Secure the hood in the wide open position (support

rod in the lower hole).
2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio,
preset buttons.
3. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then

the positive terminal.
A B
4. Remove the intake resonator.
7. Remove the intake air duct (A) and ground cable (B).
5-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:48:06 61S5N000_050_0003
8. Remove the clutch slave cylinder (A) and clutch line 10. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-129).
bracket (B) (M/T).
11. Remove the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister
A
hose.
12. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose.
9. Remove the shift cable (A) and select cable (B)

(M/T).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 5-3

00/10/26 13:48:07 61S5N000_050_0004
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont’d)

13. Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control 16. Remove the harness clamps (A) and grommet (B),
cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then then pull the engine wire harness through the
slipping the cable ends out of the accelerator bulkhead.
linkage. Take care not to bend the cables when
B
removing them. Always replace any kinked cable
with a new one.
A
B
A
14. Remove the glove box stops, then open the glove
box. 17. Remove the adjusting plate mounting bolt (A),
locknut (B) and mounting bolt (C), then remove the
15. Disconnect the Engine Control Module (ECM)/ power steering (P/S) pump belt (D) and pump
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) connectors. without disconnecting the P/S hoses.
A D
B
C
5-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:48:08 61S5N000_050_0005
18. Remove the alternator (see page 4-26). 21. Remove the radiator cap.
19. Remove the air conditioning (A/C) hose bracket (A) 22. Raise the hoist to full height.
and P/S hose bracket (B).
23. Remove the front tires/wheels.
24. Remove the splash shield.
A B
20. Remove the alternator lower bracket (A), then

remove the A/C compressor (B) without
disconnecting the A/C hoses. 25. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, drain the
engine coolant (see page 10-8).
A
26. Drain the transmission fluid. Reinstall the drain
plug using a new washer with MTF (see page 13-3),
or ATF (see page 14-100).
27. Drain the engine oil. Reinstall the drain bolt using a
new washer (see page 8-5).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 5-5

00/10/26 13:48:08 61S5N000_050_0006
Engine Assembly

28. Disconnect the primary Heated Oxygen Sensor 29. Remove the shift cable covers (A), then remove the
(primary HO2S) connector (A) and secondary shift control cable (B) (A/T).
Heated Oxygen Sensor (secondary HO2S)
connector (B), then remove the exhaust pipe A/
Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) (C).
A B
30. Disconnect the suspension lower arm ball joints

(see page 18-10) and stabilizer links (see page 18-
18).
31. Remove the driveshafts (see page 16-3). Coat all

B precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil.
C Tie plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
5-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:48:09 61S5N000_050_0007
32. Lower the hoist. 35. Remove the ATF cooler hoses, then plug the ATF
cooler hoses and lines (A/T).
33. Remove the ground cable (A), upper radiator hose
(B), lower radiator hose (C) and heater hose (D).
A
D
36. Attach the chain hoist to the engine as shown.
B
C
34. Remove the heater hose.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 5-7

00/10/26 13:48:09 61S5N000_050_0008
Engine Assembly

37. Remove the front mount mounting bolt. 39. Remove the transmission mount bracket mounting
bolt/nuts.
M/T:
38. Remove the side engine mount bracket mounting

nuts.
A/T:
5-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:48:10 61S5N000_050_0009
40. Make sure the hoist brackets are positioned 44. Check that the engine/transmission is completely
properly. Raise the hoist to full height. free of vacuum hoses, fuel and coolant hoses, and
electrical wiring.
41. Remove the rear mount mounting bolts.
45. Slowly lower the engine about 150 mm (6 in.).
Check once again that all hoses and wires are
disconnected from the engine/transmission.
46. Lower the engine all the way. Remove the chain
hoist from the engine.
47. Remove the engine from under the vehicle.
42. Use a marker to make alignment marks on the

reference lines (A) that align with the centers of the
rear sub-frame mounting bolts (B).
A A
B B
43. Remove the front sub-frame.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 5-9

00/10/26 13:48:11 61S5N000_050_0010
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation
1. Install the accessory brackets and tighten their bolts and nuts to the specified torques.
REAR STIFFENER
(A/T) P/S PUMP
BRACKET
REAR STIFFENER
(M/T)
10 x 1.25 mm
8 x 1.25 mm 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m,
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
17 lbf·ft)
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm ENGINE MOUNT

24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, BRACKET
17 lbf·ft) 10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
FRONT STIFFENER
A/C COMPRESSOR
BRACKET
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m,
17 lbf·ft)
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
10 x 1.25 mm
10 x 1.25 mm 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m,
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
33 lbf·ft)

00/10/26 13:48:11 61S5N000_050_0011
2. Position the engine under the vehicle. Attach the 4. Tighten the rear mount mounting bolts.
chain hoist to the engine, then lift the engine into
position in the vehicle.
Reinstall the mounting bolts/support nuts in

the sequence given. Failure to follow this
sequence may cause excessive noise and
vibration, and reduce bushing life.
3. Install the sub-frame (A). Align the reference lines

(B) on the sub-frame with the bolt head center, then
tighten the bolts.
10 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m
A
5. Lower the hoist.
6. Tighten the side engine mount bracket mounting

nuts.
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
14 x 1.5 mm
10 x 1.25 mm 103 N·m
59 N·m (10.5 kgf·m,
(6.0 kgf·m, B
43 lbf·ft) 76 lbf·ft)
Replace.
B B
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:48:12 61S5N000_050_0012
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont’d)

7. Tighten the transmission mount bracket mounting 8. Tighten the front mount mounting bolt.
bolt/nuts.
M/T:
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft) 12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m
(6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft)
Replace.
9. Remove the chain hoist from the engine.
10. Raise the hoist to full height.
11. Install a new spring clip on the end of each

A/T: driveshaft, then install the driveshafts. Make sure
each clip ‘‘clicks’’ into place in the differential and
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft) intermediate shaft.
12. Connect the suspension lower arm ball joints (see

page 18-10), and stabilizer links (see page 18-18).
13. Install the shift control cable (A), then install the
shift cable covers (B) (A/T).
6 x 1.0 mm 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m 9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
B A
6 x 1.0 mm
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m,
10 lbf·ft)

00/10/26 13:48:13 61S5N000_050_0013
14. Install the exhaust pipe A/TWC (A): use new 15. Install the splash shield.
gaskets (B) and new self locking nuts (C). Connect
the primary HO2S connector (D) and secondary HO
2S connector (E).
C
10 x 1.25 mm
33 N·m (3.4 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Replace.
16. Install the front tires/wheels.
D B 17. Lower the hoist.
E 18. Install the ATF cooler hoses (A/T).

A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:48:13 61S5N000_050_0014
Engine Assembly

19. Install the heater hose. 21. Install the A/C compressor (A), then install the
alternator lower bracket (B).
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
A B
20. Connect the upper radiator hose (A), lower radiator
hose (B), heater hose (C) and ground cable (D).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 8 x 1.25 mm
D 24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)
22. Install the A/C hose bracket (A) and P/S hose
bracket (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
18 N·m
(1.8 kgf·m,
6 x 1.0 mm 13 lbf·ft)
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
C
A
B
A B

00/10/26 13:48:14 61S5N000_050_0015
23. Loosely install the alternator. 31. Install the cruise control cable, then adjust the
cable (see page 4-44).
the alternator-compressor belt tension (see page 4- 32. Install the throttle cable, then adjust the cable (see
32). page 11-148).
25. Loosely install the P/S pump belt and pump. 33. Install the brake booster vacuum hose.
26. Adjust the P/S pump belt (see page 17-12).
27. Push the ECM/PCM connectors through the

bulkhead, then install the grommet (A).
A
34. Install the EVAP canister hose.
28. Install the harness clamps (B).
29. Connect the ECM/PCM connectors.
30. Install the glove box stops.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:48:15 61S5N000_050_0016
Engine Assembly

35. Install the select cable (A) and shift cable (B) using 37. Install the battery base.
the plastic washers (C), washers (D) and new cotter
pins (E) (M/T). 38. Install the intake air duct (A) and ground cable (B).
8 x 1.25 mm A 6 x 1.0 mm
24 N·m 9.8 N·m
(2.4 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft) (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
C
B
E
D
E
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
B 7.2 lbf·ft)
36. Install the clutch slave cylinder (A) and clutch line
bracket mounting bolt (B) (M/T). 39. Install the battery cables (A) on the under-hood
fuse/relay box, then install the harness clamps (B).
8 x 1.25 mm
B 24 N·m
6 x 1.0 mm (2.4 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
A
A B

00/10/26 13:48:15 61S5N000_050_0017
40. Install the intake resonator. 48. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-4).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 49. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter
8.7 lbf·ft) the customer’s radio station presets.
41. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with

sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease
to prevent corrosion.
42. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verity that
the A/T gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch (A/T).
43. Check that the transmission shifts into gear

smoothly (M/T).
44. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn ON (II) the ignition

switch (do not operate the starter) so that the fuel
pump runs for approximately 2 seconds and
pressurizes the fuel line. Repeat this operation 2 or
3 times, then check for fuel leakage at any point in
the fuel line.
45. Refill the engine with engine oil (see page 8-5).
46. Refill the transmission with MTF (see page 13-3),or

ATF (see page 14-100).
47. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed

air from the cooling system with the heater valve
open (see page 10-8).

00/10/26 13:50:11 61S5N000_060_0001
Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
Special Tools ................................................................. 6-2
Component Location Index ........................................ 6-3
Engine Compression Inspection ................................ 6-6
VTEC Oil Pressure Switch Replacement ..................... 6-7
VTEC Rocker Arms Test ............................................... 6-7
Valve Clearance Adjustment ....................................... 6-9
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation .............. 6-11
Timing Belt Inspection ................................................. 6-12
Timing Belt Removal .................................................... 6-12
Timing Belt Installation ................................................ 6-15
Auto-Tensioner Removal/Installation ......................... 6-19
Cylinder Head Removal ............................................... 6-22
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage ...................... 6-27
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal ................................. 6-27
Rocker Arms Shafts Disassembly/Reassembly ......... 6-28
Rocker Arms and Shafts Inspection ............................ 6-29
Camshaft Inspection .................................................... 6-30
Valves, Springs, and Valve Seals Removal ................ 6-32
Valve Inspection ........................................................... 6-33
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection ............... 6-33
Valve Guide Replacement ........................................... 6-34
Valve Seat Reconditioning .......................................... 6-36
Valves, Springs, and Valve Seals Installation ............ 6-38
Camshaft/Rocker Arms,
Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation ................... 6-39
Cylinder Head Installation ........................................... 6-40
Cylinder Head Cover Installation ................................ 6-45
TDC Sensor Replacement ............................................ 6-47
CKP Sensor Replacement ............................................ 6-47
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 13:50:11 61S5N000_060_0002
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Description Qty
07HAH-PJ7010B Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 1
07JAA-001020A Socket, 19 mm 1
07JAB-001020A Holder Handle 1
07LAJ-PR3020B Air Stopper 1
07MAB-PY3010A Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 1
07742-0010100 Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm 1
6-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:50:13 61S5N000_060_0003
CYLINDER HEAD
COVER
HEAD COVER GASKET
UPPER COVER
RUBBER SEAL
LOWER COVER
CRANKSHAFT
PULLEY
Replacement,
page 6-11
TDC SENSOR
CAMSHAFT
PULLEY CRANKSHAFT
PULLEY BOLT
Replacement,
page 6-11
TIMING BELT
Removal, page 6-12
Inspection, page 6-12
Installation, page 6-15
SIDE ENGINE TIMING BELT

MOUNT BRACKET DRIVE PULLEY
CKP SENSOR AUTO-TENSIONER
Install with concave
surface facing in.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 6-3

00/10/26 13:50:14 61S5N000_060_0004
Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont’d)
CYLINDER HEAD
BOLT
WATER PASSAGE
GASKET
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET DOWEL PIN
O-RING
6-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:50:17 61S5N000_060_0005
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY

Overhaul, page 6-28
DOWEL PIN
CYLINDER
HEAD PLUG O-RING CAMSHAFT
INTAKE VALVE SPRING
SEAL
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE CAMSHAFT
PULLEY
OIL CONTROL
VTEC SOLENOID ORIFICE
VALVE FILTER
O-RING
INTAKE VALVE SEAL

VALVE Replacement, page 6-32
KEEPERS
VALVE GUIDE
SPRING
RETAINER
EXHAUST VALVE
SPRING
EXHAUST VALVE
SEAL
VALVE SPRING BACK COVER

SEAT
VALVE GUIDE CYLINDER HEAD
Removal, page 6-22
Inspection, page 6-27 RUBBER SEAL
EXHAUST VALVE
Removal, page 6-32
INTAKE VALVE Installation, page 6-38
-DYNOMITE 2009- 6-5

00/10/26 13:50:17 61S5N000_060_0006
Cylinder Head
Engine Compression Inspection

1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 9. Connect a tachometer.
temperature (cooling fan comes on).
10. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the starter motor and measure the compression.
3. Remove the air cleaner housing (see step 6 on page Compression Pressure:
6-22). Above 930 kpa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi)-250 rpm
4. Disconnect all four injector connectors. 11. Measure the compression on the remaining
cylinders.
5. Start the engine and let it run until it stalls.
Maximum variation:
6. Remove the all four ignition coils (see page 4-20). Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi)
7. Remove the all four spark plugs. 12. If the compression is not within specifications,
check the following items, then remeasure the
8. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug compression.
hole.
• Damaged or worn valves and seats
• Damaged cylinder head gasket
• Damaged or worn piston rings
• Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore
6-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:50:18 61S5N000_060_0007
VTEC Oil Pressure Switch VTEC Rocker Arm Test

Replacement
Special Tools Required
Air Stopper 07LAJ-PR3020B
1. Remove the resonator (see step 5 on page 6-22).
1. Remove the resonator (see step 5 on page 6-22).
2. Remove the bolt (A) and loosen the bolt (B)
securing the VTEC solenoid valve, then remove the 2. Remove the ignition coil cover, then remove the
harness bracket (C) from the VTEC solenoid valve. four ignition coils (see page 4-20).
A
6 x 1.0 mm 3. Remove the throttle cable clamps and harness
9.8 N·m holder from the cylinder head cover (see step 9 on
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) page 6-13).
4. Remove the cylinder head cover (see step 10 on

page 6-13).
5. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC (see step 5 on page 6-9).
6. Verify that the intake secondary rocker arm (A)

moves independently of the intake primary rocker
arm (B).
• If the intake secondary rocker arm does not move,

remove the primary and secondary rocker arms
as an assembly and check that the pistons in the
B secondary and primary rocker arms move
6 x 1.0 mm C
smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing,
9.8 N·m D
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) replace the primary and secondary rocker arms
as an assembly, and retest.
3. Remove the harness clamp (D) from the connecting • If the intake secondary rocker arm moves freely,
pipe. go to step 7.
A
4. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector,
then remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (A).
A B
22 N·m
7. Repeat step 6 on the remaining intake secondary
5. Install the VTEC oil pressure switch using a new O- rocker arms with each piston at TDC. When all the
ring (B). secondary rocker arms pass the test, go to step 8.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 6-7

00/10/26 13:50:19 61S5N000_060_0009
Valve Clearance Adjustment

NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head 6. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the
temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). valves you’re going to check.
1. Remove the ignition coil cover, then remove the Intake: 0.18−0.22 mm (0.007−0.009 in.)
four ignition coils (see page 4-20). Exhaust: 0.23−0.27 mm (0.009−0.011 in.)
2. Remove the throttle cable clamps and harness Adjusting screw location:
holder from the cylinder head cover (see step 9 on
page 6-13).
INTAKE
3. Remove the cylinder head cover (see step 10 on No. 4 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1
page 6-13).
4. Remove the grommet from the upper cover, and

disconnect the TDC sensor connector. Remove the
upper cover (see step 1 on page 6-47).
5. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. The ‘‘UP’’ mark (A) on

the camshaft pulley should be at the top, and the
TDC marks (B) on the pulley should line up with the
top edge of the head.
A
No. 4 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1

EXHAUST
7. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting

screw (B) and the end of the valve stem and slide it
back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of
drag.
A
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 6-9

00/10/26 13:50:20 61S5N000_060_0010
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont’d)

8. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the 12. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to
locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until bring No. 4 piston to TDC. TDC marks (A) are visible
the drag on the feeler gauge is correct. again.
A
7 x 0.75 mm
20 N·m
B
13. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
9. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. on No. 4 cylinder.
Repeat the adjustment if necessary.
14. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to
10. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise bring No. 2 piston to TDC. The ‘‘UP’’ mark (A)
(camshaft pulley turns 90°). The ‘‘UP’’ mark (A) on should be on the intake side of the head.
the camshaft pulley should be toward the exhaust
side of the head.
A
15. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance

A on No. 2 cylinder.
11. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance 16. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-45).
on No. 3 cylinder.

00/10/26 13:50:20 61S5N000_060_0011
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation

Special Tools Required 2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and hold the pulley
• Holder handle 07JAB-001020A with holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B).
• Holder attachment, 50 mm, offset 07MAB-PY3010A
• Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A B
07MAB-PY3010A
or a commercially available 19 mm socket
C
Removal 07JAA-001020A
(or Commercially
A available)
1. Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder
07JAB-001020A
attachment (B).
B
07MAB-PY3010A
C
07JAA-001020A
(or Commercially
available)
A
07JAB-001020A
3. Tighten the bolt to 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft) with
a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C). Do not use
an impact wrench.
4. Tighten the pulley bolt an additional 90°.
2. Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket

(C) and breaker bar.
Installation
1. Remove any oil from the pulleys (A), guide plate (B),
crankshaft (C), bolt (D), and washer (E). Clean and
lubricate as shown below.
○: Clean
×: Remove any oil
●: Lubricate
A A
D C
E B

00/10/26 13:50:21 61S5N000_060_0012
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Inspection Timing Belt Removal

1. Remove the ignition coil cover, then remove the Special Tools Required
four ignition coils. • Holder handle 07JAB-001020A
2. Remove the throttle cable clamps and harness • Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A
holder mounting bolts. or a commercially available 19 mm socket
3. Remove the cylinder head cover. 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio,
4. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant preset buttons.
soaking. Replace the belt if it is oil or coolant
soaked. Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the 2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
belt.
3. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its TDC mark (A) lines
up with the pointers (B).
B
4. Remove the front tires/wheels.
5. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt 5. Remove the splash shield.
(see page 6-11).

00/10/26 13:50:23 61S5N000_060_0015
Timing Belt Installation

19. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from Special Tools Required
the timing belt, then remove the timing belt. • Holder handle 07JAB-001020A
• Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A
or a commercially available 19 mm socket
NOTE: If you are removing the auto-tensioner, refer to

the auto-tensioner installation procedure.
1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, and the upper and

lower covers.
2. Set the crankshaft to TDC. Align the TDC mark (A)

on the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (B)
on the oil pump.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:50:23 61S5N000_060_0016
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont’d)

3. Clean the camshaft pulley and set it to TDC. 5. Install the CKP sensor.
–1 The ’’UP’’ mark (A) on the camshaft pulley

should be at the top.
–2 Align the TDC marks (B) on the camshaft pulley
with the top edge of the head.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
6. Install the all bolts loosely, then tighten the

mounting bolts as the numbered sequence shown.
4. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise

sequence, starting with the drive pulley.
–1 Drive pulley (A).

–2 Tensioner pulley (B).
–3 Water pump pulley (C).
–4 Camshaft pulley (D).
D
10 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m 44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
C
B
A

00/10/26 13:50:24 61S5N000_060_0017
7. Install the lower cover. 10. Install the crankshaft pulley, and hold the pulley
with holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B).
B
07MAB-PY3010A
C
07JAA-001020A
(or Commercially
6 x 1.0 mm available)
9.8 N·m A
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 07JAB-001020A
11. Tighten the bolt to 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft) with

a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C).
12. Tighten the pulley bolt an additional 90°.

8. Clean the pulley bolt and washer.
13. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about 5 or 6 turns
9. Clean all oil off the inside face (A) of the crankshaft counterclockwise so that the timing belt positions
pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley bolt (B) and on the pulleys.
washer (C).
14. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its TDC mark (A) lines
○: Clean
×: Remove any oil up with the pointers (B).
●: Lubricate
A B
B
A
C
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:50:25 61S5N000_060_0018
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont’d)

15. Check the camshaft pulley marks (A) 17. Install the upper bracket (A), then tighten the nuts
• If the camshaft pulley marks are also at TDC, go in the numbered sequence shown.
to step 16.
12 x 1.25 mm
• If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC, 54 N·m
remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2 (5.5 kgf·m,
through 12. 40 lbf·ft)
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
(5.5 kgf·m, A
40 lbf·ft)
18. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-45).

A
19. Install the harness holder (A) and throttle cable
16. Install the upper cover (A), then connect the TDC clamps (B).
sensor connector (B), and install the grommet (C).
6 x 1.0 mm
A 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m B
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) C
A
20. Install the ignition coils (see page 4-20).

00/10/26 13:50:25 61S5N000_060_0019
Auto-Tensioner Removal/
Installation
21. Loosely install the alternator.
22. Adjust the alternator belt tension (see page 4-33) Removal:
or the alternator-compressor belt tension (see page
4-32). 1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-12).
23. Loosely install the P/S pump belt and pump. 2. Remove the auto-tensioner.
25. Install the splash shield.
26. Install the front tires/wheels.

(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:50:26 61S5N000_060_0020
Cylinder Head
Auto-Tensioner Removal/Installation (cont’d)

Installation: 4. Align the holes on the tensioner pulley (A) and
tensioner base (B), then insert 3.0 mm (0.12 in.)
1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, and the upper and diameter pin (C) into the holes.
lower covers.
C
on the oil pump.
B A
5. Install the tensioner spring (A) on the auto-

tensioner (B).
A
B
3. Clean the camshaft pulley and set it to TDC.
–1 The ’’UP’’ mark (A) on the camshaft pulley

should be at the top.
–2 Align the TDC marks (B) on the camshaft pulley
A

00/10/26 13:50:26 61S5N000_060_0021
6. Install the auto-tensioner, then tighten the auto- 9. Install the tensioner spring on the tensioner bolt.
tensioner mounting bolt (A) to 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft).
A
10. Rotate the crankshaft pulley 2 turns
7. Loosen the auto-tensioner mounting bolt 180°. counterclockwise so that the timing belt positions
on the pulleys.
8. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise
sequence, starting with the drive pulley. 11. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC.
–1 Drive pulley (A). 12. Tighten the auto-tensioner mounting bolt (A) to 44
–2 Tensioner pulley (B). N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft), then remove the pin (B)
–3 Water pump pulley (C). from the auto-tensioner.
–4 Camshaft pulley (D).
D
B
A B
13. Install the remaining parts.

00/10/26 13:50:27 61S5N000_060_0022
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal

NOTE: 5. Remove the intake resonator.
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
• To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors
carefully while holding the connector portion.
• To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the
engine coolant temperature drops below 100°F (38°C)
before loosening the cylinder head bolts.
• Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
3. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-8).

6. Disconnect the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor
4. Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control connector (A), and remove the breather hose, then
cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then remove the air cleaner housing (B).
slipping the cable ends out of the accelerator
B
linkage. Take care not to bend the cables when
removing them. Always replace any kinked cable
with a new one.
A
B
C

00/10/26 13:50:27 61S5N000_060_0023
7. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and 10. Remove the ground cable (A), upper radiator hose
positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose (B). (B), lower radiator hose (C), heater hose (D) and
water bypass hose (E).
A
A
E
B B
D
C
8. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-129).
11. Remove the two bolts securing the connecting pipe,
9. Remove the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister then remove the connecting pipe from the water
hose. passage.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:50:28 61S5N000_060_0024
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont’d)

12. Remove the adjusting plate mounting bolt (A), 15. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and
locknut (B) and mounting bolt (C), then remove the wire harness clamps from the intake manifold.
power steering (P/S) pump belt (D) and pump
without disconnecting the P/S hoses. • Idle Air Control (IAC) valve connector
• Throttle position sensor connector
A D
• Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
connector
• Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge
valve connector
• Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor
connector
• Radiator fan switch connector
• CKP sensor connector
• TDC sensor connector
• Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) connector
• VTEC solenoid valve connector
• VTEC oil pressure switch connector
• Oil pressure sensor connector
B 16. Support the engine with a jack and wood block

C under the oil pan.
13. Remove the alternator (see page 4-26). 17. Remove the upper bracket.
14. Remove the air conditioning (A/C) hose bracket (A)

and P/S hose bracket (B).
A B

00/10/26 13:50:29 61S5N000_060_0025
18. Remove the cover (A), then remove the exhaust 20. Remove the four ignition coils (see page 4-20).
manifold (B).
21. Remove the throttle cable clamps (A) and harness
holder (B) from the cylinder head cover.
A
A
19. Remove the intake manifold.

B
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:50:30 61S5N000_060_0026
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont’d)

22. Remove the cylinder head cover. 25. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent
warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at
a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are
loosened.
CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS LOOSENING SEQUENCE:
23. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-12).
24. Remove the camshaft pulley (A) and back cover (B). 26. Remove the cylinder head.
A

00/10/26 13:50:30 61S5N000_060_0027
Cylinder Head Inspection for Rocker Arm Assembly Removal

Warpage
1. Loosen the adjusting screws (A).
NOTE: If camshaft-to-holder oil clearances (see page 6-
A
30) are not within specifications, the cylinder head
cannot be resurfaced.
If camshaft-to-holder oil clearances are within

specifications, check the cylinder head for warpage.
Measure along the edges, and three ways across the
center.
• If warpage is less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) cylinder
head resurfacing is not required.
• If warpage is between 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) and 0.2
mm (0.008 in.), resurface cylinder head.
• Maximum resurface limit is 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) based
on a height of 93 mm (3.7 in.).
Cylinder Head Height:

Standard (New): 92.95−93.05 mm (3.659−3.663 in.)
A
PRECISION STRAIGHT 2. Remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly.
EDGE
–1 Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts 2 turns at a

time, in a crisscross pattern, to prevent
damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly.
–2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do
not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The
bolts will keep the camshaft holders, the
springs and the rocker arms on the shafts.
CAMSHAFT HOLDER BOLT LOOSENING

SEQUENCE:

00/10/26 13:50:31 61S5N000_060_0028
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arms and Shafts Disassembly/Reassembly

NOTE:
• Identify parts as they are removed to ensure reinstallation in original location.
• Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-29).
• The rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused.
• When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep
the holders, springs and rocker arms on the shaft.
• Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact points.
• Bundle the rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set.
INTAKE ROCKER SHAFT
INTAKE ROCKER
ARM ASSEMBLY
RUBBER BAND
COLLAR B COLLAR A
No. 4 No. 3 No. 2

CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT
HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER
No. 5 CAMSHAFT No. 1 CAMSHAFT

HOLDER HOLDER
EXHAUST ROCKER EXHAUST ROCKER

ARM B ARM A
SPRING
EXHAUST ROCKER SHAFT
Letter ’’B’’ is stamped Letter ’’A’’ is stamped

on the rocker arm. on the rocker arm.

00/10/26 13:50:31 61S5N000_060_0029
Rocker Arms and Shafts Inspection

1. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker 3. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and
location. check it for an out-of-round condition.
Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance:

Standard (New):
Intake: 0.017−0.050 mm
(0.0007−0.0020 in.)
Exhaust: 0.018−0.054 mm
(0.0007−0.0021 in.)
2. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.
Inspect rocker arm

face for wear.
A
4. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the
clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft
and all overtolerance rocker arms. If any VTEC
intake rocker arm needs replacement, replace both
rocker arms in that set (primary and secondary).
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:50:32 61S5N000_060_0030
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arms and Shafts Inspection Camshaft Inspection

(cont’d)
NOTE:
• Do not rotate the camshaft during inspection.
5. Inspect the rocker arm piston (A). Push it manually. • Remove the rocker arms and rocker shafts.
If it does not move smoothly, replace the rocker
arm assembly. 1. Put the camshaft and the camshaft holders on the
cylinder head, then tighten the bolts to the
NOTE: specified torque.
• When reassembling the primary rocker arm (B),
carefully apply air pressure to its oil passage. Specified torque:
• Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling. 8 mm bolts: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft)
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads.
B
6 mm bolts: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
6 mm bolts: , , ,
2. Seat the camshaft by pushing it away from the

camshaft pulley end of the cylinder head.
3. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the

camshaft, then push the camshaft back and forth
and read the end play.
Camshaft End Play:

Standard (New): 0.05−0.15 mm
(0.002−0.006 in.)

00/10/26 13:50:32 61S5N000_060_0031
4. Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts 2 turns at a time, 9. Check the total runout with the camshaft supported
in a crisscross pattern. Then remove the camshaft on V-blocks.
holders from the cylinder head. • If the total runout of the camshaft is within the
service limit, replace the cylinder head.
5. Lift the camshaft out of the cylinder head, wipe it • If the total runout is beyond the service limit,
clean, then inspect the lift ramps. Replace the replace the camshaft and recheck the camshaft-
camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored, or to-holder oil clearance. If the oil clearance is still
excessively worn. out of tolerance, replace the cylinder head.
6. Clean the camshaft journal surfaces in the cylinder Camshaft Total Runout:
head, then set the camshaft back in place. Place a Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max.
plastigage strip across each journal. Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
7. Install the camshaft holders, then tighten the bolts

to the specified torque as shown in step 1.
8. Remove the camshaft holders. Measure the widest

portion of plastigage on each journal.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within
limits, go to step 10.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
Rotate camshaft
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced, while measuring.
replace the cylinder head.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 9.
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance: 10. Measure cam lobe height.

(0.0020−0.0035 in.) Cam Lobe Height Standard (New):
INTAKE EXHAUST
PRI 38.604 mm 38.784 mm
(1.5198 in.) (1.5269 in.)
SEC 32.848 mm
(1.2932 in.)
PRI: Primary SEC: Secondary
IN: Intake EX: Exhaust T/B: Timing Belt
PRI SEC
←T/B EX IN EX

00/10/26 13:50:33 61S5N000_060_0032
Cylinder Head
Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal

Identify the valves and valve springs as they are 3. Install the valve guide seal remover.
removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
1. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic

mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen
the valve keepers.
B
4. Remove the valve seal.
2. Install the spring compressor. Compress the spring

and remove the valve keepers.

00/10/26 13:50:34 61S5N000_060_0033
Valve Inspection Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

Inspection
Measure the valve in these areas.
Intake Valve Dimensions 1. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10mm, then
A Standard (New): 29.85−30.15 mm measure the guide-to-stem clearance with a dial
(1.175−1.187 in.) indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of
B Standard (New): 118.27−118.87 mm normal thrust (wobble method).
(4.656−4.680 in.) • If the measurement exceeds the service limit,
C Standard (New): 5.480−5.490 mm recheck it using a new valve.
(0.2157−0.2161 in.) • If the measurement is now within the service
C Service Limit: 5.45 mm (0.215 in.) limit, reassemble using a new valve.
• If the measurement with a new valve still
Exhaust Valve Dimensions exceeds the service limit, go to step 2.
A Standard (New): 25.85−26.15 mm
(1.018−1.030 in.) Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance:
B Standard (New): 115.65−116.25 mm Standard (New): 0.04−0.10 mm
(4.553−4.577 in.) (0.002−0.004 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.450−5.460 mm Service Limit: 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
(0.2146−0.2150 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.42 mm (0.213 in.) Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance:
(0.004−0.006 in.)
B
2. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with

a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide,
measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge.
Take the measurements in 3 places along the valve
stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance:

(0.0008−0.0020 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance:

(0.0020−0.0031 in.)

00/10/26 13:50:34 61S5N000_060_0034
Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement

Special Tools Required 4. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and
• Valve guide driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100 an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm (0.1
• Valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7010B in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will
knock off some of the carbon and make removal
1. As illustrated below, use a commercially available easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line with the
air-impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the valve guide to prevent damaging the driver.
diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the
same procedure can be done using the special tool 5. Turn the head over and drive the guide out toward
and a conventional hammer. the camshaft side of the head.
A 5.3 mm
(0.21 in.)
87 mm 57 mm
(3.43 in.) (2.24 in.)
10.8 mm
(0.42 in.)
2. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill

them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for
about an hour.
3. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder

head to 300°F (150°C). Monitor the temperature
with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300°F (150°C); excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
6. If a valve guide won’t move, drill it out with a 8 mm

(5/16 inch) bit, then try again. Drill guides only in
extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder
head if the guide breaks.
7. Remove the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a

time, as you need them.

00/10/26 13:50:35 61S5N000_060_0035
8. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside 9. Coat both reamer and valve guide with cutting oil.
of the new valve guide. Install the guide from the
camshaft side of the head; use the special tool to 10. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the
drive the guide in to the specified installed height valve guide bore.
(A) of the guide (B). If you have all 16 guides to do,
you may have to reheat the head. 07HAH-PJ7010B
Valve Guide Installed Height:

Intake: 17.85−18.35 mm (0.703−0.722 in.)
Exhaust: 18.65−19.15 mm (0.734−0.754 in.)
07742-0010100
11. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while

removing it from the bore.
12. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water

to remove any cutting residue.
13. Check the clearance with a valve (see page 6-33).

Verify that the valve slides in the intake and
exhaust valve guides without exerting pressure.
B
A

00/10/26 13:50:35 61S5N000_060_0036
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning

If the valve guides are worn (see page 6-33), replace 2. After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve
them (see page 6-34) before cutting the valve seats. seating: Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
1. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
valve seat cutter. seat several times.
–1 Carefully cut a 45° seat, removing only enough

material to ensure a smooth and concentric
seat.
–2 Bevel the upper edge of the seat with the 30° B
cutter and the lower edge of the seat with the
67.5° cutter (intake) or 60° cutter (exhaust).
Check the width of the seat and adjust
accordingly.
–3 Make one more very light pass with the 45°
cutter to remove any possible burrs caused by A
the other cutters.
Valve Seat Width:

Intake:
Standard (New): 0.85−1.15 mm 3. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by
(0.033−0.045 in.) the blue compound, should be centered on the seat.
Exhaust: • If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you
Standard (New): 1.25−1.55 mm must make a second cut with the 67.5° cutter
(0.049−0.061 in.) (intake) or 60° cutter (exhaust) to move it down,
Service Limit: 2.00 mm (0.079 in.) then one more cut with the 45° cutter to restore
seat width.
• If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut with the 30° cutter to move it
up, then one more cut with the 45° cutter to
restore seat width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made with

the 45° cutter.
30°
45°
67.5° (intake side)

60° (exhaust side)

00/10/26 13:50:35 61S5N000_060_0037
4. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head and

measure the valve stem installed height (A).
Valve Stem Installed Height:

(2.093−2.112 in.)
5. If the valve stem installed height is over the service

limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over
the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the
valve seat in the head is too deep.

00/10/26 13:50:36 61S5N000_060_0038
Cylinder Head
Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Installation

1. Coat the valve stems with engine oil. Install the 5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the
valves in the valve guides. end of the valve spring with closely wound coils
toward the cylinder head.
2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly.
6. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head. spring and install the valve keepers.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide
seal installer (B).
NOTE: Exhaust valve seal (C) has a black spring (D),

and intake valve seal (E) has a white spring (F).
They are not interchangeable.
F D
7. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem 2 or 3 times

E C
with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper seating of
the valve and valve keepers. Tap the valve stem
only along its axis so you do not bend the stem.
A
B

00/10/26 13:50:37 61S5N000_060_0039
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation

NOTE: To prevent the rocker arm assembly from 6. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely
coming apart, leave the camshaft holder bolts in the install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are
holes. properly positioned on the valve stems.
1. After wiping down the camshaft and the journals in 7. Tighten each bolt 2 turns at a time, in the sequence
the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and shown below to ensure that the rockers do not bind
install the camshaft. on the valves.
2. Clean and install the oil control orifice (A) with a Specified torque:
new O-ring (B). 8 mm bolts: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft)
A 6 mm bolts: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
B
6 mm bolts: , , ,
3. Turn the camshaft until its keyway (C) is facing up

(No.1 piston TDC).
4. Loosen all the valve adjusting screws.
5. Apply liquid gasket to the head mating surface

(shaded areas) of the No. 1 and No. 5 camshaft
holders.
No. 5 No. 1
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:50:37 61S5N000_060_0040
Cylinder Head
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft Cylinder Head Installation

Seal, and Pulley Installation (cont’d)
Install the cylinder head in the reverse order of
removal:
8. Align the marks (A) on the new cylinder head plug
(B) with the top edge of the head, then install the 1. Clean the cylinder head and block surface.
cylinder head plug in the cylinder head.
2. Install the cylinder head gasket (A) and dowel pins
B
(B) on the cylinder block. Always use a new
cylinder head gasket.
B
A
9. Install the back cover (A), then install the camshaft

pulley (B).
6 x 1.0 mm B
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)

on the oil pump.
B
8 x 1.25 mm
37 N·m
A Apply engine oil to
the bolt threads.

00/10/26 13:50:38 61S5N000_060_0041
4. Clean the camshaft pulley and set it to TDC. 6. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and under the
bolt heads of all the cylinder head bolts.
–1 The ‘‘UP’’ mark (A) on the camshaft pulley
should be at the top. 7. Tighten the cylinder head bolts sequentially in 3
–2 Align the TDC marks (B) on the camshaft pulley steps.
1st step torque: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft)
2nd step torque: 49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)
A
3rd step torque: 67 N·m (6.8 kgf·m, 49 lbf·ft)
Use a beam-type torque wrench. When using a

preset-type torque wrench, be sure to tighten
slowly and do not overtighten. If a bolt makes any
noise while you are torquing it, loosen the bolt and
retighten it from the 1st step.
CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS TORQUE SEQUENCE:
5. Install the cylinder head on the block.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:50:39 61S5N000_060_0042
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont’d)

8. Install the timing belt (see page 6-15). 13. Install the new exhaust manifold gasket (A) and
exhaust manifold (B). Loosely install the new nuts,
9. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-9). then install the cover (C) and loosely install the new
bolts.
10. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-45).
8 x 1.25 mm C
11. Install the intake manifold (A) and tighten the bolts/ 31 N·m
nuts in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps, (3.2 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft) A
beginning with the inner nut. Always use a new B
intake manifold gasket (B).
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) B
A D
8 x 1.25 mm
24 N·m 8 x 1.25 mm
(2.4 kgf·m, 31 N·m
17 lbf·ft) (3.2 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m 8 x 1.25 mm
(2.2 kgf·m, 14. Tighten the bolts/nuts in a crisscross pattern in 2 or
22 N·m
16 lbf·ft) (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) 3 steps.
15. Install the exhaust pipe with a new gasket (D).

6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
12. Tighten the three nuts securing the intake manifold

and brackets.

00/10/26 13:50:40 61S5N000_060_0043
16. Install the A/C hose bracket (A) and P/S hose 22. Install the ground cable (A), upper radiator hose (B),
bracket (B). lower radiator hose (C), heater hose (D) and water
bypass hose (E).
6 x 1.0 mm 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m 18 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
E
A B
B
17. Loosely install the alternator. D
C
the alternator-compressor belt tension (see page 4- 23. Install the EVAP canister hose.
32).
19. Loosely install the P/S pump belt and pump.
21. Install the connecting pipe (A) with a new O-ring (B).
B
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:50:40 61S5N000_060_0044
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont’d)

24. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and PCV 26. Install the intake resonator.
hose (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
A 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
25. Install the air cleaner housing (A), then connect the
IAT sensor connector (B) and breather hose. 27. Install the cruise control cable, then adjust the
cable (see page 4-44).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m 28. Install the throttle cable, then adjust the cable (see
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) page 11-148).
A
29. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and
connectors are installed correctly.

31. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn ON (II) the ignition

switch (do not operate the starter) so that the fuel
pump runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the
fuel line. Repeat this operation 2 or 3 times, then
B check for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.
32. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed

air from the cooling system with the heater valve
open (see page 10-8).

00/10/26 13:50:41 61S5N000_060_0045
Cylinder Head Cover Installation

1. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the 5. Hold the head cover gasket in the groove by
groove. placing your fingers on the camshaft holder
contacting surfaces (top of the semicircles). Set the
2. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of spark plug seal (A) on the spark plug tubes. Once
the cylinder head cover (B). Seat the head cover the cylinder head cover (B) is on the cylinder head,
gasket in the recesses for the camshaft first, then slide the cover slightly back and forth to seat the
work it into the groove around the outside edges. head cover gasket.
Make sure the head cover gasket is seated securely
6 x 1.0 mm
in the corners of the recesses (C) with no gap. 9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
C A
B
C
3. Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry.
4. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-

0003, to the head cover gasket at the four corners 6. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer
of the recesses (A). that is damaged or deteriorated.
NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more

have elapsed since applying liquid gasket. Instead,
reapply liquid gasket after removing old residue.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:50:41 61S5N000_060_0046
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Cover Installation (cont’d)

7. Tighten the bolts in 2 or 3 steps. In the final step, 9. Install the ignition coils (see page 4-20).
tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft). 10. Check that all tubes, hoses and connectors are
installed correctly.
11. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before

filling the engine with oil.
8. Install the harness holder (A) and throttle cable

clamps (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)

00/10/26 13:50:42 61S5N000_060_0047
TDC Sensor Replacement CKP Sensor Replacement

1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover, 1. Remove the grommet (A) from the upper cover,
and disconnect the TDC sensor connector (B). and disconnect the TDC sensor connector (B).
C C 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m B A
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) A B
D
2. Remove the upper cover (C).
3. Remove the TDC sensor from the cylinder head. 6 x 1.0 mm

9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
2. Remove the upper cover (C) and lower cover (D).
3. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector, then remove

the CKP sensor from the oil pump.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
4. Install the TDC sensor in reverse order of removal.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
4. Install the CKP sensor in reverse order of removal.

00/10/26 13:52:03 61S5N000_070_0001
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Special Tools ................................................................. 7-2
Component Location Index ......................................... 7-3
Flywheel Removal and Installation ............................. 7-5
Drive Plate Removal and Installation .......................... 7-5
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play
Inspection .................................................................. 7-6
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-7
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-9
Crankshaft and Piston Removal .................................. 7-11
Crankshaft Inspection .................................................. 7-13
Block and Piston Inspection ........................................ 7-14
Cylinder Honing ............................................................ 7-16
Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement .......... 7-17
Piston Ring Replacement ............................................. 7-20
Piston Installation ......................................................... 7-22
Crankshaft Installation ................................................. 7-23
Oil Pan Installation ....................................................... 7-25
Pulley End Crankshaft Seal Installation-In-car ........... 7-26
Transmission End Crankshaft Seal
Installation-In-car ...................................................... 7-26
Knock Sensor Replacement ........................................ 7-27
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 13:52:03 61S5N000_070_0002
Engine Block
Special Tools
07LBA-PV00100 Ring Gear Holder 1
07746-0030100 Inner Driver Handle 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
07948-SB00101 Driver Attachment, 96 mm 1
07973-PE00200 Pilot Collar 1
07973-PE00310 Piston Pin Driver Shaft 1
07973-PE00320 Piston Pin Driver Head 1
07973-PE00400 Piston Pin Base Insert 1
07973-SB00100 Piston Base Head 1
07973-6570500 Piston Base 1
07973-6570600 Piston Base Spring 1
7-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:52:07 61S5N000_070_0003
DRAIN BOLT OIL PAN

WASHER Installation for Aluminum Oil Pan Type,
page 7-25
DRIVER PLATE (A/T)
FLYWHEEL (M/T)
MAIN BEARING CAP

BRIDGE
OIL SCREEN
GASKET
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL,

TRANSMISSION END
and page 7-26
MAIN BEARINGS
Oil clearance, page 7-7 ENGINE BLOCK
Selection, page 7-7 END COVER
DOWEL PIN
KNOCK SENSOR
Replacement, THRUST WASHERS
page 7-27
CRANKSHAFT
End play, page 7-6
Runout, page 7-13
O-RING Out-of-Round, page 7-13
Removal, page 7-11
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL, DOWEL PIN Installation, page 7-23
PULLEY END
Installation, page 7-26 OIL PUMP
and page 8-8 Overhaul, page 8-8
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 7-3

00/10/26 13:52:10 61S5N000_070_0004
Engine Block
PISTON RINGS
PISTON
Removal, page 7-11
Measurement, page 7-14
PISTON PIN
Removal, page 7-17
CONNECTING ROD
End play, page 7-6
Small end measurement, page 7-18
ENGINE BLOCK
Cylinder bore inspection, page 7-14
Warpage inspection, page 7-14
Cylinder bore honing, page 7-16
CONNECTING ROD Ridge removal, page 7-11
BEARINGS
Oil Clearance, page 7-9 CONNECTING ROD
Selection, page 7-9 BEARING CAP
7-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:52:11 61S5N000_070_0005
Flywheel Removal and Installation Drive Plate Removal and

Installation
Ring Gear Holder 07LAB-PV00100 Remove the six drive plate bolts, then separate the
drive plate from the crankshaft flange. After installation,
Remove the six flywheel bolts, then separate the tighten the bolts in a crisscross pattern.
flywheel from the crankshaft flange. After installation,
tighten the bolts in a crisscross pattern.
07LAB-PV00100
Inspect ring gear

teeth for wear
or damage.
12 x 1.0 mm
118 N·m
(12.0 kgf·m, 87 lbf·ft)
12 x 1.0 mm
74 N·m
07LAB-PV00100
-DYNOMITE 2009- 7-5

00/10/26 13:52:11 61S5N000_070_0006
Engine Block
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection

1. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler 4. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial
gauge between the connecting rod and crankshaft. indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back
Connecting Rod End Play: toward the indicator; the dial reading should not
Standard (New): 0.15−0.30 mm exceed the service limit.
(0.006−0.012 in.)
Service Limit: 0.40 mm (0.016 in.) Crankshaft End Play:
(0.004−0.014 in.)
2. If the connecting rod end play is out-of-tolerance,

install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it is
still out-of-tolerance; replace the crankshaft (see
page 7-11). 5. If the end play is excessive, inspect the thrust
washers and thrust surface on the crankshaft.
3. Mount a dial indicator on the block so that it’s tip Replace parts as necessary. Thrust washer
contacts the end of the crankshaft. thickness is fixed and must not be changed either
by grinding or shimming.
7-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:52:11 61S5N000_070_0007
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement

Main Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
(remove the engine if it’s still in the car), remove
1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance, the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the
remove the main caps and bearing halves. bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the
same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to
clean shop towel. adjust clearance.
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main 7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
journal. incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
color listed above or below that one), and check
NOTE: If the engine is still in the car when you bolt again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained
the main cap down to check the clearance, the by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings,
weight of the crankshaft and drive plate will flatten replace the crankshaft and start over.
the plastigage further than just the torque on the
cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an
accurate reading, support the crank with a jack
under the counterweights, and check only one
bearing at a time.
4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the

bolts to 51 N·m (5.2 kgf·m, 38 lbf·ft). Do not rotate
the crankshaft.
5. Remove the cap and bearing half, and measure the

widest part of the plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance:

Standard (New):
No.1, 5: 0.018−0.036mm
(0.0007−0.0014 in.)
No.2, 3, 4: 0.024−0.042mm
(0.0009−0.0017 in.)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 7-7

00/10/26 13:52:12 61S5N000_070_0008
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement (cont’d)

Main Bearing Selection
Crank Larger crank bore
bore
Crankshaft Bore Code Location code A B C D
Main
Journal
Letters have been stamped on the end of the block as a code Smaller bearing (Thicker)
code for the size of each of the five main journal bores.
1 Red Pink Yellow Green
Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft
(codes for main journal size), to choose the correct 2 Pink Yellow Green Brown
bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a 3 Yellow Green Brown Black
wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or
detergent. 4 Green Brown Black Blue
Smaller Smaller
main bearing
journal (Thicker)
No. 1 BORE
(PULLEY END) Main Journal Code Locations (Numbers)
No. 5 BORE
(DRIVE PLATE END)
7-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:52:12 61S5N000_070_0009
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement

Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new,
1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half. complete bearing with the same color code, and
recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape
2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
with a clean shop towel.
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
3. Place a strip of plastigage across the rod journal. incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
color listed above or below that one), and check
4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be
bolts to 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft). Do not rotate obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
the crankshaft. bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over.
5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half and measure

the widest part of the plastigage.
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance:

(0.0009−0.0017 in.)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 7-9

00/10/26 13:52:12 61S5N000_070_0010
Engine Block
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement (cont’d)

Rod Bearing Selection
Big end Larger big rod bore
bore
Each rod falls into one of four tolerance ranges (from 0 code 1 2 3 4
to 0.024 mm (0.0009 in.), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 in.) Rod
Journal
increments) depending on the size of its big end bore. code Smaller bearing (Thicker)
It’s then stamped with a number (1,2,3, or 4), indicating
the range. A Red Pink Yellow Green
You may find any combination of 1, 2, 3, or 4 in any
engine. B Pink Yellow Green Brown
Normal Bore Size: 48.0 mm (1.89 in.) C Yellow Green Brown Black
Inspect the connecting rod for cracks and heat damage. D Green Brown Black Blue
Smaller Smaller
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations rod bearing
Numbers have been stamped on the side of each journal (Thicker)
connecting rod as a code for the size of the big end. Use
them, and the letters stamped on the crank (codes for
rod journal size), to choose the correct bearings. If the Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations
codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation (Letters)
of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or
scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent.
Half of number is stamped

on bearing cap and the other
half is stamped on rod.

00/10/26 13:52:13 61S5N000_070_0011
Crankshaft and Piston Removal

1. Remove the oil pan. 4. Remove the bearing cap bolts. To prevent warpage,
unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time;
2. Remove the engine block end cover. repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened.
BEARING CAP BOLTS LOOSENING SEQUENCE:
3. Remove the oil screen (A), then remove the oil

pump (B).
5. Remove the bearing cap bridge/bearings. Keep all
bearings in order.
6. Turn the crankshaft so No. 2 and No. 3 crankpins

A are at the top.
7. Remove the rod caps/bearings. Keep all caps/

bearings in order.
8. Lift the crankshaft out of the engine, being careful

not to damage the journals.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:52:14 61S5N000_070_0012
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal (cont’d)

9. Remove the upper bearing halves from the 14. To avoid mixup on reassembly, mark each piston/
connecting rods, and set them aside with their connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number.
respective caps.
NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod
10. Reinstall the bearing cap bridge and bearings on does not indicate its position in the engine, it
the engine in the proper order. indicates the rod size.
11. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon

around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a
ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer’s
instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may
damage the pistons as they are pushed out.
12. Use the wooden handle of a hammer (A) to drive

out the pistons (B).
B A
13. Reinstall the connecting rod bearing and caps after

removing each piston/connecting rod assembly.

00/10/26 13:52:14 61S5N000_070_0013
Crankshaft Inspection
Straightness Out-of-Round and Taper
NOTE: 1. Measure out-of-round at the middle of each rod
• Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe cleaners and main journal in two places. The difference
or a suitable brush. between measurements on each journal must not
• Check the keyway and threads. be more than the service limit.
1. Support the crankshaft with a lathe-type tool or V- Journal Out-of-Round:

blocks. Standard (New): 0.0025 mm (0.0001 in.) max.
2. Measure runout on all main journals to make sure
the crank is not bent. Rotate the crankshaft two
complete revolutions. The difference between
measurements on each journal must not be more
than the service limit.
Crankshaft Total Indicator Runout:

2. Measure taper at the edge of each rod and main

journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service
limit.
Journal Taper:

00/10/26 13:52:15 61S5N000_070_0014
Engine Block
Block and Piston Inspection

1. Check the piston for distortion or cracks. 3. Measure wear and taper in direction X and Y at 3
levels in each cylinder as shown. If measurements
2. Measure the piston diameter at a point 13 mm (0.5 in any cylinder are beyond the Oversize Bore
in.) from the bottom of the skirt. Service Limit, replace the block. If the block is to be
rebored, refer to step 6 after reboring.
Piston Diameter:
Standard (New): 74.98−74.99 mm Cylinder Bore Size:
(2.9520−2.9524 in.) Standard (New): 75.00−75.02 mm
Service Limit: 74.97 mm (2.9516 in.) (2.9528−2.9535 in.)
Oversize:
0.25: 75.23−75.24 mm (2.9618−2.9622 in.) Oversize:
0.50: 75.48−75.49 mm (2.9716−2.9720 in.) 0.25: 75.25−75.27 mm (2.9626−2.9634 in.)
0.50: 75.50−75.52 mm (2.9724−2.9732 in.)
SKIRT Reboring limit: 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) max.

13 mm (0.5 in.) DIAMETER
Bore Taper:
Limit: (Difference between first and third
measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
6 mm (0.2 in.)
First
Measurement
Second
Measurement
Third
Measurement
6 mm (0.2 in.)

00/10/26 13:52:15 61S5N000_070_0015
4. Scored or scratched cylinder bores must be honed. 6. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore
diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance
5. Check the top of the block for warpage. Measure is near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the
along the edges and across the center as shown. piston and cylinder block for excessive wear.
Engine Block Warpage: Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance:

Standard (New): 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. Standard (New): 0.010−0.040 mm
Service Limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 in.) (0.0004−0.0016 in.)
PISTON-TO-CYLINDER
CLEARANCE
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE

00/10/26 13:52:15 61S5N000_070_0016
Engine Block
Cylinder Honing
Only a scored or scratched cylinder bore must be honed.
1. Measure the cylinder bores (see page 7-14).

If the block is to be reused, hone the cylinders and
remeasure the bores.
2. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and a fine

(400 grit) stone in a 60 degree cross-hatch pattern
(A). Use only a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer
stone such as Sunnen, Ammco, or equivalent. Do
not use stones that are worn or broken.
60°
3. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the

engine block of all metal particles. Wash the
cylinder bores with hot soapy water, then dry and
oil them immediately to prevent rusting. Never use
solvent, it will only redistribute the grit on the
cylinder walls.
4. If scoring or scratches are still present in the

cylinder bores after honing to the service limit,
rebore the cylinder block. Some light vertical
scoring and scratching is acceptable if it is not deep
enough to catch your fingernail and does not run
the full length of the bore.

00/10/26 13:52:16 61S5N000_070_0017
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. With the embossed mark facing up, place the
• Piston Base 07973-6570500 piston assembly (A) on the special tool (B). Be sure
• Piston Base Spring 07973-6570600 you position the recessed flat on the piston against
• Piston Pin Base Insert 07973-PE00400 the lugs on the base attachment.
• Piston Base Head 07973-SB00100
• Pilot Collar 07973-PE00200
• Piston Pin Driver Shaft 07973-PE00310 D
• Piston Pin Driver Head 07973-PE00320
Disassembly
1. Assemble the special tool as shown.
E
07973-PE00200
07973-SB00100 07973-PE00400
07973-6570500
07973-6570600
4. Press the pin (C) out with the pin driver (D), pilot
collar (E) and a hydraulic press.
2. Assemble and adjust the length of the piston pin
driver head and shaft to 53 mm (2.1 in.).
53 mm (2.1 in.)
07973-PE00320 07973-PE00310
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:52:16 61S5N000_070_0018
Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont’d)

Inspection 3. Measure the piston pin-to-piston clearance.
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance:

Piston Pin Diameter: (0.0004−0.0008 in.)
(0.7479−0.7480 in.)
4. Check the difference between the piston pin

diameter and connecting rod small end diameter.
2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Interference:
(0.0006−0.0014 in.)

00/10/26 13:52:16 61S5N000_070_0019
Reassembly 2. Insert the pilot collar (A) into the piston and
connecting rod.
1. Assemble the piston and connecting rod with the
connecting rod oil hole (A) facing the ‘‘IN’’ mark (B).
B E
A A
07973-PE00200
3. With the embossed mark facing up, place the

piston assembly (B) on the special tool (C). Be sure
you position the recessed flat on the piston against
the lugs on the base attachment.
4. Press the pin (D) in with the pin driver (E) and a
hydraulic press.

00/10/26 13:52:16 61S5N000_070_0020
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement

1. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston 3. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the
rings (B). cylinder bore 15−20 mm (0.6−0.8 in.) from the
B bottom.
A
A
15−20 mm
(0.6−0.8 in.)
2. Clean all ring grooves thoroughly with a squared-

off broken ring or ring groove cleaner with a blade 4. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler
to fit the piston grooves. gauge:
The top ring groove is 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) wide. The • If the gap is too small, check to see if you have
second ring groove is 1.2 mm (0.05 in.) wide. The the proper rings for your engine.
oil ring groove is 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) wide. • If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
File down a blade if necessary. diameter against the wear limits (see page 7-14).
Do not use a wire brush to clean the ring grooves, If the bore is over the service limit, the cylinder
or cut the ring grooves deeper with cleaning tools. block must be rebored.
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the Piston Ring End-Gap:

connecting rod, do not install new rings yet. Top Ring
(0.006−0.012 in.)
Second Ring
(0.012−0.018 in.)
Oil Ring
(0.008−0.028 in.)

00/10/26 13:52:17 61S5N000_070_0021
5. Install the top ring (A) has a IA mark and second 6. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they
ring (B) has a R mark. The manufacturing marks (C) do not bind.
must be facing upward.
7. Position the ring end gaps as shown:
A
DO NOT position any ring gap
SECOND RING GAP at piston thrust surfaces.
B
Approx. 90°
OIL RING
Approx. 15° GAP
90° 15°
C TOP RING GAP SPACER GAP
A DO NOT position any ring gap OIL RING GAP

in line with the piston pin hole.
C 8. After installing a new set of rings, measure the

B
ring-to-groove clearances:
Top Ring Clearance

(0.0014−0.0024 in.)
Second Ring Clearance

(0.0012−0.0022 in.)
Piston Ring Dimensions:
Top Ring (Standard):

B A: 2.6 mm (0.10 in.)
B: 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Second Ring (Standard):
A: 3.0 mm (0.12 in.)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
A

00/10/26 13:52:17 61S5N000_070_0022
Engine Block
Piston Installation
If the crankshaft is already installed If the crankshaft is not installed
1. Set the crankshaft to BDC for each cylinder. 1. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the
ring compressor, and check that the bearing is
2. Remove the connecting rod caps, and slip short securely in place.
sections of rubber hose (A) over the connecting rod
bolts. Then install the ring compressor, and check 2. Position the arrow (A) facing the timing belt side of
that the bearing is securely in place. the engine.
B A
3. Position the arrow (B) facing the timing belt side of

the engine.
4. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in

using the wooden handle of a hammer (A). 3. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in
Maintain downward force on the ring compressor using the wooden handle of a hammer (A).
(B) to prevent the rings from expanding before Maintain downward force on the ring compressor
entering the cylinder bore. (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before
entering the cylinder bore.
A
A
B
B
5. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and

check the connecting rod-to-crank journal 4. Position all pistons at top dead center.
alignment before pushing the piston into place.
6. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with

plastigage (see page 7-9).
7. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads, then install the

rod caps with bearings. Torque the nuts to 32 N·m
(3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft).

00/10/26 13:52:18 61S5N000_070_0023
Crankshaft Installation
Special Tools Required 10. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage
• Driver 07749-0010000 (see page 7-7).
• Driver Attachment, 96 mm 07948-SB00101
11. Install the bearing cap bridge. Coat the bolt threads
1. Apply engine oil to the main bearings and rod with engine oil.
bearings.
12. Torque the cylinder head bolts sequentially in 2
2. Install the bearing halves in the cylinder block and steps.
connecting rods.
1st step torque: 25 N·m (2.5 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)
3. Hold the crankshaft so rod journal No. 2 and rod 2nd step torque: 51 N·m (5.2 kgf·m, 38 lbf·ft)
journal No. 3 are straight up, and lower the
crankshaft into the block. NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod
bearing is replaced, it is necessary after
4. Install the thrust washers (A) on both edges of the reassembly to run the engine at idling speed until it
No. 4 main bearing recess. reaches normal operating temperature, then
continue to run it for approximately 15 minutes.
BEARING CAP BOLTS TIGHTENING SEQUENCE:
5. Apply engine oil to the threads of the connecting

rod bolts.
6. Seat the rod journals into connecting rod No. 1 and

connecting rod No. 4. Install the caps and nuts
finger tight. Install the cap so the bearing recess is
on the same side as the recess in the rod.
7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, and seat the

journals into connecting rod No. 2 and connecting
rod No. 3. Install the connecting rod cap and bolts
finger tight.
8. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with

plastigage (see page 7-9).
9. Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·

m, 24 lbf·ft).
(cont’d)

00/10/26 13:52:18 61S5N000_070_0024
Engine Block
Crankshaft Installation (cont’d)

13. The seal mating surface on the engine block end 16. Clean and dry the engine block end cover mating
cover should be dry. Apply a light coat of grease to surfaces.
the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal.
14. Drive the crankshaft oil seal squarely into the 0003, evenly to the block mating surface of the
engine block end cover. engine block end cover and to the inner threads of
the bolt holes. Install the dowel pins (A), and the
engine block end cover (B) on the cylinder block.
NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more

07749-0010000 have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket.
Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing the
old residue.
07948-SB00101
A
15. Confirm that the clearance is equal all the way

around with a feeler gauge.
Clearance: 0.5−0.8 mm (0.02−0.03 in.)
6 x 1.0 mm
A 9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)

0.5−0.8 mm
(0.02−0.03 in.) filling the engine with oil.

00/10/26 13:52:19 61S5N000_070_0025
Oil Pan Installation

19. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces. 1. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces and bolt
holes.
20. Install the oil pump (A).
–1 Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil pump 0003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of the
(see step 12 on page 8-10). block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
–2 Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface NOTE:
of the oil pump and to the inner threads of the • Apply liquid gasket 4 mm wide.
bolt holes. • Apply liquid gasket doubly to the jointing point of
–3 Grease the lip of the oil seal and apply oil to the liquid gasket.
the new O-ring (B).
–4 Install the dowel pins (C), then align the inner
rotor with the crankshaft and install the oil
pump.
–5 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft and
check the seal for distortion.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
D Apply liquid gasket

along the broken line.
E
3. Install the oil pan.
4. Tighten the bolts in 2 or 3 steps. In the final step,

tighten all bolts, in sequence to 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft).
B
6 x 1.0 mm C
9.8 N·m A
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
21. Install the oil screen (D) with a new gasket (E).
22. Install the oil pan (see page 7-25).

filling the engine with oil.

00/10/26 13:52:19 61S5N000_070_0026
Engine Block
Pulley End Crankshaft Seal Transmission End Crankshaft Seal

Installation - In-car Installation - In-car
Special Tools Required Special Tools Required
Inner driver handle 07746-0030100 • Driver 07749-0010000
• Driver attachment, 96 mm 07948-SB00101
1. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
1. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
2. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to
the lip of the seal. 2. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to
the lip of the seal.
3. Using the seal driver, drive in the crankshaft oil seal
until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When 3. Using the special tools, drive in the crankshaft oil
the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the seal until the driver bottoms against the engine
crankshaft and check that the oil seal lip is not block end cover. When the seal is in place, clean
distorted. any excess grease off the crankshaft and check that
the oil seal lip is not distorted.
07746-0030100
07749-0010000
07948-SB00101

00/10/26 13:52:20 61S5N000_070_0027
Knock Sensor Replacement

1. Disconnect the knock sensor connector, then
remove the knock sensor.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
2. Install the knock sensor.

00/10/26 13:54:27 61S5N000_080_0001
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools ................................................................. 8-2
Oil Pressure Switch Test .............................................. 8-4
Oil Pressure Test ........................................................... 8-4
Engine Oil Replacement .............................................. 8-5
Engine Oil Filter Replacement ..................................... 8-6
Oil Pump Overhaul ....................................................... 8-8
Oil/Air Separator Installation ....................................... 8-11
Oil Pressure Switch Replacement ............................... 8-11
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 13:54:27 61S5N000_080_0002
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Number Tool Number Description Qty
07HAA-PJ70100 Oil Filter Wrench 1
07746-0010400 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
07912-6110001 Oil Filter Wrench 1
8-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:54:29 61S5N000_080_0003
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

Circuit Diagram,
page 22-56
O-RING Switch Test,
page 8-4
Oil Pressure test,
page 8-4
DOWEL PIN
OIL FILTER
OIL PUMP
Overhaul,
page 8-8 OIL/AIR SEPARATOR
GASKET
BREATHING
PORT COVER
OIL SCREEN
WASHER
BAFFLE PLATE DRAIN BOLT
OIL PAN
-DYNOMITE 2009- 8-3

00/10/26 13:54:30 61S5N000_080_0004
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pressure Switch Test Oil Pressure Test

1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) from the engine oil If the oil pressure warning light stays on with the
pressure switch (B). engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil
level is correct:
B C A
1. Connect a tachometer.
2. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, and install

an oil pressure gauge (A).
2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal 3. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the
(C) and the engine (ground). There should be gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem
continuity with the engine stopped. There should before continuing.
be no continuity with the engine running.
4. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature
3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should
level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine be:
oil pressure. If the oil pressure is OK, replace the oil
pressure switch. Engine Oil Temperature: 176°F (80°C)
Engine Oil Pressure:
At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi)
minimum
At 3,000 rpm: 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi)
minimum
5. If oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect

the oil pump (see step 7 on page 8-9).
8-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:54:30 61S5N000_080_0005
Engine Oil Replacement

NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be
replaced at every other oil change. Under severe
conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil
change.
Change interval
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
(Normal conditions)
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
(Severe conditions).
1. Warm up the engine.
2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
B A
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m,
29 lbf·ft)
Do not overtighten.
3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).
4. Refill with the recommended oil (see page 3-2).
Capacity
3.3 (3.5 US qt, 2.9 lmp qt) at oil change.
3.5 (3.7 US qt, 3.1 lmp qt) at oil change
including filter.
4.2 (4.4 US qt, 3.7 lmp qt) after engine overhaul.
5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check

for oil leakage.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 8-5

00/10/26 13:54:31 61S5N000_080_0006
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Filter Replacement

Special Tools Required 5. If 4 numbers or marks (1 to 4 or ▼ to ▼▼▼▼) are
• Oil filter wrench 07HAA-PJ70100 printed around the outside of the filter, use the
• Oil filter wrench 07912-6110001 following procedure to tighten the filter.
Engine Oil Filter Replacement • Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against
(oil filter type A) the block, and note which number or mark is at
the bottom.
1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter • Tighten the filter by turing it clockwise 3 numbers
wrench. or marks from the one you noted. For example, if
number 2 is at the bottom when the seal is seated,
2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the tighten the filter until the number 1 comes
new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block, around the bottom.
then apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal.
Use only filters with a built-in bypass system.
Number when rubber Number after tightening.

seal is seated.
A
Number or 1 2 3 4
3. Install the oil filter by hand. Mark when or or or or
rubber seal is ▼ ▼▼ ▼▼▼ ▼▼▼▼
4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter seated
clockwise with the special tool.
Number or 4 1 2 3
Tighten: 3/4 turn clockwise. Mark after or or or or
Tightening torque: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) tightening ▼▼▼▼ ▼ ▼▼ ▼▼▼
6. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the

specified level, run the engine for more than 3
minutes, then check for oil leakage.
07HAA-PJ70100
8-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:54:31 61S5N000_080_0007
Engine Oil Filter Replacement 5. If 8 numbers (1 to 8) are printed around the outside
(oil filter type B) of the filter, use the following procedure to tighten
the filter.
1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter
wrench. • Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against
the block, and note which number is at the
2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the bottom.
new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block, • Tighten the filter by turing it clockwise 7 numbers
then apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal. from the one you noted. For example, if number
Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 2 is at the bottom when the seal is seated, tighten
the filter until the number 1 comes around the
bottom.
Number when rubber Number after tightening.

3. Install the oil filter by hand. seal is seated.
4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter

clockwise with the special tool. Number when 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
rubber seal is
Tighten: 7/8 turn clockwise. seated
Tightening torque: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
Number after 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
tightening
6. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the

specified level, run the engine for more than 3
minutes, then check for oil leakage.
07912-6110001
-DYNOMITE 2009- 8-7

00/10/26 13:54:32 61S5N000_080_0008
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul

Exploded View
6 x 1.0 mm
7 N·m
PUMP COVER
INNER ROTOR
DOWEL PIN
OUTER ROTOR
O-RING
Replace.
OIL SEAL
Replace.
PUMP HOUSING
Apply liquid gasket
to mating surface of
the cylinder block
when installing.
6 x 1.0 mm RELIEF VALVE
9.8 N·m Valve must slide freely
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) in housing bore.
Replace if scored.
SPRING
SEALING BOLT
39 N·m
8-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 13:54:32 61S5N000_080_0009
Special Tools Required Inspection

• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 7. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (B). If
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance exceeds
this procedure. the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.
Removal Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance

1. Drain the engine oil. Service Limit: 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
2. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-12).

B
3. Remove the oil pan.
A
4. Remove the oil screen (A).
8. Check the housing-to-rotor axial clearance between

the rotor (A) and pump housing (B). If the housing-
to-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service limit,
replace the oil pump assembly.
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance

A Standard (New): 0.02−0.07 mm (0.001−0.003 in.)
5. Remove the mounting bolts and the oil pump

assembly (B).
6. Remove the screws from the pump housing, then

separate the housing and cover.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 8-9

00/10/26 13:54:33 61S5N000_080_0010
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont’d)

9. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance Installation
between the outer rotor (A) and pump housing (B).
If the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance 14. Reassemble the oil pump.
exceeds the service limit, replace the pump
assembly. 15. Check that the oil pump turns freely.
Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance 16. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surface.
Service Limit: 0.20 mm (0.008 in.) 17. Install the oil pump (A).
–1 Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or

08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface
A
of the oil pump and to the inner threads of the
B bolt holes.
–2 Grease the lips of the oil seal and apply oil to
the new O-ring (B).
–3 Install a dowel pins (C), then align the inner
rotor with the crankshaft and install the oil
pump.
–4 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft and
balancer shaft, and check the seal for distortion.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
10. Inspect both rotors and the pump housing for C

B
scoring or other damage. Replace parts if
necessary.
11. Remove the old oil seal from the oil pump.
12. Gently tap in the new oil seal until the special tool
bottoms on the pump. A
07749-0010000
E
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
07746-0010400 18. Install the oil screen (D) with a new gasket (E).
19. Install the oil pan (see page 7-25).

13. Apply liquid thread lock to the pump housing
screws.

00/10/26 13:54:34 61S5N000_080_0011
Oil/Air Separator Installation Oil Pressure Switch Replacement

1. Clean and dry the oil/air separator mating surfaces. 1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then
remove the oil pressure switch.
2. Apply liquid gasket, part No 08718-0001 or 08718-
0003, evenly to the block mating surface of the
oil/air separator and to the inner threads of the bolt
holes.
Apply liquid gasket

along the broken line. 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m,
13 lbf·ft)
3. Install the oil/air separator. 2. Apply liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch
threads, then install the oil pressure switch.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)

00/10/26 15:09:37 61S5N000_090_0001
Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System

Intake Manifold Removal and Installation ................. 9-2
Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation .............. 9-3
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement ..................... 9-4
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 15:09:38 61S5N000_090_0002
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation

NOTE: Use new O-rings and gasket when reassembling.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
THROTTLE 8 x 1.25 mm
BODY 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
INJECTOR BASE
STIFFENER GASKET
Replace.
O-RING
5 x 0.8 mm Replace.
4 N·m
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE 16 lbf·ft)
PRESSURE
(MAP) SENSOR
O-RING
Replace.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) INJECTOR BASE
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
O-RINGS INTAKE MANIFOLD
Replace. BRACKET
INTAKE MANIFOLD 8 x 1.25 mm
Replace if cracked or 6 x 1.0 mm 24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)
if mating surfaces are 12 N·m
damaged. (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
9-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:09:38 61S5N000_090_0003
Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation

NOTE: Use a new gasket when reassembling.
COVER
8 x 1.25 mm
31 N·m
(3.2 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft) GASKET
Replace. Replace.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
8 x 1.25 mm
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm
31 N·m (3.2 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft)
Replace.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 9-3

00/10/26 15:09:39 61S5N000_090_0004
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement

NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
8 x 1.25 mm
MUFFLER 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
Replace.
Tighten the bolts in steps,
alternating side-to-side.
HEAT SHIELD
GASKET
Replace.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 mm EXHAUST PIPE B
33 N·m (3.4 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Replace.
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
(SECONDARY HO2S)
44 N·m
GASKET
Replace.
GASKET
8 x 1.25 mm Replace. EXHAUST PIPE A/
22 N·m THREE WAY CATALYTIC
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) CONVERTER ASSEMBLY
Replace.
Tighten the bolts in steps,
alternating side-to-side.
PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

(PRIMARY HO2S)
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
9-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:10:27 61S5N000_100_0001
Engine Cooling
Cooling System
Radiator Cap Test ......................................................... 10-5
Radiator Test ................................................................. 10-5
Fan Motor Test .............................................................. 10-6
Thermostat Test ........................................................... 10-6
Water Pump Inspection ............................................... 10-7
Water Pump Replacement ........................................... 10-7
Coolant Check ............................................................... 10-8
Coolant Replacement ................................................... 10-8
Thermostat Replacement ............................................ 10-10
Radiator and Fans Replacement ................................. 10-11
ECT Sensor Replacement ............................................ 10-12
Fan Controls
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............................... 10-14
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 10-15
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting ........................ 10-16
Radiator Fan Switch Circuit Troubleshooting
(Open) ........................................................................ 10-18
Radiator Fan Switch Circuit Troubleshooting
(Short) ........................................................................ 10-18
Radiator Fan Switch Test ............................................. 10-19
Radiator Fan Switch Replacement .............................. 10-19
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 15:10:29 61S5N000_100_0002
Cooling System
UPPER RADIATOR HOSE

RADIATOR CAP
O-RING
RADIATOR
COOLANT RESERVOIR
A/C CONDENSER
FAN ASSEMBLY
Fan Motor Test, page 10-6
O-RING
DRAIN PLUG
ATF COOLER HOSES
RADIATOR FAN
Replacement, page 10-11 LOWER RADIATOR HOSE
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR RADIATOR FAN SHROUD

Test, page 10-6 Replacement, page 10-11

00/10/26 15:10:29 61S5N000_100_0003
WATER BYPASS HOSE
WATER PASSAGE
CONNECTING PIPE
HEATER VALVE
HEATER HOSES
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:10:30 61S5N000_100_0004
Cooling System
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION ENGINE COOLANT

(EGR) VALVE TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR
O-RING
GASKET
O-RING
RADIATOR
FAN
SWITCH
O-RING
WATER PASSAGE
O-RING
O-RING
WATER PUMP
CONNECTING PIPE
CONNECTING PIPE

00/10/26 15:10:31 61S5N000_100_0005
Radiator Cap Test Radiator Test

1. Remove the radiator cap (A), wet its seal with 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
engine coolant, then install it on a commercially the radiator cap and fill the radiator with engine
available pressure tester (B). coolant to the top of the filler neck.
2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A)

B to the radiator and apply a pressure of 93−123 kPa
(0.95−1.25 kgf/cm2, 14−18 psi).
A
2. Apply a pressure of 93−123 kPa (0.95−1.25

kgf/cm2, 14−18 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.
3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in

pressure.
4. Remove the tester and reinstall the radiator cap.
5. Check for engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in

the engine oil.

00/10/26 15:10:31 61S5N000_100_0006
Cooling System
Fan Motor Test Thermostat Test

1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan Replace the thermostat if it is open at room
motor and condenser fan motor. temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:

Terminal side of
male terminals 1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.
Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of
the hot container.
2. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the

B terminal and ground to the A terminal.
3. If the motor fails to run or does not run smoothly,

replace it. 2. Heat the water and check the temperature with a
thermometer. Check the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is

fully open.
STANDARD THERMOSTAT
Lift height: above 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Starts opening: 169−176°F (76−80°C)
Fully open: 194°F (90°C)

00/10/26 15:10:31 61S5N000_100_0007
Water Pump Inspection Water Pump Replacement

1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-12). 1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-12).
2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise. 2. Remove the water pump (A) by removing four bolts.
Check that it turns freely.
3. Check for signs of seal leakage. A small amount of

‘‘weeping’’ from the bleed hole (A) is normal. 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
A
3. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and mating
surface with the cylinder block.
4. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (B) in the

reverse order of removal.
5. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.

00/10/26 15:10:32 61S5N000_100_0008
Cooling System
Coolant Check Coolant Replacement

1. Look at the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. 1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control
Make sure it is between the MAX (A) and MIN mark dial to maximum heat, then turn off the ignition
(B). switch. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool
to the touch.
A then write down the frequencies for the radio’s
preset buttons.
3. Remove the battery.
4. Remove the radiator cap.
5. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.
2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or

below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it up to
the MAX mark, and inspect the cooling system for
leaks.

00/10/26 15:10:32 61S5N000_100_0010
Cooling System
Thermostat Replacement
PIN
RUBBER SEAL
Replace.
WATER PASSAGE
THERMOSTAT
Install with pin up.
THERMOSTAT COVER
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
10-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:10:33 61S5N000_100_0011
Radiator and Fans Replacement

1. Drain engine coolant.
2. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-90).
3. Remove the hood latch (see page 20-113).
4. Remove the upper and lower radiator hoses, and ATF cooler hoses.
6 x 1.0 mm
UPPER RADIATOR 9.8 N·m
HOSE RADIATOR CAP (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
UPPER BRACKET
AND CUSHION
A/C CONDENSER
FAN ASSEMBLY RADIATOR
O-RING
6 x 1.0 mm Replace.
7 N·m
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
LOWER RADIATOR
HOSE
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
6 x 1.0 mm (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
7 N·m
(0.7 kgf·m,
5 lbf·ft) DRAIN PLUG CONDENSER
BRACKET
RADIATOR FAN
ASSEMBLY
LOWER CUSHION
FAN MOTOR
CONNECTORS
ATF COOLER
HOSES
5. Disconnect the fan motor connectors and compressor clutch connector.
6. Remove the radiator upper brackets, then pull up the radiator.
7. Remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts from the radiator.
8. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the upper and lower cushions are set securely.
9. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the air.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 10-11

00/10/26 15:10:33 61S5N000_100_0012
Cooling System
ECT Sensor Replacement

1. Remove the resonator.
2. Disconnect the ECT sensor connector, then remove

the ECT sensor (A).
A
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm,
8.7 lbfft)
B
3. Install the ECT sensor using a new O-ring (B).
4. Install the resonator.
10-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:10:35 61S5N000_100_0013
Fan Controls
RADIATOR FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-51
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
RADIATOR FAN
CONDENSER FAN RELAY SWITCH
Test, page 22-51 Test, page 10-19
Replacement,
page 10-19
RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY

Motor Test, page 10-6 CONDENSER FAN ASSEMBLY
Motor Test, page 10-6
-DYNOMITE 2009- 10-13

00/10/26 15:10:35 61S5N000_100_0014
Fan Controls

Before performing any troubleshooting procedures check:
• Fuses
• Grounds
• Cleanliness and tightness of all connectors
SYMPTOM PROCEDURE
Radiator fan does not run at all. Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 10-16).
Radiator fan does not runs for engine cooling, but it Radiator Fan Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (Open)
runs with A/C on. (see page 10-18).
Radiator fan runs with ignition switch ON (II), A/C off, Radiator Fan Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (Short)
and engine temperature below 199°F (93°C). (see page 10-18).
10-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:10:37 61S5N000_100_0015
Circuit Diagram
-DYNOMITE 2009- 10-15

00/10/26 15:10:38 61S5N000_100_0016
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the No. 4 (20A) fuse in the under-hood 4. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the
fuse/relay box, and the No. 14 (10A) fuse in the radiator fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire.
driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the f use ( s) OK ? RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Replace the fuse (s) and recheck. JUMPER

WIRE
2. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-51).
Is the relay OK ?
YES−Go to step 3. Terminal side of female terminals
NO−Replace the radiator fan relay.

Does the radiator f an run?
3. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of
the radiator fan relay 4P socket and body ground. YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 6.
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
5. Disconnect the jumper, and turn the ignition switch
ON (II). Check for voltage between the No. 3
terminal of the radiator fan relay 4P socket and
body ground.
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
Terminal side of female terminals
Is there battery voltage?
YES−Go to step 4. Terminal side of female terminals
NO−Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.

YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Check for an open in the wire between the

under-hood fuse/relay box and under-dash fuse/
relay box.
10-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:10:38 61S5N000_100_0017
6. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector. 9. Reinstall the radiator fan relay.
7. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of 10. Disconnect the radiator fan switch 2P connector.
the radiator fan relay 4P socket and the No. 2 jump terminals No. 1 and No. 2 to see if fan runs.
terminal of the radiator fan motor 2P connector.
Does the radiator f an run?
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET YES−Replace the radiator fan switch.
NO−Go to step 11.

Terminal side of
female terminals 11. Remove the jumper wire, and measure the voltage
between the No. 2 terminal of the radiator fan
BLU/BLK switch connector and body ground.
Wire side of
female terminals
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
2P CONNECTOR
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
GRN
YES−Go to step 8. Wire side of

female terminals
NO−Repair open in the wire between the under-
hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan motor 2P
connector terminal No. 2.
8. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of Is there battery voltage?
the radiator fan motor 2P connector and body
ground. YES−Check for an open in the wire between
radiator fan switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and
body ground. If the wire is OK, check for a poor
RADIATOR FAN CONNECTOR
ground at G101.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the radiator

fan switch terminal No. 2 and the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
YES−Replace the radiator fan motor.
NO−Check for an open in the wire between

radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No. 1 and
ground at G201.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 10-17

00/10/26 15:10:38 61S5N000_100_0018
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan Switch Circuit Radiator Fan Switch Circuit

Troubleshooting (Open) Troubleshooting (Short)
1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch 2P connector. 1. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-51).
Is the relay OK ?
3. Measure voltage between the No. 2 terminal of the
radiator fan switch 2P connector and body ground. YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Replace the radiator fan relay.

RADIATOR FAN SWITCH 2P
CONNECTOR
2. Remove the radiator fan switch, and test it (see
page 10-19).
Is the radiator f an switch OK ?

GRN
Wire side of YES−Go to step 3.

female terminals
NO−Replace the radiator fan switch.
3. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P) and under-

hood fuse relay box 14P connector.
4. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of
YES−Go to step 4. the radiator fan switch 2P connector and body
ground.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the radiator
fan switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and under-
hood fuse/relay box. RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
2P CONNECTOR
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for

continuity between the No. 1 terminal of the
radiator fan switch 2P connector and body ground.
GRN
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH 2P
CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
BLK
Wire side of
female terminals Is there continuity?
YES−Repair short in the wire between the radiator

fan switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and under-
hood fuse/relay box.
YES−Replace the radiator fan switch.

radiator fan switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and
ground at G101.
10-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:10:39 61S5N000_100_0019
Radiator Fan Switch Test Radiator Fan Switch Replacement

NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing 1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch connector, then
the radiator fan switch (see page 10-8). remove the radiator fan switch (A).
1. Remove the radiator fan switch from the

thermostat cover (see page 10-19).
2. Suspend the radiator fan switch (A) in a container

of water as shown.
D B
A A
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m,
17 lbf·ft)
2. Install the radiator fan switch using a new O-ring

(B).
3. Heat the water and check the temperature with a

thermometer. Do not let the thermometer (B) touch
the bottom of the hot container.
4. Measure the continuity between the A terminal (C)

and B terminal (D) according to the table.
Terminal
A B
Operation Temperature
ON 196° −203°F
(91°−95°C)
SWITCH 5°−15°F (3°−8°C) lower
OFF than the temperature
when it goes on
-DYNOMITE 2009- 10-19

00/10/26 15:14:47 61S5N000_110_0001
Fuel and Emissions
Fuel and Emissions Systems Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect

Special Tools ............................ 11-2 Fittings Installation ............... 11-135
General Troubleshooting Fuel Pressure Regulator
Information ........................... 11-3 Replacement ......................... 11-137
DTC Troubleshooting Index .... 11-7 Fuel Filter Replacement ........... 11-137
Symptom Troubleshooting Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending
Index ...................................... 11-10 Unit Replacement ................. 11-138
System Descriptions ................ 11-12 Fuel Tank Replacement ........... 11-139
How to Set Readiness Codes .. 11-47 Fuel Gauge Sending Unit
Test ........................................ 11-140
PGM-FI System Low Fuel Indicator Light Test ........ 11-142
Component Location Index .... 11-50
DTC Troubleshooting .............. 11-53 Intake Air System
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting ... 11-98 Component Location Index .... 11-143
VTEC Solenoid Valve Test ....... 11-111 Throttle Body Test ................... 11-144
Injector Replacement ............... 11-112 Air Cleaner Replacement ........ 11-145
Primary HO2S Replacement ... 11-114 Air Cleaner Element
Secondary HO2S Replacement ......................... 11-146
Replacement ......................... 11-114 Resonator Replacement .......... 11-147
Throttle Cable Adjustment ...... 11-148
Idle Control System Throttle Cable
Component Location Index .... 11-115 Removal/Installation ............ 11-149
DTC Troubleshooting .............. 11-116 Throttle Body Removal/
A/C Signal Circuit Installation ............................ 11-150
Troubleshooting ................... 11-119 Throttle Body Disassembly/
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Reassembly .......................... 11-151
Troubleshooting ................... 11-120
PSP Switch Signal Circuit Catalytic Converter System
Troubleshooting ................... 11-122 DTC Troubleshooting .............. 11-152
Brake Pedal Position Switch Tailpipe Emission Test ............ 11-152
Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting ................... 11-123 EGR System
Idle Speed Inspection .............. 11-124 DTC Troubleshooting .............. 11-153
Fuel Supply System PCV System

Component Location Index .... 11-125 PCV Valve Inspection and Test .....
...... 11-158
Fuel Pump Circuit
Troubleshooting ................... 11-126 EVAP System
Fuel Pressure Relieving ........... 11-129 Component Location Index .... 11-159
Fuel Pressure Test ................... 11-130 DTC Troubleshooting .............. 11-160
Fuel Lines Inspection ............... 11-131 EVAP Two Way Valve Test ...... 11-175
Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fuel Tank Vapor Control
Fittings Precautions ............. 11-133 Valve Test ............................. 11-176
Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fuel Tank Vapor Control
Fittings Removal .................. 11-134 Valve Replacement .............. 11-178
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 15:14:47 61S5N000_110_0002
Fuel and Emissions Systems
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty
A973X-041-XXXXX Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0−30 in.Hg 1
07JAZ-001000B Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0−4 in.Hg 1
07SAZ-001000A Backprobe Set 2
07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adapter 1
07XAA-001010A Fuel Tank Assembly Wrench 1
07ZAJ-S5A0100 Fuel Pressure Gauge Set 1
07ZAJ-S5A0200 Hose, Oil Pressure 1
-1 07406-0020201 A/T Pressure Hose 1
-2 07406-0070300 A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 1
-3 07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 1
-4 07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Hose, Adapter 1
07406-004000A Fuel Pressure Gauge 1
-1, -2, -3, -4

00/10/26 15:14:48 61S5N000_110_0003
General Troubleshooting Information

Intermittent Failures 2. If the MIL stays on, connect the Honda PGM Tester
(A) or an OBD II scan tool to the Data Link
The term ‘‘intermittent failure’’ means a system may Connector (DLC) (B) located under the driver’s side
have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the of the dashboard.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the dash does not
come on, check for poor connections or loose wires at
all connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting.
Opens and Shorts

‘‘Open’’ and ‘‘Short’’ are common electrical terms. An
open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is
an accidental connection of a wire to ground or to
another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means
something won’t work at all. In complex electronics A
(like ECM’s/PCM’s) this can sometimes mean
something works, but not the way it’s supposed to.
How to Use the PGM Tester or a Scan Tool

B
If the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) has come on
1. Start the engine and check the MIL. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and 4. Check the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and note
the engine is not started, the MIL will stay on for 15 it. Also check the freeze frame data. Refer to the
−20 seconds (see page 11-29). DTC Troubleshooting Index and begin the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data indicates the engine conditions
when the first malfunction, misfire or fuel trim
malfunction was detected.
• The scan tool and the Honda PGM Tester can read the
DTC, freeze frame data, current data, and other
Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) data.
• For specific operations, refer to the user’s manual
that came with the scan tool or Honda PGM Tester.
If the MIL did not come on

If the MIL did not come on but there is a driveability
problem, refer to the Symptom Troubleshooting Index
in this section.
If you can’t duplicate the DTC

Some of the troubleshooting in this section requires
you to reset the ECM/PCM and try to duplicate the DTC.
If the problem is intermittent and you can’t duplicate
the code, do not continue through the procedure. To do
so will only result in confusion and, possibly, a
needlessly replaced ECM/PCM.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:14:49 61S5N000_110_0004
General Troubleshooting Information (cont’d)

How to Reset the ECM/PCM How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing
You can reset the ECM/PCM in either of 2 ways: If the inspection for a trouble code requires voltage or
resistance checks at the ECM/PCM connectors, remove
• Use the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to the ECM/PCM and test it:
clear the ECM’s/PCM’s memory.
See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user’s 1. Remove the passenger’s dashboard lower cover
manuals for specific instructions. (see page 20-70), the right kick panel (see page 20-
• Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the No. 6 57), and the glove box (see page 20-70).
ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse (A) from the under-hood
fuse/relay box (B) for 10 seconds. 2. Remove the bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace in the
glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area
A
shown, and discard it.
B
How to End a Troubleshooting Session

(required after any troubleshooting) Cut here.
1. Reset the ECM/PCM as described above. 3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and
the glove box frame (B).
A
3. Disconnect the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM
Tester from the DLC.
NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer

system. If you replace the ECM/PCM, it will have a
different immobilizer code. In order for the engine
to start, you must rewrite the immobilizer code with
the Honda PGM Tester.

00/10/26 15:14:50 61S5N000_110_0005
4. Remove the gray 20P ECM/PCM wire harness How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/
connector from the ECM/PCM mounting bracket. PCM
Remove the ECM/PCM mounting bolt (A) and the
bracket. Special Tools Required
B
• Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a
commercially available digital multimeter
• Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2)
1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking

patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital
multimeter (C).
A A
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
B
5. Remove the nuts, then remove the ECM/PCM (B).
07SAZ-001000A
2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the

contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide
the tip into the connector from the wire side until it
touches the end of the wire terminal.
3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector

or the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the
connector and probe the terminals (B) from the
terminal side. Do not force the probe into the
connector.
Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.

Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:14:50 61S5N000_110_0006

ECM/PCM Reprogramming and Substitution How to Substitute the ECM/PCM
for Testing
1. Remove the ECM/PCM from the vehicle.
Honda Interface Module (HIM) 2. Install a known-good ECM/PCM in the vehicle.
· P/N 3557010000
3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM
Use this procedure when you have to substitute a replacement procedure on the Honda PGM Tester.
known-good ECM/PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. It allows you to start the engine.
Reprogram the ECM/PCM only if the ECM/PCM does
not already have the latest software loaded. 4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original
ECM/PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with
NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while the ECM/PCM replacement procedure on the
reprogramming the ECM/PCM. If you turn the ignition Honda PGM Tester again.
switch OFF, the ECM/PCM can be damaged.
How to Re-program the ECM/PCM
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the

engine.
2. Connect the Honda Interface Module (HIM) to the

Data Link Connector (DLC) (A) located under the
driver’s side of dashboard.
A 3557010000
3. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure as described

on the HIM label and in the ECM/PCM update
system. If the software in the ECM/PCM is the latest
version, substitute the ECM/PCM.

00/10/26 15:14:50 61S5N000_110_0007
DTC Troubleshooting Index

DTC Temporary DTC Detection Item Note
(MIL indication*)
P0107 (3) ――― Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit (see page 11-53)
Low Voltage
P0108 (3) ――― Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit (see page 11-54)
High Voltage
P0112 (10) ――― Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Low (see page 11-56)
Voltage
P0113 (10) ――― Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit High (see page 11-57)
Voltage
P0116 (86) P0116 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Range/ (see page 11-58)
Performance Problem
P0117 (6) ――― Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit (see page 11-58)
Low Voltage
P0118 (6) ――― Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit (see page 11-59)
High Voltage
P0122 (7) ――― Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (see page 11-60)
P0123 (7) ――― Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage (see page 11-63)
P0128 (8) P0128 Cooling System Malfunction (see page 11-65)
P0131 (1) ――― Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary HO2S) (see page 11-66)
(Sensor 1) Circuit Low Voltage
(Sensor 1) Circuit High Voltage
P0133 (61) P0133 Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary HO2S) (see page 11-68)
(Sensor 1) Slow Response
(Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0137 (63) P0137 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) (see page 11-71)
(Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage
(Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage
(Sensor 2) Slow Response
P0141 (65) ――― Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S) (see page 11-74)
(Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0171 (45) P0171 Fuel System Too Lean (see page 11-76)
P0172 (45) P0172 Fuel System Too Rich (see page 11-76)
*: These DTCs will be indicated by the blinking of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the SCS service signal
line is jumped with the Honda PGM Tester.
**: The D indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
*1: A/T
*2: M/T
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:14:50 61S5N000_110_0008
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont’d)

DTC Temporary DTC Detection Item Note
(MIL indication*)
P0300 and P0300 and Random Misfire (see page 11-77)
some of some of
P0301 (71) P0301
P0302 (72) P0302
P0303 (73) P0303
P0304 (74) P0304
P0301 (71) P0301 No. 1 Cylinder Misfire (see page 11-78)
P0325 (23) ――― Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction (see page 11-83)
P0335 (4) ――― Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor No Signal (see page 11-86)
P0336 (4) ――― Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Intermittent (see page 11-86)
Interruption
P0401 (80) P0401 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Insufficient Flow (see page 11-153)
P0420 (67) P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (see page 11-152)
P0451 (91) P0451 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Range/Performance (see page 11-160)
Problem
P0452 (91) P0452 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (see page 11-161)
P0453 (91) P0453 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage (see page 11-162)
P0500 (17)*2 ――― Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Circuit Malfunction (see page 11-88)
P0501 (17)*1 ――― Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Range/Performance (see page 11-88)
Problem
P0505 (14) P0505 Idle Control System Malfunction (see page 11-116)
P0563 (34) ――― Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control (see page 11-89)
Module (PCM) Power Source Circuit Unexpected
Voltage
P0600 (39) ――― Serial Communication Link Malfunction Refer to the Multiplex
Control system
Troubleshooting (see
page 22-173).
P07xx *1, ** ――― Automatic Transaxle System Malfunction Refer to the Automatic
(70) Transmission DTC
Troubleshooting Index
*: These DTCs will be indicated by the blinking of the MIL when the SCS service signal line is jumped with the Honda
PGM tester.
*1: A/T
*2: M/T

00/10/26 15:14:51 61S5N000_110_0009
DTC Temporary DTC Detection Item Page

(MIL indication*)
P1106 (13) P1106 Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Range/ (see page 11-91)
Performance Problem
P1107 (13) ――― Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Low (see page 11-91)
Voltage
P1108 (13) ――― Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit High (see page 11-91)
Voltage
P1121 (7) P1121 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Signal Lower Than (see page 11-64)
Expected
P1122 (7) P1122 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Signal Higher Than (see page 11-64)
Expected
P1128 (5) P1128 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal (see page 11-55)
Lower Than Expected
P1129 (5) P1129 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal (see page 11-55)
Higher Than Expected
P1259*1 (22) ――― VTEC System Malfunction (see page 11-92)
P1324 (23) ――― Knock Sensor Power Source Circuit Low Voltage (see page 11-85)
P1361 (8) ――― Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor Intermittent (see page 11-96)
Interruption
P1362 (8) ――― Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor No Signal (see page 11-96)
P1456 (90) P1456 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System (see page 11-164)
Leakage (Fuel Tank System)
P1457 (90) P1457 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System (see page 11-169)
Leakage (EVAP Canister System)
P1491 (12) P1491 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Insufficient (see page 11-153)
Lift
P1498 (12) ――― Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Position (see page 11-157)
Sensor Circuit High Voltage
P1519 (14) ――― Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Circuit Malfunction (see page 11-117)
P1607 (―) ――― Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control (see page 11-97)
Module (PCM) Internal Circuit Malfunction
P17xx *1, ** (P17xx) Automatic Transaxle System Malfunction Refer to the Automatic
(70) Transmission DTC
Troubleshooting Index
*: These DTCs will be indicated by the blinking of the MIL when the SCS service signal line is jumped with the Honda
PGM Tester.
*1: A/T
*2: M/T

00/10/26 15:14:51 61S5N000_110_0010

When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) with the scan tool. If there is
no DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.

Engine will not start 1. Test the battery (see page 22-50). • Low
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Test the starter (see page 4-8). compression
3. Troubleshoot the fuel pump circuit (see page 11-126). • Intake air leaks
• Locked up
engine
• Slipped/
broken timing
belt
• Contaminated
fuel
Engine will not start (MIL Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-98).
comes on and stays on, or
never comes on at all, no
DTCs set)
Engine will not start Troubleshoot the immobilizer system (see page 22-167).
(immobilizer indicator light
comes on)
Hard starting 1. Test the battery (see page 22-50). • Low
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-130). compression
• Intake air leaks
• Contaminated
fuel
Cold fast idle too low Check the idle speed (see page 11-124).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
Cold fast idle too high 1. Check the idle speed (see page 11-124).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect/adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-148).
3. Inspect and test the throttle body (see page 11-144).
Idle speed fluctuates 1. Check the idle speed (see page 11-124). Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect/adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-148).
3. Inspect and test the throttle body (see page 11-144)
After warming up idle speed 1. Troubleshoot the ALT FR signal circuit (see page 11-120). Vacuum hose
is below specifications with 2. Inspect and test the throttle body (see page 11-144). clogged/cracked/
no load poor connection
After warming up idle speed Troubleshoot the ALT FR signal circuit (see page 11-120).
is above specifications with
no load
Low power 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-130). Low
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect and test the throttle body (see page 11-144). compression
3. Inspect/adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-149).
Engine stalls 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-130). • Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-124). • Faulty harness
3. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal and sensor
circuit (see page 11-123). connections
11-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:14:51 61S5N000_110_0011

Difficult to refuel 1. Test the fuel tank vapor control valve (see page 11-176). Malfunctioning
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect the fuel tank vapor control signal tube between gas station filling
the fuel pipe and the fuel tank vapor control valve. nozzle.
3. Inspect the fuel tank vapor vent tube between the EVAP
canister and the fuel tank vapor control valve.
4. Check the EVAP canister.
Fuel overflows during Replace the fuel tank vapor control valve (see page 11-178). Malfunctioning
refueling gas station filling
(No DTCs set) nozzle.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-11

00/10/26 15:14:51 61S5N000_110_0012
System Descriptions
Electronic Control System
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the Engine Control Module (ECM) on vehicles
with manual transmissions or the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on vehicles with automatic transmissions.
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in a signal from a sensor, the ECM/PCM ignores that signal and assumes a pre-
programmed value for that sensor that allows the engine to continue to run.
Back-up Function
When an abnormality occurs in the ECM/PCM, the injectors are controlled by a back-up circuit independent of the
system to permit minimal driving.
Self-diagnosis
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor, the ECM/PCM supplies ground for the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) and stores the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in erasable memory. When the ignition is first turned on, the
ECM/PCM supplies ground for the MIL for 20 seconds to check the MIL bulb condition.
Two Driving Cycle Detection Method

To prevent false indications, the ‘‘two driving cycle detection method’’ is used for some self-diagnostic functions.
When an abnormality occurs, the ECM/PCM stores it in its memory. When the same abnormality recurs after the
ignition switch is turned OFF and ON (II) again, the ECM/PCM informs the driver by turning on the MIL.
11-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:14:52 61S5N000_110_0013
ECM/PCM Data
You can retrieve data from the ECM/PCM by connecting the OBD II scan tool or the Honda PGM Tester to the Data Link
Connector (DLC). The items listed in the table below conform to SAE recommended practice. The Honda PGM Tester
also reads data beyond that recommended by SAE so that this data may help you find the causes of intermittent
problems.
NOTE:
• The ‘‘operating values’’ listed are approximate and may vary depending on the environment and the individual
vehicle.
• Unless noted otherwise, ‘‘at idle speed’’ means idling with the engine completely warmed up, A/T in Park or neutral,
M/T in neutral position, and the A/C and all accessories turned off.
Data Description Operating Value Freeze Data

Diagnostic If the ECM/PCM detects a problem, it will store it as a code If no problem is YES
Trouble Code consisting of one letter and four numbers. Depending on detected, there is no
(DTC) the problem, an SAE-defined code (P0xxx) or a Honda- output.
defined code (P1xxx) will be output to the tester.
Engine Speed The ECM/PCM computes engine speed from the signals Nearly the same as YES
sent from the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. This data tachometer indication
is used for determining the time and amount of injected At idle speed: 720±50
fuel. rpm
Vehicle Speed The ECM/PCM converts pulse signals from Vehicle Speed Nearly the same as YES
Sensor (VSS). speedometer
indication
Manifold The absolute pressure caused in the intake manifold by With engine stopped: YES
Absolute engine load and speed. Nearly the same as
Pressure atmospheric pressure
(MAP) At idle speed: about 20
−34 kPa (150−260
mmHg, 6−10 in.Hg),
0.7−1.1 V
Engine The ECT sensor converts coolant temperature into voltage With cold engine: YES
Coolant and signals the ECM/PCM. The sensor is a thermistor Same as ambient
Temperature whose internal resistance changes with coolant temperature and IAT
(ECT) temperature. The ECM/PCM uses the voltage signals from With engine warmed
the ECT sensor to determine the amount of injected fuel. up: about 176−212°F
(80−100°C), 0.5−0.8 V
Primary The HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas 0.0−1.25 V NO
Heated and sends voltage signals to the ECM/PCM. Based on At idle speed:
Oxygen these signals, the ECM/PCM controls the air fuel ratio. about 0.1−0.9 V
Sensor When the oxygen content is high (that is, when the ratio is
(Primary HO2 leaner than the stoichiometric ratio), the voltage signal is
S) (Sensor 1), lower. When the oxygen content is low (that is, when the
Secondary radio is richer than the stoichiometric ratio), the voltage
Heated signal is higher.
Oxygen
Sensor
(Secondary
HO2S) (Sensor
2)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-13

00/10/26 15:14:52 61S5N000_110_0014
System Descriptions (cont’d)

ECM/PCM Data (cont’d)
Data Description Operating Value Freeze Data
Fuel System Fuel system status is indicated as ’’open’’ or ’’closed’’. At idle speed: closed YES
Status Closed: Based on the HO2S output, the ECM/PCM
determines the air/fuel ratio and controls the amount of
injected fuel.
Open: ignoring HO2S output, the ECM/PCM refers to
signals from the Throttle Position (TP), Manifold Absolute
Pressure (MAP), Intake Air Temperature (IAT), Barometric
Pressure (BARO) and Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT))
sensors to control the amount of injected fuel.
Short Term The air/fuel ratio correction coefficient for correcting the 0.6−1.5 YES
Fuel Trim amount of injected fuel when the Fuel System Status
is ’’closed.’’ When the ratio is leaner than the
stoichiometric ratio, the ECM/PCM increases short term
fuel trim gradually, and the amount of injected fuel
increases. The air/fuel ratio gradually gets richer, causing
a lower oxygen content in the exhaust gas. Consequently,
the short term fuel trim is lowered, and the ECM/PCM
reduces the amount of injected fuel.
This cycle keeps the air/fuel ratio close to the
stoichiometric ratio when in closed loop status.
Long Term Long term fuel trim is computed from short term fuel trim 0.8−1.2 YES
Fuel Trim and indicates changes occurring in the fuel supply system
over a long period.
If long term fuel trim is higher than 1.00, the amount of
injected fuel must be increased. If it is lower than 1.00, the
amount of injected fuel must be reduced.
Intake Air The IAT sensor converts intake air temperature into With cold engine: YES
Temperature voltage and signals the ECM/PCM. When intake air Same as ambient
(IAT) temperature is low, the internal resistance of the sensor temperature and ECT
increases, and the voltage signal is higher.
Throttle Based on the accelerator pedal position, the opening At idle speed: YES
Position angle of the throttle valve is indicated. about 10 %
Ignition Ignition timing is the ignition advance angle set by the At idle speed: 8° ± 2° NO
Timing ECM/PCM. The ECM/PCM matches ignition timing to the BTDC when the SCS
driving conditions. service signal line is
jumped with the Honda
PGM tester
Calculated CLV is the engine load calculated from the MAP data. At idle speed: YES
Load Value 16−36%
(CLV) At 2,500 rpm with no
load:
12−32%
11-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:14:53 61S5N000_110_0015
ECM/PCM Electrical Connections
FUEL PUMP
PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 2
PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 1
A/C CLUTCH RELAY
IG1
＋B
BATTERY IG2
RADIATOR
FAN RELAY ST
IGNITION
SWITCH
IG1 HOT in ON(II)
and START(III)
STARTER CUT
RELAY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
No. 19 BATTERY (80A)
No. 6 ECU
(ECM/PCM) (15A)
No. 20 IG (40A)
No. 9 BACK UP (10A)
No. 7 HORN, STOP
(15A)
UNDER-DASH A B C D E F
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
No. 17 FUEL PUMP ECM/PCM
(15A) A3 IGP1 IMOFPR E1
No. 4 ACG (10A)
No. 1 IGN COIL (15A) A2 IGP2 PG1 A5
No. 10 METER (7.5A)
No. 14 A/C CLUTCH PG2 A4
E9 IG1
RELAY (10A)
MRLY E7
CLUTCH
PEDAL
E18 ACC POSITION
*1:A/T SWITCH *2
*2:M/T B6 FANC
H
*1
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-15

00/10/26 15:14:53 61S5N000_110_0016

A MAP SENSOR
No. 1 INJECTOR VCC1 A21
B5 INJ1 MAP A19
SG1 A11
No. 2 INJECTOR
TP SENSOR
B4 INJ2
VCC2 A20
No. 3 INJECTOR TPS A15
B3 INJ3 SG2 A10
No. 4 INJECTOR
B2 INJ4
IAT SENSOR
IAC VALVE IAT B17
A12 IACV
ECT SENSOR
ECT B8
KNOCK
SENSOR
KS A9
VCCR A8
K
A26 TDC
EGR VALVE
POSITION
SENSOR
TDC SENSOR
EGRP A13
EGR B14
A7 CKP
EGR VALVE
CKP SENSOR
11-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:14:53 61S5N000_110_0017
K L
VSS
A18 VSS PHO2S A6
PRIMARY
HO2S
PO2SHTC A1 (SENSOR 1)
EVAP CANISTER J
PURGE VALVE
B21 PCS
EVAP CONTROL CANISTER

VENT SHUT VALVE
E21 VSV
EVAP BYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE
E20 2WBS
ALT
LG1 A24
B10 ALTL LG2 A23
B13 ALTF
SHO2S E2
E SO2SHTC E6
SECONDARY
HO2S
(SENSOR 2)
To
SPARK A30 IGPLS1
PLUG ICM
No. 1 IGNITION COIL
To
SPARK
PLUG A29 IGPLS2 LG3 E3
ICM
VTEC OIL
G M PRESSURE SWITCH
No. 2 IGNITION COIL
VTPSW B9
To
SPARK A28 IGPLS3
PLUG ICM
No. 3 IGNITION COIL

VTEC SOLENOID
VALVE
To
SPARK A27 IGPLS4 VTS B15
PLUG ICM
No. 4 IGNITION COIL
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-17

00/10/26 15:14:54 61S5N000_110_0018

M J
FTP SENSOR
E5 VCC3 B
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
E14 FTP
E4 SG3 BKSW E22
F *1
ILU E13
GAUGE ASSEMBLY To MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
SEFMJ E24
E31 MIL
MIL
*1 To CRUISE
CPU CCS E12 CONTROL UNIT
To
IMOCD E27 IMMOBILIZER UNIT
D I
E30 WEN
E29 SCS
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
E23 K-LINE
PSP SWITCH
PSPSW E16
TEST
TACHOMETER E26 NEP
CONNECTOR
11-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:14:54 61S5N000_110_0019
*1
TCC
SOLENOID VALVE
LC C2
H
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
C12 ATPNP SHA C6
C10 ATPR
C20 ATPD SHIFT SOLENOD

VALVE B
P
C9 ATPD3 SHB C4
R
N C11 ATP2
D A/T
C18 ATPFWD PRESSURE CONTROL
D3 SOLENOID VALVE A
2 LSA＋ B7
LSA− C1
A/T
PRESSURE CONTROL
TRANSMISSION SOLENOID VALVE B
RANGE SWITCH
LSB＋ B16
LSB− C8
G
MAINSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR
NM C7
NMSG C21
COUNTERSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR
NC C15
NCSG C14
*1
ECM/PCM A (31 P) ECM/PCM B (24 P) PCM C (22 P) ECM/PCM E (31 P)
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-19

00/10/26 15:14:55 61S5N000_110_0020

ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (31P)
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V.
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
1 BLK/WHT PO2SHTC (PRIMARY Drives primary HO2S With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
HEATED OXYGEN heater With fully warmed up engine running: duty controlled
SENSOR (PRIMARY
HO2S) HEATER
CONTROL)
2 YEL/BLK IGP2 (POWER Power source for the With the ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SOURCE) ECM/PCM circuit With the ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
3 YEL/BLK IGP1 (POWER Power source for the With the ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SOURCE) ECM/PCM circuit With the ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
4 BLK PG2 (POWER Ground for the ECM/PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
GROUND) circuit
5 BLK PG1 (POWER Ground for the ECM/PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
GROUND) circuit
6 WHT PHO2S (PRIMARY Detects primary HO2S With throttle fully opened from idle with fully warmed up
HEATED OXYGEN sensor (sensor 1) signal engine: about 0.6 V
SENSOR (PRIMARY With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
HO2S), SENSOR 1)
7 BLU CKP (CRANKSHAFT Detects CKP sensor signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CKP)
SENSOR)
8 YEL VCCR (SENSOR Detects sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
VOLTAGE RETURN) With the ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
9 RED/BLU KS (KNOCK SENSOR) Detects knock sensor With engine knocking: pulses
signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
10 GRN/YEL SG2 (SENSOR Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
GROUND)
11 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
GROUND)
12 BLK/RED IACV (IDLE AIR Drives IAC valve With engine running: duty controlled
CONTROL (IAC) With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
VALVE)
13 WHT/BLK EGRP (EXHAUST GAS Detects EGR valve With engine running: 1.2 V−2.0 V
RECIRCULATION (EGR) position sensor signal (depending on EGR valve lift)
VALVE POSITION
SENSOR)
15 RED/BLK TPS (THROTTLE Detects TP sensor signal With throttle fully open: about 4.8 V
POSITION (TP) With throttle fully closed: about 0.5 V
SENSOR)
18 WHT/GRN VSS (VEHICLE SPEED Detects VSS signal With ignition switch ON (II) and front wheels rotating:
SENSOR (VSS)) cycles 0 V-about 5 V or battery voltage
*1: A/T
*2: M/T
11-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:14:55 61S5N000_110_0021
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (31P)

number
19 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor With ignition switch ON (II): about 3 V
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE signal At idle: about 1.0 V (depending on engine speed)
(MAP) SENSOR)
20 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
VOLTAGE) With ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
21 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
VOLTAGE) With ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
23 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground for the ECM/PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
circuit
26 GRN TDC (TOP DEAD Detects TDC sensor With engine running: pulses
CENTER (TDC)
SENSOR)
27 BRN IGPLS4 (No. 4 Drives No. 4 ignition coil With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
IGNITION COIL PULSE) With engine running: pulses
28 WHT/BLU IGPLS3 (No. 3 Drives No. 3 ignition coil
IGNITION COIL PULSE)
29 BLU/RED IGPLS2 (No. 2 Drives No. 2 ignition coil
30 YEL/GRN IGPLS1 (No. 1 Drives No. 1 ignition coil
*1: A/T
*2: M/T
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-21

00/10/26 15:14:55 61S5N000_110_0022

ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (24P)

number
2 YEL INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR) Drives No. 4 injector With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
3 BLU INJ3 (No. 3 INJECTOR) Drives No. 3 injector At idle: duty controlled
4 RED INJ2 (No. 2 INJECTOR) Drives No. 2 injector
5 BRN INJ1 (No. 1 INJECTOR) Drives No. 1 injector
6 GRN FANC (RADIATOR FAN Drives radiator fan relay With radiator fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) With radiator fan stopped: battery voltage
7*1 RED/BLK LSA ＋ (A/T PRESSURE CONTROL Drives A/T pressure control With the ignition switch ON (II): duty
SOLENOID VALVE A ＋ SIDE solenoid valve A controlled
8 RED/WHT ECT (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor signal With the ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1−
TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR) 4.8 V
(depending on engine coolant
temperature)
9 BLU/BLK VTPSW (VTEC OIL PRESSURE Detects VTEC oil pressure switch At idle: about 0 V
SWITCH) signal
10 WHT/BLU ALTL (ALTERNATOR L SIGNAL) Detects alternator L signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
With engine running: battery voltage
13 WHT/RED ALTF (ALTERNATOR FR SIGNAL) Detects alternator FR signal With engine running: 0 V−5 V
(depending on electrical load)
14 BLU/RED EGR (EXHAUST GAS Drives EGR valve With EGR operating: duty controlled
RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE) With EGR not operating: about 0 V
15 GRN/YEL VTS (VTEC SOLENOID VALVE) Drives VTEC solenoid valve At idle: about 0 V
16*1 BLK/RED LSB ＋ (A/T PRESSURE CONTROL Drives A/T pressure control With the ignition switch ON (II): duty
SOLENOID VALVE B ＋ SIDE solenoid valve B controlled
17 RED/YEL IAT (INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Detects IAT sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 V−
(IAT) SENSOR) 4.8 V
(depending on intake air temperature)
21 YEL/BLU PCS (EVAPORATIVE EMISSION Drives EVAP canister purge valve With engine running, engine coolant below
(EVAP) CANISTER PURGE VALVE) 149°F (65°C): battery voltage
With engine running, engine coolant above
149°F (65°C): duty controlled
*1: A/T
*2: M/T
11-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:14:56 61S5N000_110_0023
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (22P)

number
1*1 WHT/BLK LSA- (A/T PRESSURE Ground for A/T pressure
CONTROL SOLENOID control solenoid valve A
VALVE A-SIDE
2*1 YEL/BLU LC (TORQUE CONVERTER Drives TCC solenoid valve With lock-up ON: battery voltage
CLUTCH (TCC) SOLENOID With lock-up OFF: about 0 V
VALVE)
4*1 GRN/WHT SHB (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in 1st, 2nd gears: battery
VALVE B) B voltage
With engine running in 3rd, 4th gears: about 0 V
6*1 BLU/BLK SHA (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in 2nd, 3rd gears: battery
VALVE A) A voltage
With engine running in 1st, 4th gears: about 0 V
7*1 WHT/RED NM (MAINSHAFT SPEED Detects mainshaft speed With engine running: pulses
SENSOR) sensor signals
8*1 BRN/WHT LSB- (A/T PRESSURE Ground for A/T pressure
CONTROL SOLENOID control solenoid valve B
VALVE B-SIDE
9*1 RED ATPD3 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D3 position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D3 switch D3 position signal In any other position: about 5 V or battery voltage
POSITION)
10*1 WHT ATPR (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R switch R position signal In any other position: about 5 V or battery voltage
POSITION)
11*1 BLU ATP2 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In 2nd position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH 2 switch 2 position signal In any other position: about 5 V or battery voltage
POSITION)
12*1 BLU/WHT ATPNP (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In Park or neutral: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH NEUTRAL/ switch Neutral/Park position In any other position: about 5 V or battery voltage
PARK POSITION) signal
14*1 GRN NCSG (COUNTERSHAFT Ground for countershaft
SPEED SENSOR GROUND) speed sensor
1
15* BLU NC (COUNTERSHAFT Detects countershaft speed With ignition switch ON (II), and front wheels
SPEED SENSOR) sensor signals rotating: battery voltage
18*1 BLU/YEL ATPFWD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D3 or D position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D3/D switch D3D position signal In any other position: about 5 V or battery voltage
POSITION)
20*1 YEL ATPD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D switch D position signal In any other position: about 5 V or battery voltage
POSITION)
21*1 WHT/GRN NMSG (MAINSHAFT Ground for mainshaft
SPEED SENSOR GROUND) speed sensor
*1: A/T
*2: M/T
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-23

00/10/26 15:14:56 61S5N000_110_0024

ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector E (31P)

number
1 GRN/YEL IMO FPR (IMMOBILIZER Drives PGM-FI main relay 2 0 V for 2 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
FUEL PUMP RELAY) (II), then battery voltage
2 WHT/RED SHO2S (SECONDARY Detects secondary HO2S With throttle fully opened from idle with fully
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (sensor 2) signal warmed up engine: above 0.6 V
(SECONDARY HO2S), With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
SENSOR 2)
control circuit
4 PNK SG3 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
5 YEL/BLU VCC3 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
With ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
6 BLK/WHT SO2SHTC (SECONDARY Drives secondary HO2S With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR heater With fully warmed up engine running: duty
(SECONDARY HO2S) controlled
HEATER CONTROL)
7 RED/YEL MRLY (PGM-FI MAIN Drives PGM-FI main relay 1 With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
RELAY) Power source for the DTC With ignition switch OFF: battery voltage
memory
9 YEL/BLK IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
With ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
1
12* BLU/ORN CCS (CRUISE CONTROL Detects cruise control signal With ignition switch ON (II): pulse
SIGNAL)
1
13* WHT/BLU ILU (INTERLOCK CONTROL Drives interlock control unit With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
UNIT) pressed: battery voltage
14 LT GRN FTP (FUEL TANK Detects FTP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill cap open:
PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR) about 2.5 V
16 LT GRN/BLK PSPSW (POWER STEERING Detects PSP switch signal At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead
PRESSURE SWITCH position: 0 V
SIGNAL) At idle with steering wheel at full lock: battery
voltage
18 RED ACC (A/C CLUTCH RELAY) Drives A/C clutch relay With compressor ON: about 0 V
With compressor OFF: battery voltage
*1: A/T
*2: M/T
11-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:14:56 61S5N000_110_0025
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector E (31P)

number
20 BLU/RED 2WBS (EVAPORATIVE Drives EVAP bypass With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
EMISSION (EVAP) BYPASS solenoid valve
SOLENOID VALVE)
21 LT GRN/RED VSV (EVAPORATIVE Drives EVAP canister vent With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
EMISSION (EVAP) shut valve
CANISTER VENT SHUT
VALVE)
22 WHT/BLK BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: about 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brake pedal pressed: battery voltage
23 LT BLU K-LINE Sends and receives scan With ignition switch ON (II): pulses or battery
tool signal voltage
24 YEL SEFMJ Communicates with With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
multiplex control unit With engine running under load: pulses
26 BLU NEP (ENGINE SPEED Outputs engine speed pulse With engine running: pulses
PULSE)
27 RED/BLU IMOCD (IMMOBILIZER Detects immobilizer signal
CODE)
29 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check signal With the service check signal shorted with the PGM
SIGNAL) Tester: about 0 V
With the service check signal opened: about 5 V
battery voltage
30 RED/WHT WEN (WRITE ENABLE Detects write enable signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SIGNAL)
31 GRN/ORN MIL (MALFUNCTION Drives MIL With MIL turned ON: about 0 V
INDICATOR LAMP) With MIL turned OFF: battery voltage
*1: A/T
*2: M/T
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-25

00/10/26 15:14:57 61S5N000_110_0026

Vacuum Hose Routing
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
To EVAPORATIVE CANISTER
EMISSION (EVAP) PURGE VALVE
CANISTER
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
11-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:14:57 61S5N000_110_0027
Vacuum Distribution
26
23
29 28 27 ATMOSPHERE 25
13
14 12 24
15 21 ATMOSPHERE
11
10
18
5 16
17
22
9
3
8
ENGINE
COOLANT
19
20
1 2
PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (PRIMARY RESONATOR

HO2S) (SENSOR 1) EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR POSITION SENSOR
(SECONDARY HO2S) (SENSOR 2) POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR VALVE
KNOCK SENSOR EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE SHUT VALVE
THROTTLE BODY EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) TWO WAY VALVE
INJECTOR EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) BYPASS
FUEL PULSATION DAMPER SOLENOID VALVE
FUEL FILTER FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) VALVE
FUEL PUMP FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
FUEL TANK FUEL TANK VAPOR RECIRCULATION VALVE
AIR CLEANER
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-27

00/10/26 15:14:58 61S5N000_110_0028

PGM-FI System Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor
The Programmed Fuel Injection (PGM-FI) system is a (thermistor). The resistor of the thermistor decreases as
sequential multiport fuel injection system. the engine coolant temperature increases.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay

When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling
from the A/C system, it delays the compressor from THERMISTOR
being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure
smooth transition to the A/C mode.
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor

The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that
modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection
discharge.
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor

The CKP sensor detects engine speed and determines
ignition timing and timing for fuel injection of each Ignition Timing Control
cylinder. The ECM/PCM contains the memory for basic ignition
timing at various engine speeds and manifold absolute
MAGNET
pressure. It also adjusts the timing according to engine
coolant temperature.
Injector Timing and Duration

The ECM/PCM contains the memory for basic discharge
duration at various engine speeds and manifold
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being
read out from the memory, is further modified by
signals sent from various sensors to obtain the final
discharge duration.
By monitoring long term fuel trim, the ECM/PCM
detects long term malfunctions in the fuel system, and
will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor

The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor
(thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases
as the intake air temperature increases.
THERMISTOR
11-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:14:58 61S5N000_110_0029
Knock Sensor Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary HO2S)

The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to The primary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the
minimize knock. exhaust gas and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which
varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To
stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater.
The primary HO2S is installed in the exhaust manifold.
By controlling the air fuel ratio with primary HO2S and
WEIGHT secondary HO2S, the deterioration of the primary
HO2S can be evaluated by its feedback period. When
the feedback period exceeds a certain value during
stable driving conditions, the sensor is considered
deteriorated and the ECM/PCM sets a DTC.
PIEZO ELEMENT
ZIRCONIA SENSOR
ELEMENT TERMINALS
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation

to Readiness Codes)
The vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness codes’’ that are part
HEATER
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. HEATER
TERMINALS
If the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, these codes are erased. In some states, part of
the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are
set. If all of them are not set, the test cannot be Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S)
completed. The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas downstream of the Three Way Catalytic
To check if the readiness codes are set, turn the ignition Converter (TWC) and sends signals to the ECM/PCM
switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly.
come on for 15−20 seconds. If it then goes off, the To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater.
readiness codes are set. If it blinks several times, the The secondary HO2S is installed in the TWC.
readiness codes are not set completely. To reset each
code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in
ZIRCONIA SENSOR
the procedures to set them in this section (see page 11- ELEMENT TERMINALS
47).
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure
into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM.
SENSOR UNIT
HEATER HEATER
TERMINALS
Starting Control
When the engine is started, the ECM/PCM provides a
rich mixture by increasing injector duration.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-29

00/10/26 15:14:59 61S5N000_110_0030

Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Idle Control System
The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the
throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the
sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. The transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the
TP sensor is not replaceable apart from the throttle power steering load is high, or the alternator is
body. charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the Idle Air
Control (IAC) valve to maintain the correct idle speed.
Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional
ELEMENT BRUSH HOLDER layout of the system.
Brake Pedal Position Switch

The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM
when the brake pedal is pressed.
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve

To maintain the proper idle speed, the IAC valve
changes the amount of air bypassing the throttle body
in response to an electrical signal from the ECM/PCM.
BRUSH
VALVE
Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor

The TDC sensor detects the position of the No. 1 From AIR
cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to CLEANER
each cylinder.
To INTAKE
MANIFOLD
MAGNET
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch

The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power
steering load is high.
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)

The VSS is driven by the differential. It generates a
pulsed signal from an input of 5 volts. The number of
pulses per minute increases/decreases with the speed
of the vehicle.
11-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:14:59 61S5N000_110_0031
Fuel Supply System Intake Air System

Fuel Cut-off Control Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional
During deceleration with the throttle valve closed, layout of the system.
current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel
economy at speeds over 850 rpm. Fuel cut-off action Throttle Body
also occurs when engine speed exceeds 6,900 rpm, The throttle body is a single-barrel down draft type. The
regardless of the position of the throttle valve, to side portion of the IAC valve is heated by engine
protect the engine from over-revving. With A/T model, coolant from the cylinder head.
when the vehicle is stopped, the PCM cuts the fuel at
engine speeds over 5,000 rpm. TP SENSOR
Fuel Pump Control

When the ignition is turned on, the ECM/PCM grounds
the PGM-FI main relay which feeds current to the fuel
pump for 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. With
the engine running, the ECM/PCM grounds the PGM-FI
main relay and feeds current to the fuel pump. When
the engine is not running and the ignition is on, the
ECM/PCM cuts ground to the PGM-FI main relay which
cuts current to the fuel pump.
PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2

The PGM-FI relay consists of two separate relays. The
PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition
switch is ON (II) which supplies battery voltage to the
ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for the
PGM-FI main relay 2. The PGM-FI main relay 2 is IAC VALVE
energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2
seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and
when the engine is running.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-31

00/10/26 15:15:00 61S5N000_110_0032

Catalytic Converter System Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional
The TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon layout of the system.
monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the
exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (CO2), dinitrogen (N2), EGR Valve
and water vapor. The EGR valve is designed to lower peak combustion
temperatures and reduce oxides of nitrogen emissions
HOUSING
(NOx) by recirculating exhaust gas through the intake
manifold and into the combustion chambers.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System

FRONT The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses from escaping
OF
VEHICLE into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake
manifold.
BREATHER
PIPE
THREE WAY
CATALYSTS
INTAKE
PCV MANIFOLD
HOSE
PCV
VALVE
: BLOW-BY VAPOR
: FRESH AIR
11-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:00 61S5N000_110_0033
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control

System
Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional
layout of the system.
EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from
the fuel tank until it can be purged back into the engine
and burned (refer to the System Diagram to see the
functional layout of the system).
EVAP Canister Purge Valve

When the engine coolant temperature is below 149°F
(65°C), the ECM/PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge
valve which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister.
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor

The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure
into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM.
SENSOR UNIT
CIRCUIT
ASSEMBLY
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-33

00/10/26 15:15:00 61S5N000_110_0034

Idle Control System Diagram
The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve:
• After the engine starts, the IAC valve opens for a certain amount of time. The amount of air is increased to raise the
idle speed.
• When the engine coolant temperature is low, the IAC valve is opened to obtain the proper fast idle speed. The
amount of bypassed air is thus controlled in relation to engine coolant temperature.
AIR CLEANER
RESONATOR
THROTTLE BODY INTAKE
AIR PIPE
INTAKE
MANIFOLD
BLK/ ECM/PCM VARIOUS

RED SENSORS
ENGINE
COOLANT
BLK
BLK
IAC
VALVE
From
YEL/BLK PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY
Intake Air System Diagram

This system supplies air for engine needs. A resonator in the intake air pipe provides additional silencing as air is
drawn into the system.
AIR CLEANER
RESONATOR
THROTTLE BODY INTAKE
AIR PIPE
INTAKE
MANIFOLD
BLK/ ECM/PCM VARIOUS

RED SENSORS
ENGINE
COOLANT
BLK
BLK
IAC
VALVE
From
YEL/BLK PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY
11-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:01 61S5N000_110_0035
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram

The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR valve and
the intake manifold into the combustion chambers. The ECM/PCM memory includes the ideal EGR valve position for
varying operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift and sends it to the ECM/PCM. The ECM/PCM then
compares it with the ideal lift in its memory (based on signals sent from other sensors). If there is any difference
between the two, the ECM/PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.
BLU/RED
YEL/
EGR VALVE BLU VARIOUS
POSITION WHT/ ECM/PCM SENSORS
SENSOR BLK
GRN/YEL
BLK
BLK
EGR
VALVE
INTAKE
MANIFOLD
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-35

00/10/26 15:15:01 61S5N000_110_0036

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged from the EVAP canister into the engine and burned.
• The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold.
The purging vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which is open whenever engine coolant
temperature is above 149°F (65°C).
• When vapor pressure in the fuel tank is higher than the set value of the EVAP two way valve, the valve opens and
regulates the flow of fuel vapor to the EVAP canister.
• During refueling, the fuel tank vapor control valve opens with the pressure in the fuel tank, and feeds the fuel vapor
to the EVAP canister.
YEL/
BLU
LT GRN
ECM/PCM VARIOUS
PNK SENSORS
BLU/
RED
BLK
EVAP BYPASS LT GRN/ RED/
SOLENOID VALVE RED YEL
FTP SENSOR From

BLK/ No. 4 ACG
FUEL TANK EVAP ORN (10 A)
VAPOR VALVE fuse
SIGNAL TUBE
FUEL TANK VAPOR EVAP CANISTER

RECIRCULATION PURGE VALVE
VALVE
FUEL FILL CAP FUEL TANK

FUEL TANK VAPOR EVAP
RECIRCULATION CANISTER
TUBE FUEL TANK
VAPOR CONTROL EVAP CANISTER
VALVE EVAP TWO WAY VENT SHUT VALVE
VALVE
11-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:02 61S5N000_110_0037
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram

JUNCTION
CONNECTOR C
C104
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
INJ1
B5 BRN
No. 1 INJECTOR
A
YEL/BLK
INJ2
B4 RED
No. 2 INJECTOR
YEL/BLK
INJ3
B3 BLU
No. 3 INJECTOR
YEL/BLK
INJ4
B2 YEL
No. 4 INJECTOR
IAC VALVE
YEL/BLK
IACV
A12 BLK/RED
BLK
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR B
BLK
C103
G101
YEL/BLK
TDC
A26 GRN
BRN/YEL
TDC SENSOR
YEL/BLK
CKP
A7 BLU
BRN/YEL
CKP SENSOR
*1:A/T
*2:M/T
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-37

00/10/26 15:15:02 61S5N000_110_0038

ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont’d)
VCC1
A21 YEL/RED
MAP
A19 GRN/RED MAP SENSOR
SG1 JUNCTION
A11 GRN/WHT CONNECTOR B
C103
VCC2
A20 YEL/BLU
YEL/BLU
RED/BLK
TPS GRN/YEL
A15 RED/BLK
TP SENSOR
YEL/BLU
KS
A9 RED/BLU
YEL
KNOCK SENSOR
VCCR
A8 YEL
I
EGRP
A13 WHT/BLK
EGR VALVE
POSITION
SENSOR
YEL/BLU
WHT/BLK
EGR GRN/YEL
B14 BLU/RED
BLK
EGR VALVE
C103
JUNCTION
BLK CONNECTOR B
J
G101
11-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:02 61S5N000_110_0039
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR B H
J
C103
GRN/
YEL
GRN/YEL
SG2
A10 GRN/YEL GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
IAT
B17 RED/YEL RED/YEL
IAT SENSOR
GRN/YEL
ECT
B8 RED/WHT RED/WHT
ECT SENSOR
To climate control unit
(with climate cotrol)
I
PHO2S
A6 WHT WHT
GRN/YEL
PO2SHTC BLK/WHT
A1 BLK/WHT BLK/YEL
PRIMARY
HO2S (SENSOR 1)
VTEC
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
VTPSW
B9 BLU/BLK
BRN/YEL
VTS
B15 GRN/YEL
VTEC
SOLENOID
VALVE
C104
BRN/YEL
LG1
A24 BRN/YEL JUNCTION
CONNECTOR C
LG2
A23 BRN/YEL
M G101
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-39

00/10/26 15:15:03 61S5N000_110_0040

JUNCTION
CONNECTOR A K L
VSS
C102
BLK/YEL
VSS
A18 WHT/GRN WHT/GRN
WHT/
GRN
C101
BLK
BLU/
WHT BLK/YEL
JUNCTION
BLK/YEL JUNCTION CONNECTOR B
BLK
P BLK/YEL CONNECTOR C
C103
C101 G101
C104
PCS BLK/YEL
B21 YEL/BLU
BLK/ EVAP CANISTER
ORN PURGE VALVE
Q
BLK/YEL
ALTL
B10 WHT/BLU
ALTF
B13 WHT/RED
ALT
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR C
C104
BLK/WHT To
IGPLS1 SPARK
A30 YEL/GRN PLUG
ICM
BLK
No. 1 IGNITION COIL
BLK/WHT To
IGPLS2 SPARK
A29 BLU/RED PLUG
ICM
BLK
No. 2 IGNITION COIL
BLK/WHT To
IGPLS3 SPARK
A28 WHT/BLU PLUG
ICM
BLK
No. 3 IGNITION COIL
BLK/WHT To
IGPLS4 SPARK
A27 BRN PLUG
ICM
BLK/ BLK
WHT No. 4 IGNITION COIL
C101
JUNCTION
BLK/ CONNECTOR B
WHT
BLK
R
C103
G101
11-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:03 61S5N000_110_0041
C103
PG1
A5 BLK
JUNCTION
PG2 CONNECTOR B
A4 BLK
BLK
A
G101
C104
YEL/BLK
IGP1
5V A3 YEL/BLK JUNCTION
CONNECTOR C
IGP2
A2 YEL/BLK
YEL/BLK
C563
YEL/GRN YEL/GRN
P
BLK
C101 C453
FUEL PUMP
G551
YEL/GRN
YEL/BLK
IMOFPR
E1 GRN/YEL GRN/YEL
YEL/BLK
PGM-FI
MAIN RELAY 2
YEL/BLK
WHT/BLK
MRLY
E7 RED/YEL
WHT/BLK
PGM-FI
MAIN RELAY 1
IMOCD
E27 RED/BLU To IMMOBILIZER UNIT
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-41

00/10/26 15:15:04 61S5N000_110_0042

*1
TCC
SOLENOID VALVE
LC
C2 YEL/BLU
BLK
C103
JUNCTION
BLK CONNECTOR B
G101
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
SHA
C6 BLU/BLK
SHB
C4 GRN/WHT
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
LSA＋
B7 RED/BLK
LSA−
C1 WHT/BLK
A/T
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A
LSB＋
B16 BLK/RED
LSB−
C8 BRN/WHT
A/T
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B
M
NM
C7 WHT/RED
NMSG
C21 WHT/GRN
MAINSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR
NC
C15 BLU
NCSG
C14 GRN
COUNTERSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR
11-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:04 61S5N000_110_0043
*1
JUNCTION BLU/BLK BLU/BLK P
CONNECTOR A
WHT WHT R
C102
BLK/RED BLK/RED N
ATPNP
C12 BLU/WHT C453 GAUGE ASSEMBLY
C101
ATPR BLU/WHT
C10 WHT
WHT BLK/BLU P
BLU/ WHT R
WHT
ATPD RED/BLK N
C20 YEL
YEL D
RED D3
ATPD3
C9 RED BLU 2
BLU/YEL
ATP2 BLK
C11 BLU
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
ATPFWD JUNCTION
C18 BLU/YEL BLK CONNECTOR B
C101 C103
LT GRN
G101
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-43

00/10/26 15:15:04 61S5N000_110_0044

LG3
E3 BRN/YEL
C451
BRN/YEL BRN/YEL
SHO2S
E2 WHT/RED WHT/RED
PNK PNK
BLK/WHT BLK/WHT
SG3 BLK/ORN BLK/ORN
E4 PNK
SECONDARY
HO2S
(SENSOR 2)
SO2SHTC
E6 BLK/WHT
BRN/
YEL
C452
VCC3
E5 YEL/BLU YEL/BLU
LT GRN LT GRN
FTP PNK PNK

E14 LT GRN FTP SENSOR
VSV
E21 LT GRN/RED LT GRN/RED
BLK/ORN BLK/ORN
EVAP
CANISTER VENT
SHUT VALVE
2WBS
E20 BLU/RED BLU/RED
BLK/ORN
BLK/ EVAP BYPASS
ORN SOLENOID
VALVE
*1
CCS
E12 BLU/ORN To cruise control unit
11-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:05 61S5N000_110_0045
C451
PSPSW
E16 LT GRN/BLK LT GRN/BLK
BLK
*1 PSP SWITCH
P G201
BLU/WHT CPU
YEL
C453
MIL MIL
E31 GRN/ORN GRN/ORN
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
V
C
WEN
E30 RED/WHT
RED/WHT
SCS
E29 BRN
WHT/RED DATA LINK
LT BLU CONNECTOR
K-LINE BRN/YEL
E23 LT BLU T E BLK
WHT/
BLK
G451
UNDER-HOOD
C451 FUSE/RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR E
WHT
CONNECTOR D
WHT/BLK
WHT/GRN
WHT/RED
BLK/YEL
L O N G
RED
C451 A/C CLUTCH

RELAY
ACC
E18 RED
C101
GRN/WHT
FANC
B6 GRN GRN/WHT
RADIATOR
FAN RELAY
BATTERY
G1
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-45

00/10/26 15:15:05 61S5N000_110_0046

*1
U S R Q D
*2
BLK/
Clutch pedal pressed:closed ORN MULTIPLEX
Clutch pedal released:open CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR D
LT GRN
BLK/ORN
BLK
CLUTCH PEDAL BLK/WHT
POSITION SWITCH
C402 C453 YEL/BLK
G401
LT GRN LT GRN
STARER
E CUT RELAY
IG1
E9 CONNECTOR E
YEL/BLK
BKSW
E22 WHT/BLK
BLU/WHT
YEL
SEFMJ BLU
E24
WHT/RED
NEP WHT/BLU
E26
CONNECTOR O
*1
ILU
E13 WHT/BLK
WHT/GRN
C
CONNECTOR K
YEL
IGNITION SWITCH
CONNECTOR A
IG2
BLK/RED
ST
BLK/WHT
IG1
＋B BLK/YEL
WHT
IG1 HOT in ON(II) G N O

and START(III) CONNECTOR J
WHT/GRN
L WHT/RED
BLK/YEL
TEST
TACHOMETER BLU
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR H
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX: WHT
No. 20 IG (40A)
No. 6 ECU(ECM/PCM) (15A)
No. 9 BACK UP (10A)
No. 7 HORN, STOP (15A) UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 19 BATTERY (80A)
UNDER-DASH BRAKE PEDAL

FUSE/RELAY BOX: POSITION SWITCH
No. 4 ACG (10A) WHT/GRN
No. 1 IGN COIL (15A) WHT/BLK
No. 17 FUEL PUMP (15A)
No. 10 METER (7.5A)
No. 14 A/C CLUTCH RELAY (10A) Brake pedal pressed:closed
Brake pedal released:open
11-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:05 61S5N000_110_0047
How to Set Readiness Codes

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication Catalytic Converter
(In relation to Readiness Codes)
NOTE:
The vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness codes’’ that are part • Do not turn the ignition switch OFF.
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. • When the battery negative cable is disconnected, all
If the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected or gone readiness codes are cleared.
dead, these codes are erased. In some states, part of
the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are Required condition:
set. If all of them are not set, the test cannot be Ambient temperture between 20−95°F (−7−35°C).
completed.
1. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector
To check if the readiness codes are set, turn the ignition (DLC).
switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will
come on for 15-20 seconds. If it then goes off, the 2. Start the engine. Hold it at 3,000 rpm with no load
readiness codes are set. If it blinks several times, the (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
readiness codes are not set completely. To reset each
code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in 3. Drive for about 10 minutes without stopping on a
the following procedures. highway or freeway. Your speed can vary.
4. With the A/T in D position, M/T in 5th gear, drive at

a steady speed between 50−62 mph (80−100 km/
h) for 30 seconds.
5. Repeat step 4 three times. Between each repetition,

close the throttle completely for 1−2 seconds. If
the engine is stopped during this part of the
procedure, go to step 3 and do the procedure again.
6. Check for the readiness code with the scan tool.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-47

00/10/26 15:15:06 61S5N000_110_0048
How to Set Readiness Codes (cont’d)

EGR Monitor EVAP Leak Monitor
NOTE: NOTE:
• Do not turn the ignition switch OFF. • When the battery negative cable is disconnected, all
• When the battery negative cable is disconnected, all readiness codes are cleared.
readiness codes are cleared. • If the engine is stopped while doing the procedure
between steps 6 and 16, do this procedure from step
1. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector 1 again.
(DLC).
1. Make sure the gasoline level is 60−90 % of fuel
2. Start the engine and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no tank capacity (not full).
load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes
on. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Drive at a steady speed with the A/T in D position, 3. Let the vehicle sit more than 8 hours.
M/T in 4th gear, between 50−62 mph (80−100
km/h) for more than 10 seconds. 4. Make sure the outside temperature is 20−95°F
(−7−35°C).
4. With the A/T in D position, M/T in 5th gear,
decelerate from 62 mph (100 km/h) by completely 5. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector
releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the (DLC).
engine is stopped during this procedure, go to step
3 and do the procedure again. 6. Start the engine and drive for about 20 minutes.
5. Check for the readiness code with the scan tool. 7. Keep the vehicle at a steady speed between 50−70
mph (80−114 km/h), without moving the
accelerator pedal, for about 1 minute.
8. Stop the vehicle (do not stop the engine).
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 two more time.
10. Check for the readiness code with the scan tool. If
the readiness code does not set, go to step 11.
11. When ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C),

hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
12. When ambient temperture is more than 86°F (30°C),

remove the fuel fill cap, then install the fuel fill cap.
13. After step 12, drive for about 20 minutes on a

freeway.
14. Keep the vehicle at a steady speed between 50−70

mph (80−114 km/h), without moving the
accelerator pedal, for about 1 minute.
15. Stop the vehicle (do not stop the engine).
16. Repeat steps 14 and 15 two more times.
11-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:06 61S5N000_110_0049
HO2S Monitor HO2S Heater Monitor

NOTE: NOTE: When the battery negative cable is disconnected,
• Do not turn the ignition switch OFF. all readiness codes are cleared.
• When the battery negative cable is disconnected, all
readiness codes are cleared. 1. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector
(DLC).
Required condition:
Ambient temperature between 20−95°F (−7−35°C). 2. Start the engine, and let the engine idle for 10
minutes.
(DLC). 3. Check for the readiness code with the scan tool.
2. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no

load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes
on.
3. Let the engine idle for 5 seconds.
4. Drive at a steady speed between 50−62 mph (80−

100 km/h) for about 2 minutes.
5. With the A/T in D position, M/T in 5th gear,

decelerate from 62 mph (100 km/h) by completely
releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the
engine is stopped during this procedure, go to step
4 and do the procedure again.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-49

00/10/26 15:15:08 61S5N000_110_0050
PGM-FI System
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE

(IAT) SENSOR
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE

(MAP) SENSOR
TOP DEAD CENTER (TDC)

SENSOR
Troubleshooting,
page 11-96
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)

SENSOR
Troubleshooting,
page 11-86
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE THROTTLE POSITION (TP)
(ECT) SENSOR SENSOR
Troubleshooting, page 11-58 Troubleshooting, page 11-60
KNOCK SENSOR
11-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:09 61S5N000_110_0051
PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN

SENSOR (PRIMARY HO2S) SENSOR (SECONDARY HO2S)
(SENSOR 1) (SENSOR 2)
Troubleshooting, page 11-66 Troubleshooting, page 11-71
Replacement, page 11-114 Replacement, page 11-114
INJECTORS
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-51

00/10/26 15:15:10 61S5N000_110_0052
PGM-FI System
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)

General Troubleshooting Information,
page 11-3
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE/

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
(ECM/PCM)
General Troubleshooting Information,
page 11-3
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1

11-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:11 61S5N000_110_0053
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0107: MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Is there about 5 V ?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A21) and the MAP sensor.
2. Check the MAP with the scan tool.
NO−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have
Is about 101 kPa ( 7 60 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) or 2.9 V the latset software, or substitute a known-good
indicated? ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the
YES−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM.
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the
MAP sensor and at the ECM/PCM. 8. Check the MAP with the scan tool.
NO−Go to step 3. Is 2 kPa ( 15 mmHg, 0.6 in.Hg) or less or 0 V

indicated?
YES−Go to step 9.
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.
NO−Replace the MAP sensor.
6. Measure voltage between the MAP sensor 3P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3. 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) 11. Check for continuity between the MAP sensor
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
VCC1
(YEL/RED) MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
SG1
(GRN/WHT)
MAP
(GRN/RED)
Is there about 5 V ? Wire side of female terminals
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Go to step 7.
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
7. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector PCM (A19) and the MAP sensor.
terminals A11 and A21.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) the latest software, or substitute a known-good
VCC1 ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM.
(YEL/RED)
SG1
(GRN/WHT)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-53

00/10/26 15:15:11 61S5N000_110_0054
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont’d)

DTC P0108: MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 9. Measure voltage between the MAP sensor 3P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with
no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
comes on, then let it idle.
VCC1
(YEL/RED)
SG1
Is about 101 kPa ( 7 60 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) or higher, (GRN/WHT)
or about 2.9 V or higher indicated?
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
MAP sensor and at the ECM/PCM. Is there about 5 V ?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES−Go to step 10.
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector. NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
5. Connect the MAP sensor 3P connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 3 with a jumper wire. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR 11. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminals A11 and
A19 with a jumper wire.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
MAP
(GRN/RED) SG1 (GRN/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
SG1 MAP
(GRN/WHT) (GRN/RED)
JUMPER WIRE

Is about 101 kPa ( 7 60 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) or higher,
or about 2.9 V or higher indicated? Is about 101 kPa ( 7 60 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) or higher,
or about 2.9 V or higher indicated?
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Replace the MAP sensor. the latest software, or substitute a known-good
8. Remove the jumper wire. symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/

11-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:11 61S5N000_110_0055
DTC P1128: MAP Sensor Signal Lower Than DTC P1129: MAP Sensor Signal Higher Than
Expected Expected
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with
no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan
2. Check the MAP with the scan tool. comes on, then let it idle.
Is 54.1 kPa ( 406 mmHg, 16.0 in.Hg), 1.6 V , or 2. Check the MAP with the scan tool.
higher indicated?
Is 36.9 kPa ( 27 7 mmHg, 10.9 in.Hg), 1.1 V , or less
YES−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this indicated?
time.
YES−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
NO−Replace the MAP sensor. time.
NO−Replace the MAP sensor.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-55

00/10/26 15:15:11 61S5N000_110_0056
PGM-FI System

DTC P0112: IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 8. Check the temperature reading on the scan tool.
Be aware that if the engine is warm, the reading
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). will be higher than ambient temperature. If the
engine is cold, the IAT and ECT will have the same
2. Check the IAT with the scan tool. value.
Is 302°F ( 150°C) or higher ( or H-Limit in Honda Is the correct ambient temperature indicated?
mode of PGM T ester) or 0 V indicated?
YES−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
YES−Go to step 3. Check for poor connections or loose wires at the
IAT sensor and at the ECM/PCM.
NO−Go to step 8.
NO−Replace the IAT sensor.
3. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector.
4. Check the IAT with the scan tool.
Is 302°F ( 150°C) or higher ( or H-Limit in Honda

YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Replace the IAT sensor.
7. Check for continuity between the IAT sensor 2P

IAT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
IAT
(RED/YEL)

PCM (B17) and the IAT sensor.

11-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:12 61S5N000_110_0057
DTC P0113: IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage 7. Check the IAT with the scan tool.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is −4°F ( −20°C) or less ( or L-Limit in Honda
YES−Go to step 8.
Is −4°F ( −20°C) or less ( or L-Limit in Honda
mode of PGM T ester) or 5 V indicated? NO−Replace the IAT sensor.
YES−Go to step 3. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO−Intermitent failure, system is OK at this time. 9. Remove the jumper wire.

IAT sensor and at the ECM/PCM. 10. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminals A10 and
B17 with a jumper wire.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
4. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector.
A (31 P) B (24 P)
5. Connect the IAT sensor 2P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
IAT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

SG2 (GRN/YEL) IAT (RED/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE
SG2 IAT Wire side of female terminals

(GRN/YEL) (RED/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE

ECM/PCM then recheck (see page 11-6). If the

PCM (A10, B17) and the IAT sensor.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-57

00/10/26 15:15:12 61S5N000_110_0058
PGM-FI System

DTC P0116: ECT Sensor Range/Performance DTC P0117: ECT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Problem
NOTE: If DTC P0117 and/or P0118 are stored at the
same time as DTC P0116, troubleshoot those DTCs first, 2. Check the ECT with the scan tool.
then recheck for DTC P0116.
Is 302°F ( 150°C) or higher ( or H-Limit in Honda
1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with mode of PGM T ester) or 0 V indicated?
comes on, then let it idle. YES−Go to step 3.
2. Check the ECT with the scan tool. NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Is 17 6−212°F ( 80 −100°C) or 0.5 −0.8 V ECT sensor and at the ECM/PCM.
indicated?
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector.
Check the thermostat and the cooling system. 4. Check the ECT with the scan tool.
NO−Check the thermostat and the cooling system. Is 302°F ( 150°C) or higher ( or H-Limit in Honda
If they are OK, replace the ECT sensor. mode of PGM T ester) or 0 V indicated?
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Replace the ECT sensor.
11-58 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:12 61S5N000_110_0059
7. Check for continuity between the ECT sensor 2P DTC P0118: ECT Sensor Circuit High Voltage
ECT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
2. Check the ECT with the scan tool.

ECT YES−Go to step 3.

(RED/WHT)
ECT sensor and at the ECM/PCM.
Is there continuity? 4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector.
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ 5. Connect the ECT sensor 2P connector terminals
PCM (B8) and the ECT sensor. No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
NO−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have ECT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

SG2 ECT
(GRN/YEL) (RED/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-59

00/10/26 15:15:13 61S5N000_110_0060
PGM-FI System

7. Check the ECT with the scan tool. DTC P0122: TP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Is −4°F ( −20°C) or less ( or L-Limit in Honda 1. Turn the ignition switch ON(II).
2. Check the throttle position with the scan tool.
YES−Go to step 8.
Is there about 10% or 0.5 V when the throttle is
NO−Replace the ECT sensor. f ully closed and about 90% or 4.5 V when the
throttle is f ully opened?
9. Remove the jumper wire. Check for poor connections or loose wires at the TP
sensor and at the ECM/PCM.
10. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminals A10 and B8
with a jumper wire. NO−Go to step 3.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Disconnect the TP sensor 3P connector.

A (31P) B (24P)
6. Measure voltage between the TP sensor 3P

SG2 (GRN/YEL) ECT (RED/WHT) connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
JUMPER WIRE
TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). VCC2 SG2

(YEL/BLU) (GRN/YEL)
12. Check the ECT with the scan tool.

ECM/PCM then recheck (see page 11-6). If the Is there about 5 V ?
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/ NO−Go to step 14.
PCM (A10, B8) and the ECT sensor.
11-60 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:13 61S5N000_110_0061
8. At the sensor side, measure resistance between the 11. At the wire harness side, check for continuity
TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 between TP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2
with the throttle fully closed. and body ground.
TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
SG2
TPS
(RED/BLK)
TPS
Terminal side of male terminals Wire side of female terminals
Is there about 0.5 −0.9 k ? Is there continuity?
YES−Go to step 9. YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/

PCM (A15) and the TP sensor.
NO−Replace the throttle body.
NO−Go to step 12.
9. Measure resistance between the TP sensor 3P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with the 12. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A15 and
throttle fully closed. body ground with a jumper wire.
TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
VCC2
TPS JUMPER WIRE

TPS (RED/BLK)
Terminal side of male terminals Wire side of female terminals
Is there about 4.5k ?
NO−Replace the throttle body.
10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-61

00/10/26 15:15:13 61S5N000_110_0062
PGM-FI System

13. At the wire harness side, check for continuity
between the TP sensor 3P connector terminals
No. 2 and body ground.
TPS
(RED/BLK)


14. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector

SG2 VCC2
(GRN/YEL) (YEL/BLU)
Is there about 5 V ?
YES−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/


11-62 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:13 61S5N000_110_0063
DTC P0123: TP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 7. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
2. Check the throttle position with the scan tool.
Is there about 10% or 0.5 V when the throttle is

f ully closed and about 90% or 4.5 V when the
throttle is f ully opened?
YES−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. SG2 VCC2

(GRN/YEL) (YEL/BLU)
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the TP
sensor and at the ECM/PCM.
NO−Go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is there about 5 V ?
4. Disconnect the TP sensor 3P connector. YES−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
6. At the wire harness side, measure voltage between the latest software, or substitute a known-good
the TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the
No. 3. symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
VCC2 SG2
(YEL/BLU) (GRN/YEL)
YES−Replace the throttle body.
NO−Go to step 7.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-63

00/10/26 15:15:14 61S5N000_110_0064
PGM-FI System

DTC P1121: TP Sensor Signal Lower Than DTC P1122: TP Sensor Signal Higher Than
Expected Expected
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check the throttle position with the scan tool. 2. Check the throttle position with the scan tool.
Is 14.1 %, 0.7 V , or higher indicated when the Is 14.1 %, 0.7 V , or less indicated when the throttle
throttle is f ully opened? is f ully closed?
YES−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this YES−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this

time. time.
NO−Replace the TP sensor. NO−Replace the TP sensor.
11-64 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:14 61S5N000_110_0065
DTC P0128: Cooling System Malfunction 3. Check the radiator fan.
Does the radiator f an keep running?

NOTE: If the DTCs listed below are stored at the same
time as DTC P0128, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then YES−Check the radiator fan circuit with A/C model
recheck for P0128. (see page 10-15) or without A/C model (see page
10-15), radiator fan switch circuit (see page 10-18),
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold Absolute and the radiator fan switch (see page 10-19). If they
Pressure (MAP) sensor are OK, reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have
P1106, P1107, P1108: Barometric Pressure (BARO) the latest software, or substitute a known-good
sensor ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the
P1259: VTEC system symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
P0401, P1491, P1498: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM.
system
P0116, P0117, P0118: Engine Coolant Temperature NO−Replace the thermostat (see page 10-10).
(ECT) sensor
P0112, P0113: Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor
P0500, P0501: Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
P0335, P0336: Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor
P0300: Random misfire
P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304: No. 1, No. 2, No. 3 or No. 4
cylinder misfire
P0505:Idle control system Malfunction
P1519: Idle Air Control (IAC) valve
DTC P0128 can occasionally set when the hood is

opened while the engine is running.
1. Check the engine coolant level.
Is the engine coolant level low?
YES−Refill the engine coolant. If necessary, repair

the coolant leakage.
NO−Go to step 2.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-65

00/10/26 15:15:14 61S5N000_110_0066
PGM-FI System

DTC P0131: Primary HO2S (Sensor 1) Circuit 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Low Voltage
1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4).
11. Check for continuity between the primary HO2S
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body
no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan ground.
comes on.
PRIMARY HO2S (SENSOR 1)
4P CONNECTOR
3. Check the primary HO2S (Sensor 1) output voltage
with the scan tool during acceleration using wide PHO2S
open throttle. (WHT)
Does the voltage stay at 0.5 V or less?
YES−Go to step 4.

primary HO2S (Sensor 1) and at the ECM/PCM. Terminal side of
male terminals
4. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-130).
Is it normal?
YES−Go to step 5. PCM (A6) and the primary HO2S (Sensor 1).
NO−Repair the fuel supply system. NO−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the
6. Disconnect the primary HO2S (Sensor 1) 4P ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM.
connector.

with the scan tool.
Does it stay at 0.5 V or less?
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Replace the primary HO2S (Sensor 1).
11-66 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:14 61S5N000_110_0067
DTC P0132: Primary HO2S (Sensor 1) Circuit 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
High Voltage
10. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminals A6 and A10
1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4). with a jumper wire.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
comes on.
PHO2S (WHT)

with the scan tool.
Does the voltage stay at 0.9 V or more?
YES−Go to step 4. SG2 JUMPER WIRE

(GRN/YEL)
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Wire side of female terminals

primary HO2S (Sensor 1) and at the ECM/PCM.
5. Disconnect the primary HO2S (Sensor 1) 4P with the scan tool.
connector.
Is there 0.9 V or more?
6. Connect the primary HO2S (Sensor 1) 4P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire. YES−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have
PRIMARY HO2S (SENSOR 1) ECM/PCM and then recheck (see page 11-6). If the
4P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
PCM (A6, A10) and the primary HO2S (Sensor 1).
PHO2S
SG2 (WHT)
(GRN/
YEL)
Terminal side of
male terminals

with the scan tool.
YES−Go to step 9.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-67

00/10/26 15:15:15 61S5N000_110_0068
PGM-FI System

DTC P0133: Primary HO2S (Sensor 1) Slow
Response
NOTE: If DTC P0131, P0132 and/or P0135 are stored at
the same time as DTC P0133, troubleshoot those DTCs
first, then recheck for DTC P0133.

comes on.
3. Test-drive under the following conditions:
• 55 mph (89 km/h) steady speed

• A/T in D position (M/T in 5th gear)
• Until readiness code or Temporary DTC P0133
comes on
4. Check for a Temporary DTC with the scan tool.
Is T emporary DT C P0133 indicated?
YES−Replace the primary HO2S (Sensor 1).

primary HO2S (Sensor 1), and at the ECM/PCM.
11-68 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:15 61S5N000_110_0069
DTC P0135: Primary HO2S (Sensor 1) Heater 6. Check for continuity between body ground and the
Circuit Malfunction primary HO2S (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals
No. 3 and No. 4 individually.
PRIMARY HO2S (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
Is DT C P0135 indicated?
YES−Go to step 3.

primary HO2S (Sensor 1) and at the ECM/PCM.
Wire side of
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. female terminals
4. Disconnect the primary HO2S (Sensor 1) 4P

connector. Is there continuity?
5. At the primary HO2S side, measure resistance YES−Replace the primary HO2S (Sensor 1).
between the primary HO2S (sensor 1) 4P connector
terminals No. 3 and No. 4. NO−Go to step 7.

8. Measure voltage between the primary HO2S

(Sensor 1) 4P connector terminal No. 3 and No. 4.
PO2SHTC IG1
(BLK (BLK
/WHT) /YEL)
Wire side of
female terminals
Is there 10−40 ?
Wire side of
YES−Go to step 6. female terminals

YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Go to step 12.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-69

00/10/26 15:15:15 61S5N000_110_0070
PGM-FI System

11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
terminal A1 and body ground.
14. Reconnect the primary HO2S (Sensor 1) 4P
connector.

PO2SHTC
(BLK/WHT)

terminal A1 and A5.

PG1 (BLK)
PO2SHTC
(BLK/WHT)
PCM (A1) and the primary HO2S (Sensor 1).

the latest software, or substitute a known-good Wire side of female terminals
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Is there 0.1 V or less?
12. Measure voltage between the primary HO2S YES−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
(Sensor 1) 4P connector terminal No. 3 (No. 4)* and PCM (A1) and the primary HO2S (Sensor 1).
body ground.
PRIMARY HO2S (SENSOR 1) the latest software, or substitute a known-good
4P CONNECTOR ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the
IG1
(BLK/YEL)
Terminal side of
male terminals
NO−Check the No. 4 ACG (10A) fuse in the under-

dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in
the wire between the primary HO2S (Sensor 1) and
the No. 4 ACG (10A) fuse.
11-70 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:16 61S5N000_110_0071
DTC P0137: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 10. Check for continuity between the secondary HO2S
Circuit Low Voltage (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
SECONDARY HO2S
(SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
comes on.
SHO2S (WHT/RED)
3. Check the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) output
voltage at 3,000 rpm with the scan tool.
YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Terminal side of male terminals

secondary HO2S (Sensor 2), and at the Is there continuity?
ECM/PCM.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. PCM (E2) and the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2).
5. Disconnect the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P NO−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have
connector. the latest software, or substitute a known-good
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
voltage with the scan tool.
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Replace the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2).
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-71

00/10/26 15:15:16 61S5N000_110_0072
PGM-FI System

DTC P0138: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 8. Check the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) output
Circuit High Voltage voltage with the scan tool.
1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4). Is there 1.0 V or more?
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with YES−Go to step 9.
comes on. NO−Replace the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2).
3. Check the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) output 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminals E2 and E4
Does the voltage stay at 1.0 V or more? with a jumper wire.
YES−Go to step 4.

Check for poor connections or loose wires at the JUMPER
WIRE
secondary HO2S (Sensor 2), and at the SHO2S SG3 (PNK)
ECM/PCM. (WHT/RED)
5. Disconnect the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P

connector.
6. Connect the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper
wire. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
SECONDARY HO2S
(SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR 12. Check the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) output
voltage with the scan tool.
JUMPER WIRE

SG3 (PNK) SHO2S (WHT/RED)

Terminal side of male terminals PCM (E2, E4) and the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2).
11-72 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:16 61S5N000_110_0073
DTC P0139: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Slow

Response

comes on.

Does the voltage stay within 0.3−0.8 V f or 2

minutes?
YES−Replace the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2).

secondary HO2S (Sensor 2), and at the
ECM/PCM.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-73

00/10/26 15:15:16 61S5N000_110_0074
PGM-FI System

DTC P0141: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 6. Check for continuity between body ground and the
Heater Circuit Malfunction secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals
No. 3 and No. 4 individually.
1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4). SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
YES−Go to step 3.

secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and at the ECM/PCM.
4. Disconnect the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P Is there continuity?

connector.
YES−Replace the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2).
5. At the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) side, measure
resistance between the HO2S 4P connector NO−Go to step 7.
terminals No. 3 and No. 4.
SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
8. Measure voltage between the secondary HO2S 4P
SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
SO2SHTC
(BLK/WHT) IG1 (BLK/ORN)
Is there 10−40 ?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Replace the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2). Is there battery voltage?
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Go to step 12.
11-74 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:17 61S5N000_110_0075
terminal E6 and body ground.
14. Reconnect the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
SO2SHTC 15. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).

(BLK/WHT)

terminal E6 and A5.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
PG1 (BLK)
A (31 P)
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ SO2SHTC

(BLK/WHT)
PCM E6 and the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2). E (31 P)

ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the Wire side of female terminals
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. Is there 0.1 V or less?
12. Measure voltage between the secondary HO2S YES−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body PCM (E6) and the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2).
ground.
SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR the latest software, or substitute a known-good
IG1
(BLK/ORN)
NO−Check the No. 4 ACG (10A) fuse in the under-

dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in
the wire between the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2)
and No. 4 ACG (10A) fuse.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-75

00/10/26 15:15:17 61S5N000_110_0076
PGM-FI System

DTC P0171: Fuel System Too Lean 5. With a vacuum pump, apply vacuum to the
evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve
DTC P0172: Fuel System Too Rich (A) from the intake manifold side.
A
NOTE: If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at
the same time as DTC P0171 and/or P0172,
troubleshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for P0171
and/or P0172.
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold Absolute

Pressure (MAP) sensor
P0135: Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary HO2S)
(Sensor 1) heater A973X-041-
P0137, P0138: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) XXXXX
P0141: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) heater
P0401 P1491, P1498: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
system
P1259: VTEC system
Does it hold vacuum?
1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-130).
YES−Check the valve clearances and adjust if
Is f uel pressure OK ? necessary. If the valve clearances are OK, replace
the injectors.
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Replace the EVAP canister purge valve.
NO−Check these items:
• If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel

pressure regulator (see page 11-137).
• If the pressure is too low, check the fuel pump,
the fuel feed pipe, the fuel filter, and replace the
fuel pressure regulator (see page 11-137).

comes on.
3. Check the primary HO2S (Sensor 1) output with the

scan tool.
Does it stay at less than 0.3 V or more than 0.6 V ?
YES−Replace the primary HO2S (Sensor 1).
NO−Go to step 4.
11-76 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:17 61S5N000_110_0077
DTC P0300: Random Misfire and Any Combination of the Following:
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire
NOTE:
• If the misfiring is frequent enough to trigger detection of increased emissions during two consecutive driving cycles,
the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0304) will be stored.
• If the misfiring is frequent enough to damage the catalyst, the MIL will blink whenever the misfiring occurs, and DTC
P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0304) will be stored. When the misfiring stops, the MIL will remain
on.
1. Troubleshoot the following DTCs first if any of them were stored along with the random misfire DTC(s):
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
P0131, P0132: Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor
P0171, P0172: Fuel system
P0335, P0336: Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor
P0401, P1491, P1498: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system
P0505: Idle control system
P1259: VTEC system
P1361, P1362: Top Dead Center (TDC) sensor
P1519: Idle Air Control (IAC) valve
2. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the symptom.
3. Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the order listed until you find the cause.
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for:

Random misfire only Check fuel pressure (see page 11-130). • Low compression.
at low RPM and • Low quality fuel.
under load
Random misfire only Check fuel pressure (see page 11-130). Malfunction in the
during acceleration VTEC system (see
page 6-7).
Random misfire at Check fuel pressure (see page 11-130). Correct valve
high RPM, under clearance (see page
load, or under 6-9).
random conditions
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-77

00/10/26 15:15:18 61S5N000_110_0078
PGM-FI System

DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire 7. Determine which cylinder(s) had the misfire.
DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Does the misf ire occur in the other cylinder whose
ignition coil was exchanged?
YES−Replace the faulty ignition coil.
NO−Go to step 8.
1. After checking and recording the freeze data, reset 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and reset the ECM/
the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4). If there is no freeze PCM.
data of the misfire, just clear the DTC.
9. Exchange the spark plug from the problem cylinder
2. Start the engine, and listen for a clicking sound at with one from another cylinder.
the injector at the problem cylinder.
10. Test-drive the vehicle several times in the range of
Does it click? the freeze data or under various conditions if there
was no freeze data.
YES−Go to step 3.
11. Check the DTC or the Temporary DTC with the scan
NO−Go to step 30. Tool.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and reset the ECM/ Is DT C or T emporary DT C P0301, P0302, P0303
PCM. or P0304 indicated?
4. Exchange the ignition coil from the problem YES−Go to step 12.
cylinder with one from another cylinder.
NO−Intermittent misfire due to spark plug fouling,
5. Test-drive the vehicle several times in the range of etc. (no misfire at this time).
the freeze data or under various conditions if there
was no freeze data. 12. Determine which cylinder(s) had the misfire.
6. Check the DTC or the Temporary DTC with the scan Does the misf ire occur in the other cylinder whose
tool. spark plug was exchanged?
Is DT C or T emporary DT C P0301, P0302, P0303 YES−Replace the faulty spark plug.

or P0304 indicated?
NO−Go to step 13.
YES−Go to step 7.
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF, reset the ECM/PCM.
NO−Intermittent misfire due to poor contact at the
ignition coil connector (no misfire at this time). 14. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder
with one from the another cylinder.
15. Let the engine idle for 2 minutes.
11-78 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:18 61S5N000_110_0079
16. Test-drive the vehicle several times in the range of 22. Measure voltage between the ignition coil 3P
the freeze data or under various conditions if there connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
was no freeze data.
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
17. Check the DTC or the Temporary DTC with the scan
Tool.
Is a DT C or T emporary DT C P0301, P0302, IG

(BLK/WHT)
P0303 or P0304 indicated?
NO−Intermittent misfire due to bad contact at the

injector connector (no misfire at this time).
18. Determine which cylinder (s) had the misfire.
Does the misf ire occur in the other cylinder whose Is there battery voltage?
injector was exchanged?
YES−Replace the faulty injector
(see page 11-112). NO−Repair open or short in the wire between the
No. 1 IGN COIL (15A) fuse and the ignition coil.
NO−Go to step 19.
24. Check for continuity between the ignition coil 3P
20. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector from the connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
problem cylinder.
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
GND
(BLK)
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ignition

coil and G101.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-79

00/10/26 15:15:18 61S5N000_110_0080
PGM-FI System

26. Check for continuity between body ground and the 28. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate ECM/PCM connector terminal (see appropriate ECM/PCM connector terminal (see
table). table).
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
IGPLS1 IGPLS1
(YEL/GRN) (YEL/GRN)
IGPLS4 (BRN) IGPLS4 (BRN)
IGPLS2 IGPLS2
IGPLS3 (BLU/RED) IGPLS3 (BLU/RED)
(WHT/BLU) (WHT/BLU)
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
PROBLEM DTC ECM/PCM WIRE PROBLEM DTC ECM/PCM WIRE

CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0301 A30 YEL/GRN No. 1 P0301 A30 YEL/GRN
No. 2 P0302 A29 BLU/RED No. 2 P0302 A29 BLU/RED
No. 3 P0303 A28 WHT/BLU No. 3 P0303 A28 WHT/BLU
No. 4 P0304 A27 BRN No. 4 P0304 A27 BRN
Is there continuity? Is there continuity?
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ YES−Go to step 29.
PCM and the ignition coil.
NO−Go to step 27. PCM and the ignition coil.
27. Connect the appropriate ignition coil 3P connector 29. Check the engine compression.
terminal No. 1 and body ground with a jumper wire
(see table). Is the engine compression OK ?
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR YES−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have

JUMPER WIRE symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
NO−Repair the engine.

PROBLEM DTC WIRE COLOR

CYLINDER
No. 1 P0301 YEL/GRN
No. 2 P0302 BLU/RED
No. 3 P0303 WHT/BLU
No. 4 P0304 BRN
11-80 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:19 61S5N000_110_0081
32. Measure voltage between body ground and the 36. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder
appropriate ECM/PCM connector terminal (see with one from another cylinder.
table).
37. Reset the ECM/PCM.
38. Install the air cleaner (see page 11-145).

INJ3 INJ4 (YEL) INJ1 (BRN) INJ2
(BLU) (RED)
39. Let the engine idle for 2 minutes.
40. Test-drive the vehicle several times in the range of

the freeze data or under various conditions if there
was no freeze data.
41. Check the DTC or the Temporary DTC with a scan

Wire side of female terminals tool.
PROBLEM DTC ECM/PCM WIRE Is a DT C or T emporary DT C P0301, P0302,

CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR P0303, or P0304 indicated?
No. 1 P0301 B5 BRN
No. 2 P0302 B4 RED YES−Go to step 42.
No. 3 P0303 B3 BLU
No. 4 P0304 B2 YEL NO−Intermittent misfire due to injector
malfunction, etc.
42. Determine which cylinder (s) had the misfire.
Does the misf ire occur in the other cylinder whose
NO−Go to step 43. injector was exchanged?
33. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the air YES−Replace the faulty injector.
cleaner (see page 11-145).
34. Disconnect the injector 2P connector on the the latest software, or substitute a known-good
problem cylinder. ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the
35. Measure the resistance between the injector 2P ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM.
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
44. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-145).
45. Disconnect the injector 2P connector on the

problem cylinder.
IGP INJ
Is there 10 −13 ?
NO−Replace the injector (see page 11-112).

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-81

00/10/26 15:15:19 61S5N000_110_0082
PGM-FI System

47. Measure voltage between the injector 2P connector 50. Connect the appropriate injector 2P connector
terminals No. 1 and body ground. terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire
(see table).
IGP (YEL/BLK)
INJ
JUMPER
WIRE


PROBLEM DTC WIRE COLOR
YES−Go to step 48. CYLINDER
No. 1 P0301 BRN
NO−Repair open in the wire between the injector No. 2 P0302 RED
and the PGM-FI main relay. No. 3 P0303 BLU
No. 4 P0304 YEL
51. Check for continuity between body ground and the
49. Check for continuity between body ground and the appropriate ECM/PCM connector terminal (see
appropriate ECM/PCM connector terminal (see table).
table).
INJ3 INJ4 (YEL) INJ1 (BRN) INJ2

INJ3 INJ4 (YEL) INJ1 (BRN) INJ2 (BLU) (RED)
(BLU) (RED)
PROBLEM DTC ECM/PCM WIRE PROBLEM DTC ECM/PCM WIRE

CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0301 B5 BRN No. 1 P0301 B5 BRN
No. 2 P0302 B4 RED No. 2 P0302 B4 RED
No. 3 P0303 B3 BLU No. 3 P0303 B3 BLU
No. 4 P0304 B2 YEL No. 4 P0304 B2 YEL
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ YES−Replace the injector, then recheck.
PCM and the injector.
NO−Go to step 50. PCM and the injector.
11-82 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:19 61S5N000_110_0083
DTC P0325: Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction 8. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan KS
comes on, then let it idle. (RED
/BLU)
3. Hold the engine at 3,000−4,000 rpm for at least 60

seconds.
YES−Go to step 4. Wire side of female terminals

Check for poor connections or loose wires at the Is there about 5 V ?
knock sensor and at the ECM/PCM.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. PCM (A9) and the knock sensor.
5. Disconnect the knock sensor 3P connector. NO−Go to step 9.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Measure voltage between the knock sensor 3P 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
KNOCK SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR terminal A9 and body ground.

KS
(RED/BLU)
KS
(RED
/BLU)

NO−Go to step 8. PCM (A9) and the knock sensor.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-83

00/10/26 15:15:20 61S5N000_110_0084
PGM-FI System

12. Substitute a known-good knock sensor and recheck.

NO−Replace the original knock sensor.
11-84 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:20 61S5N000_110_0085
DTC P1324: Knock Sensor Power Source 7. Connect the knock sensor 3P connector terminals
Circuit Low Votage No. 2 and No. 3 with a jumper wire.
1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4). KNOCK SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
VCCR
VCC2 (YEL)
YES−Go to step 3. (YEL/BLU)
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. JUMPER WIRE

knock sensor and at the ECM/PCM.
4. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P). 8. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminals A8 and A20. ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
VCCR (YEL)
VCCR (YEL)
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
VCC2 Wire side of female terminals
(YEL/BLU)
Is there continuity? YES−Replace the knock sensor.
YES−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
the latest software, or substitute a known-good PCM (A8, A20) and the knock sensor.
NO−Go to step 6.
6. Disconnect the knock sensor 3P connector.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-85

00/10/26 15:15:20 61S5N000_110_0086
PGM-FI System

DTC P0335: CKP Sensor No Signal 7. Measure voltage between the CKP sensor 3P
DTC P0336: CKP Sensor Intermittent
Interruption CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4). CKP

(BLU)
Is DT C P0335 and/ or P0336 indicated?
YES−Go to step 3.
CKP sensor and at the ECM/PCM. Is there about 5 V ?
4. Disconnect the CKP sensor 3P connector. NO−Go to step 10.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Measure voltage between the CKP sensor 3P
6. Measure voltage between the CKP sensor 3P
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR IGP

(YEL/BLK)
IGP
(YEL/BLK) LG1
(BRN/YEL)
Wire side of female terminals Is there battery voltage?
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the CKP
YES−Go to step 7. sensor and G101.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the PGM-FI 9. Substitute a known-good CKP sensor and recheck.
main relay 1 and the CKP sensor.

NO−Replace the original CKP sensor.
11-86 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:20 61S5N000_110_0087

CKP (BLU)

PCM (A7) and the CKP sensor.
NO−Go to step 11.

CKP (BLU)

PCM (A7) and the CKP sensor.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-87

00/10/26 15:15:21 61S5N000_110_0088
PGM-FI System

DTC P0500: VSS Circuit Malfunction 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
DTC P0501: VSS Range/Performance 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).

Problem
1. Test-drive the vehicle.
12. Block the right front wheel, and slowly rotate the
2. Check the vehicle speed with the scan tool. left front wheel.
Is the correct speed indicated? 13. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
VSS and at the ECM.
NO−Go to step 3.

LG1 VSS
4. Block the rear wheels and set the parking brake. (BRN/YEL) (WHT/GRN)
5. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is Wire side of female terminals
securely supported.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Does the voltage pulse between 0 V and 5 V or
battery voltage?
7. Block the right front wheel, and slowly rotate the
left front wheel. YES−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have
8. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the
terminals A18 and A24. symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
NO−Check these items:
• A short or an open in the wire between the ECM/

PCM (A18) and the VSS.
• If the wire is OK, test the VSS (see page 22-63).
LG1 VSS
(BRN/YEL) (WHT/GRN)
Does the voltage pulse between 0 V and 5 V or

battery voltage?

NO−Go to step 9.
11-88 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:21 61S5N000_110_0089
DTC P0563: ECM/PCM Power Source Circuit 8. Remove the glove box.
Unexpected Voltage
9. Remove the PGM-FI main relay 1 (A).
A
3. Wait 5 seconds.
YES−Go to step 5.

Check for poor connections or loose wires at the No.
6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box and at the ECM/PCM. 10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
MRLY
(RED/YEL)

MRLY
(RED/YEL)

Wire side of female terminals PCM (E7) and the PGM-FI main relay 1.
NO−Replace the PGM-FI main relay 1.

11. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
NO−Go to step 8.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-89

00/10/26 15:15:22 61S5N000_110_0090
PGM-FI System

12. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector 15. Remove the glove box.
16. Remove the PGM-FI main relay 1 (A).
A
MRLY
(RED/YEL)

17. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/
NO−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have PCM connector terminals A3 and A2 individually.
ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. IGP2 IGP1
(YEL/BLK) (YEL/BLK)

PCM connector terminals A3 and A2 individually.
IGP2 IGP1 Wire side of female terminals

(YEL/BLK) (YEL/BLK)
YES−Repair short to power in the wire between

the ECM/PCM (A2, A3) and the PGM-FI main relay
1.
Wire side of female terminals NO−Replace the PGM-FI main relay 1.

11-90 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:22 61S5N000_110_0091
DTC P1106: BARO Sensor Range/Perfomance DTC P1107: BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Problem
DTC P1108: BARO Sensor Circuit High
1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4). Voltage
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with 1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4).
comes on, then let it idle. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Test-drive with the A/T in 2nd (2) position, M/T in Is DT C P1107 or P1108 indicated?
4th gear.
4. Accelerate for 5 seconds using wide open throttle. the latest software, or substitute a known-good
5. Check for a Temporary DTC with the scan tool. symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
Is T emporary DT C P1106 indicated?
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
YES−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have time.
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this

time.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-91

00/10/26 15:15:22 61S5N000_110_0092
PGM-FI System

DTC P1259: VTEC System Malfunction 7. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
• Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A 8. Check for continuity on the VTEC oil pressure
• A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070300 switch between the VTEC oil pressure switch 2P
• A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201 connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
• A/T pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
• A/T pressure adaptor 07MAJ-PY40120 VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
• Hose oil pressure 07ZAJ-S5A0200 2P CONNECTOR
2. Check the engine oil level, and refill if necessary.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3.000 rpm with

no load (in Park or neutral) unit the radiator fan
comes on.
4. Road test the vehicle: Terminal side of male terminals

Accelerate in 1st gear to an engine speed over
4,000 rpm. Hold that engine speed for at least 2
seconds. If DTC P1259 is not repeated during the Is there continuity?
first road test, repeat this test 2 more times.
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Replace the VTEC oil pressure switch.
YES−Go to step 5.
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the 10. Measure voltage between the VTEC oil pressure
VTEC solenoid valve and at the ECM/PCM. switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
6. Remove the resonator (see page 11-147). HARNESS 2P CONNECTOR
VTPSW
(BLU/BLK)
NO−Go to step 11.
11-92 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:23 61S5N000_110_0093
11. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector 15. Measure voltage between the VTEC oil pressure
terminal B9 and body ground. switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (24P) VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

HARNESS 2P CONNECTOR
VTPSW
(BLU/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/YEL)
VTPSW
(BLU/BLK)
Is there battery voltage? Is there battery voltage?
YES−Repair open in the wire between the VTEC oil YES−Go to step 16.
pressure switch and the ECM/PCM (B9).
NO−Repair open in the wire between the VTEC oil
NO−Go to step 12. pressure switch and G101.
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
13. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P). 17. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector.
14. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 18. Check for resistance between the VTEC solenoid
terminal B9 and body ground. valve 1P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (24P) VTEC SOLENOID VALVE

1P CONNECTOR
VTPSW
(BLU/BLK)

Terminal side of
male terminal
Is there 14−30 ?
YES−Repair short in the wire between the VTEC oil
pressure switch and the ECM/PCM (B9). YES−Go to step 19.
NO−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have NO−Replace the VTEC solenoid valve.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-93

00/10/26 15:15:23 61S5N000_110_0094
PGM-FI System

19. Remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (A) and 24. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
install the special tools as shown, then reinstall the
VTEC oil pressure switch. 25. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector.
07406-0020201 or
07MAJ-PY4011A and 26. Attach the battery positive terminal to the VTEC
07MAJ-PY40120 solenoid valve terminal.
07406-0070300 27. Start the engine, and check oil pressure at an

engine speed of 3,000 rpm.
07NAJ-P07010A Is pressure above 390 kPa ( 4.0 kgf / cm2 , 57 psi)?

A
22 N·m NO−Inspect the VTEC solenoid valve (see page 11-
(2.2 kgf·m, 111).
16 lbf·ft)
28. With the battery positive terminal still connected to

07ZAJ-S5A0200
the VTEC solenoid valve, measure voltage between
ECM/PCM connector terminal B9 and body ground.
20. Reconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector
and VTEC oil pressure switch 2P connector. ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (24P)
22. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3.000 rpm with
no load (in Park or neutral) unit the radiator fan
comes on. VTPSW
(BLU/BLK)
23. Check oil pressure at engine speeds of 1,000, 2,000

and 4,000 rpm. Keep measuring time as short as
possible because the engine is running with no
load (less than 1 minute). Wire side of female terminals
Is pressure below 49 kPa ( 0.5 kgf / cm2 , 7 psi)?

Is there battery voltage above 4,000 rpm?
NO−Inspect the VTEC solenoid valve (see page 11-
111). NO−Replace the VTEC oil pressure switch.
30. Disconnect the battery positive terminal from the

VTEC solenoid valve terminal.
11-94 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:23 61S5N000_110_0095
31. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P). 33. Connect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector
terminal No. 1 and body ground with a jumper wire.
terminal B15 and body ground. VTEC SOLENOOID VALVE HARNESS
1P CONNECTORS
VTS
VTS (GRN/YEL)
(GRN/YEL)
JUMPER
WIRE

terminal B15 and body ground.
YES−Repair short in the wire between the VTEC
VTS
solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM (B15). (GRN/YEL)
NO−Go to step 32.

NO−Repair short in the wire between the VTEC

solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM (B15).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-95

00/10/26 15:15:24 61S5N000_110_0096
PGM-FI System

DTC P1361: TDC Sensor Intermittent 7. Measure voltage between the TDC sensor 3P
Interruption connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
DTC P1362: TDC Sensor No Signal TDC SENSOER 3P CONNECTOR
2. Start the engine. TDC (GRN)
YES−Go to step 3.
TDC sensor and at the ECM/PCM. Is there about 5 V ?
4. Disconnect the TDC sensor 3P connector. NO−Go to step 10.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Measure voltage between the TDC sensor 3P
6. Measure voltage between the TDC sensor 3P
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. TDC SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
TDC SENSOER 3P CONNECTOR IGP

(YEL/BLK)
IGP LG1
(YEL/BLK) (BRN/YEL)

YES−Go to step 9.
Is there battery voltage? NO−Repair open in the wire between the TDC
sensor and G101.
YES−Go to step 7.
9. Substitute a known-good TDC sensor and recheck.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the PGM-FI
main relay 1 and the TDC sensor. Is DT C P1361 and/ or P1362 indicated?

NO−Replace the original TDC sensor.
11-96 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:24 61S5N000_110_0097
10. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector DTC P1607: Malfunction in ECM/PCM Internal
terminal A26 and body ground. Circuit
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) 1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4).
3. Wait 40 seconds.
TDC (GRN) Is DT C P1607 indicated?

Wire side of female terminals symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
Is there about 5 V ? NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this

time.
PCM (A26) and TDC sensor.
NO−Go to step 11.

TDC (GRN)

PCM (A26) and the TDC sensor.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-97

00/10/26 15:15:24 61S5N000_110_0098
PGM-FI System
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and watch the 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).
3. Turn the ignition switch ON(II).
Does the MIL come on and stay on f or more than
20 seconds af ter turning the ignition switch ON Is the low oil pressure light on?
( II)?
YES−Go to step 6.
YES−If the MIL always comes on and stays on, go
to step 71. But if the MIL sometimes works NO−Go to step 4.
normally, first check for these problems.
4. Inspect the No. 10 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
• An intermittent short in the wire between the dash fuse/relay box.
ECM/PCM (E29) and the Data Link Connector
(DLC). Is the f use OK ?
• An intermittent short in the wire between the
ECM/PCM (E31) and the gauge assembly. YES−Go to step 5.
NO−If the MIL is always off, go to step 2. But if the NO−Repair short in the wire between No. 10
MIL sometimes works normally, first check for METER (7.5A) fuse and the gauge assembly. Also
these problems. replace the No. 10 METER (7.5A) fuse.
• A loose No. 10 METER (7.5A) fuse in the under- 5. Inspect the No. 20 IG1 (40A) fuse in the under-hood
dash fuse/relay box. fuse/relay box.
• A loose No. 20 IG (40A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box. Is the f use OK ?
• A loose No. 6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box. YES−Repair open in the wire between the No. 20
• A loose No. 17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in the IG (40A) fuse and the gauge assembly. If the wires
under-dash fuse/relay box. are OK, test the ignition switch (see page 22-53).
• A poor connection at ECM/PCM terminal E31.
• An intermittent open in the GRN/ORN wire NO−Repair short in the wire between No. 20 IG
between the ECM/PCM (E31) and the gauge (40A) fuse and the under-dash fuse/relay box. Also
assembly. replace the No. 20 IG (40A) fuse.
• An intermittent short in the wire between the
ECM/PCM (A21) and the manifold absolute 6. Try to start the engine.
pressure (MAP) sensor.
• An intermittent short in the wire between the Does the engine start?
ECM/PCM (A20) and the throttle position (TP)
sensor, knock sensor, exhaust gas recirculation YES−Go to step 7.
(EGR) valve position sensor.
• An intermittent short in the wire between the NO−Go to step 10.
ECM/PCM (A8) and the knock sensor.
• An intermittent short in the wire between the 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
ECM/PCM (E5) and the fuel tank pressure (FTP)
sensor.
11-98 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:25 61S5N000_110_0099
8. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal E31 and 13. Remove the PGM-FI main relay 1.
body ground with a jumper wire.
A
MIL
JUMPER (GRN
WIRE /ORN)
14. Check for continuity between body ground and the

PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminals No. 2
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). and No. 4 individually.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
Is the MIL on? 4P CONNECTOR
YES−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have ＋B

the latest software, or substitute a known-good (WHT/
BLK)
＋B
(WHT/
NO−Check for an open in the wire between the BLK)
ECM/PCM (E31) and the gauge assembly. Also
check for a blown MIL bulb. If the wires and the
bulb are OK, replace the gauge assembly.
11. Inspect the No. 6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box. YES−Repair short in the wire between the No. 6
ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse and the PGM-FI main
Is the f use OK ? relay 1. Also replace the No. 6 ECU (ECM/PCM)
(15A) fuse.
NO−Go to step 15.
NO−Go to step 12.
12. Remove the blown No. 6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A)

fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-99

00/10/26 15:15:25 61S5N000_110_0100
PGM-FI System
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

15. Disconnect each of the components or the 17. Check for continuity between the PGM-FI main
connectors below, one at a time, and check for relay 1 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body
continuity between the PGM-FI main relay 1 4P ground.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
4P CONNECTOR
• PGM-FI main relay 2
• ECM/PCM connector A (31P)
＋B
• Each injector 2P connector (WHT/
• Idle air control (IAC) valve 3P connector BLK)
• Top dead center (TDC) sensor 3P connector
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 3P connector
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
4P CONNECTOR
IGP1
(YEL/
BLK)
YES−Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI

main relay 1 and each item. Also replace the No. 6
ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse.
Wire side of female terminals NO−Replace the PGM-FI main relay 1. Also replace
the No. 6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse.
18. Inspect the No. 17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in the
YES−Go to step 16. under-dash fuse/relay box.
NO−Replace the component that made continuity Is the f use OK ?

to body ground go away when disconnected. If the
item is the ECM/PCM, reprogram the ECM/PCM if it YES−Go to step 30.
does not have the latest software, or substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11- NO−Go to step 19.
6). If the symptom/indication goes away with a
known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/ 19. Remove the blown No. 17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in
PCM. the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Also replace the No. 6 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse.
16. Disconnect the connectors of all these components.
• PGM-FI main relay 2
• ECM/PCM connector A (31P)
• Injectors
• Idle air control (IAC) valve
• Top dead center (TDC) sensor
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
11-100 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:25 61S5N000_110_0101
21. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 23. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E9 and body ground. terminal E9 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
IG1 IG1
(YEL (YEL
/BLK) /BLK)
YES−Go to step 22. YES−Repair short in the wire between the No. 17
FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E9), or
NO−Replace the No. 17 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse, the No. 17 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the PGM-FI
and reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have the main relay 2. Also replace the No. 17 FUEL PUMP
latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/ (15A) fuse.
PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the symptom/
indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, NO−Go to step 24.
replace the original ECM/PCM.
24. Remove the rear seat cushion (see page 20-85).
22. Remove the PGM-FI main relay 2.
25. Remove the access panel from the floor.
A
26. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-101

00/10/26 15:15:26 61S5N000_110_0102
PGM-FI System

27. Check for continuity between the fuel pump 5P 29. Check for continuity between the fuel pump 5P
connector terminal No. 5 and body ground. connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
FUEL PUMP 5P CONNECTOR FUEL PUMP 5P CONNECTOR
FUEL PUMP FUEL PUMP

(YEL/GRN) (YEL/GRN)
YES−Repair short in the wire between the fuel YES−Replace the PGM-FI main relay 2. Also
pump and the PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace replace the No. 17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse.
the No. 17 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse.
NO−Check the fuel pump, and replace it as
NO−Go to step 28. necessary. Also replace the No. 17 FUEL PUMP
(15A) fuse.
28. Reinstall the PGM-FI main relay 2.
A

terminals E9 and body ground.
IG1
(YEL
/BLK)
NO−Repair open in the wire between the No. 17

FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E9).
11-102 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:26 61S5N000_110_0103
33. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 36. Measure voltage between the PGM-FI main relay 1
4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
terminal E7 and body ground. 4P CONNECTOR

MRLY
(RED/YEL) ＋B
(WHT/BLK)

Is there battery voltage? YES−Go to step 37.
YES−Go to step 38. NO−Repair open in the wire between the No. 6
ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse and the PGM-FI main
NO−Go to step 35. relay 1.
35. Remove the PGM-FI main relay 1. 37. Check for continuity between the PGM-FI main
relay 1 4P connector terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM
A
connector terminal E7.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
4P CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
MRLY (RED/YEL)
MRLY (RED/YEL)
YES−Test the PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-

51). If the relay is OK, reprogram the ECM/PCM if it
known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-
6). If the symptom/indication goes away with a
known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/
PCM.

main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM (E7).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-103

00/10/26 15:15:27 61S5N000_110_0104
PGM-FI System

38. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 44. Measure voltage between the PGM-FI main relay 1
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
4P CONNECTOR
PCM connector terminals A2 and A3 individually.

＋B
(WHT/BLK)
IGP2 IGP1
(YEL/BLK) (YEL/BLK)

Is there battery voltage? NO−Repair open in the wire between the No. 6
ECU (ECM/PCM) (15A) fuse and the PGM-FI main
YES−Go to step 47. relay 1.
NO−Go to step 41. 45. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
41. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 46. Check for continuity between the PGM-FI main
relay 1 4P connector terminal No. 1 and ECM/PCM
42. Remove the PGM-FI main relay 1. connector terminals A2 and A3 individually.
A PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
4P CONNECTOR
IGP1 (YEL/BLK)
Wire side
of female
terminals
IGP2 (YEL/BLK)
ECM/PCM IGP1 (YEL/BLK)
CONNECTOR
E (31P)
43. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there continuity?
YES−Replace the PGM-FI main relay 1.

main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM (A2, A3).
11-104 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:27 61S5N000_110_0105
47. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/ 49. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
PCM connector terminals A4, A5, A23 and A24
individually. 50. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor 3P connector.
PG2 (BLK) PG1 (BLK) 51. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

PCM connector terminal A21.
LG2
(BRN/ ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
YEL) LG1 (BRN/YEL)
VCC1
(YEL
/RED)
Is there less than 1.0 V ?
YES−Repair open in the wire(s) that had more than

1.0 V between G101 and the ECM/PCM (A4, A5, A23, Wire side of female terminals
A24).
NO−Go to step 48. Is there about 5 V ?
48. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/ YES−Replace the MAP sensor.
NO−Go to step 53.
VCC1 54. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).

(YEL
/RED)
NO−Go to step 49.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-105

00/10/26 15:15:28 61S5N000_110_0106
PGM-FI System

58. Disconnect the 3P connector from each of these
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) sensors, one at a time, and measure voltage
between body ground and ECM/PCM connector
terminal A20 with the ignition switch ON (II).
VCC1 • Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve position
(YEL
/RED) sensor
• Knock sensor
• Throttle position (TP) sensor
VCC2
(YEL
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ /BLU)
NO−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have Wire side of female terminals
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good Is there about 5 V ?
YES−Replace the sensor that restored about 5 V
56. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/ when disconnected.
NO−Go to step 59.
60. Disconnect the 3P connectors from the following

sensors.
• Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve position
sensor
VCC2
(YEL • Knock sensor
/BLU) • Throttle position (TP) sensor

NO−Go to step 57.
11-106 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:28 61S5N000_110_0107
62. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 63. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/
terminal A20 and body ground. PCM connector terminal E5.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
VCC3
(YEL/BLU)
VCC2
(YEL
/BLU)
Is there continuity? Is there about 5 V ?
YES−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ YES−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have
PCM (A20) and the EGR valve position sensor, the latest software, or substitute a known-good
knock sensor or TP sensor, or repair short in the ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the
wire between the ECM/PCM (A8) and the knock symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
sensor. ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM.
NO−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have NO−Go to step 64.

ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the 64. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 65. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor 3P
connector.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-107

00/10/26 15:15:28 61S5N000_110_0108
PGM-FI System

67. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/ 71. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
PCM connector terminal E5.
72. Connect an OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P) (see page 11-3).
73. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the OBD II
VCC3
(YEL/BLU) scan tool/Honda PGM Tester.
Does the OBD II scan tool/ Honda PGM T ester

communicate with the ECM/ PCM?
NO−Go to step 74.

Is there about 5 V ? 75. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
YES−Replace the FTP sensor. 76. Check for continuity between body ground and
data link connector (DLC) terminal No. 7.
NO−Go to step 68.
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)

K-LINE
70. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector (LT BLU)
VCC3
(YEL/BLU) Terminal side of female terminals
YES−Repair short in the wire between the DLC and

the ECM/PCM (E23). After repairing it, check the
DTC with the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester
Wire side of female terminals and go to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
NO−Go to step 77.


PCM (E5) and the FTP sensor.

11-108 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:29 61S5N000_110_0109
77. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 81. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E23 and DLC terminal No. 7. terminal E29 and body ground.
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
K-LINE
(LT BLU)
Terminal side of female terminals
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P) SCS

(BRN)
K-LINE (LT BLU)

Is there continuity? Is there about 5 V ( or battery voltage)?
YES−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have YES−Go to step 85.

ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the NO−Go to step 82.
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 82. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the DLC and 83. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
the ECM/PCM (E23). After repairing it, check the
DTC with the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester
and go to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
78. Check the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester for

DTCs.
Are any DT Cs indicated?
YES−Go to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
NO−Go to step 79.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-109

00/10/26 15:15:29 61S5N000_110_0110
PGM-FI System

SCS
(BRN)
YES−Repair short in the wire between the DLC and

the ECM/PCM (E29).

Is the MIL on?
YES−Repair short in the wire between the gauge

assembly and the ECM/PCM (E31). If the wires are
OK, replace the gauge assembly.

11-110 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:29 61S5N000_110_0111
VTEC Solenoid Valve Test

1. Remove the resonator (see page 11-147). 5. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid
valve with your finger and check its movement. If
2. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector. the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the
engine oil pressure.
3. Measure resistance between the VTEC solenoid
6 x 1.0 mm
valve connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. 9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
Resistance: 14−30
4. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the

VTEC solenoid valve assembly (A) from the
cylinder head, and check the VTEC solenoid valve
filter (B) for clogging. If there is clogging, replace
the solenoid valve filter, the engine oil filter, and
the engine oil.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-111

00/10/26 15:15:30 61S5N000_110_0112
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement
1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-129).
2. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-145).
3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A), the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor (B), the
evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve (C), and the throttle position (TP) sensor (D).
G
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
F 8.7 lbf·ft)
A A
B H
4. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (E).
5. Disconnect the hoses from the fuel rail (F).
6. Remove the fuel rail mounting nuts (G) from the fuel rail.
7. Remove the injector clip (H) from the injector.
8. Remove the injector from the fuel rail.
11-112 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:31 61S5N000_110_0113
9. Coat the new O-rings (A) with clean engine oil, and insert the injectors (B) into the fuel rail (C).
C
A
C D
10. Install the injector clip (D).
11. Coat the injector O-ring (E) with clean engine oil.
12. To prevent damage to the O-rings, install the injectors in the fuel rail first, then install them in the injector base.
13. Install the fuel rail mounting nuts.
14. Connect the connectors on the injectors, the MAP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, and the TP sensor.
15. Connect the quick-connect fittings.
16. Install the air cleaner (see page 11-145).
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for approximately 2
seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check for fuel leakage.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-113

00/10/26 15:15:31 61S5N000_110_0114
PGM-FI System
Primary HO2S Replacement Secondary HO2S Replacement

Special Tools Required Special Tools Required
O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or
equivalent, commercially available equivalent, commercially available
1. Disconnect the primary HO2S 4P connector (A), 1. Disconnect the secondary HO2S 4P connector (A),
then remove the primary HO2S (B). then remove the secondary HO2S (B).
A
B
44N·m (4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
B
44N·m (4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft) 2. Install the secondary HO2S in the reverse order of
removal.
2. Install the primary HO2S in the reverse order of
removal.
11-114 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:32 61S5N000_110_0115
Idle Control System
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH

IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-115

00/10/26 15:15:32 61S5N000_110_0116
Idle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0505: Idle Control System Malfunction 7. Put your fingers on the lower port (A) in the throttle
body.
NOTE:
• If DTC P1519 is stored at same time as DTC P0505,
troubleshooting DTC P1519 first, then recheck for
DTC P0505.

2. Check the engine speed at idle with no-load

conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger,
radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating.
Is the engine running at 7 20±50 rpm?
YES−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this

time.
A
NO−If the idle speed is less than 670 rpm, go to
step 3; if it’s 770 rpm or higher, go to step 4.
Does the engine speed drop below 7 7 0 rpm?
3. Disconnect the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve 3P
connector. YES−Check the idle speed (see page 11-124). If it’s
out of specification, replace the IAC valve.
Does the engine speed increase or f luctuate?
NO−Check for vacuum leaks. Make sure the
YES−Check the idle speed (see page 11-124). throttle valve is completely closed, and repair as
necessary.
NO−Replace the IAC valve.
5. Remove the air cleaner from the throttle body (see

page 11-145).
6. Start the engine and let it idle.
11-116 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:33 61S5N000_110_0117
DTC P1519: IAC Valve Circuit Malfunction 8. Check for continuity between body ground and IAC
valve 3P connector terminal No. 1.
IAC VALVE 3P CONNECTOR
YES−Go to step 3.
PG1 (BLK)

IAC valve and at the ECM/PCM.

4. Disconnect the IAC valve 3P connector.
YES−Go to step 9.
6. Measure voltage between the IAC valve 3P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. NO−Repair open in the wire between the IAC valve
and G101.
10. Check for continuity between body ground and

ECM/PCM connector terminal A12.
IGP (YEL/BLK)

IACV
(BLK/RED)
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the IAC valve
and the PGM-FI main relay.
YES−Repair short in the wire between the IAC
valve and the ECM/PCM (A12).
NO−Go to step 11.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-117

00/10/26 15:15:33 61S5N000_110_0118
Idle Control System

11. Connect the IAC valve 3P connector terminal No. 3 15. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/
and body ground with a jumper wire. PCM connector terminal A12.

ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A(31P)
IACV (BLK/RED)
JUMPER WIRE
IACV
(BLK/RED)

12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector Is there battery voltage?
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A(31P)
NO−Replace the IAC valve.
IACV
(BLK/RED)
NO−Repair open in the wire between the IAC valve

and the ECM/PCM (A12).
13. Reconnect the IAC valve 3P connector.
11-118 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:33 61S5N000_110_0119
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Momentarily connect the under-hood fuse/relay
box 14P connector terminal No. 10 and body
2. Momentarily connect ECM/PCM connector ground with a jumper wire several times.
terminals A24 and E18 with a jumper wire several
times. UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
14P CONNECTOR
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS A (31P)
LG1 (BRN/YEL) ACC (RED)
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE
E (31P) ACC (RED)
Wire side of female terminals Is there a clicking noise f rom the A/ C compressor
clutch?
Is there a clicking noise f rom the A/ C compressor
clutch? YES−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E18) and the A/C clutch relay.
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Check the A/C system for other symptoms.
NO−Go to step 6.
4. Turn the blower switch ON.
5. Turn the A/C switch ON.
Does the A/ C operate?
YES−The air conditioning signal is OK.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-119

00/10/26 15:15:34 61S5N000_110_0120
Idle Control System
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Disconnect the ALT 4P connector. 12. Connect the ALT 4P connector terminal No. 4 and
body ground with a jumper wire.
ALT 4P CONNECTOR
terminals A24 and B13.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
ALTF (WHT/RED)
A (31P)
JUMPER WIRE
LG1 (BRN/YEL) ALTF

(WHT/RED)
B (24P) Wire side of female terminals

Wire side of female terminals ECM/PCM connector terminal B13.

ALTF
YES−Go to step 4. (WHT/RED)
NO−Go to step 14.
5. Reconnect the ALT 4P connector.

no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan Wire side of female terminals
terminals A24 and B13. YES−Test the ALT (see step 1 on page 4-25).
Does the voltage decrease when the headlights NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
and rear window def ogger are turned on? PCM (B13) and the ALT.
YES−The ALT FR signal is OK. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO−Go to step 8. 15. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
9. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
11. Disconnect the ALT 4P connector.
11-120 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:34 61S5N000_110_0121

ECM/PCM connector terminal B13.
ALTF
(WHT/RED)

PCM (B13) and the ALT.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-121

00/10/26 15:15:34 61S5N000_110_0122
Idle Control System
PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. At the harness side, connect the PSP switch 2P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper
2. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector wire.
terminals A24 and E16.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
A (31P)
PSPSW (LT GRN/BLK)
LG1 JUMPER WIRE

(BRN/YEL) E (31P)
GND (BLK)

PSP SW
(LT GRN/BLK)

Is there less than 1.0 V ? terminals A24 and E16.
YES−Go to step 3. Is there less than 1.0 V ?
NO−Go to step 6. YES−Replace the PSP switch.
3. Start the engine. NO−Check for these problems:
4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. • An open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E16)
and the PSP switch.
5. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector • An open in wire between the PSP switch and
terminals A24 and E16. G201.
Is there battery voltage? 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES−The PSP switch signal is OK. 12. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.
NO−Go to step 11. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.
11-122 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:35 61S5N000_110_0123
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal

Circuit Troubleshooting
terminals A24 and E16.
1. Check the brake lights.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
A (31P) Are the brake lights on without pressing the brake
pedal?
YES−Inspect the brake pedal position switch

LG1 (see page 19-9).
(BRN/YEL) E (31P)
NO−Go to step 2.
PSP SW 2. Press the brake pedal.

(LT GRN/BLK)
Do the brake lights come on?
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Go to step 4.
YES−Replace the PSP switch.
NO−Go to step 15. terminals A24 and E22 with the brake pedal
pressed.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). A (31P)

ECM/PCM connector terminal E16.
LG1
(BRN/YEL) E (31P)
BK SW
(WHT/BLK)
PSP SW
(LT GRN/BLK) Wire side of female terminals
Wire side of female terminals YES−The brake pedal position switch signal is
OK.
Is there continuity? NO−Repair open in the wire between the ECM/

PCM (E22) and the brake pedal position switch.
PCM (E16) and the PSP switch.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-123

00/10/26 15:15:35 61S5N000_110_0124
Idle Control System
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Idle Speed Inspection

Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)
NOTE:
• Leave the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve connected.
4. Inspect the No. 7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse in the • Before checking the idle speed, check these items:
under-hood fuse/relay box. – The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) has not been
reported on.
Is the f use OK ? – Ignition timing
– Spark plugs
YES−Repair open in the wire between the brake – Air cleaner
pedal position switch and the No. 7 HORN, STOP – PCV system
(15 A) fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position switch – Pull the parking brake lever up, start the engine,
(see page 19-9). then check that the headlights are off.
NO−Repair short in the wire between the ECM/ 1. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP)
PCM (E22) and the No. 7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse. canister purge valve 2P connector.
Replace the No. 7 HORN, STOP (15A) fuse.

4. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions:

headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air
conditioner are not operating.
Idle speed should be:

M/T 720±50 rpm
A/T 720±50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
5. Idle the engine for 1 minute with the heater fan

switch on HI and air conditioner on, then check the
idle speed.
Idle speed should be:

M/T 720±50 rpm
A/T 720±50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification,

see the Symptom Chart.
6. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P

connector.
11-124 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:37 61S5N000_110_0125
Fuel Supply System
FUEL PUMP
Test, page 11-126
FUEL FILTER
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
Test/Replacement,
page 11-140
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
FUEL FILL CAP
FUEL TANK
FUEL TUBE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS

Precautions, page 11-133
Removal, page 11-134
FUEL VAPOR PIPE

FUEL RAIL
FUEL FEED PIPE
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2

PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-125

00/10/26 15:15:37 61S5N000_110_0126
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting

If you suspect a problem with the fuel pump, check that 5. Measure voltage between the PGM-FI main relay 2
the fuel pump actually runs; when it is ON, you will hear 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
some noise if you listen to the fuel fill port with the fuel
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2
fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2 4P CONNECTOR
seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If
the fuel pump does not make noise, check as follows:
2. Remove the glove box (see page 20-70), then

remove the PGM-FI main relay 2. IG1
(YEL/
BLK)
A
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the under

dash fuse/relay box and PGM-FI main relay 2.

8. Check for continuity between the PGM-FI main
4. Measure voltage between the PGM-FI main relay 2 relay 2 4P connector terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM
4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground. connector terminal E1.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2
4P CONNECTOR 4P CONNECTOR
IMOFPR
(GRN/
YEL)
IGP1 Wire side of
(YEL/BLK) female terminals
IMOFPR
(GRN/ ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
YEL)
Is there battery voltage? Is there continuity?
YES−Go to step 5. YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the PGM-FI NO−Repair open in the wire between the PGM-FI
main relay 1 and the PGM-FI main relay 2. main relay 2 and the ECM/PCM (E1).
11-126 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:38 61S5N000_110_0127
9. Reinstall the PGM-FI main relay 2. 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 16. Remove the rear seat cushion (see page 20-85).
11. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector 17. Remove the access panel from the floor.
18. Measure voltage between the fuel pump 5P
connector terminal No. 5 and body ground within
IMOFPR the first 2 seconds after the ignition switch was
(GRN/YEL)
turned ON (II).
FUEL PUMP 5P CONNECTOR
FUEL PUMP
(YEL/GRN)

NO−Replace the PGM-FI main relay 2.
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is there battery voltage?
13. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). YES−Go to step 24.
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure NO−Go to step 19.
voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal E1
and body ground within the first 2 seconds after the 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
ignition switch was turned ON (II).
20. Remove the PGM-FI main relay 2.
IMOFPR
(GRN/YEL)

NO−Go to step 15.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-127

00/10/26 15:15:38 61S5N000_110_0128
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

21. Connect the PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector 25. Check for continuity between the fuel pump 5P
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire. connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2
4P CONNECTOR FUEL PUMP 5P CONNECTOR
FUEL
PUMP
(YEL/
GRN)
JUMPER GND
WIRE (BLK)
IG1
(YEL/
BLK)

YES−Replace the fuel pump.
23. Measure voltage between the fuel pump 5P
connector terminal No. 5 and body ground within NO−Repair open in the wire between the fuel
the first 2 seconds after the ignition switch was pump 5P connector and G551.
turned ON (II).
FUEL PUMP 5P CONNECTOR
FUEL PUMP
(YEL/GRN)
YES−Replace the PGM-FI main relay 2.

main relay 2 and the fuel pump 5P connector.
11-128 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:39 61S5N000_110_0129
Fuel Pressure Relieving

Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, relieve 9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and
pressure from the system by disconnecting the fuel clean if necessary.
tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment.
10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, fitting (D).
preset buttons.
3. Remove the glove box (see page 20-70), then

remove the PGM-Fl main relay 2 (A).
A
11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the

connector (B) with one hand and squeeze the
retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release
them from the locking pawls (D). Pull the connector
off.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls. NOTE:

• Prevent the remaining fuel in the fuel feed pipe or
NOTE: The DTCs or Temporary DTCs P0301, P0302, hose from flowing out with a rag or shop towel.
P0303, P0304 may come on during this procedure. • Be careful not to damage the pipe (E) or other
If any DTCs are stored, ignore them. parts.
• Do not use tools.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. • If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push
6. Remove the fuel fill cap, and relieve fuel pressure the connector until it comes off easily.
in the fuel tank. • Do not remove the retainer from the pipe; once
removed, the retainer must be replaced with a
7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. new one.
8. Remove the bolt (A) and the fuel feed pipe

mounting bracket (B), then remove the quick-
connect fitting covers (C).
D
C
A
A
E
B
C
12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check

B it for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-134).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-129

00/10/26 15:15:39 61S5N000_110_0130
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Test

• Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A
• Fuel pressure gauge set 07ZAJ-S5A0100
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-129).
2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A). Attach the

fuel pressure gauge set and fuel pressure gauge.
07406-004000A
07ZAJ-S5A0100
• If the engine starts, go to step 5.

• If the engine does not start, go to step 4.
4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: listen to

the fuel fill port with the fuel fill cap removed. The
fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the
ignition switch is first turned on.
• If the pump runs, step 5.

• If the pump does not run, perform the fuel pump
circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-126).
5. Read the pressure gauge. The pressure should be

270−320 kpa (2.8−3.3 kgf/cm2, 40−47 psi)
• If the pressure is OK, the test is complete.

• If the pressure is out of specification, replace the
fuel pressure regulator and the fuel filter (see
page 11-137), and recheck the fuel pressure.
11-130 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:39 61S5N000_110_0131
Fuel Lines Inspection

Check the fuel system lines, hoses, and fuel filter for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
Make sure the connection is

secure and the quick-connect
fitting cover is firmly locked into place.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-131

00/10/26 15:15:40 61S5N000_110_0132
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Lines Inspection (cont’d)

Check all clamps and retighten if necessary.
▲: Do not disconnect the hose from the pipe at these joints.
E
B
D
To
FUEL
PULSATION
DAMPER
To EVAPORATIVE C A
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE
VALVE
BASE
GASKET
Replace.
3.5 N·m
(0.36 kgf·m, There should be no
A: 2.6 lbf·ft) B: C: clearance.
mark
40°
Clamp in the middle. 90°

Clamp in the middle.
D: There should be no E:
clearance. When installing
mark the fuel fill tube, 3.5 N·m
align the marks (0.36 kgf·m, 2.6 lbf·ft)
on the tube and
the pipe.
mark
16°
90° There should be
no clearance.
11-132 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:41 61S5N000_110_0133
Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fittings Precaution

The fuel tube/quick-connect fittings connect the fuel rail
(A) to fuel feed hose (B), the fuel feed hose (B) to the
fuel pipe (C), and the fuel tube (D) to the fuel tank unit
(E). When removing or installing the fuel feed hose, fuel
tank unit or fuel tank, it is necessary to disconnect or
connect the quick-connect fittings.
Pay attention to the following:
• The fuel feed hose (B), fuel tube (D) and quick-
connect fittings (F) are not heat-resistant; be careful
not to damage them during welding or other heat-
generating procedures.
• The fuel feed hose (B), fuel tube (D) and quick- D
connect fittings (F) are not acid-proof; do not touch
them with a shop towel which was used for wiping
battery electrolyte. Replace them if they came into
contact with electrolyte or something similar.
• When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed hose

F E
(B), fuel tube (D) and quick-connect fittings (F), be
careful not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace
them it damaged.
A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be
reconnected, but the retainer on the mating pipe cannot
be reused once it has been removed from the pipe.
Replace the retainer when
F • replacing the fuel rail.

• replacing the fuel pipe.
• replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel filter.
• replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
B C • it has been removed from the pipe.
• it is damaged.
PART MANUFACTURER RETAINER

COLOR
ENGINE TOKAI GREEN
COMPARTMENT
FUEL TANK SANOH WHITE
UNIT
F A
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-133

00/10/26 15:15:41 61S5N000_110_0134
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fittings Removal

1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-129). 4. Check the contact area (A) of the pipe (B) for dirt
and damage.
2. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings for dirt, and • If the surface is dirty, clean it.
clean if necessary. • If the surface is rusty or damaged, replace the
fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel feed pipe.
3. Hold the connector (A) with one hand and squeeze
the retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to release
them from the locking pawls (C). Pull the connector
off.
NOTE:
• Be careful not to damage the pipe (D) or other
A
parts. Do not use tools.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push B
the connector until it comes off easily.
• Do not remove the retainer from the pipe; once
removed, the retainer must be replaced with a
new one.
5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,
cover the disconnected connector and pipe end
with plastic bags (A).
NOTE:
C
• The retainer cannot be reused once it has been
removed from the pipe.
B
Replace the retainer when
– replacing the fuel rail.
A – replacing the fuel feed pipe.
D – replacing the fuel pump.
– replacing the fuel filter.
– replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
– it has been removed from the pipe.
– it is damaged.
11-134 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:42 61S5N000_110_0135
Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fittings Installation

1. Check the contact area (A) of the pipe (B) for dirt 3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect
and damage, and clean if necessary. fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer from
the mating pipe.
2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the

retainer is damaged, or after
• replacing the fuel rail.
• replacing the fuel feed pipe.
• replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel filter.
• replacing the fuel gauge sending unit
• removing the retainer from the pipe.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-135

00/10/26 15:15:42 61S5N000_110_0136
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fittings Installation (cont’d)

4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the pipe (A), 5. Make sure the connection is secure and that the
and align the retainer (B) locking pawls with the pawls are firmly locked into place; check visually
connector (C) grooves. Then press the quick- and by pulling the connector.
connect fittings onto the pipe until both retainer
pawls lock with a clicking sound.
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of

new engine oil on the pipe end.
Connection with new retainer:
A 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and

turn the ignition switch ON (II). The fuel pump will
run for about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise.
Repeat 2 or 3 times, and check that there is no
leakage in the fuel supply system.
Reconnection to existing retainer:
11-136 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:43 61S5N000_110_0137
Fuel Pressure Regulator Fuel Filter Replacement

Replacement
The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel
pressure drops below the specified value (270−320 kPa,
1. Remove the fuel pump (see page 11-138). 2.8−3.3 kgf/cm2, 40−47 psi) after making sure that the
fuel pump and the fuel pressure regulator are OK.
2. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (A).
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-138).
2. Remove the fuel filter set (A).
B
D
B
E
E
A
3. Install the part in the reverse order of removal with

a new O-ring (B).

a new base gasket (D) and new O-rings (E), then
check these items:
• When connecting the wire harness, make sure

the connection is secure and the terminal (B) is
firmly locked into place.
• When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (C),
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful
not to bend or twist it excessively.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-137

00/10/26 15:15:44 61S5N000_110_0138
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement

Special Tools Required 8. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit.
Fuel tank assembly ring wrench 07XAA-001010A
B L
A
P N
2. Remove the fuel fill cap.
3. Remove the seat cushion (see page 20-85).
4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. M

I O
K
A
J K
J
F
C
J
H G
J
B
9. Remove the stopper (O). Release the hook (P) and

remove the fuel filter (B), the fuel gauge sending
5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B). unit (C), the case (D), the wire harness (E), and the
fuel pressure regulator (F).
6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the
fuel tank unit. 10. When connecting the fuel tank unit, make sure the
connection is secure and the suction filter (G) is
7. Using the tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). firmly connected to the fuel pump (H).
07XAA-001010A
a new base gasket (I) and new O-rings (J), then
check these items:
• When connecting the wire harness, make sure

the connection is secure and the connector (K) is
firmly locked into the place.
• When installing the fuel gauge sending unit,
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful
A
not to bend or twist it excessively.
93 N·m • When installing the fuel tank unit align the marks
(9.5 kgf·m, 69 lbf·ft) (L) on the fuel tank (M) and the fuel tank unit (N).
11-138 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:44 61S5N000_110_0139
Fuel Tank Replacement

2. Drain the fuel tank: Remove the fuel pump (see page 11-138). Using a hand pump, hose and container suitable for
gasoline, draw the fuel from the fuel tank.
3. Jack up the vehicle, and support it with jackstands.
4. Remove the fuel pipe cover (A). Disconnect the fuel vapor hose and quick-connect fittings.
Disconnect the hoses. Slide back the clamps, then twist the hoses as you pull to avoid damaging them.
5. Place a jack, or other support, under the tank.
6. Remove the strap bolts, and let the strap (B) fall free.
7. Remove the fuel tank (C). If it sticks to the undercoat on its mount, carefully pry it off the mount.
8. Install the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
38 N·m
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-139

00/10/26 15:15:45 61S5N000_110_0140
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test

Special Tools Required 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Fuel Tank assembly wrench 07XAA-001010A
8. Install a 2 resistor between the fuel pump 5P
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2, then turn the
to the Gauges Circuit Diagram (see page 22-56). ignition switch ON (II).
1. Check the No. 10 METER (75A) fuse in the under- FUEL PUMP 5P CONNECTOR
dash fuse/relay box before testing.

(YEL/BLK)
2 RESISTOR
3. Remove the rear seat cushion (see page 20-85).
4. Remove the access panel from the floor. (BLK)
5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector.
6. Measure voltage between the fuel pump 5P Wire side of female terminals
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with the
ignition switch ON (II). There should be between 5
and 8 V. 9. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates
‘‘F’’.
• If the voltage is as specified, go to step 7.
• If the voltage is not as specified, check for: • If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate
‘‘F’’, replace the gauge.
– an open in the YEL/BLK or BLK wire. • If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending
– poor ground (G551). unit.
FUEL PUMP 5P CONNECTOR NOTE: The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the
bottom on the gauge dial when the ignition switch
is OFF regardless of the fuel level.
(YEL/BLK)
(BLK)
11-140 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:45 61S5N000_110_0141
10. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-129). 17. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and
No. 2 terminals with the float at E (EMPTY), 1/2
11. Remove the fuel fill cap. (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions.
If you do not get the following readings, replace the
12. Remove the rear seat cushion (see page 20-85). fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-138).
13. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. Float F 1/2 LOW E
Position
A Resistance 11 68.5 113.4 130
( ) −13 −74.5 −128 −132
Terminal side of
male terminals
14. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B).

1/2
15. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings from the fuel
pump.
LOW
16. Using the tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A). E
07XAA-001010A
A
93 N·m
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-141

00/10/26 15:15:45 61S5N000_110_0142
Fuel Supply System
Low Fuel Indicator Light Test

1. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page 11-
140).
• If the system is OK, go to step 2.

• If the system has any malfunction, repair it.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) with the float at the

E (EMPTY) position.
• If the low fuel indicator light is on , go to step 3.

• If the low fuel indicator light is not on, refer to the
low fuel indicator Circuit Diagram (see page 22-
56) and check the circuit.
3. Lift the float above the LOW position.
• If the low fuel indicator light goes off, the system

is OK.
• If the low fuel indicator light is still on, refer to the
low fuel indicator Circuit Diagram (see page 22-
56) and check the circuit.
11-142 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:47 61S5N000_110_0143
Intake Air System
AIR CLEANER
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
RESONATOR THROTTLE CABLE

Replacement, page 11-147 Adjustment,
page 11-148
THROTTLE BODY Removal/Installation,
Test, page 11-144 page 11-149
Removal/Installation, page 11-150
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 11-151
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-143

00/10/26 15:15:47 61S5N000_110_0144
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Test

NOTE:
• Do not adjust the throttle stop screw. It is preset at the
factory.
• If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) has been
reported on, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DLC) (see page 11-3).
1. With the engine off, check the throttle cable

operation. The cable should operate without
binding or sticking.
• If the cable operates OK, go to step 2.

• If the cable binds or sticks, check it and its routing.
If it’s faulty, reroute it or replace it and adjust it
(see page 11-148), then go to step 2.
2. Operate the throttle lever by hand to see if the

throttle valve and/or shaft are too loose or too tight.
• If there is excessive play in the throttle valve

shaft, or any binding in the throttle valve at the
fully closed position, replace the throttle body.
• If the throttle valve and shaft are OK, go to step 3.

(DLC).
5. Check the throttle position with the scan tool. There

should be about 10% when the throttle is fully
closed and about 90% when the throttle is fully
opened.
• If the throttle position is correct, the throttle body

is OK.
• If the throttle position is not correct, replace the
throttle body.
11-144 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:48 61S5N000_110_0145
Air Cleaner Replacement

1. Disconnect the connector from the IAT sensor (A).
2. Remove the bolts (B).
3. Loosen the screw (C).
4. Remove the air cleaner (D).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-145

00/10/26 15:15:48 61S5N000_110_0146
Intake Air System
Air Cleaner Element Replacement

1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A).
2. Remove the air cleaner (B) from the air cleaner housing (C).
11-146 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:49 61S5N000_110_0147
Resonator Replacement
1. Remove the bolts (A).
2. Remove the throttle cable (B) from the bracket (C).
3. Remove the resonator (D).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-147

00/10/26 15:15:49 61S5N000_110_0148
Intake Air System
Throttle Cable Adjustment

1. Check cable free play at the throttle linkage. Cable
deflection (A) should be 10−12 mm (3/8−1/2 in.).
A
C
2. If deflection (A) is not within spec (10−12 mm, 3/8

−1/2 in.) loosen the locknut (B), turn the adjusting
nut (C) until the deflection (A) is as specified, then
retighten the locknut (B).
3. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle

valve to be sure it opens fully when you push the
accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the
throttle valve to be sure it returns to the idle
position whenever you release the accelerator
pedal.
11-148 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:50 61S5N000_110_0149
Throttle Cable Removal/Installation

1. Fully open the throttle valve, then remove the 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
throttle cable (A) from the throttle link (B).
5. After installing, start the engine. Hold the engine at
B 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
A
6. Hold the cable, removing all slack from the cable.
7. Set the locknut on the cable bracket (A).

Adjust the adjusting nut (B) so that its free play is
0 mm.
The should be
D no clearance. B
C
C
2. Remove the cable housing (C) from the cable A

bracket (D).
C
3. Remove the throttle cable (A) from the accelerator 9.8 Nm
pedal (B). (1.0 kgfm, 7.2 lbfft)
8. Remove the cable from the throttle bracket (A).

Reset the adjusting nut (B) and tighten the locknut
(C).
9. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle

valve to be sure it opens fully when you push the
accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the
throttle valve to be sure it returns to the idle
position whenever you release the accelerator
pedal.
B A
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-149

00/10/26 15:15:50 61S5N000_110_0150
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Removal/Installation

NOTE:
• Do not adjust the throttle stop screw.
• After reassembly, adjust the cruise control cable (see page 4-44) and the throttle cable (see page 11-149).
• The Throttle Position (TP) sensor is not removable.
22 N·m THROTTLE
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) STOP SCREW THROTTLE
(Do not adjust) LEVER
There should be
no clearance
THROTTLE CABLE
IDLE AIR CONTROL

(IAC) VALVE
CRUISE CONTROL CABLE
THROTTLE
POSITION
(TP) SENSOR
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE VALVE
GASKET THROTTLE
Replace. BODY
11-150 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:51 61S5N000_110_0151
Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) CANISTER THROTTLE
PURGE VALVE BODY
THROTTLE POSITION
(TP) SENSOR
IDLE AIR CONTROL

(IAC) VALVE
GASKET
Replace.
3.5 N·m
(0.35 kgf·m, 2.5 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-151

00/10/26 15:15:51 61S5N000_110_0152
Catalytic Converter System
DTC Troubleshooting Tailpipe Emissions Test

DTC P0420: Catalytic System Efficiency 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with
Below Threshold no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan
NOTE: If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at
the same time as DTC P0420, troubleshoot those DTCs 2. Connect a tachometer.
first, then recheck for DTC P0420.
3. Check and, if necessary, adjust the idle speed (see
P0137, P0138: Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor page 11-124).
(secondary HO2S) (Sensor 2)
P0141: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) heater 4. Warm up and calibrate the CO meter according to
the meter manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4), then continue
to steps 2 through 5 to reset the readiness code. 5. Check idle CO with the headlights, heater blower,
rear window defogger, cooling fan, and air
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with conditioner off.
comes on. On Canadian models, pull the parking brake lever
up, start the engine, then check that the headlights
3. Drive for about 10 minutes without stopping on a are off.
highway or freeway. Your speed can vary.
The CO meter should indicate 0.1 % maximum.
4. With the A/T in D position, M/T in 4th gear, drive at
a steady speed between 50−62 mph (80−100 km/
h) for 30 seconds.
5. Repeat step 4 three times. Between each repetition,

close the throttle completely for 1−2 seconds. If
the engine is stopped during this part of the
procedure, go to step 3 and do the procedure again.
6. Check for a Temporary DTC with the scan tool.
Does the scan tool indicate T emporary DT C

P0420?
YES−Check the TWC. If necessary, replace the

TWC.
NO−Check for readiness code completion. If the

readiness is complete, it was a intermittent failure,
system is OK at this time. If the readiness is
incomplete, repeat steps 2 through 5.
11-152 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:51 61S5N000_110_0153
EGR System
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0401: EGR Insufficient Flow DTC P1491: EGR Valve Insufficient Lift
1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4). 1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4).
2. Test-drive under the following conditions. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with
• Without any electrical load. comes on.
• Decelerate from 55 mph (88 km/h) for at least 5
seconds. 3. Drive the vehicle under load for about 10 minutes.
Try to keep the engine speed in the 1,700−2,500
3. Check the Temporary DTC with scan tool. rpm range.
Is T emporary DT C P0401 indicated? 4. Check the Temporary DTC with the scan tool.
YES−Clean the intake manifold EGR port with Is T emporary DT C P1491 indicated?
carburetor cleaner. Clean the passage inside the
EGR valve with carburetor cleaner or replace the YES−Go to step 5.
EGR valve.
NO−Intermittent failure, go to step 4. Check for poor connections or loose wires at the
EGR valve and at the ECM/PCM.
5. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
6. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
6. Connect the battery positive terminal to the EGR
valve 6P connector terminal No. 4. 7. Start the engine and let it idle.
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
8. Measure voltage between the EGR valve 6P
EGR PG1
EGR PG1 (BLK)

(BLU/RED)
7. Start the engine and let it idle, then connect the Wire side of female terminals
battery negative terminal to the EGR valve 6P
connector terminal No. 6. Is there battery voltage?
Did the engine stall or run rough? YES−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have
YES−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the
time. symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
NO−Clean the intake manifold EGR port with
carburetor cleaner. Clean the passage inside the NO−Go to step 9.
EGR valve with carburetor cleaner or replace the
EGR valve.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-153

00/10/26 15:15:52 61S5N000_110_0154
EGR System

10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 14. At the sensor side, measure resistance between the
EGR valve 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
SG2 VCC2
(GRN/YEL) (YEL/BLU) EGRP SG2
Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity or resistance of 100 k or

higher?
YES−Replace the EGR valve.
NO−Go to step 15.
NO−Go to step 12.
15. Measure resistance between the EGR valve 6P
12. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
EGRP VCC2
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
SG2
(GRN/YEL)
Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of male terminals
Is there 100 k or higher?

YES−Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and the ECM/PCM (A10, A20). NO−Go to step 16.
NO−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have 16. Reconnect the EGR valve connector.
ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11-154 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:52 61S5N000_110_0155
18. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector 23. Connect the battery positive terminal to the EGR
terminals A10 and A13. valve 6P connector terminal No. 4.
SG2 EGR PG1

(GRN/
YEL) EGRP
(WHT/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of male terminals
Is there about 1.2 V ? 24. Start the engine and let it idle, then connect the
battery negative terminal to the EGR valve 6P
YES−Go to step 21. connector terminal No. 6.
NO−Go to step 19. Does the engine stall or run rough?
20. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector NO−Replace the EGR valve.

terminal B14 and body ground.
EGRD (WHT/BLK)
EGR
(BLU/RED)
YES−Repair short in the wire between the EGR

valve and the ECM/PCM (A13). Wire side of female terminals
NO−Repair open in the wire between the EGR Is there continuity?

YES−Repair short in the wire between the EGR
21. Turn the ignition switch OFF. valve and the ECM/PCM (B14).
22. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector. NO−Go to step 28.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-155

00/10/26 15:15:52 61S5N000_110_0156
EGR System

28. Connect the EGR valve 6P connector terminal No. 4 30. Disconnect the jumper wire from the EGR valve 6P
and body ground with a jumper wire. connector.
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR 31. Check for continuity between the EGR valve 6P
EGR (BLU/RED)
JUMPER WIRE
PG1 (BLK)

terminal B14 and the body ground. Wire side of female terminals

EGR YES−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have

(BLU/RED) the latest software, or substitute a known-good
NO−Repair open in the wire between the EGR

valve and G101.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the EGR

valve and the ECM/PCM (B14).
11-156 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:53 61S5N000_110_0157
DTC P1498: EGR Valve Position Sensor 7. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
Circuit High Voltage terminals A10 and A20.
1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4). ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
YES−Go to step 3.
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. SG2
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the (GRN/YEL)
EGR valve and at the ECM/PCM.
4. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector. Is there about 5 V ?
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES−Repair open in the wire between the EGR
connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3. NO−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the
SG2 VCC2
(GRN/YEL) (YEL/BLU)
NO−Go to step 7.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-157

00/10/26 15:15:53 61S5N000_110_0158
PCV System
PCV Valve Inspection and Test

1. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (B) and connections
for leaks or restrictions.
A B
2. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound from the
PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve
and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) with your
fingers or pliers.
If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve
grommet for cracks or damage. If the grommet is
OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck.
11-158 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:56 61S5N000_110_0159
Evaporative Emission Control System

CANISTER PURGE VALVE
Troubleshooting,
step 3 on page 11-164,
step 1 on page 11-169
FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE

Test, page 11-176
CANISTER
Troubleshooting, step 27 on page 11-172

BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE
Troubleshooting,
step 11 on page 11-165,
EVAPORATIVE EMISSON (EVAP)

TWO WAY VALVE
Test, page 11-175
CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
Troubleshooting, FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
step 22 on page 11-167, Troubleshooting, page 11-160
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-159

00/10/26 15:15:56 61S5N000_110_0160
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0451: FTP Sensor Range/Performance 6. Connect a vacuum pump to the open end of that
Problem hose.

Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0−30 in. Hg A973X-041-XXXXX
3. Monitor the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor voltage

with the Honda PGM Tester, or measure voltage
between ECM/PCM connector terminals E4 and
E14.
A973X-041-XXXXX

SG3 (PNK)
8. Monitor the FTP sensor voltage with the Honda
PGM Tester, or measure voltage between ECM/
PCM connector terminals E4 and E14, and carefully
squeeze the vacuum pump a little.
PTANK (LT GRN)

SG3 (PNK)
Is there about 2.5V ?
YES−Go to step 4.
PTANK (LT GRN)
NO−Replace the FTP sensor.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Wire side of female terminals
5. Disconnect the hose between the EVAP two way

valve and the FTP sensor at the EVAP two way 9. The voltage should smoothly drop from about 2.5 V
valve end. down to about 1.5 V. STOP applying vacuum when
the voltage drops to about 1.5 V or damage to the
FTP sensor may occur.
Does the voltage drop to about 1.5 V and hold?

NO−Replace the FTP sensor.
11-160 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:57 61S5N000_110_0161
DTC P0452: FTP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Check the vacuum lines at the FTP sensor for 7. Reinstall the fuel fill cap.
misrouting, leakage, breakage and clogging.
8. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
Are the vacuum lines OK ?
YES−Go to step 2.
10. Measure voltage between the FTP sensor 3P
NO−Repair or replace vacuum lines as connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
necessary.
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
5. Monitor the FTP sensor voltage with the Honda

PGM Tester, or measure voltage between body SG3 (PNK)
ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E14.


PTANK (LT GRN)
NO−Repair open in the wire between the FTP
sensor and the ECM/PCM (E5).
Is there about 2.5 V ?

FTP sensor and at the ECM/PCM.
NO−Go to step 6.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-161

00/10/26 15:15:57 61S5N000_110_0162

11. Measure voltage between the FTP sensor 3P DTC P0453: FTP Sensor Circuit High Voltage
1. Check the vacuum lines of the FTP sensor for
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
misrouting, leakage, breakage and clogging.
Are the vacuum lines OK ?

PTANK (LT GRN)
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Repair or replace vacuum lines as

necessary.
SG3 (PNK)
Wire side of female terminals 3. Remove the fuel fill cap.
Is there about 5 V ? 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES−Replace the FTP sensor. 5. Monitor the FTP sensor voltage with the Honda
PGM Tester, or measure voltage between body
NO−Go to step 12. ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E14.
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
14. Check for continuity between the FTP 3P connector

terminal No. 3 and body ground.
PTANK (LT GRN)

FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

PTANK (LT GRN)
FTP sensor and at the ECM/PCM.
NO−Go to step 6.
YES−Repair short in the wire between the FTP


the latset software, or substitute a known-good
11-162 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:57 61S5N000_110_0163
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Measure voltage between the FTP sensor 3P
7. Reinstall the fuel fill cap.
8. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.

PTANK (LT GRN)
10. Measure voltage between the FTP 3P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2.

SG3 (PNK)
VCC2 (YEL/BLU) Wire side of female terminals
SG3 (PNK) YES−Replace the FTP sensor.
NO−Go to step 12.
Wire side of female terminals 12. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminals E4 and E14.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the FTP SG3 (PNK)

PTANK (LT GRN)
YES−Repair open in the wire between the FTP


-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-163

00/10/26 15:15:58 61S5N000_110_0164

DTC P1456: EVAP Control System Leakage EVAP Canister Purge Valve Test
(Fuel Tank System)
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP
canister purge valve (A), and connect a vacuum
The fuel system is designed to allow specified pump to the hose.
maximum vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not
deviate from the vacuum and pressure tests as
indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/ A973X-041-XXXXX
A
vacuum would damage the EVAP components or cause
eventual fuel tank failure.

Please note that this is a two-trip code, once cleared, it

cannot be reproduced in one trip. Also, certain specific
driving and ambient conditions must occur before the
ECM/PCM will complete the system checks. Additional
test drives may still not meet the specific conditions
needed to reproduce the code.
Therefore, follow these troubleshooting procedures

carefully to ensure the integrity of the system and to
comfirm the cause of the problem or code.
NOTE: Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create

greater pressure/vacuum. The optimum condition for 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
testing is fresh fuel, and must be less than a full tank of
gas. If possible, to assist in leak detection, add 1 gallon 5. Apply vacuum to the hose.
of fresh fuel to the tank (as long as it will not fill the
tank), just before starting these procedures. Does the valve hold vacuum?
Fuel Fill Cap Check YES−EVAP canister purge valve is OK. Go to step
11.
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say ‘‘If not
tightened 3 clicks check engine light may come NO−Go to step 6.
on’’).
Is proper f uel f ill cap installed and properly
tightened? 7. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Replace or tighten the cap.
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal.
Is the f uel f ill cap seal missing or damaged?
YES−Replace the fuel fill cap (gray or black

colored cap).
NO−Fuel fill cap is OK. Go to step 3.
11-164 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:58 61S5N000_110_0165
8. Check for continuity between the EVAP canister EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve Test
purge valve 2P connenctor terminal No. 2 and body
ground. 11. Disconnect both vacuum hoses from the EVAP two
way valve (A), and connect a vacuum pump to the
EVAP CANISTER PURRGE canister port on the EVAP two way valve.
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
PCS
(YEL/BLU)
A973-041-XXXXX A
YES−Go to step 9. 12. Turn the EVAP bypass solenoid valve ON with the
Honda PGM Tester, or connect ECM/PCM
NO−Replace the EVAP canister purge valve. connecter terminal E20 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B(24P).
10. Check for continuity between the EVAP canister
purge valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
EVAP CANISTER PURRGE

VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
2WBS
JUMPER (BLU/RED)
WIRE
PCS
(YEL/BLU) Wire side of female terminals
Wire side of female terminals 14. Apply vacuum to the hose.
Does the valve hold vacuum?

YES−Repair short in the wire between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM (B21). NO−Go to step 20.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-165

00/10/26 15:15:59 61S5N000_110_0166

15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 19. Measure voltage between the EVAP bypass
solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and
16. Disconnect the EVAP bypass solenoid valve 2P body ground.
connector.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE
17. Check for continuity between the EVAP bypass VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
body ground.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE

VALVE 2P CONNECTOR IG1
(BLK/ORN)
2WBS Wire side of female terminals

(BLU/RED)
A
NO−Repair open in the wire between the EVAP

bypass solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM (E20).
YES−Replace the EVAP two way/bypass solenoid

valves (A).

bypass solenoid valve and the No. 4 ACG (10A)
fuse.
11-166 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:15:59 61S5N000_110_0167
20. Plug the fuel tank port (A) of the EVAP two way EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Test
valve.
canister vent filter (A), and connect a vacuum pump
to the hose.
A973X-041-XXXXX A
A A973X-041-XXXXX
21. While monitoring the FTP sensor voltage with the
Honda PGM Tester, or measuring the voltage
between ECM/PCM connector terminals E4 and 23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
E14, slowly pump the vacuum pump until the
voltage drops to about 1.5 volts. 24. Apply vacuum to the hose with 5 strokes of the
pump.
SG3 (PNK) YES−Go to step 25.
NO−EVAP canister vent shut valve is OK. Go to

step 30.
PTANK (LT GRN) 25. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
26. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P

Wire side of female terminals connector.

Does the voltage drop to 1.5 V and hold f or at vent shut valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and
least 20 seconds? body ground.
YES−EVAP bypass solenoid valve/EVAP two way EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
valve is OK. Go to step 22.
NO−Repair leak from EVAP bypass solenoid valve,

EVAP two way valve and FTP sensor.
VSV
(LT GRN/RED)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-167

00/10/26 15:16:00 61S5N000_110_0168

Vacuum Hoses and Connections Test
30. Perform the fuel tank vapor control valve test (see
page 11-176).
Is the f uel tank vapor control valve OK ?
A NO−Replace the fuel tank vapor control valve.
B 31. Tighten the fuel cap 3 ‘‘clicks’’, then monitor the

FTP readings with the Honda PGM Tester.
32. Start the engine and let the engine idle for 5
Is there continuity? minutes.
YES−Go to step 28. 33. Check the FTP sensor readings.
NO−Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)

and O-ring (B).
29. Check for continuity between the EVAP canister H

vent solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 G D J
and body ground.
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT E

VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
B
C F A I
Is the reading above 0.5 kpa ( 4 mm Hg, 0.16 in.

VSV Hg) pressure or below −0.5 kpa ( 4 mm Hg, 0.16 in.
(LT GRN/RED)
Hg) vacuum?

Wire side of female terminals ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the
NO−Check the following parts for leaks:
YES−Repair short in the wire between the EVAP • Fuel tank (A)
canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM (E21). • Fuel fill cap (B)
• Fuel fill pipe (C)
NO−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have • Fuel tank vapor control valve (D)
the latest software, or substitute a known-good • Fuel tank vapor recirculation valve (E)
ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the • Fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (F)
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good • Fuel tank vapor signal tube (G)
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. • Fuel tank vapor control vent tube (H)
• FTP sensor (J)
– If necessary, repair or replace the parts.
11-168 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:16:00 61S5N000_110_0169
DTC P1457: EVAP Control System Leakage 2. Turn the EVAP canister purge valve ON with the
(EVAP Canister System) Honda PGM Tester, or connect ECM/PCM
connector terminal B21 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
The fuel system is designed to allow specified
maximum vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not
deviate from the vacuum and pressure tests as
indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/
vacuum would damage the EVAP components or
cause eventual fuel failure.

PCS
• Vacuum pump/gauge, 0 −30 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX JUMPER WIRE (YEL/BLU)
• Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0 −4 in.Hg 07JAZ-001000B
Please note that this is a two-trip code, once cleared, it

cannot be reproduced in one trip. Also, certain specific Wire side of female terminals
driving and ambient conditions must occur before the
ECM/PCM will complete the system checks. Additional 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
test drives may still not meet the specific conditions
needed to reproduce the code. 4. Apply vacuum to the hose.
Therefore, follow these troubleshooting procedures Does the valve hold vacuum?
carefully to ensure the integrity of the system and to
comfirm the cause of the problem or code. YES−Go to step 5.
NOTE: Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create NO−EVAP canister purge valve is OK. Go to step
greater pressure/vacuum. The optimum condition for 10.
testing is fresh fuel, and must be less than a full tank of
gas. If possible, to assist in leak detection, add 1 gallon 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
of fresh fuel to the tank (as long as it will not fill the
tank), just before starting these procedures. 6. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
EVAP Canister Purge Valve Test
1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP purge valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body
canister purge valve (A), and connect a vacuum ground.
pump to the hose.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
A
PCS
(YEL/BLU)
A973X-
041-
XXXXX
YES−Go to step 8.

canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM (B21).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-169

00/10/26 15:16:01 61S5N000_110_0170

8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve Test
9. Measure voltage between the EVAP canister purge 10. Disconnect both vacuum hoses from the EVAP two
valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. way valve (A), and connect a vacuum pump to the
canister port on the two way valve.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
IG1
(BLK/YEL)
A973-041-XXXXX A
YES−Replace the EVAP canister purge valve. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO−Repair open in the wire between the EVAP 12. Apply vacuum to the hose.
canister purge valve and the No. 4 ACG (10A).
YES−EVAP two way/bypass solenoid valves are

OK. Go to step 18.
NO−Go to step 13.
14. Disconnect the EVAP bypass solenoid valve 2P

connector.
15. Check for continuity between the EVAP bypass

body ground.
EVAP BYPASS SOLENOID

VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
2WBS
(BLU/RED)
11-170 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:16:02 61S5N000_110_0171
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Test

A

canister vent filter (A), and connect a vacuum pump
to the hose.
NO−Replace the EVAP two way/bypass solenoid

A A973X-041-XXXXX
valves (A).
16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P). 19. Turn the EVAP canister vent shut valve ON with the
Honda PGM Tester, or connect ECM/PCM
17. Check for continuity between the EVAP bypass connector terminal E21 and body ground with a
solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and jumper wire.
body ground.
EVAP BYPASS SOLENOID
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
VSV
(LT GRN/RED)
2WBS JUMPER
(BLU/RED) WIRE

20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)

21. Apply vacuum to the hose.
YES−Repair the short in the wire between the
EVAP bypass solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM Does the valve hold vacuum?
(E20).
YES−EVAP canister vent shut valve is OK. Go to
NO−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have step 27.
ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the NO−Go to step 22.
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. 22. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
23. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P

connector.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-171

00/10/26 15:16:02 61S5N000_110_0172

24. Check for continuity between the EVAP canister Canister System Leak Test
vent shut valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground. 27. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT

VALVE 2P CONNECTOR 28. Connect two three-way T-fittings (A) into the hose
from the EVAP canister to the EVAP two way valve.
Connect the FTP sensor to one of the T-fittings and
the vacuum pump to the other.
VSV
(LT GRN/RED)
A

canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM (E21). A
25. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). A973X-041-XXXXX
26. Measure voltage between the EVAP canister vent

shut valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body 29. Remove the vent hose from the EVAP canister vent
ground. shut valve (A) and cap (B) the port to seal the fresh
air vent for the EVAP canister.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
IG1
(BLK/ORN)

A973X-
041-
XXXXX
A
B
YES−Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve

(A) and the O-ring (B).

canister vent shut valve and the No. 4 ACG (10A).
11-172 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:16:03 61S5N000_110_0173
31. While monitoring the FTP sensor voltage with the 37. While monitoring the FTP sensor voltage with the
Honda PGM Tester, or measuring voltage between Honda PGM Tester, or measuring voltage between
ECM/PCM connector terminals E4 and E14, slowly ECM/PCM connector terminals E4 and E14, slowly
pump the vacuum pump. pump the vacuum pump.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
SG3 (PNK) SG3 (PNK)
PTANK (LT GRN) PTANK (LT GRN)
32. Continue to pump vacuum until the voltage drops 38. Continue to pump vacuum until the voltage drops
to about 1.5 V. Make sure that the engine coolant to about 1.5V. Make sure the engine coolant
temperature is still above 95°F (35°C) and your temperature is still above 95°F (35°C) and your
vacuum pump has no leak. vacuum pump has no leak.
33. Check the voltage for 20 seconds. 39. Monitor the voltage continuously for 20 seconds.
Does the voltage drop 1.5V and hold f or at least Does the voltage drop to 1.5V and hold f or at least
20 seconds? 20 seconds?
YES−Inspect the EVAP canister vent shut valve YES−Inspect the fuel tank vapor control line and
line and connections. connections.
NO−Go to step 34. NO−Go to step 40.
35. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A) from the 41. Disconnect the purge line hose (A) from the
EVAP canister, and plug (B) the canister port. canister at the metal line and plug (B) the hose.
B A
B
A
A973X-
041- A973X-
XXXXX 041-
XXXXX
36. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 42. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-173

00/10/26 15:16:03 61S5N000_110_0174

43. While monitoring the FTP sensor voltage with the
Honda PGM Tester, or measuring voltage between
ECM/PCM connector terminals E4 and E14 slowly
pump the vacuum pump.
SG3 (PNK)
PTANK (LT GRN)
44. Continue to pump vacuum until the voltage drops

to about 1.5V. Make sure that the engine coolant
temperature is still above 95°F (35°C) and your
vacuum pump has no leak.
45. Monitor the voltage continuously for 20 seconds.
Does the voltage drop to 1.5 V and hold f or at

least 20 seconds?
YES−Inspect EVAP canister purge valve line and

connections. If they are OK, perform the EVAP two
way valve test (see page 11-175) and perform the
fuel tank vapor control valve test
(see page 11-176).
NO−Replace the EVAP canister (A).
11-174 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:16:04 61S5N000_110_0175
EVAP Two Way Valve Test

Special Tools Required 4. Move the vacuum pump hose from the vacuum
• Vacuum pump/Gauge, 0−30 in. Hg A973X-041- fitting to the pressure fitting, and move the vacuum
XXXXX gauge hose from the vacuum side to the pressure
• Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0−4 in. Hg 07JAZ-001000B side (A) as shown.
2. Disconnect the vapor line from the EVAP two way

valve (A). Connect it to a T-fitting (B) from the
vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump as shown.
07JAZ-001000B
A973X-041-XXXXX
A
A973X-041-XXXXX
B
5. Slowly pressurize the vapor line while watching the
gauge. The pressure should stabilize momentarily
above 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg).
• If the pressure momentarily stabilizes (valve

opens) above 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg), the
3. Apply vacuum slowly and continuously while valve is OK.
watching the gauge. The vacuum should stabilize • If the pressure stabilizes below 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg,
momentarily at 0.8−2.1 kPa (6−16 mmHg, 0.2−0.6 0.3 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest.
in.Hg).
If the vacuum stabilizes (valve opens) below 0.8 kPa
(6 mmHg, 0.2 in.Hg) or above 2.1 kPa (16 mmHg,
0.6 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-175

00/10/26 15:16:05 61S5N000_110_0176
Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Test

Special Tools Required Valve Test
1. Make sure the fuel tank is less than half full.
Float Test
1. Make sure the fuel tank is less than half full.
3. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor signal tube (A).
2. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve fuel tank
pressure, then reinstall the cap.
A
3. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube

(A), and connect a vacuum pump to the vapor
recirculation tube.
4. Disconnect the vacuum hoses (A) from the EVAP

canister (B), then plug the ports with plugs (C).
C A
A
A973X-041-XXXXX
A
4. Plug the pipe (B).
5. Apply vacuum to the fuel tank vapor recirculation

tube.
• If the vacuum holds, replace the fuel tank vapor

control valve (see page 11-178). E
D B
• If the vacuum does not hold, the float is OK.
Perform the valve test.
A973X-041-XXXXX
5. Disconnect the vacuum hose (D) from the EVAP

canister vent shut valve (E), and connect a vacuum
pump to the vacuum hose.
6. Pump the vacuum pump 80 times.
• If the vacuum holds, go to step 7.

• If the vacuum does not hold, go to step 10.
11-176 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:16:05 61S5N000_110_0177
7. Connect a second vacuum pump to the fuel tank 9. Fill the gas tank with fuel, then check for fuel in the
vapor signal tube (A). EVAP two way valve (A), and fuel tank vapor
recirculation hose (B).
A
NOTE: At either location, tiny droplets of fuel are
normal.
• If fuel runs out of the hoses at either location,

replace the fuel tank vapor control valve.
• If the fuel does not run out of the hoses at either
location, the fuel tank vapor system function is
normal.
A973X-041-XXXXX
8. Apply vacuum (1 pump) to the fuel tank vapor

signal tube (A), then check the vacuum on the
pump in step 6.
A
• If the vacuum holds, replace the fuel tank vapor
control valve (see page 11-178).
• If the vacuum is released, go to step 9. Check for fuel running out.
Check for fuel running out.
10. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor vent tube from the
EVAP canister, then plug the port on the canister.
Reapply vacuum (80 pumps).
• If the vacuum holds, replace the fuel tank control

valve (see page 11-178).
• If the vacuum does not hold, inspect the EVAP
canister vent shut valve O-ring. If the O-ring is OK,
replace the EVAP canister and repeat step 4.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 11-177

00/10/26 15:16:05 61S5N000_110_0178
Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Replacement

1. Remove the fuel tank (see page 11-139).
2. Remove the fuel tank vapor control valve (A) from

the fuel tank (B).
3. Install the fuel tank vapor control valve.
4. Install the fuel tank (see page 11-139).
11-178 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:19:21 61S5N000_120_0001
Transaxle
Clutch
Special Tools ............................................................. 12-2
Component Location Index ..................................... 12-3
Clutch Pedal and
Clutch Pedal Position Switch Adjustment .......... 12-4
Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement ..................... 12-5
Slave Cylinder Replacement .................................... 12-6
Clutch Replacement .................................................. 12-7
Manual Transmission .................................... 13-1
M/T Differential ............................................. 13-49

Automatic Transmission .............................. 14-1
A/T Differential .............................................. 14-185

Driveline/Axle ................................................ 16-1
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 15:19:21 61S5N000_120_0002
Clutch
Special Tools
07JAF-PM7011A Clutch Alignment Disc 1
07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003 Ring Gear Holder 1
07LAF-PT00110 Clutch Alignment Shaft 1
07746-0010200 Attachment, 57 x 40 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
07936-3710100 Remover Handle 1

00/10/26 15:19:24 61S5N000_120_0003
RESERVOIR HOSE
PEDAL PIN
RESERVOIR
CLUTCH PEDAL O-RING

CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER

LOCK PIN
RETAINING CLIP
RETAINING CLIP HOLDER
CLUTCH HOSE
CLUTCH LINE
CLUTCH LINE
FLYWHEEL
DOWEL PIN
CLUTCH DISC
Removal, page 12-7
PRESSURE PLATE
Removal, page 12-7
O-RING
RELEASE FORK
ROLL PIN
M/T ASSEMBLY
SLAVE CYLINDER
RELEASE BEARING Replacement, page 12-6

00/10/26 15:19:24 61S5N000_120_0004
Clutch
Clutch Pedal and Clutch Pedal Position Switch Adjustment

NOTE: 5. Turn the clutch pedal position switch (B) in an
• To check the clutch pedal position switch (see page 4- additional 3/4 to 1 turn.
44).
• To check the clutch interlock switch (see page 4-6). 6. Tighten locknut (A).
• Remove the driver’s side floor mat before adjusting
the clutch pedal. 7. Loosen locknut (H) and the clutch interlock switch
• The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear. (I).
• If there is no clearance between the master cylinder
piston and push rod, the release bearing is held 8. Press the clutch pedal to the floor.
against the diaphragm spring, which can result in
clutch slippage or other clutch problems. 9. Release the clutch pedal 15−20 mm (0.59−0.79 in.)
from the fully depressed position, and hold it there.
1. Loosen locknut (A), and back off the clutch pedal Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (I)
position switch (B)(or adjusting bolt) until it no so that the engine will start with the clutch pedal in
longer touches the clutch pedal (C). this position.
E H
9.8 N·m 10. Tighten locknut (H).
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
I
A
9.8 N·m
D (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
G
7 N·m
(0.7 kgf·m,
5 lbf·ft) C
F
2. Loosen locknut (D), and turn the push rod (E) in or

out to get the specified height (F) and stroke (G) at
the clutch pedal.
Clutch Pedal Stroke: 130−140 mm (5.1−5.5 in.)

Clutch Pedal Height: 198 mm (7.8 in.)
3. Tighten locknut (D).
4. With the clutch pedal released, turn the clutch

pedal position switch (B) in until it contacts the
clutch pedal (C).

00/10/26 15:19:25 61S5N000_120_0005
Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement

NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may 4. Pry out the lock pin (A), and pull the pedal pin (B)
damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, out of the yoke. Remove the nuts (C).
wash it off immediately with water.
A
1. Remove the brake fluid from the clutch master
cylinder reservoir with a syringe.
2. Remove the retaining clip holder (A) and the B C

retaining clip (B). Disconnect the clutch line (C), and
remove the O-ring (D). Plug the end of the clutch
line with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid from
coming out.
E
D
5. Remove the clutch master cylinder.
C
B
3. Disconnect the reservoir hose (E) from the clutch

master cylinder reservoir. Plug the end of the
reservoir hose with a shop towel to prevent brake
fluid from coming out.
6. Install the clutch master cylinder in the reverse

order of removal. Install the new O-ring. Tighten
the master cylinder mounting nuts to 13 N·m (1.3
kgf·m, 9.4 lbf·ft).
7. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system (see step 6 on

page 12-7).

00/10/26 15:19:25 61S5N000_120_0006
Clutch
Slave Cylinder Replacement

NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may 3. Install the slave cylinder in the reverse order of
damage the paint; if brake does contact the paint, wash removal. Install the new O-ring (A).
it off immediately water.
A
1. Remove the mounting bolts (A) and the slave
cylinder (B).
D A B
E
(P/N 08798-9002)
C
(Brake Assembly Lube)

B C
4. Pull the boot (B) back, and apply brake assembly
2. Remove the roll pins (C). Disconnect the clutch line lube to the boot and slave cylinder rod (C). Reinstall
(D), and remove the O-ring (E). Plug the end of the the boot.
clutch line with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid
coming out. 5. Apply Super High Temp Grease (P/N 08798-9002)
to the tip of the push rod of the slave cylinder.
Tighten the slave cylinder mounting bolts to 22 N·
m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft).

00/10/26 15:19:26 61S5N000_120_0007
Clutch Replacement
6. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Special Tools Required
• Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110
• Attach a hose to the bleeder screw (A), and • Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A
suspended the hose in a container of brake fluid. • Remover handle 07936-3710100
• Make sure there is an adequate supply of fluid at • Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or
the clutch master cylinder, then slowly pump the 07924-PD20003
clutch pedal until no more bubbles appear at the
bleeder hose. Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal
• Tighten the bleed screw to 8 N·m (0.8 kgf·m, 6 lbf·
ft); do not overtighten it. 1. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height
• Refill the clutch master cylinder with fluid when using the special tools and a feeler gauge (A). If the
done. height is more than the service limit, replace the
• Always use only Genuine Honda DOT 3 brake pressure plate.
fluid.
07LAF-PT00110
07936-3710100 A
07JAF-PM7011A
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:19:27 61S5N000_120_0008
Clutch
Clutch Replacement (cont’d)

2. Install the special tools. 6. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and
feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate
A
(C). If the warpage is more than the service limit,
replace the pressure plate.
B
07LAF-PT00110
07936-3710100
A
B
07LAB-PV00100 or
07924-PD20003
C
3. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate
mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern in several 7. Remove the clutch disc and special tools.
steps, then remove the pressure plate (B).
4. Inspect the pressure plate (A) surface for wear,

cracks, and burning.
A
8. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of

5. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (B) for slipping or oil. If the clutch disc is burned black or
wear at the release bearing contact area. oil soaked, replace it.

00/10/26 15:19:27 61S5N000_120_0009
9. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness Flywheel Inspection

is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc.
1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage.
(0.33−0.35 in.) max. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the
Service Limit: 5.7 mm (0.22 in.) flywheel for wear, cracks and burning.
3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial

indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the
engine installed. Push against the flywheel each
time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust
washer clearance. If the runout is more than the
service limit, replace the flywheel and recheck the
runout.

B
A
10. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining
surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the
rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the
clutch disc.

(0.065−0.089 in.) max.
A B
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:19:28 61S5N000_120_0010
Clutch

4. Turn the inner race of the pilot bearing (A) with Flywheel Replacement
your finger. The bearing should turn smoothly and
quietly. Check that the bearing outer race fits tightly NOTE: Do not disassemble the flexible plate.
in the flywheel. If the race does not turn smoothly,
quietly, or fit tight in the flywheel, replace the 1. Install the special tool.
bearing.
07LAB-PV00100 or
07924-PD20003
2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross

pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel.
3. Remove the pilot bearing (A) from the flywheel (B).
12-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:19:29 61S5N000_120_0011
4. Drive the new bearing into the flywheel using the Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation
special tools as shown. Apply a light coat of oil to
the bearing surface. 1. Install the ring gear holder.
07749-0010000 07936-3710100
07LAF-PT00110
07746-0010200
B
A
5. Align the hole in the flywheel with the crankshaft
dowel pin, and install the flywheel. Install the
(P/N 08798-9002)
mounting bolts finger-tight.
07LAB-PV00100 or
07924-PD20003
6. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel
mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several 2. Apply Super High Temp Urea Grease (P/N 08798-
steps. 9002) to the splines (A) of the clutch disc (B), then
install the clutch disc using the special tools.
3. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting

bolts (B) finger-tight.
07LAB-PV00100 or
07924-PD20003
12 x 1.0 mm A
118 N·m
(12 kgf·m, 87 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 12-11

00/10/26 15:19:29 61S5N000_120_0012
Clutch

4. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern. Release Bearing Replacement
Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent
warping the diaphragm spring. 1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch
housing (B).
PRESSURE PLATE MOUNTING BOLT TORQUE:
E
25 N·m (2.6 kgf·m, 19 lbf·ft) D
C
A
2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch

5. Remove the special tools. housing (B) by squeezing the release fork set spring
(D) with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E).
6. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the
same height. 3. Check the release bearing for play by spinning it by
hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release
bearing with a new one.
NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease.

Do not wash it in solvent.
12-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:19:30 61S5N000_120_0013
4. Apply Super High Temp Urea Grease (P/N 08798-

9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt
(B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing
guide (D) in the shaded areas.
B D
0.3−0.9 g C
(0.01−0.03 oz)
0.5−1.1 g
(0.02−0.04 oz)
E A
5. With the release fork slid between the release

bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the
mainshaft while inserting the release fork through
the hole in the clutch housing.
6. Align the detent of the release fork with the release

fork bolt, then press the release fork over the
release fork bolt squarely.
7. Install the release fork boot (E), make sure the boot
seals around the release fork and clutch housing.
8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make

sure that it fits properly against the release bearing
(B), and that the release bearing slides smoothly.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 12-13

00/10/26 15:24:18 61S5N000_130_0001
Transaxle
Manual Transmission Countershaft Disassembly ......... 13-32

Special Tools ................................ 13-2 Countershaft Inspection ............. 13-33
Transmission Fluid Inspection Countershaft Reassembly .......... 13-34
and Replacement ..................... 13-3 Synchro Sleeve and Hub
Back-Up Light Switch Test .......... 13-3 Inspection and Reassembly .... 13-37
Transmission Removal ............... 13-4 Synchro Ring and Gear
Transmission Installation ........... 13-9 Inspection ................................. 13-37
Transmission Disassembly ........ 13-15 Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal
Reverse Shift Fork Clearance Replacement ............................ 13-39
Inspection ................................. 13-20 Countershaft Bearing
Shift Lever Clearance Replacement ............................ 13-40
Inspection ................................. 13-20 Mainshaft Thrust Clearance
Shift Lever Assembly Adjustment ............................... 13-40
Disassembly/Reassembly ....... 13-21 Transmission Reassembly ......... 13-43
Shift Forks Clearance Gearshift Mechanism
Inspection ................................. 13-22 Replacement ............................ 13-48
Shift Forks Disassembly/
Reassembly .............................. 13-23 M/T Differential
Mainshaft Assembly Clearance Component Location Index ........ 13-49
Inspection ................................. 13-24 Backlash Inspection ..................... 13-50
Mainshaft Disassembly .............. 13-26 Final Driven Gear/Carrier
Mainshaft Inspection ................... 13-27 Replacement ............................ 13-50
Mainshaft Reassembly ............... 13-28 Carrier Bearings Replacement ... 13-51
Countershaft Assembly Clearance Oil Seal Replacement .................. 13-52
Inspection ................................. 13-30 Differential Thrust Clearance
Adjustment ............................... 13-53
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 15:24:18 61S5N000_130_0002
Manual Transmission
Special Tools
07AAK-S5AA000 Engine Hanger Support Bar 1
* 07GAJ-PG20110 Mainshaft Holder 1
* 07GAJ-PG20120 Base Collar 1
* 07GAJ-PG20130 Mainshaft Base 1
07NAD-P200100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
** 07736-A01000B Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25−40 mm 1
07746-0010200 Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 1
07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
07746-0010400 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
07746-0030100 Driver, 40 mm I.D. 1
07746-0030300 Driver, 30 mm I.D. 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
07947-6890100 Oil Seal Driver 1
* Part of Mainshaft Inspection Tool Set, 07GAJ-PG2010A.
** Must be used with commercially available 3/8’’-16 Slide Hammer.

00/10/26 15:24:19 61S5N000_130_0003
Transmission Fluid Inspection and Back-Up Light Switch Test

Replacement
1. Disconnect the back-up light switch (A) connector.
A
1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the 25 N·m (2.5 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)
engine OFF.
2. Remove the oil filler plug (A) and washer (B), check
the condition of the fluid, and make sure the fluid is
at the proper level (C).
2. Check for continuity between the back-up light

switch 3P connector No. 1 and No. 2 terminals.
There should be continuity when the shift lever is in
A reverse.
3. If necessary, replace the switch.

3. If the transmission fluid is dirty, remove the drain
plug (D) and drain the fluid.
A
44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
D
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new washer, and

refill the transmission fluid to the proper level.
Oil Capacity
1.5 (1.6 US qt, 1.3 lmp qt) at fluid change
1.6 (1.7 US qt, 1.4 lmp qt) at overhaul
Always use Genuine Honda Manual Transmission

Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer
shifting because it does not contain the proper
additives.
5. Reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer.

00/10/26 15:24:19 61S5N000_130_0004
Manual Transmission
Transmission Removal
Special Tools Required 6. Disconnect the starter motor cables (A).
• Engine hanger support bar 07AAK-S5AA000
• Engine hanger, A and Rods AART 1256 or equivalent,
commercially available
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted

surfaces.
1. Write down the frequencies for the radio’ s preset

buttons. Disconnect the negative (−) cable first,
then the positive (＋) cable from the battery.
Remove the battery.
2. Remove the intake air duct (see page 5-2). A
3. Remove the air cleaner housing (see page 11-145).

7. Disconnect the back-up light switch connector.
4. Disconnect the transmission ground cable(A), then
remove the clutch line bracket (B).
5. Carefully remove the slave cylinder so as not to

bend the clutch line. Do not operate the clutch
pedal once the slave cylinder has been removed.

00/10/26 15:24:20 61S5N000_130_0005
8. Remove the starter motor. 10. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
connector.
9. Remove the cable bracket (A), then disconnect the

cables (B) from the top of the transmission housing. 11. Lift and support the engine with an engine hanger
Carefully remove both cables and the bracket (A), T/N AAR-T-12566, and support bar, T/N 07AAK-
together so as not to bend the cables. S5AA000, or equivalent.
07AAK-S5AA000
A
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:24:21 61S5N000_130_0006
Manual Transmission
Transmission Removal (cont’d)

12. Remove the two upper transmission mounting 14. Remove the front engine mount bracket mounting
bolts. bolt.
13. Remove the transmission mount bracket (A) and 15. Remove the front engine mount.
transmission mounting bolt (B).

00/10/26 15:24:22 61S5N000_130_0007
16. Raise vehicle and make sure it is securely 22. Remove the transmission rear mount (A) and the
supported. transmission rear mount bracket (B).
17. Drain transmission fluid with a shop towel covering

B
the front and rear beams to catch any spilled fluid
(see page 13-3).
18. Remove the splash shield.
23. Make reference marks (A) front suspension sub

frame (B) and mounting bolts (C), then remove the
front suspension sub frame.
19. Remove exhaust pipe A (see page 5-2).
20. Remove the driveshafts (see page 16-3).
21. Remove the three bolts securing the transmission B

rear mount.
A C
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:24:22 61S5N000_130_0008
Manual Transmission

24. Remove the engine stiffener (A), and clutch cover 27. Remove the boot (A), the release fork (B), and the
(B). release bearing (C) from the transmission (D).
D
B
B
A
A
25. Place the transmission jack under the transmission,

and remove the three lower transmission mounting
bolts.
26. Pull the transmission away from the engine until

the transmission mainshaft clears the clutch
pressure plate, then lower transmission on the
transmission jack.

00/10/26 15:24:23 61S5N000_130_0009
Transmission Installation
1. Check the two dowel pins are installed in the clutch 5. Install the clutch cover (A), and engine stiffener (B).
housing.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)
2. Apply Super High Temp Urea Grease (P/N 08798-
9002) to the release fork (A) and the release bearing
(B). Install the release fork and the release bearing.
0.3−0.9 g
(0.01−0.03 oz)
B
10 x 1.25 mm
B 44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
0.5−1.1 g
(0.02−0.04 oz)
A
A
8 x 1.25 mm
B 24 N·m
3. Place the transmission on the transmission jack,
and raise it to the engine level.
4. Install the three lower transmission mounting bolts.
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:24:24 61S5N000_130_0010
Manual Transmission
Transmission Installation (cont’d)

6. Install the front suspension sub frame (A) in its 8. Install the three mounting bolts for the
original position by aligning the marks (B) you transmission rear mount.
made in the removal procedure.
A 10 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m
(6.0 kgf·m,
43 lbf·ft)
B
10 x 1.25 mm
14 x 1.5 mm 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m,
98 N·m 43 lbf·ft)
(10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)
7. Install the transmission rear mount bracket (A) and 9. Install the driveshafts (see page 16-17).
the transmission rear mount (B).
10. Install exhaust pipe A (see step 14 on page 5-13).
A
B
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft)
13-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:24 61S5N000_130_0011
12. Install the front engine mount. 14. Install the transmission mount bracket (A) and the
transmission mounting bolt (B).
12 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 54 N·m 12 x 1.25 mm
47 lbf·ft) (5.5 kgf·m, 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m,
B A
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
13. Install the front engine mount bracket mounting 15. Install the two upper transmission mounting bolts.
bolt.
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft)
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-11

00/10/26 15:24:25 61S5N000_130_0012
Manual Transmission

16. Remove the engine hanger and special tool from 18. Install the cable bracket (A) and cables (B). Turn the
engine. shift lever boot (C) so the hole is facing down.
8 x 1.25 mm
17. Connect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) connector. 27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
19. Install the starter motor.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
13-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:26 61S5N000_130_0013
20. Connect the starter cables (A) to the starter. Make 22. Apply Super High Temp Urea Grease (P/N 08798-
sure that the crimped side of the ring terminal is 9002) to the end of the slave cylinder rod. Install the
facing out. slave cylinder. Take care not to bend the clutch line.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
21. Connect the back-up light switch connector.

(P/N 08798-9002)
23. Connect the transmission ground cable (A), then

install the clutch line bracket (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
6 x 1.0 mm 7.2 lbf·ft)
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft) B
24. Install the air cleaner housing (see page 11-145).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-13

00/10/26 15:24:26 61S5N000_130_0014
Manual Transmission

25. Install the intake air duct (see step 39 on page 5-16).
26. Install the battery. Connect the positive (＋) cable

first, then the negative (−) cable to the battery.
27. Refill the transmission fluid (see page 13-3).
29. Check the clutch operation.
30. Check the transmission for noise and smooth

operation.
31. Check the front wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
13-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:27 61S5N000_130_0015
Transmission Disassembly
Exploded View-Clutch Housing
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY 6 mm FLANGE BOLT 6 mm FLANGE BOLT

NEEDLE BEARING 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
OIL GUIDE PLATE C 6 mm FLANGE BOLT REVERSE IDLER GEAR
MAGNET 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft) REVERSE GEAR SHAFT
CLUTCH HOUSING REVERSE LOCK CAM 26 x 42 x 7 mm OIL SEAL
14 x 20 mm DOWEL PIN 5-R SHIFT PIECE Replace.
35 x 56 x 8 mm OIL SEAL 8 mm SPRING WASHER BALL BEARING
Replace. 8 mm SPECIAL BOLT 36 mm SPRING WASHER
O-RING 31 N·m (3.2 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft) 26 mm WASHER
Replace. SHIFT FORK ASSEMBLY MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) REVERSE SHIFT FORK COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-15

00/10/26 15:24:28 61S5N000_130_0016
Manual Transmission
Transmission Disassembly (cont’d)

Exploded View-Transmission Housing
TRANSMISSION HOUSING 8 mm FLANGE BOLT 6 mm FLANGE BOLT

32 mm SEALING CAP 27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft) 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
25 N·m (2.5 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft) 80 mm SHIM BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH
35 x 58 x 8 mm OIL SEAL OIL GUTTER PLATE 25 N·m (2.5 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)
Replace. SNAP RING 18 mm WASHER
DRAIN PLUG 72 mm SHIM Replace.
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft) OIL GUIDE PLATE M DETENT BOLTS
14 mm WASHER 8 x 10 mm DOWEL PIN 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
Replace. SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY 12 mm WASHER
FILLER PLUG SELECT LEVER ASSEMBLY Replace.
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) 8 mm FLANGE BOLT SPRING L. 23.6 mm (0.93 in.)
20 mm WASHER 27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft) STEEL BALL
Replace. TRANSMISSION HANGER
8 mm FLANGE BOLT
27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
13-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:29 61S5N000_130_0017
NOTE: Place the clutch housing on two pieces of wood 3. Remove the shift lever assembly (A) and 8 x 10 mm
thick enough to keep the mainshaft from hitting the dowel pins (B).
workbench.
1. Remove the detent bolts (A), springs, steel balls,

back-up light switch (B), and transmission hanger
(C). B
C
A
4. Remove the drain plug (A), filler plug (B), vehicle

speed sensor (VSS) (C), and O-ring (D).
B
A
A
A
B
2. Remove the select lever assembly.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-17

00/10/26 15:24:30 61S5N000_130_0018
Manual Transmission
Transmission Disassembly (cont’d)

5. Remove the 8 mm flange bolts in a crisscross 9. Remove the reverse idler gear (A) and reverse gear
pattern in several steps. shaft (B).
6. Remove the 32 mm sealing cap (A).

10. Remove the reverse shift fork.
A
C
D D
7. Expand the 52 mm snap ring (B) on the

countershaft ball bearing, and remove it from the
groove using a pair of snap ring pliers.
8. Remove the transmission housing (C) and

14 x 20 mm dowel pins (D).
13-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:31 61S5N000_130_0019
11. Apply tape to the mainshaft splines to protect the 14. Remove the oil gutter plate (A), oil guide plate M ,
seal, then remove the mainshaft assembly (A) and and 72 mm shim (B).
countershaft assembly (B) with the shift forks (C)
from the clutch housing (D).
A
A B
B
12. Remove the 36 mm spring washer (E) and 26 mm

washer (F).
13. Remove the differential assembly (A), magnet (B),

and reverse lock cam (C).
B
C
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-19

00/10/26 15:24:31 61S5N000_130_0020
Manual Transmission
Reverse Shift Fork Clearance Shift Lever Clearance Inspection

Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between shift lever (A) and
the select lever (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the
1. Measure the clearance between the reverse idler clearance is more than the service limit, go to
gear (A) and the reverse shift fork (B) with a feeler step 2.
gauge (C). If the clearance is more than the service
limit, go to step 2. Standard: 0.05−0.40 mm (0.002−0.016 in.)
Standard: 1.6−2.2 mm (0.06−0.09 in.)
A
A B B
C
2. Measure the groove of the shift lever.
2. Measure the width of the reverse shift fork. • If distance is not within the standard, replace the
shift lever with a new one.
• If distance is less than the service limit, replace • If distance is within the standard, replace the
the reverse shift fork with a new one. select lever with a new one.
• If distance is within the service limit, replace the
reverse gear with a new one. Standard: 15.00−15.15 mm (0.591−0.596 in.)
Standard: 13.8−14.1 mm (0.543−0.555 in.)

13-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:32 61S5N000_130_0021
Shift Lever Assembly Disassembly/Reassembly

Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry then, and apply lubricate to any contact surface.
SELECT LEVER COVER
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
DUST SEAL (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) OIL SEAL
Replace. Replace.
BREATHER CAP
ROLLER DUST COVER
SHIFT ARM COVER
SELECT LEVER
SELECT SPRING COLLAR
SELECT SPRING
SELECT SPRING PLATE

SHIFT LEVER
INTERLOCK
SHIFT ARM
8 mm SPRING WASHER
8mm SPECIAL BOLT
31 N·m (3.2 kgf·m, 23 lgf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-21

00/10/26 15:24:32 61S5N000_130_0022
Manual Transmission
Shift Forks Clearance Inspection

NOTE: The synchro sleeve and synchro hub should be 3. Measure the clearance between the shift fork (A)
replaced as a set. and the shift arm (B). If the clearance exceeds the
service limit, go to step 4.
1. Measure the clearance between each shift fork (A)
and its matching synchro sleeve (B). If the Standard: 0.2−0.5 mm (0.008−0.020 in.)
clearance exceeds the service limit, go to step 2. Service Limit: 0.62 mm (0.024 in.)
Standard: 0.35−0.65 mm (0.014−0.026 in.)

B
B
4. Measure the width of the shift arm.
• If the width of the shift arm is less than the

A standard, replace the shift arm with a new one.
2. Measure the thickness of the shift fork fingers. • If the width of the shift arm is within the standard,
replace the shift fork or shift piece with a new
• If the thickness of the shift fork finger is less than one.
the standard, replace the shift fork with a new
one. Standard: 12.9−13.0 mm (0.508−0.512 in.)
• If the thickness of the shift fork finger is within
the standard, replace the synchro sleeve with a
new one.
Standard:
1st/2nd, 3rd/4th, shift forks: 7.4−7.6 mm
(0.29−0.30 in.)
5th shift forks: 6.7−6.9 mm
(0.26−0.27 in.)
13-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:33 61S5N000_130_0023
Shift Forks Disassembly/Reassembly

Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact parts.
5TH SHIFT FORK

3-4 SHIFT FORK
1-2 SHIFT FORK
8 mm SPECIAL BOLT
31 N·m (3.2 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft)
8 mm SPRING WASHER
5-R SHIFT PIECE
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-23

00/10/26 15:24:33 61S5N000_130_0024
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Assembly Clearance Inspection

NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the 4. Measure the clearance between 4th gear (A) and
synchro sleeve and hub as a set. the spacer collar (B) with a dial indicator (C). If the
clearance is more than the service limit, go to step
1. Support the bearing inner race with a socket (A), 5.
and push down on the mainshaft (B).
Standard: 0.06−0.19 mm
Standard: 0.06−0.21 mm (0.002−0.007 in.)
(0.002−0.008 in.) Service Limit: 0.31 mm (0.012 in.)
C
E
A
D
C
B
A
2. Measure the clearance between 2nd (C) and 3rd (D) 5. Measure distance on the spacer collar.
gears with a feeler gauge (E).
• If distance is less than the standard, replace
• If the clearance is more than the service limit, go the spacer collar with a new one.
to step 3. • If distance is within the standard, go to step 6.
• If the clearance is within the service limit, go to
step 4. Standard: 24.03−24.06 mm
(0.946−0.947 in.)
3. Measure the thickness of 3rd gear.
• If the thickness of 3rd gear is less than the service

limit, replace 3rd gear with a new one.
• If the thickness of 3rd gear is within the service
limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub with a new
one.
(1.099−1.101 in.)
13-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:33 61S5N000_130_0025
6. Measure the thickness of 4th gear. 8. Measure distance on the spacer collar.
• If the thickness of 4th gear is less than the service • If distance is less than the standard, replace
limit, replace 4th gear with a new one. the spacer collar with a new one.
• If the thickness of 4th gear is within the service • If distance is within the standard, go to step 9.
limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub with a new
one. Standard: 24.03−24.06 mm
(0.946−0.947 in.)
(1.063−1.066 in.)
9. Measure the thickness of 5th gear.
• If the thickness of 5th gear is less than the service

7. Measure the clearance between the spacer collar limit, replace 5th gear with a new one.
(A) and 5th gear (B) with a dial indicator (C). If the • If the thickness of 5th gear is within the service
clearance is more than the service limit, go to step limit, replace the 5th synchro hub with a new one.
8.
Standard: 0.06−0.19 mm (1.139−1.141 in.)
(0.002−0.007 in.) Service Limit: 28.85 mm (1.136 in.)
A
C
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-25

00/10/26 15:24:34 61S5N000_130_0026
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Disassembly
1. Remove the angular ball bearing (A) and the 3. Support the 3rd gear (A) on steel blocks, and press
tapered cone ring (B) using a commercially the mainshaft out of the 3rd/4th synchro hub (B).
available bearing separator (C) and a commercially Use of a jaw-type puller can damage the gear teeth.
available bearing puller (D). Be sure the bearing
separator is under the tapered cone ring.
PRESS
D
A
B
A
2. Support 5th gear (A) on steel blocks, and press the

mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub (B). Use of a
jaw-type puller can damage the gear teeth.
PRESS
13-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:34 61S5N000_130_0027
Mainshaft Inspection
1. Inspect the gear surface and bearing surface for
wear and damage, then measure the mainshaft at
points A, B, C, and D. If any part of the mainshaft is
less than the service limit, replace it with a new one.
Standard:
A (Ball bearing surface): 25.987−26.000 mm
(1.0231−1.0236 in.)
B (Spacer collar surface): 28.980−28.993 mm
(1.1409−1.1415 in.)
C (Needle bearing surface): 34.984−35.000 mm
(1.3773−1.3780 in.)
D (Ball bearing surface): 25.977−25.990 mm
(1.0227−1.0232 in.)
Service Limit: A: 25.93 mm (1.021 in.)
B: 28.93 mm (1.139 in.)
C: 34.93 mm (1.375 in.)
D: 25.92 mm (1.020 in.)
C B A
D
2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the

mainshaft. Rotate the mainshaft two complete
revolutions when measuring the runout. If the
runout is more than the service limit, replace the
mainshaft with a new one.
Standard: 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-27

00/10/26 15:24:35 61S5N000_130_0028
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
ANGULAR BALL BEARING

Check for wear and operation.
Note the direction of
installation.
TAPERED CONE RING

Thin-edged outer
race faces down
SPACER
SYNCHRO RING
3RD/4TH SYNCHRO SPRING

SYNCHRO
SLEEVE 5TH SYNCHRO SLEEVE
3RD/4TH 5TH SYNCHRO HUB

SYNCHRO
HUB
SYNCHRO SPRING
SYNCHRO SYNCHRO RING

SPRING
SYNCHRO 5TH GEAR

RING
3RD GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
Check for wear and operation. NEEDLE BEARING
SPACER COLLAR
4TH GEAR
SYNCHRO RING
SYNCHRO SPRING
MAINSHAFT
13-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:36 61S5N000_130_0029
Special Tools Required 4. Install the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve (A) by aligning
• Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 the stops (B) of the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub.
• Attachment, 30 mm I.D. 07746-0030300 After installing, check the operation of the 3rd/4th
synchro hub set.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during
A
this procedure.
1. Clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply

lubricant to all contact surfaces except the 3rd/4th
and 5th synchro hubs.
2. Install the 3rd gear, its bearing, and the 3rd gear B
synchro ring and synchro spring on the shaft.
3. Support 2nd gear (A) on steel blocks, then install

the 3rd/4th synchro hubs (B) using the special tools
and a press (C).
5. Install the 4th gear synchro spring and ring, 4th

07746-0030100
gear and its bearing, the spacer collar, and 5th gear
and its bearing on the shaft.
6. Install the 5th synchro hub (A) using the special

tools and a press (B).
07746-0030300
B B
07746-0030100
A
A 07746-0030300
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-29

00/10/26 15:24:36 61S5N000_130_0030
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Reassembly (cont’d) Countershaft Assembly Clearance

Inspection
7. Install the 5th synchro sleeve.
8. Install the ball bearing (A) using the special tools 1. Measure the clearance between the 1st gear (A)
and a press (B). and the countershaft (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If
the clearance is more than the service limit, go to
B step 2.
Standard: 0.03−0.10 mm (0.001−0.004 in.)

07746-0030100
A 07746-0030300
C
B
2. Measure the thickness of the 1st gear.
• If the thickness of 1st gear is less than the service

limit, replace 1st gear with a new one.
• If the thickness of 1st gear is within the service
limit, replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub with a new
one.
Standard: 26.91−26.94 mm (1.059−1.061 in.)

13-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:36 61S5N000_130_0031
3. Measure the clearance between the 2nd gear (A) 5. Measure the thickness of the 2nd gear.
and 3rd gear (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the
clearance is more than the service limit, go to • If the thickness of 2nd gear is less than the
step 4. service limit, replace 2nd gear with new one.
• If the thickness of 1st gear is within the service
Standard: 0.04−0.12 mm (0.002−0.005 in.) limit, replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub with a new
Service Limit: 0.24 mm (0.009 in.) one.
Standard: 27.41−27.46 mm (1.079−1.081 in.)

4. Measure the thickness of the spacer collar.
• If the thickness is less than the service limit,

replace the spacer collar with a new one.
• If the thickness is within the service limit, go to
step 5.
Standard: 27.53−27.56 mm (1.084−1.085 in.)

-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-31

00/10/26 15:24:37 61S5N000_130_0032
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Disassembly
1. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a 4. Support 5th gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a
bench vise with wood blocks. press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the
countershaft (E) out of the ball bearing (F).
A
D
E
B F A
B
2. Use a chisel (A) to raise the locknut tab (B) from the
groove in the countershaft. 5. Support 4th gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a
press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the
3. Remove the locknut (A) and the spring washer (B). countershaft (E) out of the 4th gear.
A
B C
E B
13-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:37 61S5N000_130_0033
Countershaft Inspection
6. Support 3rd gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a 1. Inspect the gear surface and bearing surface for
press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the wear and damage, then measure the countershaft
countershaft (E) out of the 3rd gear. at points A, B, and C. If any part of the countershaft
is less than the service limit, replace it with a new
C
one.
D
Standard:
A (Ball bearing surface): 24.980−24.993 mm
E
(0.9835−0.9840 in.)
B (Needle bearing surface): 37.984−38.000 mm
(1.4954−1.4961 in.)
C (Needle bearing surface): 34.000−34.015 mm
(1.3386−1.3392 in.)
Service Limit: A: 24.93 mm (0.981 in.)
B: 37.934 mm (1.493 in.)
C: 33.95 mm (1.337 in.)
C B A
B
2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the

countershaft. Rotate the countershaft two complete
revolutions when measuring the runout. If the
runout exceeds the service limit, replace the
countershaft with a new one.
Standard: 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-33

00/10/26 15:24:38 61S5N000_130_0034
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Reassembly
Exploded View
LOCKNUT
Replace.
108→0→108 N·m
11→0→11 kgf·m,
79→0→79 lbf·ft
SPRING WASHER
BALL BEARING
Check for wear and
operation.
NEEDLE BEARING
Check for wear and
operation.
5TH GEAR
4TH GEAR
SYNCHRO SPRING
3RD GEAR
SYNCHRO RING
2ND GEAR
FRICTION DAMPER
Check for wear and damage. NEEDLE BEARING
Check for wear and
operation.
1ST GEAR SPACER
FRICTION DAMPER
Check for wear and
damage.
DOUBLE CONE
SYNCHRO
NEEDLE BEARING
COUNTERSHAFT
SYNCHRO SPRING
REVERSE GEAR
1ST/2ND SYNCHRO HUB
13-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:39 61S5N000_130_0035
Special Tools Required 3. Install the 1st/2nd synchro hub (A) by aligning the
• Driver 07749-0010000 fingers on the friction damper (B) with 1st/2nd
• Attachment 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 synchro hub grooves.
• Seal driver 07947-6890100 A

this procedure.
1. Clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply

lubricant to all contact surfaces.
2. Install the needle bearing (A) onto the countershaft

(B). Assemble the friction damper (C) and 1st gear
(D) together and install them on the countershaft,
then install the synchro ring (E) and the synchro
spring (F).
F
B
E
4. Install reverse gear, 2nd gear synchro spring, and
C the double cone synchro assembly.
5. Install the friction damper (A) on the spacer (B)

D
using the special tools and a press.
A PRESS
07749-0010000
B
07746-0010300
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-35

00/10/26 15:24:39 61S5N000_130_0036
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Reassembly (cont’d)

6. Install the friction damper and spacer, and the 2nd 10. Install the spring washer (A),and loosely install the
gear bearing. new locknut (B).
7. Install 2nd gear (A) by aligning the synchro cone B

fingers (B) with 2nd gear grooves (C).
A
A
11. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a

bench vise with wood blocks.
8. Install 3rd gear, 4th gear, and 5th gear. 12. Torque the new locknut to 108 N·m (11kgf·m, 79lbf·
ft), then loosen it and torque it again to the same
9. Install the needle bearing (A) and the ball bearing value. Stake the locknut tab into the groove.
(B) using the special tool and a press (C).
C
07947-6890100
13-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:40 61S5N000_130_0037
Synchro Sleeve and Hub Inspection Synchro Ring and Gear Inspection
and Reassembly
1. Inspect the inside of each synchro ring (A) for wear.
Inspect the teeth (B) on each synchro ring for wear
1. Inspect gear teeth on all synchro hubs and synchro (rounded off).
sleeves for rounded off corners, which indicate
wear.
2. Install each synchro hub (A) in its mating synchro

sleeve (B), and check for freedom of movement. Be
sure to match the three sets of longer teeth (C) (120
degrees apart) on the synchro sleeve with the three
sets of deeper grooves (D) in the synchro hub. Do
not install the synchro sleeve with its longer teeth B
in the 1st/2nd synchro hub slots (E) because it will A
damage the spring ring.
NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace

the synchro sleeve and synchro hub as a set.
B
A Example of synchro ring teeth
GOOD WORN
2. Inspect the teeth (C) on each synchro sleeve and

C matching teeth on each gear for wear (rounded off).
E
C
Example of synchro sleeve teeth and gear teeth

A D
GOOD WORN
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-37

00/10/26 15:24:41 61S5N000_130_0039
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement

Special Tools Required 4. Drive the new oil seal in from the transmission side
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25−40 mm using the special tools.
07736-A01000B
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200
07749-0010000
• Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
1. Remove the differencial assembly.
2. Remove the ball bearing (A) from the clutch

housing (B) using the special tool.
3/8″-16
SLIDE HAMMER
(commercially available)
07746-0010200
07736-A01000B 5. Drive the new ball bearing (A) in from the

transmission side using the special tools.
07749-0010000
07746-0010400
B
A
3. Remove the oil seal (A) from the clutch side.
A A
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-39

00/10/26 15:24:42 61S5N000_130_0040
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Bearing Replacement Mainshaft Thrust Clearance

Adjustment
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25−40 mm
07736-A01000B Special Tools Required
• Driver 07749-0010000 • Mainshaft base 07GAJ-PG20130
• Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 • Base collar 07GAJ-PG20120
• Mainshaft holder 07GAJ-PG20110
1. Remove the needle bearing using the special tool,
then remove the oil guide plate C. 1. Remove the 72 mm shim (A) and oil guide plate M
from the transmission housing (B).
3/8″-16
SLIDE HAMMER A
(commercially available)
07736-A01000B
M
2. Position the oil guide plate C and new needle

bearing (A) in the bore of the clutch housing (B). 2. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub (A), the spacer collar
(B), the 5th synchro hub (C), the spacer (D) and ball
07749-0010000 bearing (E) on the mainshaft (F), then install the
A
assembled mainshaft in the transmission housing
(G).
C H
G
07746-0010400
A
B B
C
D E
3. Install the washer (H) on the mainshaft.
4. Measure distance between the end of the

transmission housing and washer with a straight
edge and vernier caliper. Measure at three
locations and average the reading.
13-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:42 61S5N000_130_0041
5. Measure distance between the end of the clutch 72 mm Shim

housing (A) and bearing inner race (B) with a Part Number Thickness
straight edge and depth gauge. Measure at three A 23931-P21-000 0.60 mm (0.0236 in.)
locations and average the readings. B 23932-P21-000 0.63 mm (0.0248 in.)
C 23933-P21-000 0.66 mm (0.0260 in.)
A
D 23934-P21-000 0.69 mm (0.0271 in.)
E 23935-P21-000 0.72 mm (0.0283 in.)
F 23936-P21-000 0.75 mm (0.0295 in.)
G 23937-P21-000 0.78 mm (0.0307 in.)
H 23938-P21-000 0.81 mm (0.0319 in.)
I 23939-P21-000 0.84 mm (0.0331 in.)
J 23940-P21-000 0.87 mm (0.0343 in.)
K 23941-P21-000 0.90 mm (0.0354 in.)
L 23942-P21-000 0.93 mm (0.0366 in.)
B M 23943-P21-000 0.96 mm (0.0378 in.)
N 23944-P21-000 0.99 mm (0.0390 in.)
O 23945-P21-000 1.02 mm (0.0402 in.)
P 23946-P21-000 1.05 mm (0.0413 in.)
Q 23947-P21-000 1.08 mm (0.0425 in.)
Shim Selection Formula: R 23948-P21-000 1.11 mm (0.0437 in.)
S 23949-P21-000 1.14 mm (0.0449 in.)
6. Select the proper 72 mm shim from the chart. T 23950-P21-000 1.17 mm (0.0461 in.)
Follow the example below, and use the U 23951-P21-000 1.20 mm (0.0472 in.)
measurements you made in steps 4 and 5: V 23952-P21-000 1.23 mm (0.0484 in.)
W 23953-P21-000 1.26 mm (0.0496 in.)
• Add distance (step 5) to distance (step 4). X 23954-P21-000 1.29 mm (0.0508 in.)
• From this number, subtract 0.95 (which is the Y 23955-P21-000 1.32 mm (0.0520 in.)
midpoint of the flex range of the clutch housing Z 23956-P21-000 1.35 mm (0.0531 in.)
bearing spring washer). AA 23957-P21-000 1.38 mm (0.0543 in.)
• Take this number and compare it to the available AB 23958-P21-000 1.41 mm (0.0555 in.)
shim sizes in the chart. AC 23959-P21-000 1.44 mm (0.0567 in.)
• Try the 1.68 mm (0.0661 in.) shim. AD 23960-P21-000 1.47 mm (0.0579 in.)
AE 23961-P21-000 1.50 mm (0.0591 in.)
AF 23962-P21-000 1.53 mm (0.0602 in.)
(For example) AG 23963-P21-000 1.56 mm (0.0614 in.)
AH 23964-P21-000 1.59 mm (0.0626 in.)
AI 23965-P21-000 1.62 mm (0.0638 in.)
AJ 23966-P21-000 1.65 mm (0.0650 in.)
AK 23967-P21-000 1.68 mm (0.0661 in.)
: 2.41 2.63 AL 23968-P21-000 1.71 mm (0.0673 in.)
＋ : 0.22 −0.95 AM 23969-P21-000 1.74 mm (0.0685 in.)
AN 23970-P21-000 1.77 mm (0.0697 in.)
= 2.63 = 1.68 AO 23971-P21-000 1.80 mm (0.0709 in.)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-41

00/10/26 15:24:43 61S5N000_130_0042
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment (cont’d)

7. Install the 72 mm shim (A) selected and oil guide 13. Slide the special tools over the mainshaft (A).
plate M in the transmission housing (B).
A
A 07GAJ-PG20130
07GAJ-PG20120
14. Attach the special tool to the mainshaft as follows:

8. Throughly clean the spring washer (A) and
washer (B) before installing them on the ball • Back-out the mainshaft holder bolt (A) and loosen
bearing (C). Note the installation direction of the the two hex bolts (B).
spring washer. • Fit the holder over the mainshaft so its lip is
toward the transmission.
B • Align the mainshaft holder’s lip around the
groove at the inside of the mainshaft splines,
then tighten the hex bolts.
A
A 07GAJ-PG20110
C
B
07GAJ-PG20130
9. Install the mainshaft in the clutch housing.
10. Place the transmission housing over the mainshaft

07GAJ-PG20120
and onto the clutch housing.
11. Tighten the clutch and transmission housings with 15. Seat the mainshaft fully by tapping its end with a
several 8 mm bolts. plastic hammer.
NOTE: It is not necessary to use sealing agent 16. Thread the mainshaft holder bolt in until it just
between the housings. contacts the wide surface of the mainshaft base.
12. Tap the mainshaft with a plastic hammer.
13-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:43 61S5N000_130_0043
Transmission Reassembly
17. Zero a dial gauge (A) on the end of the mainshaft. NOTE: Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in
solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact
surfaces.
A
B
1. Install the magnet (A), differential assembly (B),
and reverse lock cam (C).
6 x 1.0 mm
15 N·m
(1.5 kgf·m,
11 lbf·ft)
B
A
C
07GAJ-PG20110 07GAJ-PG20130
18. Turn the mainshaft holder bolt (B) clockwise; stop

turning when the dial gauge (A) has reached its
maximum movement. The reading on the dial
gauge is the amount of mainshaft end play.
Do not turn the mainshaft holder bolt more than 60 2. Install the 36 mm spring washer (A) and 26 mm
degrees after the needle of the dial gauge stops washer (B) over the ball bearing (C). Note the
moving, this may damage the transmission. installation direction of the spring washer (A).
E
19. If the reading is within the standard, the clearance
is correct. If the reading is not within the standard,
recheck the shim thickness.
F
Standard: 0.11−0.18 mm (0.004−0.007 in.)
B
D
3. Apply vinyl tape the mainshaft splines (D) to

protect the seal. Install the mainshaft and
countershaft (E) into the shift forks (F), and install
them as an assembly.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-43

00/10/26 15:24:44 61S5N000_130_0044
Manual Transmission
Transmission Reassembly (cont’d)

4. Install the reverse shift fork. 6. Select the proper size 72 mm shim (A) according to
the measurements made during the Mainshaft
6 x 1.0 mm Thrust Clearance Adjustment (see page 13-40).
15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m , 11 lbf·ft)
Install the oil gutter plate (B), oil guide plate M, and
72 mm shim into the transmission housing (C).
A B
5. Install the reverse idler gear (A) and reverse gear

shaft (B).
C
B
7. Remove the dirt and oil from the tramsmission
housing sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket (P/N
08718-0001) to the sealing surface. Be sure to seal
the entire circumference of the bolt holes to
prevent oil leakage.
NOTE: If 5 minutes have passed after applying

liquid gasket, reapply it and assemble the housings.
Allow it to cure at least 20 minutes after assembly
A before filling the transmission with oil.
Liquid gasket
13-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:45 61S5N000_130_0045
8. Set the tapered cone ring (A) as shown. Place the 9. Install the 14 x 20 mm dowel pins (A).
transmission housing over the clutch housing, C
being careful to line up the shafts. 25 N·m
B
A
A
A
10. Lower the transmission housing the rest of the way

as you expand the 52 mm snap ring (B). Release
the snap ring so it seats in the groove of the
countershaft bearing.
11. Check that the 52 mm snap ring is securely seated

in the groove of the countershaft bearing.
Dimension as installed: 4.6−8.3 mm

(0.18−0.33 in.)
12. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0001) to the threads

of the 32 mm sealing cap (C), and install it on the
transmission housing.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-45

00/10/26 15:24:46 61S5N000_130_0046
Manual Transmission
Transmission Reassembly (cont’d)

13. Install the 8 mm flange bolts finger-tight. 15. Remove the dirt and oil from the shift lever cover
sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket
(P/N 08718-0001) to the sealing surface.
Liquid gasket
14. Tighten the 8 mm flange bolts in a crisscross
pattern in several steps. 16. Install the 8 x 10 mm dowel pins (A) and shift lever
assembly (B).
8 x 1.25 mm
27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
B
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
13-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:46 61S5N000_130_0047
17. Install the select lever assembly. 19. Install the drain plug (A) and the filler plug (B) with
new washers.
A
B
8 x 1.25 mm
27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
18. Install the detent bolts (A), back-up light switch (B)
with new washers, then install the transmission
C
hanger (C).
D
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
20. Install the O-ring (C) and the vehicle speed sensor
(VSS)(D).
A
22 N·m
A
22 N·m
B (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-47

00/10/26 15:24:47 61S5N000_130_0048
Manual Transmission
Gearshift Mechanism Replacement
SHIFT LEVER KNOB

8 N·m (0.8 kgf·m, 5.8 lbf·ft)
(P/N 08798-9002)
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
SHIFT LEVER HOUSING
COTTER PIN
Replace.
SELECT LOCK PIN
WASHER
(P/N 08798-9002)
COTTER PINS SHIFT CABLE CLIP
Replace. Replace.
SHIFT CABLE CLIP

Replace. COTTER PIN
Replace.
Rotate the shift

cable toward the
opening.
(P/N 08798-9002) SHIFT CABLE
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
Remove the shift

cable from the shift
lever bracket.
13-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:48 61S5N000_130_0049
M/T Differential
BALL BEARING
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection, page 13-50
BALL BEARING
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-49

00/10/26 15:24:49 61S5N000_130_0050
M/T Differential
Backlash Inspection Final Driven Gear/Carrier

Replacement
1. Place the differential assembly on V-blocks (A), and
install both axles.
1. Remove the bolts (left-hand threads) in a crisscross
B pattern in several steps, then remove the final
driven gear (A) from the differential carrier(B).
C
10 x 1.0 mm (8)
101 N·m
(10.3 kgf·m, 74.5 lbf·ft)
2. Measure the backlash of both pinion gears (B) with

a dial indicator (C). If the backlash is not within the
standard, replace the differential carrier.

B
2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfer on the

inside diameter facing the carrier. Tighten the bolts
in a crisscross pattern in several steps.
13-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:49 61S5N000_130_0051
Carrier Bearings Replacement

Special Tool Required 3. Install the new bearings (A) with the special tool
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 and a press. Press each bearing on until it bottoms.
There should be no clearance between the bearings
1. Check the carrier bearings for wear and rough and the carrier.
rotation. If they rotate smoothly and their rollers
show no signs of wear, the beaings are OK.
2. Remove the carrier bearing (A) with a

commercially-available bearing puller (B).
07746-0030100
07746-0030100
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-51

00/10/26 15:24:50 61S5N000_130_0052
M/T Differential
Oil Seal Replacement

Special Tools Required 4. Install the new oil seal in the transmission housing
• Driver 07749-0010000 with the special tools.
• Oil seal driver attachment 07NAD-P200100
1. Remove the differential assembly.
2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the transmission

housing (B).
07749-0010000
B
07NAD-P200100
5. Install the new oil seal in the clutch housing with

A the special tools.
3. Remove the oil seal (A) from the clutch housing (B).
07749-0010000
07NAD-P200100
13-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:24:51 61S5N000_130_0053
Differential Thrust Clearance Adjustment

Special Tool Required 3. Install the transmission housing onto the clutch
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 housing, then tighten the 8 mm flange bolts in a
crisscross pattern in several steps.
1. Install the 80 mm shim that’s the same size as the
one you removed. 8 x 1.25 mm
27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 Ibf·ft)
4. Use the special tool to bottom the differential

assembly in the clutch housing.
00746-0030100
2. Install the differential assembly into the clutch

housing.
5. Measure clearance between 80 mm shim and

bearing outer race in transmission housing.
Standard: 0−0.10 mm (0−0.004 in.)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 13-53

00/10/26 15:24:51 61S5N000_130_0054
M/T Differential
Differential Thrust Clearance Adjustment (cont’d)

6. If the clearance is more than the standard, select a
new 80 mm shim from the following table. If the
clearance measured in step 5 is within the standard,
go to step 9.
80 mm Shim
Part Number Thickness
A 41441-PL3-B001 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
B 41442-PL3-B001 1.1 mm (0.0433 in.)
C 41443-PL3-B001 1.2 mm (0.0472 in.)
D 41444-PL3-B001 1.3 mm (0.0512 in.)
E 41445-PL3-B001 1.4 mm (0.0551 in.)
F 41446-PL3-B001 1.5 mm (0.0591 in.)
G 41447-PL3-B001 1.6 mm (0.0630 in.)
H 41448-PL3-B001 1.7 mm (0.0669 in.)
J 41449-PL3-B001 1.8 mm (0.0709 in.)
K 41450-PL3-B001 1.05 mm (0.0413 in.)
L 41451-PL3-B001 1.15 mm (0.0453 in.)
M 41452-PL3-B001 1.25 mm (0.0492 in.)
N 41453-PL3-B001 1.35 mm (0.0531 in.)
P 41454-PL3-B001 1.45 mm (0.0571 in.)
Q 41455-PL3-B001 1.55 mm (0.0610 in.)
R 41456-PL3-B001 1.65 mm (0.0650 in.)
S 41457-PL3-B001 1.75 mm (0.0689 in.)
7. Remove the bolts and transmission housing.
8. Replace the thrust shim selected in step 7, then

recheck the clearance.
9. Reinstall the transmission.
13-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:46 61S5N000_140_0001
Special Tools ................................................... 14-2 Transmission Housing
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 14-3 Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal ..... 14-140
DTC Troubleshooting Index ............................14-8 Bearing Removal and Installation ................. 14-142
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 14-9 Reverse Idler Gear
System Description ........................................ 14-23 Removal and Installation ........................... 14-143
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 14-65 Shaft Assemblies and Housing
Interlock System Troubleshooting Installation ................................................... 14-177
Shift Lock System Circuit ........................... 14-83
Key Interlock System Circuit ...................... 14-86 Valve Body
Road Test ........................................................ 14-88 Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal ..... 14-144
Stall Speed Test .............................................. 14-91 Valve Body Repair .......................................... 14-146
Pressure Tests ................................................ 14-92 Valve Body Valve Installation ........................ 14-147
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Main Valve Body Disassembly,
Valve Test .................................................... 14-94 Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-148
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid ATF Pump Inspection ..................................... 14-150
Valve Replacement ..................................... 14-94 Regulator Valve Body Disassembly,
Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test .............. 14-95 Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-151
Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Secondary Valve Body Disassembly,
Replacement ............................................... 14-95 Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-152
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Servo Body Disassembly,
Valves A and B Test .................................... 14-96 Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-153
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Lock-up Valve Body Disassembly,
Valves A and B Replacement ..................... 14-97 Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-154
Mainshaft Speed Sensor Replacement ........ 14-98 Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer
Countershaft Speed Sensor Installation ................................................... 14-174
Replacement ............................................... 14-98
ATF Level Check ............................................. 14-99 Torque Converter Housing
ATF Replacement ........................................... 14-100 Mainshaft Bearing/Oil Seal
Transmission Removal .................................. 14-101 Replacement ............................................... 14-155
Transmission Installation .............................. 14-108 Countershaft Bearing Replacement ............. 14-156
ATF Cooler Flushing ....................................... 14-114
ATF Cooler Hoses Replacement ................... 14-115 Shafts and Clutches
Shift Lever Removal ....................................... 14-116 Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection,
Shift Lever Installation ................................... 14-117 and Reassembly ......................................... 14-157
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly .......... 14-119 Mainshaft 2nd Gear Clearance Inspection ... 14-158
Shift Cable Replacement ............................... 14-120 Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement ........ 14-159
Shift Cable Adjustment .................................. 14-123 Countershaft Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-160
A/T Gear Position Indicator Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub
Component Location Index ........................... 14-125 Removal ....................................................... 14-161
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-126 Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub
Transmission Range Switch Test ................. 14-127 Installation ................................................... 14-162
Transmission Range Switch Countershaft 4th Gear Clearance
Replacement ............................................... 14-128 Inspection .................................................... 14-163
Indicator Input Test ........................................ 14-130 1st Gear One-way Clutch Disassembly,
Indicator Bulb Replacement .......................... 14-131 Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-165
Clutch Disassembly ........................................ 14-166
A/T Interlock System Clutch Inspection ............................................ 14-168
Component Location Index ........................... 14-132 Clutch Reassembly ......................................... 14-170
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-133
Key Interlock Solenoid Test ........................... 14-134 A/T Differential
Shift Lock Solenoid Test ................................ 14-134 Component Location Index ........................... 14-185
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement ................. 14-135 Backlash Inspection ........................................ 14-185
Park Pin Switch Test ....................................... 14-135 Differential Carrier Replacement .................. 14-186
Park Pin Switch Replacement ....................... 14-136 Final Driven Gear Replacement .................... 14-187
Carrier Bearing Replacement ........................ 14-187
Transmission End Cover Oil Seal Replacement ..................................... 14-188
End Cover , 1st Gears, and 1st Clutch Removal .... 14-137 Carrier Bearing Side Clearance Inspection .. 14-189
Park Lever Stop Inspection and
Adjustment .................................................. 14-139
End Cover, 1st Gears,
and 1st Clutch Installation .......................... 14-180
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/27 09:13:57 61S5N000_140_0002
Special Tools
07AAK-S5AA000 Engine hanger attachment 1
07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 Mainshaft Holder 1
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly 1
07HAC-PK40102 Housing Puller 1
07JAD-PH80101 Driver Attachment 1
07LAE-PX40100 Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment 2
07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 4
07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Hose Adapter 4
07NAD-PX40100 Driver Attachment 1
07406-0020400 A/T Oil Pressure Gauge Set w/Panel 1
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25−40 mm 1
07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 1
07746-0010600 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 1
07746-0030100 Driver 40 mm I.D. 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
07949-3710001 Driver 1
: Use with the engine hanger T/N AAR-T-12566, or equivallent, commercially available.
: If the top arm is too short, replace it with 07SAC-P0Z01001.
: 07HAE-PL50101 may be substituted for one of these tools.
: Must be used with a commercially available 3/8’’-16 slide hammer.

00/10/26 15:30:47 61S5N000_140_0003

How to Check for DTCs with the Honda PGM If the indicator light or Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Tester/Scan Tool (MIL) has been reported on, or if a driveability problem
is suspected, follow this procedure:
When the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) senses an
abnormality in the input or output systems, the 1. Connect the OBD II Scan Tool (conforming to SAE
indicator light in the gauge assembly will blink. When J1978) or Honda PGM Tester to the DLC. (See the
the Data Link Connector (DLC) (located under the dash OBD II Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester user’s
behind the center console) is connected to the OBD II manual for specific instructions. If you are using
Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester as shown, it will the the Honda PGM Tester, make sure it is set to the
indicate the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) when the SAE DTC type.)
ignition switch is turned ON (II).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and observe the
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (16P) DTC on the screen.
3. Record all fuel and emission DTCs, A/T DTCs, and

freeze data.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the

fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC
(except for DTC P0700, DTC P0700 means there is
one or more A/T DTCs, and no problems were
detected in the fuel and emissions circuit of the
PCM).
5. Get the customer’s radio anti-theft code, and write

down the radio station presets.
6. Reset the memory with the Honda PGM Tester,

OBD II Scan Tool or by removing the No. 6 BACK
UP fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more
than 10 seconds.
7. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the

OBD II SCAN TOOL or same conditions as those indicator by the freeze
HONDA PGM TESTER data, and then recheck for DTC. If the A/T DTC
returns, go to the DTC Troubleshooting Index. If the
DTC does not return, there was an intermittent
problem within the circuit. Make sure all pins and
terminals in the circuit are tight, and then go to step
8.
8. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and

set the clock.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:30:48 61S5N000_140_0004

How to Check for DTCs with the SCS Mode If the indicator light and the MIL come on at the same
time, or if a driveability problem is suspected, follow
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or this procedure:
output systems, the indicator light in the gauge
assembly will usually blink and/or the MIL may come 1. Record all fuel and emission DTCs and A/T DTCs.
on.
2. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the
When the indicator light has been reported on, fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC
connect the Honda PGM Tester to the DLC. Turn the (except for DTC 70, DTC 70 means there is one or
ignition switch ON (II), select Honda Systems, and then more A/T DTCs, and no problems were detected in
the SCS mode, then observe the indicator light. the fuel and emissions circuit of the PCM).
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
3. Get the customer’s radio anti-theft code, and write
down the radio station presets.
4. Reset the memory by removing the No. 6 BACK UP

fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box for more
than 10 seconds.
5. Drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds

over 30 mph (50 km/h), and then recheck for DTC. If
the A/T DTC returns, go to the DTC Troubleshooting
Index. If the DTC does not return, there was an
intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight, and
INDICATOR LIGHT
then go to step 6.
Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short 6. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and
blinks. Code 10 and above are indicated by a series of set the clock.
long and short blinks. One long blink equals 10 short
blinks. Add the long and short blinks together to
determine the code. After determining the code, refer to
the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
Example: DTC 1
Short blink (once)
OFF
Example: DTC 15
Long blink Short blinks (five times)
OFF

00/10/26 15:30:48 61S5N000_140_0005
How to Troubleshoot Circuit at the PCM 5. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking
patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a
Special Tools Required multimeter (C).
Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (two required)
A
07SAZ-001000A
SRS components are located in this area. Review the
B
SRS components locations, precautions, and 07SAZ-001000A
procedures in the SRS section before performing
repairs or service.
1. Remove the glove box stops, then open the glove

box.
2. Remove the harness connector clamp (A) from its

bracket.
B
C
6. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the

contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide
the tip into the connector from the wire side until it
touches the end of the wire terminal.
D 7. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector

or the wire side is sealed, disconnect the connector
and use the tester probe to probe the connectors
from the terminal side. Do not force the probe into
A
the connector.
E
3. Loosen the mounting nut (B) on the lower right of

the PCM, and remove the mounting bolt (C) and nut
(D) on the left of the PCM.
4. Lift the PCM up to clear the mounting nut on the

lower right of the PCM, then pull out the PCM (E).
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:30:49 61S5N000_140_0006

PCM Reset Procedures How to End a Troubleshooting Session
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting.
then write down the radio station presets.
2. Disconnect the OBD II Scan Tool or the Honda PGM
3. Use one of these methods to reset the PCM Tester (A) from the DLC (B).
memory:
B
• Use the OBD II Scan Tool or the Honda PGM
Tester.
• Remove the No. 6 BACK UP fuse (15 A) (A) from
the under-hood fuse/relay box (B) for more than
10 seconds.
A
3. Reset the PCM.
5. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and

set the clock.
6. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the

vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph
(50 km/h).

00/10/26 15:30:49 61S5N000_140_0007
PCM Reprogramming and Substitution for How to Substitute the PCM

Testing
1. Remove the PCM from the vehicle.
Honda Interface Module 07 2. Install a known-good PCM in the vehicle.
Use this procedure when you have to substitute a 3. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM
known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. replacement procedure on the Honda PGM Tester.
Reprogram the PCM only if the PCM does not already It allows you to start the engine.
have the latest software loaded.
4. After completing your tests, reinstall the original
NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the
reprogramming the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch PCM replacement procedure on the Honda PGM
OFF, the PCM can be damaged. Tester again.
How to Reprogram the PCM
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the

engine.
2. Connect the Honda Interface Module (HIM) (A) to

the Data Link Connector (DLC) (B) located under the
driver’s side of dashboard.
GNR-3557010000 (USA)
3557010000 (Canada)
3. Do the PCM update procedure as described on the

HIM label and in the PCM update system. If the
software in the PCM is the latest version, substitute
the PCM.

00/10/26 15:30:49 61S5N000_140_0008

NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot.
DTC* Indicator MIL Detection Item Page

Light
P0715 (15) Blinks ON Mainshaft speed sensor (see page 14-65)
P0720 (9) Blinks ON Countershaft speed sensor (see page 14-67)
P0730 (41) OFF ON Shift control system (see page 14-68)
P0740 (40) OFF ON Lock-up control system (see page 14-69)
P0753 (7) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-70)
P0758 (8) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-72)
P1705 (5) Blinks ON Transmission range switch (short to ground) (see page 14-74)
P1706 (6) OFF ON Transmission range switch (open) (see page 14-77)
P1753 (1) Blinks ON Torque converter clutch solenoid valve (see page 14-79)
P1768 (16) Blinks ON A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-81)
P1773 (23) Blinks ON A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-82)
The DTC in parentheses is the flash code the indicator light indicates when the Data Link Connector (DLC) is
connected to the Honda PGM Tester in the SCS mode.

00/10/26 15:30:49 61S5N000_140_0009

These symptoms DO NOT trigger Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) or cause the indicator light to blink. If the
Mulfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) was reported ON or the indicator light has been blinking, check for DTCs. But if
the vehicle has one of the symptoms in the following chart, check the probable cause(s) for it, in the sequence listed,
until you find the problem.
Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
When you turn the A problem in meter bus line Check the MPCS DTC (see page 22-173).
ignition switch ON
(II), the indicator
light comes on and
stays on or never
comes on at all.
and indicator
light does not come
on when the shift
lever is in that
position.
Shift lever cannot be A problem in the shift lock Check the interlock system−shift lock system circuit
moved from system (interlock system) (see page 14-83).
position while you’re
pushing on the brake
pedal.
Ignition key cannot A problem in the key interlock Check the interlock system−key interlock system
be moved from ACC system (interlock system) circuit (see page 14-86).
(I) position to LOCK
(0) position with the
shift lever in
position.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:30:50 61S5N000_140_0010
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont’d)
Engine runs, but 1. Low ATF level • Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for
vehicle does not 2. Shift cable broken or out of leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
move in any gear. adjustment ATF cooler lines.
3. Joint in shift cable and • Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
transmission or body worn transmission control shaft.
4. ATF pump worn or binding • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
5. Regulator valve stuck or converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
spring worn symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or
6. ATF strainer clogged a high pitched squeak.
7. Mainshaft worn or • Measure line pressure.
damaged • If the strainer is clogged, find the damaged
8. Final gears worn or components that caused debris.
damaged • Inspect the differential pinion shaft for wear under the
9. Transmission-to-engine pinion gears. If the differential pinion shaft is worn,
assembly error overhaul the differential assembly, replace the ATF
10. Axle disengaged strainer, thoroughly clean the transmission, and flush
the torque converter, cooler, and lines.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing when replacing the main ball bearing. You
may also damage the ATF pump when you torque
down the main valve body. This will result in ATF
pump seizure if not detected. Use the proper tools.
• Install the main seal flush with the torque converter
housing. If you push it into the torque converter
housing until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid
return passage and result in damage.
Vehicle moves in 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
and , but not adjustment transmission control shaft.
in , or position. 2. 1st gear one-way clutch • Inspect 1st clutch pressure.
defective • Inspect the mainshaft and 1st clutch assembly for
3. 1st accumulator defective wear and damage.
4. 1st gears worn or damaged • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
5. 1st clutch defective spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
6. Foreign material in 1st clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
orifice is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates
for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn
and damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK,
adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
14-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:50 61S5N000_140_0011
Vehicle moves in 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and
, , , but not in adjustment transmission control shaft.
position. 2. 2nd accumulator defective • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
3. 2nd gears worn or loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the
damaged shift solenoid valve for seizure.
4. 2nd clutch defective • Inspect the mainshaft and 2nd clutch assembly for
wear and damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates
or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK,
Vehicle moves in 1. Shift fork shaft stuck • Measure line pressure and 4th clutch pressure.
, , , but not in 2. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork
position. adjustment shaft.
3. 4th clutch defective • Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and
4. Reverse gears worn or transmission control shaft.
damaged • If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is
OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
replace the torque converter.
• Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers, and
inspect engagement teeth chamfers of the
countershaft 4th gear and reverse gear. Replace the
reverse gears and the reverse selector if they are
worn or damaged. If the transmission makes clicking,
grinding, or whirring noises, also replace the
mainshaft 4th gear, reverse idler gear, and
countershaft 4th gear.
• If the 4th clutch feed pipe guide in the end cover is
scored by the mainshaft, inspect the ball bearing for
excessive movement in the transmission housing. If
the ball bearing is OK, replace the end cover as it is
dented. The O-ring under the guide is probably worn.
• Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 1st and
4th clutch feed pipes are loose or damaged. If the 4th
clutch feed pipe is damaged or out of round, replace
the end cover.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
the discs and plates are worn and damaged, replace
them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
with the clutch end plate.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-11

00/10/26 15:30:50 61S5N000_140_0012
Poor acceleration; 1. Low ATF level • Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for
flares on starting 2. Shift cable broken or out of leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
off in and adjustment ATF cooler lines.
positions: 3. ATF pump worn or binding • Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
Stall speed high in 4. Regulator valve stuck or transmission control shaft.
, ,and spring worn • Check line pressure.
positions. 5. ATF strainer clogged • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
6. Torque converter check converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
valve defective symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or
a high pitched squeak.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing when replacing the main ball bearing. You
may also damage the ATF pump when you torque
down the main valve body. This will result in ATF
pump seizure if not detected. Use the proper tools.
Poor acceleration; 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
flares on starting adjustment transmission control shaft.
off in and 2. 1st clutch defective • Check 1st clutch pressure.
positions: 3. 1st gear one-way clutch • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
Stall speed high in defective spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
, positions. clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
off in and 2. 2nd clutch defective • Check 2nd clutch pressure.
positions: • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
Stall speed high in spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
position. clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
off in and 2. 4th clutch defective • Check 4th clutch pressure.
positions: • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
Stall speed high in and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
position. damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end
plate clearance.
14-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:51 61S5N000_140_0013
Poor acceleration; 1. Shift solenoid valve A • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
flares on starting defective loose connectors. Inspect the shift solenoid valve
off in and 2. Torque converter one-way filter/gasket, and the shift solenoid valve A for seizure.
positions: clutch defective • Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
Stall speed low 3. Engine output low
4. Lock-up clutch piston
defective
5. Lock-up shift valve
defective
6. Restricted ATF cooler
Engine idle 1. Low ATF level • Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still
vibration 2. Shift solenoid valve A no good, adjust the engine mounts as outlined in the
defective engine section of this service manual.
3. A/T clutch pressure control • Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for
solenoid valve A defective leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
4. Drive plate defective or ATF cooler lines.
transmission • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
misassembled loose connectors. Inspect the shift solenoid valve
5. Engine output low, low idle filter/gasket, and the shift solenoid valve A for seizure.
speed • Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
6. Lock-up clutch piston filter/gasket for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch
defective pressure control solenoid valve A is stuck, inspect the
7. ATF pump worn or binding CPC valve.
8. Lock-up shift valve • Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
defective
10. Misadjusted engine mounts
Vehicle moves in 1. Excessive ATF • Check ATF level and drain ATF .
position. 2. 1st clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
3. 2nd clutch defective and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
4. 3rd clutch defective damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
5. 4th clutch defective clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
6. Foreign material in main the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
orifice the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
7. Clutch clearance incorrect them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
8. Needle bearing seized up, with the clutch end plate.
worn, or damaged • Check for clutch pressure in neutral.
9. Thrust washer seized up,
worn, or damaged
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-13

00/10/26 15:30:51 61S5N000_140_0014
Late shift from 1. 1st clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
position to and 2. Foreign material in 1st and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
positions orifice damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
• Check the 1st clutch pressure.
Late shift from 1. Shift fork shaft stuck • Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork
position to 2. 4th clutch defective shaft.
position 3. 1-2 shift valve defective • Inspect the servo valve and the O-ring.
4. Servo control valve • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
defective and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
• Check the 4th clutch pressure.
No shift 1. A/T clutch pressure control • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
solenoid valve A defective loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
2. CPC valve defective control solenoid valve filter/gasket for wear and
3. Modulator valve defective damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
4. Shift solenoid valve A valve A is stuck, inspect the CPC valve.
defective • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
5. Shift solenoid valve B loose connectors. Inspect the shift solenoid valve
defective filter/gasket, and the shift solenoid valves A and B for
seizure.
• If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
Erratic shifting 1. 2-3 shift valve defective Check the indicator light indication, and check for
gears: 2. Shift solenoid valve B loose connectors. Inspect the shift solenoid valve filter/
Fails to shift in defective gasket, and the shift solenoid valve B for seizure.
and positions;
shifts from 1st to
3rd gear
Erratic shifting 1. 2-3 shift valve defective Check the indicator light indication, and check for
gears: 2. 3-4 shift valve defective loose connectors. Inspect the shift solenoid valve filter/
Fails to shift in 3. Shift solenoid valve A gasket, and the shift solenoid valve A for seizure.
and positions; defective
shifts from 1st to
4th gear
14-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:51 61S5N000_140_0015
Erratic upshift: Countershaft speed sensor Check the indicator light indication, and check for
1st to 2nd, 2nd to defective loose connectors. Check the countershaft speed sensor
3rd, and 3rd to 4th installation.
gears
Erratic upshift: 1. 1-2 shift valve defective Check the indicator light indication, and check for
1st to 2nd gear 2. Shift solenoid valve A loose connectors. Inspect the shift solenoid valve filter/
defective gasket, and the shift solenoid valve A for seizure.
2nd to 3rd gear 2. Shift solenoid valve B loose connectors. Inspect the shift solenoid valve filter/
defective gasket, and the shift solenoid valve B for seizure.
3rd to 4th gear 2. Shift solenoid valve A loose connectors. Inspect the shift solenoid valve filter/
defective gasket, and the shift solenoid valve A for seizure.
Harsh upshift: 1. 2nd clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
1st to 2nd gear 2. A/T clutch pressure control and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
solenoid valve A defective damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
3. A/T clutch pressure control clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
solenoid valve B defective the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
4. CPC valve defective the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
5. Foreign material in main them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
orifice with the clutch end plate.
6. Torque converter clutch • Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
solenoid valve defective • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
7. Mainshaft speed sensor loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
defective control solenoid valve filter/gasket for wear and
8. Countershaft speed sensor damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
defective valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valve.
• Check the indicator light indication, and check for
loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the
torque converter clutch solenoid valve for seizure.
• Check the mainshaft speed sensor installation.
• Check the countershaft speed sensor installation.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-15

00/10/26 15:30:52 61S5N000_140_0016
Harsh upshift: 1. 3rd clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
2nd to 3rd gear 2. A/T clutch pressure control and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
5. 2nd accumulator defective them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
6. 2nd orifice control valve with the clutch end plate.
defective • Check the 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
7. Foreign material in main • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
orifice loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
8. Torque converter clutch control solenoid valve filter/gasket for wear and
solenoid valve defective damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
9. Mainshaft speed sensor valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valve.
defective • Inspect the O-rings, and check the torque converter
10. Countershaft speed sensor clutch solenoid valve for seizure.
defective • Check the mainshaft speed sensor installation.
Harsh upshift: 1. 4th clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
3rd to 4th gear 2. A/T clutch pressure control and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
5. 3rd accumulator defective them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
6. 3-4 orifice control valve with the clutch end plate.
defective • Check the 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
7. Foreign material in main • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
orifice loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
8. Torque converter clutch control solenoid valve filter/gasket for wear and
solenoid valve defective damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
9. Mainshaft speed sensor valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valve.
defective • Inspect the O-rings, and check the torque converter
10. Countershaft speed sensor clutch solenoid valve for seizure.
defective • Check the mainshaft speed sensor installation.
14-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:52 61S5N000_140_0017
Harsh downshift: 1. A/T clutch pressure control • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
2nd to 1st gear solenoid valve A defective loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
2. CPC valve defective control solenoid valve filter/gasket for wear and
3. 2nd accumulator defective damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
4. CPB valve defective valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valve.
5. Foreign material in 2nd • Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
exhaust orifice • Check the mainshaft speed sensor installation.
6. Mainshaft speed sensor • Check the countershaft speed sensor installation.
defective
7. Countershaft speed sensor
defective
Harsh downshift: 1. 2nd clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
3rd to 2nd gear 2. A/T clutch pressure control and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
3. CPC valve defective clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
4. 3rd accumulator defective the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
5. Foreign material in the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
separator plate orifice them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
6. CPB valve defective with the clutch end plate.
7. Foreign material in 3rd • Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
exhaust orifice • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
Harsh downshift: 1. 3rd clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
4th to 3rd gear 2. A/T clutch pressure control and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
3. CPC valve defective clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
4. 4th accumulator defective the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
5. Foreign material in the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
separator plate orifice them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
6. CPB valve defective with the clutch end plate.
7. Foreign material in 4th • Check the 3rd clutch pressure.
exhaust orifice • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-17

00/10/26 15:30:53 61S5N000_140_0018
Flares on 1. 3rd clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
upshifting: 2. A/T clutch pressure control and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
2nd to 3rd gear solenoid valve A defective damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressures
control solenoid valve filter/gasket for wear and
damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valve.
Flares on 1. 4th clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
3rd to 4th gear solenoid valve A defective damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve filter/gasket for wear and
damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valve.
14-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:53 61S5N000_140_0019
Excessive shock on 1. 3rd clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
2nd to 3rd gear solenoid valve A defective damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
7. CPB valve defective • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
8. Torque converter clutch loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
solenoid valve defective control solenoid valve filter/gasket for wear and
Excessive shock on 1. 4th clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
3rd to 4th gear solenoid valve A defective damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
7. CPB valve defective • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
8. Torque converter clutch loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressures
solenoid valve defective control solenoid valve filter/gasket for wear and
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-19

00/10/26 15:30:53 61S5N000_140_0020
Noise from 1. ATF pump worn or binding • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
transmission in all 2. Torque converter housing converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
shift lever and transmission housing symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or
positions bearings worn or damaged a high pitched squeak.
• Inspect the contact of the mainshaft and countershaft
with the bearings. Check the ATF guide plate for
damage and wear. Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe for
damage and out of round. If the 1st clutch feed pipe is
damaged or out of round, replace it. Replace the
mainshaft if the bushing of the 1st clutch feed pipe is
damaged or out of round.
• Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers, and
engagement teeth chamfers of the countershaft 4th
gear and reverse gear. If they are worn or damaged,
replace them.
• Inspect the differential pinion shaft for wear under
pinion gears. If the differential pinion shaft is worn,
overhaul differential assembly, replace the ATF
strainer, thoroughly clean transmission, and flush
transmission and cooler lines.
• Inspect the bottom of the 3rd clutch for swirl marks. If
the bottom of the 3rd clutch is swirled, replace the
countershaft and final driven gear.
Vehicle does not Torque converter one-way clutch Replace the torque converter.
accelerate more defective
than 31 mph
(50 km/h).
Vibration in all 1. Low idle speed • Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still
shift lever 2. Misadjusted engine mounts no good, adjust the engine mounts as outlined in the
positions 3. Drive plate defective or engine section of this service manual.
transmission • Check the stall speed.
misassembled • Check for a misinstalled/damaged drive plate.
Shift lever does 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
not operate adjustment transmission control shaft.
smoothly. 2. Joint in shift cable and
transmission or body worn
Fails to shift: 1. A/T clutch pressure control • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
stuck in 4th gear solenoid valve A defective loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
2. Shift solenoid valve A control solenoid valve filter/gasket for wear and
defective damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
3. Shift solenoid valve B valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valve.
loose connectors. Inspect the shift solenoid valve
filter/gasket, and the shift solenoid valves A and B for
seizure.
14-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:54 61S5N000_140_0021
Transmission does 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
not shift into adjustment transmission control shaft.
position. 2. Joint in shift cable and • Check the park pawl spring installation and the park
transmission or body worn lever spring installation. If installation is incorrect,
3. Parking mechanism install the spring correctly. Make sure that the park
defective lever stop is not installed upside down. Check the
distance between the park pawl shaft and park lever
roller pin. If the distance is out of tolerance, adjust the
distance with the park lever stop.
Stall speed high, Torque converter check valve • Inspect the clutch assemblies for seizure and wear. If
but all clutch defective the clutch assembly is seized or excessively worn,
pressures are in repair it, and inspect the CPC valve and A/T clutch
specification. pressure solenoid valves for free movement.
Lock-up clutch 1. Lock-up timing valve • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
does not defective loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
disengage. 2. Lock-up shift valve control solenoid valve filter/gasket for wear and
3. Lock-up control valve valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valve.
4. Lock-up clutch piston loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the
defective torque converter clutch solenoid valve for seizure.
5. Torque converter clutch • Check the countershaft speed sensor installation.
solenoid valve defective • Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
6. A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B defective
defective.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-21

00/10/26 15:30:54 61S5N000_140_0022
Lock-up clutch 1. Torque converter check • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
does not operate valve defective loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
smoothly. 2. Lock-up timing valve control solenoid valve filter/gasket for wear and
3. Lock-up shift valve valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valve.
4. Lock-up control valve loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the
5. Lock-up clutch piston • Check the countershaft speed sensor installation.
defective
6. Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve defective
defective
Look-up clutch 1. Torque converter check • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
does not engage. valve defective loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
2. Lock-up timing valve control solenoid valve filter/gasket for wear and
3. Lock-up shift valve valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valve.
4. Lock-up control valve loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the
5. Lock-up clutch piston • Check the mainshaft speed sensor installation.
defective • Check the countershaft speed sensor installation.
6. Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve defective
8. Mainshaft speed sensor
defective
defective
A/T gear position 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
indicator does not adjustment transmission control shaft.
indicate shift lever 2. Joint in shift cable and • Check the indicator light indication, and check for
positions. transmission or body worn loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range
3. Transmission range switch switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty,
defective or out of replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of
adjustment adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
14-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:54 61S5N000_140_0023
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and dual-shaft electronically controlled
automatic transmission which provides 4 speeds forward and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the
engine.
Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches

The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. They are connected to the
engine crankshaft so they turn together as a unit as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque converter is a
ring gear which meshes with the starter pinion, when the engine is being started. The entire torque converter
assembly serves as a flywheel while transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has two
parallel shafts: the mainshaft and the countershaft. The mainshaft is in line with the engine crankshaft. The mainshaft
includes the 1st, 2nd, and 4th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 2nd, 4th, reverse, and 1st (3rd gear is integral with the
mainshaft, while reverse gear is integral with the 4th gear). The countershaft includes the 3rd clutch and gears for 3rd,
2nd, 4th, reverse, 1st, and park. Reverse and 4th gears can be locked to the countershaft at its center, providing 4th
gear or reverse, depending on which way the selector is moved. The gears on the mainshaft are in constant mesh with
those on the countershaft. When certain combinations of gears are engaged by the clutches, power is transmitted
from the mainshaft to the countershaft to provide , , , and positions.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), sensors, and solenoid valves. Shifting
and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located below the
dashboard, behind the glove box.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the secondary valve body, the servo body,
and the lock-up valve body. They are bolted to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the
manual valve, the modulator valve, the 1-2 shift valve, the 2nd orifice control valve, the servo control valve, the Clutch
Pressure Back-up (CPB) valve, and the ATF pump gears. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the
lock-up control valve, the torque converter check valve, and the cooler relief valve. The secondary valve body contains
the 2-3 shift valve, the 3-4 shift valve, 3-4 orifice control valve, the 4th exhaust valve, and the Clutch Pressure Control
(CPC) valve. The servo body contains the servo valve, and the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th accumulators. The lock-up valve
body contains the lock-up shift valve and the lock-up timing valve. Fluid from the regulator passed through the manual
valve to the various control valves. The 1st, 3rd, and 4th clutches receive fluid from their respective feed pipe, and the
2nd clutch receives fluid from the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism

The PCM controls to shift gears the shift solenoid valves A and B, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A,
while receiving input signal from various sensors located throughout the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves shift the
positions of the shift valves to switch the port leading hydraulic pressure to the clutch. The A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A controls the CPC valve to regulate the CPC pressure, and to shift smoothly between lower gear and
higher gear. This pressurizes a line to one of the clutches, engaging the clutch and its corresponding gear.
Lock-up Mechanism
In position (3rd and 4th), and position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter
through a fluid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place,
the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes
the timing of the lock-up mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure
changes to switch lock-up on and off. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve control the range of the
lock-up according to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B. The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
mounted on the torque converter housing, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B is mounted on the
transmission housing with solenoid valve A as an assembly. They are all controlled by the PCM.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-23

00/10/26 15:30:55 61S5N000_140_0024
System Description (cont’d)

Gear Selection
The shift lever has six positions: PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, 1st through 4th gear ranges, 1st through
3rd gear ranges, and 2nd gear.
Position Description
PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with the park gear on the countershaft. All clutches
released.
REVERSE Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 4th clutch engaged.
NEUTRAL All clutches released.
DRIVE General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, then 4th, depending on
(1st through 4th) vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshift through 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on deceleration to
stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd and 4th gears.
DRIVE For rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving; up-hill and down-hill driving;
(1st through 3rd) starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd, depending on vehicle speed and throttle
position.
Downshifts through 2nd to 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd
gear.
SECOND Driving in 2nd gear; stays in 2nd gear, does not shift up and down. For engine braking or better
traction starting off on loose or slippery surface.
Starting is possible only in and positions through the use of a slide-type, neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transaxle (A/T) Gear Position Indicator

The A/T gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows what gear has been selected without looking down at
the console.
14-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:55 61S5N000_140_0025
Clutches
The 4-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engaged or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don’t slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the end of the mainshaft, behind the end cover. The 1st
clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 2nd clutch is joined
back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the mainshaft by a circuit
connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rd Clutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the end of the countershaft, opposite the end cover.
The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the countershaft.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
4th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 2nd clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe
within the mainshaft.
One-way Clutch
The one-way clutch is positioned between the countershaft 1st gear and the park gear. The park gear is splined with
the countershaft and rotates with the countershaft. The countershaft 1st gear provides the outer race surface of the
one-way clutch, and the park gear provides the inner race surface.
The one-way clutch locks up when power is transmitted from the mainshaft 1st gear to the countershaft 1st gear. The
1st clutch and gear remain engaged in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gear ranges in the , , or position. However, the
one-way clutch disengages when the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th clutches and gears are applied in the , or position. This
is because the increased rotational speed of the gears on the countershaft overrides the locking ″speed range″ of
the one-way clutch. The one-way clutch free-wheels when the 1st clutch is engaged.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-25

00/10/26 15:30:56 61S5N000_140_0026

Transmission Cutaway View
2ND CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT 4TH CLUTCH
ATF PUMP 2ND GEAR
RING GEAR DRIVEN MAINSHAFT
GEAR MAINSHAFT 4TH GEAR
TORQUE 3RD GEAR
CONVERTER MAINSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
MAINSHAFT
1ST GEAR
1ST CLUTCH
LOCK-UP CLUTCH
PISTON
MAINSHAFT
REVERSE
SELECTOR
HUB
COUNTERSHAFT
ONE-WAY
CLUTCH
DRIVE PLATE PARK GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR
FINAL DRIVE COUNTERSHAFT
GEAR REVERSE GEAR
REVERSE SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT 4TH GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
3RD GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL
ASSEMBLY
3RD CLUTCH
FINAL DRIVEN
GEAR
14-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:56 61S5N000_140_0027
Power Flow
POSITION PART
TORQUE 1ST GEAR 2ND GEAR 3RD GEAR 4TH REVERSE PARK
CONVERTER 1ST 2ND 3RD GEAR CLUTCH GEAR GEAR
CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH
○ × × × × × × ○
○ × × × × ○ ○ ×
○ × × × × × × ×
and 1ST ○ ○*2 × × × × × ×
2ND ○ ○*1 ○ × × × × ×
3RD ○ ○*1 × ○ × × × ×
4TH ○ ○*1 × × ○ ○ × ×
○ ○*1 ○ × × × × ×
○: Operates
×: Doesn’t operate
*1: Although the 1st clutch engages, driving power is not transmitted as the one-way clutch slips.
*2: The one-way clutch engages when accelerating, and slips when decelerating.
Gear Operation
Gears on the mainshaft
• The 1st gear engages/disengages with the mainshaft by the 1st clutch.
• The 2nd gear engages/disengages with the mainshaft by the 2nd clutch.
• The 3rd gear is integral with the mainshaft.
• The 4th gear engages/disengages with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
• The reverse gear engages/disengages with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
Gears on the countershaft

• The park gear, 1st gear, 2nd gear, 4th gear are splined with the countershaft and rotate with the countershaft.
• The 3rd gear engages/disengages with the countershaft by the 3rd clutch.
• The final drive gear is integral with the countershaft.
• The 4th gear and reverse gear rotate freely from the countershaft. The reverse selector engages the 4th gear or the
reverse gear with the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined with the countershaft so that the 4th
gear or reverse gear engage with the countershaft.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-27

00/10/26 15:30:56 61S5N000_140_0028

Power Flow (cont’d)
Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.
Position
Engine power transmitted from the torque converter drives the mainshaft, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the
clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft 4th gear is engaged with the reverse selector
hub and the countershaft by the reverse selector when the shift lever is shifted in position from position. The
countershaft reverse gear is engaged when shifted from position.
TORQUE CONVERTER
2ND CLUTCH
4TH CLUTCH
1ST CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
PARK GEAR
FINAL DRIVE GEAR SERVO VALVE ONE-WAY CLUTCH

3RD CLUTCH
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:57 61S5N000_140_0029

In or position, the optimum gear is automatically selected from the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears, according to
conditions such as the balance between the throttle opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed.
or Position in 1st gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the mainshaft 1st gear with the mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT 1ST GEAR
1ST CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
PARK GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-29

00/10/26 15:30:57 61S5N000_140_0030

or Position in 2nd gear and Position
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the mainshaft 2nd gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
NOTE: Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 2nd gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
power from 1st gear is cut off at the one-way clutch.
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
2ND GEAR
2ND CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR COUNTERSHAFT

2ND GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:57 61S5N000_140_0031
or Position in 3rd gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the countershaft 3rd gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft.
NOTE: Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 3rd gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR COUNTERSHAFT

3RD GEAR
3RD CLUTCH
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-31

00/10/26 15:30:58 61S5N000_140_0032

Position in 4th gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 4th gear while
the shift lever is in the forward range ( , and positions).
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear, which drives the reverse selector hub and the countershaft.
NOTE: Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 4th gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
TORQUE CONVERTER
4TH CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT 4TH GEAR
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE SELECTOR HUB
REVERSE SELECTOR
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:58 61S5N000_140_0033
Position
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft reverse gear
while the shift lever is in the position.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear. The countershaft reverse
gear drives the reverse selector, reverse selector hub and the countershaft.
• The rotation direction of the countershaft reverse gear is changed via the reverse idler gear.
TORQUE CONVERTER
4TH CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT REVERSE GEAR
REVERSE
FINAL DRIVE GEAR SELECTOR HUB
SERVO VALVE
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-33

00/10/26 15:30:58 61S5N000_140_0034

Electronic Control System
Functional Diagram
The electronic control system consists of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), sensors, switches, and solenoid
valves. Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions.
The PCM inputs signals from the sensors, switches, and other control units, perform processing data, and outputs
signals for engine control system and A/T control system. The A/T control system includes shift control, grade logic
control, CPC control, and lock-up control is stored in the PCM.
The PCM switches the shift solenoid valves, A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves, and torque converter clutch
solenoid valve on hydraulic circuit to control shifting transmission gears and lock-up torque converter clutch.
PCM
Engine RPM signal
Throttle Position
Sensor Signal Gauge
Multiplex Assembly
PGM-FI Control System A/T Gear
Engine Coolant Position
Temperature Sensor Signal Indicator
Intake Air Temperature A/T Control System

Sensor Signal
Vehicle Speed Sensor Shift Control Shift Solenoid Valve A

Signal
Grade Logic Control
• Ascending control
Transmission • Descending control
Range Shift Solenoid Valve B Automatic
• Deceleration control 4-speed
Switch
Signal
CPC Control A/T Clutch Pressure

Control Solenoid Valve A
A/T Clutch Pressure

Control Solenoid Valve B Lock-up
Mainshaft Speed Conditions
Sensor Signal
Lock-up Control
Countershaft Speed Lock-up

Torque Converter Clutch ON/OFF
Sensor Signal Solenoid Valve
Cruise Control Signal

Interlock Control Shift Lock Solenoid
Brake Pedal Position
Switch Signal
14-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:30:59 61S5N000_140_0035
Electronic Controls Location
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT
PARK PIN SWITCH
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

DATA LINK CONNECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH

SPEED SENSOR SOLENOID VALVE
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
MAINSHAFT SPEED
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE SHIFT SOLENOID SENSOR
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVES A and B
VALVES A and B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-35

00/10/26 15:30:59 61S5N000_140_0036

Electronic Control System (cont’d)
Shift Control
The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors and switches, and
it actuates the shift solenoid valves A and B to control shifting.
Also, a Grade Logic Control System has been adopted to control shifting in position. The PCM compares actual
driving conditions with memorized driving conditions, based on the input from the throttle position sensor, the engine
coolant temperature sensor, the barometric pressure sensor, the brake pedal position switch signal, cruise control
signal, and the shift lever position signal, to control shifting while vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, or
reducing speed.
PCM Gauge Assembly
Transmission
Engine RPM Signal Engine RPM control Range Switch
Forward range
Transmission Shift position control by
transmission range switch Multiplex
Range
Switch Signal signal
A/T Gear
Fail-safe control Position
Indicator
Service Check Signal
Shift Solenoid Valve A

Throttle Position Master Target of
Sensor Signal Shifting Position
Shift Solenoid Valve B
Countershaft Speed
Fail−safe
Sensor Signal Correction of Data

Selection of
shifting mode
Vehicle Speed Sensor
Signal
Grade Logic Control
• Ascending mode
• Descending mode
Calculation of gradient
Engine Coolant Correction of engine

Temperature coolant temperature
Sensor Signal sensor signal data
Cruise Control Signal Correction of cruise control

signal data
Judgment of controlling Interlock Control System

Brake Pedal Position area Shift Lock Solenoid
Switch Signal
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
14-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:00 61S5N000_140_0037
The PCM turns the shift solenoid valves A and B ON and OFF to control shifting transmission gear. The combination of
driving signals to shift solenoid valves A and B are shown in table below.
Position Gear Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B

and 1st OFF ON
2nd ON ON
3rd ON OFF
4th OFF OFF
2nd ON ON
Reverse ON OFF
Reverse inhibit OFF ON
――― OFF OFF
――― OFF OFF
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-37

00/10/26 15:31:00 61S5N000_140_0038

Grade Logic Control System
Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in position, the system extends the engagement area of
2nd and 3rd gear to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd gears, and between 3rd
and 4th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power when needed.
Shift schedules stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, enable it to
automatically select most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient.
100 % ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule

1ST 2ND 2ND 3RD 3RD 4TH
Throttle opening
: FLAT ROAD MODE
: GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE

50
: MEDIUM ASCENDING MODE
: STEEP ASCENDING MODE
: HEAVY STEEP ASCENDING MODE
0
62 mph Vehicle speed
(100 km/h)
Descending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in position, the shift-up speed from 3rd to 4th gear
and from 2nd to 3rd (when the throttle is closed) becomes faster than the set speed for flat road driving to widen the 3
rd gear and 2nd gear driving areas. This, in combination with engine braking from the deceleration lock-up, achieves
smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There are two descending modes with different 3rd gear driving areas
and 2nd gear driving areas to suit the magnitude of the gradients stored in the PCM. When the vehicle is in 4th gear,
and you are decelerating when you are applying the brakes on a steep hill, the transmission will downshift to 3rd gear.
When you accelerate, the transmission will then return to higher gear.
100 % 1ST 2ND 2ND 3RD 3RD 4TH DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule
Throttle opening
: FLAT ROAD MODE
: GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE

50
: STEEP DESCENDING MODE
0
62 mph Vehicle speed
(100 km/h)
14-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:00 61S5N000_140_0039
CPC (Clutch Pressure Control)

The PCM actuates the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to control CPC pressure. When shifting between
lower gear and upper gear, CPC pressure regulated by the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A engages and
disengages the clutches smoothly.
The PCM inputs signals from the various sensors, perform processing data, and outputs a current to the A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A.
PCM
Mainshaft Speed
Sensor Signal Actual Requirement
driving shift of firing
position retardant
Countershaft Speed
Sensor Signal
Decision of
shifting mode
Fail−safe
PGM-FI
Vehicle Speed Sensor Control
Signal System
A/T Clutch
Master Target of Current Pressure Control
Throttle Position Controlling Current feedback Solenoid Valves
Sensor Signal A and B
Correction of Data
Intake Air Temperature

Sensor Signal
Engine RPM Signal Correction of engine

torque signal data
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
Correction of hydraulic
pressure data
Engine Coolant Correction of engine

Temperature coolant temperature
Sensor Signal sensor signal data
PGM-FI control information
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-39

00/10/26 15:31:01 61S5N000_140_0040

Lock-up Control System
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls modulator pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up
ON and OFF. The PCM controls the torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve B. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON, the condition of the lock-up starts.
The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B regulates A/T clutch pressure control solenoid B pressure, and apply
pressure to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve. The lock-up control mechanism operates in 3rd and
4th gears in position, and in 3rd gear in position.
PCM
Engine Coolant Controlling area by engine

Temperature coolant temperature sensor
Sensor Signal signal
Transmission Shift position control by

Range transmission range switch
Switch Signal signal
Sensor Signal
Barometric
Pressure
Controlling area by
gradient
Throttle Position Sensor
Signal
Mainshaft Speed
Sensor Signal Fail-safe control
Countershaft Speed
Sensor Signal
Fail−safe
Vehicle Speed Sensor Lock-up Control

Signal • Lock-up ON/OFF Torque Converter
control Clutch Solenoid
• Lock-up condition Valve
control
Engine RPM Signal
Master Target of
Controlling Current
A/T Clutch Pressure

Current feedback Control Solenoid
Valve B
Driving shift position

information
14-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:06 61S5N000_140_0041

PCM Electrical Connections
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-41

00/10/26 15:31:07 61S5N000_140_0042

PCM Inputs and Outputs
The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are shown for the connector terminals that are related to the A/T
control system. The other PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are described in section 11.
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
A (31P) B (24P) C (22P) E (31P)
PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
Terminal Wire Color Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage

Number
A2 YEL/BLK IGP2 Power supply circuit from With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
main relay With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
A3 YEL/BLK IGP1 Power supply circuit from With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
main relay With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
A4 BLK PG2 Ground
A5 BLK PG1 Ground
A23 BRN/YEL LG2 Ground
A24 BRN/YEL LG1 Ground
PCM CONNECTOR B (24P)

Number
B7 RED/BLK LS A＋ A/T clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal
solenoid valve A power
supply positive electrode
B16 BLK/RED LS B＋ A/T clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal
solenoid valve B power
supply positive electrode
14-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:07 61S5N000_140_0043
PCM CONNECTOR C (22P)

Number
C1 WHT/BLK LS A− A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A power
supply negative electrode
C2 YEL/BLU LC Torque converter clutch During lock-up condition: Battery voltage
solenoid valve control During no lock-up condition: 0 V
C4 GRN/WHT SH B Shift solenoid valve B control Battery voltage in these positions:
•
• , and in 1st and 2nd gears
0 V in these positions:
• , and in 3rd gear
• in 4th gear
• , , and
C6 BLU/BLK SH A Shift solenoid valve A control Battery voltage in these positions:
•
• , and in 2nd and 3rd gears
•
0 V in these positions:
• , and in 1st gear
• in 4th gear
• and
C7 WHT/RED NM Mainshaft speed sensor input Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
When engine stopped: About 0 V
C8 BRN/WHT LS B− A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B power
supply negative electrode
C9 RED ATP D3 Transmission range switch In position: 0 V
position input In other than position: About 5 V
C10 WHT ATP R Transmission range switch In position: 0 V
position input In other than position: Battery voltage
C11 BLU ATP 2 Transmission range switch In position: 0 V
C12 BLU/WHT ATP NP Transmission range switch In and positions: 0 V
and position input In other than and positions: About 5 V
C14 GRN NC SG Countershaft speed sensor
ground
C15 BLU NC Countershaft speed sensor Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
input When vehicle stopped: About 0 V
C18 BLU/YEL ATP FWD Transmission range switch In and position: 0 V
and positions input In other than and position: Battery
voltage
C20 YEL ATP D4 Transmission range switch In position: 0 V
C21 WHT/GRN NM SG Mainshaft speed sensor
ground
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-43

00/10/26 15:31:07 61S5N000_140_0044

PCM Inputs and Outputs
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
A (31P) B (24P) C (22P) E (31P)
PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)

Number
E1 GRN/YEL FPR Fuel pump control With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V for 2 seconds,
then battery voltage
E7 RED/YEL MRLY PGM-FI main relay 1 signal With ignition switch ON (II):Battery voltage
input
E9 YEL/BLK IG1 Power supply for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
valve assemblies With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
E12 BLU/ORN CCS Downshift signal input from When cruise control is used: Pulsing signal
cruise control unit
E13 WHT/BLU ILU Interlock control With ignition switch ON (II), brake pedal
pressed, and accelerator pedal released:
Battery voltage
E22 WHT/BLK BK SW Brake pedal position switch Brake pedal pressed: Battery voltage
signal input Brake pedal released: 0 V
E24 YEL SEFMJ PCM-to-Multiplex control unit With ignition switch ON (II): About 5V
communication circuit With engine running under load: Pulsing
signal
E29 BRN SCS Timing and adjustment With ignition switch ON (II) and data link
service check signal connector open: 5 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and data link
connector connected to Honda PGM tester:
0V
14-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:08 61S5N000_140_0045
Hydraulic Control
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the secondary valve body, the servo body, and
the lock-up valve body. The ATF pump is driven by splines on the right end of the torque converter which is attached
to the engine. Fluid flows through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure, though the manual valve,
directing pressure to each of the clutches. The shift solenoid valves A and B, and the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B are mounted on the outside of the transmission housing. The torque converter clutch
solenoid valve is mounted on the outside of the torque converter housing.
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVES A and B
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVES A and B
SERVO BODY
LOCK-UP VALVE BODY
SECONDARY
VALVE BODY
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
MAIN VALVE BODY
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-45

00/10/26 15:31:09 61S5N000_140_0046

Hydraulic Control (cont’d)
Main Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the 1-2 shift valve, the 2nd orifice control valve,
the servo control valve, the CPB (Clutch Pressure Back-up) valve, the relief valve, and the ATF pump gears.
The primary function of the main valve body is to switch fluid pressure on and off and to control hydraulic pressure
going to the hydraulic control system.
CPB VALVE
2ND ORIFICE CONTROL VALVE
MODULATOR VALVE
1-2 SHIFT VALVE
RELIEF VALVE
MANUAL VALVE
MAIN VALVE BODY SERVO CONTROL VALVE
Regulator Valve Body

The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the lock-up control valve, the torque converter check valve, and
the cooler relief valve.
REGULATOR VALVE REGULATOR VALVE BODY
COOLER RELIEF VALVE

LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK VALVE
14-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:09 61S5N000_140_0047
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains a constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, while
also furnishing fluid to the lubricating system and torque converter. The fluid from the ATF pump flows through B and
B’. Fluid entering from B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the
regulator valve to the right side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque
converter and the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve
moves to the left side. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve
changes, and the amount of fluid from B’ through torque converter also changes. This operation is continued,
maintaining the line pressure.
NOTE: When used, ‘‘left’’ or ‘‘right’’ indicates direction on the illustration below.
From ATF PUMP

To TORQUE CONVERTER To LUBRICATION
VALVE ORIFICE
A B’ B
REGULATOR VALVE
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are performed by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined with the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (Torque Converter Range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its maximum when the stator torque reaction reaches its maximum.
TORQUE CONVERTER STATOR
REGULATOR VALVE
REGULATOR SPRING CAP
STATOR SHAFT STATOR SHAFT ARM
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-47

00/10/26 15:31:09 61S5N000_140_0048

Hydraulic Control (cont’d)
Secondary Valve Body
The secondary valve body contains the 2-3 shift valve, the 3-4 shift valve, 3-4 orifice control valve, the 4th exhaust
valve, and the CPC valve.
CPC VALVE 2-3 SHIFT VALVE
3-4 SHIFT VALVE
SECONDARY VALVE BODY
3-4 ORIFCE CONTROL VALVE

4TH EXHAUST VALVE
Lock-up Valve Body

The lock-up valve body contains the lock-up shift valve and the lock-up timing valve.
LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
LOCK-UP VALVE BODY
LOCK-UP TIMING VALVE
14-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:10 61S5N000_140_0049
Servo Body
The servo body contains the servo valve, and the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th accumulators.
2ND ACCUMULATOR
1ST ACCUMULATOR
3RD ACCUMULATOR
4TH ACCUMULATOR
SERVO VALVE/
SHIFT FORK SHAFT SERVO BODY
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-49

00/10/26 15:31:10 61S5N000_140_0050

Hydraulic Flow
As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF
strainer and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump becomes line pressure that’s
regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure from the regulator valve enters the torque converter
through the lock-up shift valve, and it is discharged from the torque converter. The torque converter check valve
prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves A and B ON and OFF, and shift solenoid valves A and B apply modulator
pressure to the shift valves. Applying modulator pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift valve, and
switches the port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A regulates linear solenoid pressure and applys linear solenoid
pressure to the CPC valves. The CPC valve regulates CPC pressure and controls to shift smoothly between upper and
lower gears.
Hydraulic pressure at the port is as follows:
PORT NO. DESCRIPTION OF PRESSURE PORT NO. DESCRIPTION OF PRESSURE

1 LINE 10 1ST CLUTCH
1’ LINE 20 2ND CLUTCH
1’’ LINE 20A 2ND ACCUMULATOR
2 LINE 25 LINE
3 LINE 30 3RD CLUTCH
3’ LINE 40 4TH CLUTCH
3’’ LINE 41 4TH CLUTCH
4 LINE 56 LINEAR SOL A
4’ LINE 90 TORQUE CONVERTER
4’’ LINE 91 TORQUE CONVERTER
5 CPC 92 TORQUE CONVERTER
6 MODULATOR 93 ATF COOLER
6A MODULATOR (SH A) 94 TORQUE CONVERTER
6B MODULATOR (SH B) 95 LUBRICATION
6C MODULATOR (LC A) 96 TORQUE CONVERTER
6E LINEAR SOL B 97 TORQUE CONVERTER
6E’ LINEAR SOL B 99 SUCTION
7 LINE X DRAIN
8 LINE/CPC HIX HIGH POSITION DRAIN
9 LINE
Key to abbreviations:
• CPC: Clutch pressure control
• SH A: Shift solenoid valve A
• SH B: Shift solenoid valve B
• LINEAR SOL A: A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
• LINEAR SOL B: A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
14-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:11 61S5N000_140_0051
Hydraulic Flow (cont’d)

Position
The PCM turns the shift solenoid valve A and B OFF. Line pressure (1) passes through the manual valve, but it does not
flow to the clutches. Line pressure (1) also flows to the modulator valve and becomes to modulator pressure (6).
Modulator pressure (6) flows to the shift valves by means of the shift solenoid valves A and B OFF.
Under this condition, hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE: When used, ‘‘left’’ or ‘‘right’’ indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
3RD ACCUMULATOR 1ST CLUTCH
3RD CLUTCH 2ND CLUTCH 4TH CLUTCH
4TH/REVERSE
2ND ACCUMULATOR ACCUMULATOR 1ST ACCUMULATOR
1’
30 X
20A 20 40 40 10 10
X X
8 1’’ 7
30
TORQUE
CONVERTER 3-4
ORIFICE
CONTROL
90 91 VALVE 3-4 SHIFT VALVE 4TH EXHAUST VALVE
94 LOCK-UP X 20X/30X 40 6A 1’’41 30 30X 25
CONTROL 6E
VALVE X X 40X 9
X 91 1’ 40X 5
6
6E’ HIX 2
XX X 25 9
SERVO
6E 97 X
90 X 96 CONTROL
VALVE
9 X
A/T CLUTCH 30 20 20A 6E’ 30X 5 20 1’ 25

LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
PRESSURE
96 94 91 6E’ CONTROL 3’ 4’’ 4 4’ 10
SOLENOID 1
VALVE B
2ND ORIFICE 20X 6B 5 20X
CONTROL VALVE X X X X
HIX 2-3 SHIFT VALVE
6C 92 93 6 6E 6 TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
OFF SHIFT
SOLENOID SOLENOID 4’
VALVE B 6A 10 X 6B
VALVE OFF 8 5
X 4’’
X
6C
X 5 25 3 3’
TORQUE 6B 4 X 1-2 SHIFT VALVE 3’
CONVERTER 6
CHECK VALVE SHIFT 3’’
SOLENOID 6A
VALVE A SERVO VALVE
RELIEF VALVE MAINSHAFT
5 X 5
95
90 93
93 X X COUNTERSHAFT
X X 4 7 56
95
CPC VALVE
95
5
HIX X 30X/40X 3’’ X 7
X
90 6E SUB SHAFT
X 90 90 X
X
92 95 95 25 4 2 3 41 40 3’’ 3’’ HIX 56 3’’ 4 4 CPB
X VALVE
93 LOCK-UP TIMING
VALVE
1 1 X 95 1
MANUAL VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE
COOLER RELIEF VALVE ATF PUMP 1

93
1
X 56 6 X
6 X
X ATF STRAINER A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
ATF COOLER CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
93 99 MODULATOR VALVE
99
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-51

00/10/26 15:31:13 61S5N000_140_0052

or Position in 1st gear
When shifting to or position from , the manual valve uncovers the port leading line pressure (4) to the 1st
clutch, and the PCM turns the shift solenoid valve B ON, but shift solenoid valve A remains OFF. Modulator (SH B)
pressure (6B) in the right side of the 1-2 shift valve and in the left side of the 2-3 shift valve is released, then 1-2 shift
valve is moved to the right side and 2-3 shift valve is moved to the left side. The 1-2 shift valve creates 1st clutch circuit
bypass to reduce engaging shock of the 1st clutch. The 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, and the 1st
clutch is engaged.
4TH/REVERSE
1’
30 X
20A 20 40 40 10 10
X X
8 1’’ 7
30
TORQUE
CONVERTER 3-4
ORIFICE
CONTROL
94 LOCK-UP X 20X/30X 40 6A 1’’41 30 30X 25
CONTROL 6E
VALVE X X 40X 9
X 91 1’ 40X 5
6
6E’ HIX 2
XX X 25 9
SERVO
6E 97 X
90 X 96 CONTROL
VALVE
9 X
A/T CLUTCH 30 20 20A 6E’ 30X 5 20 1’ 25

LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
PRESSURE
96 94 91 6E’ CONTROL 3’ 4’’ 4 4’ 10
SOLENOID 1
VALVE B
HIX 2-3 SHIFT VALVE
6C 92 93 6 6E 6 TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
ON SHIFT
VALVE B 6A 10 X 6B
VALVE OFF 8 5
X 4’’
X
6C
X 5 25 3 3’
CONVERTER 6
SOLENOID 6A
VALVE A SERVO VALVE
5 X 5
95
90 93
93 X X COUNTERSHAFT
X X 4 7 56
95
CPC VALVE
95
5
HIX X 30X/40X 3’’ X 7
X
90 6E SUB SHAFT
X 90 90 X
X
92 95 95 25 4 2 3 41 40 3’’ 3’’ HIX 56 3’’ 4 4 CPB
X VALVE
93 LOCK-UP TIMING
VALVE
1 1 X 95 1
MANUAL VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE

93
1
X 56 6 X
6 X
99
14-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:15 61S5N000_140_0053
or Position in 2nd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns the shift solenoid valve A ON. Shift solenoid
valve B remains ON, and modulator (SH A) pressure (6A) in the left side of the 1-2 shift valve and 3-4 shift valve is
released. The 1-2 and 3-4 shift valves are moved to the left side, and the 1-2 shift valve uncovers the port leading CPC
pressure (5) to the 2-3 shift valve. CPC pressure (5) becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20) at the 2-3 shift valve. The 2nd
clutch pressure (20) is applied to the 2nd clutch, and the 2nd clutch is engaged.
Line pressure (4) also flows to the 1st clutch, and the 1st clutch is engaged. However, no power is transmitted because
of the one-way clutch.
4TH/REVERSE
1’
30 X
20A 20 40 40 10 10
X X
8 1’’ 7
30
TORQUE
CONVERTER 3-4
ORIFICE
CONTROL
94 LOCK-UP X 20X/30X 40 6A 1’’41 30 30X 25
CONTROL 6E
VALVE X X 40X 9
X 91 1’ 40X 5
6
6E’ HIX 2
XX X 25 9
SERVO
6E 97 X
90 X 96 CONTROL
VALVE
9 X
A/T CLUTCH 30 20 20A 6E’ 30X 5 20 1’ 25

LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
PRESSURE
96 94 91 6E’ CONTROL 3’ 4’’ 4 4’ 10
SOLENOID 1
VALVE B
HIX 2-3 SHIFT VALVE
6C 92 93 6 6E 6 TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
ON SHIFT
6B
VALVE ON VALVE B 6A 10 8 5 X
X 4’’
X
6C
X 5 25 3 3’
CONVERTER 6
SOLENOID 6A
VALVE A SERVO VALVE
5 X 5
95
90 93
93 X X COUNTERSHAFT
X X 4 7 56
95
CPC VALVE
95
5
HIX X 30X/40X 3’’ X 7
X
90 6E SUB SHAFT
X 90 90 X
X
92 95 95 25 4 2 3 41 40 3’’ 3’’ HIX 56 3’’ 4 4 CPB
X VALVE
93 LOCK-UP TIMING
VALVE
1 1 X 95 1
MANUAL VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE

93
1
X 56 6 X
6 X
99
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-53

00/10/26 15:31:17 61S5N000_140_0054

or Position in 3rd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns the shift solenoid valve B OFF. Shift solenoid
valve A remains ON, and modulator (SH B) pressure (6B) is applied to the right side of the 1-2 shift valve and to the left
side of the 2-3 shift valve. The 2-3 shift valve is moved to the right side to switch the port leading CPC pressure (5) to
the 3-4 shift valve, then CPC pressure (5) becomes the 3rd clutch pressure (30) at the 3-4 shift valve. The 3rd clutch
pressure (30) is applied to the 3rd clutch, and the 3rd clutch is engaged.
4TH/REVERSE
1’
30 X
20A 20 40 40 10 10
X X
8 1’’ 7
30
TORQUE
CONVERTER 3-4
ORIFICE
CONTROL
94 LOCK-UP X 20X/30X 40 6A 1’’41 30 30X 25
CONTROL 6E
VALVE X X 40X 9
X 91 1’ 40X 5
6
6E’ HIX 2
XX X 25 9
SERVO
6E 97 X
90 X 96 CONTROL
VALVE
9 X
A/T CLUTCH 30 20 20A 6E’ 30X 5 20 1’ 25

LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
PRESSURE
96 94 91 6E’ CONTROL 3’ 4’’ 4 4’ 10
SOLENOID 1
VALVE B
HIX 2-3 SHIFT VALVE
6C 92 93 6 6E 6 TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
OFF SHIFT
6B
X 4’’
X
6C
X 5 25 3 3’
CONVERTER 6
SOLENOID 6A
VALVE A SERVO VALVE
5 X 5
95
90 93
93 X X COUNTERSHAFT
X X 4 7 56
95
CPC VALVE
95
5
HIX X 30X/40X 3’’ X 7
X
90 6E SUB SHAFT
X 90 90 X
X
92 95 95 25 4 2 3 41 40 3’’ 3’’ HIX 56 3’’ 4 4 CPB
X VALVE
93 LOCK-UP TIMING
VALVE
1 1 X 95 1
MANUAL VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE

93
1
X 56 6 X
6 X
99
14-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:18 61S5N000_140_0055
Position in 4th gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns the shift solenoid valve A OFF. Shift solenoid
valve B remains OFF, and modulator (SH A) pressure (6A) is applied to the left side of the 3-4 shift valve.
The 3-4 shift valve is moved to the right side to switch the port CPC pressure (5) to the 4th clutch pressure (41), the 4th
clutch pressure (41) becomes the 4th clutch pressure (40) at the manual valve. The 4th clutch pressure (40) is applied
to the 4th clutch, and the 4th clutch is engaged.
4TH/REVERSE
1’
30 X
20A 20 40 40 10 10
X X
8 1’’ 7
30
TORQUE
CONVERTER 3-4
ORIFICE
CONTROL
94 LOCK-UP X 20X/30X 40 6A 1’’41 30 30X 25
CONTROL 6E
VALVE X X 40X 9
X 91 1’ 40X 5
6
6E’ HIX 2
XX X 25 9
SERVO
6E 97 X
90 X 96 CONTROL
VALVE
9 X
A/T CLUTCH 30 20 20A 6E’ 30X 5 20 1’ 25

LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
PRESSURE
96 94 91 6E’ CONTROL 3’ 4’’ 4 4’ 10
SOLENOID 1
VALVE B
HIX 2-3 SHIFT VALVE
6C 92 93 6 6E 6 TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
OFF SHIFT
VALVE OFF VALVE B 6A 10 8 5 X 6B
X 4’’
X
6C
X 5 25 3 3’
CONVERTER 6
SOLENOID 6A
VALVE A SERVO VALVE
5 X 5
95
90 93
93 X X COUNTERSHAFT
X X 4 7 56
95
CPC VALVE
95
5
HIX X 30X/40X 3’’ X 7
X
90 6E SUB SHAFT
X 90 90 X
X
92 95 95 25 4 2 3 41 40 3’’ 3’’ HIX 56 3’’ 4 4 CPB
X VALVE
93 LOCK-UP TIMING
VALVE
1 1 X 95 1
MANUAL VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE

93
1
X 56 6 X
6 X
99
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-55

00/10/26 15:31:20 61S5N000_140_0056

Position
The PCM turns the shift solenoid valves A and B ON. The 1-2 shift valve and 2-3 shift valve uncover the ports leading
CPC pressure (5) to the 2nd clutch, CPC pressure (5) becomes the 2nd clutch pressure (20) at the 2-3 shift valve. The
2nd clutch pressure (20) is applied to the 2nd clutch, and the 2nd clutch is engaged.
Line pressure (4) passed through the manual valve also flows to the 1st clutch, and the 1st clutch is engaged. However,
no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
4TH/REVERSE
1’
30 X
20A 20 40 40 10 10
X X
8 1’’ 7
30
TORQUE
CONVERTER 3-4
ORIFICE
CONTROL
94 LOCK-UP X 20X/30X 40 6A 1’’41 30 30X 25
CONTROL 6E
VALVE X X 40X 9
X 91 1’ 40X 5
6
6E’ HIX 2
XX X 25 9
SERVO
6E 97 X
90 X 96 CONTROL
VALVE
9 X
A/T CLUTCH 30 20 20A 6E’ 30X 5 20 1’ 25

LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
PRESSURE
96 94 91 6E’ CONTROL 3’ 4’’ 4 4’ 10
SOLENOID 1
VALVE B
HIX 2-3 SHIFT VALVE
6C 92 93 6 6E 6 TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
ON SHIFT
6B
X 4’’
X
6C
X 5 25 3 3’
CONVERTER 6
SOLENOID 6A
VALVE A SERVO VALVE
5 X 5
95
90 93
93 X X COUNTERSHAFT
X X 4 7 56
95
CPC VALVE
95
5
HIX X 30X/40X 3’’ X 7
X
90 6E SUB SHAFT
X 90 90 X
X
92 95 95 25 4 2 3 41 40 3’’ 3’’ HIX 56 3’’ 4 4 CPB
X VALVE
93 LOCK-UP TIMING
VALVE
1 1 X 95 1
MANUAL VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE

93
1
X 56 6 X
6 X
99
14-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:22 61S5N000_140_0057
Position
The PCM turns the shift solenoid valves A ON and B OFF, and modulator (SH B) pressure (6B) is applied to the right
side of the 1-2 shift valve and to the left side of the 2-3 shift valve. Line pressure (3) passed through the manual valve
flows to the 1-2 shift valve, and changed to line pressure (3’). Line pressure (3’) pushes the servo valve to the reverse/
park position, passes through the servo valve, and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3’) becomes the 4th
clutch pressure (40) at the manual valve. The 4th clutch pressure (40) is applied to the 4th clutch, and the 4th clutch is
engaged.
Reverse Inhibitor Control
When the position is selected while the vehicle is moving forward at speeds over 6 mph (10 km/h), the PCM outputs
the 1st speed signal to shift solenoid valves A and B; shift solenoid valve A is OFF, and shift solenoid valve B is turned
ON. The 1-2 shift valve is moved to the right side and covers the port to stop line pressure (3’) to the servo valve. Line
pressure (3’) is not applied to the servo valve, and the 4th clutch pressure (40) is not applied to the 4th clutch. Power is
not transmitted to the reverse direction.
4TH/REVERSE
1’
30 X
20A 20 40 40 10 10
X X
8 1’’ 7
30
TORQUE
CONVERTER 3-4
ORIFICE
CONTROL
94 LOCK-UP X 20X/30X 40 6A 1’’41 30 30X 25
CONTROL 6E
VALVE X X 40X 9
X 91 1’ 40X 5
6
6E’ HIX 2
XX X 25 9
SERVO
6E 97 X
90 X 96 CONTROL
VALVE
9 X
A/T CLUTCH 30 20 20A 6E’ 30X 5 20 1’ 25
LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
PRESSURE
96 94 91 6E’ CONTROL 3’ 4’’ 4 4’ 10
SOLENOID 1
VALVE B 2ND ORIFICE 20X 6B 5 20X
HIX 2-3 SHIFT VALVE
6C 92 93 6 6E 6 TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
OFF SHIFT
6B
X 4’’
X
6C
X 5 25 3 3’
CONVERTER 6
SOLENOID 6A
VALVE A SERVO VALVE
5 X 5
95
90 93
93 X X COUNTERSHAFT
X X 4 7 56
95
CPC VALVE
95
5
HIX X 30X/40X 3’’ X 7
X
90 6E SUB SHAFT
X 90 X 90 X
92 95 95 25 4 2 3 41 40 3’’ 3’’ HIX 56 3’’ 4 4 CPB

X VALVE
93 LOCK-UP TIMING
VALVE
1 1 X 95 1
MANUAL VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE

93
1
X 56 6 X
6 X
99
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-57

00/10/26 15:31:23 61S5N000_140_0058

Position
Line pressure (3) passed through the manual valve flows to the 1-2 shift valve, and changed to line pressure (3’).
Line pressure (3’) pushes the servo valve to the reverse/park position, passes through the servo valve, and flows to the
manual valve. Line pressure (3’) is intercepted at the manual valve, and hydraulic pressure is not applied to the
clutches.
4TH/REVERSE
1’
30 X
20A 20 40 40 10 10
X X
8 1’’ 7
30
TORQUE
CONVERTER 3-4
ORIFICE
CONTROL
94 LOCK-UP X 20X/30X 40 6A 1’’41 30 30X 25
CONTROL 6E
VALVE X X 40X 9
X 91 1’ 40X 5
6
6E’ HIX 2
XX X 25 9
SERVO
6E 97 X
90 X 96 CONTROL
VALVE
9 X
A/T CLUTCH 30 20 20A 6E’ 30X 5 20 1’ 25

LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
PRESSURE
96 94 91 6E’ CONTROL 3’ 4’’ 4 4’ 10
SOLENOID 1
VALVE B
HIX 2-3 SHIFT VALVE
6C 92 93 6 6E 6 TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
OFF SHIFT
VALVE OFF VALVE B 6A 10 8 5 X 6B
X 4’’
X
6C
X 5 25 3 3’
CONVERTER 6
SOLENOID 6A
VALVE A SERVO VALVE
5 X 5
95
90 93
93 X X COUNTERSHAFT
X X 4 7 56
95
CPC VALVE
95
5
HIX X 30X/40X 3’’ X 7
X
90 6E SUB SHAFT
X 90 90 X
X
92 95 95 25 4 2 3 41 40 3’’ 3’’ HIX 56 3’’ 4 4 CPB
X VALVE
93 LOCK-UP TIMING
VALVE
1 1 X 95 1
MANUAL VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE

93
1
X 56 6 X
6 X
99
14-58 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:24 61S5N000_140_0059
Lock-up System
In position (3rd and 4th), and position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter
through a fluid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place,
the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes
the timing of the lock-up mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure
changes to switch lock-up on and off. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve control the range of the
lock-up according to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B. The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
mounted on the torque converter housing, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B is mounted on the
transmission housing with solenoid valve A as an assembly. They are all controlled by the PCM.
Lock-up Clutch ON (Engaging Lock-up Clutch)
Fluid in the camber between the torque converter cover and the lock-up clutch piston is drained off, and fluid entered
from the chamber between the pump and stator exerts pressure through the lock-up clutch piston against the torque
converter cover. The lock-up clutch piston engages with the torque converter cover (lock-up clutch ON), and the
mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine.
Power flow LOCK-UP PISTON

DAMPER SPRING
The power flows by way of:
TURBINE
Engine
↓
Drive plate TORQUE CONVERTER To ATF cooler
↓ COVER
Torque converter cover INLET OUTLET
↓
Lock-up piston
↓
Damper spring
↓
Turbine
↓
Mainshaft
MAINSHAFT
Lock-up Clutch OFF (Disengaging Lock-up Clutch)
Fluid entered from the chamber between the torque converter cover and the lock-up clutch piston passes through the
torque converter and goes out from the chambers between the turbine and the stator, and between the pump and the
stator. As a result, the lock-up clutch piston moves away from the torque converter cover, and the lock-up clutch is
released (lock-up clutch OFF).
Power flow TURBINE

PUMP
Engine
↓
Drive plate
↓
Torque converter cover TORQUE CONVERTER
COVER To ATF cooler
↓
Pump INLET
↓
Turbine
↓
Mainshaft
MAINSHAFT
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-59

00/10/26 15:31:25 61S5N000_140_0060

Lock-up System (cont’d)
No Lock-up
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned OFF by the PCM. The lock-up shift valve receives modulator (LC
A) pressure (6C) on the left side, and stays in the right side to uncover the port leading torque converter pressure (94)
to the left side of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (94) enters into the left side of the torque converter
to disengage the lock-up clutch. The lock-up clutch piston keeps away from the torque converter cover; the lock-up
clutch is OFF.
TORQUE
CONVERTER
90 91
LOCK-UP
CONTROL X
94 VALVE 6E
X 91
6
6E 97 X
90 X 96
A/T CLUTCH
LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE PRESSURE
CONTROL
96 94 91 6E’ SOLENOID
VALVE B
6C 92 93 6 6E 6
TORQUE CONVERTER
OFF CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE
X
6C
TORQUE
CONVERTER 6
CHECK VALVE
RELIEF VALVE 95 MAINSHAFT

MODULATOR PRESSURE
90 93
93 X X COUNTERSHAFT
95
X
95 MODULATOR PRESSURE
90 6E SUB SHAFT
X 90 X 90 X
92 95
93 LOCK-UP TIMING
VALVE
1 1
REGULATOR VALVE
COOLER RELIEF VALVE ATF PUMP

1
93
X ATF STRAINER
ATF COOLER
93 99
99
14-60 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:26 61S5N000_140_0061
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON by
the PCM. Modulator (LC A) pressure (6C) in the left side of the lock-up shift valve is released, and the lock-up shift
valve is moved to the left side to switch the port leading torque converter pressure (91) to the right side of the torque
converter. Torque converter pressure (91) flows to the right side of the torque converter to engage the lock-up clutch.
The PCM also controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B, and linear sol B pressure (6E) is applied to the
lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve. The positions of the lock-up control valve and lock-up timing valve
depend on torque converter pressure and linear sol B pressure. When linear sol B pressure (6E) is low, torque
converter pressure (91) from the lock-up shift valve to the right side of the torque converter is low, because torque
converter pressure (91) leaks at the lock-up control valve. The lock-up clutch is engaged partially. Linear solenoid B
pressure (6E) increases, the lock-up control valve is moved to the left side to cover the port draining torque converter
pressure (91), and torque converter pressure (91) to torque converter is increased. The engagement of the lock-up
clutch depends on torque converter pressure (91).
TORQUE
CONVERTER
90 91
LOCK-UP
CONTROL X
94 VALVE 6E
X 91
6
6E 97 X
90 X 96
A/T CLUTCH
CONTROL
VALVE B
6C 92 93 6 6E 6
TORQUE CONVERTER
ON CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE
X
6C
TORQUE
CONVERTER 6
CHECK VALVE

MODULATOR PRESSURE
90 93
93 X X COUNTERSHAFT
95
X
90 6E SUB SHAFT
X 90 X 90 X
92 95
93 LOCK-UP TIMING
VALVE
1 1
REGULATOR VALVE

1
93
X ATF STRAINER
ATF COOLER
93 99
99
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-61

00/10/26 15:31:26 61S5N000_140_0062

Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to
increase linear B pressure (6E). Linear B pressure (6E) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing
valve, and moves them to the left side. Torque converter pressure (94) from the left side of the torque converter is
drained at the lock-up control valve, and torque converter pressure (91) engages the lock-up clutch securely.
TORQUE
CONVERTER
90 91
LOCK-UP
CONTROL X
94 VALVE 6E
X 91
6
6E 97 X
90 X 96
A/T CLUTCH
CONTROL
VALVE B
6C 92 93 6 6E 6
TORQUE CONVERTER
ON CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE
X
6C
TORQUE
CONVERTER 6
CHECK VALVE

MODULATOR PRESSURE
90 93
93 X X COUNTERSHAFT
95
X
90 6E SUB SHAFT
X 90 X 90 X
92 95
93 LOCK-UP TIMING
VALVE
1 1
REGULATOR VALVE

1
93
X ATF STRAINER
ATF COOLER
93 99
99
14-62 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:32 61S5N000_140_0063
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-63

00/10/26 15:31:38 61S5N000_140_0064
14-64 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:38 61S5N000_140_0065
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0715: Problem in Mainshaft Speed 5. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Sensor Circuit terminal C7 and body ground, and between
terminal C21 and body ground.
Code P0715 (15) on the PCM doesn’t always mean
NM (WHT/RED)
there’s an electrical problem in the mainshaft or
countershaft speed sensor circuit; code P0715 (15) may
also indicate a mechanical problem in the transmission.
Any problem causing irregular countershaft to
mainshaft speed difference can cause this code.
NM SG (WHT/GRN)
1. Check the mainshaft and countershaft speed
sensor installation.
Are the mainshaf t and countershaf t speed sensor Wire side of female terminals
installed properly?
YES−Go to step 2. Is there continuity?
NO−Reinstall and recheck. YES−Repair short to ground in the wires between

PCM connector terminals C7 and C21, and the
2. Disconnect mainshaft speed sensor connector (2P). mainshaft speed sensor.
NO−Go to step 6.
3. Measure mainshaft speed sensor resistance at the
sensor connector. 6. Connect mainshaft speed sensor connector.
MAINSHAFT SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR 7. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
terminals C7 and C21.
NM (WHT/RED)
Terminal side of male terminals NM SG (WHT/GRN)
Is there 400−600 ? Wire side of female terminals
YES−Go to step 4.
Is there 400−600 ?
NO−Replace the mainshaft speed sensor.
YES−Run the Electrical Troubleshooting Flowchart
4. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P). for code P0720 (code 9). Reprogram the PCM if it
known-good PCM, then recheck (see page 14-7). If
the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
good PCM, replace the original PCM.
NO−Go to step 8.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-65

00/10/26 15:31:39 61S5N000_140_0066

8. Disconnect mainshaft speed sensor connector (2P). 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C21 and the No. 1 terminal of the
9. Check for continuity between PCM connector mainshaft speed sensor connector.
terminal C7 and the No. 2 terminal of the mainshaft
speed sensor connector. PCM CONNECTOR C (22P)
NM (WHT/RED)
NM SG (WHT/GRN)
WHT/GRN
MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
WHT/RED
MAINSHAFT SPEED Wire side of female terminals
SENSOR CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity?
Is there continuity? YES−Reprogram the PCM if it does not have the

latest software, or substitute a known-good PCM,
YES−Go to step 10. then recheck (see page 14-7). If the symptom/
indication goes away with a known-good PCM,
NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM replace the original PCM.
connector terminal C7 and the mainshaft speed
sensor. NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal C21 and the mainshaft speed
sensor.
14-66 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:39 61S5N000_140_0067
DTC P0720: Problem in Countershaft Speed 5. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Sensor Circuit terminal C14 and body ground, and between
1. Check the countershaft speed sensor installation.
Is the countershaf t speed sensor installed NC (BLU)

properly?
YES−Go to step 2. NC SG (GRN)
NO−Reinstall and recheck.
2. Disconnect countershaft speed sensor connector

(2P). Wire side of female terminals
3. Measure countershaft speed sensor resistance at

the sensor connector. Is there continuity?
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR YES−Repair short to ground in the wires between
PCM connector terminals C14 and C15, and the
countershaft speed sensor.
NO−Go to step 6.
6. Connect countershaft speed sensor connector.
7. Measure the resistance between PCM connector

terminals C14 and C15.

Is there 400−600 ? NC (BLU)
YES−Go to step 4.
NC SG (GRN)
NO−Replace the countershaft speed sensor.
4. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P).

Is there 400−600 ?
YES−Reprogram the PCM if it does not have the

then recheck (see page 14-7). If the symptom/
replace the original PCM.
NO−Repair loose terminal or open in the wires
between PCM connector terminals C14 and C15,
and the countershaft speed sensor.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-67

00/10/26 15:31:39 61S5N000_140_0068

DTC P0730: Problem in Shift Control System 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and reset the PCM
memory by removing the No. 6 BACK UP fuse in
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10
seconds.
1. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates
another code. 6. Using the scan tool, check to be sure that the
engine coolant temperature is 176°F (80°C) or
Does the OBD II scan tool indicate another code? above. If the coolant temperature is low, warm up
the engine to normal operating temperature (the
YES−Perform the troubleshooting flowchart for radiator fan comes on).
the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P0730 after
troubleshooting. 7. Drive the vehicle at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h)
in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears in position for
NO−Go to step 2. more than 30 seconds.
NOTE: Do not continue with this troubleshooting 8. Recheck for code P0730.
until the causes of any other DTCs have been
corrected. Does the OBD II scan tool indicate code P07 30?
2. Measure the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th clutch pressure YES−Replace the transmission.
(see page 14-92).
NO−The system is OK at this time.
Is each clutch pressure within the service limit?
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Repair the hydraulic system as necessary.
3. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B (see page

14-95).
4. Replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valves A and B (see page 14-97).
14-68 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:39 61S5N000_140_0069
DTC P0740: Problem in Lock-up Control 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and reset the PCM
System memory by removing the No. 6 BACK UP fuse in
the under-hood fuse/relay box for more than 10
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. seconds.
1. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates 6. Using the scan tool, check to be sure that the
another code. engine coolant temperature is 176°F (80°C) or
above. If the coolant temperature is low, warm up
Does the OBD II scan tool indicate another code? the engine to normal operating temperature (the
radiator fan comes on).
YES−Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for
the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P0740 after 7. Drive the vehicle at the freeze data speed or at 55
troubleshooting. mph (88 km/h) for more than 1 minute.
NO−Go to step 2. 8. Recheck for code P0740.
NOTE: Do not continue with this troubleshooting Does the OBD II scan tool indicate code P07 40?
until the causes of any other DTCs have been
corrected. YES−Replace the transmission and torque
converter.
2. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-92).
Is the line pressure within the service limit?
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Repair the hydraulic system as necessary.
3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve

(see page 14-94).
4. Replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valves A and B (see page 14-97).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-69

00/10/26 15:31:40 61S5N000_140_0070

DTC P0753: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
A Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. terminals C6 and A23 or A24.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. PCM CONNECTORS
2. Disconnect PCM connectors A (31P) and C (22P). SH A (BLU/BLK)

A (31P) C (22P)
4. Measure the voltage between PCM connector

terminals C6 and A23 or A24.
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
PCM CONNECTORS LG2
(BRN/YEL)
SH A (BLU/BLK) Wire side of female terminals
A (31P) C (22P)
Is there 12 −25 ?

LG1 (BRN/YEL) latest software, or substitute a known-good PCM,
LG2
(BRN/YEL) indication goes away with a known-good PCM,
Wire side of female terminals replace the original PCM.
NO−Go to step 7.
Is there voltage?
YES−Repair short to power in the wire between terminal A23 and body ground, and between
PCM connector terminal C6 and the shift solenoid terminal A24 and body ground.
valve A.
NO−Go to step 5.
LG2 (BRN/YEL) LG1 (BRN/YEL)
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Repair open in the wires between PCM

connector terminals A23 and A24, and ground
(G101), or repair poor ground (G101).
14-70 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:40 61S5N000_140_0071
8. Disconnect shift solenoid valves A and B connector 10. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal
(2P). of the shift solenoid valves A and B connector and
body ground.
terminals C6 and A23 or A24. SHIFT SOLENOID VALVES
A and B CONNECTOR (2P)
PCM CONNECTORS
SH A (BLU/BLK)
A (31P) C (22P)
SH A (BLU/YEL)
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
LG2 Terminal side of male terminals
(BRN/YEL)
Is there 12 −25 ?
Is there continuity? YES−Check for an open in the wire between PCM

connector terminal C6 and the shift solenoid valve
YES−Repair short to ground in the wire between A.
PCM connector terminal C6 and the shift solenoid
valve A. NO−Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B.
NO−Go to step 10.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-71

00/10/26 15:31:40 61S5N000_140_0072

DTC P0758: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
B Circuit
2. Disconnect PCM connectors A (31P) and C (22P). SH B (GRN/WHT)

A (31P) C (22P)

LG1 (BRN/YEL)
PCM CONNECTORS LG2
(BRN/YEL)
SH B (GRN/WHT) Wire side of female terminals
A (31P) C (22P)
Is there 12 −25 ?

LG1 (BRN/YEL) latest software, or substitute a known-good PCM,
LG2
NO−Go to step 7.
Is there voltage?
PCM connector terminal C4 and the shift solenoid terminal A24 and body ground.
valve B.
NO−Go to step 5.
YES−Go to step 8.

14-72 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:41 61S5N000_140_0073
8. Disconnect shift solenoid valves A and B connector 10. Measure the resistance between the No. 2 terminal
(2P). of the shift solenoid valves A and B connector and
body ground.
terminals C4 and A23 or A24. SHIFT SOLENOID VALVES
A and B CONNECTOR (2P)
PCM CONNECTORS
SH B (GRN/WHT)
A (31P) C (22P)
SH B (GRN/WHT)
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
LG2 Terminal side of male terminals
(BRN/YEL)
Is there 12 −25 ?
Is there continuity? YES−Check for an open in the wire between PCM

connector terminal C4 and the shift solenoid valve
YES−Repair short to ground in the wire between B.
PCM connector terminal C4 and the shift solenoid
valve B. NO−Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B.
NO−Go to step 10.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-73

00/10/26 15:31:41 61S5N000_140_0074

DTC P1705: Short in Transmission Range 8. Shift to any position other than .
Switch Circuit
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PCM CONNECTORS
2. Observe the A/T gear position indicator, and shift A (31P) C (22P)
each position separately.
Do any indicators stay on when the shif t lever is

not in that position?
LG1 (BRN/YEL) ATP R (WHT)
YES−Go to step 3. LG2 (BRN/YEL)
NO−Turn the ignition switch OFF, then go to

step 4. Wire side of female terminals
3. Clear the DTC, and test-drive the vehicle.

Is DT C P17 05 indicated?
YES−Review the freeze data. If the freeze data
indicates more than one gear position indicator on NO−Check for short in the wire between PCM
at one time, go to step 4. connector terminal C10 and the transmission range
switch or A/T gear position indicator, and check for
NO−Intermittent failure; wiggle the wire harness an open in the wires between PCM connector
and check for an intermittent short to ground. terminals A23 and A24, and body ground (G101). If
the wires are OK, reprogram the PCM if it does not
4. Disconnect the transmission range switch have the latest software, or substitute a known-
connector. good PCM, then recheck (see page 14-7). If the
Do all gear position indicators go out? PCM, replace the original PCM.
YES−Replace the transmission range switch.
NO−Turn the ignition switch OFF, then go to

step 5.
5. Test the transmission range switch (see page 14-

127).
Is the switch OK ?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Replace the transmission range switch.
6. Connect the transmission range switch connector.
14-74 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:42 61S5N000_140_0075
10. Shift to any position other than . 14. Shift to any position other than .
11. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 15. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals C20 and A23 or A24. terminals C11 and A23 or A24.
PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS
A (31P) C (22P) A (31P) C (22P)
LG1 (BRN/YEL) ATP D4 LG1 (BRN/YEL) ATP 2 (BLU)

(YEL)
Is there about 5 V ? Is there about 5 V ?

NO−Check for short in the wire between PCM NO−Check for short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal C20 and the transmission range connector terminal C11 and the transmission range
switch. If the wire is OK, reprogram the PCM if it switch. If the wire is OK, reprogram the PCM if it
does not have the latest software, or substitute a does not have the latest software, or substitute a
known-good PCM, then recheck (see page 14-7). If known-good PCM, then recheck (see page 14-7). If
the symptom/indication goes away with a known- the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
good PCM, replace the original PCM. good PCM, replace the original PCM.
12. Shift to any position other than . 16. Shift to any position other than and .
A (31P) C (22P) A (31P) C (22P)
LG1 (BRN/YEL) ATP NP

LG1 (BRN/YEL) ATP D3 (RED) (BLU/WHT)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)

YES−Go to step 14. NO−Check for short in the wire between PCM
NO−Check for short in the wire between PCM connector terminal C12 and the transmission range
connector terminal C9 and the transmission range switch. If the wire is OK, reprogram the PCM if it
switch. If the wire is OK, reprogram the PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a
does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good PCM, then recheck (see page 14-7). If
known-good PCM, then recheck (see page 14-7). If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
the symptom/indication goes away with a known- good PCM, replace the original PCM.
good PCM, replace the original PCM. (cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-75

00/10/26 15:31:42 61S5N000_140_0076

18. Shift to any position other than and .

PCM CONNECTORS
A (31P) C (22P)
LG1 (BRN/YEL) ATP FWD

(BLU/YEL)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
YES−The PCM failed; replace it.
NO−Check for short in the wire between PCM

connector terminal C18 and the transmission range
switch. If wire is OK, reprogram the PCM if it does
not have the latest software, or substitute a known-
good PCM, then recheck (see page 14-7). If the
PCM, replace the original PCM.
14-76 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:42 61S5N000_140_0077
DTC P1706: Open in Transmission Range 5. Shift to position.

Switch Circuit
1. Test the transmission range switch (see page 14- PCM CONNECTORS
127).
A (31P) C (22P)
Is the switch OK ?
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Replace the transmission range switch. LG1 (BRN/YEL) ATP D4

(YEL)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
2. Connect the transmission range switch connector.
3. Check for continuity between PCM connector Wire side of female terminals
terminal A23 and body ground, and between
Is there voltage?
YES−Repair open in the wire between PCM
switch.
NO−Go to step 7.
7. Shift to position.

PCM CONNECTORS
Is there continuity? A (31P) C (22P)
YES−Go to step 4.

connector terminals A23 and A24, and ground LG1 (BRN/YEL) ATP R (WHT)
(G101), or repair poor ground (G101). LG2 (BRN/YEL)

Is there voltage?

switch.
NO−Go to step 9.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-77

00/10/26 15:31:43 61S5N000_140_0078

9. Shift to position. 13. Shift to or position.
A (31P) C (22P) A (31P) C (22P)
LG1 (BRN/YEL) ATP NP

LG1 (BRN/YEL) ATP D3 (RED) (BLU/WHT)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)

Is there voltage?
Is there voltage?
YES−Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal C12 and the transmission range
connector terminal C9 and the transmission range switch.
switch.
NO−Go to step 15.
NO−Go to step 11.
15. Shift to or position.
12. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals C18 and A23 or A24.
PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTORS
A (31P) C (22P)
A (31P) C (22P)
LG1 (BRN/YEL) ATP FWD

(BLU/YEL)
ATP 2 (BLU) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)

Is there voltage? YES−Repair open in the wire between PCM

YES−Repair open in the wire between PCM switch.
switch. NO−Reprogram the PCM if it does not have the
NO−Go to step 13. then recheck (see page 14-7). If the symptom/
replace the original PCM.
14-78 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:43 61S5N000_140_0079
DTC P1753: Problem in Torque Converter 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit
2. Disconnect PCM connectors A (31P) and C (22P). LC (YEL/BLU)

A (31P) C (22P)

LG1 (BRN/YEL)
PCM CONNECTORS LG2
(BRN/YEL)
LC (YEL/BLU) Wire side of female terminals
A (31P) C (22P)
Is the resistance 12 −25 ?

LG1 (BRN/YEL) latest sohtware, or substitute a known-good PCM,
LG2
NO−Go to step 7.
Is there voltage?
PCM connector terminal C2 and the torque terminal A24 and body ground.
converter clutch solenoid valve.
NO−Go to step 5.
YES−Go to step 8.

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-79

00/10/26 15:31:43 61S5N000_140_0080

8. Disconnect torque converter clutch solenoid valve 10. Measure torque converter clutch solenoid valve
connector (2P). resistance at the solenoid valve connector.
9. Check for continuity between PCM connector TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH

terminals C2 and A23 or A24. SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR (2P)
PCM CONNECTORS
LC (YEL/BLU)
A (31P) C (22P)
LG1 (BRN/YEL) Terminal side of male terminals

LG2
(BRN/YEL)
Wire side of female terminals Is the resistance 12 −25 ?
YES−Check for an open in the wires between PCM

Is there continuity? connector terminal C2 and the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve and between the No. 1
YES−Repair short to ground in the wire between terminal of the torque converter clutch solenoid
PCM connector terminal C2 and the torque valve connector and ground (G101).
converter clutch solenoid valve.
NO−Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid
NO−Go to step 10. valve.
14-80 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:44 61S5N000_140_0081
DTC P1768: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure 5. Connect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit A connector.
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. 6. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
terminals B7 and C1.
1. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector (2P). PCM CONNECTORS
LS A＋ (RED/BLK) LS A− (WHT/BLK)
2. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (24P) C (22P)
A resistance at the solenoid valve connector.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
Is the resistance about 5 ?
Terminal side of male terminals YES−Go to step 7.

Is the resistance about 5 ? between PCM connector terminals B7 and C1, and
the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
YES−Go to step 3.
7. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P).
NO−Replace the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B. 8. Check for continuity between PCM connector
3. Disconnect PCM connectors B (24P) and C (22P). terminal A24 and body ground.
4. Check for continuity between PCM connector PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)

terminal B7 and body ground, and between
PCM CONNECTORS
LS A＋ (RED/BLK) LS A− (WHT/BLK) LG2 (BRN/YEL) LG1 (BRN/YEL)
B (24P) C (22P)
Is there continuity? then recheck (see page 14-7). If the symptom/
YES−Repair short to ground in the wires between replace the original PCM.
PCM connector terminals B7 and C1, and the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM
NO−Go to step 5. (G101), or repair poor ground (G101).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-81

00/10/26 15:31:44 61S5N000_140_0082

DTC P1773: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure 5. Connect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit B connector.
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. 6. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
terminals B16 and C8.
1. Disconnect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve B connector (2P). PCM CONNECTORS
B (24P) C (22P)
2. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
B resistance at the solenoid valve connector.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR LS B＋ (BLK/RED) LS B− (BRN/WHT)
Is the resistance about 5 ?
Terminal side of male terminals YES−Go to step 7.

Is the resistance about 5 ? between PCM connector terminals B16 and C8, and
the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B.
YES−Go to step 3.
7. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P).
NO−Replace the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B. 8. Check for continuity between PCM connector
3. Disconnect PCM connectors B (24P) and C (22P). terminal A24 and body ground.
4. Check for continuity between PCM connector PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)

terminal B16 and body ground, and between
PCM CONNECTORS
B (24P) C (22P) LG2 (BRN/YEL) LG1 (BRN/YEL)
LS B＋ (BLK/RED) LS B− (BRN/WHT) Wire side of female terminals
Is there continuity? then recheck (see page 14-7). If the symptom/
YES−Repair short to ground in the wires between replace the original PCM.
PCM connector terminals B16 and C8, and the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B. NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM
NO−Go to step 5. (G101), or repair poor ground (G101).
14-82 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:45 61S5N000_140_0083
Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Press the brake pedal. 6. Disconnect PCM connectors A (31P) and E (31P).
Are the brake lights ON? 7. Press the brake pedal, and measure the voltage
between PCM connector terminals E22 and A23 or
YES−Go to step 2. A24.
NO−Repair faulty brake light circuit. PCM CONNECTORS
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and shift to A (31P) E (31P)

position.
3. With the accelerator pedal released, press the

brake pedal.
LG1 (BRN/YEL) BK SW (WHT/BLK)
4. Measure the voltage between PCM connector LG2 (BRN/YEL)
PCM CONNECTOR E (31P) Wire side of female terminals
YES−Release the brake pedal, and go to step 8.

ILU (WHT/BLU)
NO−Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal E22 and the brake pedal
position switch.
Wire side of female terminals 8. Reconnect PCM connectors A (31P) and E (31P).

Is there about 8V ?
YES−Go to step 18. terminals A15 and A23 or A24.
NO−Go to step 5.
LG2 (BRN/YEL) TPS (RED/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/
YEL)
NO−Go to step 11.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-83

00/10/26 15:31:45 61S5N000_140_0084
Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

12. Disconnect the TPS (throttle position sensor) 16. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P).
connector.
17. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). and body ground.
14. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 and No. 3 TPS CONNECTOR
terminals of the TPS connector.
TPS CONNECTOR
SG2 (GRN/YEL)
VCC2 SG2
(YEL/BLU) (GRN/YEL)
Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity?
YES−Check for a short to ground between the

Is there about 5 V ? No. 3 terminal of TPS connector and ground. If the
wire is OK, replace the PCM.
YES−Check for an open or a short in the wire
between PCM connector terminal A15 and the TPS. NO−Go to step 18.
If the wire is OK, replace the TPS.
NO−Go to step 15.
14-84 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:45 61S5N000_140_0085
18. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector. 21. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid
connector to the battery positive terminal, and
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative
terminal.
20. Press the brake pedal, and check the voltage
between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the shift NOTE: Do not connect the No. 2 terminal to the
lock solenoid connector. battery positive terminal or you will damage the
diode inside the shift lock solenoid.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
SHIFT LOCK SHIFT LOCK

SOLENOID＋ SOLENOID−
(YEL) (YEL/BLK)


22. Check that the shift lock solenoid operates.
Does the shif t lock solenoid operate properly?
NO−Check for an open or a short in the wires
between the shift lock solenoid connector and the YES−Check for a loose multiplex control unit
multiplex control unit connector. If wires are OK, connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
check for a loose terminal fit in the multiplex multiplex control unit and recheck.
control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a
known-good multiplex control unit and recheck. NO−Replace the shift lock solenoid.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-85

00/10/26 15:31:46 61S5N000_140_0086
Interlock System - Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Disconnect steering lock assembly connector (6P). 5. Check for continuity No. 3 of the steering lock
assembly connector (6P) and ground.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC (I) or ON (II).
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY
3. Connect the No. 4 terminal of steering lock CONNECTOR (6P)
assembly connector (6P) to the battery positive
terminal, and connect the No. 3 terminal to the
battery negative terminal.
GND (BLK)
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR (6P)
YES−Go to step 6.
terminal of the steering lock assembly connector
4. Check the key interlock solenoid operation. A (6P) and ground (G401), or repair poor ground
clicking sound should be heard while the ignition (G401).
key stays in ACC (I) and ON (II), and you should not
be able to turn it to OFF (0) position. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the
voltage between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals of
Does the key interlock solenoid operate properly? the steering lock assembly connector (6P).
YES−Go to step 5. STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY

CONNECTOR (6P)
NO−Faulty key interlock solenoid/switch. Replace
the ignition key cylinder/steering lock assembly.
GND (BLK) KEY INTERLOCK

SOLENOID
(WHT/RED)
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Check for open or short in the wire between

the No. 4 terminal of steering lock assembly
connector and the multiplex control unit. If the wire
is OK, check for loose terminal fit in the multiplex
control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a
known-good multiplex control unit and recheck.
14-86 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:46 61S5N000_140_0087
7. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P).
8. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4

terminals of the park pin switch connector (4P)
while you move the shift lever in and out of the
position.
PARK PIN SWITCH CONNECTOR (4P)
GND (BLK/WHT) P-PIN SWITCH

(WHT)
Is there no continuity with the shif t lever in

position, and continuity with the shif t lever in any
position other than ?
YES−Repair open or short in the wires between

the park pin switch connector and the multiplex
control unit. If wires are OK, check for loose
terminal fit in the multiplex control unit connectors.
If necessary, substitute a known-good multiplex
control unit and recheck.
NO−Inspect the park pin linkage. If the linkage is

OK, replace the park pin switch.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-87

00/10/26 15:31:46 61S5N000_140_0088
Road Test
Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (two required)
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Apply the parking brake, and block rear wheels. Start the engine, then shift to position while pressing the brake
pedal. Press the accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The engine should not stall.
3. Repeat the same test in position.
4. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A), and go to the PGM-FI Data List; then go to step 9. If you don’t have a PGM
Tester, go to step 5.
5. Remove the glove box stops, then open the glove box.
6. Remove the harness connector clamp from the bracket. Loosen the mounting nut on the lower right of the PCM,
and remove the mounting bolt and nut on the left of the PCM.
7. Lift the PCM up to clear the mounting nut on the lower right of the PCM, then pull out the PCM.
8. Connect a digital multimeter (A) and the special tools (B) to check voltage between the A15 (＋) terminal and A23
(−) or A24 (−) terminal of the PCM (C).
B
07SAZ-001000A
A C
PCM CONNECTORS
A (31P) B (24P) C (22P) E (31P)
LG1 (BRN/YEL) TPS (RED/BLK)
LG2 (BRN/YEL) Wire side of female terminals
14-88 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:46 61S5N000_140_0089
9. Test-drive the vehicle on a flat road in the position, check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage. While driving,
check that the shift points occur at the proper speeds by monitoring the throttle position sensor voltage and
comparing your shift point speeds and voltage to those in the table. (The throttle position sensor voltage
represents the throttle opening.)
Upshift- position
Throttle Opening Unit of Speed 1st → 2nd 2nd → 3rd 3rd → 4th Lock-up ON
Throttle position sensor mph 9−12 19−22 29−34 14−17
voltage: 0.75 V km/h 15−19 30−35 47−54 23−28
Throttle position sensor mph 22−26 42−48 60−66 68−74
voltage: 2.25 V km/h 36−42 68−76 96−105 110−119
Fully-opened throttle, mph 34−39 67−75 103−114 103−114
Throttle position sensor km/h 55−63 108−121 166−183 166−183
voltage: 4.5 V
Downshift- position
Throttle Opening Unit of Speed Lock-up OFF 4th → 3rd 3rd → 2nd 2nd → 1st
Throttle position sensor mph 13−16 17−20 6−9 (3rd→1st)
voltage: 0.5 V km/h 21−26 27−32 10−15 (3rd→1st)
Fully-opened throttle, mph 93−103 85−95 55−62 25−30
Throttle position sensor km/h 150−166 137−153 89−100 40−48
voltage: 4.5 V
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-89

00/10/26 15:31:47 61S5N000_140_0090
Road Test (cont’d)

10. Accelerate to about 35 mph (57 km/h) so the transmission is in 4th, then shift from position to position.
The vehicle should immediately begin slowing down from engine braking.
11. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage in the following positions.
(2nd Gear) Position

Accelerate from a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts and
downshifts should not occur with the shift lever in this position.
(Reverse) Position
Accelerate from a stop at full throttle, and check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage.
12. Test in (Park) Position.

Park the vehicle on a slope (about 16°), apply the parking brake, and shift into position. Release the brake; the
vehicle should not move.
14-90 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:47 61S5N000_140_0091
Stall Speed Test

1. Engage the parking brake, and block the front wheels.
2. Connect a tachometer to the engine, and start the engine.
3. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
4. After the engine has warmed up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on), shift to position.
5. Fully press the brake pedal and accelerator for 6 to 8 seconds, and note engine speed. Do not move the shift lever
while raising engine speed.
6. Allow 2 minutes for cooling, then repeat the test in and positions.
NOTE:
• Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds at a time.
• Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic purposes only.
• Stall speed should be the same in , and positions.
• Do not test stall speed with the A/T pressure gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm:

Specification: 2,800 rpm
Service Limit: 2,650−2,950 rpm
TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE

Stall rpm high in , and positions • Low fluid level or ATF pump output low
• Clogged ATF strainer
• Pressure regulator valve stuck closed
• Slipping clutch
Stall rpm high in position Slippage of 2nd clutch
Stall rpm high in position Slippage of 4th clutch
Stall rpm low in , and positions • Engine output low
• Torque converter one-way clutch slipping
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-91

00/10/26 15:31:47 61S5N000_140_0092
Pressure Tests
• A/T oil pressure gauge set 07406-0020400
• A/T pressure hose, 2210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
• A/T pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Before testing, be sure the transmission fluid is filled to the proper level.
2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
3. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels securely.
4. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely.
5. Warm up the engine (the radiator fan comes on), then stop it, and connect the tachometer.
6. Connect the oil pressure gauges to each inspection hole, and do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter
the holes while connecting the gauges.
TORQUE: 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
A/T OIL PRESSURE GAUGE A/T PRESSURE HOSE, 2210 mm A/T PRESSURE HOSE ADAPTER
SET W/PANEL 07MAJ-PY4011A 07MAJ-PY40120
07406-0020400 (4 Required) (4 Required)
A E
LINE PRESSURE 4TH CLUTCH PRESSURE
INSPECTION HOLE INSPECTION HOLE
C D B
2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE 3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE 1ST CLUTCH PRESSURE
INSPECTION HOLE INSPECTION HOLE INSPECTION HOLE
14-92 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:48 61S5N000_140_0093
7. Start the engine, and run it at 2,000 rpm.
8. Shift to or position, and measure line pressure at the line pressure inspection hole (A).
NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if measurements are made in shift lever positions other than or .
9. Shift to position, and measure 1st clutch pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection hole (B).
10. Shift to position, and measure 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection hole (C).
11. Shift to position, and measure 3rd clutch pressure at the 3rd clutch pressure inspection hole (D).
12. Shift to position, and measure 4th clutch pressure at the 4th clutch pressure inspection hole (E).
13. Shift to position, and measure 4th clutch pressure at the 4th clutch pressure inspection hole (E).
PRESSURE SHIFT SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE FLUID PRESSURE

LEVER
POSITION Standard Service Limit
Line or No (or low) Torque converter, 880−930 kPa 830 kPa

(A) line pressure ATF pump, pressure (9.0−9.5 kgf/cm2, (8.5 kgf/cm2,
regulator valve, torque 130−140 psi) 120 psi)
converter check valve
1st clutch No or low 1st clutch

(B) 1st clutch
pressure
2nd clutch No or low 2nd 2nd clutch 850−900 kPa 800 kPa
(C) clutch (8.7−9.2 kgf/cm2, (8.2 kgf/cm2,
pressure 120−130 psi) 120 psi)
3rd clutch No or low 3rd clutch

(D) 3rd clutch
pressure
4th clutch No or low 4th clutch

(E) 4th cluth
pressure Servo valve or 4th
clutch
14. Install the sealing bolt with a new sealing washers, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m,13 lbf·ft)
NOTE: Do not reuse old sealing washers.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-93

00/10/26 15:31:48 61S5N000_140_0094
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid

Valve Test Valve Replacement
1. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid 1. Remove the mounting bolt and the torque
valve connector. converter clutch solenoid valve (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
B
2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and
No. 2 terminals of the torque converter solenoid
valve connector.
2. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve
STANDARD: 12−25 with new O-rings (B). While installing the valve, do
not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the
3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve transmission.
if the resistance is out of standard.
3. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then
4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the connect the connector securely.
No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal, and
connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative
terminal. A clicking sound should be heard.
Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve
if no sound is heard when connecting the battery
positive terminal.
14-94 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:48 61S5N000_140_0095
Shift Solenoid Valves A and B Test Shift Solenoid Valves A and B

Replacement
1. Disconnect the shift solenoid valves A and B
connector.
NOTE: Shift solenoid valves A and B must be removed/
replaced as an assembly.
1. Remove the harness clamp (C) form the clamp

bracket (D).
2. Remove the mounting bolts and the shift solenoid

valves A and B.
D
E
2. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance between

the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valves A and C
B connector and body ground, and measure shift
solenoid valve B resistance between the No. 2
terminal and body ground.
STANDARD: 12−25 A and B
3. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if either 6 x 1.0 mm

12 N·m
resistance is out of standard. (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the

No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valve A to the 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage.
battery positive terminal. A clicking sound should
be heard. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery 4. Install a new shift solenoid valves A and B with a
positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. new filter/gasket (E), and install the harness clamp
Replace the shift solenoid valves A and B if no on the clamp bracket.
clicking sound is heard when either terminal is
connected to the battery terminal. 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then
reconnect the connector securely.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-95

00/10/26 15:31:49 61S5N000_140_0096
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test

1. Disconnect the connectors from the A/T clutch 6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure
pressure control solenoid valves A and B. control solenoid valve for dust and dirt.
7. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch

B pressure control solenoid valves A and B to the
A battery negative terminal, and connect the No. 2
terminal to the battery positive terminal. Make sure
the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B move.
B A
2. Measure the resistance of the A/T clutch pressure

control solenoid valves A and B between the No. 1
and No. 2 terminals of each connector.
STANDARD: About 5.0

8. Disconnect one of the battery terminal and check
3. If the resistance of either A/T clutch pressure valve movement.
control solenoid is out of standard, replace the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. NOTE: You can see valve movement through the
fluid passage in the mounting surface of the A/T
4. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B
pressure control solenoid valve A (and B) to the body (C).
battery negative terminal, and connect the No. 2
terminal to the battery positive terminal. A clicking 9. If either valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the
sound should be heard. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid does not
operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control
5. If no sound is heard, remove the A/T clutch solenoid valves A and B.
pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
14-96 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:49 61S5N000_140_0097
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement

1. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
A and B
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lgf·ft)
2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of

the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B and the transmission housing.
3. Install the new filter/gasket (C) in the solenoid valve

assembly body groove.
4. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valves A and B. Do not pinch the filter/gasket.
5. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valve connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect
them securely.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-97

00/10/26 15:31:49 61S5N000_140_0098
Mainshaft Speed Sensor Countershaft Speed Sensor

Replacement Replacement
1. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor connector. 1. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor
connector.
2. Remove the mainshaft speed sensor (A).
2. Remove the countershaft speed sensor (A).
B B
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
6 x 1.0 mm 8.7 lbf·ft)
12 N·m (12 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
3. Install the new countershaft speed sensor with the
3. Install the new mainshaft speed sensor with the new O-ring (B).
new O-ring (B).
4. Check the countershaft speed sensor connector for
4. Check the mainshaft speed sensor connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector
rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely.
securely.
14-98 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:50 61S5N000_140_0099
ATF Level Check

NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 6. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the
recommended fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating to the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the
engine off. 7. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission in the
direction shown.
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the
transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth. Front
4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It

should be between the upper mark (B) and lower
mark (C).
B
C
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-99

00/10/26 15:31:50 61S5N000_140_0100
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer.
1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature 5. Refill transmission with the recommended fluid
(the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle. into dipstick hole to the upper mark on the dipstick.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission
2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift
engine off. quality.
3. Remove the drain plug, and drain the automatic Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
transmission fluid (ATF). 2.7 (2.9 US qt, 2.4 lmp qt) at changing
6.0 (6.3 US qt, 5.3 lmp qt) at overhaul
NOTE: If a cooler flusher is to be used, refer to ATF
Cooler Flushing (see page 14-114).
B
A
18 x 1.5 m
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)
14-100 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:50 61S5N000_140_0101
Transmission Removal
Special Tools Required 6. Disconnect the battery negative terminal, then
• Engine hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566, or remove the positive terminal.
equivalent, commercially available
• Engine hanger attachment 07AAK-S5AA000 7. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then
remove the battery and battery tray.
1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported. 8. Remove the intake air duct and resonator.
2. Remove the splash shield. 9. Remove the harness clamp from the battery base,
then remove the battery base.
10. Remove the starter cable (A) and harness clamp (B).
3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic A

transmission fluid (ATF). Reinstall the drain plug
with a new sealing washer (B).
11. Remove the transmission ground cable (A),

disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve connector (B), and remove the harness clamp
(C) from the transmission hanger (D).
B
A
18 x 1.5 mm
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft)
4. Secure the hood in a vertical position with the

support strut.
5. Before disconnecting the battery, make sure you

have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write A D
C
down the frequencies for the radio’s preset stations.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-101

00/10/26 15:31:51 61S5N000_140_0102

12. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor connector 15. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF
(A), and remove the harness clamp (B) from its cooler lines (B). Turn the ends of the ATF cooler
bracket (C). hoses up to prevent ATF from flowing out, then
plug the ATF cooler hoses and lines.
NOTE: Check for any signs of leakage at the hose

joints.
B
13. Disconnect the VSS connector (A), and remove the

harness clamp (B) its bracket (C).
A
B
A
C
F
16. Disconnect connectors from the A/T clutch
D
pressure control solenoid valves A and B, shift
solenoid valves A and B (C), and countershaft
speed sensor (D), and remove the harness clamps
(E) from the clamp brackets (F).
E F
G
E
D
14. Remove the transmission range switch connector
(D) from its bracket (E), disconnect the connector,
and remove the harness clamp (F) from its bracket
(G).
E C
F
14-102 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:52 61S5N000_140_0103
17. Remove the primary HO2S connector (A) from its 20. Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (A) in the top of the ball
bracket (B), and disconnect it. Remove the primary joint pin (B), and remove the nut (C), then separate
HO2S harness (C) from its clamp (D). the stabilizer link (D) from the lower arm.
A
B
H
G
F
E
B C E
C
21. Remove the spring clips (E) and castle nuts (F), and
D separate the lower arms (G) from the knuckles (H)
(see page 18-11).
18. Remove the front mount bolt (E) and nut (F).
22. Pry the driveshafts out of the differential (see page
19. Install the special tool and the commercially 16-3).
available engine hanger to support the engine
using the stud (A) behind the EGR valve (B). 23. Disconnect the secondary HO2S connector (A), and
remove the secondary HO2S harness (B) from its
clamp (C).
07AAK-S5AA000
B
A
A
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-103

00/10/26 15:31:52 61S5N000_140_0104

24. Remove exhaust pipe A. 27. Remove the engine stiffeners (A) and torque
converter cover (B).
25. Remove the shift cable covers (A), then remove the
bolts securing the shift cable holder (B).
B A
28. Remove the 8 drive plate bolts (C) one at a time

while rotating the crankshaft pulley.
E 29. Remove the rear mount bolts.
A D B
C
26. Remove the lock bolt securing the control lever (C),
then remove the shift cable (D) with the control
lever from the control shaft (E). Do not bend the
shift cable excessively.
14-104 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:53 61S5N000_140_0105
30. Make the appropriate reference lines at positions A 32. Remove the 10 x 1.25 mm bolts (A) and 4 sub-
and B that line up with the center of the sub-frame frame mounting bolts (B), then lower the sub-frame
mounting bolts (C). (C).
A A
B
C
B B
31. Support the sub-frame with a 4 x 4 x 40 in. piece of

wood and a jack. 33. Remove the driveshafts from the differential. Coat
all precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil,
then tie plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-105

00/10/26 15:31:53 61S5N000_140_0106

34. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts. 36. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolt
(A), rear mount bracket bolts (B), and rear mount/
bracket (C).
35. Remove the transmission mount bracket.
37. Place a jack under the transmission.
38. Pull the transmission away from the engine until it

clears the dowel pins, then lower it on the jack.
39. Remove the torque converter assembly (A).

B
40. Remove the starter (B) from the torque converter

housing.
14-106 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:54 61S5N000_140_0107
41. Remove the front mount from the transmission.
42. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it’s

damaged.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-107

00/10/26 15:31:54 61S5N000_140_0108
Transmission Installation
1. Flush the ATF cooler (see page 14-114). 7. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts.
2. Install the starter (A) on the torque converter

housing (B).
44 N·m
F
C
F 12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
8. Install the transmission mount bracket (A).

E Tighten the bolt (B) loosely, and tighten the nuts (C)
to the specified torque, then tighten the bolt to the
3. Install the torque converter assembly (C) on the specified torque.
mainshaft (D) with a new O-ring (E).
B C
12 x 1.25 mm 12 x 1.25 mm
4. Install the 14 mm dowel pins (F) in the torque 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m,
converter housing. 40 lbf·ft) 40 lbf·ft)
5. Place the transmission on a jack, and raise it to the

engine level.
6. Attach the transmission to the engine, then install

the rear mount/bracket (A) with the mount/bracket A
bolts (B) and the transmission housing mounting
bolt (C).
A
B
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft)
C
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft)
14-108 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:55 61S5N000_140_0109
9. Install new set rings (A) on the left and right 12. Loosely install the 4 sub-frame mounting bolts (A)
driveshafts (B). and the 10 x 1.25 mm bolts (B).
A B
B 10 x 1.25 mm
10 x 1.25 mm 59 N·m
10. Install the right and left driveshafts (see page 16-17). 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m,
While installing the driveshafts in the differential,
43 lbf·ft)
be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles A
to enter the transmission. 14 x 1.5 mm
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m,
75.9 lbf·ft)
NOTE:
• Clean the areas where the driveshafts contact the
transmission (differential) with solvent or 13. Align the reference marks (A) with the center of the
carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. bolt heads (B), then tighten the bolts to the
• Turn the right and left steering knuckle fully specified torque.
outward, and slide the driveshafts into the
differential until you feel its set ring engage the A
side gear.
11. Support the sub-frame (A) with a 4 x 4 x 40 in. piece

of wood (B), and lift it up to the body. B
B A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-109

00/10/26 15:31:55 61S5N000_140_0110

14. Install the rear mount bolts. 18. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt as necessary (see
page 6-11).
19. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable (B)
on the control shaft (C). Do not bend the shift cable
excessively.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
C (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
G
10 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m,
43 lbf·ft)
G
15. Remove the transmission jack from the 6 x 1.0 mm B D
transmission. 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, A
7.2 lbf·ft)
F
E
16. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate (A) 6 x 1.0 mm
with eight bolts (B). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as 14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m,
necessary to tighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified 10 lbf·ft)
torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross
pattern. After installing the last bolt, check that the 20. Secure the shift cable holder (D) with the bolts on
crankshaft rotates freely. the transmission.
B
6 x 1.0 mm 21. Install the lock bolt (E) with a new lock washer (F),
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt head.
22. Install the shift cable covers (G).

10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m A
(4.5 kgf·m,
33 lbf·ft)
C
D
8 x 1.25 mm D
25 N·m (2.5 kgf·m,
18 lbf·ft)
17. Install the torque converter cover (C) and engine

stiffeners (D).
14-110 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:56 61S5N000_140_0111
23. Connect the ball joints (A) to the lower arms (B), 26. Connect the secondary HO2S connector, and install
and install the castle nuts (C) and spring clips (D). the harness on its clamp.
G F
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m,
29 lbf·ft)
E D
C
12 x 1.25 mm
49−59·m (5.0−6.0 kgf·m,
36−43 lbf·ft)
24. Connect the ball joint pins (E) to the lower arms,
and install the nuts (F). Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench
(G) in the top of the ball joint pins, and tighten the
nuts.
25. Install the exhaust pipe A.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
8 x 1.25 mm 33 N·m (3.4 kgf·m,
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
16 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-111

00/10/26 15:31:57 61S5N000_140_0112

28. Install the front mount (A). Tighten the mount bolt 32. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler
(B) loosely, and tighten the mounting bolts (C) to lines (B) (see page 14-115).
the specified torque, then tighten the mount bolt to
the specified torque. B
D
A
A
C
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 33. Connect the transmission range switch connector
47 lbf·ft)
(A), and install it on its bracket (B). Install the
harness clamp on the clamp bracket.
F
G C
B
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft)
A
29. Connect the primary HO2S connector (D), and
install it on its bracket (E). Install the harness (F) on
its clamp (G).
30. Remove the engine hanger and the special tool

from the engine.
31. Connect the connectors to the A/T clutch pressure

control solenoid valves A and B, shift solenoid
valves A and B (C), and countershaft speed sensor
B
(D), then install the harness clamps on the clamp
brackets.
34. Install the VSS connector (C), then install the
harness clamp on the clamp bracket.
B D
14-112 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:57 61S5N000_140_0113
35. Connect the mainshaft speed sensor connector (A), 38. Connect the starter cables (A) to the starter (B), and
and install the harness clamp (B) on the clamp install the harness clamp on the clamp bracket.
bracket (C). Make sure the crimped side of the starter cable ring
terminal is facing out.
A
A
9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m,

6.5 lbf·ft)
B
B
36. Connect the torque converter clutch solenoid valve

connector (A), then install the harness clamp on the 39. Install the battery base, then install the harness
transmission hanger. clamp on the battery base.
A 40. Install the resonator and intake air duct.
41. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-100).
42. Install the battery tray and battery, then secure the
battery with its hold-down bracket.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 43. Connect the battery positive terminal, then connect
7.2 lbf·ft) the negative terminal.
44. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
the transmission through all gears three times.
45. Check the shift lever operation, A/T gear position

indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
B
46. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment (see
page 18-4).
37. Install the transmission ground cable (B). 47. Start the engine and let it reach normal operating
temperature (the radiator fan comes on) with the
transmission in or position, then turn if off
and check the ATF level (see page 14-99).
48. Perform a road test (see page 14-88).
the radio station presets, and set the clock.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-113

00/10/26 15:31:58 61S5N000_140_0114
ATF Cooler Flushing

Special Tools Required 7. With the water and air valves (A) off, attach the
Transmission cooler flusher Kent-Moore J38405-A or water and air supplies to the flusher. (Hot water if
equivqlent, commercially available available.)
OFF
This procedure should be performed before reinstalling
the transmission.
1. Check equipment for wear and cracks before using.

Replace any worn or cracked components.
2. Using the measuring cup, fill the flusher (A) with 21

ounces (approximately 2/3 full) of biodegradable
flushing fluid (J35944-20). Do not substitute with
any other fluid. Follow the handling procedure on
the fluid container.
A
3. Secure the flusher filler cap, and pressurize the
flusher with compressed air to 550−829 kpa (5.6−
8.45 kgf/cm2, 80−120 psi). The air line should be 8. Turn on the water valve for 10 seconds. If water
equipped with a water trap to ensure a dry air does not flow through the cooler, it is completely
system. plugged, cannot be flushed, and must be replaced.
4. Hang the flusher under the vehicle. 9. Depress the trigger to mix the flushing fluid into the
water flow. Use the wire clip to hold the trigger
5. Attach the flusher discharge hose (B) to the return down.
line of the ATF cooler using a clamp.
10. While flushing with the water and flushing fluid for
two minutes, turn the air valve on for 5 seconds
every 15−20 seconds to create a surging action.
AIR PRESSURE:
MAX 845 kpa (8.45 kgf/cm2, 120 psi)
11. Turn the water valve off. Release the trigger, then
B reverse the hoses to the cooler so you can flush in
the opposite direction. Repeat steps 8 through 10.
12. Release the trigger, and rinse the cooler with water
for 1 minute.
A
D
13. Turn the water valve off, and the water supply off.
C
14. Turn the air valve on for 2 minutes, or until no
moisture is visible leaving the drain hose. Residual
6. Connect the drain hose (C) to the inlet line on the moisture in the cooler or lines can damage the
ATF cooler using a clamp. Securely clamp the transmission.
opposite end of the drain hose to a bucket (D) or
floor drain. 15. Remove the flusher form the cooler line. Attach the
drain hose to an ATF container.
16. Install the transmission, and leave the drain hose

attached to the cooler line.
14-114 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:58 61S5N000_140_0115
ATF Cooler Hoses Replacement

17. Make sure the transmission is in position. 1. Connect the cooler hoses (A) to the lines (B) and the
Fill the transmission with ATF, and run the engine ATF cooler, and secure them with the clips (C) as
for 30 seconds or until approximately 0.95 (1.0 US shown.
qt., 0.8 lmp qt.) is discharged.
6−8 mm
(0.2−0.3 in.)
18. Remove the drain hose, and reconnect the cooler
return hose to the transmission.
C
19. Refill the transmission with ATF to the proper level
(see page 14-100).
B
2−4 mm
(0.1−0.2 in.)
D C
2. Install the clamp (D) aligning with the line (E) on the
cooler hoses.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-115

00/10/26 15:31:59 61S5N000_140_0116
Shift Lever Removal

1. Shift the transmission into position. 4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)
toward the shift lever a quarter turn, then slide the
2. Remove the center console panel and center holder out to remove the shift cable from the shift
console (see page 20-64). cable bracket base (C).
3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A), NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twisting
then separate the cable end from the shift lever the shift cable guide (D).
assembly.
C B
D A
5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P)

(A) and park pin switch connector (4P) (B).
6. Remove the four bolts, then remove the shift lever

assembly.
14-116 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:31:59 61S5N000_140_0117
Shift Lever Installation

1. Install the shift lever assembly. 5. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) through the
positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the and into the positioning hole (C) on the shift lever
position indicator light comes on. assembly.
A
3. If necessary, push the shift cable until it stops, then
release it. Pull the shift cable back 2 steps so that
the shift position is in .
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-117

00/10/26 15:32:00 61S5N000_140_0118
Shift Lever Installation (cont’d)

6. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) 8. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from
with the slot in the cable bracket base (C), then slide the shift cable bracket base, and reinstall the shift
the holder into the base. Install the shift cable end cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the
(D) over the mounting stud (E) by aligning its mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift
square hole (F) with the square fitting (G) at the cable bracket base.
bottom of the stud. Rotate the holder clockwise a
quarter turn to secure the shift cable. 9. Install and tighten the nut.
NOTE: Do not install the shift cable by twisting the

shift cable guide (H).
C
B
A
H
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
G
10. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in) pin that aligned the
E shift lever.
F
D
11. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector and the
park pin switch connector.
7. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly
installed on the mounting stud (B). 12. Move the shift lever to each position, and verify
that the A/T gear position indicator follows the
Properly Installed:
transmission range switch.
13. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift
lever releases.
14. Reinstall the center console, console panel, and

related parts (see page 20-64).
A B
Improperly Installed:
Cable end rides on the bottom

of the mounting stud.
14-118 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:00 61S5N000_140_0119
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly
SCREW
3 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 2 lbf·ft)
Apply non-hardening thread
lock sealant.
SHIFT LEVER KNOB
A/T GEAR POSITION

INDICATOR PANEL
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE LID
A/T GEAR POSITION SHIFT LEVER COVER

INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT BULB
A/T GEAR POSITION

INDICATOR PANEL
BRACKET
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE
BUSHING
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE SPRING
SILICONE GREASE
SHIFT LOCK STOP

SILICONE GREASE
PARK PIN SWITCH

SILICONE GREASE
SILICONE GREASE
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID PLUNGER
PLUNGER SPRING SHIFT LEVER

BRACKET BASE
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-119

00/10/26 15:32:01 61S5N000_140_0120
Shift Cable Replacement

1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely 5. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)
supported (see page 1-7). toward the shift lever a quarter turn, then slide the
holder out to remove the shift cable from the shift
2. Shift the transmission into position. cable bracket base (C).
3. Remove the center console panel and center NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twisting
console (see page 20-64). the shift cable guide (D).
4. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A),

C
then separate the cable end from the shift lever B
assembly.
D A
6. Remove the shift cable guide bracket (A) and

grommet (B).
A
A
B 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
14-120 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:01 61S5N000_140_0121
7. Remove the shift cable covers (A), then remove the 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the
bolts securing the shift cable holder (B). position indicator light comes on.
16. If necessary, push the shift cable until it stops, then

E
release it. Pull the shift cable back 2 steps so that
6 x 1.0 mm the shift position is in .
9.8 N·m
A (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
A
6 x 1.0 mm D B
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, C
7.2 lbf·ft)
G
6 x 1.0 mm
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
8. Remove the lock bolt securing the control lever (C), 18. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) through the
then remove the shift cable (D) with the control positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base
lever from the control shaft (E). and into the positioning hole (C) on the shift lever
assembly.
9. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet
hole, then install the shift cable guide bracket.
C
10. Verify that the transmission is in position on the
control shaft.
B
11. Install the control lever with the shift cable on the
control shaft. Do not bend the shift cable
excessively.
12. Secure the shift cable holder with the bolts on the
transmission.
13. Install the lock bolt with a new lock washer (G),
A
then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt head.
14. Install the shift cable covers.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-121

00/10/26 15:32:01 61S5N000_140_0122
Shift Cable Replacement (cont’d)


C
B
A
H
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
G
E 23. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that aligned the
F shift lever.
D
20. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly 24. Move the shift lever to each position, and verify
installed on the mounting stud (B). that the A/T gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch.
Properly Installed:
25. Allow the wheels to rotate freely.
26. Start the engine, and check the shift lever operation
in all gears.

A B related parts (see page 20-64).

14-122 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:02 61S5N000_140_0123
Shift Cable Adjustment

1. Shift the transmission into position. 5. Push the shift cable until it stops, then release it.
Pull the shift cable back 2 steps so that the shift
2. Remove the center console panel and center position is in .
console (see page 20-64).
3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A),

then separate the cable end from the shift lever
assembly.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the

position indicator light comes on.
8. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) through the

positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base
and into the positioning hole (C) on the shift lever
A assembly.
4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)

toward the shift lever a quarter turn, then slide the C
holder out to remove the shift cable from the shift
cable bracket base (C).
B
NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twisting
the shift cable guide (D).
C
B
A
D
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-123

00/10/26 15:32:02 61S5N000_140_0124
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont’d)


C
B
A
H
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
G 13. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that aligned the
shift lever.
E
D F 14. Move the shift lever to each position, and verify
that the A/T gear position indicator follows the
10. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly transmission range switch.
installed on the mounting stud (B).
15. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift
Properly Installed:
lever releases.

related parts (see page 20-64).
A B

14-124 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:03 61S5N000_140_0125
A/T Gear Position Indicator
A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

Indicator Input Test, page 14-130
Indicator Bulb Replacement, page 14-131
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

(PCM)
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

Test, page 14-127
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-125

00/10/26 15:32:07 61S5N000_140_0126
Circuit Diagram
14-126 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:07 61S5N000_140_0127
Transmission Range Switch Test

1. Remove the transmission range switch harness
C
connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then
disconnect the connector.
Terminal side of
male terminals
A B
B
Connector Terminal Description
Wire side of No. Description No. Description
female terminals 1 6
2 7
Connector Terminal Description 3 8
No. Description No. Description 4 GND 9 Not used
1 GND 6 5 ATP NP 10 ATP FWD
2 ATP FWD 7 Not used
3 ATP NP 8 4. Check for continuity between terminals at the
4 9 switch connector (C). There should be continuity
5 10 between the terminals listed for each position.
2. Check for continuity between terminals at the In position, between terminals:

harness connector. There should be continuity • No. 4 and No. 5
between the terminals listed for each switch • No. 4 and No. 6
position. • No. 5 and No. 6
In position, between terminals:
In position, between terminals: • No. 1 and No. 4
• No. 1 and No. 3 In position, between terminals:
• No. 1 and No. 8 • No. 4 and No. 5
• No. 3 and No. 8 • No. 4 and No. 7
In position and between terminals: • No. 2 and No. 4
• No. 1 and No. 3 • No. 2 and No. 10
• No. 1 and No. 10 • No. 4 and No. 10
• No. 1 and No. 2 • No. 4 and No. 10
• No. 1 and No. 4 • No. 8 and No. 10
• No. 1 and No. 2
• No. 1 and No. 5 • If there is no continuity between any terminals,
• No. 2 and No. 5 adjust the transmission range switch installation.
In position, between terminals: If the transmission range switch installation is OK,
• No. 1 and No. 6 replace the switch.
3. If there is no continuity between any terminal,
remove the transmission range switch cover, and • If the transmission range switch continuity check
disconnect the connector (A) at the switch (B). was OK, replace the faulty transmission range
switch harness.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-127

00/10/26 15:32:08 61S5N000_140_0128
Transmission Range Switch Replacement

1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely 6. Make sure that the control shaft is in position.
supported (see page 1-7). If necessary, move the shift lever to position.
3. Remove the transmission range switch cover (A).
B
A
7. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the

neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission
range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) feeler
gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the
position.
4. Disconnect the transmission range switch
connector (B). NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade or
equivalent to hold the switch in the position.
5. Remove the old transmission range switch, and
install the new switch.
B
14-128 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:08 61S5N000_140_0129
8. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on 10. Connect the connector securely, then install the
the control shaft (B) with holding the position transmission range switch cover.
with the 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade (C).
6 x 1.0 mm
C 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
A 8.7 lbf·ft)
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
9. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch through all gear positions, and check the
while you continue to hold the position. transmission range switch synchronization with the
Do not move the transmission range switch when A/T gear position indicator.
tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge.
12. Allow the wheels to rotate freely, then start the

6 x 1.0 mm engine.
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
13. Move the shift lever through all gear positions, and
verify the following:
• The engine will not start in any position other

than or .
• The back-up lights come on when the shift lever
is in position.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-129

00/10/26 15:32:09 61S5N000_140_0130
Indicator Input Test

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. Shift to position, and check for continuity
SRS component locations (see page 23-10), precautions, between A3 terminal (BLK/RED) and ground.
and procedures (see page 23-11) in the SRS section There should be continuity in position and no
before performing repairs or service. continuity in any other shift lever position. If your
test results are different, check for a faulty
1. If the MIL has been reported, check for a DTC, and transmission range switch or an open in the wire.
repair the system as indicated by DTC.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), shift to position,
2. If the MIL does not come on, and the A/T gear and check for voltage between A11 terminal (WHT)
position indicator , , or light does not come and ground.
on. Turn the ignition switch off, remove the gauge There should be 0 V in position. There should be
assembly from the dashboard (see page 22-62), about 5 V in any other shift lever position. If your
then disconnect gauge assembly connector A (22P) test results are different, check for a faulty
and B (22P). transmission range switch or an open in the wire.
3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to 8. Check for voltage between B17 terminal (YEL) and
be sure they are making good contact. ground with the ignition switch ON (II).
There should be battery voltage. If your test results
4. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair are different, check for a blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse in
them as necessary, and recheck the system. the under-dash fuse/relay box or an open in the
wire.
5. Shift to position, and check for continuity
between A5 terminal (BLU/BLK) and ground. GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B (22P)
There should be continuity in position and no
continuity in any other shift lever position. If your
test results are different, check for a faulty
transmission range switch or an open in the wire.
GND (BLK) IG 1 (YEL)

GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR A (22P)
ATP N (BLK/RED) ATP P (BLU/BLK)

ATP R (WHT)
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for

continuity between B16 terminal (BLK) and ground
under all conditions.
Wire side of female terminals There should be continuity. If your test results are
different, check for a poor ground (G501) or an
open in the wire.
10. If all input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty,
replace the printed circuit board.
14-130 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:09 61S5N000_140_0131
Indicator Bulb Replacement

SRS component locations (see page 23-10), precautions,
and procedures (see page 23-11) in the SRS section
before performing repairs or service.
1. Remove the gauge assembly (see page 22-62).
2. Replace the bulb (A) at the gauge assembly (B).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-131

00/10/26 15:32:10 61S5N000_140_0132
A/T Interlock System
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
PARK PIN SWITCH
Test, page 14-135
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY Replacement, page 14-136
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
Test, page 14-134 SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Test, page 14-134
14-132 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:12 61S5N000_140_0133
Circuit Diagram
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-133

00/10/26 15:32:12 61S5N000_140_0134
Key Interlock Solenoid Test Shift Lock Solenoid Test

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 1. Remove the center console panel and center
SRS component locations (see page 23-10), precautions, console (see page 20-64).
and procedures (see page 23-11) in the SRS section
before performing repairs or service. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P).
1. Remove the driver’s dashboard lower cover (see

page 20-67).
2. Remove the lower steering column cover.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the

voltage between the No. 4 terminal (WHT/RED) of
the steering lock assembly connector and body
ground while pulling up on the shift lock lever.
• If there is no battery voltage, go to step 4.

• If there is no battery voltage, disconnect the
steering lock assembly connector. Check the BLK
wire for continuity to ground. If there is no
continuity to ground, repair the open in the BLK
wire. If there is continuity to ground, replace the
key interlock solenoid.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid
connector (2P) to the battery positive terminal, and
5. Remove the under-dash fuse/relay box, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative
disconnect the multiplex control unit 8P connector. terminal.
6. Check for continuity on the WHT/RED wire between 4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the
the No. 4 terminal of the steering lock assembly position. Release the battery terminals from the
connector and the No. 1 terminal of the multiplex shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever
control unit 8P connector. There should be back to the position, and make sure it locks.
continuity.
NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal
• If there is continuity, go to step 7. (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode
• If there is no continuity, repair the open in the inside the solenoid.
WHT/RED wire.
5. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift
7. Check for continuity between the WHT/RED wire lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when
and body ground. There should be no continuity. the shift lock release is released.
• If there is continuity, go to step 8. 6. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly,
• If there is continuity, repair the short in the WHT/ replace it.
RED wire.
8. Test the park pin switch (see page 14-135).
• If the park pin switch is OK, inspect the related

multiplex control unit(under-dash fuse/relay box)
connectors. If they are OK, substitute a known-
good multiplex control unit, and recheck.
• If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it.
14-134 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:13 61S5N000_140_0135
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement Park Pin Switch Test

1. Remove the center console panel and center 1. Remove the center console panel and center
console (see page 20-64). console (see page 20-64).
2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (2P), 2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P).
and remove it from the shift lever bracket base.
3. Push the lock tab (A), pry the shift lock solenoid (B)
to clear the projected tips (C) with a screwdriver,
and remove the shift lock solenoid.
F
G
C 3. Shift to position, then check for continuity

B
between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There
should be no continuity.
4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (D) and
plunger spring (E) in the new shift lock solenoid. 4. Shift out of position, and check for continuity
between terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should
5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint be no continuity.
(F) of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip (G)
of the shift lock stop. 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace it.
6. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector, and

install it on the shift lever bracket base.
7. Install the center console and console panel (see

page 20-64).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-135

00/10/26 15:32:13 61S5N000_140_0136
Park Pin Switch Replacement

1. Remove the center console panel and center 7. Open the lock tabs (A) on the shift lever bracket
console (see page 20-64). base, then remove the park pin switch (B).
2. Remove the screws (A), then remove the shift lever

knob (B).
A B
3 N·m
Apply non-hardening
thread lock sealant.
A
B
D
G
8. Install the new park pin switch.
9. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of

C
removal.
3. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light

(C) from the A/T gear position indicator panel.
4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel and

panel bracket as an assembly (D).
5. Disconnect the park pin switch connector (4P) (E),

and remove it from the shift lever bracket base (F).
6. Remove the shift lock release (G) and spring (H).
14-136 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:14 61S5N000_140_0137
Transmission End Cover
End Cover, 1st Gears, and 1st Clutch Removal

Exploded View
END COVER
TRANSMISSION RANGE
END COVER SWITCH COVER
GASKET
Replace.
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
CONICAL SPRING
WASHER
Replace. MAINSHAFT
LOCKNUT TRANSMISSION RANGE
Replace. SWITCH HARNESS
HARNESS CLAMPS
1ST CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
THRUST WASHER PARK LEVER
THRUST NEEDLE COUNTERSHAFT

BEARING LOCKNUT
Replace.
NEEDLE BEARING CONICAL SPRING
WASHER
Replace.
PARK GEAR
MAINSHAFT
1ST GEAR
ONE-WAY
CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT 1ST
A/T CLUTCH GEAR COLLAR
PRESSURE COUNTERSHAFT
CONTROL 1ST GEAR
SOLENOID
VALVES A and B NEEDLE BEARING
COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR COLLAR
LINE BOLT
ATF COOLER
LINES
SEALING WASHERS
Replace.
LINE BOLT
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-137

00/10/26 15:32:15 61S5N000_140_0138
End Cover, 1st Gears, and 1st Clutch Removal (cont’d)

1. Remove the transmission range switch cover. 9. Remove the park pawl, park pawl spring, park pawl
shaft, and stop shaft.
2. Remove the transmission range switch harness
clamps, then remove the transmission range 10. Remove the park lever from the control shaft.
switch.
11. Remove the park gear, one-way clutch, and
3. Remove the 12 bolts securing the end cover, then countershaft 1st gear assembly (A) using a
remove the end cover. universal 2 jaw puller (B).
4. Slip the special tool onto the mainshaft.

B
07GAB-PF50101 or
07GAB-PF50100
5. Engage the park pawl with the park gear.

A
6. Cut the lock tabs (A) of the mainshaft and
countershaft locknuts (B) using a chisel (C). Then 12. Remove the needle bearing and countershaft 1st
remove the locknuts and conical spring washers gear collar.
from both shafts.
13. Remove the ATF cooler lines.
NOTE:
• Mainshaft and countershaft locknuts have 14. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
left-hand threads. valves A and B, if necessary.
• Clean the old countershaft locknut; it is used to
install the press fit park gear on the countershaft.
• Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
transmission.
7. Remove the special tool from the mainshaft.
8. Remove the 1st clutch and mainshaft 1st gear as an

assembly, and remove the 1st gear collar.
14-138 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:15 61S5N000_140_0139
Park Lever Stop Inspection and Adjustment

1. Set the park lever in the position. 3. If the measurement is out of tolerance, select and
install the appropriate park lever stop (A) from the
2. Measure the distance (A) between the park pawl table below.
shaft (B) and the park lever roller pin (C).
STANDARD:
72.9−73.9 mm (2.87−2.91 in.)
L1 L2
A
A
B PARK LEVER STOP

C
Mark Part Number L1 L2
1 24537-PA9-003 11.00 mm 11.00 mm
(0.433 in.) (0.433 in.)
2 24538-PA9-003 10.80 mm 10.65 mm
(0.425 in.) (0.419 in.)
3 24539-PA9-003 10.60 mm 10.30 mm
(0.417 in.) (0.406 in.)
4. After replacing the park lever stop, make sure the

distance is within tolerance.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-139

00/10/26 15:32:16 61S5N000_140_0140
Transmission Housing
Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal

Exploded View
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
MOUNTING BOLT
10 x 1.25 mm
TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSON HOUSING

HANGER
REVERSE GEAR
COLLAR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
NEEDLE
MAINSHAFT BEARING
SPEED SENSOR
LOCK
WASHER
Replace.
REVERSE
SELECTOR
REVERSE
SHIFT
CONNECTOR FORK
BRACKET
O-RING
Replace.
MAINSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
TRANSMISSION COUNTERSHAFT
HOUSING GASKET SUB-ASSEMBLY
Replace.
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING
14-140 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:17 61S5N000_140_0141
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the countershaft reverse gear collar,

Housing puller 07HAC-PK40102 countershaft reverse gear, and needle bearing.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 6. Remove the lock bolt securing the shift fork, then
following procedure. remove the shift fork with the reverse selector
together.
1. Remove the mainshaft speed sensor.
7. Remove the mainshaft sub-assembly (A) and
2. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts, countershaft sub-assembly (B) together.
transmission hanger, and connector bracket.
A
3. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) with
the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the
control shaft. B
NOTE: Be careful not to squeeze the end of the

control shaft tips together when turning the shaft. If
the tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty
signal or position due to the play between the
control shaft and the switch.
A
B
07HAC-PK40102
8. Remove the differential assembly.
4. Install the special tool over the mainshaft, then

remove the transmission housing.
NOTE: If the top arm of your housing puller is too

short, replace it with Housing Puller Arm, 205 mm
07SAC-P0Z0101.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-141

00/10/26 15:32:17 61S5N000_140_0142
Bearing Removal and Installation

Special Tools Required 2. Install the bearings in the direction shown.
• Driver 07949-3710001
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 3. Expand each snap ring with the snap ring pliers,
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm, 07746-0010600 and install the bearing part-way into the housing.
NOTE: Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
1. To remove the mainshaft bearing (A) and

countershaft bearing (B) from the transmission
housing, expand each snap ring with the snap ring
pliers, then push the bearing out.
NOTE: Do not remove the snap ring unless it’s

necessary to clean the grooves in the housing.
4. Release the pliers, then push the bearing down into

the housing until the snap ring snaps in place
around it.
5. After installing the bearings verify that the snap

rings (A) are seated in the bearing and housing
grooves, and that the ring end gaps (B) are correct.
B B: 0−7 mm
(0−0.28 in.)
14-142 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:18 61S5N000_140_0143
Reverse Idler Gear Removal and Installation

Removal Installation
1. Remove the two bolts securing the reverse idler 1. Install the reverse idler gear in the transmission
gear shaft holder, then remove the reverse idler housing.
gear shaft holder (A) and needle bearing (B).
2. Install the needle bearing (A) in the reverse idler

gear (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
2. Remove the reverse idler gear.
3. Install the reverse idler gear shaft holder (C) into

the transmission housing, then tighten the bolts.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-143

00/10/26 15:32:19 61S5N000_140_0144
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal

Exploded View
LOCK-UP 6 x 1.0 mm,

VALVE BODY 7 Bolts
6 x 1.0 mm,
ATF FEED PIPE, 1 Bolt
8 x 40 mm
LOCK-UP
SEPARATOR PLATE ATF FEED
PIPE, ATF FEED PIPE,
8 x 62 mm 8 x 145 mm
DOWEL PIN ATF STRAINER
REGULATOR 6 x 1.0 mm,
VALVE BODY 1 Bolt
DOWEL PIN TORQUE CONVERTER

CHECK VALVE SPRING
COOLER RELIEF
VALVE SPRING CONTROL
SHAFT
COOLER STATOR SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 6 x 1.0 mm,
WASHER 8 Bolts
O-RING
Replace. DETENT
DETENT ARM
TORQUE CONVERTER ARM SERVO BODY
CHECK VALVE SHAFT
SERVO
ATF FEED PIPE, SEPARATOR
8 x 138.8 mm PLATE
6 x 1.0 mm,
STATOR SHAFT 3 Bolts
STOP
ATF FEED PIPE, SECONDARY
8 x 112 mm VALVE BODY
6 x 1.0 mm,
5 Bolts STOP SHAFT
BRACKET
MAIN VALVE BODY
ATF PUMP DRIVEN DOWEL PIN

GEAR SHAFT 8 x 40 mm
ATF FEED
PIPE,
ATF PUMP 8 x 118 mm 8 x 105.8 mm
DRIVEN GEAR SECONDARY
8 x 192.5 mm SEPARATOR
PLATE
ATF PUMP
MAIN SEPARATOR DRIVE GEAR
PLATE
DOWEL PIN
14-144 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:19 61S5N000_140_0145
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 14. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (B)
following procedure: thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it
is in good condition and that the inlet opening is
1. Remove the ATF feed pipes from the main valve not clogged.
body, secondary valve body, and servo body.
2. Remove the ATF strainer (one bolt).

B
3. Remove the servo body (eight bolts), then remove
the separator plate.
4. Remove the secondary valve body (three bolts),

and stop shaft bracket, then remove the separator
plate and dowel pins (two).
5. Remove the lock-up valve body (seven bolts), then

remove the separator plate and dowel pins (two). A
6. Remove the cooler relief valve spring and cooler

relief valve, if necessary. 15. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through
the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or
7. Remove the regulator valve body (one bolt) and damaged.
dowel pins (two).
16. Clean the filter part on the 105.8 mm ATF feed pipe
8. Remove the torque converter check valve and and the 138.8 mm pipe thoroughly with
spring. compressed air.
9. Remove the stator shaft and stator shaft stop. 17. Check that the filters are not clogged, and that the
opening is not damaged. Replace the feed pipe if
10. Unhook the detent spring from the detent arm, then the filter is clogged or damaged.
remove the detent arm shaft, washers, detent arm,
and control shaft.
11. Remove the main valve body (five bolts).
12. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft, then

remove the ATF pump gears.
13. Remove the main separator plate and dowel pins

(two).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-145

00/10/26 15:32:19 61S5N000_140_0146
Valve Body
Valve Body Repair

NOTE: This repair is only necessary if one or more of 5. Remove the ＃600 paper. Thoroughly wash the
the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with
bores. Use this procedure to free the valves. compressed air.
1. Soak a sheet of ＃600 abrasive paper in ATF for 6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It
about 30 minutes. should drop to the bottom of the bore under its
own weight. If not, repeat step 4, then retest. If the
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful
not to scratch the bore with the screwdriver.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-
soaked ＃600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it with compressed air.
4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF-soaked ＃600 paper and

insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve.
Twist the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits
the bore tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the
paper as you push it in and out.
NOTE: The valve body is aluminum and doesn’t

require much polishing to remove any burrs.
7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the

valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with
compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
lubricant.
14-146 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:20 61S5N000_140_0147
Valve Body Valve Installation

1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence

shown for the main valve body (see page 14-148),
regulator valve body (see page 14-151), secondary
valve body (see page 14-152), and servo body (see
page 14-153) and lock-up valve body (see page 14-
154). Refer to the following valve cap illustrations,
and install each valve cap so the end shown facing
up will be facing the outside of the valve body.
3. Install all the springs and seats. Insert the spring (A)
in the valve, then install the valve in the valve body
(B). Push the spring in with a screwdriver, then
install the spring seat (C).
C
A
B
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-147

00/10/26 15:32:20 61S5N000_140_0148
Valve Body
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all
passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls, it may magnetize the balls.
3. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-146).
4. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged.
5. Coat all parts with ATF during assembly.
6. Install the filter in the direction shown.
1-2 SHIFT VALVE

VALVE CAP
VALVE CAP CLIP
2ND ORIFICE CONTROL VALVE
SPRING SEAT
CPB VALVE
CHECK BALLS, 8
MODULATOR
VALVE
FILTER
Replace.
Install in this direction.
SPRING SEAT
RELIEF VALVE
MANUAL VALVE
MAIN VALVE BODY

Inspect for scoring and damage.
SERVO CONTROL VALVE
VALVE CAP
ROLLER
14-148 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:20 61S5N000_140_0149
Sectional View
SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
No. Spring Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)

Wire Dia. O.D. Free Length No. of Coils
Relief valve spring 1.1 (0.043) 8.6 (0.339) 37.1 (1.461) 13.4
Modulator valve spring 1.4 (0.055) 9.4 (0.370) 33.8 (1.331) 10.9
CPB valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 8.1 (0.319) 40.9 (1.610) 16.2
1-2 shift valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 7.6 (0.299) 41.3 (1.626) 16.3
2nd orifice control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 34.8 (1.370) 22.0
Servo control valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 8.1 (0.319) 52.1 (2.051) 20.8
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-149

00/10/26 15:32:21 61S5N000_140_0150
Valve Body
ATF Pump Inspection

1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B) 2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive
and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main gear (A) and driven gear (B).
valve body (D). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and
install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance:
and chamfered side facing up. Standard (New):
ATF Pump Drive Gear
A B 0.105−0.1325 mm (0.004−0.005 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear
0.035−0.0625 mm (0.0014−0.0025 in.)
3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure

C the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven
D gear (A) and the valve body (B) with a straight edge
(C) and a feeler gauge (D).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)

Clearance:
Standard (New):
0.03−0.06 mm (0.001−0.002 in.)
Service Limit:
0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
C B
14-150 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:21 61S5N000_140_0151
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

passages.
4. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded.
Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.
5. Reassembly is the reverse of the disassembly.
7. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the hole in the valve body, then press the spring cap into the valve
body, and tighten the stop bolt.
REGULATOR SPRING CAP
STOP BOLT
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
REGULATOR VALVE

LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
VALVE SLEEVE
COOLER RELIEF VALVE
VALVE CAP
TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK VALVE
ROLLER

Stator reaction spring 4.5 (0.177) 35.4 (1.394) 30.3 (1.193) 1.9
Regulator valve spring A 1.9 (0.075) 14.7 (0.579) 77.4 (3.047) 15.2
Regulator valve spring B 1.8 (0.071) 9.6 (0.378) 44.0 (1.732) 12.6
Cooler relief valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 8.4 (0.331) 33.8 (1.331) 8.2
Torque converter check valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 8.4 (0.331) 33.8 (1.331) 8.2
Lock-up control valve spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.0 (0.236) 38.4 (1.512) 30.3
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-151

00/10/26 15:32:22 61S5N000_140_0152
Valve Body
Secondary Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

passages.
2. Do not move the lock bolt for the CPC valve adjusting screw.
VALVE CAP
VALVE CAP
2-3 SHIFT VALVE

VALVE CAP CLIP
SECONDARY VALVE BODY

3-4 SHIFT VALVE
4TH EXHAUST VALVE
LOCK BOLT
Do not move.
SPRING SEAT
3-4 ORIFICE CONTROL VALVE
VALVE CAP
VALVE SLEEVE
ROLLER

4th exhaust valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 6.1 (0.240) 36.4 (1.433) 19.5
3-4 orifice control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 37.5 (1.476) 24.6
14-152 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:22 61S5N000_140_0153
Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

passages.
SERVO BODY
2ND ACCUMULATOR
PISTON
O-RING SERVO VALVE/
Replce. SHIFT FORK SHAFT
3RD ACCUMULATOR PISTON
SNAP RING
4TH ACCUMULATOR
PISTON 1ST ACCUMULATOR O-RING
PISTON SNAP RING Replace.

1st accumulator spring 2.1 (0.083) 16.0 (0.630) 89.1 (3.508) 16.2
4th accumulator spring A 2.6 (0.102) 17.0 (0.669) 88.4 (3.480) 14.2
4th accumulator spring B 2.3 (0.091) 10.2 (0.402) 51.6 (2.031) 13.8
3rd accumulator spring A 2.8 (0.110) 17.5 (0.689) 94.3 (3.713) 15.9
3rd accumulator spring B 2.1 (0.083) 31.0 (1.220) 38.2 (1.504) 2.6
2nd accumulator spring C 2.2 (0.087) 14.5 (0.571) 68.0 (2.677) 13.9
2nd accumulator spring A 2.4 (0.094) 29.0 (1.142) 39.0 (1.535) 2.9
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-153

00/10/26 15:32:22 61S5N000_140_0154
Valve Body
Lock-up Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

passages.

LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE VALVE CAP
ROLLER
LOCK-UP VALVE BODY

LOCK-UP TIMING VALVE
VALVE CAP
VALVE CAP CLIP

Lock-up shift valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 7.6 (0.299) 73.7 (2.902) 32.0
Lock-up timing valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 8.1 (0.319) 80.7 (3.177) 54.2
14-154 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:23 61S5N000_140_0155
Torque Converter Housing
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Install the new oil seal flush with the housing using
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25−40 mm special tools.
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
• Driver 07749-0010000 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal with the

special tool and a commercially available 3/8’’-16
slide hammer (A).
07746-0010600
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
2. Install the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in

the housing with the special tools.
07749-0010000
07746-0010500
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-155

00/10/26 15:32:23 61S5N000_140_0156
Torque Converter Housing
Countershaft Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required 2. Install the ATF guide plate (A).
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25−40 mm
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
• Driver 07749-0010000 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Remove the countershaft bearing with the special

tool and a commercially available 3/8’’-16 slide
hammer (A).
0−0.03 mm
(0−0.001 in.)
A
07746-0010500
3. Install the new countershaft bearing (B) in the

housing with the special tools.
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
14-156 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:24 61S5N000_140_0157
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Lubricate all parts with ATF during assembly.
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)

21 x 1.25 mm
79 N·m
Replace.
Left-hand threads
SNAP RING CONICAL SPRING

WASHER
THRUST WASHER Replace.
THRUST NEEDLE BEARING

O-RINGS
Replace.
4TH GEAR THRUST WASHER
NEEDLE BEARINGS THRUST NEEDLE

BEARING
NEEDLE BEARING
4TH GEAR COLLAR 1ST GEAR

2ND/4TH
CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT 1ST GEAR COLLAR
TRANSMISSION
O-RINGS HOUSING BEARING
Replace.
THRUST WASHER,
36.5 x 55 mm
Selective part
SEALING RINGS, THRUST NEEDLE BEARING

35 mm
2ND GEAR
SEALING RING,
29 mm NEEDLE BEARING
Install sealing ring

mating surface as THRUST NEEDLE BEARING
NEEDLE BEARING shown.
SET RING
2. Check the clearance of the 2nd gear.

3. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
4. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
5. Check shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and excessive wear.
6. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent O-ring damage.
7. Install the conical spring washer in the direction shown.
8. Inspect the condition of the sealing rings. If the sealing rings are worn, distorted, or damaged, replace them (see
page 14-159).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-157

00/10/26 15:32:24 61S5N000_140_0158
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft 2nd Gear Clearance Inspection

1. Remove the mainshaft transmission housing 3. Tighten the locknut (A) to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,
bearing (see page 14-142). 22 lbf·ft). The locknut has left-hand threads.
2. Assemble the thrust needle bearing (A), needle

bearing (B), 2nd gear (C), thrust needle bearing (D),
36.5 x 55 mm thrust washer (E), 2nd/4th clutch (F),
4th gear collar (G), thrust washer (H), snap ring (I),
transmission housing mainshaft bearing (J), 1st
gear collar (K), thrust washer (L), 1st clutch (M),
conical spring washer (N), and locknut (O) on the
mainshaft (P).
O
N
A
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
M
L 4. Hold the 2nd gear (A) against the 2nd clutch (B),
K then measure the clearance between the 2nd gear
J and 3rd gear (C) with a feeler gauge (D), in at least 3
I
places. Use the average as the actual clearance.
H
STANDARD: 0.05−0.13 mm (0.002−0.005 in.)
G
B
C A
F
C
D
B
E
A
P C
D B
14-158 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:24 61S5N000_140_0159
Mainshaft Sealing Rings

Replacement
5. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 36.5
x 55 mm thrust washer and measure its thickness.
The sealing rings on the mainshaft are synthetic resin
6. Select and install a new thrust washer, then with chamfered ends. Check the condition of the sealing
recheck. rings, and replace them only if they are worn, distorted,
or damaged.
THRUST WASHER, 36.5 x 55 mm
1. For a better fit, squeeze the sealing rings together
No. Part Number Thickness slightly before installing them.
1 90441-P4P-000 4.00 mm (0.157 in.)
2 90442-P4P-000 4.05 mm (0.159 in.)
3 90443-P4P-000 4.10 mm (0.161 in.)
4 90444-P4P-000 4.15 mm (0.163 in.)
5 90445-P4P-000 4.20 mm (0.165 in.)
6 90446-P4P-000 4.25 mm (0.167 in.)
7 90447-P4P-000 4.30 mm (0.169 in.)
8 90448-P4P-000 4.35 mm (0.171 in.)
9 90449-P4P-000 4.40 mm (0.173 in.)
10 90450-P4P-000 4.45 mm (0.175 in.)
7. After replacing the thrust washer, make sure the

clearance is within standard.
8. Disassemble the shaft and gears.

2. Apply ATF to the new sealing rings, then install
9. Reinstall the bearing in the transmission housing them on the mainshaft.
(see page 14-142).
3. After installing the sealing rings, verify the

following:
• The rings are fully seated in the groove.

• The ring are not twisted.
• The chamfered ends of the ring are properly
joined.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-159

00/10/26 15:32:25 61S5N000_140_0160
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Remove the locknut, and take off components down to the reverse selector hub.
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)

23 x 1.25 mm
79 N·m (8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft)→0→
REVERSE GEAR COLLAR 79 N·m (8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft)
Replace.
Left-hand threads
REVERSE GEAR CONICAL SPRING
WASHER
Replace.
NEEDLE BEARING PARK GEAR
REVERSE SELECTOR ONE-WAY CLUTCH
1ST GEAR
REVERSE SELECTOR
HUB
4TH GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
NEEDLE BEARING
1ST GEAR COLLAR

DISTANCE COLLAR,
28 mm
Selective part 2ND GEAR
THRUST NEEDLE TRANSMISSION HOUSING

BEARING COUNTERSHAFT BEARING
3RD GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
3RD GEAR COLLAR

COUNTERSHAFT SPLINED WASHER
3RD CLUTCH
O-RINGS
Replace.
2. Remove the reverse selector hub and 4th gear (see page 14-161).
3. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
4. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
5. Check shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and excessive wear.
6. Lubricate all parts with ATF during assembly.
7. Check the clearance of the 4th gear.
8. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent O-ring damage.
9. Install the reverse selector hub, reverse selector, one-way clutch, and conical spring washer in the direction
shown.
14-160 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:25 61S5N000_140_0161
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub Removal

Remove the reverse selector hub (A) and the 4th gear
(B) with a universal 2-jaw (or 3-jaw) puller (C). Place a
shaft protector (D) between the puller and countershaft
(E) to prevent countershaft damage.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-161

00/10/26 15:32:26 61S5N000_140_0162
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub Installation

Special Tools Required 4. Slide the reverse selector hub (A) over the
Driver 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 countershaft (B), then press it into place with the
special tool and a press.
1. Wrap the countershaft splines with tape to prevent
O-ring damage.
2. Install the new O-rings (A), then remove the tape on

the shaft splines. 07746-0030100
L
K
A
I
E
B
D
3. Install the 3rd clutch (B), splined washer (C), thrust

needle bearing (D), 3rd gear collar (E), needle
bearing (F), 3rd gear (G), thrust needle bearing (H),
2nd gear (I), 28 mm distance collar (J), needle
bearing (K), and 4th gear (L) on the countershaft
(M).
14-162 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:26 61S5N000_140_0163
Countershaft 4th Gear Clearance Inspection

Special Tools Required 4. Slide the reverse selector hub (A) over the
Driver 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 countershaft (B), then press it into place with the
special tool and a press.
1. Remove the countershaft transmission housing
bearing (see page 14-142).
2. Remove the O-rings from the countershaft.

07746-0030100
3. Install the 3rd clutch (A), splined washer (B), thrust
needle bearing (C), 3rd gear collar (D), needle
bearing (E), 3rd gear (F), thrust needle bearing (G),
2nd gear (H), 28 mm distance collar (I), needle
bearing (J), and 4th gear (K) on the countershaft (L).
A
H
B
G 5. Install the reverse gear collar (A), transmission

housing bearing (B), 1st gear collar (C), needle
F
bearing (D), 1st gear/one-way clutch/park gear (E),
E and conical spring washer (F) on the countershaft
sub-assembly (H).
D
G
C F
B E
A
D
B
L
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-163

00/10/26 15:32:27 61S5N000_140_0164
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft 4th Gear Clearance Inspection (cont’d)

6. Tighten the locknut (G) to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf· 8. If the clearance is out of standard, disassemble the
ft). The locknut has left-hand threads. countershaft. Remove the 28 mm distance collar,
and measure its length.
7. Measure the clearance between the 2nd gear (A)
and 28 mm distance collar (B) with a feeler gauge 9. Select and install a new distance collar, assemble
(C) in at least 3 places. Use the average as the the countershaft, then recheck.
actual clearance.
DISTANCE COLLAR, 28 mm
STANDARD: 0.10−0.18 mm (0.004−0.007 in.)
No. Part Number Thickness
A B
1 90503-PC9-000 39.00 mm (1.535 in.)
2 90504-PC9-000 39.10 mm (1.539 in.)
3 90505-PC9-000 39.20 mm (1.543 in.)
4 90507-PC9-000 39.30 mm (1.547 in.)
5 90508-PC9-000 39.05 mm (1.537 in.)
6 90509-PC9-000 39.15 mm (1.541 in.)
7 90510-PC9-000 39.25 mm (1.545 in.)
8 90511-PC9-000 38.90 mm (1.531 in.)
9 90512-PC9-000 38.95 mm (1.533 in.)
C
10. After replacing the distance collar, make sure the
clearance is within standard.
11. Disassemble the shaft and gears.
12. Reinstall the bearing in the transmission housing

(see page 14-142).
14-164 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:27 61S5N000_140_0165
1st Gear One-way Clutch Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Separate countershaft 1st gear (A) from the park 3. Inspect the park gear (A) and 1st gear (B) for wear
gear (B) by turning the park gear in the direction and scoring. Inspect the one-way clutch (C) for
shown. damage and faulty movement.
B A
2. Pry the one-way clutch (A) up with tip of a B

screwdriver (B), and remove the one-way clutch
from the countershaft 1st gear (C).
4. Assemble the 1st gear, one-way clutch, and park

gear.
5. Hold the 1st gear (A), and turn the park gear (B) in
the direction shown to be sure it turns freely.
Also make sure the park gear does not turn in the
opposite direction.
A
B
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-165

00/10/26 15:32:27 61S5N000_140_0166
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Install the special tool on the clutch assembly.
• Clutch spring compressor attachment
07LAE-PX40100 07LAE-PX40100
07HAE-PL50101
• Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A
1. Remove the snap ring (A), then remove the clutch

end plate, the clutch discs, and the plates with a
screwdriver (B).
B
07LAE-PX40100 or
07HAE-PL50100
07GAE-PG40200 or
07GAE-PG4020A
4. Be sure the special tool (A) is adjusted to have full

contact with the spring retainer (B) on the clutches.
2. Remove the wave spring from the 1st, 3rd, and 4th
clutches.
14-166 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:28 61S5N000_140_0167
5. If either end of the special tool is set over an area of 7. Remove the snap ring (A). Then remove the special
the spring retainer which is unsupported by the tools (B), spring retainer (C), and return spring.
return spring, the retainer may be damaged.
A C
8. Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum (A), and

6. Compress the spring until the snap ring can be apply air pressure to the fluid passage to remove
removed. the piston (B). Place a finger tip on the other end
while applying air pressure.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-167

00/10/26 15:32:28 61S5N000_140_0168
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Inspection
1ST CLUTCH 3RD CLUTCH
SNAP RING
1ST CLUTCH DRUM
CLUTCH END PLATE
O-RING
Replace. CLUTCH DISCS, 3
Standard thickness:
1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
CLUTCH PISTON
CLUTCH PLATES, 3
Standard thickness:
2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
WAVE SPRING
RETURN SPRING
SPRING RETAINER
SNAP RING
SNAP RING SPRING RETAINER
RETURN SPRING
CLUTCH PLATES, 3
Standard thickness:
1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
WAVE SPRING
CLUTCH DISCS, 3
Standard thickness:
1.94mm(0.076 in.)
CLUTCH PISTON
O-RING
Replace.
CLUTCH END PLATE
SNAP RING 3RD CLUTCH DRUM
14-168 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:29 61S5N000_140_0169
2ND/4TH CLUTCH
SNAP RING
CLUTCH PLATES, 3
Standard thickness:
2.0 mm (0.079 in.) CLUTCH END PLATE
CLUTCH DISCS, 3
O-RING Standard thickness:
Replace. 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
CLUTCH PISTON
RETURN SPRING
SPRING RETAINER SNAP RING
SNAP RING SPRING RETAINER
CLUTCH PLATES, 3
Standard thickness: RETURN SPRING
2.0 mm (0.079 in.) CLUTCH DISCS, 3
Standard thickness:
1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
WAVE SPRING
CLUTCH PISTON
O-RING
Replace.
CLUTCH END PLATE
4TH CLUTCH DRUM
SNAP RING
2ND CLUTCH DRUM
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-169

00/10/26 15:32:29 61S5N000_140_0170
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly
Special Tools Required 2. Install new O-rings (A) on the piston (B).
07LAE-PX40100 A
A
07HAE-PL50101
• Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A
B
NOTE:
• Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor
cleaner, and dry them with compressed air.
• Blow out all passages.
• Apply ATF to all parts before assembly.
1. Inspect the check valve (A); if it’s loose, replace the

piston (B).
A
3. Install the piston (A) in the clutch drum (B). Apply

pressure and rotate to ensure proper seating.
Lubricate the piston O-ring with ATF before
installing.
B NOTE: Do not pinch the O-ring by installing the

piston with too much force.
A B
14-170 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:30 61S5N000_140_0171
4. Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B), 6. Be sure the special tool (A) is adjusted to have full
and position the snap ring (C) on the retainer. contact with the spring retainer (B) on the clutches.
C
B A
7. If either end of the special tool is set over an area of

the spring retainer which is unsupported by the
return spring, the retainer may be damaged.
5. Install the special tools on the clutch assembly.
07LAE-PX40100
07LAE-PX40100 or
07HAE-PL50101
07GAE-PG40200 or
07GAE-PG4020A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-171

00/10/26 15:32:30 61S5N000_140_0172
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly (cont’d)

8. Compress the return spring. 10. Remove the special tools.
11. Install the wave spring in the 1st, 3rd, and 4th
clutches.
9. Install the snap ring (A).
12. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a

minimum of 30 minutes. Before installing the
plates and discs, make sure the inside of the clutch
drum is free of dirt and other foreign matter.
13. Starting with a clutch plate, alternately install the

clutch plates and discs. Install the clutch end plate
(A) with the flat side toward the disc (B).
A
14-172 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:30 61S5N000_140_0173
14. Install the snap ring (A) with a screwdriver (B). 16. If the clearance is not within the service limits,
B
select a new clutch end plate from the following
table.
A NOTE: If the thickest clutch end plate is installed,

but the clearance is still over the standard, replace
the clutch discs and clutch plates.
15. Measure the clearance between the clutch end

plate (A) and top disc (B) with a dial indicator (C).
Zero the dial indicator with the clutch end plate
lowered, and lift it up to the snap ring (D). The
distance that the clutch end plate moves is the
clearance between the clutch end plate and top disc.
CLUTCH END PLATES
NOTE: Take measurements in at least 3 places, and
use the average as the actual clearance. Mark Part Number Thickness
1 22551-P4R-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
Clutch End Plate-to-Top Disc Clearance: 2 22552-P4R-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
Service Limit 3 22553-P4R-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
1st Clutch: 0.65−0.85 mm (0.026−0.033 in.) 4 22554-P4R-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
2nd Clutch: 0.65−0.85 mm (0.026−0.033 in.) 5 22555-P4R-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
3rd Clutch: 0.4−0.6 mm (0.016−0.024 in.) 6 22556-P4R-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
4th Clutch: 0.4−0.6 mm (0.016−0.024 in.) 7 22557-P4R-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
C
8 22558-P4R-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22559-P4R-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
D
A
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-173

00/10/26 15:32:32 61S5N000_140_0174
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Installation

Exploded View
LOCK-UP 6 x 1.0 mm,

VALVE BODY 7 Bolts
6 x 1.0 mm,
ATF FEED PIPE, 1 Bolt
8 x 40 mm
LOCK-UP
SEPARATOR PLATE ATF FEED
PIPE, ATF FEED PIPE,
8 x 62 mm 8 x 145 mm
DOWEL PIN ATF STRAINER
REGULATOR 6 x 1.0 mm,
VALVE BODY 1 Bolt
DOWEL PIN TORQUE CONVERTER

CHECK VALVE SPRING
COOLER RELIEF
VALVE SPRING CONTROL
SHAFT
COOLER STATOR SHAFT
RELIEF VALVE 6 x 1.0 mm,
WASHER 8 Bolts
O-RING
Replace. DETENT
DETENT ARM
TORQUE CONVERTER ARM SERVO BODY
CHECK VALVE SHAFT
SERVO
ATF FEED PIPE, SEPARATOR
8 x 138.8 mm PLATE
6 x 1.0 mm,
STATOR SHAFT 3 Bolts
STOP
ATF FEED PIPE, SECONDARY
8 x 112 mm VALVE BODY
6 x 1.0 mm,
5 Bolts STOP SHAFT
BRACKET
MAIN VALVE BODY
ATF PUMP DRIVEN DOWEL PIN

GEAR SHAFT 8 x 40 mm
ATF FEED
PIPE,
ATF PUMP 8 x 118 mm 8 x 105.8 mm
DRIVEN GEAR SECONDARY
8 x 192.5 mm SEPARATOR
PLATE
ATF PUMP
MAIN SEPARATOR DRIVE GEAR
PLATE
DOWEL PIN
14-174 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:32 61S5N000_140_0175
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 4. Install the two dowel pins and the secondary
following procedure. separator plate on the main valve body, then install
the secondary valve body. Do not install the bolts
1. Install the suction pipe collar in the torque on the secondary valve body (three bolts).
converter housing, if necessary.
5. Install the control shaft (A) in the housing along
2. Install the main separator plate (A) and two dowel with the manual valve (B).
pins on the torque converter housing. Then install
the ATF pump drive gear (B), driven gear (C), and H
ATF pump driven gear shaft (D). Install the ATF
pump driven gear with its grooved and chamfered
side facing down.
E
B
D A
E
G
C
C
A
3. Install the main valve body, and loosely tighten the

five bolts. Make sure the ATF pump drive gear (A)
rotates smoothly in the normal operating direction, F B
and the ATF pump driven gear shaft (B) moves
smoothly in the axial and normal operating 6. Install the detent arm (C) and arm shaft (D) with the
direction. washers (E) in the main valve body (F), then hook
the detent arm spring (G) to the detent arm.
7. Install the servo body separator plate (H) on the

secondary valve body (I), then install the servo
body (eight bolts).
8. Install the ATF strainer (one bolt).
A
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-175

00/10/26 15:32:32 61S5N000_140_0176
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Installation (cont’d)

9. Tighten the five bolts on the main valve body to
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft).
10. Make sure the ATF pump drive gear and ATF pump
driven gear shaft move smoothly. If they don’t
move smoothly, disassemble the valve bodies, and
loosen the main valve body bolts.
Realign the ATF pump driven gear shaft,
reassemble the valve bodies, and retighten the
bolts to the specified torque, then recheck.
Failure to align the ATF pump driven gear shaft
correctly will result in a seized ATF pump drive
gear or ATF pump driven gear shaft.
11. Install the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.
12. Install the three bolts and stop shaft bracket on the
secondary valve body.
13. Install the torque converter check valve and valve

spring, and cooler relief valve and valve spring in
the regulator valve body, then install the regulator
valve body with two dowel pins on the main valve
body (one bolt).
14. Install the lock-up separator plate and two dowel

pins on the regulator valve body.
15. Install the lock-up valve body (seven bolts).
16. Install the four ATF feed pipes in the servo body.
17. Install the three ATF feed pipes in the secondary

valve body; install the 105.8 mm feed pipe with its
filter side away from the secondary valve body.
18. Install the two ATF feed pipes in the main valve
body; install the 138.8 mm feed pipe with its filter
side away from the main valve body.
14-176 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:34 61S5N000_140_0177
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation

Exploded View
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
MOUNTING BOLT
10 x 1.25 mm
TRANSMISSION 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
HANGER
TRANSMISSON HOUSING
REVERSE GEAR
COLLAR
6 x 1.0 mm COUNTERSHAFT
12 N·m REVERSE GEAR 6 x 1.0 mm
(1.2 kgf·m, 14 N·m
8.7 lbf·ft) (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
NEEDLE
MAINSHAFT BEARING
SPEED SENSOR
LOCK
WASHER
DOWEL Replace.
PIN
REVERSE
SELECTOR
REVERSE
SHIFT
CONNECTOR FORK
BRACKET
O-RING
Replace.
DOWEL
PINS
MAINSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
TRANSMISSION COUNTERSHAFT
HOUSING GASKET SUB-ASSEMBLY
Replace.
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-177

00/10/26 15:32:34 61S5N000_140_0178
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation (cont’d)

NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 5. Turn the shift fork shaft (A) so the large chamfered
following procedure. hole is facing the fork bolt hole. Then install the
shift fork (B) and reverse selector together on the
1. Install the reverse idler gear in the transmission shift fork shaft and countershaft.
housing (see page 14-143). Secure the shift fork to the shift fork shaft with the
lock bolt (C) and a new lock washer (D), then bend
2. Assemble the mainshaft sub-assembly (see page the lock washer against the bolt head.
14-157) and countershaft sub-assembly (see page
14-160). B
3. Install the differential assembly in the torque

converter housing.
D
4. Install the mainshaft sub-assembly (A) and
countershaft sub-assembly (B) together in the
torque converter housing.
B C
6 x 1.0 mm
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m,
10 lbf·ft)
A
6. Install the countershaft reverse gear, needle

bearing, and countershaft reverse gear collar on
the countershaft.
14-178 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:35 61S5N000_140_0179
7. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) with 8. Install the three dowel pins and a new gasket on the
the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the torque converter housing.
control shaft.
9. Place the transmission housing on the torque
NOTE: Be careful not to squeeze the end of the converter housing. Do not install the mainshaft
control shaft tips together when turning the shaft. If speed sensor before installing the transmission
the tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty housing on the torque converter housing.
control shaft and the switch. 10. Install the housing bolts along with the
transmission hanger (A) and connector bracket (B),
tighten the bolts in two or more steps in the
sequence shown to 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft).
A
C
A B
B
11. Install the mainshaft speed sensor with the new

O-ring.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-179

00/10/26 15:32:35 61S5N000_140_0180
End Cover, 1st Gears, and 1st Clutch Installation

Special Tools Required 2. Lubricate the following parts with ATF:
Mainshaft Holder 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100
• Splines of the countershaft and park gear.
1. Install the park lever (A) and park lever stop (B) on • Threads of the countershaft and old locknut.
the control shaft (C), then install the lock bolt (D) • Old conical spring washer, and areas where the
with a new lock washer (E). Do not bend the lock park gear contacts the conical spring washer.
tab of the lock washer until step 19.
D 3. Install the countershaft 1st gear collar (A), needle
6 x 1.0 mm E bearing (B), and countershaft 1st gear (C) on the
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
countershaft (D).
K J
F
A
I
C
B
H
B
A G
4. Install the one-way clutch (E) in the direction shown

in the countershaft 1st gear.
5. Align the park gear splines with those on the

countershaft, then push the park gear (F) onto the
countershaft by hand.
6. Install the park pawl shaft (G), pawl shaft collar (H),
park pawl spring (I), park pawl (J), and stop shaft
(K) on the transmission housing, then engage the
park pawl with the park gear.
14-180 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:36 61S5N000_140_0181
7. Install the old conical spring washer (A) and old 9. Install the mainshaft 1st gear collar (A), mainshaft
locknut (B) on the countershaft (C). Tighten the old 1st gear (B), needle bearing (C), thrust needle
locknut to 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft), then bearing (D), and thrust washer (E) on the mainshaft
remove the old locknut and conical spring washer. (F).
NOTE: H
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
not use an impact wrench.
• Countershaft locknut has left-hand threads. G
E
B A
D
8. Install the special tool onto the mainshaft.

F
10. Wrap the mainshaft splines with tape to prevent

O-ring damage. Install new O-rings (G) in the
mainshaft grooves, then remove the tape.
11. Install the 1st clutch assembly (H) on the mainshaft.
07GAB-PF50101 or
07GAB-PF50100
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-181

00/10/26 15:32:36 61S5N000_140_0182
End Cover, 1st Gears, and 1st Clutch Installation (cont’d)

12. Lubricate the threads of both shafts, the new 16. Stake both locknuts into the shafts with a 3.5 mm
locknuts, and the new conical spring washers with punch.
ATF.
13. Install the new conical spring washers (A) in the

direction shown, and install the new mainshaft
locknut (B) and the new countershaft locknut. (C).
B
14. Tighten the countershaft locknut to 103 N·m (10.5

kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft), and tighten the mainshaft locknut 17. Set the park lever in position, then verify that the
to 78 N·m (8.0 kgf·m, 58 lbf·ft). park pawl (A) engages the park gear (B).
NOTE: B
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknuts.
Do not use an impact wrench.
• Countershaft and mainshaft locknuts have left-
hand threads.
15. Remove the special tool from the mainshaft.

C
A
D E
F
6 x 1.0mm
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m,
G 10 lbf·ft)
18. If the park pawl does not engage fully, check the
distance (C) between the pawl shaft (D) and the
park level roller pin (E) (see page 14-139).
19. Tighten the lock bolt (F), and bend the lock tab of
the lock washer (G) against the bolt head.
14-182 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:37 61S5N000_140_0183
20. Install the end cover (A) with the two dowel pins, 22. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the
new O-rings, new gasket, and connector bracket (B). neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission
Tighten the 12 bolts to 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft). range switch, then put a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) feeler
gauge blade (C) in the cutouts to hold it in the
A position.
NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade or

B equivalent to hold the switch in the position.
21. Set the control shaft (A) to position by turning it.

A
NOTE: Be careful not to squeeze the end of the C
signal or position due to the play between the 23. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on
control shaft and the switch. the control shaft (B) with holding the position
with the 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) blade (C).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-183

00/10/26 15:32:37 61S5N000_140_0184
End Cover, 1st Gears, and 1st Clutch Installation (cont’d)

24. Tighten the bolts on the transmission range switch 27. Install the filter/gasket (A) in A/T clutch pressure
while you continue to hold the position. control solenoid valve body groove, then install the
Do not move the transmission range switch when A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B
tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge. (B), if it was removed. Do not pinch the filter/gasket.
6 x 1.0 mm
6 x 1.0 mm 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft) B
25. Connect the switch harness connector securely,

then secure the switch harness (A) with the clamps
(B).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
28. Install the ATF cooler lines and new sealing
washers. Tighten the line fittings to 28 N·m
(2.9 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft).
29. Install the ATF dipstick.

B C
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7 lbf·ft)
26. Install the transmission range switch cover (C).
14-184 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:39 61S5N000_140_0185
A/T Differential
Component Location Index Backlash Inspection

1. Place the differential assembly on V-blocks (A), and
SET RING, 80 mm
Selection, page 14-189 install both axles.
C
B
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

Replacement,
page 14-187
CARRIER BEARING
B
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection,
page 14-185
Replacement, page 14-186 A
ROLLER, 2. Check the backlash of the pinion gears (B) with a

5 x 10 mm
dial indicator (C).
SPEEDOMETER
DRIVE GEAR STANDARD: 0.05−0.15 mm (0.002−0.006 in.)
3. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the

differential carrier.
SNAP RING
CARRIER BEARING
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-185

00/10/26 15:32:39 61S5N000_140_0186
A/T Differential
Differential Carrier Replacement

1. Remove the snap ring (A) from the differential 4. Install the final driven gear (A) on the new
assembly (B). differential carrier (B) with the chamfered side on
the inner bore facing the differential carrier.
10 x 1.0 mm
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft)
2. Remove the 5 x 10 mm roller (A) and the

speedometer drive gear (B).
B
A B
5. Tighten the bolts to 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft)

in a crisscross pattern.
6. Install the speedometer drive gear (A) with its

chamfered side facing the carrier. Align the cutout
on the bore of the speedometer drive gear with the
5 x 10 mm roller hole, then install the 5 x 10 mm
roller.
B C
3. Remove final driven gear bolts, then separate the A

final driven gear and the differential carrier. The
final driven gear bolts have left-hand threads.
7. Align the hooked end (B) of the snap ring (C) with
the spring pin (D) in the pinion shaft (E), then install
the snap ring in the differential carrier groove.
14-186 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:40 61S5N000_140_0187
Final Driven Gear Replacement Carrier Bearing Replacement

1. Remove the final driven gear from the differential Special Tools Required
carrier. The final driven gear bolts have left-hand Driver 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
threads.
1. Remove the bearings (A) with a commercially
10 x 1.0 mm available bearing puller (B) and stepper adapter (C).
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m,
75.9 lbf·ft)
A B
2. Install the new bearings with the special tool and a

press. Press the bearing on until it bottoms.
07746-0030100
2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfered side
on the inner bore (A) facing the differential carrier.
3. Tighten the bolts to 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 lbf·ft)

in a crisscross pattern.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-187

00/10/26 15:32:40 61S5N000_140_0188
A/T Differential
Oil Seal Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Install the oil seal (A) in the transmission housing
• Driver 07749-0010000 with the special tools.
• Driver Attachment 07NAD-PX40100
• Driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
1. Remove the oil seal (A) from the transmission 07749-0010000

housing (B).
07NAD-PX40100
A
A
4. Install the oil seal (A) in the torque converter
housing with the special tools.
2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the torque converter
housing (B).
07749-0010000
07JAD-PH80101
B
A
14-188 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:32:41 61S5N000_140_0189
Carrier Bearing Side Clearance Inspection

Special Tools Required 3. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft with the
Driver 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 transmission housing groove (B) by turning the
control shaft (C).
1. Install the 80 mm set ring (A) in the transmission
housing (B). NOTE: Be careful not to squeeze the end of the
control shaft and the switch.
4. Install the three dowel pins (D) and the gasket (E)
on the torque converter housing (F).
10 x 1.25 mm
A 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, B
33 lbf·ft) A C
B
G
2. Install the differential assembly (A) in the torque
converter housing (B) using the special tool.
I
D
07746-0030100
A D
B
D F
5. Place the transmission housing (G) on the torque

converter housing.
6. Install the housing bolts along with the

transmission hanger (H) and connector bracket (I).
Tighten the bolts in two or more steps to 44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) in a crisscross pattern.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 14-189

00/10/26 15:32:42 61S5N000_140_0190
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Side Clearance Inspection (cont’d)

7. Measure the clearance between the 80 mm set ring
and carrier bearing outer race with a feeler gauge.
STANDARD: 0−0.15 mm (0−0.006 in.)
8. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the

80 mm set ring, and measure its thickness.
9. Select and install a new set ring, then recheck the

clearance and make sure it is within the standard.
SET RING, 80 mm
No. Part Number Thickness

1 90414-689-000 2.50 mm (0.098 in.)
2 90415-689-000 2.60 mm (0.102 in.)
3 90416-689-000 2.70 mm (0.106 in.)
4 90417-689-000 2.80 mm (0.110 in.)
5 90418-689-000 2.90 mm (0.114 in.)
6 90419-PH8-000 3.00 mm (0.118 in.)
14-190 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:47:06 61S5N000_160_0001
Transaxle
Driveline/Axle
Special Tools ................................................................. 16-2
Driveshaft Inspection ................................................... 16-3
Driveshafts Removal .................................................... 16-3
Driveshafts Disassembly ............................................. 16-5
Driveshafts Reassembly .............................................. 16-9
Driveshafts Installation ................................................ 16-17
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 15:47:06 61S5N000_160_0002
Driveline/Axle
Special Tools
07MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
07XAC-001010A Threaded Adapter, 22 x 1.5 mm 1

00/10/26 15:47:06 61S5N000_160_0003
Driveshaft Inspection Driveshafts Removal

1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot Special Tool Required
(B) on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage, leaking Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200
grease, and loose boot bands (D). If any damage is
found, replace the boot and boot bands. 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.
C 2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with

B safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
E A
E 3. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheels.
A
D
2. Turn the driveshaft by hand, and make sure the

splines (E) and joint are not excessively loose.
3. Make sure the driveshaft is not twisted or cracked; B

if it is, replace it.
4. Lift up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B),
then remove the nut.
5. Drain the MTF (see page 13-3) or the ATF (see page
14-100).
6. Hold the stabilizer ball joint pin (A) with a hex

wrench (B), and remove the flange nut (C).
Separate the front stabilizer link (D) from the lower
arm.
D
C A
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:47:07 61S5N000_160_0005
Driveshafts Disassembly
Special Tools Required Double Loop Type
• Threaded adapter, 22 x 1.5 mm 07XAC-001010A
• Slide hammer, commercially available D
• Boot band pincers, commercially available
C
Inboard Joint Side:
1. Remove the set ring from the inboard joint.
Low Profile Type
2. Remove the boot bands. Take care not to damage

the boot and dynamic damper.
• If the boot band is a welded type (A), cut the boot F

band (B).
• If the boot band is a double loop type (C), lift up
the band bend (D), and push it into the clip (E).
• If the boot band is a low profile type (G), pinch G
the boot band using a commercially available
boot band pincers (F). Ear Clamp Type
• If the boot band is an ear clamp type (H), lift up
I
the three tabs (I) with a screwdriver.
Welded Type
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:47:07 61S5N000_160_0006
Driveline/Axle
Driveshafts Disassembly (cont’d)

3. Make a mark (A) on each roller (B) and inboard joint 4. Make a mark (A) on the rollers (B) and spider (C) to
(C) to identify the locations of rollers and grooves identify the locations of rollers on the spider, then
in the inboard joint. Then remove the inboard joint remove the rollers.
on the shop towel (D). Be careful not to drop the
rollers when separating them from the inboard
B
joint.
C
D C
D
A
A
5. Remove the circlip (D).
6. Mark the spider (C) and driveshaft (E) to identify the

position of the spider on the shaft.
7. Remove the spider (C).

00/10/26 15:47:08 61S5N000_160_0007
8. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape Outboard Joint Side:
(A) to prevent damage to the boot and dynamic
damper. 1. Remove the boot bands. Take care not to damage
the boot and dynamic damper.
A
If the boot band is an ear clamp type (A), lift up the
three tabs (B) with a screwdriver.
Ear Clamp Type
9. Remove the inboard boot and dynamic damper.

Take care not to damage them.
A
10. Remove the vinyl tape.
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) to the inboard joint side.

Take care not to damage the boot.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:47:08 61S5N000_160_0008
Driveline/Axle
Driveshafts Disassembly (cont’d)

3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and 8. Remove the stop ring from the driveshaft.
the outboard joint inner race.
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same

position of the outboard joint end (C).
B
A
C
9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape

(A) to prevent damage to the boot.
5. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise.
07XAC-001010A
B
A
10. Remove the outboard boot. Take care not to
damage the boot.
6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the special 11. Remove the vinyl tape.
tool and a commercially available 5/8’’ x 18 slide
hammer (B).
7. Remove the driveshaft from the vise.

00/10/26 15:47:09 61S5N000_160_0009
Driveshafts Reassembly
Exploded View
(Right driveshaft)
INBOARD JOINT
CIRCLIP
ROLLER
DOUBLE LOOP BAND
Replace.
(Replacement parts only)
SET RING
Replace.
INBOARD BOOT
Pack cavity with grease.

SPIDER
Left driveshaft
EAR CLAMP BAND
LOW PROFILE BAND Replace.
Replace.
EAR CLAMP BAND
Replace.
DRIVESHAFT
DYNAMIC DAMPER
(Undirectional)
STOP RING
Replace.
Right driveshaft
EAR CLAMP BANDS
Replace.
OUTBOARD JOINT
OUTBOARD BOOT
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:47:09 61S5N000_160_0010
Driveline/Axle
Driveshafts Reassembly (cont’d)

Special Tools Required 3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning
• Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent commercially the marks (B) on the spider and the end of the
available driveshaft.
• Boot band pincers, KENT-MOORE J-35910 or
B
equivalent commercially available
• Boot band pincers, commercially available C

this procedure. A
Inboard Joint Side:
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent

damage to the inboard boot and dynamic damper.
A
4. Fit the circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove. Always

rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure it is fully
seated.
5. Fit the rollers (A) onto the spider (B) with their high
shoulders facing outward, and note these items:
B
• Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on
the spider by aligning the marks (C).
2. Install the dynamic damper ear clamp bands (B) • Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the
and inboard boot onto the driveshaft, then remove rollers from falling off.
the vinyl tape. Take care not to damage the inboard
C
boot and dynamic damper.
A B
16-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:47:09 61S5N000_160_0011
6. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease 8. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure
included in the new driveshaft set. below, then adjust the boots to halfway between
full compression and full extension. Make sure the
Grease quantity ends of the boots seat in the grooves of the
Inboard joint: 115−135 g (4.1−4.8 oz) driveshaft and joint.
Left driveshaft:
M/T: 788.2−793.2 mm (31.0−31.2 in.)
A/T: 791.7−796.7 mm (31.2−31.4 in.)
Right driveshaft:
501.2−506.2 mm (19.7−19.9 in.)
7. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft, and note

these items:
• Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by

aligning the marks (A) on the inboard joint and
the rollers.
• Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint points up 9. Position the dynamic damper as shown below.
to prevent it from falling off.
Left driveshaft: 261.5−265.5 mm (10.3−10.5 in.)
A
10. Install the boot bands.
• For the low profile type, go to step 11.

• For the double loop type, go to step 13.
• For the ear clamp type, go to step 21.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-11

00/10/26 15:47:10 61S5N000_160_0012
Driveline/Axle

11. Install the new low profile band (A) onto the boot 13. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the
(B) and dynamic damper, then hook the tab (C) of inboard joint, then install the band (A) onto the boot.
the band.
A
B
A
14. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.

C
15. Mark a position (A) on the band 10−14 mm

12. Close the hook portion of the band with a (0.4−0.6 in.) from the clip (B).
commercially available boot band pincers (A), then
hook the tabs (B) of the band.
B
A
A
16-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:47:10 61S5N000_160_0013
16. Thread the free end of the band through the nose 19. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess
section of the commercially available boot band free end of the band to leave a 5−10 mm (0.2−
tool KD-3191 or equvialent (A), and into the slot on 0.4 in.) tail protruding from the clip.
the winding mandrel (B).
A
C
20. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a

hammer.
NOTE:
• Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with
anything and the band does not move.
• Remove any grease remaining on the
17. Place a wrench on the winding mandrel of the boot surrounding surfaces
band tool, and tighten the band until the marked
A
spot (C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.
18. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of
the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the
clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
90°
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-13

00/10/26 15:47:10 61S5N000_160_0014
Driveline/Axle

21. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with a 23. Install the new set ring.
commercially available boot band pincers (B).
22. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion

of the band. If the clearance is not within the
standard, close the ear portion of the band further.
6.0 mm
(0.24 in.) MAX
3.0 mm (0.12 in.) MAX
16-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:47:11 61S5N000_160_0015
Outboard Joint Side: 4. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B)
until the stop ring (C) is close to the joint.
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damage to the outboard boot. A
B
C
A
Push.
B
Push.
2. Install the new ear clamp bands (B) and outboard

boot onto the driveshaft, then remove the vinyl 5. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the
tape. Take care not to damage the outboard boot. driveshaft and joint, and drop them from about
10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface. Do not use a
3. Install the new stop ring into the driveshaft hammer as excessive force may damage the
groove (A). driveshaft.
10 cm
(4 in.)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-15

00/10/26 15:47:11 61S5N000_160_0016
Driveline/Axle

6. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) with the 8. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and
outboard joint end (B). outboard joint (C).
A
B
B
7. Pack the outboard joint with the joint grease
A
included in the new joint boot set.
Grease quantity C
Outboard joint: 90−110 g (3.2−3.9 oz)
9. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with a

commercially available boot band pincers (B).
16-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:47:11 61S5N000_160_0017
Driveshafts Installation
10. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion 1. Install a new set ring onto the set ring groove of the
of the bands. If the clearance is not within the driveshaft.
standard, close the ear portion of the bands further.
6.0 mm (0.24 in.) MAX
3.0 mm (0.12 in.) MAX
2. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the

differential thoroughly with solvent or carburetor
cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Insert the
inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the
differential (B) until the set ring (C) locks in the
groove (D).
A C D
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 16-17

00/10/26 15:47:12 61S5N000_160_0018
Driveline/Axle
Driveshafts Installation (cont’d)

3. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front hub (B). 6. Connect the front stabilizer link (A) to the lower arm.
Hold the stabilizer link ball joint pin (B) with a hex
B
wrench (C), and tighten the new flange nut (D).
4. Install the knuckle (A) onto the lower arm (B). Be D

careful not to damage the ball joint boot (C). Wipe 10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m
off the grease before tightening the nut at the ball (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft) B
joint. Torque the castle nut (D) to the lower torque
specification, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut 7. Install a new spindle nut (A), then tighten the nut.
by loosening it. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
shoulder (B) against the driveshaft.
A
B
C
D
12 x 1.25 mm A
49−59 N·m 181 N·m 108 N·m
E (5.0−6.0 kgf·m, (18.5 kgf·m, (11.0 kgf·m,
36−43 lbf·ft) 134 lbf·ft) 80 lbf·ft)
5. Install the new lock pin (E) into the pin hole as 8. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
shown. front wheel, then install the front wheel with the
wheel nuts.
9. Refill the transmission with recommended MTF

(see page 13-3) or ATF (see page 14-100).
10. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if

necessary (see page 18-4).
16-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:48:53 61S5N000_170_0001
Steering
Power Steering
Special Tools ................................................................. 17-2
Symptom Troubleshooting ......................................... 17-6
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Check ....................... 17-7
Power Assist Check ...................................................... 17-7
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection ................. 17-8
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-0010001 ........... 17-9
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A ........... 17-10
Fluid Leakage Inspection ............................................. 17-11
Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment ....................... 17-12
Fluid Replacement ........................................................ 17-14
Hoses and Lines Replacement .................................... 17-15
Pump Replacement ...................................................... 17-16
Pump Overhaul ............................................................. 17-17
Steering Wheel Removal ............................................. 17-24
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly ................ 17-25
Steering Wheel Installation ......................................... 17-26
Steering Column Removal and Installation ............... 17-27
Steering Column Inspection ........................................ 17-29
Steering Lock Replacement ......................................... 17-30
Rack Guide Adjustment ............................................... 17-31
Steering Gearbox Removal ......................................... 17-32
Steering Gearbox Overhaul ......................................... 17-36
Steering Gearbox Installation ..................................... 17-54
Tie-Rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement ......................... 17-57
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 15:48:54 61S5N000_170_0002
Power Steering
Special Tools
07GAF-PH70100 Pilot Collar 1
07GAG-SD40100 Piston Seal Ring Guide 1
07GAG-SD40200 Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
07JGG-0010100 Belt Tension Gauge 1
07NAD-SR30101 Driver Handle 1
07NAD-SR30200 Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment 1
07NAG-SR30900 Valve Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
07QAD-P0A0100 Attachment, 42 mm 1
07RAK-S040111 P/S Joint Adaptor (Pump) 1
07RAK-S040122 P/S Joint Adaptor (Hose) 1
07YAG-S2X0100 Sleeve Seal Ring Guide 1
07ZAB-S5A0100 Pulley Holder 1
07ZAA-S5A0100 Locknut Wrench 1
07ZAG-S5A0200 Valve Seal Ring Guide 1
07ZAF-S5A0100 Driver, 27 mm 1
07406-0010001 P/S Pressure Gauge 1
07406-0010100 Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
07916-SA50001 Locknut Wrench, 40 mm 1
07974-6890801 Cylinder End Seal Slider 1
07ZAG-SA50100 Sleeve Seal Ring Sizing Tool, 36 mm 1

00/10/26 15:48:58 61S5N000_170_0003
DRIVER’S AIRBAG
Removal/Installation,
page 23-127
STEERING WHEEL
Steering Wheel Removal,
page 17-24
Steering Wheel Disassembly/
Reassembly, page 17-25
Steering Wheel Installation,
page 17-26
STEERING COLUMN
Steering Column Removal and Installation,
page 17-27
Steering Column/Tilt Lever Inspection/Adjustment,
page 17-29
Steering Lock Replacement, page 17-30
POWER STEERING GEARBOX

Rack Guide Adjustment, page 17-31
Steering Gearbox Removal, page 17-32
Steering Gearbox Overhaul, page 17-36
Steering Gearbox Installation, page 17-54
Tie Rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement, page 17-57
POWER STEERING FLUID RESERVOIR

Fluid Replacement, page 17-14
Hoses and Lines Replacement, page 17-15
Fluid Leakage Inspection, page 17-11
POWER STEERING PUMP

Pump Pressure Test, page 17-9
Pump Belt Inspection
and Adjustment, page 17-12
Pump Replacement, page 17-16
Pump Overhaul, page 17-17

00/10/26 15:48:58 61S5N000_170_0004
Power Steering

Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the order listed until you find the cause.
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for:

Hard Steering Troubleshoot the system (see page 17-6). • Modified suspension
• Tire sizes, tire
varieties, and air
pressure
Assist (excessively light Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-31). Front wheel alignment
steering at high speed) (see page 18-4).
Shock or vibration when the 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-31).
wheel is turned to full lock 2. Check the power steering pump belt for slippage and adjust as necessary (see
page 17-12).
3. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see page 17-36).
Steering wheel will not 1. Check cylinder lines for deformation.
return smoothly 2. Check wheel alignment (see page 18-4).
Uneven or rough steering 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-31).
2. Check power steering pump belt adjustment (see page 17-12).
3. Check low or erratic engine idle speed (see page 11-124).
4. Check for air in the power steering system due to low fluid level.
5. Check for low fluid level in the power steering reservoir due to possible leaks
in system.
Steering wheel kicks back 1. Check power steering pump belt adjustment (see page 17-12).
during wide turns 2. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure (see page 17-9).
Humming 1. Check when the noise occurs Pump pressure
• If the noise is heard 2−3 minutes after starting the engine in cold weather,
this is normal.
• If the noise is heard when the wheel is turn with the vehicle stopped, this is
normal due to the fluid pulsation.
2. Check for the high-pressure hose touching the sub-frame or body.
3. Check for automatic transmission converter noise. Remove the power
steering belt, and recheck.

00/10/26 15:48:59 61S5N000_170_0005
Rattle or chattering 1. Check for loose steering components (tie-rod and ball joints). Tighten or
(Rack rattle) replace as necessary.
2. Check the steering column shaft for wobbling. If the steering column wobbles,
replace the steering column assembly (see page 17-27).
3. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-31).
4. Check the power steering pump pulley.
• If the pulley is loose, tighten it (see step 44 on page 17-23).
• If the pump shaft is loose, replace the pump (see page 17-16).
Hissing • Check the fluid level. If low, fill the reservoir to the proper level and check for
leaks.
• Check the reservoir for leaks.
• Check for crushed inlet hose or loose hose clamp allowing air into the suction
side of the system.
• Check the power steering pump shaft oil seal for leaks.
Pump noise • Compare the pump noise at normal operating temperature to another like
vehicle (pump noise up to 2−3 minutes after starting the engine in cold weather
is normal).
• Remove and inspect the pump for wear and damage (see page 17-17).
Squeaking Check the power steering belt tension and adjust as necessary (see page 17-12).
Fluid Leaks from the • Fluid leaks from the top of the valve body unit:
steering gearbox Overhaul the valve body unit (see step 21 on page 17-41).
• Fluid leaks from the boot A:
Replace the valve oil seal on the pinion shaft.
• Replace the cylinder end seal on the gearbox side.
• Fluid leaks from the boot B: Replace the left cylinder end seal.
• Fluid leaks from pinion shaft near the lower steering joint bolt: Overhaul the
valve body unit.
Fluid leaks from line • Fluid leaks from the cylinder line connections (flare nuts):
Tighten the connection and retest.
• Fluid leaks from a damaged cylinder lines:
Replace the cylinder line.
• Fluid leaks from the pump outlet hose or return line fitting on the valve body
unit (flair nuts):
Tighten the fitting and retest. If it still leaks, replace the hose, the line, or valve
body unit as necessary.
Fluid leaks from pump • Fluid leaks from the front oil seal: Replace the front oil seal.
• Fluid leaks from the power steering pump housing:
Replace the leaking O-rings or seals (see page 17-16), and if necessary replace
the power steering pump (see page 17-17).
Fluid leaks from reservoir • Fluid leaks from around the reservoir cap: Fluid level is too high: drain the
reservoir to the proper level. Aerated fluid: check for an air leak on the inlet side
of pump.
• Fluid leaks from reservoir: Check for the reservoir for cracks and replace as
necessary.
Fluid leaks from pump • Check the fitting for loose bolts. If the bolts are tight, replace the fitting O-ring.
outlet hose (high-pressure) • Fluid leaks at the swagged joint: Replace the outlet hose.
Fluid leaks from pump inlet Check the hose for damage, deterioration, or improper assembly. Replace or
hose (low-pressure) repair as necessary.

00/10/26 15:48:59 61S5N000_170_0006
Power Steering
Symptom Troubleshooting
Hard Steering 6. Adjust the rack guide (see page 17-31), and retest.
1. Check the power assist (see page 17-7). Is the steering OK ?
Is the power assist more than 29 N ( 3.0 kgf , 6.6 YES−Repair is completed.
lbf )?
NO−Faulty gearbox.
YES−Go to step 2.
7. Check the feed and return lines between the pump
NO−Power assist is OK. and the gearbox for clogging and deformation.
2. Measure steady-state fluid pressure from the pump Are the lines clogged or def ormed?
at idle with T/N 07406-0010001 (see page 17-9), or
T/N 07406-001000A (see page 17-10). YES−Repair or replace the lines.
Is the pressure 1,500 kPa ( 15 kgf / cm2 , 213 psi) or NO−Faulty valve body unit.
less?
8. Check the cylinder lines for deformation (see page
YES−Go to step 3. 17-11).
NO−Go to step 7. Are the lines def ormed?
3. Measure the pump relief pressure at idle with T/N YES−Replace the lines.
07406-0010001 (see page 17-9), or T/N 07406-
001000A (see page 17-10). NO−Go to step 9.
Is the pressure 7 ,600−8,300 kPa ( 7 8−85 kgf / cm2 , 9. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack
1,110−1,210 psi) or less? guide (too tight).
YES−Go to step 4. Is the rack shaf t bent or the rack guide adjusted
too tight?
NO−Faulty pump assembly.
YES−Replace the rack shaft or readjust the rack
4. With a spring scale, measure the power assist in guide.
both directions, to the left and to the right.
NO−Faulty valve body unit.
Are the two measurements within 2.9 N ( 0.3 kgf ,
0.66 lbf ) of each other?
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 8.
5. Measure the fluid pressure with both pressure

gauge valves open (if so equipped), while turning
the steering wheel fully to the left and fully to the
right.
Is the pressure 7 ,600−8,300 kPa ( 7 8−85 kgf / cm2 ,

1,110−1,210 psi) or less?
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Faulty gearbox.

00/10/26 15:48:59 61S5N000_170_0007
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Power Assist Check

Check
1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page 17-
14) and pump belt tension (see page 17-12).
1. Turn the front wheels to the straight ahead position.
2. Start the engine, let it idle, and turn the steering
2. Measure how far you can turn the steering wheel wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm up
left and light without moving the front wheels. the fluid.
• If the play is within the limit, the gearbox and 3. Attach a commercially available spring scale to the
linkages are OK. steering wheel. With the engine idling and the
• If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide vehicle on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as
(see page 17-31). If the play is still excessive after shown and read it as soon as the tires begin to turn.
rack guide adjustment, inspect the steering
linkage and gearbox (see page 17-8). • If the scale reads no more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6
lbf), the gearbox and pump are OK.
ROTATIONAL PLAY: 0−10 mm (0−0.39 in.) • If the scale reads more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 lbf),
check the gearbox and pump.

00/10/26 15:49:00 61S5N000_170_0008
Power Steering
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
BOOTS
Inspect for damage and deterioration.
STEERING COLUMN
Inspect for loose column
mounting nuts.
STEERING JOINTS
Check for loose joint bolts.
TIE-ROD END BALL JOINT

Inspect for faulty movement
STEERING GEARBOX and damage.
Inspect for loose mounting bolts.
GEARBOX MOUNTING CUSHIONS
Inspect for deterioration. TIE-ROD LOCKNUTS BALL JOINT BOOT
Check for loose locknut. Inspect for damage
and deterioration.

00/10/26 15:49:01 61S5N000_170_0009
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-0010001

Special Tools Required 5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).
• P/S joint adapter (pump) 07RAK-S040111
• P/S joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-S040122
• P/S pressure gauge 07406-0010001
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox.

A
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the B
pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts. Install
the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (B).
A 07RAK-S040122
6. Fully open the pressure control valve (B).
07406-0010001
8. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several

times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at
158°F (70°).
6 x 1.0 mm
11 N·m
(1.1 kgf·m, 8 lbf·ft) 9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the
engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition,
07RAK-S040111
the gauge should read at least 690−1,500 kPa (7−
15 kgf/cm2, 100−214 psi). If it reads high, check the
outlet hose or valve body unit (see Steering System
Troubleshooting).
B Raise the engine speed to 3,000 rpm, and measure
6 x 1.0 mm the fluid pressure. If the pump is in good condition,
11 N·m the gauge should read at least 290−1,100 kPa (3−
11 kgf/cm2, 43−156 psi). If it reads high, repair or
replace the pump.
3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S
pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose 10. Lower the engine speed and let it idle. Close the
(A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose). shut-off valve, then close the pressure control valve
gradually until the pressure gauge needle is stable.
4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint Read the pressure.
adapter (pump).
Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more than 5

seconds or the pump could be damaged by over-
heating.
11. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully.

If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should
read at least 7,600−8,300 kPa (78−85 kgf/cm2,
1,110−1,210 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the pump.

00/10/26 15:49:01 61S5N000_170_0010
Power Steering
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A

Special Tools Required 5. Open the pressure control valve (A) fully.
• P/S joint adapter (pump) 07RAK-S040111
• P/S joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-S040122 A
• P/S pressure gauge 07406-001000A
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox.

2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the

pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts. Install
the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (B).
A
07RAK-S040122 6. Start the engine and let it idle.
07406-001000A 7. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several

times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at
158°F (70°C).
8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the

engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition,
6 x 1.0 mm 15 kgf/cm2, 100−214 psi). If it reads high, check the
11 N·m
(1.1 kgf·m, 8 lbf·ft) outlet hose or valve body unit (see Steering System
Troubleshooting).
07RAK-S040111
Raise the engine speed to 3,000 rpm, and measure
the fluid pressure. If the pump is in good condition,
B
11 kgf/cm2, 43−156 psi). If it reads high, repair or
replace the pump.
6 x 1.0 mm
11 N·m 9. Lower the engine speed and let it idle. Close the
(1.1 kgf·m, 8 lbf·ft) pressure control valve gradually until the pressure
gauge needle is stable. Read the pressure.
3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S
pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose
(A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose). Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more
than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by
4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint over-heating.
adapter (pump).
10. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully.
If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should
read at least 7,600−8,300 kPa (78−85 kgf/cm2,
1,110−1,210 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the pump.
17-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:02 61S5N000_170_0011
Fluid Leakage Inspection
GEARBOX and VALVE BODY UNIT

Check for leaks at the mating surface
and flare nut connections.
HOSES and LINES

PUMP ASSEMBLY Inspect hoses for damage, leaks, interference and twisting.
Check for leaks at the pump Inspect fluid lines for damage, rusting and leakage.
seal, inlet and outlet fittings. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-11

00/10/26 15:49:02 61S5N000_170_0012
Power Steering
Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment

Special Tools Required Adjustment
• Belt tension gauge set, 07JGG-0010000
• Belt tension gauge, 07JGG-0010100 4. Loosen the power steering pump mounting nut (A)
and pump locknut (B).
C
Inspection
1. Remove the P/S reservoir from the bracket, and set

it aside.
2. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt, and

measure the tension of the belt. Follow the gauge
damaged, replace it.
NOTE: Remove the belt tension gauge carefully to B

avoid hitting the gauge reset lever. 24 N·m A
(2.4 kgf·m, 24 N·m
Tension:
Used Belt: 390−540 N (40−55 kgf, 88−121 lbf) 5. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to get the proper belt
New Belt: 740−880 N (75−90 kgf, 165−198 lbf) tension, then retighten the mounting nut and
locknut.
minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt 6. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel from
specification. lock-to-lock several times, then stop the engine and
recheck the tension of the belt.
07JGG-0010100,
07JGG-001010A, or
07TGG-001000A
17-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:03 61S5N000_170_0013
Deflection Method Adjustment
Inspection 3. Loosen the power steering pump mounting nut (A)

and pump locknut (B).
1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf) and measure
C
the deflection between the power steering pump
pulley (A) and the crankshaft pulley (B). If the belt is
worn or damaged, replace it.
Deflection:
Used Belt: 13.0−16.5 mm (0.51−0.65 in.)
New Belt: 9.0−11.0 mm (0.35−0.43 in.)

specification.
B
A 24 N·m A
(2.4 kgf·m, 24 N·m
4. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to get the proper belt

tension, then retighten the mounting nut and
locknut.
5. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel from

B lock-to-lock several times, then stop the engine and
recheck the tension of the belt.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-13

00/10/26 15:49:03 61S5N000_170_0014
Power Steering
Fluid Replacement
Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the 1. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose
recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Genuine (A) to drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill the
Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled
power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid fluid at once.
can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold
weather.
B
SYSTEM CAPACITY:
1.0 (1.06 US. qt, 0.88 lmp.qt) at disassembly
RESERVOIR CAPACITY:
0.4 (0.42 US. qt, 0.35 lmp.qt)
2. Connect a hose (B) of suitable diameter to the

disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a
suitable container.
3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the

steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times.
When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off
the engine. Discard the fluid.
4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir.
5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C).
6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the
steering from lock-to-lock several times to bleed air
from the system.
7. Recheck the fluid level and add more if necessary.

Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line.
17-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:04 61S5N000_170_0015
Hoses and Lines Replacement

Note these items during installation:
• Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or
adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown.
• Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary.
• Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.
ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP (A) HOSE CLAMP (B)
2.5−5.5 mm
(0.01−0.22 in.)
2.5−5.5 mm 2.0−4.0 mm
(0.01−0.22 in.) (0.08−0.16 in.)
POWER STEERING
CYLINDER LINE FLARE NUTS PRESSURE SWITCH RETURN LINE
17 N·m 12 N·m FLARE NUTS
(1.7 kgf·m, 12 lbf·ft) (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft) 16 x 1.5 mm
28 N·m
FEED HOSE
FLARE NUTS
PUMP OUTLET HOSE 14 x 1.5 mm
11 N·m 37 N·m
(1.1 kgf·m, 8.0 lbf·ft) (3.8 kgf·m, 27 lbf·ft)
B
A
RETURN HOSE
RETURN LINE
B
B
PUMP INLET HOSE
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-15

00/10/26 15:49:04 61S5N000_170_0016
Power Steering
Pump Replacement
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle. 7. Connect the pump inlet hose and pump outlet hose.
Tighten the pump fittings securely.
2. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir
(see page 17-14). 8. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with
the mounting bolt and lock bolt.
3. Remove the belt (A) by loosening the adjusting bolt
(B), pump mounting nut (C), and pump locknut (D). 9. Install the pump belt.
C 6 x 1.0 mm BOLT
24 N·m 11 N·m
Note these item during belt installation:
(2.4 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft) (1.1 kgf·m, 8 lbf·ft) • Make sure that the power steering belt (A) is
properly positioned on the pulleys (B).
• Do not get power steering fluid or grease on the
power steering belt or pulley faces. Clean off any
I
fluid or grease before installation.
B
A
F
B
G
D 10. Adjust the pump belt adjustment (see page 17-12).

24 N·m
H (2.4 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)
11. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (see page
17-14).
4. Cover the A/C compressor with several shop towels
to protect it from spilled power steering fluid.
Disconnect the pump inlet hose (E) and pump
outlet hose (F) from the pump (G), and plug them.
Take care not to spill the fluid on the body or parts.
Wipe off any spilled fluid at once.
5. Remove the adjusting bolt, pump mounting bolt (H),

pump mounting nut, pump locknut, and lock bolt (I),
then remove the pump from the pump bracket. Do
not turn the steering wheel with the pump removed.
6. Cover the opening of the pump with a piece of tape

to prevent foreign material from entering the pump.
17-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:05 61S5N000_170_0017
Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
Replace the pump as an assembly if the parts indicated with asterisk (*) are worn or damaged.
*COVER *ROLL PIN

SLIPPER SEAL
RUBBER SEAL (White color)
(Black color) Replace.
Replace.
*OUTER CASE
8 x 1.25 mm *CAM RING

20 N·m
(2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft) *VANES
(11 plates)
13 x 1.9 mm O-RING *ROTOR

Replace.
*SIDE PLATE
*PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE CAP
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft) O-RING
Replace.
PUMP COVER SEAL 23.8 x 2.4 mm O-RING
Replace. Replace.
16.7 x 1.8 mm O-RING *PUMP HOUSING CAP
Replace. 29 N·m
12.7 x 1.8 mm O-RING

Replace.
*PUMP PRELOAD SPRING

*PRESSURE CONTROL
VALVE SPRING
*PRESSURE CONTROL
VALVE
13 x 1.9 mm O-RING
Replace.
INLET JOINT PUMP COVER SEAL
6 x 1.0 mm Replace.
11 N·m
(1.1 kgf·m, 8 lbf·ft) *DRIVE SHAFT
BALL BEARING PULLEY NUT

64 N·m
40 mm SNAP RING PULLEY (6.5 kgf·m, 47 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-17

00/10/26 15:49:05 61S5N000_170_0018
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul (cont’d)

Special Tools Required 10. Remove the rubber seal and slipper seal from the
• Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100 outer case.
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Pulley holder 07ZAB-S5A0100 11. Remove the O-rings from the bottom of the
housing.
Disassembly
12. Remove the circlip, then remove the drive shaft by
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the tapping the shaft end with the plastic hammer.
following procedure.
13. Remove the seal from the pump housing.
1. Remove the power steering pump (see page 17-16).
Inspection
2. Drain the fluid from the pump.
14. Check the pressure control valve for wear, burrs,
3. Hold the steering pump (A) a vise with soft jaws, and other damage to the edges of the grooves in
hold the pulley (B) with the special tool (C), and the valve.
remove the pulley nut (D) and pulley. Be careful not
to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the
vise.
D
C
07ZAB-S5A0100
B
15. Inspect the bore of the pressure control valve on

the pump housing for scratches and wear.
16. Slip the pressure control valve back in the pump

housing, and check that it moves in and out
smoothly. If OK, go to step 17; if not, replace the
pump as an assembly. The pressure control valve
4. Remove the inlet joint and O-ring. is not available separately.
5. Remove the pressure control valve cap, O-ring,

valve spring, and pressure control valve.
6. Remove the pump housing cap, O-ring, and pump

preload spring.
7. Remove the pump cover, pump cover seal, and

O-ring.
8. Pull out the roll pin.
9. Remove the outer case, cam ring, rotor, vanes, and

side plate.
17-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:06 61S5N000_170_0019
17. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the pressure control Reassembly
valve (B) as shown. Then submerge the pressure
control valve in a container of power steering fluid 20. Install the new pump seal (A) (with its grooved side
or solvent (C), and blow in the hose. facing in) into the pump housing (B) by hand first,
then drive it in using the special tools until the seal
• If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than is fully seated in the pump housing.
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14.2 psi), replace the pump
as an assembly. The pressure control valve is not 07749-0010000
available separately.
07746-0010100
• If the pressure control valve is OK, set it aside for A
reassembly later.
A
B
C
21. Position the pump drive shaft (A) in the pump
housing, then drive it in with the appropriate size
18. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race socket wrench (B) as shown.
slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or
roughness, remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and C
B
install a new one (B).
A A
22. Install the 40 mm snap ring (C) with its radiused

side facing out.
19. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the
Exploded View; if any of them are worn or
damaged, replace the pump as an assembly.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-19

00/10/26 15:49:06 61S5N000_170_0020
Power Steering

23. Coat the new 23.8 mm O-ring (A) with power 25. Install the outer case (A) by aligning the slot (B)
steering fluid, then position it into the groove on inside the outer case with the cover roll pin hole (C).
the bottom of the pump housing. Be sure that the slit (D) on the outer case faces the
direction shown.
A
E G D
A
24. Coat the new cover seal (A) and 13 mm O-ring (B) C
with the power steering fluid, then position them
into the grooves on the cover (C).
26. Apply the power steering fluid to the rubber seal

B (E) black, and install it in the slot (F) of the outer
A
case.
27. Apply power steering fluid to the slipper seal (G)

(white), and install it on top of the rubber seal you
just installed.
17-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:07 61S5N000_170_0021
28. Align the slot (A) in the outer case with the roll pin 33. Place the side plate (A) on the cam ring with its ‘‘·’’
hole (B) on the cover. mark (B) facing upward, and align the roll pin set
hole (C) in the side plate with the roll pin end (D).
E
A D E
C
B
C
B
29. Install the cam ring (C) by aligning the slot (D) with
the slot (A) in the outer case.
34. Coat the new O-ring (E) with the power steering
30. Insert the roll pin (E) into the slots between the cam fluid, then position it into the groove on the side
ring and outer case, then push the roll pin into the plate.
set hole.
35. Install the pump housing (A) over the cover
31. Install the rotor (A) in the cam ring (B). assembly (B).
A
C A
B
B
32. Set the 11 vanes (C) in the grooves in the rotor.

Make sure that the round ends (D) of the vanes are
in contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-21

00/10/26 15:49:07 61S5N000_170_0022
Power Steering

36. Align the bolt holes in the cover (B) with the 38. Install the pump preload spring (A) in the pump
threaded holes in the pump housing. Install the five housing.
flange bolts (C) loosely first, then torque the flange
bolts in two or more steps with sequence shown.
C
8 x 1.25 mm
20 N·m
(2.0 kgf·m,
14 lbf·ft)
A
B
C
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
B
39. Coat the new 12.7 mm O-ring (B) with power

steering fluid, and install it on the pump housing
cap (C).
40. Install the pump housing cap (C) on the pump

A housing, and tighten it to specified torque.
41. Coat the pressure control valve (A) with power

steering fluid, and install pressure control valve
37. Push in the cam ring (A) from the pump housing and spring (B) on the pump housing.
cap hole (B) with a flat blade screwdriver, to make
sure the cam ring is fully seated against the outer
case.
A
D
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m,
36 lbf·ft)
B B
C
42. Coat the new 16.7 mm O-ring (C) with power

steering fluid, and install it on the flow control
valve cap (D).
43. Install the pressure control valve cap (D) on the

pump housing, and tighten it to the specified
torque.
17-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:08 61S5N000_170_0023
44. Coat the new O-ring (A) with power steering fluid,
and install it on the inlet joint (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
11 N·m (1.1 kgf·m,
8 lbf·ft)
45. Install the inlet joint (B) on the pump housing.
46. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley
nut (B). Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft
jaws. Be careful not to damage the pump housing
with the jaws of the vise.
B
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m,
47 lbf·ft)
07ZAB-S5A0100
47. Hold the pulley with the special tool, and tighten
the pulley nut.
48. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the

pulley. If it turns hard, loosen the five flange bolts
on the cover, then retightening them try again in
the same manner as in the step 36.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-23

00/10/26 15:49:08 61S5N000_170_0024
Power Steering
Steering Wheel Removal

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 3. Install a commercially available steering wheel
SRS component locations (see page 23-11), precautions puller (A) on the steering wheel (B). Free the
and procedures (see page 23-11) in the SRS section steering wheel from the steering column shaft by
before performing repairs or service. turning the pressure bolt (C) of the puller.
1. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove Note these items when removing the steering
the driver’s airbag from the steering wheel (see wheel:
page 23-127). • Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering
column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
2. Disconnect the horn switch connector (A) and the • If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel
cruise control set/resume switch connector (B), and hub more than 5 threads, the bolts will hit the
loosen the steering wheel nut (C). cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install
a pair of jam nuts 5 threads up on each puller bolt.
C
D A
B
C
4. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the

steering wheel nut and steering wheel from the
steering column.
17-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:08 61S5N000_170_0025
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly
STEERING WHEEL
STEERING WHEEL REAR COVER
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
ACCESS PANEL
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-25

00/10/26 15:49:09 61S5N000_170_0026
Power Steering
Steering Wheel Installation

1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the 3. Install the steering wheel nut (A) or nut and tighten
front wheels are aligned straight ahead, then center it.
the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable
A
reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
counterclockwise about 2 and a half turns. The
arrow mark (B) on the cable reel label point should
point straight up.
A B
4. Connect the horn switch connector and the cruise

control set/resume switch connector.
2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal
cancelling sleeve (B) as shown, and install the 5. Install the driver’s airbag, and confirm that the
steering wheel on to the steering column shaft, system is operating properly (see page 23-127).
making sure the steering wheel hub (C) engages
the pins (D) of the cable reel and tabs of the 6. Check the horn and turn signal cancelling for
canceling sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel proper operation.
or steering column shaft when installing the
steering wheel.
C
17-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:09 61S5N000_170_0027
Steering Column Removal and Installation

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-10), precautions and
procedures (see page 23-11) in the SRS section before performing repairs or service.
Removal
1. Record the radio station presets, and disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the driver’s airbag assembly and the steering wheel (see page 17-24).
3. Remove the driver’s dashboard lower covers.
4. Remove the column covers (A).
C B
E
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm
16 N·m (1.6 kgf·m,
12 lbf·ft)
5. Remove the combination switch assembly (B) from the steering column shaft by removing the screw (C) on the
top of the combination switch.
6. Disconnect the 2P, 6P, and 7P connectors from the ignition switch.
7. Disconnect the steering joint (D), and remove it from the column shaft.
8. Remove the steering column (E) by removing the attaching nuts and bolts.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-27

00/10/26 15:49:10 61S5N000_170_0028
Power Steering
Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont’d)

Installation
1. Install the steering column, and make sure the
wires are not caught or pinched by any parts.
2. Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the

steering shaft (A) (line up the bolt hole (B) with the
flat portion (C) on the shaft).
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm A
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft) C
F
B
E G
3. Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the

pinion shaft (E) (line up the bolt hole (F) with the
groove (G) around the shaft), and loosely install the
lower joint bolt. Be sure that the lower joint bolt is
securely in the groove in the pinion shaft.
4. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the

steering joint is fully seated. Then install the upper
joint bolt and tighten it.
5. Finish the installation, and note these items:

• Make sure the wire harness is routed and
fastened properly.
• Make sure the connectors are properly connected.
• Reinstall the steering wheel (see page 17-26).
• Reconnect the battery.
• Verify horn and turn signal switch operation.
• Check wheel alignment, if necessary (see page
18-4).
17-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:10 61S5N000_170_0029
Steering Column Inspection

• Check the steering column ball bearing (A) and the steering joint bearings (B) for play and proper movement. If any
bearing is noisy or has excessive play, replace the steering column as an assembly.
• Check the absorbing plates (C), absorbing plate guides (D), stop (E), and coating plates (F) for distortion and
breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace the steering column as an assembly.
C D
A
E
B
F
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-29

00/10/26 15:49:10 61S5N000_170_0030
Power Steering
Steering Lock Replacement

1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-27). 7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B)
twist off.
2. Center punch each of the two shear bolts, and drill
their heads off with a 5 mm (3/16 in.) drill bit. Be
careful not to damage the switch body when A
removing the shear bolts.
3. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body.
4. Install the switch body without the key inserted.
5. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts.
6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper

operation of the steering wheel lock and that the
ignition key turns freely.
17-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:11 61S5N000_170_0031
Rack Guide Adjustment

Special Tools Required 4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 25 N·m (2.5 kgf·
Locknut wrench, 40 mm 07916-SA50001 m, 18 lbf·ft), then loosen it.
20° Max.
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the

special tool, then remove the rack guide screw (B).
07916-SA50001
A
A
B
25 N·m
B 5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 N·m (0.4 kgf·

m, 2.9 lbf·ft), then back it off to specified angle.
3. Remove the old sealant from rack guide screw, and
apply new sealant all around the threads (C). Specified Return Angle: 20° Max.
Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering
gearbox. 6. Tighten the locknut (B) while holding the rack guide
screw.
C
7. Check for unusual steering effort through the
complete turning travel.
8. Check the steering wheel rotational play and the

power assist (see page 17-7).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-31

00/10/26 15:49:11 61S5N000_170_0032
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Removal

Special Tools Required 6. Remove the air cleaner (A) and resonator (B).
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200
A B
Note these items during removal:
• Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off
the valve body unit, its lines, and the end of the
gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air.
• Be sure to remove the steering wheel before
disconnecting the steering joint. Damage to the cable
reel can occur.
1. Raise the front of vehicle, and make sure it is

securely supported.
2. Remove the front wheels.
3. Remove the driver’s airbag and the steering wheel 7. Open the heater valve cable clamp, and disconnect
(see page 17-24). the heater valve cable. Remove the heater valve (A)
from the bulkhead, and move it aside.
4. Remove the driver’s dashboard lower covers.
5. Remove the steering joint bolts, and disconnect the

steering joint by moving the steering joint (A)
toward the column.
A
17-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:12 61S5N000_170_0033
8. Above the steering gearbox, remove the feed line 10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod ball joint
clamp (A). nut (B), and loosen the nut.
B
A 07MAC-SL00200
9. Disconnect the feed line (A) and return line (B) from 11. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and damper steering
the valve body unit. arm using the special tool (see page 18-10).
B
12. Under the steering gearbox, remove the return
hose clamp.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-33

00/10/26 15:49:12 61S5N000_170_0034
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Removal (cont’d)

13. Remove the engine wire harness (A) from the 16. Remove the steering gearbox attaching bolts and
harness bracket (B). washers on the left gearbox mounting bracket.
A B
C
17. Pull on the steering gearbox to free it from the

mounting stud (A) on the right gearbox mounting
14. Remove the steering rack guard (C) by removing bracket (B). Remove the three mounting bolts and
the three clips. bracket.
15. Remove the steering gearbox attaching nut and

washer on the right gearbox mounting bracket. B
17-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:12 61S5N000_170_0035
18. Lower the steering gearbox, and rotate it so the

pinion shaft points upward.
19. Carefully move the steering gearbox (A) and tie-

rods (B) as an assembly toward the passenger’s
side until the pinion shaft clears the heater hoses.
Remove the steering gearbox through the wheel
well opening on the passenger’s side.
20. Remove the pinion shaft grommet (C) from the top
of the valve body unit.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-35

00/10/26 15:49:13 61S5N000_170_0036
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul

Exploded View
FLANGE BOLTS
20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft)
VALVE HOUSING SNAP RING

Replace.
CYLINDER LINES SLEEVE

17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 12 lbf·ft)
SLEEVE SEAL RINGS
VALVE OIL SEAL Replace.
Replace.
BUSHING VALVE SEAL RING
Replace.
O-RING
Replace.
VALVE OIL SEAL
BACKUP RING Replace.
LOCK SCREW
Replace. WAVE WASHER
162 N·m (16.5 kgf·m,
119 lbf·ft) PINION SHAFT
CYLINDER
END SEAL O-RING
Replace. Replace.
BOOT A
BUSHING
Replace. CYLINDER RACK GUIDE
HOUSING STOP RING
Replace. SPRING
BOOT BANDS
Replace. RACK GUIDE SCREW
FLANGE BOLT RACK END PLUG
20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, LOCKNUT
29 N·m GEARBOX HOUSING
BOOT GUARD SNAP RING STEERING RACK
BACKUP RING
CYLINDER END SEAL
Replace.
CLIP BRACKET
BOOT B
O-RING
BOOT BAND Replace.
Replace. SLIDER GUIDE
PISTON SEAL RING
Replace.
O-RINGS
Replace.
LOCK WASHER
Replace.
RACK END
STOP WASHER 54 N·m TIE-ROD END
Replace. (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
12 mm FLANGE BOLTS
69 N·m (7.0 kgf·m, 51 lbf·ft) 44 N·m
17-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:14 61S5N000_170_0037
Special Tools Required 3. Hold the bracket (A) with one wrench, and unscrew
• Cylinder end seal remover attachment both rack ends (B) with another wrench. Remove
07NAD-SR30200 the lock washers.
• Driver, 27 mm 07ZAF-S5A0100
• Valve seal ring sizing tool 07NAG-SR30900
• Sleeve seal ring guide 07YAG-S2X0100
• Sleeve seal ring sizing tool 07ZAG-SA50100
• Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Piston seal ring guide 07GAG-SD40100
• Piston seal ring sizing tool 07GAG-SD40200
• Pincers, Oetiker 1098 or equivalent, commercially
available.
• Pilot collar 07GAF-PH70100
• Locknut wrench 07ZAA-S5A0100
• Driver handle 07NAD-SR30101
• Seal slider 07974-6890801
• Valve seal ring guide 07ZAG-S5A0200
A
this procedure.
B
Removal
4. Remove cylinder lines (A) from the gearbox.
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-32).
A
Disassembly
2. Unbend the lock washer (A).
5. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly

moving the steering rack back and forth.
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-37

00/10/26 15:49:14 61S5N000_170_0038
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont’d)

6. Remove the stop washer (A), the 12 mm flange 9. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide
bolts (B), O-rings (C), and bracket (D) from the screw (B), spring (C), and rack guide (D) from the
steering gearbox. steering gearbox.
B
A
C
B 10. Remove the snap ring (A) and backup ring (B) from
A the cylinder of the steering gearbox.
7. Remove the boot guard (A) by removing the 8 mm

flange bolt (C) on the rack end.
B
B
E A
C F
A
8. Remove the boot band (D) and clip (E). Pull the boot
B and away from the end of the steering gearbox.
Remove the rack end plug (F).
17-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:15 61S5N000_170_0039
11. Remove the valve body unit (A) from the steering 13. Attach the yoke (A) of a universal puller to the
gearbox. Remove the O-ring (B) and discard it. steering gearbox mounts with bolts. Securely
clamp the yoke in a vise with jaws as shown. Do
not clamp the gearbox housing in the vise.
A
A
B
14. Set the special tool (A) on the lock washer (B)
securely, then loosen and remove the lock washer
from inside of the gearbox housing (C).
12. Remove the two boot bands (B) from boot A.
Compress boot A by hand, and apply vinyl tape (C)
so the boots stay collapsed and pulled back.
C
C
A
07ZAA-S5A0100
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-39

00/10/26 15:49:15 61S5N000_170_0040
Power Steering

15. Remove the special tool. 18. Remove and discard the stop ring (A) on the
cylinder by expanding it with snap ring pliers.
16. Pull on the cylinder to remove it from the gearbox Remove and discard the lock washer (B).
housing. Remove boot A and the slider guide (B)
from the cylinder.
B
A
A
19. Set the cylinder housing (A) in a press so the
cylinder side points downward, then press the
17. Check the slider guide for damage and cracks. cylinder end seal (B) and steering rack (C) out of the
Using vernier calipers to measure the thickness of cylinder. Hold the rack to keep it from falling when
the slider guide. If the thickness is less than the pressed clear.
service limit, replace the slider guide.
25.3 mm 25.3 mm
(0.925 in.) (0.925 in.)
20. Remove the cylinder end seal from the steering

rack.
17-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:16 61S5N000_170_0041
21. Insert the special tools into the cylinder. 23. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B)
Make sure the attachment (A) of the special tools is off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the
securely positioned on the bushing edges (B). inside of the seal ring groove and piston edges
when removing the seal ring.
07NAD-SR30101
A
07NAD-SR30200 or
07NAD-SR3020A
B
D
C B
A
24. Before removing the valve housing (A), apply vinyl

tape (B) to the splines on the pinion shaft.
22. Place the cylinder in a press, then remove the A

cylinder end seal (C), backup ring (D), and bushing
(B) from the cylinder by pressing on the special tool
end.
Note the items when pressing the cylinder end

seal:
• Keep tool straight to avoid damaging the cylinder

wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it if
necessary, when removing the cylinder end seal.
• Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do 25. Separate the valve housing from the pinion shaft/
not try to remove the seal by striking the tool; valve using a press.
striking the tool would break the cylinder end
seal, and the seal would remain in the cylinder.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-41

00/10/26 15:49:16 61S5N000_170_0042
Power Steering

26. With your finger, check the inner wall of the valve 28. Remove the snap ring (A) and sleeve (B) from the
housing where the seal ring slides. If there is a step pinion shaft.
in the wall, the housing is worn. Replace it.
NOTE: There may be sliding marks from the seal

ring on the wall of the valve housing. Replace the
valve housing only if the wall is stepped.
B
29. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut and

remove the four seal rings from the sleeve. Be
careful not to damage the edges of the sleeve
grooves and the outer surface when removing the
seal rings.
27. Check for wear, burrs, and other damage to the
edges of the grooves in the sleeve.
NOTE: The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precision

matched set. If either the pinion shaft or sleeve
must be replaced, replace both parts as a set.
17-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:16 61S5N000_170_0043
30. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut the valve 32. Press the valve oil seal (A) and bushing (B) out of
seal ring (A) and O-ring (B) at the groove (C) in the the valve housing using a hydraulic press and
pinion shaft. Remove the valve seal ring and O-ring. special tool.
Be careful not to damage the edges of the pinion
shaft groove and outer surface when removing the 07GAF-PH70100
valve seal ring and O-ring. A
A
Reassembly
33. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the stepped portion of the

31. Remove the valve oil seal (A) and wave washer (B) pinion shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape
from the pinion shaft. with the power steering fluid.
Note these items during disassembly: D
• Inspect the ball bearing (C) by rotating the outer

race slowly. If there is any excessive play,
replace the pinion shaft and sleeve as an
assembly.
• The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precise fit; do
not intermix old and new pinion shafts and B
C
sleeves.
A
34. Install the wave washer (B). Coat the inside surface
B A of the new valve oil seal (C) with power steering
fluid, and install the seal with its grooved side
facing opposite the bearing, then slide it over the
pinion shaft, being careful not to damage its
sealing lip (D). Remove the vinyl tape.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-43

00/10/26 15:49:17 61S5N000_170_0044
Power Steering

35. Install the special tool over the pinion, and coat the 40. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the
surface of the tool with the power steering fluid. special tool. Slip two new seal rings (A) over the
Slip the new O-ring (A) and new valve seal ring (B) special tool from the smaller diameter end, and
over the special tool, and expand them. expand them. Install only two rings at a time from
each end of the pinion shaft sleeve (B).
07ZAG-S5A0200
Note these items when installing the seal ring:
• Do not over-expand the seal ring. Install the resin
seal rings with care so as not to damage them.
After installation, be sure to contract the seal
rings using the special tool (sizing tool).
A • There are two types of sleeve seal rings: black
and brown. Do not mix the different types of
rings as they are not compatible.
A
B 07YAG-S2X0100
36. Fit the O-ring and in the groove of the pinion shaft.
Then slide the valve seal ring over the shaft and in
the groove on the pinion shaft.
37. Remove the special tool, and apply power steering B

fluid to the surface of the valve seal ring (A).
07NAG-SR30900 or
07NAG-SR3090A
41. Align the special tool with each groove in the

A sleeve, and slide a sleeve seal ring into each
groove. After installation, compress the seal rings
with your fingers temporarily.
42. Apply power steering fluid to the seal rings on the

sleeve, and to the entire inside surface of the
special tool, then slowly insert the sleeve into the
special tool.
07ZAG-S5A0100
A
38. Apply power steering fluid to the inside of the

special tool. Set the larger diameter end of the
special tool over the valve seal ring, and move the
special tool up and down several times to make the
valve seal ring fit in the pinion shaft groove.
39. Remove the special tool, turn it over, slide the

smaller diameter end over the valve seal ring.
Move it up and down several times to make the 43. Move the sleeve back and forth several times to
valve seal ring fit snugly in the pinion shaft groove. make the seal rings snugly fit in the sleeve. Be sure
that the seal rings are not twisted.
17-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:18 61S5N000_170_0045
44. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the 47. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the pinion shaft, then coat
pinion shaft (A). Slide the sleeve (B) onto the pinion the vinyl tape with power steering fluid.
shaft by aligning the locating pin (C) on the inside
of the sleeve with the cutout (D) in the shaft. Then B
install the new snap ring (E) securely in the pinion
shaft groove. Be careful not to damage the valve
seal ring when inserting the sleeve.
D A
A
E
C
B
48. Insert the pinion shaft into the valve housing (B). Be
45. Apply power steering fluid to the seal ring lip of the careful not to damage the valve seal rings (C).
new valve oil seal (A), then install the seal in the
valve housing (B) using a hydraulic press and 49. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft, then
special tools. Install the seal with its grooved remove any residue from the tape adhesive.
side (C) facing the tool.
50. Press the pinion shaft/sleeve into the valve housing
07746-0010100
with a hydraulic press. Check that the pinion shaft/
C
sleeve turns smoothly by hand after installing it.
07749-0010000
A
B
46. Press the bushing (D) into the valve housing with a
hydraulic press and special tool.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-45

00/10/26 15:49:18 61S5N000_170_0046
Power Steering

51. Coat the special tool with power steering fluid, then 56. Set the new bushing (A) on the special tool, and
slide it onto the rack, big end first. insert the special tools into the cylinder housing (B).
52. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal
ring (B) on the special tool, then slide them down
07NAD-SR30101
toward the big end of the tool.
Note these items during reassembly:

• Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install
the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage
them. After installation, be sure to contract the
seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool).
• Replace piston’s O-ring and seal ring as a set.
07GAG-SD40100 or
07GAG-SD4010A
A
B
07ZAF-S5A0100
B
57. Set the cylinder in a press, and install the bushing
53. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull (A) into the bottom of the cylinder by pressing on
the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on the tool with press. Do not push on the tool with
top of the O-ring. excessive force as it may damage the new bushing.
54. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the 58. Coat the sliding surface of the special tool (A) and
special tool with power steering fluid, then new cylinder end seal (B) with power steering fluid.
carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the Place the seal on the special tool with its grooved
piston seal ring. side (C) facing opposite the special tool.
55. Move the special tool back and forth several times
to make the piston seal ring fit snugly in the piston.
A
C 07974-6890801 or
A 07974-689080A
07GAG-SD40200 or
07GAG-SD4020A
17-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:18 61S5N000_170_0047
59. Apply a thin coat of grease to the inside of the 62. Install the new backup ring (A) on the steering rack,
special tool. then place the backup ring and cylinder end seal (B)
against the piston (C).
60. Install the cylinder end seal (A) onto the steering
rack (B) with its grooved side (C) toward the piston
(D). Make sure the gap is special tool is opposite of
rack teeth.
C
A
B
A
C
63. Mark (A) a position on the steering rack surface
D with a felt-tip marker, 14.5 mm (0.57 in.) from the
rack end edges.
14.5 mm (0.57 in.)

07974-6890801 or
07974-689080A
61. Separate the cylinder end seal from the special tool,
then remove the special tool.
A
07974-6890801 or
07974-689080A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-47

00/10/26 15:49:19 61S5N000_170_0048
Power Steering

64. Grease the steering rack teeth, then insert the 66. Coat the inside and outside surfaces of the new
steering rack (A) into the cylinder (B). Be careful not cylinder end seal (A) with power steering fluid.
to damage to inner surface of the cylinder wall and
bushing with the rack edges. F
D
B E
A
C
B
65. Set the cylinder (A) in a press, then press the 67. Install the cylinder end seal onto the steering rack
cylinder end seal (B) into the bottom of the cylinder (B) with its grooved side (C) toward the piston.
until the mark (C) on the rack meets the edges (D) of Push in the cylinder end seal with your finger.
the cylinder.
68. Place the backup ring (D) on the cylinder end seal
Press with its flat side facing upward. Then drive the
D
backup ring in with the appropriate size socket
C
wrench until the its surface is below the snap ring
A groove (E). Install the snap ring (F) in the groove.
69. Install the new lock screw (A) on the cylinder.

C
A
B
70. Install the new stop ring (B) in the groove (C) on the
cylinder by expanding it with snap ring pliers. Be
careful not to scratch or damage on the cylinder
surface with the stop ring edges.
17-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:19 61S5N000_170_0049
71. Set the new boot bands (B) on the band installation 74. Push the cylinder (A) into the gearbox housing (B)
grooves of the boot A by aligning the tabs (C) with so the notch (C) is aligned with the pin (D) inside of
the holes (D) of the band. Do not close the ear the gearbox housing.
portion of the boot band in this step.
B
C
A D
C A
75. Tighten the lock screw (A) by hand first, then set
E the special tool (B) on the lock screw securely.
Tighten the lock screw to specified torque.
72. Compress the boot A by hand, and apply vinyl tape

(E) to the bellows so the boots stay collapsed and
pulled back. Pass boot A over the cylinder so the
smaller diameter end of the boot faces the gearbox
housing.
73. Attach the yoke (A) of a universal puller to the

gearbox housing (B) with bolts, then securely
clamp the yoke in a vise with jaws. Do not clamp
the gearbox housing in a vise.
B
B
A 07ZAA-S5A0100
162 N·m (16.5 kgf·m,
119 lbf·ft)
A
76. Remove the special tool.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-49

00/10/26 15:49:20 61S5N000_170_0050
Power Steering

77. Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding surface of 81. Close the ear portion (A) of the bands (B) with a
the slider guide (A). commercially available pincers, Oetiker 1098 or
Slide the steering rack all the way to left, and place equivalent (C).
the slider guide on the steering rack by aligning the
C
bolt holes (B).
B A
1.9 mm
(0.07 in.)
78. Center the steering rack within its stroke, and align
the slider guide (B) with the holes (C) in boot A. Fit 82. Coat the new O-ring (A) with grease, and carefully
the slider guide to boot A by pressing around the fit it on the valve housing.
edges of the holes securely.
D
20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m,
14 lbf·ft)
B
A
D
D
A
79. Clean off any grease or contamination from the

boot installation grooves around on the housing.
B
80. Expand boot A by removing the vinyl tape, and fit
the boot both ends (D) in the installation grooves
on the cylinder housing. 83. Apply grease to the needle bearing (B) in the
gearbox housing, then install the valve body unit
(C) by engaging the gears. Note the valve body unit
installation position (direction of the line
connections).
84. Tighten the flange bolts (D) to the specified torque.
17-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:20 61S5N000_170_0051
85. Grease the sliding surface of the rack guide (A), and 87. Install the rack end plug (A).
install it onto the gearbox housing.
H
F
G
A B
D
E
C
B
D
20 N·m
86. Apply sealant all around the threads on the rack (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft)
guide screw (B), then install the spring (C), rack
guide screw, and locknut (D). Adjust the rack guide A
screw (see page 17-31). After adjusting, check that 29 N·m
the rack moves smoothly by sliding it right and left. (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
88. Clean off any grease or contamination from the

boot installation grooves (C) around on the housing.
89. Install boot B, and set the boot end in the

installation grooves in the cylinder housing and
rack end plug properly.
90. Install the clip (D) and boot guard (E).
91. Install the new boot band (F) in the band grooves of
boot B by aligning the tabs (G) with the holes (H) in
the band.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-51

00/10/26 15:49:21 61S5N000_170_0052
Power Steering

92. Close the ear poriton (A) of the band (B) with a 96. After tightening the 12 mm flange bolts, install the
commercially available pincers, Oetiker 1098 or lock washer (A) over one of bolt the heads (B). Be
equivalent (C). sure the tabs (C) of the lock washer with the flat
surfaces (D) of the bolt head.
C
B A
A
B
C
D
1.8 mm
(0.07 in.)
93. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the 97. Install the cylinder lines.
boots are not deformed or twisted.
Note these items during reassembly:
94. Before installing the bracket (A), clean the mating • Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines.
surface of the 12 mm flange bolts (B) and bracket. The joints must be free of foreign material.
Then install the new O-rings (C) on the 12 mm • Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare
flange bolts. nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to
the specified torque.
17 N·m
17 N·m
A
C
B
69 N·m (7.0 kgf·m, 51 lbf·ft)
95. Install the bracket on the steering rack with 12 mm

flange bolts.
17-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:21 61S5N000_170_0053
98. Install the new lock washer (A) on the tie-rod (B)
with the radiused side of the washer toward the tie-
rod, and screw the tie-rod on the bracket (C).
Repeat this step for the other tie-rod. Hold the
bracket with one wrench, and tighten both tie-rods
to the specified torque with another wrench.
B
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
99. Bend the lock washer against the flat spots on the
bracket with a large pair of pliers.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-53

00/10/26 15:49:22 61S5N000_170_0054
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Installation

1. Install the pinion shaft grommet (A). 5. Slip the right side of the steering gearbox over the
mounting stud (A) on the right gearbox mounting
A bracket. Install the washer (B) and the gearbox
B
mounting nut (C) and lightly tighten.
A
2. Pass the valve body unit side of the steering
B
gearbox (B) together with the tie-rods (C) through
the wheel well opening on the passenger’s side. C
10 x 1.25 mm
61 N·m (6.2kgf·m,
3. Carefully move the steering gearbox toward the 45 lbf·ft)
driver’s side until the pinion shaft clears the heater
hoses. Continue moving the gearbox toward the 6. Insert the pinion shaft up through the bulkhead,
driver’s side until the steering gearbox is in and install the left gearbox mounting bolts (A) and
position. washer (B), and tighten them to the specified
torque. Then tighten the right side of the gearbox
4. Install the right gearbox mounting bracket (A) on mounting nut to the specified torque value.
the frame.
8 x 1.25 mm
28 N·m (2.9 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft)
A
10 x 1.25 mm
61 N·m
17-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:23 61S5N000_170_0055
7. Install the steering rack guard (A). 10. Above the steering gearbox, connect the feed line
(A) securely, and tighten the 14 mm flare nut (B).
C
B D
A 16 x 1.5 mm
C 28 N·m (2.9 kgf·m,
21 lbf·ft)
A
B
14 x 1.5 mm
8. Install the engine wire harness (B) on the harness 37 N·m
bracket (C). (3.8 kgf·m, 27 lbf·ft)
9. Under the steering gearbox, install the return hose 11. Connect the return line (C) securely, and tighten the
clamp (A) on the gearbox. 16 mm flare nut (D).
6 x 1.0mm 12. Install the feed line clamp (A) on the gearbox. Make
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) sure that there is no interference between the feed
and return lines any other parts.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-55

00/10/26 15:49:23 61S5N000_170_0056
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Installation (cont’d)

13. Wipe off any grease contamination from the ball 16. Install the air cleaner (A) and resonator (B).
joint tapered section and threads. Then reconnect
the tie-rod end (A) to the damper steering arms.
Install the 10 mm nut (B) and tighten it. A B
A
17. Install the steering joint (A), and reconnect the

steering shaft (B) and pinion shaft (C). Make sure
the steering joint is connected as follows:
B
10 x 1.25 mm
43 N·m • Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the
(4.4 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft) C steering shaft (line up the bolt hole (D) with the
flat portion (E) on the shaft).
14. Install the new cotter pin (C), and bend it as shown. • Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the
pinion shaft (line up the bolt hole (F) with the
15. Reinstall the heater valve (A) in its original position, groove (G) around the shaft), and loosely install
and connect the heater valve cable to the valve arm the lower joint bolt. Be sure that the lower joint
(see page 21-30). Install the heater hoses on the bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion shaft.
hose clamps securely. • Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the
steering joint is fully seated. Then install the
upper joint bolt and tighten it.
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m
A B
6 x 1.0 mm A
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft) E
F
C G
18. Install the driver’s dashboard lower covers.
17-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:49:24 61S5N000_170_0057
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement

19. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise Special Tools Required
until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise Attachment, 42 mm 07QAD-P0A0100
(approximately two and half turns) until the arrow
mark on the label points straight up. Reinstall the 1. Remove the boot from the tie-rod end, and wipe the
steering wheel (see page 17-26). old grease off the ball pin.
20. Install the front wheels. 2. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh
multipurpose grease.
21. Fill the system with power steering fluid, and bleed
C
air from the system (see page 17-14).
22. After installation, perform the following checks. B
• Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the D

steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to
warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks
(see page 17-11). A
• Perform the front toe inspection (see page 18-7). E
• Check the steering wheel spoke angle. Adjust by
turning the right and left tie-rods equally, if
necessary. D
3. Pack the interior of the new boot (B) and lip (C) with
fresh multipurpose grease.
Note these items when installing new grease:
• Keep grease off the boot installation section (D)

and the tapered section (E) if the ball pin.
• Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials
to enter the boot.
4. Install the new boot (A) using the special tool. The
boot must not have a gap at the boot installation
sections (B). After installing the boot, check the ball
pin tapered section for grease contamination, and
wipe it if necessary.
07QAD-P0A0100
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-57

00/10/26 15:49:24 61S5N000_170_0057
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement

19. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise Special Tools Required
until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise Attachment, 42 mm 07QAD-P0A0100
(approximately two and half turns) until the arrow
mark on the label points straight up. Reinstall the 1. Remove the boot from the tie-rod end, and wipe the
steering wheel (see page 17-26). old grease off the ball pin.
20. Install the front wheels. 2. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh
multipurpose grease.
21. Fill the system with power steering fluid, and bleed
C
air from the system (see page 17-14).
22. After installation, perform the following checks. B
• Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the D

steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to
warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks
(see page 17-11). A
• Perform the front toe inspection (see page 18-7). E
• Check the steering wheel spoke angle. Adjust by
turning the right and left tie-rods equally, if
necessary. D
3. Pack the interior of the new boot (B) and lip (C) with
fresh multipurpose grease.
Note these items when installing new grease:
• Keep grease off the boot installation section (D)

and the tapered section (E) if the ball pin.
• Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials
to enter the boot.
4. Install the new boot (A) using the special tool. The
boot must not have a gap at the boot installation
sections (B). After installing the boot, check the ball
pin tapered section for grease contamination, and
wipe it if necessary.
07QAD-P0A0100
-DYNOMITE 2009- 17-57

00/10/26 15:50:28 61S5N000_180_0001
Suspension
Front and Rear Suspension

Special Tools ................................................................. 18-2
Wheel Alignment .......................................................... 18-4
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection ............................ 18-8
Wheel Runout Inspection ............................................ 18-9
Ball Joint Removal ....................................................... 18-10
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement ................ 18-11
Ball Joint Boot Replacement ....................................... 18-16
Stabilizer Bar Replacement ......................................... 18-17
Stabilizer Link Replacement ........................................ 18-18
Lower Arm Replacement ............................................. 18-19
Damper/Spring Replacement ...................................... 18-20
Rear Suspension
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement ................................... 18-24
Knuckle Replacement ................................................... 18-26
Stabilizer Bar Replacement ......................................... 18-28
Stabilizer Link Replacement ........................................ 18-29
Upper Arm Replacement ............................................. 18-30
Trailing Arm Replacement ........................................... 18-31
Damper Replacement .................................................. 18-32
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 15:50:28 61S5N000_180_0002
Special Tools
07GAF-SE00100 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 1
07QAD-P0A0100 Driver Attachment 1
07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
07965-SD90100 Support Base 1

00/10/26 15:50:29 61S5N000_180_0003

Front Suspension:
FRONT DAMPER
STABILIZER BAR
KNUCKLE
LOWER ARM
Rear Suspension:
REAR DAMPER
REAR SPRING
TRAILING ARM

00/10/26 15:50:29 61S5N000_180_0004
Wheel Alignment
The suspension can be adjusted for front camber, front Front Caster Inspection
toe, and rear toe. However, each of these adjustments
are interrelated to each other. For example, when you Use commercially available computerized four wheel
adjust toe, the camber changes. Therefore, you must alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
adjust the front wheel alignment whenever you adjust (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
camber or toe. equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Pre-Alignment Checks Check the caster angle. If the caster angle is not within
the specification, check for bent or damaged
For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel suspension components.
alignment, do these checks:
Front caster angle: 1°33’ ± 1°
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect
measurement.
2. Make sure the suspension is not modified.
3. Check the tire size and tire pressure.
Tire size:
Front/rear: 185/65R15 86H
Tire pressure:
Front/rear: 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi)
4. Check the runout of the wheels and tires.
5. Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a wheel

with your hands, and move it up and down and
right and left to check for wobbling).
6. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to

stabilize the suspension.

00/10/26 15:50:29 61S5N000_180_0005
Front Camber Inspection Front Camber Adjustment

Use commercially available computerized four wheel The front camber can be adjusted by exchanging one or
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment both of the damper pinch bolts with the smaller
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the diameter adjusting bolt(s). The difference between the
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. adjusting bolt diameter and the pinch bolt hole
diameter allow a small range of adjustment.
Check the camber angle. If the camber angle is not
within the specification, adjust the camber.
Front camber angle: 0°00’ ± 45’

Damper Pinch Bolt: Adjusting Bolt:
P/N 90188-S5A-000
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is

securely supported. Remove the front wheels.
2. Loosen the damper pinch nuts and bolts (A), and

adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the
damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt
free play.
A
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m,
76 lbf·ft)
3. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
4. Reinstall the front wheels. Lower the front of the

vehicle to the ground, and bounce the vehicle
several times to stabilize the suspension.
5. Check the camber angle. If it is within the

specification, check the front toe. If it is not within
the specification, go to step 6.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:50:30 61S5N000_180_0006
Wheel Alignment (cont’d)

6. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is Rear Camber Inspection
Use commercially-available computerized four wheel
7. Replace the damper pinch bolts with the adjusting alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
bolts (A), and adjust the camber angle. (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: The camber angle can be adjusted up to ±
15’ (center of tolerance) by replacing one damper Check the camber angle. If the camber angle is not
pinch bolt with the adjusting bolt. The camber within the specification, check for bent or damaged
angle can be adjusted up to ± 30’ by replacing both suspension components.
upper and lower damper pinch bolts with the
adjusting bolts. Rear camber angle: −0°45’ ± 45’
A
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m,
76 lbf·ft)
8. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
9. Reinstall the front wheels. Lower the front of the

vehicle to the ground, and bounce the vehicle
several times to stabilize the suspension.
10. Check the camber angle. if it is within the

specification, check the front toe, and adjust it if
necessary. If it is not within the specification,
readjust, and recheck. If the camber angle cannot
be adjusted to the specification, check for bent or
damaged suspension components.

00/10/26 15:50:30 61S5N000_180_0007
Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment

Use commercially-available computerized four wheel Use commercially-available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Center the steering wheel spokes. 1. Release the parking brake.
2. Check the toe. If it is not within the specification, go 2. Check the toe. If it is not within the specification, go
to step 3. to step 3.
Front toe-in: 0 ± 3 mm (0 ± 0.12 in.) Rear toe-in: 2＋2−1 mm (0.08＋0.08−0.04 in.)
3. Loosen the locknut (A) while holding the tie-rod 3. Loosen the self-locking nut (A) while holding the
arm (B). adjusting bolt (B).
Do not loosen the special bolts (C) on the

lower arm to adjust the alignment.
C
A
14 x 1.5 mm
44 N·m
C (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft)
4. Turn the tie-rod end (C) until the toe is correct.
NOTE: Adjust both the right and left wheels at the

same time by the same amount in opposite
directions to obtain the correct toe.
A B
5. After adjusting, tighten the locknut while holding 12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m
the tie-rod arm. Make sure the toe setting does not (6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft)
change.
4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and
lightly tighten it.
NOTE: Always use a new self-locking nut whenever

you loosened it.
5. Turn the adjusting bolt until the toe is correct.
6. Tighten the self-locknut to the specified torque

while holding the adjusting bolt.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 15:50:31 61S5N000_180_0008
Wheel Alignment (cont’d) Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection

Turning Angle Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported. Remove the wheels.
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment 2. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts, and
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. brake disc securely against the hub.
1. Turn the steering wheel fully to the right and left Front:
while applying the brake, and check the turning
angles of both front wheels. If the turning angle is
not within the specification or the inward turning
angles differ between the right and left side, go to
step 2.
Turning angle:
Inward: 40°00’
Outward: 31°00’ (reference)
A
108 N·m
(11.0 kgf·m,
80 lbf·ft)
Rear:
2. Check the toe. If it is correct, but the turning angle

is not within the specification, check for bent or 108 N·m
damaged suspension components. (11.0 kgf·m, 80 lbf·ft) A
3. Set up the dial gauge against the hub flange as

shown, and measure the bearing end play moving
the brake disc inward and outward.
Bearing end play:

Standard:
Front/Rear: 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
4. If the bearing end play is more than the standard,

replace the wheel bearing.

00/10/26 15:50:31 61S5N000_180_0008
Wheel Alignment (cont’d) Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection

Turning Angle Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported. Remove the wheels.
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment 2. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts, and
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. brake disc securely against the hub.
1. Turn the steering wheel fully to the right and left Front:
while applying the brake, and check the turning
angles of both front wheels. If the turning angle is
not within the specification or the inward turning
angles differ between the right and left side, go to
step 2.
Turning angle:
Inward: 40°00’
Outward: 31°00’ (reference)
A
108 N·m
(11.0 kgf·m,
80 lbf·ft)
Rear:
2. Check the toe. If it is correct, but the turning angle

is not within the specification, check for bent or 108 N·m
damaged suspension components. (11.0 kgf·m, 80 lbf·ft) A
3. Set up the dial gauge against the hub flange as

shown, and measure the bearing end play moving
the brake disc inward and outward.
Bearing end play:

Standard:
Front/Rear: 0−0.05 mm (0−0.002 in.)
4. If the bearing end play is more than the standard,

replace the wheel bearing.

00/10/26 15:50:31 61S5N000_180_0009
Wheel Runout Inspection

1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely 4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and
supported. measure the radial runout.
2. Check for a bent or deformed wheel. Front and Rear Wheel radial runout:
Standard:
3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure the Aluminum Wheel: 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.)
axial runout by turning the wheel. Steel Wheel: 0−1.0 mm (0−0.04 in.)
Service limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Front and Rear Wheel axial runout:
Standard: Aluminum Wheel:
Aluminum Wheel: 0−0.7 mm (0−0.03 in.)
Steel Wheel: 0−1.0 mm (0−0.04 in.)
Aluminum Wheel:
Steel Wheel:
Steel Wheel:
5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification,

check the wheel bearing end play (see page 18-8).
6. If the bearing end play is within the specification

but the wheel runout is more than the service limit,
replace the wheel.

00/10/26 15:50:32 61S5N000_180_0010
Ball Joint Removal

Special Tools Required 3. Install the special tool as shown. Insert the jaws
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 carefully, making sure not to damage the ball joint
boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the
pressure bolt (B).
Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball
joint. Do not strike the housing or any other part of B
the ball joint connection to disconnect it.
1. Install a hex nut (A) onto the threads of the ball joint
(B). Make sure the nut is flush with the ball joint pin
end to prevent damage to the thread end of the ball
joint pin.
C
07MAC-SL00200
10 mm HEX NUT
A
4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the

A head of the adjusting bolt (A) is in the position
B shown to allow the jaw (C) to pivot.
2. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown 5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the
(A). This will ease installation of the tool and ball joint pin pops loose from the steering arm or
prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads. knuckle. If necessary, apply penetrating type
lubricant to loosen the ball joint pin.
B
A
6. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end
of the ball joint pin, and pull the ball joint out of the
steering arm or knuckle. Inspect the ball joint boot,
and replace it if damaged.
18-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:50:32 61S5N000_180_0011
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement

Exploded View
WHEEL BEARING
Replace.
SNAP RING
6 mm FLAT WASHER
Replace.
FLAT SCREW
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
KNUCKLE
Check for deformation
and damage.
SPLASH GUARD
Check for corrosion, deformation,
and damage.
Replace if rusted.
HUB
Check for deformation,
damage, and cracks.
SPINDLE NUT
BRAKE DISC 22 x 1.5 mm
page 19-12 181 N·m
(18.5 kgf·m, 134 lbf·ft)
Replace.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-11

00/10/26 15:50:33 61S5N000_180_0012
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont’d)

Special Tools Required 5. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B).
• Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100
• Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200
• Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Support base 07965-SD90100 B
22 x 1.5 mm
181 N·m
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is (18.5 kgf·m,
134 lbf·ft)
securely supported.
2. Remove the wheel cap, wheel nuts, and front wheel.
108 N·m
(11.0 kgf·m,
80 lbf·ft)
6. Remove the brake disc retaining flat screws (A).
3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A). A

6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
A (1.0 kgf·m,
8 x 1.25 mm 7.2 lbf·ft)
22 N·m
C (2.2 kgf·m,
26 lbf·ft)
B
12 x 1.25 mm
108 N·m B
(11.0 kgf·m,
80 lbf·ft)
7. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to
push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at
a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively.
4. Remove the caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and
remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle.
To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or
brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the
caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not
twist the brake hose with force.
18-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:50:33 61S5N000_180_0013
8. Remove the flange bolt (A) and wheel sensor (B) 10. Remove the clip (A) from the lower arm ball joint,
from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel and remove the castle nut (B).
sensor connector. NOTE: During installation, insert the clip into the
ball joint pin in the range of 180 degrees or below
A
6 x 1.0 mm from the inside of the vehicle. Insert the clip from
B 9.8 N·m the inside to the outside of the vehicle.
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
07MAC-SL00200
B
12 x 1.25 mm
9. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint REAR FRONT 59−69 N·m
pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the (6.0−7.0 kgf·m,
OUTSIDE A 43−51 lbf·ft)
stabilizer link (D) from the lower arm (E).
11. Disconnect the lower arm from the knuckle using
the special tool (see page 18-10).
12. Loosen the damper pinch bolts (A) while holding

the nuts (B), and remove the bolts and nuts.
C
B
B
D
A
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft) E
A
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m,
76 lbf·ft)
13. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (A) from the

knuckle (B) by tapping the driveshaft end (C) with a
plastic hammer while drawing the knuckle outward,
then remove the knuckle.
NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The

driveshaft joint may come off.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-13

00/10/26 15:50:34 61S5N000_180_0014
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont’d)

14. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the 16. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B)
special tool and a hydraulic press. Take care not to from the knuckle (C).
deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep
B
it from falling when pressed clear.
07GAF-SE00100
Press
A C
17. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B)
using the special tool and a press.
15. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) out of the
Press
hub (B) using the special tool, a commercially
available bearing separator (C), and a press.
07GAF-SE00100 07749-0010000
Press 07746-0010500
B
C
B
A
18-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:50:34 61S5N000_180_0015
18. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash 22. Press a new hub bearing unit (A) into the hub (B)
point solvent before reassembly. using the special tools and a press.
19. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) A
using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the
special tool, and a press. Place the wheel bearing
on the knuckle with the pack seal side facing (metal
color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage
the sleeve of the pack seal.
BLACK
D
C
B
B
INSIDE
METAL COLOR
23. Install the knuckle/hub/hub bearing unit in the
reverse order of removal, and note these items:
07965-SD90100
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
20. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). installing the knuckle.
• Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
B torque values.
• Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
C specification, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot with the clip hole. Do not align the
A castle nut by loosening it.
• Install a new clip on the castle nut after torquing.
• Use a new spindle nut on reassembly.
• Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the
nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the
spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
• Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
surface of the front hub and the inside of the
D
9.3 N·m (0.95 kgf·m, 6.9 lbf·ft) brake disc.
• Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
21. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
(D) to the specified torque. wheel.
• Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-15

00/10/26 15:50:35 61S5N000_180_0016
Front Suspension
Ball Joint Boot Replacement

Special Tools Required 4. Install the boot onto the ball joint pin, then squeeze
Driver attachment 07QAD-P0A0100 it gently to force out any air. Do not let dirt or other
foreign materials get into the boot.
1. Remove the boot.
5. Press the boot with the special tool until the bottom
2. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with fresh seats on the knuckle (A) evenly around.
grease. Do not contaminate the lower collar of the Press
boot (B) with grease.
07QAD-P0A0100
A
A
D
C
6. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the

exposed portion of the ball joint pin.
3. Wipe the grease off the tapered section of the pin

(C), and pack fresh grease onto the base (D).
18-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:50:35 61S5N000_180_0017
Stabilizer Bar Replacement

1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 4. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
securely supported. Remove the front wheels. removal, and note these items:
2. Remove the self-locking nuts (A) while holding the • Use new self-locking nuts on reassembly.
joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect • Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer
the stabilizer links (D) from the stabilizer bar (E) on bar.
the right and left. • Align the ends of the paint marks (A) on the
stabilizer bar with each end of the bushings (B).
D
• Note the fore/aft direction of the bushing holders.
• Refer to Stabilizer Link Replacement to connect
E
the stabilizer bar to the links (see page 18-18).
A C
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m
(4.0 kgf·m, B
29 lbf·ft) B
3. Remove the flange bolts (A) and bushing holders

(B), then remove the bushings (C) and the stabilizer
bar (D).
D
C
B
FORWARD
A
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-17

00/10/26 15:50:36 61S5N000_180_0018
Front Suspension
Stabilizer Link Replacement

1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 4. Install the self-locking nut and flange nut, and
securely supported. Remove the front wheels. lightly tighten them.
2. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut on reassembly.
while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a hex
wrench (D), and remove the stabilizer link (E). 5. Place the floor jack under the lower arm ball joint,
and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle’s
E
weight.
Do not place the jack against the flat section

of the lower arm. Lifting the arm in this area
might bend it.
6. Tighten the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) to

the specified torque values while holding the
respective joint pins (C) with a hex wrench (D).
A
A
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N·m
3. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar and

lower arm with the joint pins set at the center of
each moving range.
B
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m D
C
7. After 5 minutes of driving, re-tighten the self-

locking nut again with the specified torque.
18-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:50:36 61S5N000_180_0019
Lower Arm Replacement

Special Tools Required 5. Remove the flange bolts (A), and remove the lower
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 arm (B).

2. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint

pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the
stabilizer link (D) from the lower arm (E).
A
14 x 1.5 mm
83 N·m (8.5 kgf·m, 61 lbf·ft)
D
6. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items:
E
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
connecting the lower arm to the knuckle.
• Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.
A
10 x 1.25 mm • First install all the components and lightly tighten
39 N·m the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to
(4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft) C
load it with the vehicle’s weight before fully
B
tightening it to the specified torques.
• Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
3. Remove the clip (A) from the lower arm ball joint, specification, then tighten it only far enough to
and remove the castle nut (B). align the slot with the clip hole. Do not align the
NOTE: During installation, insert the clip into the castle nut by loosening it.
ball joint pin the range of 180 degrees or below • Install a new clip on the castle nut after torquing.
from the inside of the vehicle. Insert the clip from • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
the inside to the outside of the vehicle. surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
• Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
C
07MAC-SL00200
B
12 x 1.25 mm
REAR FRONT 59−69 N·m
(6.0−7.0 kgf·m,
OUTSIDE A 43−51 lbf·ft)
4. Disconnect the lower arm from the knuckle using

the special tool (see page 18-10).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-19

00/10/26 15:50:37 61S5N000_180_0020
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Replacement
Exploded View
UPPER SPRING MOUNTING CUSHION

NOTE: Do not remove the cushion from the spring.
SELF-LOCKING NUT If it must be removed, replace it with a new one.
12 x 1.25 mm Align the projection tabs on the cushion and the upper
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) end of the spring as shown. The cushion has the
Replace. six claws. Secure the cushion to the spring by
bending the three tabs (marked with ▼) securely.
UPPER SPRING
DAMPER MOUNTING BASE SEAT
Check for deformation.
20°
DAMPER MOUNTING
BEARING
Check for smooth operation.
UPPER SPRING MOUNTING

CUSHION
Check for deterioration
and damage.
BUMP STOP
Check for weakness
and damage.
DAMPER SPRING
Check for free length.
DAMPER UNIT
Check for oil leak,
gas leak, and smooth
operation.
18-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:50:37 61S5N000_180_0021
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) while holding
Strut spring compressor, Branick MST-580A or Model the nuts (B).
7200, or equivalent, commercially available
Removal A

securly supported. Remove the front wheels.
B
2. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball
joint, and remove the nut (B).
6. Remove the flange nuts (A) from the top of the

damper.
B B
10 mm A
HEX NUT 07MAC-SL00200
3. Disconnect the tie-rod end from the steering arm

on the damper using the special tool (see page 18-
10).
4. Remove the bolts (A), and remove the wheel

sensor harness bracket (B) and brake hose bracket
(C) from the damper. Do not disconnect the wheel
sensor connector.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m 7. Lower the lower arm, and remove the damper
(1.0 kgf·m, assembly (B).
7.2 lbf·ft)
A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-21

00/10/26 15:50:38 61S5N000_180_0022
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Replacement (cont’d)

Disassembly/Inspection Reassembly
1. Compress the damper spring with the 1. Install all the parts except the self-locking nut onto
commercially available strut compressor (A) the damper unit by referring to the Exploded View.
according to the manufacturer’s instructions, then Align the bottom of the spring (A) and the stepped
remove the self-locking nut (B) while holding the part of the lower spring seat (B) as illustrated. Align
damper shaft (C) with a hex wrench (D). Do not the upper spring seat so that the small hole in it is
compress the spring more than necessary to on the engine compartment side when it is installed
remove the nut. in the body.
D LEFT:
C INSIDE
A A
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring 2. Install the damper assembly on a commercially
compressor, then disassemble the damper as available strut spring compressor (C).
shown in the Exploded View.
3. Compress the damper spring with the spring
3. Reassemble all the parts, except for the spring. compressor.
4. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and 4. Install a new self-locking nut (A) on the damper
check for smooth operation through a full stroke, shaft.
both compression and extension. The damper
B
should extend smoothly and constantly when
compression is released. If it does not, the gas is
leaking and the damper should be replaced.
A
12 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·fm, 33 lbf·ft)
5. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench (B), and

tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque.
5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding

during these tests.
18-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:50:38 61S5N000_180_0023
Installation 5. Tighten the flange nuts on the top of the damper to

the specified torque.
1. Lower the lower arm, and position the damper
assembly in the body. 6. Tighten the damper pinch nuts to the specified
torque.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 lbf·ft) 7. Connect the tie-rod end to the steering arm, and
tighten the nut (A) to the specified torque. Install
the cotter pin (B) after tightening, and bend its end
as shown.
2. Loosely install flange nuts (A) onto the top of the

damper.
A
3. Position the damper bottom on the knuckle, and 10 x 1.25 mm B
install the damper pinch bolts (A) and nuts (B), and 43 N·m
(4.4 kgf·m,
lightly tighten the nuts. 32 lbf·ft)
8. Install the brake hose bracket and the flange bolt

A onto the damper, and tighten the bolt to the
specified torque.
9. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the

inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
10. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if

B necessary (see page 18-4).
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m,
76 lbf·ft)
4. Place the floor jack under the lower arm ball joint,
and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle’s
weight.
Do not place the jack against the flat section

of the lower arm. Lifting the arm in this area
might bend it.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-23

00/10/26 15:50:39 61S5N000_180_0024
Rear Suspension
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement

Exploded View
SPLASH GUARD
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 71 lbf·ft)
BRAKE DISC
Check for wear and damage.
KNUCKLE
HUB BEARING UNIT

Check for faulty movement 6 x 1.0 mm
and wear. 9.8 N·m HUB CAP
(1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) Replace.
SPINDLE NUT
22 x 1.5 mm
181 N·m (18.5 kgf·m, 134 lbf·ft)
Replace.
18-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:50:40 61S5N000_180_0025
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is 4. Release the parking brake lever.
securely supported.
5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A).
2. Remove the wheel cap, wheel nuts, and rear wheel.
B
C 10 x 1.25 mm
55 N·m
108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m, 80 lbf·ft)
3. Remove the hub cap (A), raise the stake (B), and
remove the spindle nut (C). A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
6. Remove the caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and

hang the caliper (C) to one side. To prevent damage
to the caliper or brake hose, use a short piece of
wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage.
7. Remove the brake disc retaining screws (A).

B
C
22 x 1.5 mm
181 N·m
(18.5 kgf·m, 134 lbf·ft)
C A
6 x 1.0 mm
B 9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
8. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc (C) to

push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at
a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively.
Remove the brake disc.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-25

00/10/26 15:50:40 61S5N000_180_0026
Rear Suspension
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement Knuckle Replacement

(cont’d)
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is
securely supported. Remove the rear wheels.
9. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) from the spindle.
2. Remove the brake disc and hub bearing unit (see
step 1 on page 18-25).
3. Remove the flange bolts (A) and splash guard (B)

from the knuckle.
A
10. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of

• Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified A

9.8 N·m
torque values. (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
surface of the hub and the inside of the brake 4. Remove the wheel sensor (A), brake hose
disc. mounting bracket (B), and parking cable mounting
• Use a new spindle nut on reassembly. bracket (C) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the
• After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle wheel sensor connector.
nut shoulder against the spindle.
B
• Use a new hub cap on reassembly.
surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
A
C
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
18-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:50:41 61S5N000_180_0027
5. Place the floor jack under the trailing arm (A), to 9. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal,
support it. and note these items:
• First install all the suspension components, and

Do not place the jack against the plate lightly tighten bolts and nuts, then place a floor
section of the lower arm. Be careful not to jack under the lower arm, and raise the
give an impact on the suspension. suspension to load it with the vehicle’s weight
before fully tightening bolts and nuts to the
C
specified torque values.
• Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A)
and adjusting cam (B) with the marked positions
when tightening.
• Use a new self-locking nut on reassembly.
• Tighten all the mounting hardware to the
B • Use a new spindle nut on reassembly.
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m • Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
(6.0 kgf·m, 43 lbf·ft) amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the
nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the
spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
surface of the hub and the inside of the brake
disc.
• Use a new hub cap on reassembly.
A
6. Remove the flange bolt (B), and disconnect the surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
upper arm (C) from the knuckle. wheel.
7. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and necessary (see page 18-4).
adjusting cam (B), the remove the self-locking nut
(C), adjusting cam, and adjusting bolt. Discard the
self-locking nut.
E A
D C
12 x 1.25 mm 12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m,
8. Remove the flange bolt (D), and remove the

knuckle (E).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-27

00/10/26 15:50:41 61S5N000_180_0028
Rear Suspension
Stabilizer Bar Replacement

1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is 4. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
securely supported. Remove the rear wheels. removal, and note these items:
2. Remove the self-locking nuts (A) while holding the • Use new self-locking nuts on reassembly.
joint pins (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect • Make sure the right and left ends of the stabilizer
the stabilizer links (D) from the stabilizer bar (E) on bar are installed on their respective sides of the
the right and left. vehicle.
• Align the ends of the paint marks (A) on the
A
10 x 1.25 mm stabilizer bar with the bushings (B).
38 N·m • Refer to Stabilizer Link Replacement to connect
(3.9 kgf·m, 28 lbf·ft) the stabilizer bar to the links.
E B
C B
3. Remove the flange bolts (A) and bushing holders

(B), then remove the bushings (C) and the stabilizer
bar (D).
A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
D
18-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:50:42 61S5N000_180_0029
Stabilizer Link Replacement

1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is 4. Install the self-locking nut and flange nut, and
securely supported. Remove the rear wheels. lightly tighten them.
2. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut on reassembly.
while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a hex
wrench (D), and remove the stabilizer link (E). 5. Place a jack under the trailing arm at the knuckle
side end, and raise the suspension to load it with
A
the vehicle’s weight.
E
6. Tighten the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) to
the specified torque values while holding the
respective joint pins (C) with a hex wrench (D).
A
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 lbf·ft)
D
C
3. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar and

trailing arm with the joint pins set at the center of
each moving range. B
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m
(4.0 kgf·m,
29 lbf·ft)
D C
7. After 5 minutes of driving, re-tighten the self-

locking nut again to the specified torque.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-29

00/10/26 15:50:42 61S5N000_180_0030
Rear Suspension
Upper Arm Replacement

1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is 5. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of
securely supported. Remove the rear wheels. removal, and note these items:
2. Place a floor jack under the trailing arm, and • First install all the suspension components and
support the suspension. lightly tighten bolts and nuts, then place a jack
under the trailing arm, and raise the suspension
3. Remove the flange bolt (A) and wheel sensor to load it with the vehicle’s weight before fully
harness bracket (B). tightening bolts and nuts to the specified torque
values.
B • Tighten all the mounting hardware to the
wheel.
A
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
4. Remove the flange bolts (A), and remove the upper

arm (B).
A
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m,
43 lbf·ft) A
12 x 1.25 mm
B 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m,
43 lbf·ft)
18-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:50:43 61S5N000_180_0031
Trailing Arm Replacement

1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is 7. Remove the trailing arm rear mounting bolt (A).
A
12 x 1.25 mm
2. Remove the knuckle (see page 18-26). 59 N·m
3. Place the floor jack under the trailing arm (A) to
support it.
B
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N·m
(3.9 kgf·m,
28 lbf·ft)
E
8. Lower the jack, and remove the trailing arm.
D 9. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of

12 x 1.25 mm removal, and note these items:
61 N·m (6.2 kgf·m,
45 lbf·ft)
A
• First install all the suspension components and
4. Remove the flange nut (B), and disconnect the lightly tighten bolts and nuts, then place a jack
stabilizer link (C) from the trailing arm. under the trailing arm, and raise the suspension
to load it with the vehicle’s weight before fully
5. Remove the flange bolt (D), and disconnect the tightening bolts and nuts to the specified torque
damper (E) from the trailing arm. values.
• Tighten all the mounting hardware to the
6. Remove the trailing arm front mounting bolts (A). specified torque values.
wheel.
A
12 x 1.25 mm
108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m,
80 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-31

00/10/26 15:50:43 61S5N000_180_0032
Rear Suspension
Damper/Spring Replacement
Exploded View
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
Replace.
DAMPER MOUNTING
COLLAR
DAMPER MOUNTING WASHER

DAMPER MOUNTING Check for weakness.
BUSHING
DAMPER MOUNTING
BASE
DAMPER MOUNTING DUST COVER

BUSHING
DAMPER MOUNTING
PLATE
SPRING MOUNTING BUMP STOP COVER

CUSHION Check for bending
Check for deterioration and damage.
and damage.
BUMP STOP PLATE
DAMPER SPRING BUMP STOP

Check for weakened Check for weakness
compression and damage. and damage.
DAMPER UNIT
Check for oil leak,
gas leak, and smooth
operation.
18-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:50:43 61S5N000_180_0033
Removal 4. Remove the damper assembly from the body.

securly supported. Remove the front wheels.
2. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the bottom of the

damper.
3. Remove the flange nuts (A) from the top of the

damper in the trunk.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-33

00/10/26 15:50:44 61S5N000_180_0034
Rear Suspension
Damper/Spring Replacement (cont’d)

Disassembly/Inspection Reassembly
1. Compress the damper spring with the 1. Install all the parts except the damper mounting
commercially available strut compressor (A) washer and self-locking nut onto the damper unit
according to the manufacturer’s instructions, then by referring to the Exploded View. Align the bottom
remove the self-locking nut (B) while holding the of the spring (A) and the stepped part of the lower
damper shaft (C) with a hex wrench (D). Do not spring seat (B), and align the damper mounting
compress the spring more than necessary to base as shown.
remove the nut.
C C
LEFT RIGHT
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring

21±3° 21 ±3°
compressor, then disassemble the damper as
shown in the Exploded View.
3. Reassemble all the parts, except for the spring.

2. Install the damper assembly on a commercially
4. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and available strut spring compressor (C).
check for smooth operation through a full stroke,
both compression and extension. The damper 3. Compress the damper spring with the spring
should extend smoothly and constantly when compressor.
compression is released. If it does not, the gas is
leaking and the damper should be replaced. 4. Install the washer (A) and a new self-locking nut (B)
on the damper shaft.
B
10 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m
5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, or binding
during these tests. 5. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench (C), and
tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque.
18-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:50:44 61S5N000_180_0035
Installation 3. Loosely install the flange bolt (A) on the bottom of

the damper.
1. Position the damper assembly in the body. Note
the direction of the damper mounting base so that
the small hole dot on it is toward the front and
inside of the vehicle.
INSIDE
FORWARD
A
12 x 1.25 mm
61 N·m (6.2 kgf·m, 45 lbf·ft)
4. Raise the suspension with a floor jack to load the

vehicle weight, and tighten the nuts and bolt to the
2. Loosely install the flange nuts (A) onto the top of 5. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the
the damper. inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel.
A 6. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if

10 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m necessary (see page 18-4).
(6.0 kgf·m,
43 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 18-35

00/10/26 15:56:24 61S5N000_190_0001
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components

Special Tools ................................................................. 19-2
Brake System Operation and
Leakage Check ............................................................ 19-4
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch
Adjustment .................................................................. 19-5
Parking Brake Check and
Adjustment .................................................................. 19-6
Brake System Bleeding ................................................ 19-7
Brake System Indicator Circuit
Diagram ....................................................................... 19-8
Parking Brake Switch Test ........................................... 19-9
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test ...................................... 19-9
Front Brake Pads Inspection and
Replacement ............................................................... 19-10
Front Brake Disc Inspection ......................................... 19-12
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul ...................................... 19-13
Master Cylinder Replacement ..................................... 19-14
Master Cylinder Inspection .......................................... 19-15
Brake Booster
Pushrod Clearance Adjustment ................................ 19-15
Brake Booster Test ....................................................... 19-17
Brake Booster Replacement ........................................ 19-18
Rear Brake Pads Inspection and
Replacement ............................................................... 19-19
Rear Brake Disc Inspection .......................................... 19-21
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul ....................................... 19-22
Brake Hoses and Lines Inspection .............................. 19-23
Brake Hose Replacement ............................................. 19-24
Parking Brake Cable Replacement .............................. 19-25
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Components ............................................... 19-27
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 15:56:24 61S5N000_190_0002
Special Tools
07JAG-SD40100 Pushrod Adjustment Gauge 1

00/10/26 15:56:28 61S5N000_190_0003
INDICATOR
Brake System Indicator Circuit
Diagram, page 19-8
Parking Brake Switch
Test, page 19-9
Brake Fluid Level Switch
Test, page 19-9
PARKING BRAKE CABLE

Parking Brake Cable
REAR DISC BRAKE

Rear Brake Pads Inspection and
FRONT BRAKES Rear Brake Disc
Front Brake Pads, Inspection and Inspection, page 19-21
Replacement, page 19-10 Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul,
Front Brake Disc page 19-22
Front Brake Caliper
Overhaul, page 19-13 PARKING BRAKE LEVER
Parking Brake
BRAKE BOOSTER Check and Adjustment, page 19-6
Brake Booster
Test, page 19-17
Brake Booster BRAKE PEDAL
Replacement, page 19-18 Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch
BRAKE HOSES and LINES
Brake Hoses and Lines
Brake Hoses
MASTER CYLINDER
Master Cylinder
Removal, page 19-14
Master Cylinder Inspection, page 19-15
Brake Booster Pushrod Clearance
Brake System Bleeding, page 19-7

00/10/26 15:56:29 61S5N000_190_0004
Brake System Operation and Leakage Check

Check all of the following items:
Component Procedure
Brake Booster (A) Check brake operation by applying the brakes during a test drive. If the brakes do not
work properly, check the brake booster. Replace the brake booster as an assembly if it
does not work properly or if there are signs of leakage.
Piston Cup and • Check brake operation by applying the brakes. Look for damage or signs of fluid
Pressure Cup leakage. Replace the master cylinder if the pedal does not work properly or if there
Inspection (B) is damage or signs of fluid leakage.
• Check for a difference in brake pedal stroke between quick and slow brake
applications. Replace the master cylinder if there is a difference in pedal stroke.
Brake Hoses (C) Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage. Replace the brake hose with a new one if it
is damaged or leaking.
Caliper Piston Seal and Check brake operation by applying the brakes.
Piston Boots (D) Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage. If the pedal does not work properly, the
brakes drag, or there is damage or signs of fluid leakage, disassemble and inspect the
brake caliper. Replace the boots and seals with new ones whenever the brake caliper
is disassembled.
C
D
A
B D
C D

00/10/26 15:56:29 61S5N000_190_0005
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment

Pedal Height 4. Push in the brake pedal position switch until its
plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching
1. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn the brake
connector, turn the brake pedal position switch (A) pedal position switch clockwise to lock it. Make
counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is
longer touching the brake pedal. released.
B A
2. Lift up the carpet. At the insulator cutout, measure
the pedal height (B) from the middle of the right
side of the pedal pad (C).
Standard Pedal Height (with carpet removed):

M/T: 184 mm (7 4/16 in.)
A/T: 188 mm (7 6/16 in.)
B 5. Check the brake pedal free play as described below.
Pedal Free Play

1. With the engine off, inspect the play (A) on the
pedal pad (B) by pushing the pedal by hand.
C
Free Play: 0.4−3.0 mm (0.016−0.118 in.)
3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the

pushrod in or out with pliers until the standard
pedal height from the floor is reached. After
adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not
adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed.
C
Lower the pedal

B
Raise
the pedal
A
15 N·m 2. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust
(1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft) the brake pedal position switch (C). If the pedal free
play is insufficient, it may result in brake drag.

00/10/26 15:56:30 61S5N000_190_0006
Parking Brake Check and Adjustment

Check 5. Remove the console cover (see page 20-64).
1. Pull the parking brake lever (A) with 196 N (20 kgf, 6. Pull the parking brake lever up one click.
44 lbf) of force to fully apply the parking brake. The
parking brake lever should be locked within the
specified number of clicks (B).
Lever locked clicks: 7−8

pulled up with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf)
A
7. Tighten the adjusting nut (A) until the parking

brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels are
2. Adjust the parking brake if the lever clicks are not turned.
within the specification.
Adjustment
1. Release the parking brake lever fully.
2. Loosen the parking brake adjusting nut, start the

engine, and press the brake pedal several times to
set the self-adjusting brake before adjusting the
parking brake.
3. Block the front wheels, then raise the rear of the

vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
4. Make sure the parking brake arm (A) on the rear

brake caliper contacts the brake caliper pin (B).
NOTE: The parking brake arm will only contact the
brake caliper pin when the parking brake adjusting A
nut is loosen.
8. Release the parking brake lever fully, and check
that the parking brakes do not drag when the rear
wheels are turned. Readjust if necessary.
9. Make sure the parking brakes are fully applied

when the parking brake lever is pulled up fully.
10. Reinstall the console cover.

00/10/26 15:56:31 61S5N000_190_0007
Brake System Bleeding

NOTE: 5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage sequence shown below until air bubbles no longer
the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it appear in the fluid.
off immediately with water.
BLEEDING SEQUENCE:
• The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the
MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding
Front Right Rear Right
procedure and checked after bleeding each brake
caliper. Add fluid as required.
• Do not reuse the drained fluid.
• Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 brake fluid. Non-
Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten
the life of the system.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed
to contaminate the brake fluid.
Front Left Rear Left
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at
the MAX (upper) level line (A).
6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX
(upper) level line.
FRONT BRAKE:
A
2. Slide a piece of clear plastic hose over the first

bleed screw, and submerge the other end in a
container of new brake fluid.
3. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal

several times, then apply steady pressure.
4. Loosen the left-front brake bleed screw to allow air REAR BRAKE:
to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed
screw securely.

00/10/26 15:56:31 61S5N000_190_0008
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION FUSE BOX
SWITCH
No.19 (80A) No.20 (40A) IG1 No.10 (7.5A)
WHT BLK/YEL YEL
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and START (III)
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
BRAKE
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
WHT/GRN
UNDER-DASH
FUSE BOX
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
GRN/RED
13
DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT
GRN/RED GRN/ORN
BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL SWITCH PARKING BRAKE
CLOSED: Float down SWITCH
OPEN: Float up CLOSED: Lever up
OPEN: Lever down
BLK
G301

00/10/26 15:56:31 61S5N000_190_0009
Parking Brake Switch Test Brake Fluid Level Switch Test

1. Remove the console, and disconnect the connector Check for continuity between the terminals (A) with the
(A) from the switch (B). float in the down position and the up position.
• Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir.

A With the float down, there should be continuity.
• Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to MAX (upper) level
B
(B). With the float up, there should be no continuity.
UP
B
A
DOWN
2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal

and body ground:
• With the brake lever up, there should be

continuity.
• With the brake lever down, there should be no
continuity.

00/10/26 15:56:32 61S5N000_190_0010
Front Brake Pads Inspection and Replacement

Replacement
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of 1. Remove the bolt (B), and pivot the caliper (C) up out
material composition, could be hazardous to your of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for
health. damage and deterioration.
• Avoid breathing dust particles.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-appropriate vacuum
cleaner.
Inspection
2. Check the thickness of the inner pad (A) and outer

pad (B). Do not include the thickness of the backing
plate.
Brake pad thickness:

Standard: 9.5−10.5 mm (0.37−0.41 in.)
Service limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) B
2. Remove the pad shim (A) and pads (B).

Inner pad:
Outer pad:
A
B
3. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service

limit, replace all the pads as a set. B
19-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:32 61S5N000_190_0011
3. Remove the pad retainers (A). 10. Push in the piston (A) so the caliper will fit over the
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
down.
B
8 x 1.0 mm
34 N·m
3.5 kgf·m,
25 lbf·ft)
4. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and A

check for grooves and cracks.
5. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks.
6. Apply Dow Corning Molykote M77 grease to the

retainers on their mating surfaces against the 11. Pivot the caliper down into position. Being carefull
caliper bracket. not to damage the pin boots, install the bolt (B), and
tighten it to the specified torque.
7. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess grease off the
retainers. Contaminated brake discs and pads 12. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure
reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs the brake works, then test-drive.
and pads.
NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a
8. Apply Dow Corning Molykote M77 or Daikalub greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake
528D grease to both sides of the pad shim (A), the pads have been replaced as a set. Several
back of the pads (B), and the other areas indicated applications of the brake pedal will restore the
by the arrows. normal pedal stroke.
Wipe excess grease off the shim. Contaminated
brake discs and pads reduce stopping ability. Keep 13. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
grease off the discs and pads. joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
9. Install the brake pads and pad shim correctly.

Install the pads with the wear indicators (C) on the
inside.
If you are reusing the pads, always reinstall the
brake pads in their original positions to prevent a
momentary loss of braking efficiency.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-11

00/10/26 15:56:33 61S5N000_190_0012
Front Brake Disc Inspection

Runout Thickness and Parallelism
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is
securely supported. Remove the front wheels. securely supported. Remove the front wheels.
2. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-10). 2. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-10).
3. Inspect the disc surface for damage and cracks. 3. Using a micrometer, measure disc thickness at
Clean the disc thoroughly and remove all rust. eight points, approximately 45° apart and 10 mm
(0.4 in.) in from the outer edge of the disc. Replace
4. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts, and the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less
tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the than the max. refinishing limit.
brake disc securely, against the hub.
Brake Disc Thickness:
Standard: 20.9−21.8 mm (0.82−0.86 in.)
Max. Refinishing Limit: 19.0 mm (0.75 in.)
10 mm Brake Disc Parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.)
(0.4 in.)
max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference

between the thickness measurements.
A
10 mm (0.4 in.)
108 N·m
(11.0 kgf·m,
80 lbf·ft)
5. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as

shown, and measure the runout at 5 mm (0.2 in.)
from the outer edge of the disc.
Brake Disc Runout:

6. If the disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the

brake disc.
Max. Refinish Limit: 19.0 mm (0.75 in.)

4. If the disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism,
NOTE: refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe.
• If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-way
refinishing, replace it (see page 18-11). Manufacturing Co. and the ‘‘Front Brake Disc
• A new disc should be refinished if its runout is Lathe’’ offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved
greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 in.). for this operation.
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit

for refinishing, replace it (see page 18-11).
19-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:34 61S5N000_190_0013
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water.
• To prevent dripping, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
• Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid.
• When reusing pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
• Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 brake fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the
system.
• Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
• Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
• Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
• Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled.
• After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
: Rubber grease
: Silicone grease
8 x 1.0 mm
BOOTS 34 N·m
BRAKE HOSE BLEED SCREW

9 N·m
(0.9 kgf·m,
7 lbf·ft)
CALIPER BODY
BANJO BOLT
CALIPER PIN A 3.4 N·m
(3.5 kgf·m,
25 lbf·ft) PISTON SEAL
SEALING Replace.
WASHERS
Replace.
PAD RETAINERS
BRAKE PADS
BUSHING
PISTON
PISTON BOOT BOOT CLIP

CALIPER PIN B Replace. Replace.
WEAR INDICATOR
PISTON BOOT CALIPER Install inner pad with
Replace. BRACKET its wear indicator downward.
12 x 1.25 mm OUTER PAD SHIM
108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m,
80 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-13

00/10/26 15:56:34 61S5N000_190_0014
Master Cylinder Replacement

NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may 7. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of
damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, removal, and note these items:
wash it off immediately with water.
• Replace all the rubber parts with new ones
1. Remove the reservoir cap and brake fluid from the whenever the master cylinder is removed.
master cylinder reservoir. • Check the pushrod clearance before installing the
master cylinder, and adjust it if necessary (see
2. Remove the brake fluid level sensor connector (A). page 19-15).
• Use a new rod seal on reassembly.
3. Disconnect the brake lines (B) from the master • Coat the inner bore lip and outer circumference
cylinder (C). To prevent spills, cover the hose joints of the new rod seal with the recommended seal
with rags or shop towels. grease in the master cylinder set.
• Install the rod seal onto the brake booster with its
4. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (D) and grooved side toward the master cylinder.
washers. • Check the brake pedal height and free play after
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
5. Remove the master cylinder from the brake booster necessary (see page 19-5).
(E). Be careful not to bend or damage the brake
pipes when removing the master cylinder.
6. Remove the rod seal (F) from the brake booster or

master cylinder.
BOOSTER A
SIDE
C
B D
15 N·m 15 N·m
F (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft) (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
19-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 18:42:28 61S5N000_190_0015
Master Cylinder Inspection Brake Booster Pushrod Clearance

Adjustment
NOTE:
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of
dust and other foreign particles. Special Tools Required
• Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder Pushrod adjustment gauge 07JAG-SD40100
assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly with
a new part if necessary. NOTE: Brake booster pushrod-to-piston clearance must
• Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to contaminate the be checked and adjustments made, if necessary, before
brake fluid. installing the master cylinder.
RESERVOIR CAP
Check for blockage 1. Set the special tool (A) on the master cylinder body
of vent holes. (B), push in the center shaft (C) until the top of it
contacts the end of the secondary piston (D) by
turning the adjusting nut (E).
RESERVOIR SEAL
Check for damage
and deterioration.
A
STRAINER 07JAG-SD40100
Remove accumulated
RESERVOIR sediment. E
2. Without disturbing the center shaft’s position,

install the special tool (A) backwards on the booster.
MASTER CYLINDER
Check for leaks,
C
rust and damage. 0−101 kPa (0−760 mmHg, 30 in.Hg)
B
15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
A
07JAG-SD40100
3. Install the master cylinder nuts (B), and tighten

them to the specified torque.
4. Connect the booster in-line with a vacuum gauge

(C) 0−101 kPa (0−760 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) to the
booster’s engine vacuum supply, and maintain an
engine speed that will deliver 66 kPa (500 mmHg,
20 in.Hg) vacuum.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-15

00/10/26 15:56:36 61S5N000_190_0017
Brake Booster Test

Functional Test Booster Check Valve Test
1. With the engine stopped, press the brake pedal 1. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (check
several times to deplete the vacuum reservoir, then valve built-in) (A) at the booster (B) side.
press the pedal hard, and hold it for 15 seconds. If
the pedal sinks, either the master cylinder is B
bypassing internally, or the brake system (master
cylinder, lines, modulator, proportioning valve, or
calipers) is leaking.
A
2. Start the engine with the pedal pressed. If the pedal
sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is operating
normally. If the pedal height does not vary, the
booster or check valve is faulty.
3. With the engine running, press the brake pedal

lightly. If the brake pedal sinks more than 10 mm
(3/8 in.) in 3 minutes, the master cylinder is faulty.
A slight change in pedal height when the A/C
compressor cycles on and off is normal. (The A/C
compressor load changes the vacuum available to
the booster.)
2. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be
Leak Test vacuum available. If no vacuum is available, the
check valve is not working properly. Replace the
1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then brake booster vacuum hose and check valve, and
stop the engine. If the pedal height does not vary retest.
while pressed for 30 seconds, the vacuum booster
is OK. If the pedal rises, the booster is faulty.
2. With the engine stopped, press the brake pedal

several times using normal pressure. When the
pedal is first pressed, it should be low. On
consecutive applications, the pedal height should
gradually rise. If the pedal position does not vary,
check the booster check valve.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-17

00/10/26 15:56:36 61S5N000_190_0018
Brake Booster Replacement

1. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-14). 6. Remove the under-dash cover and fuse/relay box in
the passenger compartment (see page 22-49).
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the brake
booster. 7. Remove the clip (A) and the joint pin (B), and
disconnect the yoke from the brake pedal.
A D
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
B
B A
C
8 x 1.25 mm
13 N·m (1.3 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
8. Remove the brake booster mounting flange

E nuts (C).
3. Remove the air conditioner hose (B) and power 9. Remove the brake booster (A) from the engine
steering hose (C) from their respective holders. compartment.
4. Remove the flange bolts (D) and throttle cable A

holder (E).
5. Remove the brake pipes (A) from the ABS

modulator (B).
A 10 x 1.0 mm
15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
10. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of

• Adjust the pushrod clearance before installing

the brake booster (see page 19-15).
B • Use a new clip whenever installing.
• After installing the brake booster and master
10 x 1.0 mm
cylinder, fill the reservoir with new brake fluid,
15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft) bleed the brake system (see page 19-7), and
adjust the brake pedal height and free play (see
page 19-5).
19-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:37 61S5N000_190_0019
Rear Brake Pads Inspection and Replacement

Replacement
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of 1. Remove the bolt (A) and brake hose (B) from the
material composition, could be hazardous to your mounting bracket.
health.
B
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
Inspection A

C
2. Check the thickness of the inner and outer pads (A).

Do not include the thickness of the backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:

Standard: 8.5−9.5 mm (0.33−0.37 in.)
2. Remove the caliper bolts (C), and remove the

caliper (D) from the caliper bracket.
3. Remove the pad shims (A) and pads (B).

A
3. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service

limit, replace all the pads as a set.
B
A
A
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-19

00/10/26 15:56:38 61S5N000_190_0020
Rear Brake Pads Inspection and Replacement (cont’d)

4. Remove the pad retainers (A). 11. Rotate the caliper piston clockwise into the cylinder,
then align the cutout (A) in the piston with the tab
(B) on the inner pad by turning the piston back so
the caliper can be installed on the pad. Lubricate
the boot with rubber grease to avoid twisting the
A piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out
so it is positioned properly.
5. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and

check for grooves and cracks.
F
6. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
7. Apply Dow Corning Molykote M77 grease to the
retainers on their mating surfaces against the
caliper bracket.
8. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess grease off the

retainers. Contaminated brake discs and pads
reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs
and pads.
D
9. Apply Dow Corning Molykote M77 or Daikalub 8 x 1.25 mm
C 23 N·m
528D grease to both sides of the pad shims (A), the (2.3 kgf·m,
back of the pads (B), and the other areas indicated 17 lbf·ft)
by the arrows. Wipe excess grease off the shim.
Contaminated brake discs and pads reduce
stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads.
A
B
A
12. Install the brake caliper (C) and caliper bolts (D),
and tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
13. Install the brake hose (E) and the bolt (F), and
tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
A
C
B
14. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure
the brake works then test-drive.
B
NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a
greeter pedal stroke immediately after the brake
10. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. pads have been replaced as a set. Several
Install the pads with the wear indicators (C) on the applications of the brake pedal will restore the
inside. normal pedal stroke.
If you are reusing the pads, always reinstall the
brake pads in their original positions to prevent a 15. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
momentary loss of braking efficiency. joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
19-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:38 61S5N000_190_0021
Rear Brake Disc Inspection

Runout Thickness and Parallelism
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is
securely supported. Remove the rear wheels. securely supported. Remove the rear wheels.
2. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-19). 2. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-19).
3. Inspect the disc surface for damage and cracks. 3. Using a micrometer, measure disc thickness at
Clean the disc thoroughly, and remove all rust. eight points, approximately 45° apart and 10 mm
(0.4 in.) in from the outer edge of the disc. Replace
4. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts, and the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less
tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the than the max. refinishing limit.
brake disc securely against the hub.
Brake Disc Thickness:
10 mm Standard: 8.9−9.1 mm (0.350−0.358 in.)
(0.4 in.) Max. Refinishing Limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Brake Disc Parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.)
max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference

between the thickness measurements.
A
10 mm
(0.4 in.)
108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m, 80 lbf·ft)
5. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as

shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (0.4 in.)
from the outer edge of the disc.
Brake Disc Runout:

6. If the disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the

brake disc.
Max. Refinish Limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
NOTE: 4. If the disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism,

• If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe.
refinishing, replace it (see page 18-24).
• A new disc should be refinished if its runout is NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit
greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 in.). for refinishing, replace it (see page 18-24).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-21

00/10/26 15:56:39 61S5N000_190_0022
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
• To prevent dripping, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
• Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter contaminates the brake fluid.
• When reusing pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
• Use only clean Genuine Honda DOT 3 brake fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of
the system.
• Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
• Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
• Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
• Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled.
• After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
: Rubber grease BLEED SCREW

: Silicone grease
BRAKE HOSE
BANJO BOLT
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
SELING WASHERS
Replase.
CAM SLEEVE PISTON

PIN
ADJUSTING BOLT
CAM BOOT BEARING A

Replace.
SPASER
SPRING COVER
LEVEL CIRCLIP
CALIPER BODY
PISTON
ARM O-RING CUP
SPRING Replase. Replase.
WASHER RETURN
SPRING 10 mm FLANGE ADJUSTING
BOLTS SPRING B
PARKING NUT 23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m,
27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)
20 lbf·ft)
PAD SPRING PISTON SEAL
Replace. PISTON BOOT
Replace.
CALIPER BOLTS
23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)
PIN B
INNER PAD SHIM
BRAKE PADS
PIN A
OUTER PAD SHIM
RETAINER
PIN BOOT CALIPER BRACKET

Replace.
10 mm FLANGE BOLTS
55 N·m (5.6 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft)
19-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:40 61S5N000_190_0023
Brake Hoses and Lines Inspection

1. Inspect the brake hoses, for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting.
2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leakage. Also check for bent brake lines.
3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder and ABS modulator unit (if equipped) for damage and leakage.
NOTE: Replace the brake hose clip whenever the brake hose is serviced.
BRAKE LINE-to-BRAKE HOSE

15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
BRAKE HOSE-to-CALIPER
(BANJOBOLT)
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
BLEED SCREW
BRAKE LINE-to-BRAKE HOSE

15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
MASTER CYLINDER-to-BRAKE LINE

15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
PROPORTIONING CONTROL VALVE-to-

BRAKE LINE
15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
BRAKE HOSE-to-CALIPER
(BANJO BOLT)
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
BLEED SCREW
9 N·m
VEHICLES WITH ABS
ABS MODULATOR UNIT-to-BRAKE LINE

15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-23

00/10/26 15:56:41 61S5N000_190_0024
Brake Hose Replacement

NOTE: 6. Install the brake hose bracket (A) on the damper
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage with the flange bolt (B) first, then connect the brake
the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off hose to the caliper with the banjo bolt (C) and new
immediately with water. sealing washers (D).
• To prevent dripping, cover disconnected pipe joints B
with rags or shop towels. 8 x 1.25 mm
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of 22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·fm,
dust and other foreign particles. 16 lbf·ft)
• Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to C
34 N·m
do so. (3.5 kgf·fm,
25 lbf·ft)
A
1. Replace the brake hose (A) if the hose is twisted,
cracked, or if it leaks.
B C
7. Install the hose onto the hose bracket on the body

with a new hose clip (A).
A A
2. Disconnect the brake hose from the brake line (B)

using a 10 mm flare nut wrench (C).
3. Remove the flange bolt (A), and remove the brake

hose brackets from the damper.
10 x 1.0 mm
15 N·m
(1.5 kgf·fm, 11 lbf·ft)
8. Connect the brake line to the brake hose.
B 9. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake

system (see page 19-7).
A 10. Do the following checks:
• Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary.
C • Check the brake hoses for interference and
twisting.
4. Remove and discard the hose clip (B).
5. Remove the banjo bolt (C), and remove the brake

hose from the caliper.
19-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:41 61S5N000_190_0025
Parking Brake Cable Replacement

Exploded View
PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Check for smooth
operation.
(Sliding surface)
EQUALIZER
ADJUSTING NUT
PARKING BRAKE
SWITCH
PARKING BRAKE LEVER

BRACKET
8 x 1.25 mm
PARKING BRAKE CABLE 22 N·m
Check for faulty movement. (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-25

00/10/26 15:56:42 61S5N000_190_0026
Parking Brake Cable Replacement (cont’d)

NOTE: 7. Install the new cable in reverse order of removal,
• The parking brake cables must not be bent or and note these items.
distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and • Be careful not to bend or distort the cable.
premature failure. • Be sure the parking brake cable clip is fully
• Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this seated on the cable housing.
procedure. • Do the parking brake cable adjustment (see page
19-6).
1. Release the parking brake lever fully.
2. Remove the console cover (see page 20-64).
3. Loosen the parking brake cable adjusting nut (A).
4. Remove the parking brake cable clip (A) from the

brake cable housing (B).
B
A
5. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the lever

(C).
6. Remove the parking brake cable mounting

hardware, then remove the cable.
19-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:42 61S5N000_190_0027
Brakes
ABS Components
General Troubleshooting Information ....................... 19-29
DTC Troubleshooting Index ........................................ 19-32
System Description ...................................................... 19-34
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 19-40
DTC Troubleshooting ................................................... 19-42
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting ...................... 19-49
ABS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and
Installation ................................................................. 19-52
Wheel Sensor Inspection ............................................. 19-53
Wheel Sensor Replacement ........................................ 19-53
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 15:56:44 61S5N000_190_0028
ABS Components
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX RIGHT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
LEFT-REAR
WHEEL SENSOR
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR DATA LINK CONNECTOR (16P)

ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR

Removal and Installation, page 19-52 Inspection, page 19-53
19-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:45 61S5N000_190_0029

ABS Indicator Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
• If the system is OK, the ABS indicator goes off 2 • The memory can hold three DTCs. However, when
seconds after turning the ignition switch ON (II) the same DTC is detected more than once, the more
without starting the engine, and then comes on again recent DTC is written over the earlier one.
and goes off 2 seconds later after starting the engine. Therefore, when the same problem is detected
This occurs because the ABS control unit is turned repeatedly, it is memorized as a single DTC.
on by the IG2 power source. • The DTCs are in the order they occurred, beginning
• The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS control with the most recent.
unit detects a problem in the system. However, even • The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-
though the system is operating properly, the indicator volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs
will come on under these conditions: are not cleared when the battery is disconnected, the
– Only the drive wheels rotate ignition switch is turned off, or the system returns to
– One drive wheel is stuck normal. Do the specified procedures to clear the
– The vehicle goes into a spin DTCs.
– The ABS continues to operate for a long time.
– The vehicle is subjected to an electrical signal Self-diagnosis
disturbance
• Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories:
To determine the actual cause of the problem, question – Initial diagnosis:
the customer about the problem, taking the above Done right after the engine starts and until the ABS
conditions into consideration. indicator goes off
– Regular diagnosis:
• When a problem is detected and the ABS indicator Done right after the initial diagnosis until the
comes on, there are cases when the indicator stays ignition switch is turned OFF
on until the ignition switch is turned OFF, and cases • When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the
when the indicator goes off automatically when the system does the following:
system returns to normal. – Turns the ABS indicator on
– DTC 61: The ABS indicator goes off automatically – Memorizes the DTC
when the system returns to normal. – Stops ABS control
– DTC 11, 13, 15, 17, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 54,
or 81: The ABS indicator stays on until the ignition Kickback
switch is turned OFF whether or not the system
returns to normal. The pump motor operates when the ABS is functioning,
– DTC 12, 14, 16, 18, 21, 51, 52, or 53: The ABS and the fluid in the reservoir is forced out to the master
indicator goes off when the vehicle is driven again cylinder, causing kickback at the brake pedal.
and the system is OK after the ignition switch is
turned from OFF to ON (II). Pump Motor
• The pump motor operates when the ABS is
functioning.
• The ABS control unit checks the pump motor
operation when the vehicle is started the first time
after the ignition switch is turned ON (II). You may
hear the motor operate at this time, but it is normal.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-29

00/10/26 15:56:45 61S5N000_190_0030
ABS Components

How to Troubleshoot ABS DTCs 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and follow the
prompts on the PGM Tester to display the DTC(s)
The troubleshooting flowchart procedures assume that on the screen. After determining the DTC, refer to
the cause of the problem is still present and the ABS the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
indicator is still on. Following the flowchart when the
ABS indicator does not come on can result in incorrect NOTE: See the Honda PGM Tester user’s manual
diagnosis. for specific instructions.
The connector illustrations show the female terminal
connectors with a single outline and the male terminal Service Check Signal Circuit Method:
connectors with a double outline. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda
PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector
1. Question the customer about the conditions when (DLC) (B) under the driver’s side of the dashboard.
the problem occured, and try to reproduce the
same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out
A
when the ABS indicator came on, such as during
ABS control, after ABS control, when the vehicle
was at a certain speed, etc.
2. When the ABS indicator does not come on during

the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done based on B
the DTC, check for loose connectors, poor terminal
contact, etc., before you start troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTC, and test-drive

the vehicle. Make sure the ABS indicator does not
come on.
How to Retrieve ABS DTCs

Honda PGM Tester Method: 2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda Honda PGM Tester.
PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector
(DLC) (B) under the driver’s side of the dashboard. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
19-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:46 61S5N000_190_0031
4. The blinking frequency indicates the DTC. DTCs are How to Clear ABS DTCs
indicated by a series of long and short blinks. One
long blink equals 10 short blinks. Add the long and Honda PGM Tester Method:
short blinks together to determine the DTC. After 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda
determining the DTC, refer to the DTC PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector
Troubleshooting Index. (DLC) (B) under the driver’s side of the dashboard.
NOTE:
A
• If the DTC is not memorized, the ABS indicator
will go off for 3.6 seconds, and then come back
on.
• If the ABS indicator stays on, troubleshoot for
’’ABS indicator does not go off’’ (see page 19-49).
B
The system will not indicate the DTC unless these
conditions are met:
• The brake pedal is not pressed.
• The ignition switch is turned ON (II).
• The SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before
the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Example of DTC 15
Short blinks
Long blink (five times) 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and clear the
DTC(s) by following the screen prompts on the
ON Honda PGM Tester.
OFF NOTE: See the Honda PGM Tester user’s manual

for specific instructions.
Example of DTC 22 Cycling the ignition switch Method:

Short blinks
Long blinks (two times) (two times) Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch ON (II) then
OFF at least 20 times.
ON
OFF
6. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester from the DLC.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-31

00/10/26 15:56:46 61S5N000_190_0032
ABS Components

DTC Detection Item Note
DTC:11 Right-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-42)
DTC:12 Faulty right-front wheel sensor pulse signal (see page 19-43)
DTC:13 Left-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-42)
DTC:14 Faulty left-front wheel sensor pulse signal (see page 19-43)
DTC:15 Right-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-42)
DTC:16 Faulty right-rear wheel sensor pulse signal (see page 19-43)
DTC:17 Left-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-42)
DTC:18 Faulty left-rear wheel sensor pulse signal (see page 19-43)
DTC:21 Continuous operation (chipped pulser) (see page 19-45)
DTC:31 Solenoid (see page 19-45)
DTC:51 Motor lock (see page 19-46)
DTC:52 Motor stuck off (see page 19-46)
DTC:53 Motor stuck on (see page 19-47)
DTC:54 Main relay stuck off (see page 19-47)
DTC:61 Ignition voltage (see page 19-48)
DTC:81 CPU (Central Processing Unit) (see page 19-48)
19-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:46 61S5N000_190_0033

ABS indicator does not come on ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-49)
ABS indicator does not go off and no ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see step 1
DTC is stored on page 19-50)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-33

00/10/26 15:56:46 61S5N000_190_0034
ABS Components
System Description
ABS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 31P Connector
Terminal Wire Terminal sign Description Measurement

number color (Terminal name) Terminals Conditions (Ignition Voltage
switch ON (II))
1 BLU/ RRS (-) Detects right-rear 1−2
YEL (Rear-right signal wheel sensor
negative) signal
2 GRN/ RRS (＋)
YEL (Rear-right signal
positive)
4 BLU FRS (-) Detects right-front 4−5 Spin wheel at AC: 0.053 V or
(Front-right signal wheel sensor 1 turn/second above
negative) signal
5 GRN/ FRS (＋) Wheel Oscilloscope
BLK (Front-right signal 0.15 Vp-p or
positive) above
6 BRN/ FLS (-) Detects left-front 6−7
WHT (Front-left signal wheel sensor
negative) signal
7 BLU/ FLS (＋)
ORN (Front-left signal
positive)
8 GRY/ RLS (−) Detects left-rear 8−9
RED (Rear−left signal wheel sensor
positive) signal
9 YEL/ RLS (＋) Stops About 2.5 V
RED (Rear Left signal
positive)
11 LT BLU DIAG−K Communications ――― ――― ―――
(Diagnosis K) with Honda PGM
Tester
12 BRN DIAG−L DTC indication ――― ――― ―――
(Diagnosis L)
19-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:46 61S5N000_190_0035
Terminal Wire Terminal sign Description Measurement

number color (Terminal name) Terminals Conditions (Ignition Voltage
switch ON (II))
14 WHT/ STOP Detects brake 14-GND Brake pedal Pressed Battery
BLK switch signal voltage
Released 0V
15 BLK/ IG2 Power source for 15-GND ――― Battery
ORN activating the voltage
system
16 BLK M-GND Ground for the 16-GND ――― Below 0.3 V
(Motor ground) pump motor
17 WHT/ ＋B-MR Power source for 17-GND At all times Battery
RED (＋B motor relay) the pump motor voltage
18 WHT/ ＋B-FSR Power source for 18-GND At all times Battery
GRN (＋B fail-safe relay) the valve relay voltage
19 BLK GND Ground for the 19-GND ――― Below 0.3 V
modulator
assembly
10 BLU/ ABS Drives ABS 10-GND ABS indicator ON About 11 V
RED indicator OFF Below 1 V
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-35

00/10/26 15:56:47 61S5N000_190_0036
ABS Components

Features
When the brake pedal is pressed during driving, the wheels can lock before the vehicle comes to a stop. In such an
event, the maneuverability of the vehicle is reduced if the front wheels are locked, and the stability of the vehicle is
reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. The ABS precisely controls the slip
rate of the wheels to ensure maximum grip force from the tires, thereby ensuring the maneuverability and stability of
the vehicle.
The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the vehicle speed and the wheel speed, then it controls the
brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip Force of Tire and Road Surface

TARGET SLIP RATE
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
COEFFICIENT OF
FRICTION
RADIAL
DIRECTION
OF THE
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
SLIP RATE
19-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:47 61S5N000_190_0037
ABS Control Unit

Main Control
The ABS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signal it received, then it calculates the
vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration
based on the rate of deceleration.
The ABS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel and transmits the control signal to the modulator unit
solenoid valve when the slip rate is high.
The pressure reduction control has three modes: pressure reducing, pressure retaining, and pressure intensifying.
ABS CONTROL UNIT
DETECT REFERENCE
VEHICLE SPEED SLIP RATE
REAR
RIGHT-REAR DETECT DETECT ABS DRIVE RIGHT-REAR
WHEEL SENSOR WHEEL SPEED SLIP RATE CONTROL SOLENOID SOLENOID
LEFT-REAR DETECT SELECT LOW DRIVE LEFT-REAR

WHEEL SENSOR WHEEL SPEED SPEED WHEEL SOLENOID SOLENOID
RIGHT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT DETECT DETECT ABS DRIVE RIGHT-FRONT
LEFT-FRONT
LEFT-FRONT DETECT DETECT ABS DRIVE LEFT-FRONT
Self-diagnosis Function
1. The ABS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub-CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.
2. The CPUs check the circuit of the system.
3. The ABS control unit turns on the ABS indicator when the unit detects a problem and the unit stops the system.
4. The self-diagnosis can be classified into these two categories:
• Initial diagnosis
• Regular diagnosis
On-board Diagnosis Function

The ABS can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester.
The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda
PGM Tester. See the Honda PGM Tester user’s manual for specific operating instructions.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-37

00/10/26 15:56:48 61S5N000_190_0038
ABS Components

ABS Modulator
The ABS modulator consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, reservoir, pump, pump motor, and the
damping chamber. The modulator reduces the caliper fluid pressure directly. It is a circulating-type modulator
because the brake fluid circulates through the caliper, reservoir, and the master cylinder. The hydraulic control has
three modes: pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing. The hydraulic circuit is an independent
four-channel type, one channel for each wheel.
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT

MODULATOR UNIT
PUMP MOTOR
ABS CONTROL UNIT
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT MC2 MC1
DAMPING CHAMBER DAMPING CHAMBER
MOTOR
PUMP M PUMP
IN ACCUMULATOR IN IN ACCUMULATOR IN
OUT OUT OUT OUT
RL FR FL RR
IN: INLET VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN)

OUT: OUTLET VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED)
Pressure intensifying mode: Inlet valve open, outlet valve closed

Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to the caliper.
Pressure retaining mode: Inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed

Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve.
Pressure reducing mode: Inlet valve closed, outlet valve open

Caliper fluid flows through the outlet valve to the reservoir.
Motor operation mode: When starting the pressure reducing mode, the pump motor is ON.
When stopping ABS operation, the pump motor is OFF.
The reservoir fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber, to the
master cylinder.
19-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:49 61S5N000_190_0039
Wheel Sensors
The wheel sensors are the magnetic contactless type. As the gear pulser teeth rotate past the wheel sensor’s magnetic
coil, AC current is generated. The AC frequency changes in accordance with the wheel speed. The ABS control unit
detects the wheel sensor signal frequency and thereby detects the wheel speed.
Wheel Speed and Modulator Control
SPEED VEHICLE SPEED

REFERENCE VEHICLE SPEED
WHEEL SPEED
TIME
PRESSURE
OUTLET
VALVE ON
OFF
INLET
VALVE ON
OFF
MOTOR
ON
OFF
When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the
caliper fluid pressure. The pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve opens
momentarily to increase the caliper fluid pressure.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-39

00/10/26 15:56:49 61S5N000_190_0040
ABS Components
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
＋B UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Closed: Brake pedal pressed
No. 7 (15A)
1 2
WHT/GRN WHT/BLK WHT/BLK
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX GAUGE ASSEMBLY
No. 19 (80A) No. 10 (7.5A)

IGNITION K7 YEL A17
SWITCH
No. 20 (40A) IG1 YEL/BLK
WHT/BLK
IG2 YEL
IG1 Hot in ON (II) and START (III)
IG2 Hot in ON (II)
ABS
INDICATOR
B15 BLU/RED
B18 BLK
G501
No. 11 (7.5A)
I2 BLK/ORN BLK/ORN
No. 8 (20A)
A10 WHT/GRN WHT/GRN
No. 10 (40A)
B2 WHT/RED WHT/RED
WHEEL SENSOR
1 BLU/ORN
LEFT-
FRONT
2 BRN/WHT
1 GRN/BLK
RIGHT-
FRONT
2 BLU
2 YEL/RED
LEFT-
REAR
1 GRY/RED
2 GRN/YEL
＋B RIGHT-
DATA LINK REAR
CONNECTOR (16P) 1 BLU/YEL
16
WHT/RED
5
BRN/YEL
4
BLK 9
BRN BRN
7
LT BLU LT BLU
G101 G451
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTORS BRAKE PEDAL POSITION DATA LINK CONNECTOR (16P) WHEEL SENSOR CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR A (12P) CONNECTOR B (2P) SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR FRONT
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTORS

RIGHT- LEFT-
CONNECTOR I (5P) CONNECTOR K (17P) REAR REAR
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTORS Terminal side of male terminals

CONNECTOR A (22P) CONNECTOR B (22P)
19-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:50 61S5N000_190_0041
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT

ABS CONTROL UNIT MODULATOR UNIT
WHT/BLK WHT/BLK 14 STOP
BRAKE
LIGHT
BLU/RED 10 ABS
IG2
BLK/ORN 15
＋B-FSR
WHT/GRN 18
LEFT-FRONT
SOLENOID
＋B-MR
WHT/RED 17 FLI
IN
FLO
BLU/ORN 7 FLS (＋) OUT
RIGHT-FRONT
BRN/WHT 6 FLS (−) SOLENOID
GRN/BLK 5 FRS (＋) FRI

IN
BLU 4 FRS (−)
FRO
OUT
YEL/RED 9 RLS (＋)
LEFT-REAR
SOLENOID
GRY/RED 8 RLS (−)
RLI
GRN/YEL 2 RRS (＋) IN
BLU/YEL 1 RRS (−) RLO
OUT
RIGHT-REAR
SOLENOID
RRI
IN
RRO
BRN 12 DIAG-L OUT
LT BLU 11 DIAG-K
BLK 19 GND PUMP M

MOTOR
BLK 16 M-GND
G302
ABS CONTROL UNIT 31P CONNECTOR
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-41

00/10/26 15:56:50 61S5N000_190_0042
ABS Components
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17: Wheel Sensor (Open/Short to 5. Check for continuity between the appropriate
Body Ground/Short to Power) wheel sensor (＋) circuit terminal and body ground
(see table).
1. Disconnect the ABS control unit 31P connector.
DTC Appropriate Terminal
2. Start the engine. 11 (Right-front) No. 5: FRS (＋)
13 (Left-front) No. 7: FLS (＋)
3. Measure the voltage between the appropriate 15 (Right-rear) No. 2: RRS (＋)
wheel sensor (＋) circuit terminal of the ABS 17 (Left-rear) No. 9 RLS (＋)
control unit 31P connector and body ground (see
table).
DTC Appropriate Terminal FRS (＋) (GRN/BLK) FLS (＋) (BLU/ORN)
11 (Right-front) No. 5: FRS (＋) RRS (＋) RLS (＋)
13 (Left-front) No. 7: FLS (＋) (GRN/YEL) (YEL/RED)
15 (Right-rear) No. 2: RRS (＋)
17 (Left-rear) No. 9 RLS (＋)

FRS (＋) (GRN/BLK) FLS (＋) (BLU/ORN)
RRS (＋) RLS (＋)
(GRN/YEL) (YEL/RED)
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 7.

6. Disconnect the harness 2P connector from the
Is there battery voltage? appropriate wheel sensor, then check for continuity
between the (＋) and (−) terminals of the harness
YES−Repair short to power in the (＋) circuit wire and body ground.
between the ABS modulator-control unit and the
appropriate wheel sensor. Is there continuity?
NO−Go to step 4. YES−Repair short to body ground in the (＋) or (−)

circuit wire between the ABS modulator-control
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. unit and the wheel sensor.
NO−Replace the wheel sensor.
19-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:51 61S5N000_190_0043
7. Check the resistance between the appropriate DTC 12, 14, 16, 18: Wheel Sensor Pulse
wheel sensor (＋) and (−) circuit terminals (see Signal
table).
NOTE: If the ABS indicator comes on for the reasons
DTC Appropriate Terminal described below, the indicator goes off when you test-
(＋) Side (−) Side drive the vehicle at 31 mph (50 km/h).
11 (Right-front) No. 5: FRS (＋) No. 4: FRS (−)
13 (Left-front) No. 7: FLS (＋) No. 6: FLS (−) • Only the drive wheel rotated
15 (Right-rear) No. 2: RRS No. 1: RRS • The vehicle spun
(＋) (−) • Electrical noise
17 (Left-rear) No. 9: RLS (＋) No. 8: RLS (−)
1. Visually check for appropriate wheel sensor and
pulser installation and condition (see table).
FRS (＋) (GRN/BLK) FLS (−) (BRN/WHT) DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor
12 Right-front
14 Left-front
FLS (＋) (BLU/ORN) 16 Right-rear
FRS (−) (BLU) 18 Left-rear
RLS (−) (GRY/RED)
RRS (＋) (GRN/YEL)
Are they installed correctly and not damaged?
RLS (＋) (YEL/RED)
YES−Go to step 2.
RRS (−)
(BLU/YEL) NO−Reinstall or replace the appropriate wheel
sensor or pulser.
Is the resistance between 450−2,000 ?
YES−Check for loose ABS control unit 31P

connector. If necessary, substitute a known-good
ABS modulator-control unit, and recheck.
NO−Go to step 8.
8. Disconnect the harness 2P connector from the

appropriate wheel sensor, and check the resistance
between the (＋) and (−) terminals of the wheel
sensor.
Is the resistance between 450−2,000 ?
YES−Repair open in the (＋) or (−) circuit wire, or

short between the (＋) circuit wire and the (−)
circuit wire between the ABS modulator-control
unit and the wheel sensor.
NO−Replace the wheel sensor.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-43

00/10/26 15:56:51 61S5N000_190_0044
ABS Components

3. Measure the resistance between the appropriate 4. Check for continuity between the appropriate
wheel sensor (＋) and (−) circuit terminals (see wheel sensor (＋) circuit terminal and other wheel
table). sensor (＋) circuit terminals (see table).
DTC Appropriate Terminal DTC Appropriate Other Terminal

(＋) Side (−) Side Terminal
12 (Right-front) No. 5: FRS (＋) No. 4: FRS (−) 12 No. 5: FRS (＋) No. 7 No. 2 No. 9
14 (Left-front) No. 7: FLS (＋) No. 6: FLS (−) 14 No. 7: FLS (＋) No. 5 No. 2 No. 9
16 (Right-rear) No. 2: RRS (＋) No. 1: RRS (−) 16 No. 2: RRS (＋) No. 5 No. 7 No. 9
18 (Left-rear) No. 9: RLS (＋) No. 8: RLS (−) 18 No. 9: RLS (＋) No. 5 No. 7 No. 2

FRS (＋) (GRN/BLK) FLS (−) (BRN/WHT)
FRS (＋) FLS (＋)
(GRN/BLK) (BLU/ORN)
FLS (＋) (BLU/ORN) RRS (＋)
FRS (−) (BLU) RLS (＋)
(GRN/YEL) (YEL/RED)
RLS (−) (GRY/RED)
RRS (＋) (GRN/YEL)
RLS (＋) (YEL/RED)
RRS (−)
(BLU/YEL) Wire side of female terminals

Is there less than 450 ?
YES−Repair short in the wires between the
YES−Repair short to wire between the appropriate appropriate wheel sensor and the other wheel
wheel sensor (＋) and (−) circuits. sensor.
NO−Go to step 4. NO−Clear the DTC, and test-drive the vehicle. If

the ABS indicator comes on and the same DTC is
indicated, replace the ABS modulator-control
unit.
19-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:51 61S5N000_190_0045
DTC 21: Continuous Operation (Chipped DTC 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38: Solenoid
pulser)
1. Clear the DTC.
1. Clear the DTC.
2. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
Does the ABS indicator come on and are DT Cs 31,
Does the ABS indicator come on and is DT C 21 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37 , 38 indicated?
indicated?
YES−Replace the ABS modulator-control unit.
YES−Go to step 3.
3. Check the pulser gear for a chipped tooth.
Is the pulser OK ?
YES−Check for loose ABS control unit 31P

connector. If necessary, substitute a known-good
ABS modulator-control unit, and recheck.
NO−Replace the driveshaft or hub unit. (Chipped

pulser gear).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-45

00/10/26 15:56:51 61S5N000_190_0046
ABS Components

DTC 51: Motor Lock DTC 52: Motor Stuck OFF
1. Clear the DTC. 1. Check the No. 10 (40A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the f use OK ?
Does the ABS indicator come on and is DT C 51
indicated? YES−Go to step 2.
YES−Replace the ABS modulator-control unit. NO−Replace the fuse, and recheck.
NO−The system is OK at this time. 2. Disconnect the ABS control unit 31P connector.
3. Measure the voltage between the ABS control unit

＋B-MR (WHT/RED)
NO−Repair open in the wire between the ABS

control unit and the under-hood fuse/relay box.
19-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:52 61S5N000_190_0047
DTC 53: Motor Stuck ON DTC 54: Main Relay Stuck OFF
1. Clear the DTC. 1. Check the No. 8 (20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the f use OK ?
indicated? YES−Go to step 2.
YES−Go to step 3. NO−Replace the fuse, and recheck.
NO−Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 2. Disconnect the ABS control unit 31P connector.
time.
3. Disconnect the ABS control unit 31P connector. connector terminal No. 18 and body ground.
4. Check for continuity between the ABS control unit ABS CONTROL UNIT 31P CONNECTOR
＋B-FSR (WHT/GRN)
M-GND (BLK)
Wire side of female terminals Is there battery voltage?

YES−Replace the ABS modulator-control unit. control unit and the main under-hood fuse/relay
box.
control unit and body ground (G302).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-47

00/10/26 15:56:52 61S5N000_190_0048
ABS Components

DTC 61: Ignition Voltage DTC 81: CPU (Central Processing Unit)
NOTE: Check the No. 11 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash 1. Clear the DTC.
fuse/relay box before troubleshooting.
1. Clear the DTC.
2. Test-drive the vehicle. indicted?
Does the ABS indicator come on and is DT C 61 YES−Replace the ABS modulator-control unit.
indicted?
YES−Go to step 3.


IG2 (BLK/ORN)

control unit and the main under-hood fuse/relay
box.
19-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:52 61S5N000_190_0049
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting

ABS indicator does not come on 9. Disconnect the gauge assembly connector B (22P).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ABS 10. Check for continuity between the gauge assembly
indicator. connector B (22P) terminal No. 15 and body ground.
Does the ABS indicator come on? GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B (22P)
YES−The system is OK at this time.
NO−Go to step 2.
ABS (BLU/RED)
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF then ON (II) again.
Does the brake system indicator come on?
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Repair open in the indicator power source
circuit.
• Blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse.
• Open in the wire between the No. 10 (7.5A) fuse YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire
and the gauge assembly. between the gauge assembly and the ABS control
• Open circuit inside the fuse box. unit.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO−Go to step 11.
4. Disconnect the ABS control unit 31P connector. 11. Check for continuity between the gauge assembly
connector B (22P) terminal No. 18 and body ground.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B (22P)
Does the ABS indicator come on?
YES−Check for loose terminals in the ABS control

unit 31P connector. If necessary, substitute a
known-good ABS modulator-control unit, and
GND (BLK)
recheck.
NO−Go to step 6.

7. Remove the gauge assembly (see page 22-62).
8. Check the ABS indicator bulb in the gauge Is there continuity?

assembly.
YES−Check for loose terminals in the gauge
Is the bulb OK ? assembly connectors. If the connector is OK,
replace the gauge assembly.
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the gauge
NO−Replace the ABS indicator bulb. assembly and body ground (G501).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-49

00/10/26 15:56:53 61S5N000_190_0050
ABS Components
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

ABS indicator does not go off 6. Measure the voltage between the ABS control unit
1. Check the No. 8 (20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK. ABS CONTROL UNIT 31P CONNECTOR
Is the f use OK ? IG2 (BLK/ORN)
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is

blown, check for a short to body ground in this fuse
circuit. If the circuit is OK, replace the ABS
modulator-control unit.
2. Check the No. 11 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash Wire side of female terminals
fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the f use OK ? Is there battery voltage?
NO−Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is NO−Repair open in the wire between the No. 11
blown, check for a short to body ground in this fuse (7.5A) fuse and the ABS control unit.
circuit.
8. Check for continuity between the ABS control unit
4. Measure the voltage between the ABS control unit 31P connector terminal No. 19 and body ground.
GND (BLK)
＋B-FSR (WHT/GRN)

YES−Go to step 9.
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the No. 8 control unit and body ground (G302).
(20A) fuse and the ABS control unit.
19-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:53 61S5N000_190_0051
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 12. Connect the gauge assembly connector B (22P)
terminal B15 and body ground with a jumper wire.
10. Connect the ABS control unit 31P connector
terminal No. 10 and body ground with a jumper GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B (22P)
wire.
ABS (BLU/RED)
ABS (BLU/RED)
JUMPER
WIRE
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female terminals Does the ABS indicator go of f ?
YES−Repair open in the wire between the gauge

Does the ABS indicator go of f ? assembly and the ABS control unit.
YES−Check for loose terminals in the ABS control NO−Check for a loose gauge assembly connectors.
unit 31P connector. If necessary, substitute a If the connector is OK, replace the printed circuit
known-good ABS modulator-control unit, and board in the gauge assembly.
recheck.
NO−Go to step 11.
11. Remove the gauge assembly, and leave the

connectors connected.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-51

00/10/26 15:56:53 61S5N000_190_0052
ABS Components
ABS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation

NOTE:
• Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
• To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent
material.
Removal
1. Pull up the lock (C) of the ABS control unit 31P connector (B), then disconnect the connector.
C FLARE NUT
15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)
8 mm NUT
6 mm BOLT
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
2. Disconnect the six brake lines.
3. Remove the two 8 mm nuts.
4. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit (A).
Installation
1. Install the ABS modulator-control unit, then tighten the two 8 mm nuts.
2. Align the connecting surface of the ABS control unit 31P connector.
3. Push in the lock of the ABS control unit 31P connector until you hear it click into place, then connect the connector.
4. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels.
5. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off.
6. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on.
19-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 15:56:54 61S5N000_190_0053
Wheel Sensor Inspection Wheel Sensor Replacement

1. Inspect the front and rear pulsers for chipped or NOTE: Install the sensors carefully to avoid twisting the
damaged teeth. wires.
2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and Front:
the pulser all the way around while rotating the
6 mm BOLT
pulser. Remove the rear brake disc to measure the 9.8 N·m
gap on the rear wheel sensor. If the gap exceeds (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
1.0 mm (0.04 in.), check for a bent suspension arm.
Standard:
Front: 0.4−1.0 mm (0.02−0.04 in.)
Rear: 0.2−1.0 mm (0.01−0.04 in.)
Front:
0.4−1.0 mm
(0.02−0.04 in.)
6 mm BOLT
9.8 N·m WHEEL SENSOR
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
Rear:
6 mm BOLT
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
Rear:
6 mm BOLT
9.8 N·m
0.2−1.0 mm (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
(0.01−0.04 in.)
WHEEL
SENSOR
-DYNOMITE 2009- 19-53

00/10/26 16:01:50 61S5N000_200_0001
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If body maintenance is required)

The Acura 1.7 EL SRS includes a driver’s airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger’s airbag in the dashboard
switch is ON (II).
• SRS electrical wiring harnesses and connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are
located in the steering column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove
box, in the front seats, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 16:01:51 61S5N000_200_0002
Body
Doors Dashboard
Component Location Index-Front Door ....... 20-2 Instrument Panel Removal/Installation ........ 20-67
Component Location Index-Rear Door ........ 20-4 Driver’s Dashboard Lower Cover
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation .................................. 20-67
Removal/Installation .................................. 20-6 Driver’s Dashboard Under Cover
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement ........ 20-7 Removal/Installation .................................. 20-68
Front Door Latch Replacement ..................... 20-9 Driver’s Pocket Removal/Installation ............ 20-68
Front Door Glass and Regulator Dashboard Center Lower Cover
Replacement ............................................... 20-10 Removal/Installation .................................. 20-69
Front Door Sash Trim Replacement ............. 20-11 Center Panel Removal/Installation ............... 20-69
Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Passenger’s Dashboard Lower Cover
Replacement ............................................... 20-12 Removal/Installation .................................. 20-70
Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement ........ 20-12 Glove Box Removal/Installation ................... 20-70
Front Door Upper Seal Replacement ........... 20-13 Dashboard Side Vent Removal/
Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement ........ 20-13 Installation ................................................... 20-71
Rear Door Panel Dashboard Removal and Installation ........... 20-72
Removal/Installation .................................. 20-14 Steering Hanger Beam Replacement ........... 20-75
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement ......... 20-15 Seats
Rear Door Latch Replacement ...................... 20-17 Component Location Index ........................... 20-76
Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and Front Seat Removal/Installation ................... 20-77
Regulator Replacement .............................. 20-18 Front Seat Disassembly/
Rear Door Sash Trim Replacement .............. 20-20 Reassembly-Driver’s .................................. 20-79
Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Front Seat Disassembly/
Replacement ............................................... 20-21 Reassembly-Passenger’s ........................... 20-80
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement ......... 20-21 Front Seat Armrest Replacement ................. 20-81
Rear Door Upper Seal Replacement ............ 20-22 Front Seat Cover Replacement ..................... 20-82
Rear Door Hook Pin and Catch Rear Seat Removal/Installation ..................... 20-85
Replacement ............................................... 20-22 Rear Seat-back Latch Replacement .............. 20-86
Front and Rear Door Glass Rear Seat-back Lock Cylinder
Adjustment .................................................. 20-23 Replacement ............................................... 20-86
Front and Rear Door Position Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement ............. 20-87
Adjustment .................................................. 20-25 Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover
Front and Rear Door Striker Replacement ............................................... 20-88
Adjustment .................................................. 20-26 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement ....... 20-89
Mirrors Bumpers
Component Location Index ........................... 20-27 Front Bumper Removal/Installation ............. 20-90
Power Mirror Replacement ........................... 20-28 Rear Bumper Removal/Installation ............... 20-91
Mirror Holder Replacement ........................... 20-29 Hood
Rearview Mirror Replacement ...................... 20-29 Adjustment ..................................................... 20-92
Glass Hood Seal Replacement ................................ 20-93
Component Location Index ........................... 20-30 Hood Insulator Replacement ......................... 20-94
Windshield Replacement ............................... 20-31 Trunk Lid
Rear Window Replacement ........................... 20-37 Adjustment ..................................................... 20-95
Moonroof Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Replacement ............. 20-96
Component Location Index ........................... 20-43 Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Replacement ........... 20-97
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 20-44 Fuel Fill Door
Glass Height Adjustment ............................... 20-45 Adjustment ..................................................... 20-98
Glass Replacement ........................................ 20-45 Exterior Trim
Wind Deflector Replacement ........................ 20-46 Front Grille Replacement ............................... 20-99
Drain Channel Replacement .......................... 20-47 Cowl Cover Replacement .............................. 20-100
Sunshade Replacement ................................. 20-48 Roof Molding Replacement ........................... 20-101
Motor Replacement ....................................... 20-49 Roof Drip and Rear Pillar Moldings
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement ............ 20-50 Replacement ............................................... 20-102
Drain Channel Slider and Cable Door Moldings Replacement ........................ 20-103
Assembly Replacement ............................. 20-52 Rear License Molding Replacement ............. 20-104
Position Switch Adjustment .......................... 20-54 Emblem Replacement .................................... 20-105
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check ...... 20-55 Fenderwell
Interior Trim Front Inner Fender Replacement .................. 20-106
Component Location Index ........................... 20-56 Front Fender Fairing Replacement ............... 20-107
Trim Removal/Installation-Door Area .......... 20-57 Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement .................. 20-108
Trim Removal/Installation Rear Air Outlet Replacement ......................... 20-108
-Rear Shelf Area .......................................... 20-58 Openers
Trim Removal/Installation-Trunk Area ......... 20-59 Component Location Index ........................... 20-109
Headliner Removal/Installation ..................... 20-60 Hood Opener Cable Replacement ................ 20-110
Carpet Replacement ....................................... 20-62 Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door
Console Opener Cable Replacement ....................... 20-111
Center Console Removal/ Hood Latch Replacement .............................. 20-113
Installation ................................................... 20-64 Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door
Wood Trim Panel Replacement .................... 20-65 Opener Replacement .................................. 20-114
Center Console Rear Cover Trunk Lid Latch Replacement ........................ 20-115
Replacement ............................................... 20-65 Frame
Center Console Trim Replacement ............... 20-66 Sub-frame Replacement ................................ 20-116
Frame Repair Chart ........................................ 20-118
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 16:01:53 61S5N000_200_0003
Doors
Component Location Index - Front Door
DOOR WEATHERSTRIP
DOOR UPPER SEAL
DOOR SASH TRIM
DOOR OUTER TRIM
DOOR GLASS OUTER

WEATHERSTRIP
PLASTIC COVER DOOR

Position Adjustment, page 20-25
HINGE
DETENT ROD
DOOR SIDE SILL SEAL

SPEAKER
DOOR GLASS HINGE
INNER WETHERSTRIP
Passenger’s:
SWITCH
WOOD TRIM PANEL PANEL
ARMREST
GRIP COVER
GRIP BASE GRIP BASE
SWITCH PANEL
GRIP COVER POWER WINDOW
DOOR PANEL SWITCH
POWER WINDOW SWITCH Removal/Installation, page 20-6

00/10/26 16:01:55 61S5N000_200_0004
GLASS
IMMOBILIZER LABEL GLASS RUN

CHANNEL
CENTER LOWER
CHANNEL
REGULATOR
Replacement,
page 20-10
OUTER HANDLE
PROTECTOR
FRONT LOWER
CHANNEL
OUTER HANDLE
LOCK CYLINDER Replacement, page 20-7
CYLINDER SWITCH
INNER HANDLE ROD

LOCK KNOB
POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
(Driver’s)
RETAINER
CYLINDER ROD CLIP
STRIKER INNER HANDLE

Adjustment,
page 20-26 COVER
LOCK ROD PROTECTOR

LATCH
Replacement, page 20-9 LATCH PROTECTOR
POWER DOOR
LOCK ACTUATOR

00/10/26 16:01:57 61S5N000_200_0005
Doors
Component Location Index - Rear Door
DOOR OUTER TRIM
DOOR SASH TRIM

Replacement,
page 20-20
DOOR UPPER SEAL DOOR

Replacement, page 20-22 Position Adjustment,
page 20-25
DOOR GLASS
OUTER
WEATHERSTRIP
DOOR Replacement,
WEATHERSTRIP page 20-21
Replacement,
page 20-21
HINGE
DOOR HOOK PIN

DETENT ROD
DOOR CATCH
PLASTIC COVER HINGE
WOOD TRIM PANEL

DOOR GLASS
ARMREST INNER WEATHERSTRIP
GRIP BASE
DOOR PANEL
Removal/Installation,
GRIP COVER POWER WINDOW SWITCH page 20-14
SWITCH PANEL

00/10/26 16:01:59 61S5N000_200_0006
GLASS
GLASS RUN CHANNEL
QUARTER GLASS
Replacement,
page 20-18
CENTER CHANNEL
ULEV STICKER
COLLAR
OUTER HANDLE
PROTECTOR
REGULATOR
INNER ROD PROTECTOR

HANDLE ROD
STRIKER
Adjustment,
page 20-26
OUTER HANDLE
Replacement, LOCK KNOB
page 20-15
LOCK ROD LOCK CRANK

LATCH
PROTECTOR
CHILD LOCK
CAP ACTUATOR ROD
LATCH
Replacement, page 20-17 INNER HANDLE
COVER
POWER DOOR
LOCK ACTUATOR

00/10/26 16:01:59 61S5N000_200_0007
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation

Special Tools Required 2. Remove the grip cover (A). To remove the
Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177 or equivalent, passenger’s grip cover, refer to rear door panel
commercially available. removal/installation (see page 20-14).
1. Remove the inner handle (A). Take care not to –1 Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with
scratch the door panel. protective tape, pry out the front edge of the
cover to release the clips (B).
–1 Pry out on the upper portion of the cover (B) to –2 Pry out along the bottom to release the lower
release the hooks (C, D), then remove the cover. hooks (C).
–2 Remove the screws. –3 Pry out along the top to release the upper
–3 Pull the inner handle forward and out half-way hooks (D), and release the clip (E) by pulling
to release the hook (E). the cover forward.
–4 Disconnect the inner handle rod (F) and power
Fastener Locations
door lock switch connector (G) (driver’s door).
C : Hook, 7 D : Hook, 5
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
C
F E C
G C
C D
D D
D
D
C D C
C
C
A
E B
3. Driver’s door: Disconnect the power window switch

A connector (A). Remove the screws from the grip
D
base (B).
B
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
4. Remove the mirror mount cover (see step 2 on

page 20-28).

00/10/26 16:02:00 61S5N000_200_0008
Front Door Outer Handle

Replacement
5. Release the clips that hold the door panel (A) with a
commercially available trim pad remover (B), then
remove the door panel by pulling it upward. NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Passenger’s door: Disconnect the power window
switch connector. Remove the door panel with as 1. Raise the glass fully.
little bending as possible to avoid creasing or
breaking it. 2. Remove these items:
Fastener Locations
• Door panel (see page 20-6)
95 mm (3.74 in.)
: Clip, 7 • Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-2)
12 mm
(0.47 in.) 3. Release the retainer clip (A), then remove the lock
cylinder (B). Disconnect the cylinder rod (C).
B
1 mm 45 ° B
(0.04 in.)
A 45 mm C
(1.77 in.)
6. Install the door panel in the reverse order of

• Replace any damaged clips.

• Make sure the connectors are plugged in 4. Remove the screw, then separate the lock cylinder
properly, and the rod is connected properly. (A) and cylinder switch (B).
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
A
(cont’d)

00/10/26 16:02:00 61S5N000_200_0008
Front Door Outer Handle

Replacement
5. Release the clips that hold the door panel (A) with a
remove the door panel by pulling it upward. NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Passenger’s door: Disconnect the power window
switch connector. Remove the door panel with as 1. Raise the glass fully.
little bending as possible to avoid creasing or
breaking it. 2. Remove these items:
Fastener Locations
95 mm (3.74 in.)
: Clip, 7 • Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-2)
12 mm
(0.47 in.) 3. Release the retainer clip (A), then remove the lock
cylinder (B). Disconnect the cylinder rod (C).
B
1 mm 45 ° B
(0.04 in.)
A 45 mm C
(1.77 in.)
6. Install the door panel in the reverse order of


• Make sure the connectors are plugged in 4. Remove the screw, then separate the lock cylinder
properly, and the rod is connected properly. (A) and cylinder switch (B).
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
A
(cont’d)

00/10/26 16:02:00 61S5N000_200_0009
Doors
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont’d)

5. Disconnect the cylinder switch connector (A), and 7. Pull out the outer handle (A) in the numbered
detach the harness clips (B), then remove the sequence, and remove it.
cylinder switch (C).
8. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal,

and note these items:
• Make sure the cylinder switch harness is routed

B properly.
• Make sure the cylinder switch connector is
plugged in properly, and each rod is connected
6. Disconnect the outer handle rod (A), and remove securely.
the nuts, then remove the outer handle protector • Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
(B) from the outer handle (C). • When installing the lock cylinder, leave the outer
door handle bolts loose so the inner protector
Fastener Locations
does not interfere with the lock cylinder, then
: Nut, 2 tighten the handle bolts.
• Install the lock cylinder retaining clip on the
handle, then install the lock cylinder. Be sure the
C
clip is fully seated in the slot on the lock cylinder.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)

00/10/26 16:02:01 61S5N000_200_0010
Front Door Latch Replacement

NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 6. Disconnect the actuator connectors (A), and detach
the inner handle rod (B) from the rod holder (C).
1. Raise the glass fully. Remove the lock knob (D).
Fastener Locations
2. Remove these items:
:Screw, 3
• Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-2)
3. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder D G

F
(see step 3 on page 20-7), and disconnect the outer C
handle rod from the outer handle (see step 6 on
page 20-8). H
4. Remove the clip, and remove the lock rod protector E

(A) in the numbered sequence.
Fastener Location
: Clip, 1
B
A
6 x 1.0 mm
6 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, A
4 lbf·ft)
7. Remove the screws, then remove the latch (E)

through the hole in the door. Take care not to bend
the outer handle rod (F), cylinder rod (G), lock rod
(H), and inner handle rod.
5. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as necessary, 8. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
and remove the bolts, then remove the center note these items:
lower channel (B) by pulling it downward.
• Make sure the actuator connectors are plugged in
Fastener Location
properly, and each rod is connected securely.
: Bolt, 1 • Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
6 x 1.0 mm
8 N·m (0.8 kgf·m,
6 lbf·ft)

00/10/26 16:02:01 61S5N000_200_0011
Doors
Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement

NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 3. Disconnect and detach the connector (A) and
harness clip (B) from the door.
Fastener Locations
• Door panel (see page 20-6) C : Bolt, 2 D : Bolt, 4
• Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-2)
2. Carefully raise the glass (A) until you can see the
bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass 6 x 1.0 mm
out through the window slot. Take care not to drop 8 N·m (0.8 kgf·m,
6 lbf·ft)
the glass inside the door.
A
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2 C
D
D
D B
A
D
F
C
4. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D), then
remove the regulator (F) through the hole in the
door.
5. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A)

where shown.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
20-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:01 61S5N000_200_0012
Front Door Sash Trim Replacement

6. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.
of removal, and note these items:
1. Pull back the door weatherstrip (A) at the rear
• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves upper corner, and remove the screw.
freely without binding.
Fastener Location
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and glass run channel when the glass is : Screw, 1
closed.
• Adjust the position of the glass as necessary (see
page 20-23).
B
A
D
C
2. Lift up the door sash trim (B) to release the hooks

(C), then remove the trim. Take care not to damage
the door glass outer weatherstrip (D).
3. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-11

00/10/26 16:02:01 61S5N000_200_0012
Front Door Sash Trim Replacement

6. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.
1. Pull back the door weatherstrip (A) at the rear
• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves upper corner, and remove the screw.
freely without binding.
Fastener Location
glass and glass run channel when the glass is : Screw, 1
closed.
page 20-23).
B
A
D
C
2. Lift up the door sash trim (B) to release the hooks

-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-11

00/10/26 16:02:02 61S5N000_200_0013
Doors
Front Door Glass Outer Front Door Weatherstrip

Weatherstrip Replacement Replacement
NOTE: NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to scratch the door.
• Take care not to scratch the door. • Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. Remove the power mirror (see page 20-28). 1. At the A-pillar, remove the door stop mounting bolt
(A).
2. Starting at the rear, pry the door glass outer
Fastener Locations
weatherstrip (A) up to detach the clips (B, C), then
remove the weatherstrip. A : Bolt, 1 B : Clip, 1 C : Clip, 17
Fastener Locations
B : Clip, 4 C : Clip, 1 A
A
D
C E
B D
E
B B
B B
C
C
A
C
3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of
removal, and replace any damaged clips. A
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
2. Detach the clips (B, C), then remove the door

weatherstrip (D).

removal and note these items:

• Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the
holder (E) securely.
• Apply liquid thread lock to the door stop
mounting bolt before installation.
• Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-24).
20-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:02 61S5N000_200_0014
Front Door Upper Seal Replacement Front Door Side Sill Seal
Replacement
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the door.
• Use a clip remover to remove the clips. NOTE:
1. Remove these items: • Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
• Power mirror, as necessary (see page 20-28) 1. Detach the clips, then remove the door side sill
• Door sash trim (see page 20-11) seal (A).
Fastener Locations
2. Detach the door weatherstrip clip (A), then remove
the door upper seal (B). : Clip, 8
Fastener Location B
A : Clip, 1
B
C
A B
2. Install the seal in the reverse order of removal, and

replace any damaged clips.

note these items:
• Replace the clip if it’s damaged.

• Make sure the upper seal is installed in the
holder (C) securely.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-13

00/10/26 16:02:03 61S5N000_200_0015
Doors
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation

Special Tools Required 2. Remove the grip cover (A).
Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177 or equivalent,
commercially available. –1 Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with
protective tape, pry out the front edge of the
1. Remove the inner handle (A). Take care not to cover to release the clip (B).
scratch the door panel. –2 Pry out along the bottom to release the lower
hooks (C).
–1 Pry out on the upper portion of the cover (B) to –3 Pry out along the top to release the upper
release the hooks (C, D), then remove the cover. hooks (D), and release the clip (E) while pulling
–2 Remove the screws. the cover forward.
–3 Pull the inner handle forward and out half-way
Fastener Locations
to release the hook (E).
–4 Disconnect the inner handle rod (F). C : Hook, 5 D : Hook, 4 : Screw, 2
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
C D
E C
D
D
D
C
B
C C
C
F
F E A
A
D D B
3. Remove the screws from the grip base (F).
20-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:03 61S5N000_200_0016
Rear Door Outer Handle

Replacement
4. Release the clips hold the door panel (A) with a
remove the door panel by pulling it upward, and NOTE : Put on gloves to protect your hands.
disconnecting the power window switch connector
(C). Remove the door panel with as little bending as 1. Raise the glass fully.
possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
Fastener Locations
95 mm (3.74 in.)
: Clip, 7 • Door panel (see page 20-14)
12 mm
(0.47 in.) • Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-4)
B 3. Release the inner handle rod (A) and lock rod (B)
1 mm 45 ° from the rod holder (C), and remove the screws,
(0.04 in.)
45 mm then remove the actuator (D) from the door.
(1.77 in.)
A Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
C
C
5. Install the door panel in the reverse order of B

removal, and note these items: D

• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly, 4. Remove the clip, and release the hooks (A), then
and the rod is connected properly. remove the rod protector (B).
Fastener Location
: Clip, 1
A A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-15

00/10/26 16:02:03 61S5N000_200_0016
Rear Door Outer Handle

Replacement
4. Release the clips hold the door panel (A) with a
remove the door panel by pulling it upward, and NOTE : Put on gloves to protect your hands.
disconnecting the power window switch connector
(C). Remove the door panel with as little bending as 1. Raise the glass fully.
possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
Fastener Locations
95 mm (3.74 in.)
: Clip, 7 • Door panel (see page 20-14)
12 mm
(0.47 in.) • Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-4)
B 3. Release the inner handle rod (A) and lock rod (B)
1 mm 45 ° from the rod holder (C), and remove the screws,
(0.04 in.)
45 mm then remove the actuator (D) from the door.
(1.77 in.)
A Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
C
C
5. Install the door panel in the reverse order of B

removal, and note these items: D

• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly, 4. Remove the clip, and release the hooks (A), then
and the rod is connected properly. remove the rod protector (B).
Fastener Location
: Clip, 1
A A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-15

00/10/26 16:02:04 61S5N000_200_0017
Doors
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont’d)

5. Remove the screws securing the latch (A), then 7. Remove the outer handle protector (A) from the
move the latch down. Take care not to bend any of outer handle (B).
the rods.
B
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 3
8. Pull out the outer handle (A) in the numbered

sequence, then remove it.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
6 N·m (0.6 kgf·m,
4 lbf·ft)
6. Remove the nuts securing the outer handle (A) and

outer handle protector (B).
Fastener Locations
: Nut, 2
A
A
9. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal,

• Make sure each rod is connected securely.

• Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft) B
20-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:04 61S5N000_200_0018
Rear Door Latch Replacement

NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 6. Remove the bolt, then remove the collar (A) from
the center channel (B).
1. Raise the glass fully.
Fastener Location
2. Remove these items: : Bolt, 1

• Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-4) B
• Rod protector (see step 3 on page 20-15)
3. Remove the screws securing the latch (see step 5

on page 20-16). A
4. Disconnect the actuator rod (A) and connector (B),

then remove the actuator (C).
A
6 x 1.0 mm
8 N·m (0.8 kgf·m,
6 lbf·ft)
7. Move the latch (A) through the gap between the

center channel (B) and door, then remove it. Take
care not to bend any of the rods.
C
B
5. Disconnect the lock rod (A) from the lock crank (B).
8. If necessary, remove any of the rods from the latch.
B 9. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly,

and each rod is connected securely.
• Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-17

00/10/26 16:02:04 61S5N000_200_0019
Doors
Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and Regulator Replacement

NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 4. Remove the bolts (A, B) and collar (C) from the
center channel (D). Pull the upper seal (E) away as
1. Raise the glass fully. needed, and remove the screw (F). Pull the glass
run channel (G) away as needed from the center
2. Remove these items: channel.
Fastener Locations
• Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-4) A : Bolt, 1 B : Bolt, 1 F : Screw, 1
• Rod protector (see step 3 on page 20-15)
3. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the
bolts, then remove them. Remove the glass from E
F
the regulator (B), and carefully lower the glass.
Take care not to drop the glass inside the door.
G
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
D
A
B
6 x 1.0 mm
8 N·m (0.8 kgf·m,
6 lbf·ft) C
5. Move the center channel (A) away from the quarter

glass (B), and the rear door glass (C), and remove
the center channel out through the window slot.
Take care not to damage the outer weatherstrip (D).
B
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) D C
20-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:05 61S5N000_200_0020
6. Remove the quarter glass (A). Take care not to 8. Disconnect and detach the connector (A) from the
damage the outer weatherstrip (B). door.
Fastener Locations
A
B : Bolt, 2 C : Bolt, 4
6 x 1.0 mm
B 8 N·m (0.8 kgf·m, 6 lbf·ft)
C
C
C
C
7. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the
window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside
the door. D
A
B
A
9. Remove the bolts (B), and loosen the bolts (C), then
remove the regulator (D) through the hole in the
door.
10. Grease all the sliding surfaces (A) of the regulator

(B) where shown.
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-19

00/10/26 16:02:05 61S5N000_200_0021
Doors
Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and Rear Door Sash Trim Replacement
Regulator Replacement (cont’d)
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.
11. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order 1. Pull back the door weatherstrip (A) at the front
of removal, and note these items: upper corner portion, and remove the screw.
Fastener Location A
• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves
freely without binding. : Screw, 1
glass and glass run channel when the glass is
closed.
page 20-23).
2. Pull up the door sash trim (B) to release the hooks

20-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:05 61S5N000_200_0022
Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Rear Door Weatherstrip

NOTE: NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect you hands. • Take care not to scratch the door.
• Take care not to scratch the door. • Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. Starting at the front, pry the door glass outer 1. At the B-pillar, remove the door stop mounting
weatherstrip (A) up to detach the clips (B, C, D), bolt (A).
then remove the weatherstrip.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations A : Bolt, 1 B : Clip, 14
B : Clip, 1 C : Clip, 3 D : Clip, 1
A
A A C
C
C
B D
D
C D
C D
C
B
B
A
C B
removal, and replace any damaged clips.
A
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
2. Detach the clip (B), then remove the door

weatherstrip (C).


• Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the
holder (D) securely.
• Apply liquid thread lock to the door stop
mounting bolt before installation.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-21

00/10/26 16:02:06 61S5N000_200_0023
Doors
Rear Door Upper Seal Replacement Rear Door Hook Pin and Catch
Replacement
NOTE:
• Use a clip remover to remove the clips. 1. With a Torx T40 bit, remove the door hook pin (A)
from the door.
1. Remove the door sash trim (see page 20-20).
A
10 x 1.25 mm
2. Detach the door weatherstrip clip (A), then remove 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m,
the door upper seal (B). 24 lbf·ft)
Fastener Location
A : Clip, 1 B
B
2. With a Torx T40 bit, remove the bolts, then remove
the door catch (A) from the body.
Fastener Locations
A
: Bolt, 2

A
note these items:

• Make sure the upper seal is installed in the
holder (C) securely.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16 lbf·ft)
3. Install the hook pin and catch in the reverse order

of removal, and apply liquid thread lock to the
threads of the door hook pin.
20-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:06 61S5N000_200_0024
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment

NOTE: Check the weatherstrips and glass run channel Rear:
for damage or deterioration, and replace them if
C
necessary.
A
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
• Door panel, front door (see page 20-6), rear door

(see page 20-14)
• Plastic cover, front door (see page 20-2), rear
door (see page 20-4)
3. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the
glass mounting bolts (B), then loosen them.
Front:
C
B
A 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
4. Push the glass (A) against the channel (C), then

tighten the glass mounting bolts.
5. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Also check
that the glass (A) contacts the glass run channel (B)
evenly.
B
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-23

00/10/26 16:02:06 61S5N000_200_0025
Doors
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment (cont’d)

7. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and
on the sealing area as shown, and note these items:
• Use a 12 mm (1/2 in.) diameter hose (A).

• Adjust the rate of water flow as shown (B).
• Do not use a nozzle.
• Hold the hose about 300 mm (12 in.) away from
the door (C).
12 mm (1/2 in.)
0.5 m (18 in.)
300 mm (12 in.)

C
8. Attach the plastic cover, and install the door panel,

front door (see page 20-6), rear door (see page 20-
14).
20-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:07 61S5N000_200_0026
Front and Rear Door Position Adjustment

SRS components are located in the B-pillar bottom area. Front door:
Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-10),
C
and the precautions and procedures (see page 23-11) in 8 x 1.25 mm
the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
NOTE: Check for a flush fit with the body, then check for
equal gaps between the front, rear, and bottom door
edges and the body. Check that the door and body
A
edges are parallel. Before adjusting, replace the
mounting bolts.
B
8 x 1.25 mm
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,
adjusting the doors. 22 lbf·ft)
2. Adjust at the hinges (A):
• Loosen the door mounting bolts (B) slightly, and

move the door in or out until it’s flush with the E
body.
F
• On the front door: Remove the front inner fender
(see page 20-106) and front fender fairing (see
page 20-107). Loosen the hinge mounting bolts Rear door:
(C) slightly, and move the door backward or
A
forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
B
• On the rear door: Remove the B-pillar lower trim 8 x 1.25 mm
(see page 20-57) and remove the front seat belt 29 N·m
D (3.0 kgf·m,
and retractor (see page 23-4), and the plug seal 8 x 1.25 mm 22 lbf·ft)
from the body. Loosen the hinge mounting nuts 29 N·m
(D) slightly, and move the door backward or (3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
• Place a shop towel (E) on the jack (F) to prevent
damage to the door when adjusting the door.
F
B
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m
(3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
D
8 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,
22 lbf·ft)
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-25

00/10/26 16:02:07 61S5N000_200_0027
Doors
Front and Rear Door Position Front and Rear Door Striker
Adjustment (cont’d) Adjustment
3. Check that the door and body edges are parallel. If Make sure the door latches securely without slamming
necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make the it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker nuts
rear of the doors flush with the body. are fixed, but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or
down, and in or out.
1. Loosen the screws (B), then insert a shop towel (C)

between the body and striker.
D
A
4. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts,

and around the hinges.
B C
8 x 1.25 mm
5. Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-24). 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
2. Lightly tighten the screws.
3. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the

striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (D). Do
not tap the striker too hard.
4. Loosen the screws, and remove the shop towel.
5. Lightly tighten the screws.
6. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door

against the body to be sure the striker allows a
flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the
screws and recheck.
20-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:08 61S5N000_200_0028
Mirrors
MIRROR MOUNT COVER
MIRROR HOLDER
LOCK BOLT
TOOTHED WASHER
POWER MIRROR
BRACKET BASE
BRACKET CAP
REARVIEW MIRROR
HEADLINER CAP
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-27

00/10/26 16:02:08 61S5N000_200_0029
Mirrors
Power Mirror Replacement

1. Lower the door glass fully. 5. While holding the mirror, push out the connector
clip (A), and remove the mirror (B). Take care not to
2. Carefully pry out the mirror mount cover (A) by scratch the door.
hand in the sequence shown.
A
Fastener Location
: Clip, 1
B
6. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal,

and make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
3. Disconnect the connector (A).

Fastener Locations
: Nut, 3
5 x 0.8 mm
A 5 N·m (0.5 kgf·m,
4 lbf·ft)
4. While holding the mirror, remove the nuts securing

the mirror.
20-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:09 61S5N000_200_0030
Mirror Holder Replacement Rearview Mirror Replacement

1. Carefully pull out the bottom edge of the mirror NOTE: When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it
holder (A) by hand. Take care not to scratch the with protective tape to prevent damage.
mirror.
1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, carefully remove the
D A
headliner cap (A) by releasing the hooks (B) on the
E front edge, and pull downward. Take care not to
scratch the cap and headliner (C).
C A
B
2. Remove the screws, then remove the rearview
mirror (A).
2. Separate the mirror holder from the actuator (B) by
Fastener Locations
slowly pulling them apart while removing the
adhesive (C), and detaching the clips (D). : Screw, 3
Disconnect the mirror defogger connectors (E) from
the heater pad terminals.
3. Reconnect the mirror defogger connectors.
4. Reattach the clips of the mirror holder to the

actuator, then position the mirror holder on the
actuator. Carefully push on the clip portions of the
mirror holder until the mirror holder locks into
place.
5. Check the operation of the actuator.
5 x 0.8 mm
4 N·m
(0.4 kgf·m,
3 lbf·ft)
3. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-29

00/10/26 16:02:09 61S5N000_200_0031
Glass
FASTENER, 2
(Self-adhesive-type, glass side)
FASTENER, 2
(Clip-type, body side)
WINDSHIELD MOLDING
WINDSHIELD SIDE TRIM
RETAINER, 2
Black
RETAINER, 6
White
CLIP, 2
Left: White
Right: Green
CLIP, 2
Left: Green
WINDSHIELD Right: White
Replacement, page 20-31 CLIP, 2
Left: Pink
Right: Yellow
SIDE RUBBER DAM
WINDOW ANTENNA LOWER RUBBER DAM
TERMINAL BASE
WINDOW ANTENNA
TERMINAL COVER
REAR WINDOW
UPPER MOLDING
UPPER FASTENER, 2
LEFT REAR WINDOW (Self-adhesive-type, glass side)
SIDE MOLDING
UPPER FASTENER, 2
(Self-adhesive-type, body side)
RIGHT REAR WINDOW

SIDE MOLDING
SIDE FASTENER, 2
(Self-adhesive-type, glass side)
SIDE FASTENER, 2
(Self-adhesive-type, body side)
REAR WINDOW LOWER MOLDING REAR WINDOW

20-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:10 61S5N000_200_0032
Windshield Replacement
NOTE: 3. Remove the molding (A) from the upper edge of the
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. windshield (B). If necessary, cut the molding with a
• Wear eye protection when removing the glass with utility knife.
piano wire.
A
• Use seat covers to avoid damaging the seat.
1. Pull up the side trim (A) to release the clips (B) from
the retainers (C), then remove the trim from each
side of the windshield.
B A
B
B C
4. If the old windshield is to be reinstalled, make

alignment marks across the glass and body with a
A
grease pencil.
5. Pull down the front portion of the headliner (see

page 20-60). Take care not to bend the headliner
excessively, or you may crease or break it.
C
B
6. Apply protective tape along the edge of the
dashboard and body. Using an awl, make a hole
through the rubber dam and adhesive from inside
the vehicle at the corner portion of the windshield.
Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and
wrap each end around a piece of wood.
• Windshield wiper arms (see step 1 on page 22-

133)
• Cowl covers (see page 20-100)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-31

00/10/26 16:02:10 61S5N000_200_0033
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont’d)

7. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) 9. With a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a
back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding
wire as close to the windshield (B) as possible to surface around the entire windshield opening
prevent damage to the body and dashboard. flange:
Carefully cut through the rubber dam and adhesive
(C) around the entire windshield. • Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
A
bonding.
• Remove the rubber dam and fasteners from the
body.
B
10. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge
dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil,
grease and water from getting on the clean surface.
11. If the old windshield is to be reinstalled, use a putty

knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the
fasteners and the rubber dam from the windshield.
Clean the inside face and the edge of the
C windshield with alcohol where new adhesive is to
be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept
Cutting portions: free of water, oil and grease.
A
A B
A
A C A
8. Carefully remove the windshield.
20-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:10 61S5N000_200_0034
12. Glue the side rubber dams (A), lower rubber dam 13. Glue the molding (A) with adhesive tape (B) to the
(B) and fasteners (C) to the inside face of the upper edge of the windshield (C):
windshield (D) as shown:
• Be sure the alignment mark (D) of the molding
• Be sure the rubber dam and fasteners line up lines up with the alignment mark (E) of the
with the alignment marks (E). windshield.
• Be careful not to touch the windshield where • Be careful not to touch the windshield where
adhesive will be applied. adhesive will be applied.
E E D A
E
12.5 mm
(0.49 in.) 12.5 mm
(0.49 in.) A B
C
C
C
A
14. Install the fasteners (A) and retainers (B, C) to the

body.
12.5 mm
(0.49 in.)
Fastener Locations
A : Fastener, 2 B : Retainer, 2 C : Retainer, 6
B A
B A
C
C B
E C C
12.5 mm
(0.49 in.) C
C
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-33

00/10/26 16:02:11 61S5N000_200_0035
Glass

15. Set the windshield in the opening, and center it. 17. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer
Make alignment marks (A) across the windshield around the edge of the windshield (A) between the
and body with a grease pencil at the four points dams (B) and molding (C) as shown, then lightly
shown. Be careful not to touch the windshield wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth:
where adhesive will be applied.
• Apply glass primer to the molding.
A
• Do not apply body primer to the windshield, and
do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed
up.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
windshield properly, causing a leak after the
windshield is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
from the primed surface.
: Apply glass primer here.
16. Remove the windshield.
B
Inside
A
C
Inside B
Inside
B A
A
12 mm
(0.47 in.)
20-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:11 61S5N000_200_0036
18. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to 20. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets
the original adhesive remaining around the to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
windshield opening flange. Let the body primer dry caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A)
for at least 10 minutes: around the edge of the windshield (B) between the
dams (C) and molding (D) as shown. Apply the
• Do not apply glass primer to the body, and be adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass
careful not to mix up glass and body primer primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner.
sponges.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. 11 mm
(0.43 in.) D
• Mask off the dashboard before painting the
flange. 7 mm (0.28 in.)
Overlap
: Apply body primer here. 16 mm 1 mm (0.04 in.)
5.5 mm (0.63 in.)
(0.22 in.) A
C
Inside B
D
8 mm
(0.31 in.) 16 mm
(0.63 in.) 2 mm
C (0.08 in.)
A
5 mm Inside
(0.2 in.)
16 mm C
(0.63 in.)
B
C
19. Before filling a cartridge, cut a ‘‘V’’ in the end of the Inside
nozzle (A) as shown. C
2 mm
(0.08 in.)
B
A
11 mm (0.43 in.)
21. Use suction cups to hold the windshield over the

opening, align it with the alignment marks made in
step 15, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly
push on the windshield until its edges are fully
A seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not
open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry.
7 mm (0.27 in.)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-35

00/10/26 16:02:11 61S5N000_200_0037
Glass

22. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty 26. On both sides of the windshield, set the bottom
knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted edge of the side molding (A) under the cowl cover
surface or the windshield, wipe with a soft shop (B), then align the clips (C) with the retainers (D),
towel dampened with alcohol. and push on the clip portions of the molding until
the molding is fully seated on the windshield.
23. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray
A
water over the windshield and check for leaks.
Mark leaking areas, and let the windshield dry, then C
seal with sealant:
• Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after A

windshield installation. If the vehicle has to be
used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly. C
C
• Keep the windshield dry for the first hour after
D
installation. D
24. Reinstall the cowl covers (see page 20-100). C
25. Install the clips (A, B, C) on both side moldings (D).

If the clip (E) is damaged, replace the side molding
and clip as an assembly.
D
A : Left, White
: Right, Green A, B, C
B : Left, Green B
: Right, White
C : Left, Pink
: Right, Yellow 27. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. Advise the
customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3
E days:
• Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.

A • Twist the body excessively (such as when going
in and out of driveways at an angle or driving
over rough, uneven roads).
D
B
Top of molding
C
D
20-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:12 61S5N000_200_0038
Rear Window Replacement

NOTE: 5. Pull down the rear portion of the headliner (A) by
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. detaching the clips (B). Take care not to bend the
• Wear eye protection when removing the glass with headliner excessively, or you may crease or break
piano wire. it.
• Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
Fastener Locations
• Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines,
window antenna grid lines, and terminals. B Clip, 2
• Trunk lid
• Rear shelf (see page 20-58)
2. Remove the window antenna terminal cover (A) B B

from the window antenna terminal base (B), and
A
disconnect the window antenna connector (C).
B 6. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside

edges of the body. Using an awl, make a hole
through the adhesive from inside the vehicle at the
A corner portion of the rear window. Push a piece of
piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end
around a piece of wood.
3. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors

(D).
4. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, make

alignment marks across the glass and body with a
grease pencil.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-37

00/10/26 16:02:12 61S5N000_200_0039
Glass
Rear Window Replacement (cont’d)

7. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) 9. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth
back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the
wire as close to the rear window (B) as possible to bonding surface around the entire rear window
prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut opening flange:
through the adhesive (C) around the entire rear
window. • Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding.
B
• Remove the fasteners from the body.
10. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge

dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil,
grease and water from getting on the surface.
11. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, use a

putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the
A moldings and the fasteners from the rear window.
Clean the inside face and the edge of the rear
window with alcohol where new adhesive is to be
C applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free
of water, oil and grease.
Cutting positions:
A B A
C A
8. Carefully remove the rear window.
20-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:12 61S5N000_200_0040
12. Glue the fasteners (A) to the inside face of the rear 13. Glue the upper molding (A), side moldings (B), and
window (B) as shown. Aplly primer (3M N-200, or lower molding (C) around the edge of the rear
equivalent) to the inside face of the rear window as window (D):
shown. If necessary, apply primer (3M N-200, or
equivalent) to the areas where the window antenna • Glue the moldings in the numbered sequence.
terminal base (C) will be glued, then glue the base • After installing the moldings, cut the corner edge
on: areas (E) of the moldings as shown.
• Be careful not to touch the rear window where
• Be sure the fasteners (and window antenna adhesive will be applied.
terminal base cover) line up with the alignment
marks (D). A: 7.5 mm (0.3 in.)
B: 7 mm (0.28 in.)
• Be careful not to touch the rear window where C: 8 mm (0.31 in.)
adhesive will be applied.
Inside A, B, C
: Apply primer here. 4 mm (0.16 in.)
3 mm
(0.12 in.) 18 mm 18 mm
E (0.71 in.) (0.71 in.) E
D Inside D
C
B
D A A
B B
A
D
D B
A B
150 mm (5.9 in.) or or
150 mm
(5.9 in.)
225 mm
(8.86 in.)
250 mm
(9.84 in.)
Min. 2.5 mm Min. 2.5 mm
(0.098 in.) (0.098 in.)
C
B B
150 mm
(5.9 in.)
150 mm C C
(5.9 in.) B 1 mm
(0.04 in.)
1 mm
E E (0.04 in.)
D
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-39

00/10/26 16:02:13 61S5N000_200_0041
Glass

14. Glue the fasteners (A) to the rear window opening 17. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer
flange (B) of the body. along the edge of the rear window (A) and molding
(B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or
Fastener Locations
cheesecloth:
A Fastener, 4
B • Do not apply body primer to the rear window,
A and do not get body and glass primer sponges
mixed up.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear
A window properly, causing a leak after the rear
A
window is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
from the primed surface.
A
: Apply glass primer here. B
12 mm
A (0.47 in.)
Inside
A B
A
15. Set the rear window in the opening, and center it.
Make alignment marks (A) across the rear window B
and body with a grease pencil at the 4 points
shown. Be careful not to touch the rear window
where adhesive will be applied.
A
16. Remove the rear window.
20-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:13 61S5N000_200_0042
18. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to 20. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets
the original adhesive remaining around the rear to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
window opening flange. Let the body primer dry for caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A)
at least 10 minutes: around the edge of the rear window (B) and
moldings (C) as shown.
• Do not apply glass primer to the body, and be Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after
careful not to mix up glass and body primer applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker
sponges. bead at each corner.
11 mm
: Apply body primer here. (0.43 in.)
7 mm (0.28 in.)
16 mm (0.63 in.)
16 mm A C
3 mm (0.63 in.)
(0.12 in.)
Inside
C
B
Overlap
1 mm (0.04 in.)
2.5 mm C
(0.098 in.)
16 mm
(0.63 in.)
19. Before filling a cartridge, cut a ‘‘V’’ in the end of the

nozzle (A) as shown.
11 mm (0.43 in.)
7 mm (0.27 in.)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-41

00/10/26 16:02:13 61S5N000_200_0043
Glass

21. Use suction cups to hold the rear window over the
opening, align it with the alignment marks you
made in step 15, and set it down on the adhesive.
Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are
fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do
not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry.
22. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty

knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted
surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel
dampened with alcohol.
23. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray
water over the rear window and check for leaks.
Mark the leaking areas, let the rear window dry,
then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at
least 4 hours after rear window installation. If the
vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it
must be driven slowly.
24. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. Advise the

customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3
days:
• Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.

• Twist the body excessively (such as when going
in and out of driveways at an angle or driving
over rough, uneven roads).
20-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:16 61S5N000_200_0044
Moonroof
GLASS
Height Adjustment, page 20-45
Closing Force and Opening Drag
Check, page 20-55
DRAIN CHANNEL
BRACKET COVER
POSITION SWITCH
CABLE TUBE
WIND DEFLECTOR REAR BRACKET
SUNSHADE
Replacement,
page 20-48
SHIM
SLIDE STOP
CABLE ASSEMBLY
DRAIN CHANNEL SLIDER Replacement, page 20-52
MOTOR
FRAME SEALS Replacement, page 20-49
REAR DRAIN TUBE

FRONT DRAIN TUBE Replacement, page 20-50
FRAME
FRONT DRAIN VALVE REAR DRAIN VALVE
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-43

00/10/26 16:02:17 61S5N000_200_0045
Moonroof
Water leaks 1. Check for a clogged drain tube.

2. Check for a gap between the glass weatherstrip and the roof
panel.
3. Check for a defective or an improperly installed glass
weatherstrip or drain channel.
4. Check for a gap between the drain seal and the roof panel.
Wind noise 1. Check for excessive clearance between the glass weatherstrip
and the roof panel.
Motor noise 1. Check for a loose motor.

2. Check for a worn gear or bearing.
3. Check for a deformed cable assembly.
Glass does not move, 1. Check for a defective gear or inner cable.
but motor turns 2. Check for foreign matter stuck between the guide rail and the
slider.
3. Check for a loose inner cable.
4. Make sure the cable assembly is attached properly.
Glass does not move 1. Check for a blown fuse.

and motor does not 2. Check for a faulty moonroof switch.
turn (glass can be 3. Check the limit switch.
moved with 4. Check for a run down battery.
moonroof wrench) 5. Check for a defective motor.
6. Check for a faulty relay.
20-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:17 61S5N000_200_0046
Glass Height Adjustment Glass Replacement

The roof panel (A) should be even with the glass 1. Close the glass fully.
weatherstrip (B), to within 2＋0.5/−1 mm (0.08＋0.02/−
0.04 in.) all the way around. If not, make the following 2. Slide the sunshade all the way back.
adjustment:
3. Remove the screws (A), then remove both bracket
B covers (B). Remove the nuts (C) and shims (D) from
2＋0.5/−1 mm
both glass brackets (E).
(0.08＋0.02/−0.04 in.)
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 2 C : Nut, 4
D E
1. Remove the bracket cover from each side.
2. Loosen the nuts (A), and install the shims (B) C C

between the glass frame (C) and glass bracket (D)
on each side.
Shim thickness: Front and rear max. 2 mm (0.08 in.)

6 x 1.0 mm
B C B 9 N·m A
(0.9 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) B
4. Remove the glass (A) by lifting it up. Do not

damage the roof panel.
D Forward
A
6 x 1.0 mm
3. If necessary, repeat on the opposite side.
5. Install the glass in the reverse order of the removal,

and adjust the glass height alignment.
6. Check for water leaks. Use free-flowing water from

a hose without a nozzle. Do not use high-pressure
water.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-45

00/10/26 16:02:17 61S5N000_200_0047
Moonroof
Wind Deflector Replacement

1. Open the glass fully. 3. Install the deflector (A) in the reverse order of
removal, and check that the deflector arm base (B)
2. Remove the screws (A, B) and release the hooks (C), and deflector link pivot base (C) line up with same
then remove the wind deflector (D). alignment lines (D). If necessary, adjust them
forward or backward so the edge of the deflector
Fastener Locations
seal (E) touches the roof panel (F) evenly. Each
A : Screw, 2 B : Screw, 2 base must be moved the same amount for
adjustment.
43 mm (1.7 in.)
A 16 mm
D 5 x 0.8 mm (0.63 in.)
4 N·m (0.4kgf·m,
3 lbf·ft) A
E
F
B
C
C
C
G D
20-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:18 61S5N000_200_0048
Drain Channel Replacement

1. Remove the moonroof glass (see page 20-45). 4. Remove the drain channel (A).
2. With the moonroof wrench, move both glass A

brackets (A) to the position where the moonroof
normally pivots down, and remove the screws
securing the drain channel (B).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
A
5. Install the channel in the reverse order of removal,
• Push the drain channel onto the hooks until a

faint click is heard.
• Check the glass height adjustment (see page 20-
3. Release the drain channel (A) from both hooks (B) 45).
of the drain channel slider by pulling the drain
channel forward. 6. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from
a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure
B spray.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-47

00/10/26 16:02:18 61S5N000_200_0049
Moonroof
Sunshade Replacement
1. Remove the drain channel (see page 20-47). 4. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A),
move the sunshade forward until you can see both
2. Slide the sunshade (A) until you can see both sunshade rear hooks (B). Do not damage the
sunshade slider spacers (B). sunshade and hooks.
Fastener Locations Fastener Locations
: Screw, 4 : Screw, 4
B
B
A
A
3. Remove the screws, then remove both spacers. 5. Remove the screws, then remove both hooks.
20-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:19 61S5N000_200_0050
Motor Replacement
6. Release both rear sunshade base sliders (A) from 1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-60).
the guide rail portions of the frame, then remove
the sunshade. 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the
connector (A), and remove the bolts, then remove
A
the motor (B).
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2 A
7. Remove both front sunshade base sliders (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal,

A • Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.

• Check the motor operation.
8. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal,
and check the glass height adjustment (see page
20-45).
9. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from
spray.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-49

00/10/26 16:02:19 61S5N000_200_0051
Moonroof
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement

• Headliner (see page 20-60)

• Moonroof glass (see page 20-45)
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the motor connector (A), open/close-tilt/close switch connector
(B), and the drain tubes (C), and remove the moonroof relays (D).
Fastener Locations A F
: Bolt, 10
E
C
F
F
F D
F B
F F
F
C
C
F
G H
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m H
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
C
3. Remove the interior harness (E) by detaching the harness clips (F).
4. With an assistant holding the frame (G), starting at the rear, remove the bolts and release the rear hooks (H) by
moving the frame forward, then remove the frame.
5. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the front door opening. Take care not to scratch
the interior trim and body, or tear the seat covers.
20-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:19 61S5N000_200_0052
6. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, 8. From inside: Release the rear drain tube (A) from
remove the kick panel, left or right (see page 20-57). the inside of the vehicle by releasing the clips (B).
Tie a string to the end of the drain tube, then pull Remove the rear drain tube.
the front drain tube (B) down out of the A-pillar.
A
B
A 9. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order

7. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the trunk
compartment, remove these parts (see page 20-59): • Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes
and drain valves using compressed air.
• Trunk floor mat and trunk floor • Check the frame seal.
• Trunk rear trim panel • Clean the surface of the frame.
• When installing the frame, first attach the rear
Pull back the trunk side trim panel and release the hooks into the body holes.
rear drain tube (B) from the clip (C), and pull the • Make sure the connectors are plugged in
drain tube out through the hole in the pillar. properly.
• When installing the rear drain tube at the C-pillar,
make sure the cushion on the tube aligns with
B C
the hole in the body, and that the alignment mark
on the tube aligns with the upper clip.
• When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the
frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.).
• Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as
shown.
Upward
A
A
10. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from
spray.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-51

00/10/26 16:02:20 61S5N000_200_0053
Moonroof
Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement

1. Remove the frame (see page 20-50). 4. While pushing down on the hook (A), slide the
drain channel sliders (B) back on both sides.
2. Remove these parts from the frame:
• Sunshade (see page 20-48)

B
• Moonroof motor (see page 20-49)
3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the

slide stops (A), cable tube rear brackets (B), cable
tube side bracket mounting bolts (C) and the cable
tube mounting screws (D) from both sides of the
frame (E).
A
Fastener Locations
C : Bolt, 2 D : Screw, 2 F : Screw, 2
G : Screw, 2
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
A (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft) 5. Turn both cable tube side brackets (A) up, and
remove the drain channel sliders (B).
F B
G
D A
C
B
20-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:20 61S5N000_200_0054
6. Pivot the glass bracket (A) down by sliding the link 8. Install the slider and cable assembly in the reverse
lifter (B) back, then slide both glass brackets back order of removal, and note these items:
with the link lifter.
• Damaged parts should be replaced.
A
• Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket
(A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B)
Forward
indicated by the arrows.
• Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both
link lifters are parallel, and in the fully closed
position.
• Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame
and glass, then check the opening drag (see page
20-55).
B
A
7. Slide the cable assembly (A) and both glass

brackets (B) back, then remove them from the
frame (C).
C
A
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-53

00/10/26 16:02:21 61S5N000_200_0055
Moonroof
Position Switch Adjustment

1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-60).
2. With the moonroof wrench, close the glass (A) fully:
• Make sure both link lifters (B) are parallel, and in the position shown.
• Check the glass fit to the roof panel and the glass height (see page 20-45).
F E
D
C
5 x 0.8 mm
5 N·m
3. With an open-end wrench, loosen the position switch mounting bolts (C).
4. Adjust the position switch (D):
• Move the switch plate (E) a little at a time, then secure it at the position where you hear a faint click when the
switch cam (F) pushes the position switch (open/close).
• Check that the switch plate contacts the switch bracket (F).
5. Check the operation of the glass (from the tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open position to
the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch.
20-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:21 61S5N000_200_0056
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check

1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-60). 4. Opening drag check: Protect the leading edge of the
glass with a shop towel (A). Measure the effort
2. Closing force check: required to open the glass using a spring scale (B)
as shown.
• With a shop towel (A) on the leading edge of the
glass (B), attach a spring scale (C) as shown.
• Have an assistant hold the switch to close the
glass while you measure the force required to A
stop it.
• Read the force as soon as the glass stops moving,
then immediately release the switch and spring
scale.
Closing Force: 200−290 N (20−30 kgf, 44−66 lbf)
B
A B
5. If the load is over 40 N (4 kgf, 9 lbf), check:
• The side clearance and glass height adjustment

(see page 20-45).
• For broken or damaged sliding parts. If any
sliding parts are damaged, replace them.
3. If the force in not within specification, remove the

moonroof motor (see page 20-49), then check:
• The gear portion and the inner cable for breakage

and damage. If the gear portion is broken,
replace the motor. If the inner cable is damaged,
remove the frame (see page 20-50), and replace
the cable assembly (see page 20-52).
• The moonroof motor (see page 20-49). If the
motor fails to run or doesn’t turn smoothly,
replace it.
• The opening drag. Go to step 4.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-55

00/10/26 16:02:24 61S5N000_200_0057
Interior Trim
A-PILLAR TRIM
page 20-57
FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM
page 20-57
REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM
page 20-57
C-PILLAR TRIM
page 20-58
REAR SHELF
page 20-58
TRUNK REAR
TRIM PANEL
page 20-59
TRUNK SIDE
TRIM PANEL
page 20-59
TRUNK FLOOR MAT

page 20-59
TRUNK FLOOR
page 20-59
HEADLINER
KICK PANEL Removal/Installation, page 20-60
page 20-57
B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM
page 20-57
SEAT SIDE TRIM
CARPET page 20-57
B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM
page 20-57
FRONT DOOR SILL TRIM
page 20-57
20-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:25 61S5N000_200_0058
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area

NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage.
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels.
Remove the trim as shown:
• To remove the driver’s kick panel, remove the footrest (see step 2 on page 20-62).
• To remove the seat side trim, remove the rear seat side bolster (see page 20-85).
• To remove the front side cap and opener lock cylinder, refer to trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener replacement
(see page 20-114).
Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:

• Apply liquid thread lock to the front seat belt upper anchor bolt before installation.
• Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the belts.
Fastener Locations
A : Clip, 2 B : Clip, 3 C : Clip, 9 D : Clip, 1

(Black) (White)
FRONT DOOR
FRONT SEAT BELT B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM OPENING TRIM A-PILLAR TRIM
UPPER ANCHOR BOLT
7/16-20 UNF
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)
A
KICK PANEL
REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM
A
UPPER ANCHOR
B COVER
FRONT SIDE
CAP
B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM

B
OPENER LOCK
CYLINDER B
C
C
C
C
D
C
C C
C C
C-PILLAR TRIM
FRONT DOOR SILL TRIM
SEAT SIDE TRIM FRONT SEAT BELT LOWER

ANCHOR BOLT
7/16-20 UNF
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-57

00/10/26 16:02:25 61S5N000_200_0059
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Shelf Area

NOTE:
Remove the trim as shown. To remove the rear shelf, remove the rear seat side bolster from each side (see page 20-
85), and lock cylinder trim (see step 1 on page 20-86).
Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:

• When installing the rear shelf, slip the rear seat belts and center belt through the slits and hole in the rear shelf.
• Make sure the high mount brake light connector is plugged in properly.
Fastener Locations REAR WINDOW

DEFOGGER HARNESS
A : Clip, 5 B : Clip, 2 C : Clip, 12
(White)
C-PILLAR TRIM
CENTER
RETRACTOR CAP
A
REAR SHELF LOCK A
CYLINDER TRIM
A A
B
B
A
SLIT
HOOK C
C
C REAR DOOR
HOOK OPENING TRIM
BODY
HOOK C
C C SEAT SIDE
C TRIM
C
C
C REAR SEAT BELT
C
C
REAR CENTER BELT
SLIT
REAR CENTER BELT

HIGH MOUNT CENTER ANCHOR BOLT
BRAKE LIGHT 7/16-20 UNF
CONNECTOR 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m,
24 lbf·ft)
REAR SEAT BELT REAR SHELF
20-58 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:26 61S5N000_200_0060
Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area

NOTE:
Remove the trim as shown.
Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
Fastener Locations
A : Clip, 4 B : Clip, 4 C : Clip, 8
TRUNK FLOOR MAT
TRUNK FLOOR
C
C
B
C
C
B C
C
C
B
A
A
B
A C
A
LEFT TRUNK SIDE

TRIM PANEL
TRUNK REAR
TRIM PANEL RIGHT TRUNK SIDE
TRIM PANEL
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-59

00/10/26 16:02:26 61S5N000_200_0061
Interior Trim
Headliner Removal/Installation
NOTE: 3. Lower the grab handle, then remove the caps (A).
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with Remove the self-tapping ET screws, then remove
protective tape to prevent damage. the grab handle (B). Remove the remaining grab
• Take care not to bend and scratch the headliner. handles.
• Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other
Fastener Locations
interior trim.
: Screw, 6
5 x 0.8 mm
• A-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-57) 3.4 N·m (0.35 kgf·m,
• B-pillar upper trim, both sides (see page 20-57) 2.5 lbf·ft)
• Rearview mirror (see page 20-29)
• Spotlights/ceiling light, with moonroof (see page
22-93)
• Spotlights, without moonroof (see page 22-94)
• Ceiling light, without moonroof (see page 22-94)
2. From both sides, remove the caps (A), and remove

the self-tapping ET screws, then remove the
sunvisor (B) and holder (C).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 4
B A
5 x 0.8 mm
3.4 N·m B
(0.35 kgf·m, 2.5 lbf·ft)
20-60 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:27 61S5N000_200_0062
4. Remove the headliner. 5. Remove the headliner.

With moonroof: Without moonroof:
–1 Remove the socket plug (A). –1 Remove the upper portion of the C-pillar trim
–2 Remove the upper portion of the C-pillar trim (A) from each side (see page 20-58).
(B) from each side (see page 20-58). –2 Remove the remaining front door opening trim
–3 Remove the remaining front door opening trim (B) and rear door opening trim (C) from
(C) and rear door opening trim (D) from each each roof portion.
roof portion. –3 With the help of an assistant, release the
–4 Detach the clips (E), and release the fasteners headliner (D) from the clips (E) by sliding the
(F) by pulling the front portion of the headliner headliner forward, and lowering the headliner.
(G) down. –4 Remove the cushion tape (F), then remove the
–5 With the help of an assistant, release the clips roof harness (G) from the headliner.
(H) of the headliner from the moonroof frame –5 Remove the headliner through the front
(I), and release the headliner from the clips (J) passenger’s door opening.
by sliding the headliner forward, and lowering
Fastener Locations
the headliner.
–6 Remove the headliner through the front E : Clip, 2 F : Cushion tape, 6
passenger’s door opening.
Fastener Locations
E : Clip, 3 H : Clip, 2 J : Clip, 2 A
E
E
F
F F
I F
F
B F
J
F
J C
H D B
E H
G
E
E D
A
G
C
F
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-61

00/10/26 16:02:27 61S5N000_200_0063
Interior Trim
Headliner Removal/Installation Carpet Replacement

(cont’d)
SRS component locations (see page 23-10), and the
6. If necessary, remove the bolts, then remove the precautions and procedures (see page 23-11) in the SRS
grab handle bracket (A). Remove the remaining section before performing repairs or service.
grab handle brackets, as needed.
NOTE:
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 6 • Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet.
• Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other
interior trim pieces.
A 1. Remove these items:
• Front seats, both sides (see page 20-77)

• Rear seat cushion (see page 20-85)
• Rear seat side bolsters, both sides (see page 20-
85)
• Kick panels, both sides (see page 20-57)
• Front door sill trim, both sides (see page 20-57)
• Seat side trim, both sides (see page 20-57)
5 x 0.8 mm • Center console (see page 20-64)
5 N·m • Driver’s dashboard under cover (see page 20-68)
• Passenger’s dashboard lower cover (see page
7. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal, 20-70)
2. Remove the nut (A), and using a hex wrench,
• When reinstalling the headliner through the door release the clip (B), then remove the footrest (C).
opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Also, be
Fastener Locations
careful not to scratch the body.
• If the threads on a visor and grab handle screws A : Nut, 1 B : Clip, 1
are worn out, use an oversized self-tapping ET
screw made specifically for this application.
• Check that both sides of the headliner are
securely attached to the trim.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
20-62 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:27 61S5N000_200_0064
3. Using a utility knife, cut the carpet (A) under the 6. Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal,
heater area (B) on the driver’s side, and cut out the and note these items:
shift lever area (C) and parking brake lever area (D)
as shown. Release the hook (E), then pull back the • Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the
carpet. carpet.
A B • Make sure the seat harnesses are routed
correctly.
• Slip the slit in the carpet over the hook.
• Reattach the cut areas under the heater around
the shift lever and parking brake lever with a wire
tie.
• When installing new carpet, cut the carpet (A)
under the heater area (B), and around the shift
lever (C) and parking brake lever (D). After
installing the new carpet, reattach the cut areas
(C, D) with wire ties.
C
A B
E
4. On the driver’s side, remove the screws (A), then

remove the floor mat holders (B).
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 2 C : Clip, 1
5. Remove the clip (C), and release the fasteners (D),

then remove the carpet (E).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-63

00/10/26 16:02:28 61S5N000_200_0065
Console
Center Console Removal/Installation

NOTE: 3. Remove the screws (A, B) and clips (C), and remove
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with the center console (D).
protective tape to prevent damage.
Fastner Locations
• Take care not to scratch the front seat, dashboard,
and related parts. A : Screw, 2 B : Screw, 2 C : Clip, 2
1. Detach the clips (A, B) by pulling the center console

box (C) up, and removing it from the center console
(D).
C
Fastener Locations B B
D
A : Clip, 4 B : Clip, 5
C
B C
B A
A
A B
A B
A
B
4. Install the console in the reverse order of removal,

D and replace any damaged clips.
2. M/T: Remove the shift knob.
20-64 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:28 61S5N000_200_0066
Wood Trim Panel Replacement Center Console Rear Cover

Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the center console.
1. Slide the front seat rearward fully. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the center console.
2. Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with protective tape. 1. Remove the center console (see page 20-64).
Carefully insert a flat-tip screwdriver next to the
clips, and detach the clips by prying on the wood 2. Remove the screws, then remove the center
trim panel (A), then remove it from the center console rear cover (A).
console (B).
Faster Locations
Faster Locations
: Screw, 2
: Clip, 5
A
B
3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal.
3. Install the panel by pushing on the clip portions
until the clips snap into place.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-65

00/10/26 16:02:28 61S5N000_200_0067
Console
Center Console Trim Replacement

NOTE: Take care not to scratch the center console.
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-64).
2. Remove the screws, then remove the center

console trim (A). MT model is shown, AT model is
similar.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 6
20-66 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:29 61S5N000_200_0068
Dashboard
Instrument Panel Removal/ Driver’s Dashboard Lower Cover

Installation Removal/Installation
NOTE: NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and

• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with related parts.
protective tape, and apply protective tape around the
related parts, to prevent damage. 1. Remove the driver’s dashboard lower cover (A).
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
parts. –1 Adjust the steering column upward.
–2 Turn both lock knobs (B) 45°.
1. Tilt the steering column down. –3 Gently pull out the bottom to release the hooks
(C).
2. Remove the steering column upper cover (see step –4 Pull down the panel to release the hooks (D).
4 on page 17-27).
3. Remove the instrument panel (A). C
–1 Remove the screws (B).

–2 Gently pull out along the bottom to release the
clips (C) and hooks (D).
–3 Gently pull out the upper portion of the panel.
Fastener Locations
B : Screw, 2 C : Clip, 2
C
C
A
A B B
B
B
C
D
4. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-67

00/10/26 16:02:29 61S5N000_200_0069
Dashboard
Driver’s Dashboard Under Cover Driver’s Pocket Removal/

Removal/Installation Installation
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and NOTE:

related parts. • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Remove the driver’s dashboard under cover (A). parts.
–1 Turn the lock knob (B) 45°. 1. Remove the driver’s pocket (A).
–2 Gently pull down the rear edge to release the
clip (C). –1 Remove the driver’s dashboard under cover.
–3 Pull the cover away to release it from the clip –2 Open the pocket, and remove the screw (B).
(D). –3 From behind the dashboard, push the pocket
back by hand to release the clips (C).
Fastener Location
–4 Release the hooks (D).
C : Clip, 1 –5 If equipped, disconnect the cruise control main
switch connector (E), moonroof switch
connector (F), and power mirror switch
D connector (G).
Fastener Locations
B : Screw, 1 C : Clip, 2
G
D
C A
C C
2. Install the pocket in the reverse order of removal,

and make sure each connector is plugged in
properly (for some models).
20-68 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:29 61S5N000_200_0070
Dashboard Center Lower Cover Center Panel Removal/Installation

Removal/Installation
NOTE:
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
NOTE: protective tape, and apply protective tape around the
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with related parts, to prevent damage.
protective tape, and apply protective tape around the • Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
related parts, to prevent damage. parts.
parts. 1. Remove the dashboard center lower cover.
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-64). 2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio,
then write down the frequencies for the preset
2. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (A). buttons.
–1 Gently pull out the cover to release the clips (B, 3. Remove the center panel (A).
C).
–2 Disconnect the accessory power socket –1 Remove the bolts (B) from the dashboard
connector (D). If equipped with seat heaters, center lower cover opening.
disconnect the switch connector (E). –2 Gently pull out along the bottom to release the
lower clips (C), then along both sides and top
Fastener Locations
to release the remaining clips (C).
B : Clip, 4 C : Clip, 1 –3 Disconnect the hazard warning switch
connector (D), audio unit connector (E),
antenna lead (F), heater switch connector (G),
D and heater control unit connectors (H).
Fastener Locations
E B : Bolt, 2 C : Clip, 9
B
B F D
E
B
B G
A
A
C C
3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, C C
and make sure the connectors is plugged in
properly. C
H B
B C
C
5 x 0.8 mm C
5 N·m (0.5 kgf·m, 4 lbf·ft) C
4. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal,

• Make sure each connector is plugged in properly

and antenna lead is connected properly.
• Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-69

00/10/26 16:02:30 61S5N000_200_0071
Dashboard
Passenger’s Dashboard Lower Glove Box Removal/Installation

Cover Removal/Installation
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and precautions and procedures (see page 23-11) in the SRS
related parts. section before performing repairs or service.
1. Remove the passenger’s dashboard lower cover NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and
(A). related parts.
–1 Gently pull down the edge nearest the glove 1. Remove the passenger’s dashboard lower cover.
box to release the clips (B).
–2 Pull the cover away to release the pins (C) from 2. While holding the glove box (A), remove the glove
the holders (D). box stop (B) on each side.
B
Fastener Locations
B : Clip, 3
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the glove box.

Fastener Locations
B
: Bolt, 2
B
A
5 x 0.8 mm
4. Install the glove box in the reverse order of

removal.
20-70 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:30 61S5N000_200_0072
Dashboard Side Vent Removal/Installation

1. Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with protective tape,
and apply protective tape around the related parts
to prevent damage. Carefully insert a flat-tip
screwdriver next to the clip (A), and detach the clips
by prying on the side vent (B). Take care not to
scratch the dashboard and related parts.
C A
A
A
A
2. Remove the vent by releasing the hooks (C).
3. Reinstall the hook portions of the vent first, then

push the clip portions into place securely.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-71

00/10/26 16:02:30 61S5N000_200_0073
Dashboard
Dashboard Removal/Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. From under the center dash, remove the clip (A),
SRS component locations (see page 23-10), and the then remove the rear vent duct (B).
precautions and procedures (see page 23-11) in the SRS
Fastener Location
section before performing repairs or service.
A : Clip, 1
NOTE:
protective tape, and apply protective tape around the
related parts to prevent damage.
• Have an assistant help you when removing and B
installing the dashboard.
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard, body and
other related parts. A
buttons.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at

least 3 minutes before beginning work. 5. From outside of the passenger’s door, gently pull
out on the bottom of the dashboard side cover (A)
3. Remove these items: to release the lower clip (B), then release the
remaining clips (B) and hooks (C), to remove the
• Center console (see page 20-64) cover.
• Driver’s dashboard lower cover (see page 20-67)
Fastener Locations
• Driver’s dashboard under cover (see page 20-68)
• Passenger’s dashboard lower cover (see page B : Clip, 2
20-70)
• Glove box (see page 20-70)
• Kick panels, both sides (see page 20-57)
• A- pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-57) C
• Steering column (see page 17-27)
B
A C
20-72 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:31 61S5N000_200_0074
Driver’s side: Middle portion:
6. From under the dash, disconnect the interior wire 7. From the passenger’s side, disconnect the floor
harness connector (A), driver’s door wire harness wire harness connectors (A), engine compartment
connectors (B), clutch pedal position switch wire harness connectors (B) and A/C sub wire
connector (C) (on MT model) and brake pedal harness connectors (C).
position switch connector (D), and disconnect the
B A
floor wire harness connectors (E) and engine C
compartment wire harness connectors (F) from the C A
under-dash fuse/relay box (G). B
A B
B
A
A 8. On the driver’s side, disconnect the floor wire

harness connector (A) and engine compartment
wire harness connector (B), and using a Torx T30
B D bit, remove the ground bolt (C). On AT model,
C
disconnect the parking pin shift connector (D) and
shift lock solenoid connector (E).
A
E
F A
B
E E
C
6 x 1.0 mm D
F 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-73

00/10/26 16:02:31 61S5N000_200_0075
Dashboard
Dashboard Removal/Installation (cont’d)

Passenger’s side: 11. From outside the driver’s door, remove the caps (A),
then remove the bolts (B, C, D), and lift up on the
9. From under the dash, disconnect the ECM/PCM dashboard (E) to release it from the guide pins (F,
connector E (A), 20P ECM/PCM wire harness G) and hook (H).
connector (B), passenger’s door wire harness
Fastener Locations
connectors (C), and antenna lead (D).
B : Bolt, 3 C : Bolt, 2 D : Bolt, 2
A B
H
F F
E
F
D
A
B D
B
D
C A B
C
C
G
10. Detach all of the harness and connector clips. 8 x 1.25 mm
8 x 1.25 mm 22 N·m
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m,
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) 16 lbf·ft)
12. Carefully remove the dashboard through the front

door opening.
13. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of

• Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins

correctly.
• Apply liquid thread lock to the dashboard
mounting bolts of the middle portion before
reinstallation.
• Before tightening the bolts, make sure the each
wire harness is not pinched.
• Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly, and the antenna lead is connected
properly.
• Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
20-74 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:32 61S5N000_200_0076
Steering Hanger Beam Replacement

NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 4. Remove the bolts (A, B) and screws (C) securing the
dashboard (D) and steering hanger beam (E), and if
1. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-72). equipped, disconnect the cruise control main
switch connector (F), moonroof switch connector
2. Remove these items from the dashboard: (G), and power mirror switch connector (H), and
separate the dashboard and steering hanger beam.
• Center panel (see page 20-69)
Fastener Locations
• Instrument panel (see page 20-67)
• Gauge assembly (see page 22-62) A : Bolt, 10 B : Bolt, 2 C : Screw, 4
• Passenger’s airbag (see page 23-129)
3. From outside of the driver’s side, gently pull out on

the bottom of the dashboard side cover (A) to
E
release the lower clip (B), then release the
remaining clips (B) and hooks (C), to remove the
cover.
C
Fastener Locations C
B : Clip, 2
C
H
C F G I
A
A
C A
AA
A
A A
A
A B
B B
D
C 5 x 0.8 mm
5 N·m
(0.5 kgf·m,
4 lbf·ft)
5. Install the beam in the reverse order of removal,

B • Make sure the dashboard wire harness (I) is not

A pinched.
• Make sure the connectors are connected properly
(for some models).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-75

00/10/26 16:02:35 61S5N000_200_0077
Seats
REAR SEAT
Seat-back latch Replacement,
page 20-86
Seat-back Lock Cylinder Replacement,
page 20-86
Seat-back Cover Replacement,
page 20-87
Seat Side Bolster Cover Replacement,
page 20-88
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement,
page 20-89
FRONT SEAT
(Driver’s)
Removal and Installation, page 20-77
Disassembly/Reassembly-Driver’s, page 20-79
Armrest Replacement, page 20-81
Seat Cover Replacement, page 20-82
FRONT SEAT
(Passenger’s)
Disassembly/Reassembly-Passenger’s, page 20-80
Seat Cover Replacement, page 20-82
20-76 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:35 61S5N000_200_0078
Front Seat Removal/Installation

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Remove the bolts (A) securing the front seat (B).
Fastener Locations
section before performing repairs or service. A : Bolt, 4
NOTE
protective tape to prevent damage.
• Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat
covers.
B
buttons. A

A
least 3 minutes before beginning work.
3. Remove the seat track end covers (A) from the back
of both seat tracks.
Outer:
10 x 1.25 mm
34 N·m
A (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Inner:
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-77

00/10/26 16:02:35 61S5N000_200_0079
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation (cont’d)

5. Lift up the front seat, then detach the harness clip
(A), and disconnect the seat belt switch connector
(B), seat belt buckle tensioner connector (C), and
side airbag connector (D). If equipped with seat
heaters, disconnect it’s connector (E). On the
passenger’s seat, disconnect the OPDS unit
connector (F). The passenger’s seat is shown, the
driver’s seat is similar except it has no OPDS unit
connector.
F
B
D
A E C
6. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the

front seat through the front door opening.
7. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.

20-78 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:36 61S5N000_200_0080
Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly - Driver’s

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-10), and the precautions
and procedures (see page 23-11) in the SRS section before performing repairs or service.
NOTE:
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers.
Disassemble the seat as shown. The driver’s seat with manual height adjustment is shown; the driver’s seat without
manual height adjustment is configured like passenger’s (see page 20-80).
Reassemble the seat in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
• Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track.

• To prevent wrinkles in the seat cushion cover, stretch the material evenly over the pad.
HEADREST
Release the seat cushion

cover from the cushion
frame spring.
HOOKS SEAT-BACK
HOOKS
HOOKS
(Five places)
10 x 1.25 mm
47 N·m
HANGER SPRING
CLIP
SEAT HEATER SIDE AIRBAG
HARNESS HARNESS
(For some models) HOOKS
RECLINE COVER
CLIP
CLIP
CENTER COVER
RECLINE KNOB
HEIGHT HANDLE
SEAT CUSHION
FRAME/SEAT
TRACKS CAP
CLIP
SEAT HEATER CLIP

UNIT SLIDE LEVER
(For some models)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-79

00/10/26 16:02:36 61S5N000_200_0081
Seats
Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly - Passenger’s

NOTE:
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers.
Disassemble the seat as shown. The driver’s seat without manual height adjustment is symmetrical except it has no
OPDS harness.
Reassemble the seat in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
• Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track.

• To prevent wrinkles in the seat cushion cover, stretch the material evenly over the pad.
HEADREST
Release the seat cushion

cover from the cushion
frame spring.
SEAT-BACK
HOOKS
HOOKS
HOOKS
(Five places)
10 x 1.25 mm
47 N·m
SEAT HEATER
HARNESS
(For some models)
HANGER SPRING
CLIP CENTER COVER
OPDS HARNESS
CLIP
CLIP
SIDE AIRBAG
HARNESS
SEAT CUSHION
HOOK FRAME/SEAT
TRACKS
RECLINE COVER
CLIP
SEAT HEATER
RECLINE KNOB UNIT
HOOK (For some models)
SLIDE LEVER
20-80 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:37 61S5N000_200_0082
Front Seat Armrest Replacement

NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the armrest
seat covers. bracket (A).
Fastener Locations
On driver’s seat:
: Bolt, 2
1. Unzip the armrest cover (A), and pull back the
armrest cover.
Fastener Location A
6 x 1.0 mm
: Nut, 1 9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
4. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal.
C
B
10 x 1.25 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
2. Remove the nut, the wave washer (B), and the

washer (C), then remove the armrest (D). If
necessary, remove the bushings (E) from the
armrest.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-81

00/10/26 16:02:37 61S5N000_200_0083
Seats
Front Seat Cover Replacement

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Fold the seat-back forward.
precautions and procedures (see page 23-11) in the SRS 6. Release the hooks (A), and unzip the seat-back
section before performing repairs or service. cover (B). Pull the side airbag harness (C) and the
OPDS harness (D) (passenger’s seat) out through
NOTE: the harness guides (E) and holes (F) in the seat-
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat back cover.
covers.
• On the passenger’s seat with side airbag, do not
touch the OPDS sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep
it away from oil. Oil can corrode the sensor causing it B
to fail.
B
A
Seat-back Cover
B
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-77).

F
2. Remove the headrest.
3. Driver’s seat: Remove the armrest (see page 20-81).
4. From under the seat cushion, detach the side A A

airbag connector clip (A), and on the passenger’s
seat, detach the OPDS unit connector clip (B).
Release the hook springs (C), then pull the harness E
guide (D) back. The passenger’s seat is shown, the D A C
driver’s seat is symmetrical except it has no OPDS
unit connector.
A B
D
C
20-82 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:37 61S5N000_200_0084
7. Remove the side airbag (see page 23-131), and 9. Pull out the headrest guides (A) while pinching the
release the hooks (A) from the airbag module end of the guides, and remove them.
holder (B).
A A
A
A
8. Release the hooks (A) and hook springs (B), then 10. Pull back the seat-back cover all the way around,
loosen the seat-back cover (C). then remove it.
C
11. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,
B and note these items:
B
• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back

A
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
A
over the pad before securing the hooks and hook
springs.
B B • Make sure the side airbag harness and OPDS
harness (passenger’s seat) are routed properly.
• If necessary, reinitialize the OPDS control unit
(see page 23-24).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-83

00/10/26 16:02:38 61S5N000_200_0085
Seats
Front Seat Cover Replacement (cont’d)

Seat Cushion Cover 6. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the
way around, and release the clips (A), then remove
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-77). the seat cushion cover.
2. Remove the recline cover and center cover, drivers

seat (see page 20-79), passenger’s seat (see page
20-80).
3. From under the seat cushion, detach the side

airbag connector clip, and on the passenger’s seat,
detach the OPDS unit connector clip. Release the
hook springs.
4. Release the hooks (A) from both sides the seat

cushion.

• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat

cushion cover, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing
the clips and hooks.
• Replace any clips you removed with new ones
A (A). Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers (B).
5. Release the seat-back cover (A) from the cushion
frame spring (B), and release the hooks (C) from A
under the seat cushion.
C C
B B
C C
20-84 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:38 61S5N000_200_0086
Rear Seat Removal/Installation

NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat covers.
Remove the rear seat as shown.
Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Before attaching the rear seat-back and cushion, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belts and
center belt.
• When installing the seat cushion, slip the seat belt buckles through the slits in the seat cushion.
• Make sure the seat-back locks securely.
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 1 B : Bolt, 2 C : Bolt, 2 D : Bolt, 1
HOOK
Release it from trunk
compartment.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m HOOK
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm HOOK
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
BUSHING
RIGHT SEAT SIDE
BOLSTER C
BUSHING C
PIVOT BRACKET
6 x 1.0 mm D
9.8 N·m LEFT SEAT SIDE
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) BOLSTER
BUSHING
RIGHT SEAT-BACK B
LEFT SEAT-BACK
SEAT CUSHION
CENTER BELT
Remove the belt from the
center belt guide.
HOOK
SEAT BELT
BUCKLE
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
CLIP
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-85

00/10/26 16:02:39 61S5N000_200_0087
Seats
Rear Seat-back Latch Replacement Rear Seat-back Lock Cylinder

Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the interior trim.
1. Remove the rear shelf (see page 20-58). NOTE:

2. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A), and remove the protective tape to prevent damage.
bolts, then remove the seat-back latch (B). • Take care not to scratch the interior trim.
Fastener Locations
1. Remove the lock cylinder trim (A).
A
: Bolt, 2
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
2. From trunk compartment, disconnect the cylinder

rods from both seat-back latches.
3. Remove the screws, then remove the seat-back

B
lock cylinder (A) and cylinder rods (B).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
3. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Make sure the cylinder rod is connected securely.

• Make sure the seat-back locks securely and
opens properly.
4. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of

• Make sure the cylinder rod is connected securely.

• Make sure the seat-back opens properly.
20-86 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:39 61S5N000_200_0088
Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement

NOTE: 4. Pull back the seat-back cover (A), and remove the
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat clips (B), and release the hooks (C).
covers.
Fastener Locations
B : Clip Left, 6
1. Remove the seat-back (see page 20-85). Right, 3
2. On the left seat-back: Remove the screw, then

remove the center belt guide (A).
A
Fastener Location
Left seat- back:
: Screw, 1
B B B B B B
C E C
A
Right seat- back:
3. Release the hook (A), and unzip the seat-back cover A
(B). The left seat-back is shown, the right seat-back B B B
is similar.
E C
A
5. Remove the seat-back cover and pad (D) from the
B seat-back frame (E).
A B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-87

00/10/26 16:02:39 61S5N000_200_0089
Seats
Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover

(cont’d) Replacement
6. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the 1. Remove the seat side bolster (see page 20-85).
way around, and release the hooks (B) of the
horizontal wires (C) from the vertical wires (D) on 2. Release all the hook strips (A), and fold back the
the pad, and on the left seat-back, remove the clips seat side bolster cover (B), and release the cover
(E), then remove the seat-back cover. from the hooks (C), to remove it.
B
Left seat-back:
D C A
C A
C
B
Right seat-back:
C A C
B
D 3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,

D
and to prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing the
hook strips.


over the pad before securing the hooks and clips.
• Replace any clips you removed with new ones.
Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers.
20-88 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:39 61S5N000_200_0089
Seats
Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover

(cont’d) Replacement
6. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the 1. Remove the seat side bolster (see page 20-85).
way around, and release the hooks (B) of the
horizontal wires (C) from the vertical wires (D) on 2. Release all the hook strips (A), and fold back the
the pad, and on the left seat-back, remove the clips seat side bolster cover (B), and release the cover
(E), then remove the seat-back cover. from the hooks (C), to remove it.
B
Left seat-back:
D C A
C A
C
B
Right seat-back:
C A C
B
D 3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,

D
and to prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing the
hook strips.


over the pad before securing the hooks and clips.
• Replace any clips you removed with new ones.
Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers.
20-88 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:40 61S5N000_200_0090
Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement

1. Remove the rear seat cushion (see page 20-85). 4. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,
2. Release all the clips (A) from under the seat
cushion, and fold back the seat cushion cover (B). • To prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing
the clips.
• Replace any clips (A) you removed with new
ones. Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers (B).
A B
3. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the B
way around, and release the clips (A), then remove
the seat cushion cover.
A
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-89

00/10/26 16:02:40 61S5N000_200_0091
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation

NOTE:
• Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the front bumper.
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body.
Remove the front bumper as shown.
Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Make sure the front turn signal light connectors are plugged in properly.
• Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers and upper beams on both sides securely.
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 2 B : Screw, 2 C : Clip, 4 D : Clip, 6
HOOKS HOOKS
ABSORBER
RIGHT FRONT TURN

SIGNAL LIGHT CONNECTOR
SIDE SPACER
C
C UPPER BEAM
C A
C
FRONT INNER
FENDER
A
LEFT FRONT TURN

D B SIGNAL LIGHT CONNECTOR
D
D
D
D B D
FRONT BUMPER
20-90 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:41 61S5N000_200_0092
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation

NOTE:
• Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the rear bumper.
• Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body.
Remove the rear bumper as shown.
Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers, side brackets and upper brackets on both sides
securely.
• Make sure the side spacers of the rear bumper engage the clips on the body securely.
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 2 B : Screw, 2 C : Screw, 2 D : Clip, 2
UPPER BRACKET
HOOKS
SIDE BRACKET
HOOKS
CLIPS
HOOKS
(Six places)
ABSORBER
SIDE SPACER
CAP
A C
B
6 x 1.0 mm C
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) B
D
CAP SIDE SPACER
D
REAR BUMPER
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-91

00/10/26 16:02:41 61S5N000_200_0093
Hood
Adjustment
1. Slightly loosen each hood hinge bolt.
2. Adjust the hood alignment in this sequence.
• Adjust the hood right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes on the hood hinge
(A).
• Turn the hood edge cushions (B), as necessary, to make the hood fit flush with the body at the front and side
edges.
• Adjust the hood latch (C) to obtain the proper height at the forward edge, and move the hood latch right or left
until the striker (D) is centered in the hood latch.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
D
C
3. Tighten each bolt securely.
20-92 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:41 61S5N000_200_0094
Hood Seal Replacement

4. Check that the hood opens properly and locks 1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (A), then
securely. remove the hood seal (B). Take care not to scratch
the hood.
5. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts
Fastener Locations
A : Clip, 12
6. Grease each location of the hood latch and hood
hinge as indicated by the arrows.
2. Install the seals in the reverse order of removal,

and replace any damaged clips.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-93

00/10/26 16:02:41 61S5N000_200_0094
Hood Seal Replacement

4. Check that the hood opens properly and locks 1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (A), then
securely. remove the hood seal (B). Take care not to scratch
the hood.
Fastener Locations
A : Clip, 12
6. Grease each location of the hood latch and hood
hinge as indicated by the arrows.
2. Install the seals in the reverse order of removal,

-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-93

00/10/26 16:02:42 61S5N000_200_0095
Hood
Hood Insulator Replacement

1. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (A).
Fastener Locations
: Clip, 9
C B
2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips. Release the

hooks (B), then remove the hood insulator (C). Take
care not to scratch the hood.
3. Install the insulator in the reverse order of removal,

20-94 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:42 61S5N000_200_0096
Trunk Lid
Adjustment
1. Remove the item:
• Rear shelf (see page 20-58)

• Trunk rear trim panel (see page 20-59)
2. Slightly loosen each bolt.
3. Adjust the trunk lid alignment in the following sequence.
• Adjust the trunk lid hinges (A) right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes.
Take care not to hit the rear window when loosening the bolts (B).
• Turn the trunk lid edge cushions (C), in or out as necessary, to make the trunk lid fit flush with the body at the
rear and side edges.
• Adjust the fit between the trunk lid and the trunk lid opening by moving the striker (D).
C
A
B
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m D
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 lbf·ft)
4. Tighten each bolt securely.
5. Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely.
6. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-95

00/10/26 16:02:42 61S5N000_200_0097
Trunk Lid
Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Replacement

1. Remove the torsion bars (A) from the torsion bar 3. Remove the torsion bar center clip from the body.
center clip (B).
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the 4. Install the torsion bars in the reverse order of
torsion bars with the torsion bar tool (A) from both removal, and note these items:
trunk lid hinges. First remove the right torsion bar
(B), then remove the left torsion bar (C). • The shapes of the right torsion bar (A) and left
torsion bar (B) are shown. Install the torsion bars
C properly.
• Adjust the torsion bars forward or rearward with
the torsion bar assembly tool.
• Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks
securely.
A B
B
A
○= Normal position
●= Higher tension
20-96 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:42 61S5N000_200_0098
Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Replacement

1. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip (A) by pulling it
off.
B
C Forward
2. Locate the painted alignment mark (B or C) on the

trunk lid weatherstrip. Align the painted mark with
the alignment tab in the center of the trunk, and
install the weatherstrip. Make sure it’s seated
completely and facing in the direction shown. Make
sure there are no wrinkles in the weatherstrip.
3. Check for water leaks.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-97

00/10/26 16:02:43 61S5N000_200_0099
Fuel Fill Door
Adjustment
1. Slightly loosen the hinge mounting bolts (A). 5. Grease each location indicated by the arrows.

A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
2. Adjust the fuel fill door (B) in or out until it’s flush
with the body, and up or down as necessary to
equalize the gaps.
3. Tighten the hinge mounting bolts.
4. Check that the fuel fill door opens properly and

locks securely, and check that the rear of the door is
flush with the body.
20-98 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:43 61S5N000_200_0100
Exterior Trim
Front Grille Replacement

2. Remove the screws (A) and clips (B), and remove

the front grille (C) from the front bumper (D) by
releasing the hooks (E), and pulling the grille out.
Take care not to scratch the front bumper.
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 2 B : Clip, 4
A
D
A
B
B
B
B
C
E E
3. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal,

-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-99

00/10/26 16:02:43 61S5N000_200_0101
Exterior Trim
Cowl Covers Replacement

1. Remove the windshield wiper arms (see step 1 on page 22-133).
2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (A), then remove the hood rear seal (B), and detach the clips (C) from the
cowl covers. Take care not to scratch the cowl covers.
Fastener Locations
A : Clip, 9 C : Clip, 3 D : Clip, 5 E : Clip, 3
A
A
A
A
A
A
C D H A A
F A
D G
E
E I
E B
D C
C D
D
H
J
J
J
3. Detach the clips (D, E) and release the hook (G) by carefully pulling the passenger’s cowl cover (F) upward, and
pull the cover forward to release the hooks (H), then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body.
4. Detach the clips (D, E) by carefully pulling the driver’s cowl cover (I) upward, and pull the cover forward to release
the hooks (J), then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body.
5. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
20-100 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:44 61S5N000_200_0102
Roof Molding Replacement

1. Apply protective tape to the body (A). Using a 4. Pull up and release the rear bracket (A) from the pin
flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape (B), then remove the roof molding (C).
(B), pry up on the roof molding (C). Take care not to
scratch the body. B
C
D
E A
C A
5. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal,

B
• Take care not to damage the windshield molding.

• Make sure the roof molding is installed securely.
2. Pull up and slide the roof molding to release the
front bracket (D) from the pin (E).
3. Pull up the front portion of roof molding.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-101

00/10/26 16:02:44 61S5N000_200_0103
Exterior Trim
Roof Drip and Rear Pillar Moldings Replacement

NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Detach the moldings from each clip, then remove the roof drip molding (A) and rear pillar molding (B) as an
assembly. Take care not to scratch the body.
Fastener Locations
C : Clip, 12 D : Clip, 1 E : Clip, 1 F : Clip, 1
C C C C
C C
C
C C
D
C E
C F
A
C
B
2. Remove the clips (C, D, E, F), and replace any damaged clips.
3. Install the clips on the body.
4. Hold the molding up, and starting at the rear, align the molding to the body shape, then push on the clip portions
of the molding until the molding snaps into place.
20-102 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:44 61S5N000_200_0104
Door Moldings Replacement

NOTE:
• Wrap the blade of your putty knife or flat-tip screwdriver with protective tape to prevent damage to the door.
• Be careful not to pry too far or you may bend the molding.
1. Prepare to release the molding clips from inside the vehicle.
• To remove the front door molding, remove the front door panel (see page 20-6) and plastic cover.
• To remove the rear door molding, remove the rear door panel (see page 20-14) and plastic cover.
2. Release the clips (A) and gently pry the front door molding (B) or rear door molding (C) away from the door while
removing the adhesive tape (D, E).
Fastener Locations
A : Clip, 11
D D
A A A A A A A A A A A
B C E
E
D
3. Install the moldings in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips and adhesive tape.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-103

00/10/26 16:02:44 61S5N000_200_0105
Exterior Trim
Rear License Molding Replacement

1. Remove the trunk lid latch (see page 20-115).
2. On the inside the trunk lid, release the clips, then

remove the rear license molding (A). Take care not
to scratch the trunk lid.
Fastener Locations
: Clip, 5
3. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal,

20-104 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:45 61S5N000_200_0106
Emblem Replacement
NOTE: When removing the emblems, take care not to scratch the body.
1. To remove the front ‘‘A’’ emblem, remove the front bumper (see page 20-90), then remove the front grille (see
page 20-99).
2. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from
getting on the surface.
3. Apply the emblem where shown.

REAR ’’A’’ EMBLEM
1.7EL EMBLEM
FRONT ’’A’’ EMBLEM
Unit : mm (in.) ULEV EMBLEM ACURA EMBLEM

FRONT ’’A’’ EMBLEM REAR ’’A’’ EMBLEM
ADHESIVE TAPE
PUSH
NUT
CLIP
FRONT TRUNK
GRILLE ADHESIVE TAPE LID
ACURA EMBLEM 1.7EL EMBLEM

35.5
(1.4)
36 35.5
(1.41) (1.4)
36
(1.41) 42 39.5 (1.56)
(1.7)
Edge of the rear bumper. Edge of the rear bumper.
GLASS MARK
56 (2.2) ULEV APPLICATION
EMBLEM TAPE
14 14
(0.55) (0.55)
4. After installing the front ‘‘A’’ emblem, reinstall the front grille and front bumper.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-105

00/10/26 16:02:49 61S5N000_200_0116
Trunk Lid Latch Replacement

1. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A) and trunk
lid latch switch connector (B). Detach the trunk lid
latch switch connector from the trunk lid. Take care
not to bend the opener cable.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
B 7.2 lbf·ft)
2. Remove the bolts from the trunk lid latch (C), then
remove the latch.
3. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items.
• When installing the opener cable, set the cable

housing in the middle position (D).
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly
and the opener cable is connected properly.
• Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks
securely.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-115

00/10/26 16:02:45 61S5N000_200_0107
Fenderwell
Front Inner Fender Replacement

NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the front inner fender (A).
–1 On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B) then remove the front splash guard (C).
–2 From under the front bumper (D), remove the screw (B) securing the front bumper, splash shield (E), and front
inner fender, and remove the clip (F) securing the front bumper and front inner fender. With a front spoiler,
remove the clip (G) securing the front spoiler, front bumper, and front inner fender.
–3 From the wheel arch, remove the clips (F, H) securing the front inner fender (and splash shield) on the body.
–4 Release the hook (I) of the splash shield, then remove the front inner fender.
Fastener Locations
B : Screw, 4 F : Clip, 2 or 1 G : Clip, 1 H : Clip, 5
D H H
E
F or G
B
H
H B
B
B
C
A
2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
20-106 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:46 61S5N000_200_0108
Front Fender Fairing Replacement

1. Remove the front inner fender as necessary (see 3. From the wheel arch, remove the clip (A), and
page 20-106). release the clip (B), then remove the front fender
fairing (C).
2. Open the front door. From outside the door,
Fastener Locations
remove the upper clip (A), and from inside the door,
remove the lower clip (A) securing the front fender A : Clip, 1 B : Clip, 1
fairing (B) and front fender (C).
Fastener Locations
A : Clip, 2
C
B
4. Install the fender fairing in the reverse order of

B
A • Before installing the clips in the door opening
C
area, install the front fender fairing (A) to the
front fender (B) properly as shown.
A
A
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-107

00/10/26 16:02:46 61S5N000_200_0109
Fenderwell
Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement Rear Air Outlet Replacement

1. Remove the clips, then remove the fuel pipe 1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-91).
protector (A). Take care not to scratch the body.
2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air
Fastener Locations
outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body.
: Clip, 3
A B
3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook

portions until the hooks snap into place.
2. Install the protector in the reverse order of removal,

20-108 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:47 61S5N000_200_0110
Openers
TRUNK LID LATCH

FUEL FILL DOOR LATCH

Replacement, step 5 on page 20-111
TRUNK LID OPENER/

FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER CABLE
TRUNK LID OPENER/

HOOD LATCH FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER
Replacement, page 20-113 Replacement, page 20-114
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

HOOD OPENER CABLE Replacement, step 2 on page 20-110
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-109

00/10/26 16:02:48 61S5N000_200_0111
Openers
Hood Opener Cable Replacement

NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the body and related parts.
• Front bumper (see page 20-90)

• Inner fender, left side (see page 20-106)
• Kick panel, left side (see page 20-57)
2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the hood latch (B) (see page 20-113), and remove the bolts (C), then
remove the hood release handle (D) from the body.
Fastener Locations
C : Bolt, 2 E : Clip, 4
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
C
D
B
A
E
E
E E
D
3. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (E), and remove the grommet (F) from the body, then remove the hood
opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to bend the cable.
4. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
20-110 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:48 61S5N000_200_0112
Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement

NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the body and related parts.
1. Remove these items from the left side of the vehicle:
• Front door sill trim (see page 20-57)

• Seat side trim (see page 20-57)
• Trunk side trim panel (see page 20-59)
2. Pull the carpet back as necessary (see page 20-62).
3. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (B) (see step 3 on page 20-114).
Fastener Locations
C : Clip, 1 D : Cushion tape, 2 E : Clip, 1
E
A
B
C
4. Release the opener cable from the clip (C). Remove the cushion tape (D), and detach the clip (E) with a clip
remover.
5. Remove the fuel fill door latch (F) by turning it 90°, and detach the opener cable junction box (G) from the body.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-111

00/10/26 16:02:48 61S5N000_200_0113
Openers
Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement (cont’d)

6. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A) from the trunk lid latch (B) (see page 20-115).
Fastener Locations
C : Clip, 1 D : Clip, 3 E : Clip, 1
A E
C
D
7. Using a clip remover, detach the clip (C) from the body, and detach the clips (D) from the trunk lid hinge.
8. Remove the cable from the clip (E).
9. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to bend the cable.
10. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Align the mark on the cable with the clip on the bottom portion of the trunk lid hinge.
20-112 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:49 61S5N000_200_0114
Hood Latch Replacement

1. If necessary, remove the front bumper (see page 5. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
20-90). note these items:
2. Detach the harness clip (A) and the hood latch • Grease each location of the hood latch indicated
switch connector (B) from the body, and disconnect by the arrows.
it. • Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly and hood latch switch connector is
plugged in properly.
• Adjust the hood latch alignment (see page 20-92).
• Make sure the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
B
A
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (A)

from the body.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 3 B
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
4. Disconnect the hood opener cable (B) from the

hood latch. Take care not to bend the cable.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-113

00/10/26 16:02:49 61S5N000_200_0115
Openers
Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement

1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with 4. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener
protective tape, detach the hooks (A) by prying the cable (A), then remove the opener (B). Take care
front side cap (B), then remove it from the front not to bend the cable.
door sill trim (C). Remove the opener lock cylinder
(D).
A A
B
A
D
B
C
5. Install the opener in the reverse order of removal,

2. Remove the front door sill trim (see page 20-57).
• Make sure the opener cable is connected
3. Loosen the bolt (A), and remove the opener (B) properly.
from the bolt. • Make sure the trunk lid and fuel fill door open
properly and lock securely.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
20-114 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:50 61S5N000_200_0117
Frame
Sub-frame Replacement
Sub-frame Torque:
After loosening the sub-frame mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones.
FRONT SUSPENSION
SUB-FRAME
SUB-FRAME
REAR DAMPER
8 x 1.25 mm
26 N·m
To
FRONT SUSPENSION body.
SUB-FRAME
10 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m
To body.
To body.
To body.
8 x 1.25 mm
26 N·m SPECIAL BOLTS
(2.7 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft) 14 x 1.5 mm
103 N·m
SUB-FRAME (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)
FRONT DAMPER Replace.
20-116 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:02:56 61S5N000_200_0119
Frame
Frame Repair Chart

Top view:
Unit: mm (in.) a For sub- frame ø15 (0.59) i For sub-frame ø11 (0.43)
ø: Inner diameter b For engine mount ø13 (0.51) j For damper mount ø11.5 (0.45)
c For engine mount ø13 (0.51) k For damper mount ø11.5 (0.45)
d For engine mount ø13 (0.51) l Damper center ø78 (3.07)
e For transmission mount ø13 (0.51) m For sub-frame ø15 (0.59)
f For transmission mount ø13 (0.51) n Locating hole ø25 (0.98)
g For transmission mount ø13 (0.51) o Locating hole ø50 (1.97)
h For damper mount ø11.5 (0.45)
20-118 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:03:02 61S5N000_200_0120
p Locating hole ø25 (0.98) x For upper arm bracket center ø15 (0.59)
q For trailing arm ø13 (0.51) y1, y2 Locating hole ø13 (0.51)
r Locating hole ø25 (0.98) z For upper arm ø13 (0.51)
s Locating hole ø20 (0.79) a1 For rear lower arm center
t Trailing arm center b1 Locating hole ø50 (1.97)
u Rear damper center 73 x 68 (Slot) c1 Locating hole ø20 (0.79)
v For upper arm ø13 (0.51)
w For trailing arm ø13 (0.51)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-119

00/10/26 16:03:05 61S5N000_200_0121
Frame
Frame Repair Chart (cont’d)

Side view:
Unit: mm (in.) a For sub- frame ø15 (0.59) i For sub-frame ø11 (0.43)
ø: Inner diameter b For engine mount ø13 (0.51) j For damper mount ø11.5 (0.45)
c For engine mount ø13 (0.51) k For damper mount ø11.5 (0.45)
d For engine mount ø13 (0.51) l Damper center ø78 (3.07)
e For transmission mount ø13 (0.51) m For sub-frame ø15 (0.59)
f For transmission mount ø13 (0.51) n Locating hole ø25 (0.98)
g For transmission mount ø13 (0.51) o Locating hole ø50 (1.97)
h For damper mount ø11.5 (0.45)
20-120 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:03:08 61S5N000_200_0122
p Locating hole ø25 (0.98) x For upper arm bracket center ø15 (0.59)
q For trailing arm ø13 (0.51) y1, y2 Locating hole ø13 (0.51)
r Locating hole ø25 (0.98) z For upper arm ø13 (0.51)
s Locating hole ø20 (0.79) a1 For rear lower arm center
t Trailing arm center b1 Locating hole ø50 (1.97)
u Rear damper center 73 x 68 (Slot) c1 Locating hole ø20 (0.79)
v For upper arm ø13 (0.51)
w For trailing arm ø13 (0.51)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 20-121

00/10/26 16:34:19 61S5N000_210_0001
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If HVAC maintenance is required)

switch is ON (II).
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 16:34:20 61S5N000_210_0002
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
Heating Air Conditioning

Special Tools ................................ 21-2 Component Location Index ........ 21-31
Component Location Index ........ 21-3 A/C Service Tips and
General Troubleshooting Precautions ............................... 21-33
Information ............................... 21-4 A/C Refrigerant Oil
DTC Troubleshooting Index ....... 21-5 Replacement ............................ 21-33
Symptom Troubleshooting Symptom Troubleshooting
Index ......................................... 21-6 Index ......................................... 21-35
System Description ..................... 21-7 System Description ..................... 21-36
Circuit Diagram ............................ 21-8 Circuit Diagram ........................... 21-37
DTC Troubleshooting .................. 21-9 Condenser Fan Circuit
Recirculation Control Motor Troubleshooting ...................... 21-38
Circuit Troubleshooting .......... 21-18 Radiator and Condenser Fans
Heater Control Power and Ground Common Circuit
Circuits Troubleshooting ........ 21-20 Troubleshooting ...................... 21-39
Air Mix Control Motor Compressor Clutch Circuit
Test and Replacement ............. 21-21 Troubleshooting ...................... 21-40
Mode Control Motor A/C Pressure Switch Circuit
Test and Replacement ............. 21-22 Troubleshooting ...................... 21-42
Recirculation Control Motor Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Test and Replacement ............. 21-23 Replacement and Test ............. 21-44
Power Transistor Test ................. 21-24 Evaporator Core
Heater Control Panel Replacement ............................ 21-45
Removal and Installation ........ 21-24 Compressor Replacement .......... 21-46
Dust and Pollen Filter Compressor Clutch Check .......... 21-48
Replacement ............................ 21-25 Compressor Clutch Overhaul ..... 21-49
Blower Unit Removal and Compressor Thermal Protector
Installation ................................ 21-26 Replacement ............................ 21-51
Blower Unit Components Compressor Relief Valve
Replacement ............................ 21-27 Replacement ............................ 21-51
*Heater Unit/Core Condenser Replacement ............ 21-52
Replacement ............................ 21-28 Refrigerant Recovery .................. 21-53
Heater Valve Cable System Evacuation ...................... 21-54
Adjustment ............................... 21-30 System Charging ......................... 21-55
Refrigerant Leak Test .................. 21-56
A/C System Tests ........................ 21-57
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 16:34:20 61S5N000_210_0003
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
Special Tools

00/10/26 16:34:23 61S5N000_210_0004
Heating
HEATER UNIT/CORE
Replacement, page 21-28 BLOWER UNIT
HEATER VALVE CABLE BLOWER UNIT COMPONENTS
Adjustment, page 21-30 Replacement, page 21-27
DUST AND POLLEN

FILTER (With A/C)
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-23
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-22
POWER TRANSISTOR
Test, page 21-24
AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

Test, page 21-21 SWITCH
A/C SWITCH (With A/C)
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (With A/C) RECIRCULATION CONTROL SWITCH
Test, page 21-44
HEATER CONTROL PANEL

00/10/26 16:34:24 61S5N000_210_0005
Heating

How to Retrieve a DTC
The Heater Control Panel has a self-diagnosis function.
Running the Self-diagnosis Function
1. Turn the fan switch OFF.
2. Press the recirculation control switch and the rear window defogger switch.
3. While holding the both switches down, turn the ignition switch ON (II), then release the both switches. The
recirculation indicator light and the rear window defogger indicator light come on. The recirculation indicator light
goes off 2 seconds later and the A/C indicator light comes on (if so equipped), then the self-diagnosis will begin.
About 10 seconds later, the self-diagnosis will finish and the A/C indicator light goes off. The recirculation
indicator light will blink the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) to indicate a faulty component. If no DTC’s are found,
the indicator light will not blink.
A/C INDICATOR
LIGHT
FAN SWITCH RECIRCULATION REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
INDICATOR LIGHT INDICATOR LIGHT
RECIRCULATION REAR WINDOW

CONTROL SWITCH DEFOGGER SWITCH
Example of DTC indication Pattern (DTC 3)
0.3 sec 0.3 sec
Recirculation
indicator light
comes on
Recirculation
indicator light
goes off
2 sec 1.5 sec
Resetting the Self-diagnosis Function
Turn the ignition switch OFF to cancel the self-diagnosis function. After completing repair work, run the self-diagnosis
function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.

03/09/11 19:09:39 61S5N030_210_0007
Climate Control
DTC Detection Item Page

(Recirculation Indicator
Light Blinks)
1 An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-12)
2 A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-13)
3 An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-13)
4 A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-15)
5 An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-15)
6 A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-16)
7 An open in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-17)
8 A short in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-17)
9 A problem in the air mix control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-18)
10 An open or short in the mode control motor circuit (see page 21-19)
11 A problem in the mode control linkage, doors, or motor (see page 21-20)
12 A problem in the blower motor circuit (see page 21-21)
13 A problem in the EEPROM in the climate control unit; the control (see page 21-38)
unit must be replaced.
14 An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-24)
15 A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-25)
In case of multiple problems, the recirculation indicator light will indicate only the DTC with the least number of blinks.

Ｓ５Ｎ４Ａ００Ｇ１０５００００００００ＧＡＡＴ００
00/10/26 16:34:24 61S5N000_210_0008
System Description
Heater Control Panel Inputs and Outputs
HEATER CONTROL PANEL CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR A (14P) CONNECTOR B (22P)
CONNECTOR A (○ on Circuit Diagram)

Cavity Wire color Signal
1 GRY AIR MIX POTENTIAL ＋5V OUTPUT
2 LT GRN SENSOR COMMON GROUND INPUT
3 PNK/BLU AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
4 BLU A/C PRESSURE SWITCH INPUT
5 GRN/YEL RECIRCULATE INPUT
6 GRN/WHT FRESH INPUT
7 BLU/YEL POWER TRANSISTOR OUTPUT
8 BLU/RED BLOWER FEEDBACK INPUT
9 GRN AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT
10 YEL/RED MODE DEF OUTPUT
11 YEL/BLU MODE VENT OUTPUT
12 YEL/BLK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
13 BLK GROUND INPUT
14 BLK/YEL IG2 (Power) INPUT
CONNECTOR B (□ on Circuit Diagram)

Cavity Wire color Signal
1 ――― ――― ―――
2 ――― ――― ―――
3 BLK/RED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH LED INPUT
4 LT GRN A/C SWITCH LED INPUT
5 LT GRN/BLK RECIRCULATION CONTROL SWITCH LED INPUT
6 PNK/BLK AIR MIX POTENTIAL OUTPUT
7 BRN EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
(With A/C)
8 ――― ――― ―――
9 ――― ――― ―――
10 ――― ――― ―――
11 RED GAUGE ASSEMBLY OUTPUT
12 RED/BLK TAILLIGHTS RELAY INPUT
13 ――― ――― ―――
14 BLU REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH INPUT
15 LT GRN/RED A/C SWITCH INPUT
16 YEL/RED RECIRCULATION CONTROL SWITCH INPUT
17 YEL/GRN MODE 4 OUTPUT
18 WHT/BLU MODE 3 OUTPUT
19 RED/BLU MODE 2 OUTPUT
20 RED/YEL MODE 1 OUTPUT
21 BRN/WHT IGN (Power) OUTPUT
22 ――― ――― ―――

00/10/26 16:34:31 61S5N000_210_0009
Heating
Circuit Diagram

00/10/26 16:34:31 61S5N000_210_0010
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 7: An Open in the Air Mix Control Motor DTC 8: A Short in the Air Mix Control Motor
Circuit Circuit
1. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector. 1. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector.
2. Disconnect heater control panel connectors A (14P) 2. Disconnect heater control panel connectors A (14P)
and B (22P). and B (22P).
3. Check for continuity between the following 3. Check for continuity between body ground and
terminals of heater control panel connectors A (14 heater control panel connector A (14P) terminals
P) and B (22P) and the air mix control motor 7P No. 1, 2, 3 and 9 individually, and between body
connector. ground and heater control panel connector B (22P)
14P: 7P: terminal No. 6.
No. 1 No. 5
No. 2 No. 7 HEATER CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (14P)
No. 3 No. 1
No. 9 No. 2 LT GRN
PNK/BLU
GRY
22P: 7P:
No. 6 No. 3
GRN
HEATER CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (14P)
LT GRN
PNK/BLU
GRY
Wire side of
female terminals Wire side of female terminals
GRN
GRY
AIR MIX CONTROL GRN LT GRN
HEATER CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR B (22P)
MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
Wire side of PNK/ PNK/BLK
female terminals BLU
PNK/BLK
PNK/BLK
Wire side of
female terminals
YES−Check for loose wires or poor connections at
heater control panel connectors A (14P) and B (22P)
and at the air mix control motor 7P connector. If the Is there continuity?
connections are good, substitute a known-good
heater control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/ YES−Repair any short to body ground in the
indication goes away, replace the original heater wire(s) between the heater control panel and the air
control panel. mix control motor.
NO−Repair any open in the wire(s) between the NO−Go to step 4.

heater control panel and the air mix control
motor.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 16:34:32 61S5N000_210_0011
Heating

4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same DTC 9: A Problem in the Air Mix Control
terminals for voltage. Linkage, Door, or Motor
HEATER CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (14P) 1. Test the air mix control motor (see page 21-21).
LT GRN Is the air mix control motor OK ?

PNK/BLU
GRY
YES−Substitute a known-good heater control
panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
GRN away, replace the original heater control panel.
NO−Go to step 2.
2. Remove the air mix control motor (see page 21-21).

3. Check the air mix control linkage and door for
smooth movement.
HEATER CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR B (22P) Do the air mix control linkage and door move
smoothly?
YES−Replace the air mix control motor.

PNK/BLK
NO−Repair the air mix control linkage or door.
Is there any voltage?
YES−Repair any short to power in the wire(s)

between the heater control panel and the air mix
control motor. This short also damages the heater
control panel. Repair the short to power before
replacing the heater control panel.
NO−Substitute a known-good heater control panel,

and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original heater control panel.
21-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:34:32 61S5N000_210_0012
DTC 10: An Open or Short in the Mode 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same
Control Motor Circuit terminals for voltage.
1. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P connector. HEATER CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (14P)
2. Disconnect heater control panel connectors A (14P)

LT GRN
and B (22P).

heater control panel connector A (14P) terminals
YEL/RED YEL/BLU
No. 2, 10 and 11 individually, and between body
ground and heater control panel connector B (22P)
terminals No. 17, 18, 19 and 20 individually.
HEATER CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (14P) Wire side of female terminals
LT GRN
YEL/RED YEL/BLU
YEL/GRN RED/YEL
WHT/BLU
RED/BLU

Is there any voltage?

YEL/GRN RED/YEL
YES−Repair any short to power in the wire(s)
WHT/BLU
between the heater control panel and the mode
RED/BLU
control motor. This short also damages the heater
control panel. Repair the short to power before
replacing the heater control panel.
NO−Go to step 5.
YES−Repair any short to body ground in the

wire(s) between the heater control panel and the
mode control motor.
NO−Go to step 4.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-11

00/10/26 16:34:32 61S5N000_210_0013
Heating

5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for DTC 11: A Problem in the Mode Control
continuity between the following terminals of Linkage, Doors, or Motor
and the mode control motor 7P connector. 1. Test the mode control motor (see page 21-22).
14P: 7P:
No. 2 No. 7 Is the mode control motor OK ?
No. 10 No. 1
No. 11 No. 2 YES−Substitute a known-good heater control
panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
22P: 7P: away, replace the original heater control panel.
No. 17 No. 3
No. 18 No. 4 NO−Go to step 2.
No. 19 No. 5
No. 20 No. 6 2. Remove the mode control motor (see page 21-22).
3. Check the mode control linkage and doors for
smooth movement.
LT GRN
Do the mode control linkage and doors move
smoothly?
YEL/RED YEL/BLU
YES−Replace the mode control motor.
YEL/BLU YEL/RED
LT GRN NO−Repair the mode control linkage or doors.
YEL/GRN RED/YEL
WHT/BLU RED/BLU
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
7P CONNECTOR
YEL/GRN RED/YEL
WHT/BLU RED/BLU

and at the mode control motor 7P connector. If the
heater control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/
indication goes away, replace the original heater
control panel.
NO−Repair any open in the wire(s) between the

heater control panel and the mode control motor.
21-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:34:33 61S5N000_210_0014
DTC 12: A Problem in the Blower Motor 7. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of
Circuit the power transistor 4P connector and body ground.
1. Check the No. 12 (40A) fuse in the under-hood POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
fuse/relay box, and the No. 14 (10A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the f uses OK ? BLK
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.
2. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the blower motor 2P

connector to body ground with a jumper wire. Wire side of female terminals
BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR

YES−Go to step 8.

power transistor and body ground. If the wire is OK,
BLU/BLK check for poor ground at G502.
JUMPER WIRE
8. Connect the No. 2 and No. 4 terminals of the power

transistor 4P connector with a jumper wire.
POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR

BLK
Does the blower motor run?
YES−Go to step 4. JUMPER WIRE
BLU/BLK
NO−Go to step 17.

5. Disconnect the jumper wire.
6. Disconnect the power transistor 4P connector. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the blower motor run at high speed?
NO−Repair open in the wire between the power

transistor and the blower motor.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-13

00/10/26 16:34:33 61S5N000_210_0015
Heating

12. Disconnect heater control panel connector A (14P). 15. Reconnect the heater control panel connector A
(14P).
terminals of heater control panel connector A (14P) 16. Test the power transistor (see page 21-24).
and body ground individually.
Is the power transistor OK ?
heater control panel connector A (14P) and at the
power transistor 4P connector. If the connections
BLU/YEL
are good, substitute a known-good heater control
BLU/RED panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original heater control panel.
NO−Replace the power transistor.
Wire side of female terminals 17. Disconnect the jumper wire.
18. Disconnect the blower motor 2P connector.

YES−Repair any short to body ground in the the blower motor 2P connector and body ground.
power transistor. BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
NO−Go to step 14.

BLU/WHT
14. Check for continuity between the following
terminals of heater control panel connector A (14P)
and the power transistor 4P connector.
14P: 4P:
No. 7 No. 1
No. 8 No. 3
BLU/YEL BLU/RED YES−Replace the blower motor.
NO−Go to step 20.

BLU/YEL
BLU/RED
21. Remove the blower motor relay from the
POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-
Wire side of female terminals 51).
Is there continuity? Is the relay OK ?
NO−Repair any open in the wire(s) between the NO−Replace the blower motor relay.
heater control panel and the power transistor.
21-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:34:33 61S5N000_210_0016
22. Measure the voltage between the No. 3 terminal of 25. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
the blower motor relay 4P socket and body ground.
26. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
the blower motor relay 4P socket and body ground.
BLK
YES−Go to step 23. Is there continuity?
NO−Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. YES−Repair open in the wire between the blower
motor relay and the blower motor.
24. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of blower motor relay and body ground. If the wire is
the blower motor relay 4P socket and body ground. OK, check for poor ground at G201.
BLK/YEL

fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
blower motor relay.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-15

00/10/26 16:34:34 61S5N000_210_0017
Heating

DTC 14: An Open in the Evaporator 4. Check for continuity between the No. 7 terminal of
Temperature Sensor Circuit heater control panel connector B (22P) and the No.
2 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
1. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.
connector.
No. 2 terminals of the evaporator temperature BRN
sensor.
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
BRN
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

Terminal side of male terminals Is there continuity?

40
YES−Go to step 5.
30 NO−Repair open in the wire between the heater

control panel and the evaporator temperature
RESISTANCE sensor.
k
20
5. Disconnect heater control panel connector A (14P).
10
50 68 86 °F
10 20 30 °C
TEMPERATURE
Is the resistance within the specif ications shown

on the graph?
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Replace the evaporator temperature

sensor.
3. Disconnect heater control panel connector B (22P).
21-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:34:34 61S5N000_210_0018
6. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of DTC 15: A Short in the Evaporator
heater control panel connector A (14P) and the No. Temperature Sensor Circuit
1 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector. 1. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.
2. Test the evaporator temperature sensor (see page
LT GRN 21-16).
Is the resistance within the specif ications shown

on the graph?
YES−Go to step 3.
LT GRN NO−Replace the evaporator temperature

sensor.
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals 3. Disconnect heater control panel connector B (22P).
Is there continuity? 4. Check for continuity between the No. 7 terminal of

heater control panel connector B (22P) and body
YES−Check for loose wires or poor connections at ground.
and at the evaporator temperature sensor 2P HEATER CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR B (22P)
connector. If the connections are good, substitute a
known-good heater control panel, and recheck. If
the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original heater control panel. BRN
NO−Repair open in the wire between the heater

control panel and the evaporator temperature
sensor.
YES−Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the heater control panel and the
evaporator temperature sensor.
NO−Substitute a known-good heater control panel,

and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original heater control panel.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-17

00/10/26 16:34:34 61S5N000_210_0019
Heating
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the No. 14 (10A) fuse in the under-dash 8. Check for continuity between the No. 5 and No. 6
fuse/relay box. terminals of heater control panel connector A (14P)
and body ground individually.
Is the f use OK ?
YES−Go to step 2.
GRN/YEL
NO−Replace the fuse, and recheck. GRN/WHT
2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P

connector.

the recirculation control motor 7P connector and Wire side of female terminals
body ground.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR Is there continuity?

7P CONNECTOR
YES−Repair any short to body ground in the
recirculation control motor.
BLK/YEL
NO−Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same

wires for voltage.
Wire side of female terminals HEATER CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (14P)
GRN/YEL
Is there battery voltage? GRN/WHT
YES−Go to step 5.

recirculation control motor.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Wire side of female terminals
6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page 21-

23). Is there any voltage?
Is the recirculation control motor OK ? YES−Repair any short to power in the wire(s)
between the heater control panel and the
YES−Go to step 7. recirculation control motor. This short also
damages the heater control panel. Repair the short
NO−Go to step 12. to power before replacing the heater control
panel.
NO−Go to step 10.
21-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:34:35 61S5N000_210_0020
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Remove the recirculation contol motor (see page
21-23).
11. Check for continuity between the following
terminals of heater control panel connector A (14P) 13. Check the recirculation control linkage and doors
and the recirculation control motor 7P connector. for smooth movement.
14P: 7P:
No. 5 No. 7 Do the recirculation control linkage and doors
No. 6 No. 5 move smoothly?
YES−Replace the recirculation control motor.
GRN/YEL NO−Repair the recirculation control linkage or
doors.
GRN/WHT
GRN/WHT
GRN/YEL
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR


heater control panel connector A (14P) and at the
recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the
control panel.
NO−Repair any open in the wire(s) between the

heater control panel and the recirculation control
motor.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-19

00/10/26 16:34:42 61S5N000_210_0021
Heating
Heater Control Power and Ground Circuits Troubleshooting

1. Check the No.14 (10A) fuse in the under-dash 6. Check for continuity between the No. 13 terminal of
fuse/relay box. heater control panel connector A (14P) and body
ground.
Is the f use OK ?
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Replace the fuse, and recheck.

BLK
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 14 terminal

of heater control panel connector A (14P) and body
ground. Wire side of female terminals


heater control panel connector A (14P). If the
BLK/YEL heater control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/
control panel.

Wire side of female terminals heater control panel and body ground. If the wire is
OK, check for poor ground at G502.
YES−Go to step 5.

heater control panel.
21-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:34 61S5N000_210_0022
Air Mix Control Motor Test Air Mix Control Motor Replacement
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the air mix 1. Remove the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page
control motor. 22-51).
2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the air mix
air mix control motor, and ground the No. 2 control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws
terminal; the air mix control motor should run, and and the air mix control motor from the heater unit.
stop at Max Hot. If it doesn’t, reverse the
connections; the air mix control motor should run,
and stop at Max Cool. If the air mix control motor
B
does not run, remove it, then check the air mix
control linkage and door for smooth movement.
• If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace

the air mix control motor.
• If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them
as needed.
AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.

After installation, make sure the motor runs
smoothly.

No. 7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 k to
7.8 k .

No. 7 terminals.
Max Cool−0.84 k to 1.56 k

Max Hot−3.36 k to 6.24 k
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-21

00/10/26 16:35:35 61S5N000_210_0024
Recirculation Control Motor Test Recirculation Control Motor

Replacement
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the recirculation
control motor.
1. Remove the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4).
Incorrectly applying power and ground to 2. Remove the bolt and the bracket (A). Disconnect
the recirculation control motor will damage it. the 7P connector (B) and the harness clip (C) from
Follow the instructions carefully. the recirculation control motor (D). Remove the
self-tapping screws and the recirculation control
2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal, and motor from the blower unit.
ground the No. 5 and No. 7 terminals; the
recirculation control motor should run smoothly. C
To avoid damaging the recirculation control motor, B
do not reverse power and ground. Disconnect the
No. 5 or No. 7 terminals from ground; the
recirculation control motor should stop at Fresh or A
Recirculate. Don’t cycle the recirculation control
motor for a long time.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.

After installation, make sure the motor runs
smoothly.
3. If the recirculation control motor does not run in

step 2, remove it, then check the recirculation
control linkage and doors for smooth movement.
• If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace

the recirculation control motor.
• If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them
as needed.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-23

00/10/26 16:35:36 61S5N000_210_0025
Heating
Power Transistor Test Heater Control Panel Removal and

Installation
1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the power
transistor.
1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-69).
No. 4 terminals of the power transistor. It should be 2. Remove the dials (A), then remove the self-tapping
about 1.4−1.5 k . screws and the heater control panel (B) from the
center panel (C).
• If the resistance is within the specifications, go to
B
step 3.
• If the resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the power transistor.
POWER TRANSISTOR
3. Carefully release the lock tab on the No. 1 terminal A

(BLU/YEL) (A) in the 4P connector, then remove the
terminal and insulate it from body ground. 3. Install the control panel in the reverse order of
removal. After installation, operate the control
panel controls to see whether it works properly.
4. Run the self-diagnosis function to comfirm that

there are no problems in the system (see page 21-
4).
JUMPER WIRE
A
(To 12 V power source on vehicle)
4. Reconnect the 4P connector to the power transistor.
5. Supply 12 volts to the No. 1 cavity with a jumper

wire.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the

blower motor runs.
• If the blower motor does not run, replace the

power transistor.
• If the blower motor runs, the power transistor is
OK.
21-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:36 61S5N000_210_0026
Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement (With Air Conditioning)

The dust and pollen filters should be replaced every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months whichever
comes first. Replace the filters more often if the air flow
is less than usual.
1. Open the glove box. Remove the glove box stop on

each side, then hang the glove box down (see page
20-70).
2. Remove the filter lid (A) from the blower unit, then
pull out the first dust and pollen filter (B). Slide the
second filter to the left, and pull it out.
3. Remove the filter (A) from the housing (B), and

replace the filter.
4. Install the filters in the reverse order of removal.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-25

00/10/26 16:35:37 61S5N000_210_0027
Heating
Blower Unit Removal and Installation

1. Remove the passenger’s dashboard lower cover 4. Remove the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4).
(see page 20-70), the right kick panel (see page 20-
57), and the glove box (see page 20-70). 5. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the blower
motor, the power transistor, and the recirculation
2. Remove the bolt, then cut the plastic cross brace in control motor, then remove the wire harness clips
the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the (B).
area shown. Remove and discard the plastic cross
A
brace. B
A
B
6. Fold the carpet and pad back toward you. Remove

Cut here.
the mounting bolts, the mounting nut, and the
3. Remove the relays (A), then remove the bolts and blower unit.
the glove box frame (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
A 9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
7. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure that there is no air leakage.
21-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:37 61S5N000_210_0028
Blower Unit Components Replacement

Note these items when overhauling the blower unit:
• The recirculation control motor (A), the power transistor (B), the blower motor (C), and the dust and pollen filters
(with A/C) (D) can be replaced without removing the blower unit.
• Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation control linkage and doors move smoothly.
• After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control motor runs smoothly (see page 21-23).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-27

00/10/26 16:35:38 61S5N000_210_0029
Heating
Heater Unit/Core Replacement

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the
SRS component locations (see page 23-10), and inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C)
precautions and procedures (see page 23-11) in the SRS from the heater core. Engine coolant will run out
section before performing repairs or service. when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a
clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any
then write down the frequencies for the radio’s coolant spills, rinse it off immediately.
preset buttons.
B
A
3. With air conditioning; disconnect the suction and

receiver lines from the evaporator core (see page
21-45).
4. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A),

then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the
heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to
the fully opened position as shown.
C A
C
7. Remove the mounting bolt and the heater valve as

shown.
5. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant

from the radiator (see page 10-8).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
21-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:38 61S5N000_210_0030
8. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. 12. Remove the self-tapping screws and the expansion
Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines and valve cover (A). With air conditioning; carefully pull
the brake lines, etc. out the evaporator core (B) so you don’t bend the
inlet and outlet pipes. Remove the self-tapping
screws and the flange cover (C), then remove the
grommet (D), and carefully pull out the heater core
(E) so you don’t bend the inlet and outlet pipes.
B
8 x 1.25 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 lbf·ft)
9. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-72). E
10. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-26).
11. Disconnect the drain hose (A), then remove the

mounting bolts and the heater unit (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
C
B
13. Install the heater core and the evaporator core
(with A/C) in the reverse order of removal.
14. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of

A
6 x 1.0 mm • Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater
9.8 N·m hoses, and install the hose clamps securely.
(1.0 kgf·m, • Refill the cooling system with engine coolant (see
7.2 lbf·ft)
page 10-8).
• Be sure to connect the drain hose securely.
• Adjust the heater valve cable (see page 21-30).
• Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
• Make sure that there is no air leakage.
• With air conditioning, refer to evaporator core
replacement (see step 6 on page 21-45).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-29

00/10/26 16:35:39 61S5N000_210_0031
Heating
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment

1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), 5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C)
then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it.
heater valve arm (C). Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the heater valve
arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable
C A housing to take up any slack, then install the heater
valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A).
2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve

cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and B C
disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the air
mix control linkage (C).
C
D
3. Set the temperature control dial on MAX COOL

with the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the air mix

control linkage (C) as shown above. Hold the end of
the heater valve cable housing against the stop (D),
then snap the heater valve cable housing into the
cable clamp (A).
21-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:41 61S5N000_210_0032
Air Conditioning
EVAPORATOR CORE
(Built-in the heater unit)
SERVICE VALVE Replacement, page 21-45
(LOW-PRESSURE SIDE)
SERVICE VALVE
(HIGH-PRESSURE SIDE)
CONDENSER
COMPRESSOR
RECEIVER/DRYER Clutch Check, page 21-48
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-49
Thermal Protector Check, page 21-48
Thermal Protector Replacement, page 21-51
Relief Valve Replacement, page 21-51
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-31

00/10/26 16:35:41 61S5N000_210_0033
Air Conditioning
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY,

RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
CONDENSER FAN RELAY,
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
(Located in the under-hood fuse/relay box)
Test, page 22-51
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH
RADIATOR FAN
CONDENSER FAN
21-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:42 61S5N000_210_0034
A/C Service Tips and Precautions A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement

Recommended PAG oil: SANDEN SP-10:
• Compressed air mixed with R-134a forms a • P/N 38897-P13-A01AH: 120 m (4 fl·oz)
combustible vapor. • P/N 38899-P13-A01: 40 m (1 1/3 fl·oz)
• The vapor can burn or explode causing serious
injury. Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount
• Never use compressed air to pressure test R-134 listed if you replace any of the following parts.
a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning
systems. • To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
container once dispensed, and never mix it with other
refrigerant oils.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on
the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor absorption.
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. • Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. immediately.
The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a) Condenser ........... 25 m (5/6 fl·oz, 0.9 lmp·oz)
refrigerant and polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil, Evaporator ........... 45 m (1 1/2 fl·oz, 1.6 lmp·oz)
which are not compatible with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant Line or hose ......... 10 m (1/3 fl·oz, 0.4 lmp·oz)
and mineral oil. Do not use R-12 refrigerant or mineral Receiver/Dryer .... 10 m (1/3 fl·oz, 0.4 lmp·oz)
oil in this system, and do not attempt to use R-12 Leakage repair .... 25 m (5/6 fl·oz, 0.9 lmp·oz)
servicing equipment; damage to the air conditioning Compressor ......... For compressor replacement,
system or your servicing equipment will result. subtract the volume of oil drained
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is from the removed compressor from
certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to 130 m (4 1/3 fl·oz, 4.6 lmp·oz), and
remove R-134a from the air conditioning system. drain the calculated volume of oil
from the new compressor: 130 m
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work (4 1/3 fl·oz, 4.6 lmp·oz) − Volume of
area before resuming service. removed compressor = Volume to
drain from new compressor.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning
systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested NOTE: Even if no oil is drained from
with compressed air. the removed compressor, don’t
drain more than 50 m (1 2/3 fl·oz,
Additional health and safety information may be 1.8 lmp·oz) from the new
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant compressor.
manufacturers.
REMOVED NEW
• Always disconnect the negative cable from the COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
battery whenever replacing air conditioning parts.
• Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When
disconnecting any lines, plug or cap the fittings
immediately; don’t remove the caps or plugs until
just before you reconnect each line.
• Before connecting any hose or line, apply a few drops
of refrigerant oil to the O-ring.
• When tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second DRAINING
SAME LEVEL VOLUME :A
wrench to support the matching fitting.
• When discharging the system, use a R-134a
refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station; don’t
release refrigerant into the atmosphere. A: 130 m (4 1/3 fl·oz, 4.6 lmp·oz)
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-33

00/10/26 16:35:43 61S5N000_210_0036

Condenser fan does not run at all (but Condenser Fan Circuit • Blown fuse No. 1 (20A) in the
radiator fan runs with the A/C on) Troubleshooting (see page 21-38) under-hood fuse/relay box, and
No. 14 (10A) in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
• Poor ground at G201
• Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
Both fans do not run with the A/C on Radiator and Condenser Fans • Blown fuse No. 1 (20A) and No. 4
Common Circuit Troubleshooting (20A) in the under-hood fuse/relay
(see page 21-39) box, and No. 14 (10A) in the
under-dash fuse/relay box
• Poor ground at G201
connectors
Compressor clutch does not engage Compressor Clutch Circuit • Blown fuse No. 1 (20A) in the
Troubleshooting (see page 21-40) under-hood fuse/relay box, and
No. 14 (10A) in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
connectors
A/C System does not come on (both A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Cleanliness and tightness of all
fans and compressor) Troubleshooting (see page 21-42) connectors
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-35

00/10/26 16:35:44 61S5N000_210_0037
Air Conditioning
System Description
The air conditioning system removes heat from the passenger compartment by circulating refrigerant through the
system as shown below.
BLOWER FAN
EVAPORATOR
(Absorption of heat)
EXPANSION VALVE
(Meters the required
amount of refrigerant
into the evaporator)
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH THERMAL PROTECTOR

When the refrigerant is below (Opens the compressor clutch circuit
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) when the compressor temperature
or above 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm2, becomes too high)
455 psi), the A/C pressure
switch opens the circuit to RELIEF VALVE
the A/C switch and stops the (Relieves pressure at the compressor
air conditioning to protect the when the pressure is too high)
compressor.
COMPRESSOR
RECEIVER/DRYER (Suction and compression)
(Traps debris, and
removes moisture)
HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR
HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID

CONDENSER
(Radiation of heat)
LOW PRESSURE LIQUID
LOW PRESSURE VAPOR
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
following service items:
• Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
• Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (SANDEN SP-10) designed for the R-134a
compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other refrigerant oil will result in
compressor failure.
• All A/C system parts (compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, condenser, receiver/dryer, expansion
valve, O-rings for joints) have to be proper for refrigerant R-134a. Do not confuse with R-12 parts.
• Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
• R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging
station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to service R-134a air conditioning
system.
• Always recover the refrigerant R-134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting
any A/C fitting.
21-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:47 61S5N000_210_0038
Circuit Diagram
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-37

00/10/26 16:35:48 61S5N000_210_0039
Air Conditioning
Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the No. 1 (20A) fuse in the under-hood 4. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the
fuse/relay box, and the No. 14 (10A) fuse in the condenser fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire.
CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
Are the f uses OK ?
YES−Go to step 2.
BLU/YEL
NO−Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. JUMPER WIRE
2. Remove the condenser fan relay from the

under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it
(see page 22-51).
Is the relay OK ?
YES−Go to step 3.
Does the condenser f an run?
NO−Replace the condenser fan relay.
YES−Go to step 5.
the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body ground. NO−Go to step 8.


the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body ground.
Is there battery voltage? BLK/YEL
YES−Go to step 4.
YES−Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.

condenser fan relay.
21-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:48 61S5N000_210_0040
Radiator and Condenser Fans

Common Circuit Troubleshooting
9. Disconnect the condenser fan 2P connector.
10. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of 1. Check the No. 1 (20A) and No. 4 (20A) fuses in the
the condenser fan relay 4P socket and the No. 2 under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 14 (10A)
terminal of the condenser fan 2P connector. fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the f uses OK ?
BLU/YEL
YES−Go to step 2.
2. Remove the condenser fan relay from the

under-hood fuse/relay box.

BLU/YEL
CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR 4. Measure the voltage between the No. 3 terminal of
Wire side of female terminals the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body ground.

condenser fan relay and the condenser fan.
11. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of BLK/YEL

the condenser fan 2P connector and body ground.
CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR

BLK
YES−Go to step 5.

radiator fan relay, and the condenser fan relay.
Wire side of female terminals 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is there continuity? 6. Reinstall the condenser fan relay.
YES−Replace the condenser fan motor. 7. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
NO−Check for an open in the wire between the 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
condenser fan and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G201.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-39

00/10/26 16:35:48 61S5N000_210_0041
Air Conditioning
Radiator and Condenser Fans Compressor Clutch Circuit

Common Circuit Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
(cont’d)
1. Check the No. 1 (20A) fuse in the under-hood
9. Using a Backprobe Set, measure the voltage fuse/relay box, and the No. 14 (10A) fuse in the
between the No. 6 terminal of ECM/PCM connector under-dash fuse/relay box.
B (24P) and body ground with the ECM/PCM
connectors connected. Are the f uses OK ?
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (24P) YES−Go to step 2.

GRN
2. Check the engine coolant temperature (use the
Honda PGM Tester PGM-FI data list if possible).
Is the coolant temperature above nomal?
YES−Troubleshoot and repair the cause of the

high engine coolant temperature.
NO−Go to step 3.
Is there battery voltage? 3. Remove the compressor clutch relay from the
under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-
YES−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have 51).
ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6). If the Is the relay OK ?
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM. YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the radiator NO−Replace the compressor clutch relay.
fan relay, the condenser fan relay and the
ECM/PCM. 4. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of
the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body
ground.
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET
YES−Go to step 5.
21-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:49 61S5N000_210_0042
5. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
compressor clutch relay 4P socket with a jumper
wire. 10. Reinstall the compressor clutch relay.
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET 11. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
BLU/RED 13. Using the Backprobe Set, measure the voltage

JUMPER WIRE between the No. 18 terminal of ECM/PCM
connector E (31P) and body ground with the
ECM/PCM connectors connected.
Does the compressor clutch click ?

RED
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 14.
6. Disconnect the jumper wire. Wire side of female terminals

the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body YES−Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have
ground. the latest software, or substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM, then recheck (see page 11-6).If the

compressor clutch relay and the ECM/PCM.
BLK/YEL 15. Disconnect the compressor clutch 1P connector.
YES−Go to step 9.

compressor clutch relay.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-41

00/10/26 16:35:49 61S5N000_210_0043
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Circuit A/C Pressure Switch Circuit

Troubleshooting (cont’d) Troubleshooting
16. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of 1. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and the No. 1
terminal of the compressor clutch 1P connector. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
BLU/RED the A/C pressure switch 2P connector and body
ground.
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
BLU/WHT
BLU/RED
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH 1P CONNECTOR

YES−Check the compressor clutch clearance, the Wire side of female terminals
thermal protector, and the compressor clutch field
coil (see page 21-48). Is there battery voltage?
NO−Repair open in the wire between the YES−Go to step 4.

compressor clutch relay and the compressor
clutch. NO−Go to step 10.

terminals of the A/C pressure switch.
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH
YES−Go to step 6.
NO−Go to step 12.
21-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:49 61S5N000_210_0044
6. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector. 10. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
7. Disconnect the heater control panel connector A 11. Measure the voltage between the No. 9 terminal of
(14P). under-dash fuse/relay box connector F (12P) and
body ground with the under-dash fuse/relay box
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connectors connected.
9. Measure the voltage between the No. 4 terminal of UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (12P)
heater control panel connector A (14P) and body
ground.

BLU/WHT
BLU

YES−Repair open in the wire between the
under-dash fuse/relay box and the A/C pressure
Is there battery voltage? switch.
YES−Check for loose wires or poor connections at NO−Refer to the multiplex control system (see
heater control panel connector A (14P) and at the page 22-169).
A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good 12. Check for proper A/C system pressure.
indication goes away, replace the original heater Is the pressure within specif ications?
control panel.
YES−Replace the A/C pressure switch.
NO−Repair open in the wire between the heater
control panel and the A/C pressure switch. NO−Repair the A/C pressure problem.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-43

00/10/26 16:35:50 61S5N000_210_0045
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Evaporator Temperature Sensor

Replacement Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the 1. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the
evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove resistance between its terminals.
the connector clip (C). Turn the evaporator
temperature sensor counterclockwise to the stop, EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
and carefully pull out it.
A
B
2. Then pour hot water on the sensor, and check for a

change in resistance.
3. Compare the resistance readings with the

specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
40
30
RESISTANCE
k
20
10
50 68 86°F
10 20 30°C
TEMPERATURE
21-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:50 61S5N000_210_0046
Evaporator Core Replacement

1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ 5. Carefully pull out the evaporator core without
charging station (see page 21-53). bending the pipes.
2. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the suction line

(A) and the receiver line (B) from the evaporator
core.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) B 6. Install the core in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items.
3. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-26).
• If you’re installing a new evaporator core, add
4. Remove the bolt and the ECM/PCM bracket (A). refrigerant oil (SANDEN SP-10) (see page 21-33).
Remove the self-tapping screws and the expansion • Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
valve cover (B). and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the right O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap
A
on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
• Charge the system (see page 21-55).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-45

00/10/26 16:35:51 61S5N000_210_0047
Air Conditioning
Compressor Replacement
1. If the compressor is marginally operable, run the 7. Remove the nuts, then disconnect the suction line
engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning (A) and the discharge line (B) from the compressor.
work for a few minutes, then shut the engine off. Plug or cap the lines immediately after
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, contamination.
preset buttons. 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
B
4. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/

charging station (see page 21-53).
5. Remove the alternator (see page 4-26).
6. Remove the compressor clutch connector (A) from

the condenser fan shroud (B), then disconnect the
compressor clutch connector. Disconnect the
condenser fan connector (C), then remove the wire
harness clip (D) from the condenser fan shroud.
Remove the mounting bolts and the condenser fan A
shroud. Be careful not to damage the radiator fins
when removing the condenser fan shroud.
8. Remove the mounting bolts and the compressor.
6 x 1.0 mm Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) removing the compressor.
A C
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
21-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:51 61S5N000_210_0048
9. Install the compressor in the reverse order of

• If you’re installing a new compressor, you must

calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
removed from it (see page 21-33).
• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
• Use refrigerant oil (SANDEN SP-10) for HFC-134a
SANDEN spiral type compressor only.
• To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to
the container once dispensed, and never mix it
with other refrigerant oils.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap
on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
• Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
installing the compressor and the condenser fan
shroud.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-47

00/10/26 16:35:52 61S5N000_210_0049
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Check

1. Check the armature plate for discoloration, peeling, 4. Release the field coil connector from the holder,
or other damage. If there is damage, replace the then disconnect it. Check the thermal protector for
clutch set (see page 21-49). continuity. If there is no continuity, replace the
thermal protector (see page 21-51).
2. Check the rotor pulley bearing play and drag by
rotating the rotor pulley by hand. Replace the NOTE: The thermal protector will have no
clutch set with a new one if it is noisy or has continuity above 252 to 262°F (122 to 128°C). When
excessive play/drag (see page 21-49). the temperature drops below 241 to 219°F (116 to
104°C), the thermal protector will have continuity.
3. Measure the clearance between the rotor pulley (A)

and the armature plate (B) all the way around. If the 5. Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not
clearance is not within specified limits, remove the within specifications, replace the field coil
armature plate (see page 21-49) and add or remove (see page 21-49).
shims as needed to increase or decrease clearance.
Field Coil Resistance: 3.05−3.35 ohms at 68°F
Clearance: 0.5±0.15 mm (0.020±0.006 in.) (20°C)
NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses:

0.1 mm, 0.2 mm, 0.4 mm, and 0.5 mm.
21-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:52 61S5N000_210_0050
Compressor Clutch Overhaul

Special Tool Required 3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap
A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204, Kent-Moore J37872, ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the rotor
or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939, pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the rotor pulley
commercially available and compressor.
1. Remove the center nut (A) while holding the

armature plate with a commercially available A/C
clutch holder (B). A
A
24.5 N·m B
(2.5 kgf·m,
18 lbf·ft)
4. Remove the bolt and holder (A), then disconnect

the field coil connector (B). Loosen the clamp screw
(C) to free the field coil wire. Remove the snap ring
(D) with snap ring pliers, then remove the field coil
2. Remove the armature plate (A) and shim(s) (B), (E). Be careful not to damage the field coil and
taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch compressor.
needs adjustment, increase or decrease the
D
number and thickness of shims as necessary, then
E
reinstall the armature plate, and recheck its
clearance (see page 21-48).
A
B
7.4 N·m
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-49

00/10/26 16:35:52 61S5N000_210_0051
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Overhaul (cont’d)

5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of
disassembly, and note these items:
• Install the field coil with the wire side facing

down, and align the boss on the field coil with the
hole in the compressor.
• Clean the rotor pulley and compressor sliding
surfaces with contact cleaner or other
non-petroleum solvent.
• Install new snap rings, note the installation
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in
the groove.
• Make sure that the rotor pulley turns smoothly
after it’s reassembled.
• Route and clamp the wires properly or they can
be damaged by the rotor pulley.
21-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:53 61S5N000_210_0052
Compressor Thermal Protector Compressor Relief Valve

1. Remove the bolt, the ground terminal (A), and the 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/
holder (B). Disconnect the field coil connector (C), charging station (see page 21-53).
then remove the thermal protector (D).
2. Remove the cover (A), the relief valve (B), and the
A O-ring (C). Plug the opening to keep foreign matter
from entering the system and the compressor oil
7.4 N·m
(0.75 kgf·m, 5 lbf·ft) from running out.
B
C
B
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
2. Replace the thermal protector (A) with a new one, 3. Clean the mating surfaces.
and apply silicone sealant (B) to the bottom of the
thermal protector. 4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief
valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
B installing it.
5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief

valve.
6. Charge the system (see page 21-55).
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-51

00/10/26 16:35:53 61S5N000_210_0053
Air Conditioning
Condenser Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ 4. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the
charging station (see page 21-53). condenser by lifting it up. Be careful not to damage
the radiator and condenser fins when removing the
2. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-90). condenser.
6 x 1.0 mm
3. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the discharge 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
line (A) and the condenser line (B) from the
condenser. Plug or cap the lines immediately after
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
contamination.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 5. Install the condenser in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items.
• If you’re installing a new condenser, add

refrigerant oil (SANDEN SP-10) (see page 21-33).
B • Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
6 x 1.0 mm • Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
7.2 lbf·ft) absorption.
• Be careful not to damage the radiator and
condenser fins when installing the condenser.
21-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:54 61S5N000_210_0054
Refrigerant Recovery
1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/
charging station (A) to the high-pressure service
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. shown, following the equipment manufacturer’s
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. instructions.
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
A
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is

certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to
remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning
system.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work

area before resuming service.
Additional health and safety information may be

obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed

from the A/C system after the recovery process is
completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new
refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before
charging.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-53

00/10/26 16:35:54 61S5N000_210_0055
Air Conditioning
System Evacuation
charging station (A) to the high-pressure service
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. shown, following the equipment manufacturer’s
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. instructions. Evacuate the system.
A

system.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work

Additional health and safety information may be

obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
1. When an A/C system has been opened to the

atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it
must be evacuated using a R-134a refrigerant
recovery/recycling/charging station (If the system C
has been open for several days, the receiver/dryer
should be replaced, and the system should be
evacuated for several hours.)
3. If the low-pressure does not reach more than 93.3

kPa (700 mmHg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes, there is
probably a leak in the system. Partially charge the
system, and check for leaks.
21-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:54 61S5N000_210_0056
System Charging
2. Evacuate the system (see page 21-54).
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor 3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. system that was removed during recovery. Use
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. only SANDEN SP-10 refrigerant oil.
4. Charge the system with the specified amount of
R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system;
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is the compressor will be damaged.
remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning Select the appropriate units of measure for your
system. refrigerant charging station.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work Refrigerant capacity:

area before resuming service. 500 to 550 g
0.50 to 0.55 kg
Additional health and safety information may be 1.1 to 1.2 lbs
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant 17.6 to 19.4 oz
manufacturers.
5. Check for refrigerant leaks (see page 21-56).
charging station (A) to the high-pressure service 6. Check for system performance (see page 21-58).
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
shown, following the equipment manufacturer’s
instructions.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-55

00/10/26 16:35:55 61S5N000_210_0057
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Leak Test

Special Tool Required 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/
Leak detector, Honda Tool and Equipment YGK-H-10PM, charging station (A) to the high-pressure service
commercially available port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
shown, following the equipment manufacturer’s
instructions.
• Compressed air mixed with R-134a froms a A

combustible vapor.
injury.
• Never use compressed air to pressure test
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air
conditioning system.
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor

can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat.
• Be careful when connecting service equipment.
C
certiified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to
system.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work B

2. Open high pressure valve to charge the system to
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning the specified capacity, then close the supply valve,
systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested and remove the charging system couplers.
with compressed air.
Select the appropriate units of measure for your
Additional health and safety information may be refrigerant charging station.
obtained from the refrigerant and lulbricant
manufacturers. Refrigerant capacity:
500 to 550 g
0.50 to 0.55 kg
1.1 to 1.2 lbs
17.6 to 19.4 oz
3. Check the system for leaks using a R-134a

refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g
(0.5 oz) per year or better.
4. If you find leaks that require the system to be

opened (to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.),
recover the system.
5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system

must be evacuated.
21-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:55 61S5N000_210_0058
A/C System Tests

Pressure Test
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy
Discharge (high) After stopping compressor, pressure Air in system Recover, evacuate (see page 21-54),
pressure drops to about 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 and recharge with specified amount
abnormally high psi) quickly, and then falls gradually. (see page 21-55).
Reduced or no air flow through • Clogged condenser or radiator • Clean
condenser fins • Check voltage and fan rpm.
• Condenser or radiator fan not • Check fan direction.
working properly
Line to condenser is excessively hot. Restricted flow of refrigerant in Restricted lines
system
Discharge pressure High and low pressures are balanced • Faulty compressor discharge Replace the compressor.
abnormally low soon after stopping compressor. Low valve
side is higher than normal. • Faulty compressor seal
Outlet of expansion valve is not • Faulty expansion valve • Replace
frosted, low-pressure gauge indicates • Moisture in system • Recover, evacuate, and recharge
vacuum. with specified amount.
Suction (low) Expansion valve is not frosted, and • Frozen expansion valve • Recover, evacuate, and recharge
pressure low-pressure line is not cold. Low- (Moisture in system) with specified amount.
abnormally low pressure gauge indicates vacuum. • Faulty expansion valve • Replace the expansion valve.
Discharge temperature is low, and the Frozen evaporator Run the fan with compressor off, then
air flow from vents is restricted. check evaporator temperature sensor.
Expansion valve is frosted. Clogged expansion valve Clean or replace.
Receiver/dryer outlet is cool, and inlet Clogged receiver/dryer Replace
is warm (should be warm during
operation).
Suction pressure Low-pressure hose and check joint are Expansion valve open too long Repair or replace.
abnormally high cooler than the temperature around
evaporator.
Suction pressure is lowered when Excessive refrigerant in system Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
condenser is cooled by water. specified amount.
High and low-pressure are equalized • Faulty gasket Replace the compressor.
as soon as the compressor is stopped, • Faulty high-pressure valve
and both gauges fluctuate while • Foreign particle stuck in high-
running. pressure valve
Suction and Reduced air flow through condenser. • Clogged condenser or radiator • Clean
discharge fins • Check voltage and fan rpm.
pressures • Condenser or radiator fan not • Check fan direction.
abnormally high working properly
Suction and Low-pressure hose and metal end Clogged or kinked low-pressure Repair or replace.
discharge pressure areas are cooler than evaporator. hose parts
abnormally low Temperature around expansion valve Clogged high-pressure line Repair or replace.
is too low compared with that around
receiver/dryer.
Refrigerant leaks Compressor clutch is dirty. Compressor shaft seal leaking Replace the compressor.
Compressor bolt(s) are dirty. Leaking around bolt(s) Tighten bolt(s) or replace compressor.
Compressor gasket is wet with oil. Gasket leaking Replace the compressor.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-57

00/10/26 16:35:55 61S5N000_210_0059
Air Conditioning
A/C System Tests (cont’d)

Performance Test 2. Insert a thermometer in the center air vent.
Determine the relative humidity and air
temperature.
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor

can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat.
• Be careful when connecting service equipment.
• Compressed air mixed R-134a forms a

combustible vapor.
injury.
• Never use compressed air to pressure test R-134
a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning
systems.
3. Test conditions:
The performance test will help determine if the air • Avoid direct sunlight.
conditioner system is operating within specifications. • Open the hood.
• Open the front doors.
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is • Set the temperature control dial on MAX COOL,
certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to the mode control dial on VENT and the
remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning recirculation control switch on RECIRCULATE.
system. • Turn the A/C switch on and the fan switch on
MAX.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work • Run the engine at 1,500 rpm.
area before resuming service. • No driver or passengers in vehicle.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning 4. After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes
systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested under the above test conditions, read the delivery
with compressed air. temperature from the thermometer in the dash
vent, the intake temperature near the blower unit
Additional health and safety information may be behind the glove box and the high and low system
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant pressure from the A/C gauges.
manufacturers.
1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recover/recycling/

charging station to the high-pressure service port
and the low-pressure service port, following the
equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
21-58 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:35:56 61S5N000_210_0060
5. To complete the charts:
• Mark the delivery temperature along the vertical line.

• Mark the intake temperature (ambient air temperature) along the bottom line.
• Draw a line straight up from the air temperature to the humidity.
• Mark a point 10 % above and 10 % below the humidity level.
• From each point, draw a horizontal line across the delivery temperature.
• The delivery temperature should fall between the two lines.
• Complete the low-side pressure test and high-side pressure test in the same way.
• Any measurements outside the line may indicate the need for further inspection.
kPa
(kgf/cm2)
［psi］
2500 80 %
(25)
［360］ HUMIDITY
LEVEL
2000 30 %
(20)
［280］
DELIVERY
kPa °F PRESSURE
(kgf/cm2) (°C)
1500 ［psi］
(15)
［210］ 400 95
DELIVERY (4) (35) 80 %
PRESSURE ［57］
980 80 %
(10)
［140］ 300 86
(3) (30) HUMIDITY
［43］ LEVEL
INTAKE
PRESSURE 30 %
200 77
(2) (25)
［28］
100 68 HUMIDITY
(1) (20) LEVEL
［14］
INTAKE DELIVERY
PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
0 59
(15) 30 %
50
(10)
41
(5)
DELIVERY
TEMPERATURE
0
68 77 86 95 104 °F
(20) (25) (30) (35) (40) (°C)
INTAKE TEMPERATURE
-DYNOMITE 2009- 21-59

00/10/26 16:42:32 61S5N000_220_0001
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If electrical maintenance is required)

switch is ON (II).
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 16:42:33 61S5N000_220_0002
Body Electrical
Body Electrical Interior Lights Wiper/Washer
Special Tools ......................... 22-2 Component Location Component Location
General Troubleshooting Index ................................... 22-90 Index ................................... 22-127
Information ........................ 22-3 Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-91 Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-128
Ceiling Light/Spotlights Wiper/Washer Switch
Relay and Control Test/Replacement ............. 22-93 Test/Replacement ............. 22-129
Unit Locations ........ 22-7 Spotlight Test/ Control Unit Input Test ......... 22-130
Replacement ...................... 22-94 Wiper Motor Test .................. 22-132
Connectors and Ceiling Light Test/ Washer Motor Test ............... 22-132
Harnesses ................ 22-12 Replacement ...................... 22-94 Wiper Motor Replacement ... 22-133
Trunk Light Test/ Washer Fluid Level Switch
Fuse/Relay Boxes ....... 22-44 Replacement ...................... 22-95 Test ..................................... 22-134
Trunk Lid Latch Switch Washer Reservoir
Power Distribution .......
........ 22-46 Test ..................................... 22-95 Replacement ...................... 22-134
Washer Tube
Ground Distribution .....
...... 22-48 *Stereo Sound System Replacement ...................... 22-135
Component Location
Under-dash Fuse/ Index ................................... 22-96 Accessory Power Socket
Relay Box ................. 22-49 Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-97 Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-136
Audio Unit Removal/ Test/Replacement ................. 22-136
Battery ......................... 22-50 Installation .......................... 22-98
Audio Unit Connector Keyless/Power Door Lock
Relays .......................... 22-51 Replacement ...................... 22-99 System
Window Antenna Test .......... 22-100 Component Location
*Ignition Switch Window Antenna Repair ...... 22-100 Index ................................... 22-137
Test ......................................... 22-53 Speaker Replacement .......... 22-101 Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-138
Keyless Receiver Input
*Gauges Rear Window Defogger Test ..................................... 22-140
Component Location Index .. 22-54 Component Location Control Unit Input Test ......... 22-142
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-56 Index ................................... 22-102 Door Lock Actuator Test ....... 22-145
Gauge Bulb Replacement .... 22-61 Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-103 Door Lock Knob Switch
Gauge Assembly Function Test ......................... 22-104 Test ..................................... 22-146
Replacement ...................... 22-62 Defogger Wire Repair ........... 22-104 Door Lock Switch Test .......... 22-146
Coolant Temperature Window Antenna Coil Transmitter Test .................... 22-147
Gauge Troubleshooting ... 22-62 Test ..................................... 22-105 Transmitter Programming ... 22-147
VSS Circuit
Troubleshooting ................ 22-63 Moonroof Seat Heaters
VSS Replacement ................. 22-65 Component Location Component Location
Index ................................... 22-106 Index ................................... 22-148
Exterior Lights Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-107 Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-149
Component Location Index .. 22-66 Switch Test/Replacement .... 22-108 Seat Heater Test .................... 22-150
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-68 Motor Test ............................. 22-108 Seat Heater Relay Test ......... 22-150
Brake Lights Circuit Limit Switch Test ................... 22-109 Seat Heater Switch
Diagram .............................. 22-70 Test/Replacement ............. 22-151
Back-up Lights Circuit Power Mirrors
Diagram .............................. 22-71 Component Location Security Alarm System
DRL Control Unit Input Index ................................... 22-110 Component Location
Test ..................................... 22-72 Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-111 Index ................................... 22-152
Headlight Adjustment .......... 22-74 Function Test ......................... 22-112 Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-154
Headlight Replacement ........ 22-75 Power Mirror Switch Test .... 22-113 Control Unit Input Test ......... 22-157
Combination Light Switch Power Mirror Actuator Door Lock Knob Switch
Test/Replacement ............. 22-76 Test ..................................... 22-113 Test ..................................... 22-160
Bulb Replacement ................. 22-77 Power Mirror Actuator Door Key Cylinder Switch
Front Turn Signal Lights Replacement ...................... 22-114 Test ..................................... 22-161
Replacement ...................... 22-78 Security Horn Test ................ 22-161
License Plate Lights Horn Trunk Lid Opener Solenoid
Replacement ...................... 22-78 Component Location Test ..................................... 22-162
Taillights Replacement ......... 22-79 Index ................................... 22-116 Trunk Security Latch Switch
High Mount Brake Light Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-117 Test ..................................... 22-162
Replacement ...................... 22-80 Horn Test/Replacement ........ 22-117 Hold Switch Test ................... 22-163
Brake Pedal Position Horn Switch Test ................... 22-118
Switch Test ........................ 22-80 Immobilizer System
Power Windows Component Location
Turn Signal/Hazard Component Location Index ................................... 22-164
Flasher System Index ................................... 22-119 System Description .............. 22-165
Component Location Index .. 22-81 Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-120 Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-166
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-82 Master Switch Input Troubleshooting .................... 22-167
Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Test ..................................... 22-122 Immobilizer Control Unit-
Input Test ........................... 22-83 Master Switch Test/ Receiver Replacement ...... 22-168
Hazard Warning Switch Replacement ...................... 22-124
Test ..................................... 22-84 Driver’s Window Motor Multiplex Control System
Test ..................................... 22-125 Component Location
Entry Lights Control System Passenger’s Window Switch Index ................................... 22-169
Component Location Index .. 22-85 Test/Replacement ............. 22-126 Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-170
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-86 Passenger’s Window Motor System Description .............. 22-172
Ignition Key Switch Test ....... 22-87 Test ..................................... 22-126 Troubleshooting .................... 22-173
Ignition Key Light Test .......... 22-87 Multiplex Control Unit
Control Unit Input Test ......... 22-88 Input Test ........................... 22-177
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 16:42:33 61S5N000_220_0003
Body Electrical
Special Tools
07WAZ-001010A MPCS Service Connector 1

00/10/26 16:42:34 61S5N000_220_0004

Tips and Precautions • Some connectors have a clip on their side used to
attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on
Before Troubleshooting another component. This clip has a pull type lock.
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay • Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected
box. unless you first release the lock and remove the
connector from its mount bracket (A).
2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and
clean and tight connections.
• Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery

ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise
you will damage the alternator diodes.
• Do not attempt to crank the engine with the
battery ground cable loosely connected or you
will severely damage the wiring.
Handling Connectors
• Make sure the connectors are clean and have no
loose wire terminals. A
• Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with
grease (except watertight connectors). • Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their
• All connectors have push-down release type locks (A). wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
• Always reinstall plastic covers.
• Before connecting connectors, make sure the

terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 16:42:34 61S5N000_220_0005
Body Electrical

• Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). Handling Wires and Harnesses
• Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with
their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
A • Remove clips carefully; don’t damage their locks (A).
B
• The backs of some connectors are packed with

grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is • Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the
contaminated, replace it. hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to
release the clip.
• After installing harness clips, make sure the harness

• Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is doesn’t interfere with any moving parts.
securely locked. • Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and
• Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and
down. holes, and from exposed screws and bolts.
• Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not
leave grommets distorted (B).
A B
DOWN

00/10/26 16:42:34 61S5N000_220_0006
Testing and Repairs • Use a probe with a tapered tip.

• Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation.
Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break
with electrical tape.
• After installing parts, make sure that no wires are
pinched under them.
• When using electrical test equipment, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and those described in
this manual.
• If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire
side (except waterproof connector).
• Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for

identification and replacement of connector terminals.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 16:42:35 61S5N000_220_0007
Body Electrical

Five-step Troubleshooting Wire Color Codes
1. Verify The Complaint The following abbreviations are used to identify wire
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit colors in the circuit schematics:
to verify the customer complaint. Note the WHT .................................... White
symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing YEL ...................................... Yellow
until you have narrowed down the problem area. BLK ...................................... Black
BLU ..................................... Blue
2. Analyze The Schematic GRN..................................... Green
Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. RED ..................................... Red
Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by ORN..................................... Orange
tracing the current paths from the power feed PNK ..................................... Pink
through the circuit components to ground. If BRN ..................................... Brown
several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or GRY ..................................... Gray
ground is a likely cause. PUR ..................................... Purple
LT BLU ................................ Light Blue
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of LT GRN ............................... Light Green
the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem. The wire insulation has one color or one color with
another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit
Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made
in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple WHT/BLK
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting.
Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to
make tests at points that are easily accessible.
4. Fix The Problem

Once the specific problem is identified, make the
repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe
procedures.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works

Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all
modes to make sure you’ve fixed the entire
problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure
to test all of the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no
new problems turn up and the original problem
does not recur.

00/10/26 16:42:35 61S5N000_220_0008
Relay and Control Unit Locations
Engine Compartment
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER RELAY
A/C COMPRESSOR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
CLUTCH RELAY
RADIATOR FAN RELAY

HEADLIGHT
RELAY 1
HORN RELAY
HEADLIGHT
RELAY 2
CONDENSER FAN
RELAY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX

00/10/26 16:42:35 61S5N000_220_0009
Dashboard
POWER WINDOW RELAY

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY
TAILLIGHT RELAY
STARTER CUT RELAY

SECURITY CONTROL UNIT
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT

00/10/26 16:42:35 61S5N000_220_0010
LOW BEAM CUT RELAY

Wire colors: RED/WHT, RED/BLK,
RED/YEL and RED/BLU
SECURITY HORN RELAY

IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER Wire colors: BLU/ORN,
WHT/GRN, WHT/GRN and GRN
AUDIO UNIT
HEATER CONTROL PANEL DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS RELAY

Wire colors: RED, RED/YEL,
RED/BLK and RED/BLU
(cont’d)

00/10/26 16:42:36 61S5N000_220_0011
Dashboard (cont’d)
KEYLESS RECEIVER UNIT
SRS UNIT
ECM/PCM
SEAT HEATER RELAY

Wire colors: GRN/BLU, PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
RED/BLK, BLK/YEL and BLK Wire colors: YEL/BLK,
WHT/BLK, WHT/BLK and RED/YEL
A/T REVERSE RELAY PGM-FI MAN RELAY 2
Wire colors: GRN, Wire colors: YEL/BLK,
YEL, YEL and WHT YEL/GRN, YEL/BLK and GRN/YEL
22-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:36 61S5N000_220_0012
Door, Roof and Seat
MOONROOF OPEN RELAY

Wire colors: GRN/YEL, GRN,
RED/YEL, BLK and YEL/GRN
MOONROOF CLOSE RELAY
Wire colors: GRN/BLK, GRN,
GRN/WHT, BLK and YEL/GRN
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH

(Has built-in control unit)
OPDS UNIT
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-11

00/10/26 16:42:36 61S5N000_220_0013
Connectors and Harnesses
Connector Index
Identification numbers have been assigned to in-line connectors. The number is preceded by the letter ‘‘C’’ for connectors, ‘‘G’’ for ground
terminals or ‘‘T’’ for non-ground terminals.
Harness Location
Engine Compartment Dashboard Others (Floor, Door, Notes
Trunk and Roof)
Battery ground cable T3, (−) (see page 22-13)
G1
Engine ground cable T4 (see page 22-13)
G2
Engine wire harness C102 through C106 C101 (see page 22-14)
T1, T2 and (＋)
T101 and T102
G101
Engine compartment wire harness C401, C451, C501 (see page 22-18)
(Left branch) C502, C503, C504,
C551, C552, C853
G301, G302
Engine compartment wire harness G201 (see page 22-18)
(Right branch)
Dashboard wire harness B C401 through C404 (see page 22-22)
G401, G402
ECM/PCM wire harness C101, C451, C452, (see page 22-24)
C453
G451
Dashboard wire harness A C402, C651, C751, (see page 22-26)
(Left branch) C752
G501
Dashboard wire harness A C453, C501 through (see page 22-26)
(Right branch) C504, C561 through
C564, C781, C782,
C851, C852
G502, G503
Floor wire harness C403, C404, C452, C553, C554, C555, (see page 22-30)
C551, C552, C561, C601
C562, C563, C564 G551
Rear wire harness C601 (see page 22-32)
G601
Roof wire harness C651 (see page 22-34)
A/C wire harness C851, C852, C853 (see page 22-43)
Driver’s door wire harness C751, C752 (see page 22-36)
Front passenger’s door wire C781, C782 (see page 22-37)
harness
Left rear door wire harness C553 (see page 22-38)
Right rear door wire harness C554 (see page 22-39)
OPDS unit harness C555 (see page 22-42)
Rear window defogger ground (see page 22-40)
wire
Engine oil pressure switch sub- C105 (see page 22-41)
harness
Transmission range switch sub- C106 (see page 22-41)
harness
22-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:37 61S5N000_220_0014
Connector to Harness Index

Battery Ground Cable
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
T3 5 Right side of engine compartment
G1 1 Right side of engine compartment Body ground via battery
ground cable
(−) 2 Battery Battery negative terminal
Engine Ground Cable

T4 4 Right side of engine
G2 3 Middle of engine compartment Body ground via engine
ground cable
ENGINE GROUND CABLE
4
1
BATTERY GROUND CABLE
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-13

00/10/26 16:42:37 61S5N000_220_0015
Connector to Harness Index (cont’d)

Engine Wire Harness
Alternator 22 4 Left side of engine compartment
A/T pressure control solenoid valve A 38 2 Transmission housing
A/T pressure control solenoid valve B 35 2 Transmission housing
Back-up light switch 41 2 Transmission housing M/T
CKP sensor 19 3 Left side of engine compartment
Countershaft speed sensor 41 2 Transmission housing A/T
ECM/PCM connector C 2 22 Under middle of dash
ECM/PCM connector B 3 24 Under middle of dash
ECM/PCM connector A 4 31 Under middle of dash
EGR valve and EGR valve position 45 6 Right side of engine compartment D17A2
sensor
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) 28 2 Right side of engine compartment
sensor
EVAP canister purge valve 12 2 Left side of engine compartment
Idle air control (IAC) valve 6 3 Right side of engine compartment
Ignition coil No. 1 20 3 Middle of engine
Injector No. 1 16 2 Middle of engine
Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor 14 2 Left side of engine compartment
Knock sensor 17 3 Left side of engine compartment
MAP sensor 13 3 Left side of engine compartment
Mainshaft speed sensor 39 2 Transmission housing
Primary HO2S 29 4 Middle of engine
Radiator fan switch 32 2 Right side of engine compartment
Secondary HO2S 30 4 Middle of engine D17A1
Shift solenoid valve 36 2 Transmission housing A/T
Starter solenoid 34 1 Right side of engine compartment
TDC sensor 18 3 Left side of engine compartment
Throttle position (TP) sensor 11 3 Left side of engine compartment A/T
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 37 2 Transmission housing A/T
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) 44 3 Transmission housing
VTEC oil pressure switch 46 2 Right side of engine compartment D17A2
VTEC solenoid valve 7 1 Right side of engine compartment D17A2
22-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:37 61S5N000_220_0016
ENGINE WIRE HARNESS

45 46 3 4 5
2
44 6 7
1 8 9
10 11
12 13 14
43 15
16
17
42
41 18
19
40
37
39 20
21
22
23
24
38 25
36 35 26
34 28 27
33
32 30 29
31
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-15

00/10/26 16:42:37 61S5N000_220_0017

Engine Wire Harness (cont’d)
C101 5 20 Under middle of dash ECM/PCM wire harness
(see page 22-24)
C102 (Junction connector A) 1 20 Right side of engine compartment
C103 (Junction connector B) 26 24 Cylinder head cover
C104 (Junction connector C) 24 24 Cylinder head cover
C105 8 1 Middle of engine compartment Engine oil pressure switch
sub-harness (see page 22-
41)
C106 40 10 Trasmission housing Transmission range switch
sub-harness (see page 22-
41)
T1 42 Right side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
T2 33 Middle of engine compartment Starter motor
(＋) 37 Battery Battery positive terminal
T101 43 Under-hood fuse/relay box
T102 23 Alternator
G101 31 Middle of engine compartment Engine ground via engine
wire harness
22-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:38 61S5N000_220_0018
ENGINE WIRE HARNESS

45 46 3 4 5
2
44 6 7
1 8 9
10 11
12 13 14
43 15
16
17
42
41 18
19
40
37
39 20
21
22
23
24
38 25
36 35 26
34 28 27
33
32 30 29
31
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-17

00/10/26 16:42:38 61S5N000_220_0019

Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Left branch)
ABS left front wheel sensor 18 2 Left side of engine compartment
ABS modulator assembly 19 26 Left side of engine compartment
Brake fluid level switch 16 2 Left side of engine compartment
Horn 27 1 Behind left side of front bumper
Left front parking light 22 2 Behind left headlight assembly
Left front turn signal light 25 2 Behind left headlight assembly
Left front impact sensor 26 2 Left side of engine compartment
Left headlight 22 3 Behind left headlight assembly
Power steering pressure (PSP) switch 17 2 Left side of engine compartment
Secondary HO2S 29 4 Middle of engine compartment
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector F 14 12 Under left side of dash
(see page 22-45)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 11 10 Under left side of dash
G (see page 22-45)
H (see page 22-45)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector I 13 5 Under left side of dash
(see page 22-45)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector J 12 8 Under left side of dash
(see page 22-45)
Washer fluid level switch 24 2 Behind left side of front bumper
Windshield washer motor 23 2 Behind left side of front bumper
Windshield wiper motor 15 5 Under left side of cowl cover
C401 9 4 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-22)
C451 6 13 Under middle of dash ECM/PCM wire harness
(see page 22-24)
C501 7 10 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-26)
(see page 22-26)
(see page 22-26)
(see page 22-26)
C551 4 8 Under middle of dash Floor wire harness (see
page 22-30)
C552 5 2 Under middle of dash Floor wire harness (see
page 22-30)
C853 1 1 Under middle of dash A/C wire harness (see page
22-43)
G301 20 Left side of engine compartment Body ground via engine
compartment wire harness
G302 28 Left side of engine compartment Body ground via engine
22-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:39 61S5N000_220_0020
10 11
12
13
ENGINE COMPARTMENT WIRE 14

HARNESS
2
3
4
1
5 6
7
8
9
15
16
17
18
29 19
21
22
27
26
25 23
24
28 20
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-19

00/10/26 16:42:39 61S5N000_220_0021

Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Right branch)
ABS right front wheel sensor 11 2 Right side of engine compartment
A/C compressor clutch 8 1 Behind left side of condenser fan
A/C pressure switch 7 2 Behind left side of condenser fan
Condenser fan motor 9 2 Behind condenser fan
Cruise control actuator 6 4 Right side of engine compartment
Hood switch 12 2 Behind hood latch
Optional connector (for A/C) 10 4 Right side of engine compartment
Radiator fan motor 13 2 Behind right side of radiator fan
Right front parking light 19 2 Behind right headlight assembly
Right front turn signal light 16 3 Behind right headlight assembly
Right front impact sensor 15 2 Right side of engine compartment
Right headlight 17 3 Behind right headlight assembly
Security horn 18 1 Behind right side of front bumper
Test tachometer connector 20 2 Right side of engine compartment
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector 1 2 Right side of engine compartment
A (see page 22-44)
B (see page 22-44)
C (see page 22-44)
D (see page 22-44)
E (see page 22-44)
G201 14 Right side of engine compartment Body ground via engine
22-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:39 61S5N000_220_0022
2
1
3
4 5
6
ENGINE COMPARTMENT WIRE
HARNESS
20
19
18
17
16
15
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
14
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-21

00/10/26 16:42:39 61S5N000_220_0023

Dashboard Wire Harness B
Cable reel 24 5 In steering column cover
Clutch pedal position switch 20 2 Under left side of dash Cruise
Clutch interlock switch 19 2 Under left side of dash
Combination light switch 23 16 In steering column cover
Daytime running lights relay 8 4 Under middle of dash
Driver’s airbag inflator 21 4 In steering column cover
Ignition key switch 17 6 In steering column cover
Ignition switch 18 7 In steering column cover
Immobilizer control unit-receiver 16 7 In steering column cover
Low beam cut relay 9 5 Under middle of dash
Multiplex control unit 6 8 In the under-dash fuse/relay box
(Fuse/relay box connector X)
Passenger’s airbag inflator 10 4 Under right side of dash
SRS unit connector 11 18 Under middle of dash
A (see page 22-45)
B (see page 22-45)
C (see page 22-45)
S (see page 22-45)
Wiper/washer switch 22 14 In steering column cover
C401 12 4 Under middle of dash Engine compartment wire
harness (see page 22-18)
(see page 22-26)
C403 13 8 Under middle of dash Floor wire harness (see page
22-30)
22-30)
G401 1 Under gauge assembly Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness B
G402 15 Under middle of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness B
22-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:40 61S5N000_220_0024
2 3 4
5
1 6
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B
10
24
23
22
21
20 16 11
19 17
18
12
13
14
15
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-23

00/10/26 16:42:40 61S5N000_220_0025

ECM/PCM Wire Harness
A/T reverse relay 8 4 Behind glove box
A/T shift switch and light 14 4 Behind A/T shift lever
Data link connector 4 16 Under middle of dash
ECM/PCM connector E 7 31 Under right side of dash
PGM-FI main relay 1 10 4 Behind glove box
PGM-FI main relay 2 11 5 Behind glove box
Seat heater relay 9 4 Behind glove box
Shift lock solenoid 15 2 Behind A/T shift lever
D (see page 22-45)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector E 2 13 Under left side of dash
(see page 22-45)
R (see page 22-45)
C101 6 20 Under right side of dash Engine wire harness (see
page 22-14)
22-30)
(see page 22-26)
G451 16 Under middle of dash Body ground, via ECM/PCM
wire harness
22-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:40 61S5N000_220_0026
1
2
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
ECM/PCM WIRE HARNESS
12
13
14
15
16
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-25

00/10/26 16:42:41 61S5N000_220_0027

Dashboard Wire Harness A (Left branch)
Brake pedal position switch 13 4 Under left side of dash
Cruise control main switch 16 5 Under left side of dash
Cruise control unit 12 14 Under left side of dash
Daytime running lights control unit 1 14 Under left side of dash
Gauge assembly connector A 2 22 Behind gauge assembly
Gauge assembly connector B 3 22 Behind gauge assembly
Moonroof switch 15 6 Under left side of dash
Multiplex control unit 5 13 In the under-dash fuse/relay box
(Fuse/relay box connector Y)
Power mirror switch 14 13 Under left side of dash
Security control unit connector A 20 20 Under left side of dash
Security control unit connector B 21 16 Under left side of dash
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 7 17 In the under-dash fuse/relay box
K (see page 22-45)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector L 8 10 In the under-dash fuse/relay box
(see page 22-45)
M (see page 22-45)
N (see page 22-45)
O (see page 22-45)
(see page 22-22)
C651 19 8 Under left side of dash Roof wire harness (see 1
page 22-34)
C651 19 8 Under left side of dash Roof wire harness (see 2
page 22-35)
C751 18 10 Under left side of dash Driver’s door wire harness
(see page 22-36)
C752 17 13 Under left side of dash Driver’s door wire harness
(see page 22-36)
G501 4 Under gauge assembly Body ground, via
dashboard wire harness A
1: With moonroof
2: Without moonroof
22-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:41 61S5N000_220_0028
7 8
9
6
10
5
2 3
1
4
21
20 11
19
18
17
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS A
16 12
13
15 14
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-27

00/10/26 16:42:41 61S5N000_220_0029

Dashboard Wire Harness A (Right branch)
Accessory power socket 23 2 Under middle of dash
Audio unit 4 20 Behind audio unit
Hazard warning switch 5 10 Behind hazard switch
Heater control panel connector A 3 22 Behind heater control panel
Heater control panel connector B 2 14 Behind heater control panel
HVAC push switch assembly 1 10 Behind HVAC switch assembly
Keyless receiver unit 8 5 Under middle of dash
Keyless receiver unit (Optional) 8 2 Under middle of dash
Seat heater switch 24 10 Under middle of dash
Security horn relay 7 4 Behind glove box
C453 9 13 Under middle of dash ECM/PCM wire harness (see
page 22-24)
22-30)
22-30)
22-30)
22-30)
C781 12 13 Under right side of dash Front passenger’s door wire
C782 13 6 Under right side of dash Front passenger’s door wire
22-43)
22-43)
G502 6 Under middle of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness A
G503 14 Under right side of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness A
22-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:42 61S5N000_220_0030
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS A
4 5
3 7
1 2
10
11
24 12
23
22
21
20 13
15
16
17
19 18
14
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-29

00/10/26 16:42:42 61S5N000_220_0031

Floor Wire Harness
ABS left rear wheel sensor 30 2 Under left side of floor
ABS right rear wheel sensor 25 2 Under right side of floor
Driver’s door switch 35 1 Left B-pillar
Driver’s seat belt switch 41 3 Under driver’s seat
Driver’s seat belt tensioner 37 2 Left B-pillar
Driver’s seat belt buckle tensioner 40 2 Under driver’s seat
Driver’s seat heater 39 2 Under driver’s seat
Driver’s side airbag inflator 38 2 Under driver’s seat
Driver’s side impact sensor 36 2 Left side of floor
EVAP bypass solenoid valve 27 2 Under left side of floor
EVAP canister vent shut valve 29 2 Under left side of floor
Front passenger’s door switch 17 1 Right B-pillar
Fuel pump/fuel gauge sending unit 26 5 Under middle of floor
Fuel tank pressure sensor 28 3 Under left side of floor
Left rear door switch 31 1 Left C-pillar
Memory erase signal (MES) connector 1 2 Under-dash fuse/relay box
Parking brake switch 21 1 Middle of floor
Passenger’s seat belt switch 12 3 Under front passenger’s seat
Passenger’s seat belt tensioner 18 2 Right B-pillar
Passenger’s seat belt buckle tensioner 13 4 Under front passenger’s seat
Passenger’s seat heater 14 2 Under front passenger’s seat
Passenger’s side airbag inflator 15 2 Under front passenger’s seat
Passenger’s side impact sensor 20 2 Right side of floor
Right rear door switch 22 1 Right C-pillar
SRS unit connector A 7 18 Under middle of dash
SRS unit connector B 8 8 Under middle of dash
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector P 3 18 Under-dash fuse/relay box
(see page 22-45)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 2 8 Under-dash fuse/relay box
Q (see page 22-45)
(see page 22-22)
(see page 22-22)
C452 4 10 Under middle of dash ECM/PCM wire harness (see
page 22-24)
C553 34 8 Left B-pillar Left rear door wire harness
(see page 22-38)
C554 19 8 Right B-pillar Right rear door wire harness
(see page 22-39)
C555 11 4 Under front passenger’s seat OPDS unit harness (see page
22-42)
(see page 22-26)
(see page 22-26)
(see page 22-26)
(see page 22-26)
C601 23 14 Right side of trunk Rear wire harness (see page
22-32)
C602 24 10 Right side of trunk Rear wire harness (see page
22-32)
G551 16 Under front passenger’s seat Body ground, via floor wire
harness
22-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:43 61S5N000_220_0032
2 3
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16
6 7 15
4 5
17
18
19
20
43
21
42
22
41 23
24
40
39
38
37
36 25
35
26
34
33
32
31 FLOOR WIRE HARNESS

30
29 28 27
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-31

00/10/26 16:42:43 61S5N000_220_0033

Rear Wire Harness
High mount brake light 17 2 Middle of rear shelf
Left back-up light 12 3 Left side of trunk
Left inner taillight 13 2 Left side of trunk
Left rear speaker 18 2 Left side of rear shelf
Left rear turn signal light 15 2 Left side of trunk
Left taillight 14 4 Left side of trunk
License plate light connector A 9 2 Middle of trunk lid
License plate light connector B 11 2 Middle of trunk lid
Right back-up light 7 3 Right side of trunk
Right inner taillight 6 2 Right side of trunk
Right rear speaker 19 2 Right side of rear shelf
Right rear turn signal light 5 2 Right side of trunk
Right taillight 4 4 Right side of trunk
Trunk lid opener solenoid/latch switch 10 6 Middle of trunk
Trunk light 16 2 Middle of trunk
Window antenna coil 3 1 Middle of rear shelf
C601 1 14 Right side of trunk Floor wire harness (see page
22-30)
C602 2 10 Right side of trunk Floor wire harness (see page
22-30)
G601 8 Middle of trunk Body ground, via rear wire
harness
22-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:43 61S5N000_220_0034
19
18
17
16
15
14
1
13
12 2
11
10
REAR WIRE HARNESS

7
6 3
5 4
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-33

00/10/26 16:42:43 61S5N000_220_0035

Roof Wire Harness (With moonroof)
Ceiling light 7 3 Roof
Moonroof close relay 4 5 Roof
Moonroof motor 5 2 Roof
Moonroof motor position sensor 6 4 Roof
Moonroof open relay 3 5 Roof
Spotlights 2 4 Roof
C651 1 8 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-26)
6 ROOF WIRE HARNESS

5
7
22-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:43 61S5N000_220_0036
Roof Wire Harness (Without moonroof)

Ceiling light 3 3 Roof
Spotlights 2 2 Roof
(see page 22-26)
ROOF WIRE HARNESS
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-35

00/10/26 16:42:44 61S5N000_220_0037

Driver’s Door Wire Harness
Driver’s door lock actuator 8 2 Driver’s door
Driver’s door lock knob switch 9 3 Driver’s door
Driver’s door lock key cylinder switch 10 3 Driver’s door
Driver’s door lock switch 1 3 Driver’s door
Driver’s door speaker 6 2 Driver’s door
Driver’s power window motor 5 4 Driver’s door
Left power mirror actuator 2 8 Driver’s door
Power window master switch 7 20 Driver’s door
(see page 22-26)
C752 3 13 Under left side of trunk Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-26)
2
1
10
9
4
8
7
6 5
DRIVER’S DOOR WIRE HARNESS
22-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:44 61S5N000_220_0038
Front Passenger’s Door Wire Harness

Front passenger’s door lock actuator 4 2 Front passenger’s door
Front passenger’s door lock key 2 3 Front passenger’s door
cylinder switch
Front passenger’s door lock knob 3 3 Front passenger’s door
switch
Front passenger’s door speaker 6 2 Front passenger’s door
Front passenger’s power window 7 2 Front passenger’s door
motor
Front passenger’s power window 5 5 Front passenger’s door
switch
Right power mirror actuator 1 8 Front passenger’s door
C781 9 13 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-26)
C782 8 6 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-26)
1 2
3
8
7 6 FRONT PASSENGER’S DOOR

5 WIRE HARNESS
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-37

00/10/26 16:42:44 61S5N000_220_0039

Left Rear Door Wire Harness
Left rear door lock actuator 4 2 Left rear door
Left rear door lock knob switch 5 3 Left rear door
Left rear power window motor 3 2 Left rear door
Left rear power window switch 1 5 Left rear door
C553 2 8 Left rear door Floor wire harness (see page
22-30)
2
5
LET REAR DOOR 3

WIRE HARNESS
22-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:44 61S5N000_220_0040
Right Rear Door Wire Harness

Right rear door lock actuator 5 2 Right rear door
Right rear door lock knob switch 4 3 Right rear door
Right rear power window motor 3 2 Right rear door
Right rear power window switch 2 5 Right rear door
C554 1 8 Right rear door Floor wire harness (see page
22-30)
2
3
RIGHT REAR DOOR WIRE HARNESS
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-39

00/10/26 16:42:45 61S5N000_220_0041

Rear Window Defogger Wire Harness
Rear window defogger connector A 3 1 Right C-pillar
(＋)
Rear window defogger connector B 1 1 Left C-pillar
(−)
Window antenna coil connector B 2 2 Middle of rear shelf
2
1
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

WIRE HARNESS
22-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:45 61S5N000_220_0042
Engine Oil Pressure Switch Sub-harness

Engine oil pressure switch 2 1 Middle of engine compartment
C105 1 1 Middle of engine compartment Engine wire harness (see
page 22-14)
Transmission Range Switch Sub-harness (A/T)

Transmission range switch 3 10 Transmission housing
C106 4 10 Transmission housing Engine wire harness (see
page 22-14)
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

SUB-HARNESS 1
4
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 2

SUB-HARNESS
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-41

00/10/26 16:42:45 61S5N000_220_0043

OPDS Unit Harness
OPDS unit 4 8 In front passenger’s seat
C555 1 4 Under front passenger’s seat Floor wire harness (see page
22-30)
Floor Wire Harness (SRS branch)

Driver’s seat belt buckle tensioner 9 4 Under driver’s seat
Driver’s seat belt tensioner 7 2 Left B-pillar
Driver’s side airbag inflator 10 2 Under driver’s seat
Driver’s side impact sensor 8 2 Left side of floor
Front passenger’s seat belt buckle 2 4 Under front passenger’s seat
tensioner
Front passenger’s seat belt tensioner 5 2 Right B-pillar
Front passenger’s side airbag inflator 3 2 Under front passenger’s seat
Front passenger’s side impact sensor 6 2 Right side of floor
1
2
3
4
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS OPDS UNIT HARNESS
10
9
7
22-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:45 61S5N000_220_0044
A/C Wire Harness

Air mix control motor 1 7 Under middle of dash
Blower motor 4 2 Under right side of dash
Evaporator temperature sensor 9 2 Under middle of dash
Mode control motor 2 7 Under right side of dash
Power transistor 5 4 Under right side of dash
Recirculation control motor 3 7 Under right side of dash
(see page 22-26)
(see page 22-26)
3 4
A/C WIRE HARNESS
6
8
7
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-43

00/10/26 16:42:46 61S5N000_220_0045
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index

Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref Terminal Connects to

A 14 2 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-18)
A/C compressor clutch relay 2 4
B 13 5 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-18)
Blower motor relay 4 4
C 15 12 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-18)
Condenser fan relay 9 4
D 12 14 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-18)
E 11 7 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-18)
Horn relay 10 4
Headlight relay 1 5 4
Radiator fan relay 1 4
Rear window defogger relay 3 4
T1 (Battery) 8 Engine wire harness (see page 22-14)
T101 (Alternator) 7 Engine wire harness (see page 22-14)
1 2 3 4 5 11 12 13
10
6
8 7 15 14
(View of front side) (View of back side)
22-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:46 61S5N000_220_0046
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref Terminal Connects to

A 2 5 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-22)
B 3 6 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-22)
C 1 14 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-22)
D 4 12 ECM/PCM wire harness (see page 22-24)
E 5 13 ECM/PCM wire harness (see page 22-24)
F 19 12 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-18)
G 9 10 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-18)
H 8 3 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-18)
I 20 5 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-18)
J 21 8 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-18)
K 23 17 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-26)
L 24 10 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-26)
M 22 12 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-26)
N 27 6 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-26)
O 26 12 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-26)
P 7 18 Floor wire harness (see page 22-30)
Q 6 8 Floor wire harness (see page 22-30)
R 10 6 ECM/PCM wire harness (see page 22-24)
Power window relay 12 4
S 25 2 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-22)
Starter cut relay 14 4
T 18 3 Multiplex control unit service check connector
Taillight relay 13 4
Turn signal/hazard relay 11 3
U 15 1 Optional connector
V 16 4 Optional connector
W (Memory erase signal (MES) 17 2 Floor wire harness (see page 22-30)
connector)
X 28 8 (Plugs directly into the multiplex control unit)
Y 29 13 (Plugs directly into the multiplex control unit)
2 24
1 3 25
23
22
26
21 4
5
20 6
7 27
19 8
9
18
10
17
16
11
15
14 13 12 29 28
(View of front side) (View of back side)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-45

00/10/26 16:42:46 61S5N000_220_0047
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index

Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected

Number
1 20 A BLU/YEL Condenser fan motor
BLU/RED A/C compressor clutch
2 15 A WHT/GRN Dash lights, Front parking lights, Heater control panel, License plate lights,
Taillights
3 7.5 A WHT/BLU Ceiling light, Spotlights, Trunk light
4 20 A BLU/BLK Radiator fan motor
5 10 A WHT/BLK Turn signal/hazard relay, Turn signal lights
6 15 A WHT/BLK CKP sensor, ECM/PCM, Injectors, IAC valve, Immobilizer control unit-
receiver, PGM-FI main relay 1 and 2, TDC sensor
7 15 A WHT/GRN Horn, Brake lights, Brake signals (to ABS modulator unit, Cruise control
unit, ECM/PCM, Multiplex control unit)
8 20 A WHT/GRN ABS modulator unit
9 10 A WHT/RED Data link connector (DLC), Gauge assembly, Immobilizer control unit-
receiver, Keyless receiver unit, Multiplex control unit, Security control unit,
Audio unit
10 40 A WHT/RED ABS modulator unit
11 30 A BLK Rear window defogger (via window antenna coil)
12 40 A BLU/WHT Blower motor
13 40 A WHT/BLK No. 7 fuse (in the under-dash fuse/relay box), Power window relay
14 40 A WHT/RED No. 2, 3, 5, 15 and 16 fuses (in the under-dash fuse/relay box)
15 15 A RED/YEL Daytime running lights control unit, High beam indicator light, Left
headlight
16 20 A WHT Multiplex control unit
17 15 A RED Daytime running lights control unit, Right headlight
18 ――― ――― Not used
19 80 A ――― Battery, Power distribution
20 40 A WHT Ignition switch (BAT)
11
14
1 2 3 15 16 17
12 13
4 5 6 ●
7 8 9 ● ●
10
● ●
19
18 20
●: Spare fuse
22-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:47 61S5N000_220_0048
Fuse Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected

Number
1 15 A BLK/WHT Ignition coils
2 ――― ――― Not used
3 10 A RED/BLU Daytime running lights control unit, Multiplex control unit
4 10 A BLK/ORN Alternator, Cruise control unit, ELD unit, EVAP bypass solenoid valve, EVAP
canister purge valve, EVAP canister vent shut valve, Primary and
secondary HO2S, Vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
5 ――― ――― Not used
6 7.5 A YEL/GRN Moonroof open and close relays, Power window relay
7 20 A GRN Moonroof motor
8 7.5 A YEL/RED Audio unit, Multiplex control unit
9 10 A GRN OPDS unit
10 7.5 A YEL A/T reverse relay, Back-up lights, Gauge assembly, Keyless receiver unit,
Multiplex control unit, Security control unit, Shift lock solenoid
11 7.5 A BLK/ORN ABS modulator unit (IG2)
12 7.5 A YEL/RED Daytime running lights control unit
13 10 A PNK SRS unit
14 10 A BLK/YEL A/C compressor fan relay, Climate control unit, Condenser fan relay,
Blower motor relay, Power mirror actuators, Radiator fan relay,
Recirculation control motor, Rear window defogger relay, Seat heater main
relay
15 10 A WHT Security control unit
16 20 A RED/BLK Driver’s seat heater, Front passenger’s seat heater
17 15 A BLK/YEL ECM/PCM, SRS unit
18 15 A YEL/GRN Accessory power socket
19 7.5 A YEL/BLK Turn signal/hazard relay
20 20 A GRN/BLK Multiplex control unit, Windshield washer motor, Windshield wiper motor
21 ――― ――― Not used
22 20 A GRN/BLK Front passenger’s power window motor
23 20 A GRN/WHT Driver’s power window motor
24 20 A YEL/RED Left rear power window motor
25 20 A YEL/BLU Right rear power window motor
21 22 23 24 25
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-47

00/10/26 16:42:47 61S5N000_220_0049
Ground Distribution
Ground to Components Index

Ground Component or circuit grounded
G1 Battery, Transmission housing
G2 Engine
G101 ECM/PCM (PG is BLK; LG is BRN/YEL)
BLK: EGR valve, IAC valve, Ignition coils, Radiator fan switch, Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
(A/T), Transmission range switch (A/T)
BRN/YEL: ECM/PCM, CKP sensor, TDC sensor
Shielding between the ECM/PCM and these components have BRN/YEL wires: Knock sensor, Primary
and secondary HO2S, Mainshaft speed sensor (A/T), Countershaft speed sensor (A/T)
G201 Blower motor relay, Condenser fan motor, Multiplex control unit, Power steering pressure (PSP)
switch, Radiator fan motor, Right front parking light, Right front turn signal light
G301 Brake fluid level switch, Cruise control actuator, Left front parking light, Left front turn signal light,
Park pin switch (A/T), Power window relay, Turn signal/hazard relay, Windshield washer motor,
Windshield wiper motor
G302 ABS modulator unit
G401 Combination light switch, Clutch interlock switch, Clutch pedal position switch (for cruise control),
Ignition key switch, Ignition key interlock solenoid, Wiper/washer switch
G402 Left and right airbag sensors, SRS unit
G451 A/T shift lock solenoid, Data link connector (DLC), Seat heater main relay, Driver’s and front
passenger’s seat heater
G501 Cruise control main switch, Cruise control unit, Driver’s door lock knob switch, Driver’s door lock
switch, Driver’s door lock key cylinder switch, Gauge assembly, Left power mirror defogger,
Moonroof open and close relays, Moonroof switch, Multiplex control unit, Power mirror switch,
Power window master switch, Spotlights (With moonroof)
G502 Accessory power socket, Front Passenger’s door lock knob switch, Front Pssenger’s door lock key
cylinder switch, Heater control panel, Keyless receiver unit, Multiplex control unit, Power transistor,
Right power mirror defogger, Security control unit
G503 Audio unit
G551 Fuel gauge sending unit, Fuel pump, Memory erase signal (MES) connector, Left seat belt switch,
OPDS unit, Right seat belt switch
G601 Back-up lights, High mount brake light, License plate lights, Rear turn signal lights, Taillights, Trunk
latch switch
22-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:47 61S5N000_220_0050
Removal and Installation

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Remove the mounting bolt and slide the under-
SRS component locations (see page 23-10), and dash fuse/relay box (A) down from the bracket (B).
section before performing repairs or service. 6. Disconnect the back side from connectors from the
back of the under-dash fuse/relay box, and remove
Removal the fuse/relay box.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, NOTE: The SRS connector is a spring-loaded lock
then write down the frequencies for the radio’s type (see page 23-15).
preset buttons.
Installation
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then
disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 1. Install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse
minutes. order of removal and connect all connectors to the
3. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20-
67). 2. Install the dashboard lower cover.
4. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the 3. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable
under-dash fuse/relay box. to the battery.

5. Confirm that all systems work properly.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-49

00/10/26 16:42:48 61S5N000_220_0051
Battery
Battery Test
A battery can explode if you do not follow the

proper procedure, causing serious injury to anyone
nearby. Follow all procedures carefully and keep
sparks and open flames away from the battery.
Use either a JCI or Bear ARBST tester, and follow the

manufacturer’s procedures. If you don’t have one of
these computerized testers, follow this conventional
test procedure:
1. Be sure the temperature of the electrolyte is

between 70°F (21°C) and 100°F (38°C).
2. Inspect the battery case for cracks or leaks.
• If the case is damaged, replace the battery.

• If the case looks OK, go to step 3.
3. Check the indicator EYE.
• If the EYE indicates the battery is charged, go to

step 4.
• If the EYE indicates a low charge, go to step 7.
4. Apply a 300 amp load for 15 seconds to remove the

surface charge.
5. Wait 15 seconds, then apply a test load of 280 amps

for 15 seconds.
6. Record battery voltage.
• If voltage is above 9.6 volts, the battery is OK.

• If voltage is below 9.6 volts, go to step 7.
7. Charge the battery on High (40 amps) until the EYE

shows the battery is charged, plus an additional 30
minutes. If the battery charge is very low, it may be
necessary to bypass the charger’s polarity
protection circuitry.
• If the EYE indicates the battery is charged within

3 hours, the battery is OK.
• If the EYE indicates the battery is not charged
within 3 hours, replace the battery.
22-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:48 61S5N000_220_0052
Relays
Power Relay Test

Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the type 1:
test listed for it.
NOTE: See page 22-85 for the turn signal/hazard relay

input test.
1
Relay Test
A/C compressor clutch relay Normally-open 2
Condensor fan relay type A
Headlight relay 1
Horn relay
Power window relay
Radiator fan relay type 2:
Reverse relay
Starter cut relay
Seat heater relay
Security horn relay
1
Taillight relay
Daytime running lights relay
PGM-FI main relay 1 2
PGM-FI main relay 2
Blower motor relay Normally-open
Rear window defogger relay type B
3 4
Moonroof close relay Five terminal
Moonroof open relay type
Low beam cut relay PGMFI main relay 1
PGMFI main relay 2
Normally-open type A: type 1:
Check for continuity between the terminals.
• There should be continuity between the No. 1 and 1

No. 2 terminals when power and ground are
connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals.
• There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and 2
No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected.
2 3 3 4
type 2:
1 4
3 4
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-51

00/10/26 16:42:48 61S5N000_220_0053
Relays
Power Relay Test (cont’d)

Normally-open type B: Five-terminal type
Check for continuity between the terminals. Check for continuity between the terminals.
• There should be continuity between the No. 1 and • There should be continuity between the No. 1 and
No. 3 terminals when power and ground are No. 2 terminals when power and ground are
connected to the No. 2 and No. 4 terminals. connected to the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals.
• There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and • There should be continuity between the No. 1 and
No. 3 terminals when power is disconnected. No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected.
1 2
3 2 4
5 1
3 4
Rear window defogger relay
1
2
1 2
5
3 4 3
4
Blower motor relay
type 1:
1
2
3 4
type 2:
1 2
3 4
22-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:49 61S5N000_220_0054
Ignition Switch
Test
SRS component locations (see page 23-10), and
section before performing repairs or servicing.
1. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20-

67)
2. Disconnect the 5P connector from the under-dash

fuse/relay box.
WHT WHT/RED
Wire side of
female terminals
BLK/YEL
BLK/WHT
BLK/RED

Terminal WHT/ BLK/ BLK/ BLK/

RED WHT YEL RED WHT
Position (ACC) (BAT) (IG1) (IG2) (ST)
O (LOCK)
I (ACC)
II (ON)
III (START)
4. If the continuity checks do not agree with the table,

replace the steering lock assembly (see page 17-30).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-53

00/10/26 16:42:51 61S5N000_220_0055
Gauges
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

page 19-9
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
Troubleshooting, page 22-63 FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
Replacement, page 22-65 page 11-140
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
Gauge Bulb Replacement, page 22-61
Coolant Temperature Gauge
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH page 19-9
page 8-4
22-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:42:52 61S5N000_220_0056
B1 B10 A1 A10
B11 B22 A11 A22
CONNECTOR B CONNECTOR A
(green) (blue)
COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE A/T GEAR POSITION

Troubleshooting, page 22-63 INDICATOR
FUEL GAUGE
Test, page 11-140
TACHOMETER ODO/TRIP METER SPEEDOMETER

Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-55

00/10/26 16:42:55 61S5N000_220_0057
Gauges
Circuit Diagram
22-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:00 61S5N000_220_0058
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-57

00/10/26 16:43:02 61S5N000_220_0059
Gauges
Circuit Diagram (cont’d)
22-58 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:04 61S5N000_220_0060
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-59

00/10/26 16:43:07 61S5N000_220_0061
Gauges
22-60 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:07 61S5N000_220_0062
Gauge Bulb Replacement
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR LIGHT (1.4 W)
GAUGE LIGHT (1.4 W) LEFT TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR LIGHT (1.4 W)
GAUGE LIGHT (1.4 W)

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.4 W)
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.4 W)
GAUGE LIGHT (1.4 W)

GAUGE LIGHT (1.4 W)
GAUGE LIGHT (1.4 W)
A/T GEAR POSITION

LCD BACK LIGHT INDICATOR LIGHT (1.12 W x 10)
(1.4 W)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHT (1.4 W)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-61

00/10/26 16:43:07 61S5N000_220_0063
Gauges
Gauge Assembly Replacement Coolant Temperature Gauge

Troubleshooting
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-67),
then remove the upper column cover (see page 17-
27). Before testing, check the No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box and No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
2. Remove the screws from the gauge assembly (B). dash fuse/relay box.
1. Start the engine and check the Malfunction

Indicator Lamp (MIL).
Does the MIL come on?

C
B
YES−Troubleshooting the DTC (see page 11-98),
and recheck.
NO−Go to step 2.
2. Check the multiplex control unit DTC (see page 22-

173).
A
Is there a DT C?
3. Disconnect the connectors (C), and remove the YES−Troubleshooting the DTC (see page 22-173),
gauge assembly. and recheck.
4. Install the gauge assembly in the reverse order of NO−Inspect the connector and socket terminals of
removal. the gauge assembly connectors. If the terminals
look OK, replace the gauge assembly
22-62 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:08 61S5N000_220_0064
Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit Troubleshooting

Special Tools Required: 5. Connect the WHT test harness clip (B) to the
Test Harness 07LAJ-PT3020A positive probe of a voltmeter, and connect the RED
test harness clip (C) to the negative probe.
Before testing, inspect the No. 4 (10A) and No. 10 (7.5A)
fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
07LAJ-PT3020A
1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the vehicle
B
speed sensor (VSS) (A). C
07LAJ-PT3020A
B
C
D
A
YES−Go to step 7.
2. Connect the test harness only to the engine wire
harness. NO−Repair open in the BLK/YEL wire between the
VSS and the under-dash fuse/relay box.
3. Connect the RED test harness clip (B) to the positive
prove of an ohmmeter. Cover the white (C) and 7. Disconnect the WHT test harness clip (B).
green (D) test harness with protective tape (E).
8. Connect the GRN test harness clip (D) to the
4. Check for continuity between the RED test harness positive probe of a voltmeter.
clip and body ground.
Is there continuity? 07LAJ-PT3020A
YES−Go to step 5. D
NO−Repair open in the BLK wire between the VSS

and G101.
Is there 5 V or more?
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Repair short in the BLU/WHT wire between

the VSS and the cruise control unit, or the ECM/
PCM.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-63

00/10/26 16:43:08 61S5N000_220_0065
Gauges
Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Disconnect the 22P connector ‘‘A’’ from the gauge
assembly.
10. Connect the other test harness connector (A) to the
VSS (B). GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR A (22P)
07LAJ-PT3020A
BLU/WHT
B
15. Touch a probe to the BLU/WHT wire, and connect it
to body ground through a voltmeter.
securely supported. 16. Slowly rotate one wheel with the other wheel
blocked.
12. Put the vehicle in neutral with the ignition switch
ON (II). Does the voltmeter indicate pulsing voltage?
13. Slowly rotate one wheel with the other wheel YES−Replace the speedometer assembly.
blocked.
NO−Repair open in the BLU/WHT wire between
Does voltage pulse f rom 0 to about 5 V or more? the VSS and the speedometer.
NO−Replace the VSS.
22-64 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:08 61S5N000_220_0066
VSS Replacement
1. Remove the intake resonator.
2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the vehicle

speed sensor (VSS) (B).
3. Remove the mounting bolt, then remove the VSS.
4. Install the VSS in the reverse order of removal.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-65

00/10/26 16:43:12 61S5N000_220_0067
Exterior Lights
UNDER-HOOD HEADLIGHT RELAY 1

FUSE/RELAY BOX Test, page 22-51
HEADLIGHT RELAY 2
Test, page 22-51
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION

SWITCH
Test, page 22-80
HEADLIGHTS Adjustment, page 19-5
Bulb Replacement, page 22-77 FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS
PARKING LIGHT
Bulb Replacement, page 22-77
HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS

INNER TAILLIGHT
BACK-UP LIGHT
TAILLIGHTS and BRAKE LIGHTS
REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
22-66 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:13 61S5N000_220_0068
DASH LIGHTS BRIGHTNESS CONTROLLER
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHT

DRL INDICATOR LIGHT

LOW BEAM CUT RELAY
Wire colors: RED/WHT, RED/BLK,
RED/YEL and RED/BLU
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS RELAY

Wire colors: RED, RED/YEL,
RED/BLK and RED/BLU

COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT

Input Test, page 22-72
TAILLIGHT RELAY
Test, page 22-51
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-67

00/10/26 16:43:16 61S5N000_220_0069
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram
22-68 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:20 61S5N000_220_0070
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-69

00/10/26 16:43:21 61S5N000_220_0071
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Brake Lights
22-70 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:24 61S5N000_220_0072
Circuit Diagram - Back-up Lights
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-71

00/10/26 16:43:24 61S5N000_220_0073
Exterior Lights
Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test

The DRL indicator light in the gauge assembly will turn on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) with the
headlight switch off and the parking brake set. It should go off you turn on the headlight switch or release the parking
brake. If it comes on at any other time, do the control unit input test.
NOTE: When the daytime running lights are on, the high beam indicator light will glow at half intensity.
1. Remove the driver’s dashboard lower cover (see page 20-67).
2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the daytime running lights control unit (B).
RED/BLU BLK GRN/ORN

RED/BLU GRN/BLK GRN/BLK
BLK WHT/BLU RED/BLK GRN/RED

BLU/RED RED/YEL YEL/RED
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
22-72 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:24 61S5N000_220_0074
4. Make these input tests at the connector.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
2 RED/BLU Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 14 (40 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
• Blown No. 3 (10 A) fuse in the
12 YEL/RED Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 12 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
4 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
conditions There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
7 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
conditions There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
10 RED/YEL Combination Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 15 (15 A) fuse in the
light switch ON There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
( ) • Faulty headlight relay 2
• Faulty combination light switch
1 RED/BLU Combination Connect a jumper wire between • Blown bulb
light switch ON No. 3 and No. 1 terminals • Faulty low beam cut relay
( ), and Both headlights (HIGH) and • Faulty combination light switch
dimmer switch high beam indicator light • Poor ground (G401)
in HIGH should come on. • An open in the wire
11 RED/BLK Combination Connect a jumper wire between • Blown bulb
light switch ON No. 5 and No. 11 terminals. • Faulty combination light switch
( ), and Right headlight (HIGH) should • Poor ground (G401)
dimmer switch come on. • An open in the wire
in HIGH
3 GRN/BLK Combination Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty combination light switch
5 light switch ON There should be continuity. • Poor ground (G401)
( ), and • An open in the wire
dimmer switch
in HIGH
6 GRN/ORN Parking brake Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty parking brake switch
lever pulled There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
8 BLU/RED Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty headlight relays
conditions There should be battery voltage. • An open in the wire
9 WHT/BLU Ignition switch Attach to ground: • Faulty DRL indicator
ON (II) The DRL indicator light should • An open in the wire
come on.
13 GRN/RED Ignition switch Attach to ground: • Faulty brake system indicator
ON (II) The brake system light should • An open in the wire
come on.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-73

00/10/26 16:43:24 61S5N000_220_0075
Exterior Lights
Headlight Adjustment
2. Park the vehicle in front of a wall or a screen (A).
A
Headlights become very hot in use; do not touch
them or any attaching hardware immediately after 7.5 m (25 ft)
they have been turned off.
Before adjusting the headlights:

• Park the vehicle on a level surface.
• Make sure the tire pressures are correct.
• The driver or someone who weighs the same should
sit in the driver’s seat.
1. Clean the outer lens so that you can see the center
of the headlights (A).
3. Open the hood.
22-74 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:25 61S5N000_220_0076
Headlight Replacement
4. Turn the low beams on. 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-90).
5. Determine if the headlights are aimed properly. 2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the headlight
(B).
Vertical adjustment:
A
Measure the height of the headlights (A). The lights
should reflect 52 mm (2.1 in.) below (B) headlight
height.
A
B
6. If necessary, adjust the headlights to local C

requirements by turning the vertical adjuster.
3. Remove the five mounting bolts, then remove the
corner upper beam (C) and headlight assembly.
4. Install the headlight in the reverse order of removal.
5. After replacement, adjust the headlights to local

requirements.
Do not adjust.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-75

00/10/26 16:43:25 61S5N000_220_0077
Exterior Lights
Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement

1. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20-67).
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17-27).
3. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B).
4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch.
5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the
tables.
– If there is no continuity, replace the switch.
Light switch:
Terminal
4 6 7 12 13
Position
OFF
Headlight switch
LOW
HIGH
OFF
Passing switch
ON
Turn signal switch:

Terminal
2 10 11
Position
LEFT
NEUTRAL
RIGHT
22-76 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:25 61S5N000_220_0078
Bulb Replacement
Headlight: Parking Light:
1. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the headlight. 1. Remove the inner fender (see page 20-106).
Headlight (high/low): 60/55 W 2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the light.
Parking light: 5 W
D
B
A 3. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45° counterclockwise to

remove it from the headlight housing.
2. Remove the rubber cover (B).
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
3. Pull the retaining spring (C) away from the bulb (D),
then remove the bulb.
4. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure the notches in the bulb align with the
tabs in the headlight.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-77

00/10/26 16:43:26 61S5N000_220_0079
Exterior Lights
Front Turn Signal Lights License Plate Lights Replacement

Replacement
1. Push the license plate light to right side and pull it
out.
1. Remove the bolt from the front turn signal light (A).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the light.
Front Turn Signal Light: 21 W
License Plate Light: 5 W x 2
A
C
D
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the light. B
3. Turn the bulb socket (C) 45 ° counterclockwise to 3. Take the lens (B) off, then remove the bulb (C) from
remove it from the housing. the housing (D).
4. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. 4. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
22-78 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:26 61S5N000_220_0080
Taillight Replacement
Taillights: Inner Taillights:
1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-91). 1. Open the trunk lid and disconnect the connectors
(A) from the inner taillight (B).
2. Remove the trunk side trim panel (see page 20-59).
Back-up Light: 21 W
3. Open the trunk lid and disconnect the connectors Inner Taillight: 5W
(A) from the taillight (B).
B
Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W
Turn Signal Light: 21 W
2. Turn the bulb socket 45° counterclockwise to

remove the bulb socket.
B
3. Remove the mounting nuts, then remove the
taillight.
4. Turn the bulb socket 45° counterclockwise to 4. Install the taillight and note these item:
remove the bulb socket.
• Inspect the gasket; replace it if it is distorted or
5. Remove the mounting nuts and bolts, then remove stays compressed.
the taillight. • Tighten the taillight mounting nuts to 4.9 N·m
(0.5 kgf·m, 3.6 lbf·ft)
6. Install the taillight and note these item: • After installing the taillights, run water over them
to make sure they do not leak.
• Inspect the gasket; replace it if it is distorted or
stays compressed.
• Tighten the taillight mounting nuts to 4.9 N·m
(0.5 kgf·m, 3.6 lbf·ft)
• After installing the taillights, run water over them
to make sure they do not leak.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-79

00/10/26 16:43:26 61S5N000_220_0081
Exterior Lights
High Mount Brake Light Brake Pedal Position Switch Test

Replacement
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake
pedal position switch (B).
1. Open the trunk lid and disconnect the 2P
connectors (A) from the high mount brake light (B).
High Mount Brake Light: 21 W
B
B

terminals.
2. Carefully remove the rear shelf (see page 20-58) • There should be continuity when the brake pedal
and high mount brake light. is pressed.
• There should be no continuity when the brake
3. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. pedal is released.

terminals (with cruise control).
• There should be no continuity when the brake

pedal is pressed.
• There should be continuity when the brake pedal
is released.
4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust

the pedal height (see page 19-5).
22-80 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:27 61S5N000_220_0082
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher
COMBINATION LIGHT/TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Test, page 22-76
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR LIGHTS
(In the gauge assembly) HAZARD WARNING SWITCH
Bulb Replacement, page 22-61 Test, page 22-84
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-81

00/10/26 16:43:31 61S5N000_220_0083
Circuit Diagram
22-82 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:31 61S5N000_220_0084
Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test

1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B).
2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it.
Cavity Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
1 Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
2 Ignition switch ON (II) Connect No. 2 terminal to No. 3 • Poor ground (G201, G301, G501,
and turn signal switch terminal: G601)
in Right or Left position Right or left turn signal lights • Faulty turn signal switch
should come on. • An open in the wire
Hazard warning switch Connect No. 2 terminal to No. 3 • Poor ground (G201, G301, G501,
ON terminal: G601)
Hazard warning lights should • Faulty hazard warning switch
come on. • An open in the wire
3 Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 19 (7.5 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty hazard warning switch
Hazard warning switch Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 5 (10 A) fuse in the
ON There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
• Faulty hazard warning switch
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-83

00/10/26 16:43:31 61S5N000_220_0085
Hazard Warning Switch Test

1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-69).
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the hazard

warning switch (B).
A
B
3. Push out the hazard warning switch from behind

the center panel (C).

Terminal
5 6 1 2 3 4 7 10
Position
OFF
ON
22-84 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:33 61S5N000_220_0086
Entry Light Control System
FRONT CEILING LIGHT/SPOTLIGHT (With moonroof)

Test, page 22-93
IGNITION KEY SWITCH

Test, page 22-87
IGNITION KEY LIGHT
Test, page 22-87
FRONT CEILING LIGHT (Without moonroof)
Test, page 22-94
REAR CEILING LIGHT (With moonroof)

Test, page 22-93
FRONT PASSENGER’S DOOR SWITCH
RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH
DRIVER’S DOOR SWITCH
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-85

00/10/26 16:43:36 61S5N000_220_0087
Circuit Diagram
22-86 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:37 61S5N000_220_0088
Ignition Key Switch Test Ignition Key Light Test

NOTE: For more key-in beeper information, refer to the 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower
circuit diagram (see page 22-86) and input test (see covers (see page 17-27).
page 22-88).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector.
When the ignition key is not removed, the key-in beeper
in the driver’s multiplex control unit senses ground
through the closed ignition key switch. When you open
the driver’s door, the beeper circuit senses ground
through the closed door switch.
1. Remove the steering column upper and lower

covers (see page 17-27).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector.
3. The LED should come on when power is connected

to the No. 6 terminal and ground is connected to
No. 5 terminal.

terminals.
• There should be continuity with the key in the

ignition switch.
• There should be no continuity with the key
removed.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-87

00/10/26 16:43:37 61S5N000_220_0089

1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-173).
2. Remove the dashboard lower cover.
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors.
NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR K (17P)

BLU/ORN
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR O (12P)
GRN/RED
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR P (18P)
RED
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (8P)
GRN/WHT
GRN LT GRN/RED
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR X (8P)
RED/WHT WHT/BLK
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Y (13P)
YEL/RED
22-88 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:37 61S5N000_220_0090
5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5.
K2 BLU/ORN Under all conditions Check for continuity between the K2 • An open in the wire
terminal and the keyless receiver
unit 5P connector No. 2 terminal:
O7 GRN/RED Ceiling light switch in Attach to ground: • Blown No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood
middle position. Ceiling light(s) should come on. fuse/relay box
• Blown bulb
• Faulty ceiling light
X8 WHT/BLK Under all conditions Attach to ground: • Blown No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood
Ignition key light should come on. fuse/relay box
• Faulty ignition key light
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make sure these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-
dash fuse/relay box
• If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly.
P18 RED Trunk lid open Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G601)
There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty trunk latch switch
Trunk lid closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty trunk latch switch
There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
Q2 GRN/WHT Left (right) rear door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left (right) rear door switch
open There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
Left (right) rear door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left (right) rear door switch
closed There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
Q3 GRN Driver’s door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver’s door switch
There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
Driver’s door closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver’s door switch
Q4 LT GRN/ Front passenger’s Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger’s door switch
RED door open There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
Front passenger’s Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger’s door switch
door closed There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
X5 RED/WHT Ignition key inserted Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
into the ignition There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty ignition key switch
switch • An open in the wire
Ignition key removed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
from the ignition There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
switch
Y8 YEL/RED Driver’s door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
knob switch locked There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty driver’s door lock knob switch
Driver’s door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver’s door lock knob switch
knob switch unlocked There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-89

00/10/26 16:43:40 61S5N000_220_0091
Interior Lights
CEILING LIGHT/SPOTLIGHT (With moonroof)

Test, page 22-93
SPOTLIGHT (Without moonroof)
Test, page 22-94
CEILING LIGHT (Without moonroof)

Test, page 22-94
REAR CEILING (With moonroof)

Test, page 22-93
TRUNK LIGHT
Test, page 22-95
Replacement, page 22-95 TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH
Latch Switch Test, page 22-95
22-90 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:41 61S5N000_220_0092
Circuit Diagram - With Moonroof
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-91

00/10/26 16:43:43 61S5N000_220_0093
Interior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Without Moonroof
22-92 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:43 61S5N000_220_0094
Ceiling Light/Spotlights Test/Replacement - With Moonroof

1. Turn the ceiling light/spotlights switches OFF. 5. Check the bulbs. If the bulbs are OK, check for
continuity between the terminals in each switch
2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small position according to the table.
screwdriver.
Terminal
1 3 4
Ceiling Light: 5 W Position
Spotlight: 5Wx2
OFF
CEILING LIGHT
MIDDLE
ON
ON
R
OFF
C SPOTLIGHTS
ON
L
OFF
6. When installing the ceiling/spotlights housing, if

B the threads in the ET screw are worn out, use an
oversized ET screw made specifically for this
application.
5 x 1.0 mm
3. Remove the two screws and the housing (B).
4. Disconnect the 4P connector (C) from the housing.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-93

00/10/26 16:43:43 61S5N000_220_0095
Interior Lights
Spotlights Test/Replacement - Ceiling Light Test/Replacement

Without Moonroof
1. Turn the light switch OFF.
1. Turn the light switch OFF. 2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small
screwdriver.
2. Carefully pry off the lenses (A) with a small
screwdriver. Ceiling Light: 8 W
Spotlight: 8 W x 2
B
B
C
C
5 x 1.0 mm
5 x 1.0 mm
A A
3. Remove the two mounting screws. 3. Remove the two mounting screws.
4. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the housing 4. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) from the housing
(C). (C).
5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table. switch position according to the table.
Terminal Terminal
1 2 1 2 3
Position Position
ON OFF
LEFT
OFF
MIDDLE
ON
RIGHT
OFF ON
6. When installing the spotlights housing, if the 6. When installing the ceiling light housing, if the
threads in the ET screw are worn out, use an threads in the ET screw are worn out, use an
oversized ET screw made specifically for this oversized ET screw made specifically for this
application. application.
22-94 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:44 61S5N000_220_0096
Trunk Light Test/Replacement Trunk Lid Latch Switch Test

1. Open the trunk lid. 1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Carefully pry out the trunk light (A). 2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the trunk lid
latch (B).
Trunk Light: 5 W

terminals.
(＋ ) (−)
• There should be continuity with the trunk lid
open.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the light. • There should be no continuity with the trunk lid
closed.
4. Check for continuity between the No. 1 (＋) and
No. 2 (−) terminals. There should be continuity.
If there is no continuity, check the bulb. If the bulb
is OK, replace the trunk light.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-95

00/10/26 16:43:45 61S5N000_220_0097
Stereo Sound System
WINDOW ANTENNA AUDIO UNIT

Test, page 22-100 Removal/Installation, page 22-98
Repair, page 22-100 Connector Terminals, page 22-99
SUB ANTENNA
LEAD
FRONT PASSENGER’S
DOOR SPEAKER
DRIVER’S DOOR SPEAKER

LEFT REAR SPEAKER ANTENNA LEAD

RIGHT REAR SPEAKER

22-96 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:48 61S5N000_220_0098
Circuit Diagram
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-97

00/10/26 16:43:48 61S5N000_220_0099
Stereo Sound System
Audio Unit Removal/Installation

NOTE: 5. Remove the heater control panel (see page 21-24).
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related 6. Remove the four mounting bolts and the audio unit
parts. from the radio brackets.
preset buttons.
2. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (see

page 20-69).
3. Remove the two mounting bolts, then remove the

center panel.
B
7. Install the audio unit in the reverse order of

• Make sure the audio unit and A/C connectors are

plugged in properly, and the antenna lead is
C connected properly.
4. Disconnect the audio connector (A), antenna lead

(B) and the A/C connectors (C), then remove the
audio unit (D).
22-98 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:49 61S5N000_220_0100
Audio Unit Connector Replacement

Cavity Wire Connects to
1 ――― Not used
2 YEL/RED ACC (Main stereo power supply)
4 RED/WHT Security input
5 PNK Right rear speaker (＋)
6 BLU/WHT Left rear speaker (＋)
7 GRN/YEL Front passenger’s door speaker (＋)
8 GRN/BLK Driver’s door speaker (＋)
9 RED/BLK Lights-on signal
10 WHT/RED Constant power
15 BLU/YEL Right rear speaker (−)
16 BLU/BLK Left rear speaker (−)
17 GRY/RED Front passenger’s door speaker (−)
18 LT GRN Driver’s door speaker (−)
19 RED Dash lights brightness controller
20 BLK Ground (G503)
AUDIO UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-99

00/10/26 16:43:49 61S5N000_220_0101
Stereo Sound System
Window Antenna Test Window Antenna Repair

1. Wrap aluminum foil (A) around the tip of the tester NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section
probe (B) as shown. must be no longer than 1 inch.
A
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)
with fine steel wool, then clean it with alcohol.
A
2. Touch one tester probe to the window antenna

terminal (A), and move the other tester probe along C
the antenna wires to check that continuity exists.
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion
of the window antenna wire (B) with transparent
tape (C).
3. Using a small brush, apply a heavy coat of silver

conductive paint (A) extending about 1/8’’ on both
sides of the break. Allow 30 minutes to dry.
NOTE: Thoroughly mix the paint before use.

A
4. Check for continuity in the repaired wire.
5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it

dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
22-100 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:49 61S5N000_220_0102
Speaker Replacement
Door Speaker: Rear:
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Remove the rear shelf (see page 20-58).
2. Pull the top of the speaker (A) straight out to 2. Remove the three mounting screws, then
release the upper crip, then lift the speaker straight disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the speaker
up to release the lower clips. (B).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B), and remove the

A
speaker.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-101

00/10/26 16:43:50 61S5N000_220_0103
Rear Window Defogger
*:Rear window defogger switch is built into the heater control panel.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX Test, page 22-51
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH*
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

Function Test, page 22-104
Defogger Wire Repair, page 22-104
WINDOW ANTENNA COIL

Test, page 22-105
22-102 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:52 61S5N000_220_0104
Circuit Diagram
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-103

00/10/26 16:43:53 61S5N000_220_0105
Function Test Defogger Wire Repair

NOTE: NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section
• Be careful not to scratch or damage the defogger must be no longer than one inch.
wires with the tester probe.
• Before testing, check the No. 11 (30 A) fuse in the 1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)
under-hood fuse/relay box and No. 14 (10 A) fuse in with fine steel wool, then clean it with alcohol.
the under-dash fuse/relay box. A
1. Check for voltage between the positive terminal (A)

and body ground with the ignition switch and
defogger switch ON.
• If there is no voltage, check for:

– faulty defogger relay. B
– faulty window antenna coil.
– an open in the BLK, BLK/YEL, or YEL/BLK wire.
– faulty the heater control panel.
• If there is battery voltage, go to step 2.
C
B A
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion
of the defogger wire (B) with transparent tape (C).
3. Using a small brush, apply a heavy coat of silver

conductive paint extending about 1/8″on both
sides of the break. Allow 30 minutes to dry.
Thoroughly mix the paint before use.
2. Check for continuity between the negative terminal

(B) and body ground.
If there is no continuity, check for:
• an open in the BLK wire. A
• faulty window antenna coil.
• Poor body ground at the window antenna coil
mounting bolt.
3. Touch the voltmeter positive probe to the halfway

point of each defogger wire, and the negative 4. Check for continuity in the repaired wire.
probe to the negative terminal.
There should be about 6 V with the ignition switch 5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it
and the defogger switch ON. dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
• If the voltage is as specified, the defogger wire is

OK.
• If the voltage is not as specified, repair the
defogger wire.
– If it is more than 6 V, there is a break in the
negative half of the wire.
– If it is less than 6 V, there is a break in the
positive half of the wire.
22-104 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:53 61S5N000_220_0106
Window Antenna Coil Test

1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Disconnect the 1P connector (A) and 2P connector

(B) from the window antenna coil (C).
B A
3. Check for continuity between the terminal B2 and

body ground, and between terminal A1 and B1.
If there is no continuity, go to step 4.
4. Remove the rear shelf (see page 20-58).
5. Loosen the two bolts, and replace the window

antenna coil.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-105

00/10/26 16:43:54 61S5N000_220_0107
Moonroof
MOONROOF SWITCH MOONROOF MOTOR

Test, page 22-108 Test, page 22-108
MOONROOF LIMIT SWITCH

Test, page 22-109
MOONROOF OPEN RELAY

Wire colors: GRN/YEL, GRN,
RED/YEL, BLK and YEL/GRN
Test, page 22-51
MOONROOF CLOSE RELAY
Wire colors: GRN/BLK, GRN,
GRN/WHT, BLK and YEL/GRN
Test, page 22-51
22-106 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:57 61S5N000_220_0108
Circuit Diagram
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-107

00/10/26 16:43:57 61S5N000_220_0109
Moonroof
Switch Test/Replacement Motor Test

1. Remove the driver’s pocket (see page 20-68). 1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-60).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the moonroof 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the moonroof
switch (B), and remove the moonroof switch. motor.
3. Check the motor by connecting power and ground

according to the table.
Terminal
1 2
Position
switch position according to the table. OPEN
CLOSE
Terminal
2 5 1 3 4 6
Position
CLOSE
4. If the motor does not run, replace it.
TILT NOTE: See closing force check (see page 20-55) for
OPEN motor clutch test.
22-108 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:43:58 61S5N000_220_0110
Limit Switch Test

1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-60).
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the moonroof

limit switch.
Terminal side of
male terminals

NOTE: Turn the motor by hand with the wrench.
Terminal
1 2 3 4
Position
TILT
OPEN
CLOSE
4. If there is no continuity, replace the cable assembly.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-109

00/10/26 16:43:59 61S5N000_220_0111
Power Mirrors
POWER MIRRORS
Test, page 22-112
Mirror Actuator Replacement,
page 22-114
POWER MIRROR and

MIRROR DEFOGGER SWITCH
Test, page 22-113
22-110 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:02 61S5N000_220_0112
Circuit Diagram
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-111

00/10/26 16:44:03 61S5N000_220_0113
Power Mirrors
Function Test
1. Remove the driver’s pocket (see page 20-68). Left mirror
2. Remove the power mirror switch (A) from the 7. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the No. 10 terminal,
driver’s pocket. and the No. 5 (or No. 12) terminal to body ground
with jumper wires. The left mirror should tilt down
BLK/YEL GRN/WHT (or swing left) with the ignition switch ON (II).
BLK/YEL RED
• If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing
left), check for an open in the GRN/WHT (or BLU/
WHT) wire between the left mirror and the 13P
Wier side of connector. If the wire is OK, check the left mirror
female terminals
actuator.
WHT/RED
• If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left,
BLK repair the BLU/BLK wire.
RED/BLK RED/YEL
BLU/WHT • If the mirror works properly, check the mirror
ORN BLU/BLK
switch.
B
Right mirror
A
8. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the No. 11 terminal,
and the No. 5 (or No. 13) terminal to body ground
with jumper wires. The right mirror should tilt
down (or swing left) with the ignition switch ON (II).
• If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing
left), check for an open in the GRN/WHT (or WHT/
RED) wire between the right mirror and the 13P
3. Disconnect the 13P connector (B) from the switch. connector.
If the wire is OK, check the right mirror actuator.
4. Choose the appropriate test based on the • If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left,
symptom: repair the RED/YEL wire.
• Both mirrors don’t work, go to step 5. • If the mirror works properly, check the mirror
• Left mirror doesn’t work, go to step 7. switch.
• Right mirror doesn’t work, go to step 8.
• Defogger doesn’t work, go to step 9. Defogger
Both mirrors 9. Connect the No. 1 and No. 8 terminals with a

jumper wire, and check for voltage between the
5. Check for voltage between the No. 2 terminal and No. 4 terminal of the mirror connector and body
body ground with the ignition switch ON (II). ground. There should be battery voltage and both
There should be battery voltage. mirrors should warm up with the ignition switch
• If there is no battery voltage, check for: ON (II).
– blown No. 14 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash • If there is no voltage or neither warms up, check
fuse/relay box. for:
– an open in the BLK/YEL wire. – an open in the BLK/YEL or ORN wire.
• If there is battery voltage, go to step 6. – blown No. 14 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
6. Check for continuity between the No. 6 terminal – poor ground (G501, G502).
and body ground. • If only one fails to warm up, check its defogger.
There should be continuity. • If both warm up, check the defogger switch.
• If there is no continuity, check for:
– an open in the BLK wire.
– poor ground (G501).
• If there is continuity, check both mirrors
individually as described in the next column.
22-112 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:03 61S5N000_220_0114
Power Mirror Switch Test Power Mirror Actuator Test

1. Remove the driver’s pocket (see page 20-68). 1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6).
2. Remove the power mirror switch (A). 2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the power
mirror actuator (B).
B
3. Disconnect the 13P connector (B) from the switch.

Mirror Switch:
Terminal 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and

2 5 6 10 11 12 13
Position ground according to the table.
UP Terminal
6 7 8
Position
DOWN TILT UP
L TILT DOWN
SWING LEFT
LEFT
SWING RIGHT
RIGHT
4. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the
mirror actuator.
UP
Defogger Test:
DOWN
R 5. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4
LEFT terminals of the 8P connector. There should be
continuity.
RIGHT
Defogger Switch:
Terminal
1 8
Position
ON
OFF
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-113

00/10/26 16:44:03 61S5N000_220_0115
Power Mirrors
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement

1. Remove the power mirror (see page 20-28). 5. Remove the three Torx screws (A) from the mirror
housing (B).
2. Carefully remove the mirror holder from the mirror
housing. Gently pull it out by hand (see page 20-29).
3. Disconnect the connector.
4. Remove the rubber seal cover (A), then remove the

two Torx screws from the mirror housing (B).
B 6. Remove the mirror actuator base (A) from the

mirror housing (B).
7. Remove the two Torx screws from the connector.
22-114 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:04 61S5N000_220_0116
8. Insert the terminals into the connector in the

original arrangement as shown below.
Left Right
LT BLU LT BLU LT BLU LT BLU
LT GRN YEL GRY ORN PNK BRN
9. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

Be careful not to break in the mirror holder when
reinstalling it to the actuator.
10. Reinstall the mirror assembly to the door.
11. Operate the power mirror to ensure smooth

operation.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-115

00/10/26 16:44:05 61S5N000_220_0117
Horn
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
HORN RELAY
Test, page 22-51
HORN SWITCH
Test, page 22-118
HORN CABLE REEL

Test, page 22-117 page 23-135
22-116 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:06 61S5N000_220_0118
Circuit Diagram Horn Test/Replacement

2. Disconnect the 1P connector (B), and remove the

horn (A).
3. Test the horn by connecting battery power to the

terminal (A) and grounding to the bracket (B). The
horn should sound.
B
4. If it fails to sound, replace it.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-117

00/10/26 16:44:06 61S5N000_220_0119
Horn
Horn Switch Test

1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17- 4. Remove the driver’s airbag assembly (see page 23-
27). 127).
2. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 5P 5. Disconnect the horn switch positive terminal 1P
connector (A) from the cable reel (B). connector.
6. Check for continuity between the cable reel No.2

terminal (A) and the horn switch positive terminal
(B).
• If there is no continuity, replace the cable reel

(see page 23-135).
• If there is continuity, check the contact between
B the horn plate and contact plate.
A
3. Check for continuity between the cable reel No. 2

terminal and body ground with the horn switch
pushed. There should be continuity. If there is no
continuity, go to step 4.
22-118 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:09 61S5N000_220_0120
Power Windows
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
POWER WINDOW RELAY

Test, page 22-51
FRONT PASSENGER’S
WINDOW MOTOR
Test, page 22-126
RIGHT REAR
WINDOW MOTOR
Test, page 22-126
DRIVER’S WINDOW MOTOR

Test, page 22-125
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH

Test, page 22-124
LEFT REAR WINDOW MOTOR

Test, page 22-126
LEFT REAR WINDOW SWITCH

Test, page 22-126
FRONT PASSENGER’S WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR WINDOW

Test, page 22-126 SWITCH
Replacement, page 22-126 Test, page 22-126
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-119

00/10/26 16:44:12 61S5N000_220_0121
Power Windows
Circuit Diagram
22-120 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:16 61S5N000_220_0122
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-121

00/10/26 16:44:16 61S5N000_220_0123
Power Windows
Master Switch Input Test

NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch, and it only controls the driver’s
window operations.
1. Remove the door grip cover (see page 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 20P connector (A) from the master switch (B).
A B
GRN/BLK BLK RED/BLK

BLU/RED BLU/WHT RED/YEL BLK
Wire side of
female terminals
YEL/BLU GRN/WHT YEL/RED ORN

BRN/YEL BLU/ORN BRN BRN/WHT
• If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector.
– If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
– If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it.
22-122 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:16 61S5N000_220_0124
4 BLK Under all condition Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
8
14 GRN/WHT Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 23, 22, 24 or 25 (20 A) fuse
There should be battery voltage. in the under-dash fuse/relay box
2 GRN/BLK • Faulty power window relay
18 YEL/RED
11 YEL/BLU
6 RED/YEL Connect the No. 14 and No. 6 Check for driver’s window motor • Faulty driver’s window motor
terminals, and the No. 7 and No. 4 operation: • An open in the wire
7 RED/BLK terminals, then turn the ignition It should run (the driver’s window
switch ON (II). moves down).
1 BLU/RED Connect the No. 2 and No. 3 Check for front passenger’s • Faulty front passenger’s window
terminals, and the No. 1 and No. 8 window motor operation: motor
3 BLU/WHT terminals, then turn the ignition It should run (the front passenger’s • Faulty front passenger’s window
switch ON (II). window moves down). switch
19 BRN/WHT Connect the No. 18 and No. 17 Check for left rear window motor • Faulty left rear window motor
terminals, and the No. 19 and operation: • Faulty left rear window switch
17 BRN No. 8 terminals, then turn the It should run (the left rear window • An open in the wire
ignition switch ON (II). moves down).
12 BLU/ORN Connect the No. 11 and No. 10 Check for right rear window motor • Faulty right rear window motor
terminals, and the No. 12 and operation: • Faulty right rear window switch
10 BRN/YEL No. 8 terminals, then turn the It should run (the right rear • An open in the wire
ignition switch ON (II). window moves down).
4. Reconnect the connector to the power window master switch.
20 ORN Connect the No. 14 and No. 6 Check for voltage between the • Faulty driver’s window motor
terminals, and the No. 4 and No. 7 No. 20 and No. 4 terminals: • An open in the wire
4 BLK terminals, then turn the ignition About 6 V should be indicated
switch ON (II). while the driver’s window motor
running.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-123

00/10/26 16:44:17 61S5N000_220_0125
Power Windows
Master Switch Test/Replacement

1. Remove the door grip cover (see page 20-6). Front Passenger’s Switch:
2. Disconnect the 20P connector from the power Terminal

window master switch. Main 1 2 3 8
Position Switch
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
UP
OFF
ON
DOWN
OFF
Left Rear Switch:
Terminal
Main 19 18 17 8
Position Switch
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
UP
OFF
ON
DOWN
OFF
Right Rear Switch:
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each Terminal

switch position according to the tables. Main 11 12 10 8
Position Switch
Driver’s Switch: ON
OFF
The driver’s switch is combined with the control OFF
unit so you cannot isolate the switch to test it.
ON
Instead, run the master switch input test UP
procedures on page 22-122. If the tests are normal, OFF
the driver’s switch must be faulty.
ON
DOWN
OFF
4. If the switch is faulty, remove the three screws and

replace the switch.
22-124 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:17 61S5N000_220_0126
Driver’s Window Motor Test

Motor Test: Pulser Test:
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Remove the 4P conector to the driver’s window
motor, and reconnect the 20P connector to the
2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the driver’s power window master switch.
window motor.
2. Connect the test leads of a voltmeter to the No. 3
and No. 4 terminals of the driver’s window motor
Terminal side of 4P connector.
male terminals
3. Run the motor by connecting power and ground to
the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals. The voltmeter should
read about 6 V.
4. If the voltage is not as specified, check for an open

in the wires. If the wires are OK, replace the driver’s
window motor.
3. Test the motor in each direction by connecting

battery power and ground according to the table.
When the motor stops running, disconnect one
lead immediately.
Terminal
1 2
Direction
UP
DOWN
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,

replace it.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-125

00/10/26 16:44:17 61S5N000_220_0127
Power Windows
Passenger’s Window Switch Test/ Passenger’s Window Motor Test

Replacement
1. Remove the passenger’s door panel (see page 20-
6).
1. Remove the door grip cover (see page 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the passenger’s power window motor.
passenger’s power window switch (B).
Terminal side of
male terminals

Left A
Terminal
1 2 3 4 5
Position 3. Test the motor in each direction by connecting
battery power and ground according to the table.
UP
When the motor stops running, disconnect one
lead immediately.
OFF
Terminal
DOWN 1 2
Direction
Right UP
DOWN
Terminal
1 2 3 4 5
Position
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
UP
replace it.
OFF
DOWN
4. If the switch is faulty, remove the two screws and

replace the switch.
22-126 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:19 61S5N000_220_0128
Wiper/Washer
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARMS/BLADES
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
Test, page 22-129
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
WASHER
RESERVOIR
WASHER FLUID LEVEL

SWITCH
Test, page 22-134
WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR

Test, page 22-132
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR

Test, page 22-132
INTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY CIRCUIT

(In the multiplex control unit)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-127

00/10/26 16:44:22 61S5N000_220_0129
Wiper/Washer
Circuit Diagram
22-128 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:22 61S5N000_220_0130
Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement

2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17-27).
3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B)
B
4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/washer switch.
5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the
tables.
– If there is no continuity, replace the switch.
Terminal
4 5 6 11 12 13 14
Position
OFF
INT
LO
HI
Mist switch ON
Washer switch ON
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-129

00/10/26 16:44:22 61S5N000_220_0131
Wiper/Washer

3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors B, G, J, X and Y.
CONNECTOR B (6P) CONNECTOR G (10P) CONNECTOR J (8P)

WHT/BLU
BLU/RED BLU/WHT BLK
CONNECTOR X (8P) CONNECTOR Y (13P)
BLU/BLK BLK
• If the terminals are OK, go to step 5.
22-130 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:22 61S5N000_220_0132
5. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
assembly.
J4 BLK Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G301)
conditions There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
Y6 BLK Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
conditions There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
B1 WHT/BLU Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 20 (20 A) fuse in the
(II) and washer There should be battery under-dash fuse/relay box
switch ON voltage. • Faulty wiper/washer switch
B6 BLU/RED Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 20 (20 A) fuse in the
(II) There should be battery under-dash fuse/relay box
voltage. • Faulty wiper/washer switch
• Faulty windshield wiper motor
F6 BLU/WHT Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 20 (20 A) fuse in the
(II) There should be battery under-dash fuse/relay box
voltage. • Faulty windshield wiper motor
X7 BLU/BLK Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 20 (20 A) fuse in the
(II) and wiper There should be battery under-dash fuse/relay box
switch in INT voltage. • Faulty wiper/washer switch
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-131

00/10/26 16:44:23 61S5N000_220_0133
Wiper/Washer
Wiper Motor Test Washer Motor Test

1. Carefully remove the windshield wiper arms (see 1. Remove the left inner fender (see page 20-106).
page 22-133).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the wiper motor (B).
motor (B).
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the

3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No. 1 terminal and ground the No. 2 terminal of the
No. 4 terminal and ground the No. 2 terminal of the washer motor. The motor should run.
wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at
low speed. If the motor does not run or fails to run • If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
smoothly, replace the motor. replace it.
• If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no
4. Connect an analog voltmeter between the No. 5 (＋) washer fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected
and No. 3 (−) terminals, and run the motor at low or blocked washer hose, or a clogged pump
or high speed. The voltmeter should indicate 0 V outlet in the motor.
and 4V or less alternately.
22-132 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:23 61S5N000_220_0134
Wiper Motor Replacement

1. Open the hood. Remove the nut covers, nuts (A) 5. Scribe a line (A) across the link and windshield
and the windshield wiper arms (B). wiper linkage to show the original adjustment.
Separate the windshield wiper linkage (B) from the
A
18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft) wiper motor (C).
18 N·m
B
A
B
8 N·m
(0.8 kgf·m,
6 lbf·ft)
D
2. Remove the hood seals (C) and cowl covers (D).
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the wiper

C
motor.
B
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft) 6. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note
these items:
• Grease the moving parts.

• Before reinstalling the wiper arms, turn the wiper
switch ON, then OFF to return the wiper shafts to
the park position.
• If necessary, replace any damaged clips.
C • Check the wiper motor operation.
4. Remove the three bolts (B) and wiper linkage

assembly (C).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-133

00/10/26 16:44:23 61S5N000_220_0135
Wiper/Washer
Washer Fluid Level Switch Test Washer Reservoir Replacement

1. Remove the left inner fender (see page 20-106). 1. Remove the left inner fender (see page 20-106).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) and washer tube
fluid level switch (B). (B).
C
A
B
B A
3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the washer fluid
level switch.
4. Remove the three bolts and washer reservoir.

terminals in each float position (C).
• There should be continuity when the float is

down.
• There should be no continuity when the float is
up.
A C
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
5. Install the reservoir in the reverse order of removal.

Check the washer motor operation.
22-134 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:24 61S5N000_220_0136
Washer Tube Replacement

1. Remove the left inner fender (see page 20-106).
2. Remove the windshield washer nozzles and clips, then remove the tube.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tube. Check the windshield washer
operation.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-135

00/10/26 16:44:25 61S5N000_220_0137
Accessory Power Socket
Circuit Diagram Test/Replacement

1. Carefully pry the accessory power socket (A) out
from the center lower cover.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the socket.
BLK
Wire side of YEL/GRN

female terminals
3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are

all making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded,

repair them as necessary, and recheck the
system.
4. Turn the ignition switch ACC (I), and check for

voltage between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals.
• There should be battery voltage.

• If there is no battery voltage, check for:
– poor ground (G502).
– an open in the wire.
– blown No. 18 (15A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
22-136 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:27 61S5N000_220_0138
Keyless/Power Door Lock System
LOCK BUTTON
UNLOCK BUTTON
TRUNK BUTTON
PANIC BUTTON
TRANSMITTER
Test, page 22-147
Programming, page 22-147
DRIVER’S DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Test, page 22-146
IGNITION KEY SWITCH
Test, page 22-87
KEYLESS RECEIVER UNIT
FRONT PASSENGER’S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Test, page 22-145
RIGHT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Test, page 22-145
MUTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT
DRIVER’S DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR/KNOB SWTICH
Actuator Test, page 22-145
Knob Switch Test, page 22-146 TRUNK LID OPENER SOLENOID/
LATCH SWITCH
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH
LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Test, page 22-145
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-137

00/10/26 16:44:31 61S5N000_220_0139
Circuit Diagram
22-138 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:34 61S5N000_220_0140
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-139

00/10/26 16:44:34 61S5N000_220_0141
Keyless Receiver Unit Input Test

1. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (see page 20-69).
2. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-98).
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the keyless receiver unit (B).
BLK WHT/RED
BLU/ORN YEL
• If the terminals are OK, go to step 5.
22-140 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:34 61S5N000_220_0142
5. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, replace the keyless receiver unit.
1 BLK Under all Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G502)
conditions ground: • An open in the wire
3 YEL Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery under-dash fuse/relay box
voltage. • An open in the wire
5 WHT/RED Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery under-hood fuse/relay box
voltage. • An open in the wire
2 BLU/ORN Under all Check for continuity between • An open in the wire
conditions the No. 2 terminal and the
No. 2 terminal of the
connector K (17P).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-141

00/10/26 16:44:35 61S5N000_220_0143

3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors C, F, J, K, M, P, Q, X and Y.
CONNECTOR C (14P) CONNECTOR F (12P) CONNECTOR J (8P)
BLU BLU/RED BLK ORN WHT
CONNECTOR K (17P) CONNECTOR M (12P) CONNECTOR P (18P)

BLU/ORN
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK YEL YEL/GRN YEL YEL/BLK RED
CONNECTOR Q (8P) CONNECTOR X (8P) CONNECTOR Y (13P)

GRN/WHT
GRN LT GRN/RED RED/WHT YEL/RED WHT/GRN WHT/BLU
22-142 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:35 61S5N000_220_0144
5. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connector.
M7 YEL/BLK Connect J7 terminal Check actuator operation: • Blown No. 16 (20 A) fuse in the
M9 YEL/GRN to M7 ［M9］ The driver’s door lock under-hood fuse/relay box
terminal, and M9 actuator should lock • Faulty driver’s door lock
［M7］ terminal to ［unlock］. actuator
J4 terminal. • An open in the wire
M6 YEL/BLK Connect J7 terminal Check actuator operation: • Blown No. 16 (20 A) fuse in the
M8 YEL to M6 ［M8］ The front passenger’s door under-hood fuse/relay box
terminal, and M8 lock actuator should lock • Faulty front passenger’s door
［M6］ terminal to ［unlock］. lock actuator
P16 YEL Connect J7 terminal Check actuator operation: • Blown No. 16 (20 A) fuse in the
P17 YEL/BLK to P17 ［P16］ The both rear door lock under-hood fuse/relay box
terminal, and P16 actuators should lock • Faulty left or right door lock
［P17］ terminal to ［unlock］. actuator
6. Reconnect all connections to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make sure these input tests at the appropriate
connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box
• If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
assembly.
C11 BLU Under all conditions Attach to ground: • Blown No. 2 (15 A) fuse in the
Parking, side marker, under-hood fuse/relay box
license plate lights and • Faulty taillight relay
taillights should come on. • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay
box
F7 BLU/RED Under all conditions Attach to ground: • Blown No. 15 or 17 (15 A) fuse
Headlights should come on. in the under-hood fuse/relay
box
• Faulty headlight relay 1 or 2
J2 WHT/RED Under all conditions Check for voltage to • Blown No. 9 (15 A) fuse in the
ground: under-hood fuse/relay box
There should be battery • An open in the wire
voltage.
J4 BLK Under all conditions Check for voltage to • Poor ground (G301)
ground: • An open in the wire
There should be 1 V or less.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-143

00/10/26 16:44:36 61S5N000_220_0145
Control Unit Input Test (cont’d)

J6 ORN Under all conditions Attach to ground: • Blown No. 7 (15 A) fuse in the under-
The horn should sound. hood fuse/relay box
• Faulty horn relay
• Faulty horn
J7 WHT Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 16 (20 A) fuse in the under-
There should be battery voltage. hood fuse/relay box
K2 BLU/ORN Under all conditions Check for continuity between the K2 • An open in the wire
terminal and the keyless receiver
unit 5P connector No. 2 terminal
with the 5P connector disconnected:
P18 RED Trunk lid open Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G601)
There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty trunk lid latch switch
Trunk lid closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty trunk lid latch switch
Q2 GRN/WHT Left (right) rear door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left (right) rear door switch
Left (right) rear door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left (right) rear door switch
Q4 LT GRN Front passenger’s door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger’s door switch
/RED open There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
Front passenger’s door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger’s door switch
X5 RED/WHT Ignition key inserted Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
into the ignition switch There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty ignition key switch
Ignition key removed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
from the ignition switch There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
Y8 YEL/RED Driver’s door lock knob Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
switch locked There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty driver’s door lock knob switch
Driver’s door lock knob Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver’s door lock knob switch
switch unlocked There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
Y10 WHT/GRN Driver’s door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
switch unlocked There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty driver’s door lock switch
Driver’s door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver’s door lock switch
switch in neutral There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
Y12 WHT/BLU Driver’s door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
switch locked There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty driver’s door lock switch
Driver’s door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver’s door lock switch
switch in neutral There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
22-144 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:36 61S5N000_220_0146
Door Lock Actuator Test

Driver’s Door: Passenger’s Door:
1. Remove the driver’s door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Remove the passenger’s door panel (see page 20-
6).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator.
Front:
Rear:
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and

ground according to the table. To prevent damage
to the actuator, apply battery voltage only
momentarily.
Terminal
1 2
Position
LOCK
UNLOCK
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and

ground according to the table. To prevent damage
to the actuator, apply battery voltage only
momentarily.
Terminal
1 2
Position
LOCK
UNLOCK
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-145

00/10/26 16:44:36 61S5N000_220_0147
Door Lock Knob Switch Test Door Lock Switch Test

1. Remove the driver’s door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Remove the driver’s door panel (see page 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 2. Remove the two mounting screws and the door
lock switch.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals.

Not used
• There should be continuity between the No. 1
3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 and No. 2 terminals when the door lock switch is
terminals. in the LOCKED position.
• There should be continuity when the door lock and No. 3 terminals when the door lock switch is
knob switch is in the LOCKED position. in the UNLOCKED position.
• There should be no continuity when the door lock
knob switch is in the UNLOCKED position.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door

lock actuator.
22-146 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:37 61S5N000_220_0148
Transmitter Test Transmitter Programming

NOTE: Storing transmitter codes:
• If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but The codes of up to three transmitters can be read into
the LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is
is faulty; replace the transmitter. stored, the code which was input first will be erased.)
• If any door is open, you cannot lock the door with the
transmitter. NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits
• If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do between the steps. Make sure the doors and the trunk
not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the are closed.
doors relock automatically.
• The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch.
2. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or
1. Press the lock or unlock button 5 or 6 times to reset unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the
the transmitter. receiver in the multiplex control unit.
• If the locks work, the transmitter is OK. 3. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF.
• If the locks don’t work, go to step 2.
4. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Open the transmitter and check for water damage.
• If you find any water damage, replace the unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the
transmitter. receiver in the multiplex control unit.
• If there is no water damage, go to step 3.
6. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one,
and try to lock and unlock the doors with the 7. Within 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II).
transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button 5
or 6 times. 8. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or
unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the
• If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK. receiver in the mupltiplex control unit.
• If the doors don’t lock and unlock, go to step 4.
9. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Within 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II).

unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the
A receiver in the multiplex control unit.
12. Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock
actuators. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter
lock or unlock button again.
13. Within 10 sec., aim the transmitters (up to three)

whose codes you want to store at the receiver, and
press the transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
4. Reprogram the transmitter, then try to lock and Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door
unlock the doors. lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored.
• If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and pull out the key.
• If the doors don’t lock and unlock, replace the
transmitter. 15. Confirm proper operation with the new codes(s).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-147

00/10/26 16:44:38 61S5N000_220_0149
Seat Heaters
SEAT HEATER MAIN RELAY

DRIVER’S/FRONT PASSENGER’S Wire colors: GRY/BLU,
SEAT HEATER SWITCH RED/BLK, BLK/YEL, and BLK
Test/Replacement, page 22-151 Test, page 22-51
DRIVER’S SEAT CUSHION HEATER

Test, page 22-150
DRIVER’S SEAT HEATER RELAY

Test, page 22-51
FRONT PASSENGER’S
SEAT CUSHION HEATER
Test, page 22-150
FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT HEATER RELAY

Test, page 22-51
22-148 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:42 61S5N000_220_0150
Circuit Diagram
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-149

00/10/26 16:44:42 61S5N000_220_0151
Seat Heaters
Seat Heater Test Seat Heater Relay Test

1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-77). 1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-77).
2. Disconnect the seat heater harness 2P connector 2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the seat heater
(A) from the floor wire harness, and 6P connector relay (A).
(B) from the seat heater relay (C).
Wire side of
female terminals

Terminal side of terminals, and No. 6 and No. 4 terminals. There
male terminals should be continuity.
If there is no continuity, replace the seat heater
relay.
3. Check for continuity between the A1 and B3 4. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 6
terminals, and A2 and B6 terminals. There should terminals, and No. 3 and No. 4 terminals when
be continuity. power and ground are connected across the No. 6
If there is no continuity, replace the seat cushion and No. 5 terminals. There should be continuity.
(see page 20-79). If there is no continuity, replace the seat heater
relay.
4. Check for continuity between the B1 and B4
terminals, and B1 and B5 terminals. There should
be continuity.
If there is no continuity, replace the seat cushion
(see page 20-79).
22-150 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:42 61S5N000_220_0152
Seat Heater Switch Test/Replacement

1. Remove the center lower cover (see page 20-69).
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the seat

heater switch (B), then remove the switch.

NOTE: When testing the switch in step 3, do not

remove the bulbs from the switch.
Terminal
2 3 5 6 7 9 10
Position
ON
OFF
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-151

00/10/26 16:44:44 61S5N000_220_0153
Security Alarm System
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
TAILLIGHT RELAY
Test, page 22-51
SECURITY CONTROL UNIT

IGNITION KEY SWITCH

Test, page 22-87
SECURITY HORN RELAY

Test, page 22-51
HOOD SWITCH
Test, page 22-163
SECURITY HORN
Test, page 22-161
HEADLIGHT RELAY 1
Test, page 22-51
UNDER-HOOD HEADLIGHT RELAY 2

FUSE/RELAY BOX Test, page 22-51
22-152 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:46 61S5N000_220_0154
SECURITY INDICATOR
(In the gauge assembly) FRONT PASSENGER’S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH
Test, page 22-160
RIGHT REAR DOOR LOCK

KNOB SWITCH
Test, page 22-160
DRIVER’S DOOR
LOCK KNOB SWITCH
Test, page 22-160
LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK

KNOB SWITCH
Test, page 22-160
TRUNK LID OPENER

LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH SOLENOID/LATCH SWITCH
Security Latch Switch Test,
page 22-162
Opener Solenoid Test,
page 22-162
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-153

00/10/26 16:44:49 61S5N000_220_0155
Circuit Diagram
22-154 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:51 61S5N000_220_0156
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-155

00/10/26 16:44:54 61S5N000_220_0157
22-156 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:54 61S5N000_220_0158
Security Control Unit Input Test

2. Disconnect the 20P connector (A) and 16P connector (B) from the control unit (C).
NOT USED
3. Inspect the all connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-157

00/10/26 16:44:54 61S5N000_220_0159
Security Control Unit Input Test (cont’d)

4. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
B16 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
B8 WHT/RED Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 9 (10A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
There should be battery voltage. relay box
A11 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 10 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
There should be battery voltage. relay box
B2 GRN Under all conditions Attach to ground: The security • Blown No. 7 (15A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
horn should come on. relay box
• Faulty security horn relay
• Faulty security horn
B4 BLU/RED Under all conditions Attach to ground: The headlights • Faulty headlight relay 1 or 2
should come on. • An open in the wire
B5 BLU Under all conditions Attach to ground: The parking • Faulty taillight relay
lights, taillights and dash lights • An open in the wire
should come on.
B9 RED/WHT Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty audio unit
B13 BLK/YEL Under all conditions Attach to ground: • Faulty indicator light (LED)
The security indicator light should • Faulty gauge assembly
come on. • An open in the wire
A6 LT GRN/ Under all conditions Check for continuity between the • An open in the wire
BLK A6 terminal and multiplex control
unit connector Y3 terminal:
A17 BLU/ORN Under all conditions Check for continuity between the • An open in the wire
A17 terminal and multiplex control
unit connector Y2 terminal:
A16 YEL/GRN Connect B8 terminal Check the solenoid operation: • Faulty trunk lid opener
to A16 terminal The solenoid should work (trunk is • An open in the wire
momentarily unlocked).
22-158 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:55 61S5N000_220_0160
5. Reconnect the connectors to the control unit, and make sure these input tests at the connectors.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty, replace the security control unit.
A8 RED/WHT Ignition key is in the Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
ignition switch There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty ignition key switch
Ignition key is out of Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
the ignition switch There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
A18 GRN/BLK Hood open Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G201)
There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty hood switch
Hood closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty hood switch
A7 BLU/YEL Trunk lid open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty trunk latch switch
There should be 1 V or less. • Poor ground (G601)
A1 WHT/BLK Driver’s door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver’s door lock knob switch
knob switch in There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
unlocked
Driver’s door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver’s door lock knob switch
knob switch in locked There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
A12 BRN/WHT Front passenger’s Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger’s door lock knob switch
door lock knob There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
switch in unlocked
Front passenger’s Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger’s door lock knob switch
door lock knob There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
switch in locked
A13 BLK/WHT Left ［right］ rear Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left ［right］ rear door lock knob switch
［A2］［BLK/RED］ door lock knob There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
switch in unlocked
Left ［right］ rear Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left ［right］ rear door lock knob switch
door lock knob There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
switch in locked
A3 WHT Driver’s door key Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
［A4］［WHT/RED］ cylinder switch in There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty driver’s door lock knob switch
unlocked ［locked］ • An open in the wire
Driver’s door key Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver’s door lock knob switch
cylinder switch in There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
neutral
A14 PNK/BLU Front passenger’s Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
［A15］［PNK］ door key cylinder There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty front passenger’s door key cylinder switch
switch in unlocked • An open in the wire
［locked］
Front passenger’s Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger’s door key cylinder switch
door key cylinder There should be 5 V or more. • An open in the wire
switch in neutral
A20 GRN Driver’s door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver’s door switch
A9 LT GRN/ Front passenger’s Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger’s door switch
RED door open There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
A19 1 GRN/WHT Right rear door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
Right rear door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
B15 2 GRN/WHT Left rear door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
Left rear door closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
1: When testing A19, make sure the left door is closed.
2: When testing B15, make sure the right door is closed.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-159

00/10/26 16:44:55 61S5N000_220_0161
Door Lock Knob Switch Test

Driver’s Door: Passenger’s Door:
1. Remove the driver’s door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Remove the passenger’s door panel (see page 20-
6).
2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the actuator
(B). 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the actuator.
A

switch position according to the table. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
Terminal
1 2 3
Position Front Passenger’s:
LOCK Terminal
1 2
UNLOCK Position
LOCK
UNLOCK
Left Rear:
Terminal
2 3
Position
LOCK
UNLOCK
Right Rear:
Terminal
1 2
Position
LOCK
UNLOCK
22-160 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:55 61S5N000_220_0162
Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Security Horn Test

1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Remove the right inner fender.
2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder 2. Disconnect the 1P connector (A) from the security
switch. horn (B).
Wire side of
female terminals
3. Test the horn by connecting battery power to the

terminal and grounding to the body ground.
The horn should sound.

and No. 3 terminals when the door key cylinder
switch is in LOCK position.
and No. 2 terminals when the door key cylinder
switch is in UNLOCK position.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-161

00/10/26 16:44:56 61S5N000_220_0163
Trunk Lid Opener Solenoid Test Trunk Security Latch Switch Test
1. Open the trunk lid, and disconnect the 6P connector 1. Open the trunk lid and disconnect the 6P connector
(A) from the trunk lid opener solenoid/latch switch (A) from the trunk lid opener solenoid/latch switch
(B). (B).
2. Check solenoid operation by connecting power to 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
the No. 6 terminal and ground the No. 5 terminal switch position.
only momentarily.
The solenoid should work. • There should be continuity between the No. 1
and No. 3 terminals when the trunk lid is opened.
• There should be no continuity between the No. 1
and No. 3 terminals when the trunk lid is closed.
22-162 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:56 61S5N000_220_0164
Hood Switch Test

1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch.
Terminal side of
male terminals

and No .2 terminals when the hood is opened.
(lever released)
• There should be no continuity between the No. 1
and No. 2 terminals when the hood closed.
(lever pushed down)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-163

00/10/26 16:44:57 61S5N000_220_0165
Immobilizer System
ECM/PCM
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR LIGHT Replacement, page 11-4
Bulb Replacement, page 22-61 Substitute known-good for testing,
page 11-5
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER

TRANSPONDER
(Built into the ignition key)
IGNITION KEY
22-164 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:44:57 61S5N000_220_0166
System Description
The vehicle is equipped with an immobilizer system that will disable the vehicle unless the proper ignition key is used.
This system consists of a transponder located in the ignition key, an immobilizer control unit-receiver, an indicator
light, and the ECM/PCM.
When the key is inserted in the ignition switch and turned to the on (II) position, the immobilizer control unit-receiver
sends power to the transponder in the ignition key. The transponder then sends a coded signal back through the
immobilizer control unit-receiver to the ECM/PCM.
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER
ECM/PCM FUEL SUPPLY

SYSTEM
IGNITION KEY KEY CYLINDER

(Has built-in transponder)
• If the proper key has been used, the immobilizer indicator light will come on for about 2 seconds, then go off.
• If the wrong key has been used whose code was not received or recognized by the unit, the indicator light will come
on for about 2 seconds, then it will blink until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
• If the ignition switch is turned OFF, the indicator will blink for about 5 seconds to signal that the unit has been set
correctly, then the indicator will go off.
• If the customer has lost his key, and cannot start the engine, contact Acura Customer Relations.
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR LIGHT BLINKING PATTERN:
IGNITION SWITCH ON
OFF
2 sec 5 sec
1 Hz
PROPER KEY INDICATOR ON

INSERTED LIGHT
OFF
1 Hz
WRONG KEY INDICATOR ON

INSERTED LIGHT
OFF
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-165

00/10/26 16:45:00 61S5N000_220_0167
Immobilizer System
Circuit Diagram
22-166 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:45:00 61S5N000_220_0168
Troubleshooting
Before troubleshooting the immobilizer system, 5. Disconnect the 7P connector from the immobilizer
troubleshoot any ECM/PCM with Diagnostic Trouble control unit-receiver.
Codes (DTCs) (see page 11-3), and make sure the ECM/
PCM has no malfunction.
Note these items before troubleshooting: B
• Due to the action of the immobilizer system, the

engine takes slightly more time to start than on a
vehicle without an immobilizer system. A
• When the system is normal, and the proper key is
inserted, the indicator light comes on for 2 seconds,
then it will go off.
• If the indicator starts to blink after 2 seconds, or if the
engine does not start, repeat the starting procedure.
If the engine still does not start, continue with this
procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) with proper key.
2. Check to see if the immobilizer indicator light 6. Check for voltage between the immobilizer control
comes on. unit-receiver 7P connector No. 7 terminal and body
ground.
Does the indicator light blink?
YES−Go to step 3.
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Check for these problems:
NO−Repair open in the WHT/RED wire.
• Blown No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box. 7. Check for voltage between the immobilizer control
• An open in the wire between the gauge assembly unit-receiver 7P connector No. 6 terminal and body
and the immobilizer control unit-receiver. ground.
• A faulty immobilizer indicator light.
• An open in the wire between the gauge assembly Is there battery voltage?
and the under-hood fuse/relay box.
YES−Go to step 8.
4. Remove the steering column lower covers (see
page 17-27). • Blown No. 6 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
• Faulty PGM-FI main relay 1.
• An open in the YEL/BLK wire.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-167

00/10/26 16:45:00 61S5N000_220_0169
Immobilizer System
Troubleshooting (cont’d) Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver

Replacement
8. Check for voltage between the immobilizer control-
unit receiver 7P connector No. 4 terminal and body
ground with the parking brake lever pulled, then 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover.
released.
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17-
Is there 1 V or less, then 5 V or more? 27).
YES−Go to step 9. 3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the immobilizer

control unit-receiver (B).
• Faulty parking brake switch or a poor body

ground of the parking brake switch.
• Repair open in the GRN/ORN wire. C
9. Check for continuity between the immobilizer

control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 1 terminal B
and ECM/PCM terminal E3.
Is there continuity? A
NO−Repair open in the BRN/YEL wire.

4. Remove the two screws and the immobilizer
10. Check for continuity between the immobilizer control unit-receiver from the ignition key cylinder
control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 2 terminal (C).
and ECM/PCM terminal E27.
5. Install the immobilizer control unit-receiver in the
Is there continuity? reverse order of removal.
YES−Replace the immobilizer control unit-receiver. 6. After replacement, check the immobilizer system.
After replacing the immobilizer control unit-
receiver, rewrite the unit with a Honda PGM-
Tester.
NO−Repair open in the RED/BLU wire.
22-168 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:45:02 61S5N000_220_0170
Multiplex Control System
REAR CEILING LIGHT

(With moonroof)
Test, page 22-94

FRONT CEILING LIGHT

(Without moonroof)
Test, page 22-94
FRONT CEILING LIGHT/SPOTLIGHTS

(With moonroof)
Test, page 22-93
IGNITION KEY LIGHT

Test, page 22-87
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-169

00/10/26 16:45:05 61S5N000_220_0171
Circuit Diagram
22-170 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:45:08 61S5N000_220_0172
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-171

00/10/26 16:45:09 61S5N000_220_0173
System Description
The Multiplex Control System has four internal Multiplex Communication
functions:
• Multiplexing (send multiple signals over shared To reduce the number of wire harnesses, digital signals
wires) are sent via shared multiplex communication lines
• Wake up/sleep (runs at full power only on demand to rather than sending normal electrical signals through
reduce battery draw) individual wires.
• Fail-safe (fixes or ignores faulty signals) • The input signals from each switch are converted to
• Self-diagnosis (Mode 1 for the system, Mode 2 for digital signals at the central processing unit (CPU).
input lines) • The digital signals are sent from the transmitting unit
to the receiving unit as serial signals.
The system controls the function of these circuits: • The transmitted signal is converted to a switch signal
• Entry light control at the receiving unit, and it operates the related
• Wiper/washer (including intermittent wiper) component or monitors a switch.
• Interlock • There are exclusive communication lines between
• Keyless/power door lock the ECM/PCM and the gauge assembly.
• Key-in reminder
Wake-up and Sleep
The multiplex control system has ‘‘wake-up’’ and
‘‘sleep’’ functions to decrease parasitic draw on the
battery when the ignition switch is OFF.
• In the sleep mode, the multiplex control unit stops
functioning (communication and CPU control) when it
is not necessary for the system to operate.
• As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a
door is unlocked), the related control unit in the sleep
mode immediately wakes up and begins to function.
• When the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the
driver’s or front passenger’s door is opened, then
closed, there is about a 10 second delay before the
control unit goes from the wake-up mode to the sleep
mode.
• If any door is open, the sleep mode will not function.
• If a key is in the ignition switch, the sleep mode will
not function.
Fail-safe
To prevent improper operation, the multiplex control
system has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode,
the output signal is fixed when any part of the system
malfunctions (for example a faulty control unit or
communication line).
Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that
fixes the output signal when there is any CPU
malfunction, and a software fail-safe function that
ignores the signal from the malfunctioning control unit
and allows the system to operate normally.
22-172 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:45:09 61S5N000_220_0174
Troubleshooting
Special Tool Required: 5. If there is a DTC, it will blink, pause, then repeat the
MPCS Service Connector 07WAZ-001010A DTC as long as the ignition switch is ON (II).
1. Check the No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ Is there a repeating DT C?
relay box and the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box. YES−Count the blinks, then go to step 8.
Are the f uses OK ? NO−See if the SCS circuit is working properly. Go

to step 6.
YES−Go to step 2.
6. Check for continuity between the inspection
NO−Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse. connector T1 and T3 terminals.
2. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20- Is there continuity?
67).
YES−Go to step 7.
If the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, the beeper will NO−Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box, replace it
beep five times. and recheck for DTCs.
4. Check self-diagnosis function Mode 1 for a 7. Check for continuity between the connector J No. 4
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) by connecting the terminal of under-dash fuse/relay box and body
special tool (A) to the multiplex control inspection ground.
connector (B). After about 5 seconds, the spotlight
and ceiling light should come on, then blink 0.2 Is there continuity?
second. This means that you are in Mode 1 of the
self-diagnosis function. YES−Go to step 9.
B NO−Repair the open in the wire, and recheck for

DTCs.
MODE 1: Ceiling Light Blinking Pattern

0.2 sec.
ON
OFF
0.2 sec.
2 sec.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-173

00/10/26 16:45:09 61S5N000_220_0175
Troubleshooting (cont’d)
8. About 1 second after you go into self-diagnosis • DTC 6 only (no other DTCs present): Substitute a
Mode 1, the ceiling light will indicate the DTC, and known-good ECM/PCM, and recheck for the DTC.
repeat it every 3 seconds. If there is more than one
DTC, the system will indicate them in ascending • Reprogram the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
order, beginning from the DTC with the lowest latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/
numerical value. Troubleshoot the DTCs as PCM, then recheck (see page 11-4). If the
indicated below: symptom/indication goes away with a known-
good ECM/PCM, replace the original
• DTC 1, 2, and 3 (ECM/PCM P0600) ECM/PCM.
simultaneously: Check for a short to body ground
in the YEL wire between multiplex control unit
terminal E10 and ECM/PCM terminal E24, and in DTC Cause
the WHT/GRN wire between multiplex control
unit terminal K10 and gauge assembly terminal 1 The multiplex control unit cannot
A2. If both wires are OK, substitute a known-good receive signals from the gauge
multiplex control unit, gauge assembly, and ECM assembly.
/PCM one at a time, in that order, and recheck for
the DTCs after each substitution. 2 The multiplex control unit cannot
receive signals from the ECM/PCM.
• DTC 2 and 5 simultaneously: Check for an open
in the YEL wire between multiplex control unit 3 The multiplex control unit cannot
terminal E10 and ECM/PCM terminal E24, If the receive signals from itself.
wire is OK, substitute a known-good multiplex
control unit, gauge assembly, and ECM/PCM one 5 The gauge assembly cannot receive
at a time, in that order, and recheck for the DTCs signals from multiplex control unit and
after each substitution. the ECM/PCM.
• DTC 1, and 6 simultaneously: Check for an open 6 The ECM/PCM cannot receive signals
in the WHT/GRN wire between multiplex control from multiplex control unit and the
unit terminal K10 and gauge assembly terminal gauge assembly.
A2. If the wire is OK, substitute a known-good
multiplex control unit, gauge assembly, and ECM
/PCM one at a time, in that order, and recheck for
the DTCs after each substitution.
• DTC 1 only (no other DTCs present): Substitute a

known-good multiplex control unit, and a gauge
assembly one at a time, in that order, and
recheck for the DTCs after each substitution.

known-good multiplex control unit, and a ECM/
PCM one at a time, in that order, and recheck for
the DTCs after each substitution.

known-good multiplex control unit, and recheck
for the DTC.

known-good gauge assembly, and recheck for
the DTC.
22-174 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:45:10 61S5N000_220_0176
9. From Mode 1, disconnect the special tool from the Taillight relay
multiplex control inspection connector for about 10 Windshield washer motor
seconds, then reconnect it. The ceiling light should Windshield wiper motor (INT, Auto stop)
come on for 2 seconds, then blink twice more at 0.2 Driver’s door switch
second intervals. This means the system has gone Front passenger’s door switch
from Mode 1 to Mode 2. Left rear door switch
Right rear door switch
MODE 2: Ignition key switch
Trunk latch switch
Parking brake switch
Driver’s door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
2 sec.
Driver’s door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
0.2 sec. Driver’s seat belt switch (UNLATCH)
A/C switch (with fan switch ON)
ON Combination light switch
Keyless signal line
OFF ECM/PCM communication line (disconnect and
0.2 sec.
reconnect)
Gauge assembly communication line
11. Check two or three other circuits listed above.
Does the spotlight and ceiling light blink f or each

NOTE: To cancel Mode 2, disconnect the SCS circuit?
service connector from the multiplex control
inspection connector for more than 10 seconds or YES−The additional circuits are OK. Repair the
turn the ignition switch OFF. short or open in the circuit that failed the test in
step 10.
10. Look in the following table for the switches most
closely related to the problem. While still in Mode NO−Multiplex failed circuits can mean that the
2, operate the switches and the control unit. If the control unit has failed, but without triggering a DTC.
circuit is OK, the spotlight and ceiling light should Test a few more circuits. If they also fail, test the
blink once. If the circuit is faulty, there will be no multiplex control unit inputs (see page 22-177). If
indication. all the input test are OK, substitute a known-good
control unit, gauge assembly, or ECM/PCM, one at
Does the spotlight and ceiling light blink? a time, then recheck. If the system works properly,
the original control unit is faulty; replace it. If there
YES−Go to step 12. is still a malfunction, substitute a known-good
control unit for the next most likely faulty control
NO−Go to step 11. unit, then recheck. If the system works properly,
that control unit is faulty; replace it.
In each table below is a list of circuits that can be
checked in Mode 2.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-175

00/10/26 16:45:10 61S5N000_220_0177
Troubleshooting (cont’d)
12. Shift to the sleep mode: 14. Shift to the wake up mode:
Turn the ignition switch OFF. When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the
If the control unit receivers no inputs from the multiplex control unit, gauge assembly, and ECM/
inputs listed below, it will go into the sleep mode PCM wake up at the same time without ‘‘talking’’ to
after about 20 seconds. each other through the communication lines. When
any switch in the multiplex system is turned on, it
Multiplex Control Unit wakes up its related control unit which, in turn,
Taillight relay wakes up the other units.
Driver’s door switch
Front passenger’s door switch After confirming the sleep mode, look in the
Left rear door switch following table for the switch most closely related
Right rear door switch to the problem. Operate that switch and see if its
Keyless communication line control unit wakes up.
13. Comfirm the sleep mode: NOTE: If any control unit is faulty and will not wake
Check for voltage on the YEL and WHT/GRN wires. up, several parts of the system will malfunction at
There should be battery voltage in the sleep mode. the same time.
Check the parasitic draw at the battery while In the table below, the control unit is followed by a
shifting into the sleep mode. Amperage should list of the switches and input signals that can wake
change from about 70 through 80 mA to less than it up.
10 mA.
Multiplex Control Unit No. 9 (10 A)
Under-hood Fuse
Communication lines
(ECM/PCM, Gauge assembly)
Taillight relay
Driver’s door switch
Keyless communication line
Ignition key switch
Is the wake-up f unction OK ?
YES−Intermittent failure; the system is OK at this

time.
NO−Test the multiplex control unit inputs (see

page 22-177).
22-176 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:45:10 61S5N000_220_0178
Multiplex Control Unit Input Test

2. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors C, E, F, J, K, O, P, Q, X and Y.
CONNECTOR C (14P) CONNECTOR E (13P) CONNECTOR F (12P) CONNECTOR J (8P)

GRN/RED WHT/RED
GRN/ORN BLU YEL GRN/RED BLK
CONNECTOR K (17P) CONNECTOR O (12P) CONNECTOR P (18P)
WHT/GRN GRN/RED RED
CONNECTOR Q (8P) CONNECTOR X (8P) CONNECTOR Y (13P)
GRN/WHT LT GRN/RED GRN/ORN WHT/BLK BLK
GRN BLU/RED BLU/RED RED/WHT BLK
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-177

00/10/26 16:45:11 61S5N000_220_0179
Multiplex Control Unit Input Test (cont’d)

4. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
J4 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G301)
Y6 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
Y1 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
J2 WHT/RED Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 9 (10A) fuse in the under-hood
There should be battery voltage. fuse/relay box
5. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make sure these input tests at the appropriate connectors on the under-
dash fuse/relay box.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex control unit must be faulty, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box assembly.
Q4 LT GRN/RED Front passenger’s Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger’s door switch
door open There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
Q2 GRN/WHT Left or right rear door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty rear door switch
Left or right rear door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty rear door switch
Q8 GRN/ORN Parking brake lever Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty parking brake switch
· up There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
C8 Parking brake lever Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty parking brake switch
· up There should be continuity. • Short to ground
F1
Q5 BLU/RED Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver’s seat belt switch
Q6 BLU/RED Driver’s seat belt is There should be 1 V or less. • Poor ground (G551)
unbuckled. • An open in the wire
P18 RED Trunk lid open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty trunk latch switch
There should be 1 V or less. • Poor ground (G601)
X5 RED/WHT Ignition key is in the Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
ignition switch There should be 1 V or less. • Poor ground (G401)
Ignition key is out of Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
the ignition switch There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
22-178 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:45:11 61S5N000_220_0180
X8 WHT/BLK Under all conditions Attach to ground: The ignition key • Blown No. 3 (7.5A) fuse in the under-hood
light should come on. fuse/relay box
• Blown LED
O7 GRN/RED Ceiling light, Attach to ground: The ceiling light, • Blown No. 3 (7.5A) fuse in the under-hood
spotlights switches in spotlights should come on. fuse/relay box
the middle position • Faulty ceiling light or spotlights
C11 BLU Under all conditions Attach to ground: Dash lights should • Blown No. 2 (15A) fuse in the under-hood
come on. fuse/relay box
• Faulty taillight relay
F8 GRN/RED Brake fluid reservoir Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty brake fluid lever switch
Float in down There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
position
E10 YEL Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • An open or short in the wire
There should be 3-7 volts in the
sleep mode and battery voltage
when awake.
K10 WHT/GRN Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • An open or short in the wire
There should be 3-7 volts in the
sleep mode and battery voltage
when awake.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 22-179

00/10/26 16:54:31 61S5N000_230_0001
Restraints
Restraints
Special Tools ................................................................. 23-2
Seat Belts
Front Seat Belt Replacement ....................................... 23-4
Rear Seat Belt Replacement ........................................ 23-7
Inspection ...................................................................... 23-9
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

Precautions and Procedures ....................................... 23-11
General Troubleshooting Information ....................... 23-20
DTC Troubleshooting Index ........................................ 23-25
System Description ...................................................... 23-28
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 23-30
DTC Troubleshooting ................................................... 23-32
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting ............. 23-117
Driver’s Airbag Replacement ...................................... 23-127
Front Passenger’s Airbag Replacement ..................... 23-129
Side Airbag Replacement ............................................ 23-131
Airbag Disposal ............................................................ 23-132
Cable Reel Replacement .............................................. 23-135
SRS Unit Replacement ................................................. 23-138
Side Impact Sensor Replacement ............................... 23-139
OPDS Unit Replacement .............................................. 23-140
Front Sensor Replacement .......................................... 23-141
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/26 16:54:32 61S5N000_230_0002
Restraints
Special Tools
*1 07HAZ-SG00500 Deployment Tool 1
07PAZ-0010100 SCS Service Connector 1
07SAZ-TB4011A SRS Inflator Simulator 1
07TAZ-SZ5011A SRS Simulator Lead C 1
*2 07TAZ-001020A Backprobe Adapter, 17 mm 2
07XAZ-S1A0200 SRS Simulator Lead E 1
07XAZ-SZ30100 SRS Simulator Lead F 1
07YAZ-S3AA100 SRS Simulator Lead H 1
*1: Included in SRS Tool Set 07MAZ-SM5000B
*2: Use with the stacking patch cords from T/N 07SAZ-001000A, Backprobe Set.

00/10/26 16:54:34 61S5N000_230_0003
Seat Belts
SHOULDER ANCHOR ADJUSTER

step 9 on page 23-5
REAR SEAT BELT

REAR CENTER BELT and

REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLES
step 1 on page 23-8
FRONT SEAT BELT
Replacement, page 23-4 FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES
Inspection, page 23-9 step 1 on page 23-6

00/10/26 16:54:34 61S5N000_230_0004
Seat Belts
Front Seat Belt Replacement

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), and remove
SRS component locations (see page 23-10), and the the upper anchor bolt (B).
section before performing repairs or service.
B
NOTE: Check the front seat belts for damage, and 7/16-20 UNF
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)
replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage
them during removal and installation.
Front Seat Belt

buttons.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at A

3. Slide the front seat forward fully. 7. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A).
Remove the upper retractor mounting bolt (B), and
4. Pull the lower anchor cover (A) back, and remove the lower retractor bolt (C), then remove the front
the lower anchor bolt (B). seat belt (D) and retractor (E).
B
D 6 x 1.0 mm
A Forward 9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
B
7/16-20 UNF
32 N·m
C
E 7/16-20 UNF
5. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (see page 20-57). 32 N·m

00/10/26 16:54:35 61S5N000_230_0005
8. Remove the B-pillar upper trim (see page 20-57). Upper anchor bolt construction:
9. Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster (A).

COLLAR UPPER ANCHOR UPPER ANCHOR
BOLT
BUSHING
TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) Lower anchor bolt construction:
A WASHER
LOWER ANCHOR
COLLAR COLLAR BOLT
10. Install the seat belt in the reverse order of removal,
• Apply liquid thread lock to the upper anchor bolt

before reinstallation.
• If the threads on the retractor mounting self-
BUSHING
tapping ET screw are worn out, use an oversized TOOTHED SPRING
self-tapping ET screw made specifically for this LOCK WASHER WASHER LOWER ANCHOR
application.
• Check that the retractor locking mechanism
functions (see page 23-9).
• Assemble the washers, collar and bushing on the
upper and lower anchor bolts as shown.
• Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure
there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt.
• Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is
plugged in properly.
(cont’d)

00/10/26 16:54:35 61S5N000_230_0006
Seat Belts
Front Seat Belt Replacement (cont’d)

Seat Belt Buckle 6. Remove the center anchor bolt (A), and remove the
seat belt buckle (B).
buttons.
B
3. Remove the front seat (see page 20-77).
4. Detach the seat belt switch connector clip (A) and

harness clips (B). The driver’s seat with manual
C
height adjustment is shown, the driver’s seat A
without manual height adjustment is configured 7/16-20 UNF
like the passenger’s seat. 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)
Driver’s seat: 7. Pull the seat belt switch/tensioner harness (C) out
through the space between the seat cushion and
the seat linkage (driver’s seat with manual height
adjustment), or the hole on the seat track (driver’s
B seat without manual height adjustment and
passenger’s seat).
A
8. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal,
• Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt

as shown.
Passenger’s seat:
SPRING CENTER ANCHOR
WASHER BOLT
TOOTHED CENTER
LOCK WASHER COLLAR ANCHOR
5. On driver’s seat with manual height adjustment,

adjust the seat cushion to its maximun height.

00/10/26 16:54:35 61S5N000_230_0007
Rear Seat Belt Replacement

NOTE: Check the rear seat belts for damage, and 5. Install the seat belt in the reverse order of removal,
replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage and note these items:
them during removal and installation.
• If the threads on the retractor mounting
Rear Seat Belt self-tapping ET screw are worn out, use an
oversized self-tapping ET screw made
1. Remove the rear seat cushion (see page 20-89). specifically for this application.
2. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A). functions as described (see page 23-9).
• Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there
A are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belt.
7/16-20 UNF
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)
3. Remove the rear shelf (see page 20-58).
4. Remove the retractor mounting self-tapping ET

screw (A), and the retractor bolt (B), then remove
the rear seat belt (C) and retractor (D).
B
7/16-20 UNF
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)
A
6 x 1.0 mm
3.4 N·m
(0.35 kgf·m,
2.5 lbf·ft)
(cont’d)

00/10/26 16:54:36 61S5N000_230_0008
Seat Belts
Rear Seat Belt Replacement (cont’d)

Center Belt and Seat Belt Buckles 5. Remove the protector (A).
1. Remove the rear seat cushion (see page 20-85). A
2. Remove the center anchor bolts (A), and remove

the seat belt buckles (B).
A
7/16-20 UNF
32 N·m
6. Install the seat belt and buckles in the reverse order

• If the threads on the retractor mounting

self-tapping ET screw are worn out, use an
oversized self-tapping ET screw made
B
specifically for this application.
3. Remove the rear shelf (see page 20-58). functions (see page 23-9).
• Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt
4. Remove the retractor mounting self-tapping ET as shown.
screw (A), and the retractor bolt (B), then remove • Before installing the center anchor bolt, make
the center belt (C) and retractor (D). sure there are no twists or kinks in the center belt.
B
7/16-20 UNF A Center anchor bolt construction:
32 N·m 6 x 1.0 mm
(3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft) 3.4 N·m CENTER ANCHOR
(0.35 kgf·m, BOLT
2.5 lbf·ft)
WASHER
C
D CENTER TOOTHED
ANCHOR LOCK WASHER

00/10/26 16:54:36 61S5N000_230_0009
Inspection
For front seat belt retractor with seat belt tensioner, Rear center:
review the SRS component locations (see page 23-10),
and the precautions and procedures (see page 23-11) in 40° 40°
the SRS section before performing repairs or service. 15° 15°
Retractor
40°
1. Before installing the retractor, check that the seat
15°
belt can be pulled out freely.
15°
2. Make sure that the seat belt does not lock when the
A 40°
retractor (A) is leaned slowly up to 15° from the
mounted position. The seat belt should lock when
the retractor is leaned over 40°. Do not attempt to
Inside Forward
disassemble the retractor.
Front: 3. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there

is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of
12.5° the seat belt for any reason.
40°
40° 40° In-vehicle
40° 15° 15° 15°
15°
1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on
anything.
2. After installing the anchors, check for free

A movement on the anchor bolts. If necessary,
remove the anchor bolts and check that the
washers and other parts are not damaged or
improperly installed.
Forward Inside
3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration.

Rear: Clean with a shop towel if necessary. Use only
soap and water to clean.
40° 40°
15° 15° NOTE: Dirt build-up in the metal loops of the upper
anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
Wipe the inside of the loops with a clean cloth
40° dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
15°
4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled
out slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only
15°
A during a sudden stop or impact.
40°
5. Make sure that the seat belt will retract
automatically when released.
Inside Forward
6. For each passenger’s seat belt, make sure that the

locking mechanism in the seat belt retractor will
engage when the seat belt is pulled all the way out.
7. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there

is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of
the seat belt for any reason.

00/10/26 16:54:41 61S5N000_230_0010
SRS
SRS INDICATOR LIGHT

RIGHT FRONT SENSOR
SIDE AIRBAG INDICATOR LIGHT
LEFT FRONT SENSOR
CABLE REEL
DRIVER’S AIRBAG
Disposal, page 23-132
FRONT PASSENGER’S AIRBAG
SRS UNIT
OPDS SENSOR/
SEAT BACK
FRONT PASSENGER’S
SIDE AIRBAG
RIGHT SIDE SEAT

BELT TENSIONER
FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDE

IMPACT SENSOR
MEMORY ERASE
SIGNAL (MES)
CONNECTOR (2P) OPDS UNIT
Initialization, page 23-24
DATA LINK Replacement, page 23-140
CONNECTOR
(DLC) 16P RIGHT SIDE SEAT BELT BUCKLE TENSIONER
LEFT SIDE SEAT BELT BUCKLE TENSIONER
DRIVER’S SIDE AIRBAG
DRIVER’S SIDE IMPACT SENSOR Replacement, page 23-131
Replacement, page 23-139 Disposal, page 23-132
LEFT SIDE SEAT BELT TENSIONER
23-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:54:41 61S5N000_230_0011
Precautions and Procedures

General Precautions Steering-related Precautions
Please read the following precautions carefully before Cable Reel Alignment
performing the airbag system service. Observe the
instructions described in this manual, or the airbags • Misalignment of the cable reel could cause an open in
could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. the wiring making the SRS system and the horns
inoperative. Center the cable reel whenever the
• Except when performing electrical inspections, following is performed (see step 6 on page 23-137).
always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect
the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least – Installation of the steering wheel
3 minutes before beginning work. – Installation of the cable reel
NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased – Installation of the steering column
even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery – Other steering-related adjustment or installation
cables are disconnected from the battery.
• Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to • Do not disassemble the cable reel.
the same standards as the original parts and quality.
Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. • Do not apply grease on the cable reel.
Use only new parts when making SRS repairs.
• Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. • If the cable reel shows any signs of damage, replace
Do not install any part that shows signs of being it with a new one. For example, it does not rotate
dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks smoothly.
or deformation.
Inspection After Deployment
After a collision in which the airbags were deployed,
replace the deployed parts (airbag, seat belt tensioner,
seat belt buckle tensioner, and side airbag), the SRS
unit, the side impact sensor on the side which deployed,
and any related parts, and inspect the following:
1. Inspect all the SRS wire harnesses. Replace, don’t

repair, any damaged harnesses.
2. Inspect the cable reel for heat damage. If there is

any damage, replace the cable reel.
3. After the vehicle is completely repaired, turn the

• Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the ignition switch on. If the SRS indicator light comes
disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect on for about 6 seconds and then goes off, the SRS
the SRS connector. airbag system is OK. If the indicator light does not
• Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it function properly, go to SRS Troubleshooting.
is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10
mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value
in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output
could cause accidental deployment and possible
injury.
• Do not put objects on the front passenger’s airbag.
• The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit.
Be sure to get the customer’s radio code before
disconnecting the battery cable.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-11

00/10/26 16:54:42 61S5N000_230_0012
SRS
Precautions and Procedures (cont’d)

Airbag Handling and Storage • Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface
away from any high heat source (exceeding 200°F/
Do not disassemble the airbags. It has no serviceable 93°C).
parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be
repaired or reused.
For temporary storage of the airbag during service,

please observe the following precautions.
• Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up.

Never put any things on the removed airbag.
• Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags,

such as measuring resistance.
• Do not position yourself in front of the airbag

assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement.
• Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to

prevent damage to the airbag assembly.
• Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the

damaged airbag.
23-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:54:42 61S5N000_230_0013
SRS Unit, Front Sensors and Side Impact • Do not disassemble the SRS unit or the side impact
Sensors sensors.
• Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front • Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery
sensors or the side impact sensors whenever the negative cable and wait at least 3 minutes before
ignition switch is ON (II), or at least for 3 minutes after beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit,
the ignition switch is turned OFF. or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit.
• During installation or replacement, be careful not to • Be sure the SRS unit and side impact sensors are
bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area installed securely with the mounting bolts torqued to
around the SRS unit, front sensors and the side 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
impact sensor. The airbags could accidentally deploy
and cause damage or injury. • Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or the side
impact sensors and keep them away from dust.
• Store the SRS unit and the side impact sensors in a

cool (less than 104°F/40°C) and dry (less than 80 %
relative humidity, no moisture) area.
• After a collision in which the airbags were deployed,

replace the SRS unit and front sensors. After a
collision in which the side airbag was deployed,
replace the side impact sensor on the side where the
side airbag deployed and the SRS unit. After a
collision in which the airbags or the side airbags did
not deploy, inspect for any damage or any
deformation on the SRS unit, front sensors and the
side impact sensors. If there is any damage, replace
the SRS unit and/or the side impact sensors.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-13

00/10/26 16:54:42 61S5N000_230_0014
SRS

Wiring Precautions Precautions for Electrical Inspections
SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer • When using electrical test equipment, insert the
covering (except the SRS indicator light circuit). probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector.
Observe the instructions described in this section. Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal
side of the connector, and do not tamper with the
• Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. connector.
If there is an open or damage in SRS wiring, replace
the harness.
• Use a u-shaped probe. Do not insert the probe

forcibly.
• Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are

not pinched or interfere with other parts.
• Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting.

Using improper tools could cause an error in
inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact.
• Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and
grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-
metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent
problems that are difficult to diagnose.
23-14 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:54:43 61S5N000_230_0015
Spring-loaded Lock Connector Side Airbag Connector:
Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded Disconnecting

lock. To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A)
and the slider (B) while holding the opposite half of the
Front Airbag Connectors: connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be
sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half.
Disconnecting
B
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A)
toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of
the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be
sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half.
A
A
B
Connecting
Hold the both connector halves, and press them forcibly
Connecting until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side connector
1. To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector half, clicks to lock.
and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector
C
half in the direction shown. As the two connector
halves are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is
pushed back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the
sleeve.
C
2. When the connector halves are completely

connected, the pawl is released, and the spring-
loaded sleeve locks the connector.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-15

00/10/26 16:54:43 61S5N000_230_0016
SRS

Backprobing Spring-loaded Lock Connectors Seats with Side Airbags
When checking voltage or resistance on this type of Seats with side airbags have a ‘‘SIDE AIRBAG’’ label on
connector the first time, you must remove the retainer the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-back
to insert the tester probe from the wire side. cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without airbags
are different, make sure you install only the correct
NOTE: It is not necessary to reinstall the removed replacement parts.
retainer; the terminals will stay locked in the connector
housing.
Label
SIDE AIRBAG
To remove the retainer (A), insert a flat-tip screwdriver

(B) between the connector body and the retainer, then
carefully pry out the retainer. Take care not to break the • When cleaning, do not saturate the seat with liquid,
connector. and do not spray steam on the seat.
• Do not repair torn or frayed seat-back covers. Replace
A the seat-back cover.
• After a collision in which the side airbag was
B
deployed, replace the side airbag with new parts. If
the seat-back cushion is split, it must be replaced. If
the seat-back frame is deformed, it must be replaced.
23-16 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:54:48 61S5N000_230_0017
Disconnecting the Airbag Connectors, Side Airbag Connectors, Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner
Connectors and Seat Belt Tensioner Connectors
Before removing a front airbag, side airbag or other SRS related devices (the SRS unit, the cable reel, the side impact
sensors, the seat belt buckle tensioners, and the seat belt tensioner connector), disconnecting connectors from related
devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors or the side airbag
connectors to prevent accidental deployment.
Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before
beginning the following procedures.
• Before disconnecting the dashboard wire harness B 18P connector (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect the driver’s
airbag 4P connector (C), the front passenger’s airbag 4P connector (D), the left side seat belt tensioner 2P connector
(F) and the right side seat belt tensioner 2P connector (G).
• Before disconnecting the floor wire harness 18P connector (I) from the SRS unit, disconnect both side airbag 2P
connectors (L, M) and both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P connectors (J, K).
• Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (B), disconnect the driver’s airbag 4P connentor (C).
• Before disconnecting the floor wire harness 4P connector (E), disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (F,
G).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-17

00/10/26 16:54:48 61S5N000_230_0018
SRS

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at Side Airbag
least 3 minutes.
4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from
Driver’s Airbag the floor wire harness 2P connectors (B).
2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel,

then disconnect the driver’s airbag 4P connector
(A) from the cable reel 4P connector (B).
A B
Front Passenger’s Airbag
3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front

passenger’s airbag 4P connector (A) from the
dashboard wire harness B 4P connector (B).
23-18 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:54:49 61S5N000_230_0019
Seat Belt Tensioner
5. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors

(A) from the floor wire harness 2P connector (B).
Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner
6. Disconnect both seat belt buckle tensioner 4P

connectors (A).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-19

00/10/26 16:54:49 61S5N000_230_0020
SRS

DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Codes)
The self-diagnostic function of the SRS system allows it to locate the causes of system problems and then store this
information in memory. For easier troubleshooting, this data can be retrieved via a data link circuit.
• When you turn the ignition switch ON (II), the SRS indicator will come on. If it goes off after 6 seconds, the system is
normal.
• If there is an abnormality, the system locates and defines the problem, stores this information in memory, and turns
the SRS indicator light on. The data will remain in the memory even when the ignition switch is turned off or if the
battery is disconnected.
• When you connect the Honda PGM Tester to the 16P data link connector (DLC) to short the SCS terminal, and turn
the ignition switch ON (II), the SRS indicator light will indicate the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) by the number of
blinks.
• After reading and recording the DTC, proceed with the troubleshooting procedure for this code.
Precautions
• Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it’s not a Honda multimeter, make sure it’s output is 10 mA
(0.01A) or less when switched to the smallest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could
damage the airbag circuit or cause accidental airbag deployment and possible injury.
• Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than 3 minutes, be careful not to bump the
SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries.
• Before you remove the SRS main harness, disconnect the driver’s airbag connector, the front passenger’s airbag
connector, both side airbag connectors, both seat belt buckle tensioner connectors, and both seat belt tensioner
connectors.
• Make sure the battery is sufficiently charged. If the battery is dead or low, measuring values won’t be correct.
• Do not touch a tester probe to the terminals in the SRS unit or harness connectors, and do not connect the terminals
with a jumper wire. Use only the backprobe set and the Honda PGM Tester. Backprobe spring-loaded lock type
connectors correctly.
Reading the DTC

When the SRS indicator light is on, read the DTC using either of the following methods:
PGM Tester Method

Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC)(B), and follow the tester’s prompts in the
‘‘SRS’’ menu. If the tester indicates no DTC, DTC 3-6 to 3-10, DTC 4-6 to 4-10, DTC 9-1 or DTC 9-2, double-check by
selecting ‘‘SCS’’ on the display, and watching the SRS indicator light.
A B
23-20 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:54:50 61S5N000_230_0021
SRS Indicator Light Method: Reading the main code:

In case of 1∼10
The SRS indicator light (A) indicates the DTC by the Count the number of the blinks.
number of blinks when the Honda PGM Tester (C) is
Example:
connected to the DLC (data link connector) (16P) (B). 1.2 S 1.2 S 1.2 S 1.2 S 1.2 S
1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. ON
2. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (C) to the DLC (16P)

(B), and follow the tester’s prompts in the ‘‘SCS’’ OFF
menu (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator’s Main code= 1 ＋ 1 ＋ 1 =3
Manual).
In case of 11∼19
Four continuous blinks count as 10.
Add any further blinks together as shown.
Example:
0.1 S
1.2 S 1.2 S 1.2 S 1.2 S
ON
OFF
Main code= 10 ＋ 1 ＋ 1 = 12
C B In case of 20 or more
Four continuous blinks count as 10.
Add any further blinks together as shown.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). The SRS indicator
Example:
light (A) comes on for about 6 seconds, and then
goes off. Then it will blink to indicate the DTCs (see 0.1 S 0.1 S
the table below).
1.2 S 1.2 S 1.2 S
4. Read the DTC.
ON
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait for 10
seconds. OFF
Main code= 10 ＋ 10 ＋ 1 = 21
6. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester (C) from the
DLC (16P) (B).
Reading the sub code:
Patterns of DTC Indications:
Count the number of the blinks.
The DTC consists of a main code and sub-code. Example:
0.3 S 0.3 S 0.3 S 0.3 S 0.3 S 0.3 S 0.3 S

S: Second
ON
6S 3S 2S 3S
ON OFF
Sub code= 1 ＋ 1 ＋ 1 ＋ 1 =4
OFF
If the main code is ’3’, and the sub code is ’4’, record a
DTC 3-4.
First emitting Main code Sub-code
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-21

00/10/26 16:54:50 61S5N000_230_0022
SRS

• Including the most recent problem, up to three different malfunctions can be indicated (see example 1 below).
• In case of a continuous failure, the DTC will be indicated repeatedly (see example 1 below).
• In case of an intermittent failure, the SRS indicator light will indicate the DTC one time, then it will stay on (see
example 2 below).
• If both a continuous and an intermittent failure occur, both DTCs will be indicated as continuous failures.
• When the system is normal (no DTC), the SRS indicator light will stay on (see example 3).
• If the SRS indicator light comes on continuously without a DTC, there may be a problem with the system.
• If the SRS indicator light does not come on as indicated above, always check for an open or a short to ground in the
SCS circuit before troubleshooting the system.
Example of the DTC Indications:
1. Continuous failure, SRS Indicator Light blinks like this: S: Second

1.2 S 1.2 S 0.3 S 0.3 S 0.3 S 0.3 S
3S 2S 3S
ON
OFF
Indications
Bulb check Main code (2) Sub-code (1) Main code (1) Sub-code (2) Main code (1) Sub-code (1) are repeated
period in case of
DTC 2-1 DTC 1-2 DTC 1-1 continuous
Most recent problem Second-most recent Third-most recent failure.
problem problem
2. Intermittent failure, SRS Indicator Light blinks like this:
ON
OFF Light stays on in case of

intermittent failure.
Bulb check
period DTC 5-1
3. Normal (no failure), SRS Indicator Light blinks like this:
ON
OFF
No DTC, system is normal, the
Bulb check light stays on.
period
23-22 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:54:50 61S5N000_230_0023
Erasing the DTC Memory Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures

Special Tools Required If there was a malfunction, but it doesn’t recur, it will be
SCS service connector 07PAZ-0010100 stored in the memory as an intermittent failure, and the
SRS indicator light will come on.
To erase the DTC(s) from the SRS unit, use a Honda
PGM Tester (see the Honda PGM Tester SRS vehicle After checking the DTC, troubleshoot as follows:
System Supplement) or the following procedure.
1. Read the DTC (see ‘‘Reading DTCs’’).
1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Erase the DTC memory (see ‘‘Erasing the DTC
2. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the MES Memory’’).
connector (2P) (B). Do not use a jumper wire.
3. With the shift lever in Park or neutral, start the
engine, and let the engine idle.
4. The SRS indicator light will come on for about 6

seconds and then go off.
5. Shake the wire harness and the connectors, take a

test drive (quick acceleration, quick braking,
A cornering), turn the steering wheel fully left and
07PAZ-0010100
right, and hold it there for 5 to 10 seconds. If the
problem recurs, the SRS indicator light will come
on.
B 6. If you can’t duplicate the intermittent failure, the

system is OK at this time.
4. The SRS indicator light will come on for about 6

seconds, and then go off. Remove the SCS service
connector from the MES connector (2P) within 4
seconds after the light goes off.
5. The SRS indicator light will come on again.

Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES
connector (2P) within 4 seconds after the light
comes on.
6. When the SRS indicator light goes off, remove the

SCS service connector from the MES connector
(2P) within 4 seconds.
7. The SRS indicator light will blink 2 times indicating

that the memory has been erased.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait for 10

seconds.
Turn the ignition switch ON (II) again after the
procedure. The SRS system is OK if the SRS
indicator light comes on for 6 seconds, and then
goes off.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-23

00/10/26 16:54:51 61S5N000_230_0024
SRS

Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Unit
When the seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, or (and) OPDS unit assembly are replaced with a new one, initialize the
OPDS unit links with the OPDS sensor by following the procedure below.
NOTE: Make sure the passenger’s seat is dry, set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing
sitting on the front passenger’s seat.
1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A) to the DLC (16P) (B), and follow the tester’s prompts in the ‘‘SCS’’ menu (see
the Honda PGM Tester Operator’s Manual).
3. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the MES connector (2P) (B). Do not use a jumper wire.
A A
07PAZ-0010100
B
B

5. The SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the
MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator light went off.
6. The SRS indicator light comes on again. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4
seconds after the SRS indicator light comes on.
7. The SRS indicator light goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds.
8. The SRS indicator light indicates that the OPDS unit is initialized by blinking 2 times, then goes off.
If the light doesn’t blink 2 times and stay on, repeat this procedure beginning with step 1.
If the light stays on after blinking 2 times, read the DTC and proceed with troubleshooting procedures.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait for 10 seconds. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester from the DLC (16P).
Turn the ignition switch ON (II) again after the procedure. The SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds
and goes off. If the SRS indicator light doesn’t come on again after 30 seconds, the initialization of the OPDS unit
is complete and the system is OK.
4 sec or less
Blinking
SRS indicator ON
light
OFF
MES CONNECTED
connector
terminals
DISCONNECTED
23-24 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:54:51 61S5N000_230_0025

SIEMENS (M1), KARE (M3) SRS unit
DTC Detection Item Notes
1-1 Open or increased resistance in driver’s airbag inflator (see page 23-32)
1-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver’s airbag (see page 23-34)
inflator
1-4 Short to power in driver’s airbag inflator (see page 23-36)
1-5 Short to ground in driver’s airbag inflator (see page 23-38)
2-1 Open or increased resistance in front passenger’s airbag inflator (see page 23-40)
2-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger’s (see page 23-41)
airbag inflator
2-4 Short to power in front passenger’s airbag inflator (see page 23-43)
2-5 Short to ground in front passenger’s airbag inflator (see page 23-44)
3-1 Open or increased resistance in left side seat belt tensioner (see page 23-46)
3-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in left side seat belt (see page 23-48)
tensioner
3-4 Short to power in left side seat belt tensioner (see page 23-50)
3-5 Short to ground in left side seat belt tensioner (see page 23-52)
21-1 Open or increased resistance in left side seat belt buckle tensioner (see page 23-54)
21-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in left side seat belt (see page 23-55)
buckle tensioner
21-4 Short to power in left side seat belt buckle tensioner (see page 23-57)
21-5 Short to ground in left side seat belt buckle tensioner (see page 23-58)
4-1 Open or increased resistance in right side seat belt tensioner (see page 23-60)
4-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in right side seat belt (see page 23-62)
tensioner
4-4 Short to power in right side seat belt tensioner (see page 23-64)
4-5 Short to ground in right side seat belt tensioner (see page 23-66)
22-1 Open or increased resistance in right side seat belt buckle tensioner (see page 23-68)
22-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in right side seat belt (see page 23-69)
buckle tensioner
22-4 Short to power in right side seat belt buckle tensioner (see page 23-71)
22-5 Short to ground in right side seat belt buckle tensioner (see page 23-72)
5-1 Internal failure of SRS unit (see page 23-74)
5-2
5-4
5-8
6-3
6-4
6-7
6-8
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting DTCs 5-1 through 8-6, check battery/system voltage. If voltage is low, repair the charging
system before troubleshooting the SRS system.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-25

00/10/26 16:54:52 61S5N000_230_0026
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont’d)

DTC Detection Item Notes
9-1 Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, could mean internal (see page 23-74)
failure of the unit or a faulty indicator light circuit. Refer to
Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 23-23).
9-2 Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, could mean internal
failure of the power supply (VB line). Refer to Troubleshooting
Intermittent Failures (see page 23-23).
9-3 Faulty driver’s seat belt buckle switch (see page 23-76)
9-4 Faulty front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch (see page 23-80)
9-6 Faulty left front sensor (see page 23-83)
9-7 Faulty right front sensor (see page 23-86)
10-1 Seat belt tensioners (and airbag(s)) deployed (see page 23-74)
10-2 Driver’s side airbag deployed
10-3 Seat belt tensioners (and airbag(s)) and driver’s side airbag
deployed
10-4 Front passenger’s side airbag deployed
10-5 Seat belt tensioners (and airbag(s)) and front passenger’s side
airbag deployed
10-6 Driver’s and front passenger’s side airbags deployed
10-7 Seat belt tensioners (and airbag(s)) and driver’s and front passenger’s
side airbags deployed
11-1 Open or increased resistance in driver’s side airbag inflator (see page 23-89)
11-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver’s side airbag (see page 23-90)
inflator
11-4 Short to power in driver’s side airbag inflator (see page 23-92)
11-5 Short to ground in driver’s side airbag inflator (see page 23-93)
12-1 Open or increased resistance in front passenger’s side airbag (see page 23-95)
inflator
12-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger’s (see page 23-96)
side airbag inflator
12-4 Short to power in front passenger’s side airbag inflator (see page 23-98)
12-5 Short to ground in front passenger’s side airbag inflator (see page 23-99)
13-1 Internal failure of the driver’s side impact sensor (see page 23-75)
13-2
13-3 No signal from the driver’s side impact sensor (see page 23-101)
13-4 Faulty power supply to the driver’s side impact sensor (see page 23-102)
14-1 Internal failure of the front passenger’s side impact sensor (see page 23-75)
14-2
14-3 No signal from the front passenger’s side impact sensor (see page 23-104)
14-4 Faulty power supply to the front passenger’s side impact sensor (see page 23-105)
15-1 Faulty OPDS unit (see page 23-107)
15-2 Faulty side airbag indicator light circuit (see page 23-111)
15-3 Faulty OPDS sensor (see page 23-116)
23-26 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:54:52 61S5N000_230_0027

SRS indicator light doesn’t come on SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting
(see page 23-117)
SRS indicator light stays on after the SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting
ignition switch is turned on (II) (see step 1 on page 23-120)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-27

00/10/26 16:54:52 61S5N000_230_0028
SRS
System Description
SRS Components
Airbags
The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver
and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including
safing sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver’s airbag (C), the front passenger’s airbag (D), side
airbags (E), seat belt tensioners (I), and front impact sensors (J).
Side Airbags
The side airbags (E) are in each front seat-back. They help protect the upper torso of the driver or front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side impact. Sensors (F) in each door sill and in the SRS unit detect such an impact and
instantly inflate the driver’s or the passenger’s side airbag. Only one side airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the
impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger.
Seat Belt and Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners

The seat belt and seat belt buckle tensioners are linked with the SRS airbags to further increase the effectiveness of
the seat belt. In a front-end collision, the tensioners instantly retract the belt and buckle firmly to secure the occupants
in their seats.
OPDS
The side airbag system also includes an Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS). This system consists of sensors
(G) and a control unit (H) in the front passenger’s seat-back. The control unit sends occupant height and position data
to the SRS unit. If the SRS unit determines that the front passenger’s head is in the deployment path of the side airbag,
it will automatically disable the airbag. When the side airbag is disabled, the Side Airbag indicator light in the gauge
assembly alerts the driver that the passenger’s side airbag will not deploy in a side impact.
J C B D
A
G
H
E
F
I
23-28 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:54:55 61S5N000_230_0029
SRS Operation
The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If
battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power
circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level.
For the SRS to operate:
Airbag
(1) The frontal impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals, and depending on the severity of the collision and whether the seat
belt buckle switch is ON or OFF, it sends the appropriate signals to the airbag inflators.
(3) The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags.
Side Airbags
(1) The side impact sensors must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflators. However, the
microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger’s side airbag if the SRS unit determines that the front
passenger’s head is in the deployment path of the side airbag.
(3) The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag.
Self-diagnosis System
A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator light
comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the system is operating normally.
If the light does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an
abnormality in the system. The system must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible.
For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is connected to the
data link connector (DLC). This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester when it is connected to the DLC
(16P).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-29

00/10/26 16:55:39 61S5N000_230_0129
Front Passenger’s Airbag Replacement

Removal 4. Remove the three mounting nuts (A) from the
bracket. Cover the lid and dashboard with a cloth,
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at and pry carefully with a screwdriver to lift the front
least 3 minutes before beginning work. passenger’s airbag (B) out of the dashboard.
2. Remove the glove box (see page 20-70). NOTE: The airbag lid has pawls on its side which
attach it to the dashboard.
3. Disconnect the connector between the front
passenger’s airbag 4P connector (A) and B
dashboard wire harness B 4P connector (B).
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-129

00/10/26 16:55:39 61S5N000_230_0130
SRS
Front Passenger’s Airbag Replacement (cont’d)

Installation 2. Connect the front passenger’s airbag 4P connector
(A) to the dashboard wire harness B 4P connector
1. Place the new front passenger’s airbag (A) into the (B), then reinstall the glove box.
dashboard. Tighten the front passenger’s airbag
mounting nuts (B).
B
3. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
4. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system
operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS
indicator light should come on for about 6 seconds
and then go off.

23-130 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:54:59 61S5N000_230_0030
SRS
Circuit Diagram
23-30 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:02 61S5N000_230_0031
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-31

00/10/26 16:55:03 61S5N000_230_0032
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 1-1: Open in Driver’s Airbag Inflator 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
DTC 1-2: Increased Resistance in Driver’s 7. Erase the DTC memory.

Airbag Inflator
8. Read the DTC.
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-23).
Is DT C 1-1 or DT C 1-2 indicated?
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds, YES−Go to step 9.
and then goes off.
NO−Open or increased resistance in the driver’s
Does the SRS indicator light stay on? airbag inflator; replace the driver’s airbag (see page
23-127).
YES−Go to step 3.
9. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. 3 minutes.
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see
page 23-23). 10. Disconnect the front passenger’s airbag 4P
connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness B
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the 4P connector (B).
battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes.
4. Disconnect the driver’s airbag 4P connector from

the cable reel 4P connector (A).
A
A
B
07XAZ-SZ30100
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
5. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the cable reel 4P

connector.
23-32 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:03 61S5N000_230_0033
11. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors 13. Check resistance between the No. 7 and the No. 16
(A) from the floor wire harness 2P connectors (B). terminals and between the No. 6 and the No. 15
terminals of the dashboard wire harness B 18P
connector. There should be 2.0−3.0 .
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B 18P CONNECTOR
12. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 18P

connector (A) from the SRS unit (B). Is the resistance as specif ied?
YES−Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at the

dashboard wire harness B 18P connector and the
SRS unit, check the connection between the
SRS unit. If the connection is OK, replace the SRS
unit (see page 23-138).
B
NO−Go to step 14.
14. Disconnect the cable reel from dashboard wire

harness B. Check resistance between the No. 7 and
the No. 16 terminals and the No. 6 and the No. 15
A terminals of the dashboard wire harness B 18P
connector. There should be 0 − 1.0
Is the resistance as specif ied?
YES−Replace the cable reel.
NO−Replace dashboard wire harness B.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-33

00/10/26 16:55:03 61S5N000_230_0034
SRS

DTC 1-3: Short to Another Wire or Decreased 8. Read the DTC.
Resistance in Driver’s Airbag Inflator
Is DT C 1-3 indicated?
YES−Go to step 9.
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds, NO−Short in the driver’s airbag; replace the
and then goes off. driver’s airbag (see page 23-127).
Does the SRS indicator light stay on? 9. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for
3 minutes.
YES−Go to step 3.
10. Disconnect the front passenger’s airbag 4P
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness B
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see 4P connector (B).
page 23-23).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the


07XAZ-SZ30100
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)

connector.
7. Erase the DTC memory.
23-34 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:04 61S5N000_230_0035
11. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors 14. Check resistance between the No. 7 and the No. 16
(A) from the floor wire harness 2P connectors (B). terminals and between the No. 6 and the No. 15
connector. There should be 1 M or more.

connector (A) from the SRS unit (B). Is the resistance as specif ied?
YES−Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see

page 23-138).
NO−Short in dashboard wire harness B; replace

dashboard wire harness B or the cable reel.
13. Disconnect the special tool (2 ) from the cable

reel 4P connector.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-35

00/10/26 16:55:04 61S5N000_230_0036
SRS

DTC 1-4: Short to Power in Driver’s Airbag 8. Read the DTC.
Inflator
YES−Go to step 9.
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds, NO−Short to power in the driver’s airbag; replace
and then goes off. the driver’s airbag (see page 23-127).
3 minutes.
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness B 4
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see P connector (B).
page 23-23).



(A) from the floor wire harness 2P connectors (B).
07XAZ-SZ30100
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)

connector. A

B
23-36 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:04 61S5N000_230_0037
12. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 18P 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
connector (A) from the SRS unit (B).
18. Disconnect the cable reel from dashboard wire
harness B.
20. Check for voltage between the No. 7 terminal of the

dashboard wire harness 18P connector and body
B ground, between the No.16 terminal of the
dashboard wire harness B 18P connector and body
ground, between the No. 6 terminal of the
ground, and between the No.15 terminal of the
A ground. There should be 0.5 V or less.
13. Disconnect the special tool (2 ) from the cable Is the voltage as specif ied?
reel 4P connector.
YES−Replace the cable reel.
NO−Replace dashboard wire harness B.

ground, and between the No. 15 terminal of the
ground. There should be 0.5 V or less.
Is the voltage as specif ied?

page 23-138).
NO−Go to step 17.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-37

00/10/26 16:55:05 61S5N000_230_0038
SRS

DTC 1-5: Short to Ground in Driver’s Airbag 8. Read the DTC.
Inflator
YES−Go to step 9.
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds, NO−Short to ground in the driver’s airbag inflator;
and then goes off. replace the driver’s airbag (see page 23-127).
3 minutes.
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness B
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see 4P connector (B).
page 23-23).


07XAZ-SZ30100 11. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors

07SAZ-TB4011A (A) from the floor wire harness 2P connectors (B).
(2 JACK)

connector.

A
23-38 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:05 61S5N000_230_0039
12. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 18P 15. Disconnect the cable reel from dashboard wire
connector (A) from the SRS unit (B). harness B.
16. Check resistance between the No. 7 terminal of the

B ground, and between the No. 15 terminal of the
ground. There should be 1 M or more.
A YES−Replace the cable reel.
13. Disconnect the special tool (2 ) from the cable reel NO−Replace dashboard wire harness B.
4P connector.

ground, and between No. 15 terminal of the

page 23-138).
NO−Go to step 15.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-39

00/10/26 16:55:06 61S5N000_230_0040
SRS

DTC 2-1: Open in Front Passenger’s Airbag 8. Read the DTC.
Inflator
Is DT C 2-1 or 2-2 indicated?
DTC 2-2: Increased Resistance in Front
Passenger’s Airbag Inflator YES−Go to step 9.
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-23). NO−Open or increased resistance in the front
passenger’s airbag inflator; replace the front
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the passenger’s airbag (see page 23-129).
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds,
and then goes off. 9. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for
3 minutes.
Does the SRS indicator light stay on?
10. Disconnect the driver’s airbag 4P connector (A)
YES−Go to step 3. from the cable reel 4P connector (B).

page 23-23).


connector from the dashboard wire harness B 4P
connector (A).
A B

07XAZ-SZ30100
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
B
5. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the dashboard wire
harness B 4P connector.
23-40 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:06 61S5N000_230_0041
12. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 18P DTC 2-3: Short to Another Wire or Decreased
connector (A) from the SRS unit (B). Resistance in Front Passenger’s Airbag
Inflator

and then goes off.
B
YES−Go to step 3.

A Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see
page 23-23).
13. Check resistance between the No. 4 and No. 13
terminals and between the No. 5 and No. 14 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
terminals of the dashboard wire harness B 18P battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes.
connector. There should be 2.0−3.0 .
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B 18P CONNECTOR connector from the dashboard wire harness B 4P
connector (A).
A
07XAZ-SZ30100
YES−Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at the SRS
unit connector; check the connection between the
07SAZ-TB4011A
SRS unit. If the connector is OK, replace the SRS (2 JACK)
5. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the dashboard
NO−Open or increased resistance in dashboard wire harness B 4P connector.
wire harness B; replace dashboard wire harness
B. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-41

00/10/26 16:55:07 61S5N000_230_0042
SRS

8. Read the DTC. 12. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 18P
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Short in the front passenger’s airbag inflator;

replace the front passenger’s airbag (see page 23-
129).
B
3 minutes.
10. Disconnect the driver’s airbag 4P connector (A)

from the cable reel 4P connector (B).
A
13. Disconnect the special tool (2 ) from the

dashboard wire harness B 4P connector.

terminals and between the No. 5 and No. 14
B DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B 18P CONNECTOR

A

A YES−Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see

page 23-138).
B NO−Short in dashboard wire harness B; replace

dashboard wire harness B.
23-42 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:07 61S5N000_230_0043
DTC 2-4: Short to Power in Front Passenger’s 8. Read the DTC.

Airbag Inflator
YES−Go to step 9.
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds, NO−Short to power in the front passenger’s airbag
and then goes off. inflator; replace the front passenger’s airbag (see
page 23-129).
YES−Go to step 3. 3 minutes.
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. 10. Disconnect the driver’s airbag 4P connector (A)
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see from the cable reel 4P connector (B).
page 23-23).


connector (A).
A B

07XAZ-SZ30100
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
A
wire harness B 4P connector.
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-43

00/10/26 16:55:07 61S5N000_230_0044
SRS

12. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 18P DTC 2-5: Short to Ground in Front Passenger’s
connector (A) from the SRS unit (B). Airbag Inflator

and then goes off.
B Does the SRS indicator light stay on?
YES−Go to step 3.

A page 23-23).
13. Disconnect the special tool (2 ) from the 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
dashboard wire harness B 4P connector. battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes.
14. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. Disconnect the front passenger’s airbag 4P
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector (A).

DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B 18P CONNECTOR A
07XAZ-SZ30100
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
5. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the dashboard wire

harness B 4P connector.

page 23-138).
NO−Short to power in dashboard wire harness B;

replace dashboard wire harness B.
23-44 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:08 61S5N000_230_0045
6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 12. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 18P
8. Read the DTC.
YES−Go to step 9.
B
NO−Short to ground in the front passenger’s
airbag inflator; replace the front passenger’s airbag
(see page 23-129).

3 minutes. A
10. Disconnect the driver’s airbag 4P connector (A) 13. Disconnect the special tool (2 ) from the
from the cable reel 4P connector (B). dashboard wire harness B 4P connector.

ground, and between No. 14 terminal of the
A B


A
page 23-138).
B
NO−Short to ground in dashboard wire harness B;
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-45

00/10/26 16:55:08 61S5N000_230_0046
SRS

DTC 3-1: Open in Left Side Seat Belt 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
Tensioner
DTC 3-2: Increased Resistance in Left Side
Seat Belt Tensioner 8. Read the DTC.
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-23). Is DT C 3-1 or DT C 3-2 indicated?
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the YES−Go to step 9.
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds
and then goes off. NO−Open or increased resistance in the left side
seat belt tensioner; replace the left side seat belt
Does the SRS indicator light stay on? (see page 23-4).
YES−Go to step 3. 9. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for
3 minutes.
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see 10. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector (A)
page 23-23). from the dashboard wire harness B 4P
connector (B).
4. Disconnect the left side seat belt tensioner 2P A

connector from the floor wire harness 2P
connector (A).
B
07SAZ-TB4011A
A (2 JACK)
07XAZ-SZ30100
07TAZ-SZ5011A
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
14. Read the DTC.
5. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the floor wire Is DT C 3-1 or DT C 3-2 indicated?
harness 2P connector.
NO−Open or increased resistance in the floor wire

harness; replace the floor wire harness.

3 minutes.
23-46 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:09 61S5N000_230_0047
16. Disconnect the driver’s airbag connector (A), front 17. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 18P
passenger’s airbag connector (B) and right side connector (A) from the SRS unit (B).
seat belt tensioner connector (C).
A A
18. Check resistance between the No. 8 terminal and

the No. 17 terminal of the dashboard wire harness
B 18P connector. There should be 2.0−3.0 .
C YES−Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at the

dashboard wire harness B 18P connector and at the
SRS unit. Check the connection between the
NO−Open or increased resistance in dashboard

B.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-47

00/10/26 16:55:09 61S5N000_230_0048
SRS

DTC 3-3: Short to Another Wire or Decreased 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
Resistance in Left Side Seat Belt Tensioner
8. Read the DTC.
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds Is DT C 3-3 indicated?
and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Short in the left side seat belt tensioner;
YES−Go to step 3. replace the left side seat belt (see page 23-4).
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. 9. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see 3 minutes.
page 23-23).
10. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector (A)
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the from the dashboard wire harness B 4P
battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes. connector (B).
4. Disconnect the left side seat belt tensioner 2P

connector (A). A
B
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-SZ30100
07TAZ-SZ5011A
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK) 11. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the dashboard
5. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the floor wire 14. Read the DTC.
NO−Short in the floor wire harness; replace the

floor wire harness.

3 minutes.
23-48 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:10 61S5N000_230_0049
A A


B 18P connector. There should be 1 M or more.
C

page 23-138).

-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-49

00/10/26 16:55:10 61S5N000_230_0050
SRS

DTC 3-4: Short to Power in Left Side Seat Belt 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
Tensioner
8. Read the DTC.
and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Short to power in the left side seat belt
YES−Go to step 3. tensioner; replace the left side seat belt
(see page 23-4).
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see 9. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for
page 23-23). 3 minutes.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the 10. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector (A)
battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes. from the dashboard wire harness B 4P
connector (B).
connector (A).
A
A B
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07TAZ-SZ5011A 07XAZ-SZ30100
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)

5. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the floor wire
harness 2P connector. 14. Read the DTC.
NO−Short to power in the floor wire harness;

replace the floor wire harness.

3 minutes.
23-50 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:11 61S5N000_230_0051
A A


B ground. There should be 0.5 V or less. Check for
voltage between the No. 17 terminal of the

page 23-138).

-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-51

00/10/26 16:55:11 61S5N000_230_0052
SRS

DTC 3-5: Short to Ground in Left Side Seat 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
Belt Tensioner
8. Read the DTC.
and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Short to ground in the left side seat belt
YES−Go to step 3. tensioner; replace the left side seat belt
(see page 23-4).
connector (B).
connector (A).
A
A B
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07TAZ-SZ5011A 07XAZ-SZ30100
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)

NO−Short to ground in the floor wire harness;


3 minutes.
23-52 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:12 61S5N000_230_0053
A A


ground. There should be 1 M or more. Then
check resistance between the No. 17 terminal of the
B
C

page 23-138).

-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-53

00/10/26 16:55:12 61S5N000_230_0054
SRS

DTC 21-1: Open in Left Side Seat Belt Buckle 8. Read the DTC.
Tensioner
DTC 21-2: Increased Resistance in Left Side
Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner YES−Go to step 9.
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-23). NO−Open or increased resistance in the left side
seat belt buckle tensioner; replace the left side seat
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the belt buckle.
and then goes off. 9. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for
3 minutes.
10. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) and
YES−Go to step 3. the right side seat belt buckle tensioner 4P
connector (B).
page 23-23).

4. Disconnect the left side seat belt buckle tensioner

4P connector from the floor wire harness 4P
connector (A).
A 07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-SZ30100 B

23-54 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:13 61S5N000_230_0055
11. Disconnect the floor wire harness 18P connector DTC 21-3: Short to Another Wire or
(A) from the SRS unit (B). Decreased Resistance in Left Side Seat Belt
Buckle Tensioner

and then goes off.
B
A
YES−Go to step 3.

page 23-23).
terminals of the floor wire harness 18P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
There should be 2.0−3.0 . battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes.
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR

connector (A).
YES−Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at the floor A 07SAZ-TB4011A

wire harness 18P connector and at the SRS unit. (2 JACK)
Check the connection between the floor wire
harness 18P connector and the SRS unit. If the
connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see page
23-138). 07XAZ-SZ30100
NO−Open or increased resistance in the floor wire 5. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the floor wire
harness; replace the floor wire harness. harness 4P connector.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-55

00/10/26 16:55:13 61S5N000_230_0056
SRS

8. Read the DTC. 11. Disconnect the floor wire harness 18P connector
(A) from the SRS unit (B).
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Short in the left side seat belt buckle

tensioner; replace the left side seat belt buckle.
9. DIsconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for B

3 minutes.
A
the right side seat belt buckle tensioner 4P
connector (B).
12. Disconnect the special tool (2 ) from the floor

wire harness 2P connector.

terminals of the floor wire harness 18P connector.
There should be 1 M or more.

page 23-138).
B NO−Short in the floor wire harness; replace the

floor wire harness.
23-56 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:13 61S5N000_230_0057
DTC 21-4: Short to Power in Left Side Seat 8. Read the DTC.
Belt Buckle Tensioner
YES−Go to step 9.
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds NO−Short to power in the left side seat belt buckle
and then goes off. tensioner; replace the left side seat belt buckle.
3 minutes.
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. the right side seat belt buckle tensioner 4P
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see connector (B).
page 23-23).


connector (A).
A 07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-SZ30100
5. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the floor wire B

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-57

00/10/26 16:55:14 61S5N000_230_0058
SRS

11. Disconnect the floor wire harness 18P connector DTC 21-5: Short to Ground in Left Side Seat
(A) from the SRS unit (B). Belt Buckle Tensioner

and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 3.
A

page 23-23).
12. Disconnect the special tool (2 ) from the floor 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
wire harness 2P connector. battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes.
13. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. Disconnect the left side seat belt buckle tensioner

floor wire harness 18P connector and body ground.
There should be 0.5 V or less. Check for voltage
between the No. 10 terminal of the floor wire
harness 18P connector and body ground. There
should be 0.5 V or less.
A 07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-SZ30100
page 23-138). 7. Erase the DTC memory.

23-58 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:14 61S5N000_230_0059
YES−Go to step 9.

buckle tensioner; replace the left side seat belt
buckle.
B
3 minutes.
A

the right side seat belt buckle tensioner 4P
connector (B).


There should be 1 M or more. Check resistance
should be 1 M or more.
A

B page 23-138).

-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-59

00/10/26 16:55:15 61S5N000_230_0060
SRS

DTC 4-1: Open in Right Side Seat Belt 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
Tensioner
DTC 4-2: Increased Resistance in Right Side
Seat Belt Tensioner 8. Read the DTC.
and then goes off. NO−Open or increased resistance in the right side
seat belt tensioner; replace the right side seat belt
Does the SRS indicator light stay on? (see page 23-4).
3 minutes.
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see 10. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector (A)
page 23-23). from the dashboard wire harness B 4P
connector (B).
4. Disconnect the right side seat belt tensioner 2P A

connector from the floor wire harness 2P connector.
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-SZ30100
07TAZ-SZ5011A
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)


23-60 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:15 61S5N000_230_0061
15. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for 17. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 18P
3 minutes. connector (A) from the SRS unit (B).
16. Disconnect the driver’s airbag connector (A), front

left side airbag connector (B) and left side seat belt
tensioner connector (C).
A 18. Check resistance between the No. 9 terminal and

B 18P connector. There should be 2.0−3.0 .
YES−Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at the

C dashboard wire harness B 18P connector and the
SRS unit. Check the connection between the
NO−Open or increased resistance in dashboard

B.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-61

00/10/26 16:55:16 61S5N000_230_0062
SRS

DTC 4-3: Short to Another Wire or Decreased 8. Read the DTC.
Resistance in Right Side Seat Belt Tensioner
YES−Go to step 9.
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds NO−Short in the right side seat belt tensioner;
and then goes off. replace the right side seat belt (see page 23-4).
3 minutes.
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. from the dashboard wire harness B 4P
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see connector (B).
page 23-23).

battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes. A
4. Disconnect the right side seat belt tensioner 2P

connector (A). B
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-SZ30100


07TAZ-SZ5011A
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK) 14. Read the DTC.
5. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the floor wire Is DT C 4-3 indicated?

7. Erase the DTC memory. floor wire harness.

3 minutes.
23-62 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:16 61S5N000_230_0063
passenger’s airbag connector (B) and left side seat connector (A) from the SRS unit (B).
belt tensioner (C).
A A


B 18P connector. There should be 1 M or more.

C

page 23-138).

-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-63

00/10/26 16:55:17 61S5N000_230_0064
SRS

DTC 4-4: Short to Power in Right Side Seat 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
Belt Tensioner
8. Read the DTC.
and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Short to power in the right side seat belt
YES−Go to step 3. tensioner; replace the right side seat belt
(see page 23-4).
connector (B).
connector from the floor wire harness 2P connector
(A).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
A
07XAZ-SZ30100
07TAZ-SZ5011A
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
harness 2P connector. 13. Erase the DTC memory.
14. Read the DTC.

23-64 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:17 61S5N000_230_0065
15. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for 17. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 18P
3 minutes. connector (A) from the SRS unit (B).
16. Disconnect the driver’s airbag connector (A), front

passenger’s airbag connector (B) and left side seat
belt tensioner connector (C).

A dashboard wire harness B 4P connector.

ground. There should be 0.5 V or less. Check for
voltage between the No. 18 terminal of the
B ground. There should be 0.5 V or less.

page 23-138).

-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-65

00/10/26 16:55:18 61S5N000_230_0066
SRS

DTC 4-5: Short to Ground in Right Side Seat 8. Read the DTC.
Belt Tensioner
YES−Go to step 9.
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds NO−Short to ground in the right side seat belt
and then goes off. tensioner; replace the right side seat belt
(see page 23-4).
YES−Go to step 3. 3 minutes.
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. 10. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector (A)
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see from the dashboard wire harness B 4P
page 23-23). connector (B).

A
connector (A).
B
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-SZ30100

07TAZ-SZ5011A 12. Reconnect the battery negative cable.

07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
14. Read the DTC.
harness 2P connector. Is DT C 4-5 indicated?
6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. YES−Go to step 15.
7. Erase the DTC memory. NO−Short to ground in the floor wire harness;

3 minutes.
23-66 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:18 61S5N000_230_0067
passenger’s airbag connector (B) and left side seat connector (A) from the SRS unit (B), and disconnect
belt tensioner connector (C). the special tool (2 ) from the SRS main harness
2P connector.


ground. There should be 1 M or more. Then
check resistance between the No. 18 terminal of the
B dashboard wire harness B 18P connector and body

page 23-138).

-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-67

00/10/26 16:55:18 61S5N000_230_0068
SRS

DTC 22-1: Open in Right Side Seat Belt Buckle 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
Tensioner
DTC 22-2: Increased Resistance in Right Side
Seat Belt Buckle Tensioner 8. Read the DTC.
and then goes off. NO−Open or increased resistance in the right side
seat belt buckle tensioner; replace the right side
Does the SRS indicator light stay on? seat belt buckle.
3 minutes.
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see 10. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) and
page 23-23). the left side seat belt buckle tensioner 4P
connector (B).
4. Disconnect the right side seat belt buckle tensioner

connector (A).
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-SZ30100

B
23-68 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:19 61S5N000_230_0069
(A) from the SRS unit (B). Decreased Resistance in Right Side Seat Belt
Buckle Tensioner

and then goes off.
B
A
YES−Go to step 3.

page 23-23).
terminals of the floor wire harness 18P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
There should be 2.0−3.0 . battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes.

connector (A).
YES−Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at the floor 07SAZ-TB4011A

(2 JACK)
wire harness 18P connector and at the SRS unit.
Check the connection between the floor wire
harness 18P connector and the SRS unit. If the
connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see page
23-138). 07XAZ-SZ30100
NO−Open or increased resistance in the floor wire 5. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the floor wire
harness; replace the floor wire harness. harness 4P connector.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-69

00/10/26 16:55:19 61S5N000_230_0070
SRS

YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Short in the left side seat belt buckle

tensioner; replace the left side seat belt buckle.
9. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for B

3 minutes.
A
the left side seat belt buckle tensioner 4P
connector (B).



page 23-138).
B NO−Short in the floor wire harness; replace the

floor wire harness.
23-70 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:20 61S5N000_230_0071
DTC 22-4: Short to Power in Right Side Seat 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
Belt Buckle Tensioner
8. Read the DTC.
and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Short to power in the right side seat belt
YES−Go to step 3. buckle tensioner; replace the right side seat belt
buckle.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the 10. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) and
battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes. the left side seat belt buckle tensioner 4P
connector (B).
connector (A).
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-SZ30100

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-71

00/10/26 16:55:20 61S5N000_230_0072
SRS

11. Disconnect the floor wire harness 18P connector DTC 22-5: Short to Ground in Right Side Seat
(A) from the SRS unit. Belt Buckle Tensioner

and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 3.
A

page 23-23).
12. Disconnect the special tool (2 ) from the floor 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
wire harness 2P connector. battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes.
13. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 4. Disconnect the right side seat belt buckle tensioner

There should be 0.5 V or less. Check for voltage
should be 0.5 V or less.
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-SZ30100
page 23-138). 7. Erase the DTC memory.

23-72 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:21 61S5N000_230_0073
YES−Go to step 9.

buckle tensioner; replace the left side seat belt
buckle.
B
3 minutes.
A

the left side seat belt buckle tensioner 4P
connector (B).


There should be 1 M or more. Check resistance
should be 1 M or more.
A

B page 23-138).

-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-73

00/10/26 16:55:21 61S5N000_230_0074
SRS

DTC 5-1, 5-2, 5-4, 5-8, 6-3, 6-4, 6-7, 6-8, 7-1, DTC 10-1, 10-2, 10-3, 10-4, 10-5, 10-6, 10-7:
7-2, 7-3, 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 8-5, 8-6, 9-1, 9-2: Airbags, Side Airbags and/or Seat Belt
Internal Failure of the SRS Unit Tensioners Deployed
NOTE: Before troubleshooting any of these DTCs, check The SRS unit must be replaced after any airbags have
battery/system voltage. If voltage is low, repair the deployed (see page 23-138).
charging system before troubleshooting the SRS
system.

and then goes off.
YES−Replace the SRS unit (see page 23-138).

page 23-23).
23-74 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:21 61S5N000_230_0075
DTC 13-1, 13-2: Internal Failure of the Driver’s DTC 14-1, 14-2: Internal Failure of the Front
Side Impact Sensor Passenger’s Side Impact Sensor
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-23). 1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-23).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds, SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds,
and then goes off. and then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator light stay on? Does the SRS indicator light stay on?
YES−Replace the driver’s side impact sensor (see YES−Replace the front passenger’s side impact
page 23-139). sensor (see page 23-139).
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see
page 23-23). page 23-23).
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-75

00/10/26 16:55:21 61S5N000_230_0076
SRS

DTC 9-3: Faulty Driver’s Seat Belt Buckle 7. Disconnect the floor wire harness 3P connector (A)
Switch from the driver’s seat belt buckle switch 3P
connector (B).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then buckle and

unbuckle the driver’s seat belt several times.
3. Read the DTC.

B
Is DT C 9-3 indicated? A
YES−Go to step 4.

page 23-23).
4. Check the No. 19 (7.5A) fuse in the driver’s 8. Buckle the driver’s seat belt.
Check resistance between the No. 1 and No. 3
Is the f use blown? terminals of the driver’s seat belt buckle switch 3P
connector. There should be 0−1 .
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 6. terminals of the same connector. There should be
1 M or more.
5. Replace the No. 19 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box, and turn the ignition on for 30 DRIVER’S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
3P CONNECTOR
seconds.
Did the f use blow-out again?

BLK BLU/RED
YES−Locate and repair the short to ground on the
No. 19 fuse circuit, and clear the DTC.
NO−Go to step 6.
RED/BLU
BLK
Are the resistance readings as specif ied?
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Replace the driver’s seat belt buckle assembly,

and clear the DTC.
23-76 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:22 61S5N000_230_0077
9. Unbuckle the driver’s seat belt. 10. Check resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the
Check resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 There should be 0−1 .
terminals of the driver’s seat belt buckle switch 3P
connector. There should be 0−1 . FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR

terminals of the same connector. There should be
1 M or more.
DRIVER’S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH BLK

3P CONNECTOR
RED/BLU
BLK

NO−Open in the driver’s power seat wire harness,

BLK BLU/RED open in the left side wire harness, or poor ground
connection at G551. If G551 is OK, replace the
faulty harness.

Are the resistance readings as specif ied? Does the seat belt reminder stay on?
NO−Replace the driver’s seat belt buckle assembly, NO−Go to step 12.
and clear the DTC.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-77

00/10/26 16:55:22 61S5N000_230_0078
SRS

12. Connect No. 2 terminal of the floor wire harness 3P 15. Connect the No. 4 terminal of the floor wire harness
connector to body ground with a jumper wire. 8P connector to body ground with a jumper wire.
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE

Does the seat belt reminder come on?

NO−Open in the floor wire harness, driver’s
under-dash fuse/relay box, gauge assembly/circuit NO−Open in the floor wire harness. Replace the
board or bulb. Isolate the faulty harness, and floor wire harness.
replace the harness or component as necessary.
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3
negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes.
minutes.
17. Disconnect the floor wire harness 8P connector,
14. Disconnect the floor wire harness 8P connector, reconnect the battery, and turn the ignition switch
and reconnect the battery. ON (II).
YES−Short to ground in the floor wire harness,

driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box, multiplex
control unit, or gauge assembly/circuit board.
Replace the faulty harness or component.
NO−Replace the SRS unit.
23-78 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:22 61S5N000_230_0079
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 20. Check resistance between the No. 8 terminal of the
floor wire harness 3P connector and the No. 3
19. Check resistance between the No. 3 terminal of the terminal of the floor wire harness 3P connector.
floor wire harness 3P connector and body ground. There should be 0−1 .
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS FLOOR WIRE HARNESS
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR 3P CONNECTOR 8P CONNECTOR
LT GRN LT GRN


YES−Replace the SRS unit.
NO−Open in the floor wire harness; replace the
NO−Short to ground in the floor wire harness; floor wire harness.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-79

00/10/26 16:55:22 61S5N000_230_0080
SRS

DTC 9-4: Faulty Front Passenger’s Seat Belt 6. Buckle the front passenger’s seat belt.
Buckle Switch
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-23). terminals of the front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch 3P connector. There should be 0−1 .
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then buckle and
unbuckle the front passenger’s seat belt several Check resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2
times. terminals of the same connector. There should be
1 M or more.
3. Read the DTC.
FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH 3P CONNECTOR
BLK BLU/RED
YES−Go to step 4.

Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see Terminal side of male terminals
page 23-23).

BLK RED/BLU
5. Disconnect the front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch 3P connector (A) from the floor wire harness
3P connector (B). Terminal side of male terminals
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−Replace the front passenger’s seat belt buckle

assembly, and clear the DTC.
23-80 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:23 61S5N000_230_0081
7. Unbuckle the front passenger’s seat belt. 8. Check resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the
Check resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 There should be 0−1 .
terminals of the front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch 3P connector. There should be 0−1 . FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR

terminals of the same connector. There should be
1 M or more.
FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT BELT BLK
BUCKLE SWITCH 3P CONNECTOR
BLK RED/BLU

BLK BLU/RED YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Open in the floor wire harness or poor ground

Terminal side of male terminals connection at G551. If G551 is OK, replace the floor
wire harness.
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Replace the front passenger’s seat belt buckle from the SRS unit (B).
assembly, and clear the DTC.
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-81

00/10/26 16:55:23 61S5N000_230_0082
SRS

11. Check resistance between the No. 2 terminal of the 13. Check resistance between the No. 7 terminal of the
floor wire harness 3P connector and body ground. floor wire harness and the No. 3 terminal of the
There should be 1 M or more. floor wire harness 3P connector. There should be
0−1 .
YEL
ORN


replace the floor wire harness. NO−Open in the floor wire harness; replace the
floor wire harness.
floor wire harness 3P connector and body ground. 14. Check resistance between the No. 3 terminal of the
There should be 1 M or more. floor wire harness 8P connector and the No. 2
terminal of the floor wire harness 3P connector.
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR There should be 0−1 .

ORN
YEL

YES−Go to step 13. Is the resistance as specif ied?
NO−Short to ground in the floor wire harness; YES−Replace the SRS unit.
floor wire harness.
23-82 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:23 61S5N000_230_0083
DTC 9-6: Faulty Left Front Sensor 6. Disconnect the front passenger’s airbag 4P
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-23). connector (A).

and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 3.

page 23-23).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check the A

connections between the dashboard wire harness
B 18P connector and the SRS unit, and between the
engine compartment wire harness 2P connector
and the left front sensor (see page 23-10).
Are the connections OK ? from the floor wire harness 2P connectors (A).
YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Poor contact at the SRS unit and/or left front

sensor; reconnect or replace them.

3 minutes.
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-83

00/10/26 16:55:24 61S5N000_230_0084
SRS

8. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 10. Check resistance between the No. 10 and No. 11
2P connector (A) from the left front sensor. terminals of the dashboard wire harness B 18P
A
9. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 18P Is the resistance as specif ied?
NO−Short in the engine compartment wire

harness or dashboard wire harness B; replace the
faulty harness.

B
13. Check the voltage between the No. 10 terminal of

the dashboard wire harness B 18P connector and
the body ground. There should be 1 V or less.
A
NO−Short to power in the engine compartment

wire harness or dashboard wire harness B; replace
the faulty harness.
23-84 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:24 61S5N000_230_0085
15. Connect the special tool to the engine compartment

wire harness 2P connector (A).
A
07YAZ-S3AA100
07SAZ-TB4011A

connector. There should be 1 or less.
YES−Faulty left front sensor or SRS unit. Replace

the left front sensor; if the problem is still present,
replace the SRS unit.
NO−Faulty engine compartment wire harness or

dashboard wire harness B; replace the faulty
harness.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-85

00/10/26 16:55:24 61S5N000_230_0086
SRS

DTC 9-7: Faulty Right Front Sensor 6. Disconnect the front passenger’s airbag 4P
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-23). connector (A).

and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 3.

page 23-23).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check the A

connections between the dashboard wire harness
B 18P connector and the SRS unit, and between the
engine compartment wire harness 2P connector
and the right front sensor (see page 23-10).
Are the connections OK ? from the floor wire harness 2P connectors (A).
YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Poor contact at the SRS unit and/or right front

sensor; reconnect or replace them.

3 minutes.
A
23-86 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:25 61S5N000_230_0087
8. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 10. Check resistance between the No. 1 and No. 12
2P connector (A) from the right front sensor. terminals of the dashboard wire harness B 18P
A
9. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 18P Is the resistance as specif ied?
NO−Short in the engine compartment wire

harness or dashboard wire harness B; replace the
faulty harness.

B
13. Check the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the

body ground. There should be 1 V or less.
A
NO−Short to power in the engine compartment

wire harness or dashboard wire harness B; replace
the faulty harness.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-87

00/10/26 16:55:25 61S5N000_230_0088
SRS

15. Connect the special tool to the engine compartment

wire harness 2P connector (A).
07SAZ-TB4011A
07YAZ-S3AA100

connector. There should be 1 or less.
YES−Faulty right front sensor or SRS unit. Replace

the right front sensor; if the problem is still present,
NO−Faulty engine compartment wire harness or

dashboard wire harness B; replace the faulty
harness.
23-88 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:25 61S5N000_230_0089
DTC 11-1: Open or Increased Resistance in 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
Driver’s Side Airbag Inflator
8. Read the DTC.
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds, Is DT C 11-1 indicated?
and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Open or increased resistance in the driver’s
YES−Go to step 3. side airbag inflator; replace the driver’s side
airbag.
battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes. from the front passenger’s side airbag (B).

from the driver’s side airbag (B).
B B
A 11. Disconnect the floor wire harness 18P connector

(A) from the SRS unit (B). Do not disconnect the
07SAZ-TB4011A special tool (2 ) from the floor wire harness 2P
(2 JACK)
connector.
07XAZ-S1A0200

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-89

00/10/26 16:55:26 61S5N000_230_0090
SRS

12. Check resistance between the No. 6 and No. 17 DTC 11-3: Short to Another Wire or
terminals of the floor wire harness 18P connector. Decreased Resistance in Driver’s Side Airbag
There should be 2.0−3.0 . Inflator
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR 1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-23).

and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 3.

Wire side of female terminals Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see
page 23-23).
Is the resistance as specif ied? 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
YES−Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at the floor
wire harness 18P connector and the SRS unit; 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A)
check the connection at the floor wire harness 18P from the driver’s side airbag (B).
connector and SRS unit. If the connector is OK,

B
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-S1A0200

23-90 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:26 61S5N000_230_0091
8. Read the DTC. 13. Check resistance between the No. 6 and No. 17
Is DT C 11-3 indicated? There should be 1 M or more.
YES−Go to step 9. FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR
NO−Short to another wire in the driver’s side

airbag inflator; replace the driver’s side airbag.

3 minutes.

from the front passenger’s side airbag (B).
YES−Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit.
B NO−Short to another wire in the floor wire


12. Disconnect the floor wire harness 18P connector

-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-91

00/10/26 16:55:26 61S5N000_230_0092
SRS

DTC 11-4: Short to Power in Driver’s Side 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
Airbag Inflator
8. Read the DTC.
and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Short to power in the driver’s side airbag
YES−Go to step 3. inflator; replace the driver’s side airbag.
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. 9. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see 3 minutes.
page 23-23).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the from the front passenger’s side airbag (B), and
battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes. disconnect the special tool (2 ) from the floor wire
B
B
A
A
07SAZ-TB4011A (A) from the SRS unit (B).
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-S1A0200

B
23-92 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:27 61S5N000_230_0093
12. Check resistance between the No. 17 and No. 8 DTC 11-5: Short to Ground in Driver’s Side
terminals of the floor wire harness 18P connector, Airbag Inflator
and between the No. 17 and No. 9 terminals of the
floor wire harness 18P connector. There should be 1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-23).
1 M or more.
and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 3.

page 23-23).
Wire side of female terminals 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
Is the resistance as specif ied? 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A)

07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-S1A0200

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-93

00/10/26 16:55:27 61S5N000_230_0094
SRS

6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 12. Check resistance between the No. 17 and No. 15
terminals of the floor wire harness 18P connector,
7. Erase the DTC memory. and between the No. 17 and No. 16 terminals of the
floor wire harness 18P connector. Then check
8. Read the DTC. resistance between the No. 17 terminal of the floor
wire harness 18P connector and body ground.
NO−Short to ground in the driver’s side airbag

inflator; replace the driver’s side airbag.

3 minutes.

from the front passenger’s side airbag (B), and
disconnect the special tool (2 ) from the floor wire

B

23-94 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:28 61S5N000_230_0095
DTC 12-1: Open or Increased Resistance in 5. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the floor wire
Front Passenger’s Side Airbag Inflator harness 2P connector.
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-23). 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the 7. Erase the DTC memory.
and then goes off. 8. Read the DTC.
Does the SRS indicator light stay on? Is DT C 12-1 indicated?
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. NO−Open or increased resistance in the front
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see passenger’s side airbag inflator, replace the front
page 23-23). passenger’s side airbag.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the 9. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for
battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes. 3 minutes.
4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) 10. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A)
from the front passenger’s side airbag (B). from the driver’s side airbag (B).
B
B
A
07SAZ-TB4011A A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-S1A0200
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-95

00/10/26 16:55:28 61S5N000_230_0096
SRS

(A) from the SRS unit (B). Do not disconnect the Decreased Resistance in Front Passenger’s
special tool (2 ) from the floor wire harness 2P Side Airbag Inflator
connector.

and then goes off.

B
YES−Go to step 3.
A
page 23-23).

12. Check resistance between the No. 7 and No. 18 battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes.
There should be 2.0−3.0 . 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A)

A
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)

wire harness 18P connector and the SRS unit;
07XAZ-S1A0200
check the connection at the floor wire harness 18P
connector and SRS unit. If the connector is OK,
replace the SRS unit. 5. Connect the special tool (2 ) to the floor wire
23-96 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:28 61S5N000_230_0097
6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 12. Disconnect the floor wire harness 18P connector
8. Read the DTC.
YES−Go to step 9
B
NO−Short to another wire in the front passenger’s
side airbag inflator; replace the front passenger’s
A
side airbag.

3 minutes.

from the driver’s side airbag (B). 13. Check resistance between the No. 7 and No. 18
A
NO−Short to another wire in the floor wire

-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-97

00/10/26 16:55:29 61S5N000_230_0098
SRS

DTC 12-4: Short to Power in Front Passenger’s 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
Side Airbag Inflator
8. Read the DTC.
and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 9.
NO−Short to power in the front passenger’s side
YES−Go to step 3. airbag inflator, replace the front passenger’s side
airbag.
battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes. from the driver’s side airbag (B).

A
07SAZ-TB4011A (A) from the SRS unit (B).
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-S1A0200

harness 2P connector. B
23-98 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:29 61S5N000_230_0099
12. Check resistance between the No. 18 and No. 8 DTC 12-5: Short to Ground in Front
terminals of the floor wire harness 18P connector, Passenger’s Side Airbag Inflator
and between the No. 18 and No. 9 terminals of the
floor wire harness 18P connector. There should be 1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-23).
1 M or more.
and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 3.

page 23-23).
Wire side of female terminals 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
Is the resistance as specif ied? 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A)

A
07SAZ-TB4011A
(2 JACK)
07XAZ-S1A0200

(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-99

00/10/26 16:55:29 61S5N000_230_0100
SRS

6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 12. Check resistance between the No. 15 and No. 18
terminals of the floor wire harness 18P connector,
7. Erase the DTC memory. and between the No. 16 and No. 18 terminals of the
floor wire harness 18P connector. Then check
8. Read the DTC. resistance between the No. 18 terminal of the SRS
floor harness 18P connector and body ground.
NO−Short to ground in the front passenger’s side

airbag inflator, replace the front passenger’s side
airbag.

3 minutes.


B replace the floor wire harness.

23-100 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:30 61S5N000_230_0101
DTC 13-3: No Signal from the Driver’s Side 6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A)
Impact Sensor from the driver’s side impact sensor (B).

SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds, B
A
and then goes off.

07YAZ-S3AA100
YES−Go to step 3.

07SAZ-TB4011A
page 23-23).

4. Check the connection between the floor wire

harness 2P connector and the driver’s side impact
sensor. 7. Connect the special tool to the floor wire harness
2P connector.
Is the connection OK ?
YES−Go to step 5. (A) from the SRS unit (B).
NO−Poor contact between the floor wire harness

2P connector and the driver’s side impact sensor;
reconnect or replace the driver’s side impact
sensor.
5. Disconnect the driver’s side airbag and front

passenger’s side airbag 2P connectors. B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-101

00/10/26 16:55:30 61S5N000_230_0102
SRS

9. Check resistance between the No. 8 and No. 15 DTC 13-4: Faulty Power Supply to the Driver’s
terminals of the floor wire harness 18P connector. Side Impact Sensor
There should be 0−1.0 .
and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 3.

Wire side of female terminals page 23-23).

Is the resistance as specif ied? battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes.
YES−Faulty driver’s side impact sensor or SRS 4. Disconnect the driver’s side airbag and front
unit; replace the driver’s side impact sensor. If the passenger’s side airbag 2P connectors.
problem is still present, replace the SRS unit.

floor wire harness.
23-102 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:30 61S5N000_230_0103
5. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) 7. Check resistance between the No. 8 terminal of the
from the driver’s side impact sensor (B). floor wire harness 18P connector and body ground.
B Wire side of female terminals

(A) from the SRS unit (B). Is the resistance as specif ied?
YES−Go to step 8.


B terminals of the floor wire harness 18P connector.
A
YES−Faulty driver’s side impact sensor or SRS

unit; replace the driver’s side impact sensor. If the
problem is still present, replace the SRS unit.

floor wire harness.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-103

00/10/26 16:55:31 61S5N000_230_0104
SRS

DTC 14-3: No Signal from the Front 6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A)
Passenger’s Side Impact Sensor from the front passenger’s side impact sensor (B).

SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds, B
and then goes off.
A

07YAZ-S3AA100
YES−Go to step 3.

page 23-23).
07SAZ-TB4011A

4. Check the connection between the floor wire

harness 2P connector and the front passenger’s
side impact sensor.
7. Connect the special tool to the floor wire harness
Is the connection OK ? 2P connector.
YES−Go to step 5. 8. Disconnect the floor wire harness 18P connector

NO−Poor contact between the floor wire harness
2P connector and the front passenger’s side impact
sensor; reconnect or replace the front passenger’s
side impact sensor.
5. Disconnect the driver’s side airbag and front

passenger’s side airbag 2P connectors.
B
23-104 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:31 61S5N000_230_0105
9. Check resistance between the No. 9 and No. 16 DTC 14-4: Faulty Power Supply to the Front
terminals of the floor wire harness 18P connector. Passenger’s Side Impact Sensor
and then goes off.
YES−Go to step 3.

Wire side of female terminals page 23-23).

Is the resistance as specif ied? battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes.
YES−Faulty front passenger’s side impact sensor 4. Disconnect the driver’s side airbag and front
or SRS unit; replace the front passenger’s side passenger’s side airbag 2P connectors.
impact sensor. If the problem is still present,

floor wire harness.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-105

00/10/26 16:55:32 61S5N000_230_0106
SRS

5. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) 7. Check resistance between the No. 9 terminal of the
from the front passenger’s side impact sensor (B). floor wire harness 18P connector and body ground.
B
A Wire side of female terminals

YES−Go to step 8.

B 8. Check resistance between the No. 9 and No. 16

A
YES−Faulty front passenger’s side impact sensor

or SRS unit; replace the front passenger’s side
impact sensor. If the problem is still present,

floor wire harness.
23-106 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:32 61S5N000_230_0107
DTC 15-1: Faulty OPDS Unit 8. Check for voltage between the No. 4 terminal of the
OPDS unit harness 8P connector and body ground.
1. Make sure nothing is sitting on the front passenger’s There should be battery voltage.
seat.
2. Initialize the OPDS unit (see page 23-24). OPDS UNIT HARNESS 8P CONNECTOR
4. Read the DTC.
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Wire side of female terminals.

page 23-23).
5. Check the No. 9 (10A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box. YES−Go to step 16.
Is the f use OK ? NO−Open in the floor wire harness or in the OPDS

unit harness; replace the faulty harness.
YES−Go to step 6.
9. Replace the No. 9 (10A) fuse in the under-dash
NO−Go to step 9. fuse/relay box.
6. Disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P connector (A) 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) for 30 seconds, then
from the OPDS unit (B). turn it OFF.
11. Check the No. 9 (10A) fuse in under-dash fuse/relay

box.
B
Is the f use OK ?

A page 23-23).
NO−Go to step 12.

fuse/relay box.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-107

00/10/26 16:55:32 61S5N000_230_0108
SRS

13. Disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P connector (A) 17. Check resistance between the No. 8 terminal of the
from the OPDS unit (B). OPDS unit harness 8P connector and body ground.
OPDS UNIT HARNESS 8P CONNECTOR
B

14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) for 30 seconds, then
turn it off. Is the resistance as specif ied?
15. Check the No. 9 (10A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ YES−Go to step 18.
relay box.
NO−Open in the floor wire harness, OPDS unit
Is the f use OK ? harness, or poor ground (G551). If G551 is OK,
replace the faulty harness.
YES−Short to ground in the OPDS unit; replace the
OPDS unit. 18. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for
3 minutes.
NO−Short to ground in the No. 9 (10A) circuit.
19. Disconnect the side airbag connectors (A).
23-108 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:32 61S5N000_230_0109
20. Disconnect the floor wire harness 18P connector 22. Check resistance between the No. 3 terminal of the
(A) from the SRS unit (B). floor wire harness 18P connector and the No. 7
terminal of the OPDS unit harness 8P connector.
B
A OPDS UNIT HARNESS 8P CONNECTOR
21. Check resistance between the No. 3 terminal of the Wire side of female terminals
There should be 1 M or more. Is the resistance as specif ied?
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR YES−Go to step 23.
NO−Open in the floor wire harness or in the OPDS

unit harness; replace the faulty harness.
NO−Short to ground in the floor wire harness or in

the OPDS unit harness; replace the faulty
harness.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-109

00/10/26 16:55:33 61S5N000_230_0110
SRS

23. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 2P 26. Check for voltage between the No. 3 terminal of the
connector (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box floor wire harness 18P connector and body ground.
(B). There should be 0.5 V or less.
A FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR
B Wire side of female terminals
24. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Is the voltage as specif ied?
25. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES−Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit. Replace the
OPDS unit. If the problem is still present, replace
the SRS unit.
NO−Short to power in the floor wire harness or in

the OPDS unit harness; replace the faulty
harness.
23-110 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:33 61S5N000_230_0111
DTC 15-2: Faulty Side Airbag Indicator Light 8. Check for a blown side airbag indicator light.
Circuit
Is the side airbag indicator light OK ?
YES−Go to step 9.
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds, NO−Blown side airbag indicator; replace the
and then goes off. gauge assembly.
Does the SRS indicator light stay on? 9. Disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P connector (A)
from the OPDS unit (B).
YES−Go to step 3.

B
page 23-23).
3. Make sure nothing is sitting on the front passenger’s

seat.
A
side airbag indicator light comes on.
Does the side airbag indicator light come on?
YES−Go to step 5.
NO−Go to step 6.
5. Make sure the side airbag indicator light comes on OPDS unit harness 8P connector and body ground.
for 5 seconds and then goes off. There should be battery voltage.
Does the side airbag indicator light go of f ?

YES−Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit; replace the
OPDS unit. If the problem is still present, replace
the SRS unit.
NO−Go to step 36.
7. Check the No. 19 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/

relay box. Wire side of female terminals.
Is the f use OK ?
YES−Go to step 8.
NO−Short to ground in the No. 19 (7.5A) fuse
circuit. NO−Go to step 24.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-111

00/10/26 16:55:33 61S5N000_230_0112
SRS

13. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness A 17P 17. Disconnect gauge assembly 22P connector B (A)
connector (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. from the gauge assembly.

OPDS unit harness 8P connector and body ground. 19. Check for voltage between the No. 3 terminal of the
There should be 0.5 V or less. OPDS unit harness 8P connector and body ground.
There should be 0.5 V or less.

Wire side of female terminals.


YES−Faulty OPDS unit; replace the OPDS unit.
YES−Short to power in the gauge assembly;
NO−Go to step 16. replace the gauge assembly.
NO−Go to step 20.
23-112 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:34 61S5N000_230_0113
21. Disconnect the floor wire harness 6P connector (A) 25. Backprobe the No. 21 terminal of the dashboard
from the dashboard wire harness A 6P wire harness A 22P connector. Do not disconnect
connector (B). the gauge assembly connector B (22P) from the
gauge assembly.
27. Check for voltage between the No. 21 terminal of

gauge assembly connector B (22P) and body
ground. There should be battery voltage.
B
A
PNK/BLU

OPDS unit harness 8P connector and body ground. Wire side of female terminals
There should be 0.5 V or less.

NO−Go to step 32.

from the dashboard wire harness A 6P
connector (B).
YES−Short to power in dashboard wire harness A;

replace dashboard wire harness A.
NO−Short to power in the floor wire harness or in B

the OPDS unit harness; if the OPDS unit harness is
A
OK, replace the floor wire harness.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-113

00/10/26 16:55:34 61S5N000_230_0114
SRS

30. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 32. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
31. Check for voltage between the No. 4 terminal of the 33. Disconnect gauge assembly connector B (22P) (A)
dashboard wire harness A 6P connector and body from the gauge assembly.
ground. There should be battery voltage.
A
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS A 6P CONNECTOR
Is there battery voltage? 34. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES−Poor contact at dashboard wire harness A 6P 35. Check for voltage between the No. 17 terminal of
and floor wire harness 6P connectors, an open in gauge assembly connector B (22P) and body
the floor wire harness or in the OPDS unit harness. ground. There should be battery voltage.
Check the connection between the dashboard wire
harness A 6P and floor wire harness 6P connectors; GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B (22P)
if the connection is OK, replace the faulty
harness.
NO−Poor contact at gauge assembly connector B

(22P) or an open in dashboard wire harness A.
Check gauge assembly connector B (22P); if the YEL
connections are OK, replace the dashboard wire
harness A.
YES−Faulty side airbag indicator light circuit;

replace the gauge assembly.
NO−Open in dashboard wire harness A; replace

dashboard wire harness A.
23-114 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:35 61S5N000_230_0115
36. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 41. Check resistance between the No. 21 terminal of
gauge assembly connector B (22P) and body
37. Disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P connector (A) ground. There should 1 M or more.
from the OPDS unit (B).
PNK/BLU
38. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES−Short to ground in the side airbag indicator
light circuit; replace the gauge assembly.
Does the side airbag indicator light come on?
NO−Short to ground in dashboard wire harness A,
YES−Go to step 39. floor wire harness or OPDS unit harness; replace
the faulty harness.
NO−Faulty OPDS unit; replace the OPDS unit.
40. Disconnect the gauge assembly connector B (22P)

(A) from the gauge assembly.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-115

00/10/26 16:55:35 61S5N000_230_0116
SRS

DTC 15-3: Faulty OPDS Sensor 7. Replace the OPDS unit (see page 23-140), and
reinitialize the OPDS system.
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds, 9. Read the DTC.
and then goes off.
YES−Replace the SRS unit.
YES−Go to step 3.
NO−System is OK.
page 23-23).
3. Check the connection at the OPDS sensor harness

connector and the OPDS unit connector.
Are the connections OK ?
YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Reconnect the OPDS sensor harness

connector, and clear the DTC.
4. Replace the OPDS sensor/seat back foam (see page

20-82), and reinitialize the OPDS system (see page
23-24).
6. Read the DTC.
YES−Go to step 7.
NO−System is OK.
23-116 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:35 61S5N000_230_0117
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting

The SRS Indicator Light Doesn’t Come On 4. Check for voltage between the No. 14 terminal of
gauge assembly connector A (22P) and body
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check to see if ground within the first 6 seconds after turning the
the other indicator lights come on (brake system, ignition switch ON (II). There should be 8.5 V or less.
etc).
Do the other indicator lights come on?
YES−Go to step 2.
NO−Go to step 8.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect

gauge assembly connector A (22P) from the gauge
assembly.
A Is voltage as specif ied?
YES−Faulty SRS indicator light circuit in the gauge

assembly; replace the gauge assembly.
NO−Go to step 5.
3. Check resistance between the No. 18 terminal of

gauge assembly connector A (22P) and body
ground. There should be 0−1.0 .
Is resistance as specif ied?
YES−Go to step 4.
NO−Open in the BLK wire of dashboard wire

harness A or faulty body ground terminal (G501). If
the body ground terminal is OK, replace dashboard
wire harness A. (cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-117

00/10/26 16:55:35 61S5N000_230_0118
SRS
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting (cont’d)

6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 8P connector (A) 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check the No. 19
from the SRS unit. (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
A Did f use No. 19 ( 7 .5A) blow?
NO−Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect gauge assembly connector B (22P) (A)

from the gauge assembly.
7. Connect a voltmeter between the No. 14 terminal

(＋) of gauge assembly connector A (22P) and body
ground. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and
measure voltage. There should be 0.5 V or less.
Is voltage as specif ied?
NO−Short to power in the PNK wire of dashboard

wire harness A or in the floor wire harness; replace
the faulty harness.
23-118 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:36 61S5N000_230_0119
10. Connect a voltmeter between the No. 17 terminal 11. Replace the No. 19 (7.5A) fuse, and check to see if
(＋) of gauge assembly connector B (22P) the SRS indicator light comes on.
connector and body ground. Turn the ignition
switch ON (II), and measure voltage. There should Does the SRS indicator light come on?
be battery voltage.
NO−Short to ground in the under-dash fuse/relay
box No. 19 (7.5A) fuse line.

assembly or poor contact at gauge assembly
connector B (22P) and the gauge assembly; if the
connection is OK, replace the gauge assembly.
NO−Open in the under-dash fuse/relay box No. 19

(7.5A) fuse line, or open in the YEL wire of
dashboard wire harness A. If the under-dash
fuse/relay box is OK, replace the faulty harness.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-119

00/10/26 16:55:36 61S5N000_230_0120
SRS

The SRS Indicator Light Stays On After the 8. Disconnect the driver’s airbag 4P connector.
Ignition Switch is Turned ON (II)
Does the SRS indicator light go of f while the DT C

memory is erased?
NO−Go to step 2.
2. Check the No. 13 (10A) fuse in the under-dash

fuse/relay box.
Is the f use OK ?
YES−Go to step 19. 9. Disconnect the front passenger’s airbag 4P

connector.
NO−Go to step 3.

fuse/relay box.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and wait for 30

seconds. Then turn the ignition switch OFF.

fuse/relay box.
Is the f use OK ?
NO−Go to step 6.

fuse/relay box.
7. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for

3 minutes.
23-120 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:36 61S5N000_230_0121
10. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors. 12. Reconnect the negative battery cable.


fuse/relay box.
Is the f use OK ?
YES−Short to ground in the SRS unit; replace the

SRS unit.
NO−Go to step 15.

fuse/relay box.
connector (A) from the SRS unit. 16. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 2P
connector (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.


fuse/relay box.
Is the f use OK ?
YES−Short to ground in the dashboard wire

harness B; replace dashboard wire harness B.
NO−Short to ground in the under-dash fuse/relay

box No. 13 (10A) fuse line; replace the under-dash
fuse/relay box or repair it.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-121

00/10/26 16:55:37 61S5N000_230_0122
SRS

19. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for 22. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors.
three minutes.
20. Disconnect the driver’s airbag 4P connector.

connector (A) from the SRS unit.
21. Disconnect the front passenger’s 4P connector.
23-122 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:37 61S5N000_230_0123
24. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 28. Check resistance between the No. 3 terminal of the
25. Connect a voltmeter between the No. 3 terminal No. 2 terminal of the dashboard wire harness B 2P
(＋) of dashboard wire harness B 18P connector connector. There should be 0−1.0 .
and body ground. Turn the ignition switch ON (II),
and measure voltage. There should be battery DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B 2P CONNECTOR
voltage.
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B 18P CONNECTOR Wire side of

female terminals
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B
18P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals Is the resistance as specif ied?
YES−Open in the under-dash fuse/relay box or

Is there battery voltage? poor contact at the dashboard wire harness B 2P
connector; check the connection. If the connection
YES−Go to step 29. is OK, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.
NO−Go to step 26. NO−Open in dashboard wire harness B; replace

connector (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 30. Disconnect the floor wire harness 8P connector (A)
from the SRS unit.
A
A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-123

00/10/26 16:55:37 61S5N000_230_0124
SRS

31. Connect the No. 3 terminal of the dashboard wire 38. Disconnect the gauge assembly connector A (22P)
harness B 18P connector and the No. 5 terminal of (A) from the gauge assembly.
floor wire harness 8P connector with a jumper wire.

JUMPER
WIRE DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B
18P CONNECTOR
32. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 39. Check resistance between the No. 5 terminal of the
33. Check the SRS indicator light. There should be 1 M or more.
Does the SRS indicator light go of f ? FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 8P CONNECTOR
NO−Go to step 34.
35. Disconnect the jumper wire between the No. 3

terminal of the dashboard wire harness B 18P
connector and the No. 5 terminal of the floor wire
harness 8P connector. Wire side of female terminals

fuse/relay box. Is the resistance as specif ied?
Is the f use OK ? YES−Faulty SRS indicator light circuit in the gauge

assembly; replace the gauge assembly.
NO−Short to ground in the floor wire harness or in
NO−Go to step 37. dashboard wire harness A; replace the faulty
harness.
fuse/relay box.
23-124 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:38 61S5N000_230_0125
40. Disconnect the gauge assembly connector A (22P) 42. Disconnect the floor wire harness 8P connector (A)
(A) from the gauge assembly. from the SRS unit.
41. Check resistance between the No. 14 terminal of 43. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A) to the Data Link
gauge assembly connector A (22P) and the No. 5 Connector (16P) (B) and follow the tester’s prompts
terminal of the floor wire harness 8P connector. in the ’’SCS’’ menu.
There should be 1 or less.

A B

assembly or poor contact at the gauge assembly
connector B (22P); Check the connection. If the
connection is OK, replace the gauge assembly.
NO−Open in the floor wire harness or in

dashboard wire harness A; replace the faulty
harness.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-125

00/10/26 16:55:38 61S5N000_230_0126
SRS


wire harness 8P connector; check the connection at
the floor wire harness 8P connector and the SRS
unit. If the connection is OK, replace the SRS
unit.
NO−Open in the SCS line between the No. 6

terminal of the floor wire harness 8P connector and
the No. 9 terminal (brown wire) of the Data Link
Connector (DLC) (16P) or open between the No. 4
terminal of the Data Link Connector (DLC) (16P) and
body ground.
23-126 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:38 61S5N000_230_0127
Driver’s Airbag Replacement

Removal 3. Remove the two Torx bolts (A) using a Torx T30 bit.
Then remove the driver’s airbag (B).
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at
B
2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering

wheel, then disconnect the connector between the
cable reel 4P connector (B) and driver’s airbag 4P
connector (C).
C B A
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-127

00/10/26 16:55:39 61S5N000_230_0128
SRS
Driver’s Airbag Replacement (cont’d)

Installation 2. Connect the cable reel 4P connector (A) to the
driver’s airbag 4P connector (B), then install the
1. Place the new driver’s airbag (A) in the steering access panel (C) on the steering wheel.
wheel, and secure it with new Torx bolts (B).
B
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
A B C
3. Connect the battery negative cable.
A 4. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system

operation:
• Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator

light should come on for about 6 seconds and
then go off.
• Make sure the horn button works.

23-128 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:40 61S5N000_230_0131
Side Airbag Replacement

NOTE: Review the seats replacement procedure in the Installation
body section (see page 20-77) before performing repair
or service.
Removal Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are

not pinched or interfering with other parts.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait at
least 3 minutes before beginning work. NOTE:
• If the side airbag lid is fixed by a tape, remove the
2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P tape.
connector (A). • Do not open the lid of the side airbag cover.
• Use new mounting nuts tightened to the specified
torque when you replace a side airbag.
• Make sure that the seat-back cover is installed
properly. Improper installation may prevent proper
deployment.
1. Place the new side airbag on the seat

A back-frame (A). Tighten the side airbag mounting
nuts (B).
3. Remove the seat assembly (see page 20-77) and

seat-back cover (see page 20-82).
4. Remove the mounting nut (A) and the side

airbag (B). B
6.3 N·m
(0.64 kgf·m,
4.65 lbf·ft)
2. Install the seat-back cover (see page 20-82).
3. Install the seat assembly (see page 20-77), then

connect the side airbag harness 2P connector.
4. Move the front seat and the seat-back through their

full ranges of movement, making sure the harness
wires are not pinched or interfering with other parts.

B A
6. After installing the side airbag, confirm proper
system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II);
the SRS indicator light should come on for about 6
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-131

00/10/26 16:55:40 61S5N000_230_0132
SRS
Airbag Disposal
Special Tool Required Driver’s Airbag:
Deployment tool 07HAZ-SG00500
4. Remove the access panel (A), then disconnect the
Before scrapping any airbags, side airbags, seat belt 4P connector between the driver’s airbag (B) and
tensioners or seat belt buckle tensioners (including the cable reel (C).
those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags,
side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt buckle
tensioners must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within
the warranty period, the Acura Parts and Service
Manager must give approval and/or special instruction
before deploying the airbags, side airbags, seat belt
tensioners and seat belt buckle tensioners. Only after
the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners or seat
belt buckle tensioners have been deployed (as the
result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be
scrapped. C
If the airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and
seat belt buckle tensioners appear intact (not deployed),
treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure. B A
Deploying Airbags In the vehicle

Front Passenger’s Airbag:
If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its
airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and seat belt 5. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the 4P
buckle tensioners should be deployed while still in the connector between the front passenger’s airbag (A)
vehicle. The airbags, side airbags, seat belt tensioners and dashboard wire harness B (B).
and seat belt buckle tensioners should not be
considered as salvageable parts and should never be
installed in another vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the

battery negative cable and wait at least 3 minutes.
2. Confirm that each airbag, side airbag and seat belt
tensioner is securely mounted.
3. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly
by following the check procedure on the tool label.
23-132 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:41 61S5N000_230_0133
Side Airbag: 9. Pull the seat belt out all the way and cut it.
6. Disconnect the 2P connector between the side
airbag (A) and the floor wire harness (B). 10. Cut off each connector, strip the ends of the wires,
and connect the deployment tool alligator clips (A)
to the wires. Place the deployment tool at least 30
feet (10 meters) away from the vehicle.
NOTE: The driver’s airbag and the front passenger’s

airbag has four wires, two yellow and two red.
A Twist each pair of like colored wires together, and
connect an alligator clip to each pair.
B
A
A
Seat belt tensioner:

7. Disconnect the 2P connector between the seat belt
tensioner (A) and floor wire harness (B).
A
Seat belt buckle tensioner:
8. Disconnect the 4P connector between the seat belt

buckle tensioner (A) and floor wire harness (B). 07HAZ-SG00500
A
B
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-133

00/10/26 16:55:41 61S5N000_230_0134
SRS
Airbag Disposal (cont’d)

11. Connect a 12 volt battery to the tool. Deploying the Components Out of the
Vehicle
• If the green light on the tool comes on, the igniter
circuit is defective and cannot deploy the If an intact airbag or tensioner has been removed from
component. Go to Damaged Airbag Special a scrapped vehicle, or has been found defective or
Procedure. damaged during transit, storage or service, it should be
• If the red light on the tool comes on, the deployed as follows:
component is ready to be deployed.
12. Push the tool’s deployment switch. The airbags and

tensioners should deploy (deployment is both
highly audible and visible: a loud noise and rapid
inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation).
• If the components deploy and the green light on

the tool comes on, continue with this procedure.
• If an component doesn’t deploy, yet the green 1. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly
light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to by following the check procedure on this page or
Damaged components Special Procedure. on the tool label.
• During deployment the airbag can become hot 2. Position the airbag face up, outdoors on flat ground
enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after at least 30 feet (10 meters) from any obstacles or
deployment before touching the airbag. people.
3. Follow steps 9, 10, 11, and 12 of the in-vehicle
13. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be deployment procedure.
reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and seal
it securely. Disposal of Damaged Components
1. If installed in a vehicle, follow the removal
A
procedure for the driver’s airbag (see page 23-127),
front passenger’s airbag (see page 23-129), side
airbag (see page 23-131), seat belt tensioner (see
page 23-4) and seat belt buckle tensioner.
2. In all cases, make a short circuit by twisting
together the two inflator wires.
3. Package the component in exactly the same
packaging that the new replacement part come in.
4. Mark the outside of the box ’’DAMAGED AIRBAG
NOT DEPLOYED’’, ’’DAMAGED SIDE AIRBAG NOT
DEPLOYED’’, ’’DAMAGED SEAT BELT TENSIONER
NOT DEPLOYED’’ or ’’DAMAGED SEAT BELT
BUCKLE TENSIONER’’ so it does not get confused
with your parts stock.
5. Contact your Acura Parts and Service Manager for
how and where to return it for disposal.
Deployment Tool Check

1. Connect the yellow clips to both switch protector
handles on the tool; connect the tool to a battery.
2. Push the operation switch: green means the tool is
OK; red means the tool is faulty.
3. Disconnect the battery and the yellow clips.
23-134 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:42 61S5N000_230_0135
Cable Reel Replacement

Removal 6. Remove the dashboard lower cover (A).
1. Make sure the wheels are aligned straight ahead.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at

least 3 minutes.
3. Remove the driver’s airbag (see page 23-127).
4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the cruise

control set/resume switch, then remove the
steering wheel bolt (B).
7. Remove the column cover screws (A), then remove

the column covers (B, C).
5. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove

the steering wheel with a steering wheel puller (see
step 3 on page 17-24). C
Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering
column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-135

00/10/26 16:55:42 61S5N000_230_0136
SRS
Cable Reel Replacement (cont’d)

8. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 4P Installation
connector (A) from the cable reel 4P connector (B),
then disconnect the dashboard wire harness B 5P 1. Before installing the steering wheel, align the front
connector (C) from the cable reel (D). wheels straight ahead.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at

D
least 3 minutes.
C 3. Set the cancel sleeve (A) so that the projections (B)

are aligned vertically.
A A
B
B
9. Release the tab (A), then remove the cable reel

from the column.
4. Carefully install the cable reel (A) on the steering

column shaft. Then connect the 5P connector (B) to
the cable reel, and connect the 4P connector (C) to
the SRS main harness 4P connector (D).
A A
23-136 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:43 61S5N000_230_0137
5. Install the steering column covers. 8. Install the driver’s airbag (see page 23-128).
6. If necessary, center the cable reel. (New 9. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
replacement cable reels come centered.) Do this by
first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. 10. After installing the cable reel, confirm proper
Then rotate it counterclockwise (approximately system operation:
2 1/2 turns) until the arrow mark on the cable reel
label points straight up. • Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator
light should come on for about 6 seconds and
then go off.
• After the SRS indicator light has turned off, turn
the steering wheel fully left and right to confirm
the SRS indicator light does not come on.
• Make sure the horn button works.
7. Align the projections on the cable reel with the

holes on the steering wheel, and install the steering
wheel with a new steering wheel bolt (A).
A
38 N·m
(3.9 kgf·m,
28 lbf·ft)
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-137

00/10/26 16:55:43 61S5N000_230_0138
SRS
SRS Unit Replacement

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at 1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with Torx bolts (B), then
least 3 minutes before beginning work. connect the connectors (C) to the SRS unit; push it
into position until it clicks.
2. Disconnect the driver’s and front passenger’s
airbag connectors (see page 23-18). NOTE:
• When tightening the Torx bolts to the specified
3. Disconnect the side airbag connectors (see page torque after replacement, be careful to turn them
23-18). in so that their heads rest squarely on the
brackets.
4. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors (see
B
page 23-19) and both seat belt buckle tensioner 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
connectors (see page 23-19).
A
5. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (see
page 20-69).
6. Pull down the carpet, then remove the torx bolt (A)
from the SRS unit.
2. Reinstall the dashboard center lower cover (see

page 20-69).
3. Reconnect the driver’s and front passenger’s airbag

4. Reconnect the side airbag connectors (see page 23-

7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the two torx 18).
bolts (A), then pull out the SRS unit.
5. Reconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors (see
A page 23-19) and both seat belt buckle tensioner
7. Initialize the OPDS unit (see page 23-24).
8. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system

operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS
indicator light should come on for about 6 seconds
and then go off.
23-138 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:43 61S5N000_230_0139
Side Impact Sensor Replacement

• Removal of the airbag must be performed • Be sure to install the harness wires so that they
according to the precautions/procedures are not pinched or interfering with other parts.
described before. • Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II) and do not
• Before disconnecting the side impact sensor 2P connect the battery cable while replacing the side
connector(s), disconnect the side airbag 2P impact sensor.
connector(s).
• Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II) and do not 1. Install the new side impact sensor with a new Torx
connect the battery cable while replacing the side bolt (A) then connect the floor wire harness 2P
impact sensor. connector (B) to the side impact sensor (C).

2. Remove the seat assembly (see page 20-77).
3. Remove the B-pillar lower trim panel (see page 20-

57).

from the side impact sensor.
B
5. Remove the Torx bolt (A) using a Torx T30 bit, then
remove the side impact sensor (B).
A C
9.8 N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
2. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
3. After installing the side impact sensor, confirm

proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch
ON (II): the SRS indicator light should come on for
about 6 seconds and then go off.
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-139

00/10/26 16:55:44 61S5N000_230_0140
SRS
OPDS Unit Replacement

NOTE: Review the seats replacement procedure in the Installation
body section (see page 20-77) before performing repair
or service. 1. Place the new OPDS unit on the seat-back frame.
Tighten the two screws (A), and connect the OPDS
Removal unit harness 8P and sensor connector to the OPDS
unit. Reinstall the cover.
2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P connector

(see step 4 on page 23-18).
3. Remove the seat assembly (see page 20-77) and

seat-back cover (see page 20-82).
4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the OPDS

unit harness 8P and sensor connectors from the
OPDS unit.
2. Install the seat-back cover (see page 20-82).
3. Install the seat assembly (see page 20-77), then

connect the side airbag harness 2P connector.
B 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make

sure there is nothing sitting on the front passenger’s
seat.
A
6. Initialize the OPDS unit (see page 23-24).
5. Remove the two screws (B) and OPDS unit (C).
7. After installing the OPDS unit, confirm proper
system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II);
23-140 -DYNOMITE 2009-

00/10/26 16:55:44 61S5N000_230_0141
Front Sensor Replacement

• Removal of the airbag must be performed • Be sure to install the harness wires so that they
according to the precautions/procedures are not pinched or interfering with other parts.
described before. • Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II) and do not
• Before disconnecting the side impact sensor 2P connect the battery cable while replacing the side
connector(s), disconnect the driver’s and front impact sensor.
passenger’s airbag 2P, both seat belt tensioner
2P and both seat belt buckle tensioner 2P 1. Install the new front sensor with new Torx bolts (A),
connector(s). then connect the engine compartment wire harness
• Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II) and do not 2P connector (B) to the front sensor (C).
connect the battery cable while replacing the side
impact sensor.
A
9.8 N·m
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 lbf·ft)
2. Remove the front inner fender (see page 20-106).
3. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness

2P connector (A), and remove the two Torx bolts (B)
using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the front
sensor (C). C
B
B
2. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
3. After installing the front sensor, confirm proper

system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II):
-DYNOMITE 2009- 23-141

00/10/27 09:06:25 61S5N000_260_0001
Service Manual Index
NOTE: Refer to the following list to look up

DTCs, symptoms, fuses, connectors, wire A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Air Cleaner Element
harnesses, specifications, maintenance Troubleshooting ................................... 21-42 Replacement ....................................... 11-146
schedules, and general service
information: A/C Signal Circuit Air Mix Control Motor
Troubleshooting ................................ 11-119 Replacement ......................................... 21-21
DTC Troubleshooting Indexes Test ........................................................ 21-21
ABS/TCS Components ........................ 19-32 A/T Assembly
Automatic Transaxle ............................. 14-8 Removal .............................................. 14-101 Airbag, Driver’s
Fuel and Emissions ................................ 11-7 Installation .......................................... 14-108 Replacement ....................................... 23-127
Heating/Ventilation ................................ 21-5 Repair .................................................. 23-132
SRS ........................................................ 23-25 A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valves Airbag, Front Passenger’s
Symptom Troubleshooting Indexes Test ........................................................ 14-96 Replacement ....................................... 23-129
A/C ......................................................... 21-35 Replacement ......................................... 14-97
ABS/TCS Components ........................ 19-33 Alternator
Automatic Transaxle ............................. 14-9 A/T Countershaft Assembly Replacement ........................................... 4-26
Cruise Control System .......................... 4-36 Disassembly/Inspection/Reassembly .... 14- Overhaul ................................................. 4-27
Fan Controls ......................................... 10-14 160
Fuel and Emissions .............................. 11-10 Alternator Belt
Heating/Ventilation ................................ 21-6 A/T Countershaft 4th Gear Inspection/Adjustment .......................... 4-33
Moonroof/Sunroof ............................... 20-44 Inspection ........................................... 14-163
SRS ........................................................ 23-27 Alternator FR Signal Circuit
Steering ................................................... 17-4 A/T Differential Troubleshooting ................................ 11-120
Component Location Index .............. 14-185
Fuse/Relay Indexes Alternator-compressor Belt
Power Distribution ............................... 22-46 A/T Gear Position Indicator Inspection/Adjustment .......................... 4-32
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box ............... 22-45 Replacement ....................................... 14-131
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box ............... 22-44 ATF
A/T Gear Position Indicator System Inspection ............................................. 14-99
Connector and Wire Harness Indexes Component Location Index .............. 14-125 Replacement ....................................... 14-100
Component Connectors (to hamess) . 22-13 Circuit Diagram .................................. 14-126
Grounds (to components) ................... 22-48 Test ...................................................... 14-130 ATF Cooler
In-line Connectors (to hamess) ........... 22-12 Repair .................................................. 14-114
A/T Hydraulic Controls
Specifications section .................. Section 2 Test ........................................................ 14-92 ATF Cooler Lines and Hoses
Replacement ....................................... 14-115
Maintenance section .................... Section 3 A/T Mainshaft Assembly
Disassembly/Inspection/Reassembly .... 14- ATF Pump
General Information section ........ Section 1 157 Inspection ........................................... 14-150
A/T Reverse Idler Gear Audio Unit

Removal/Installation .......................... 14-143 Removal/Installation ............................ 22-98
A Replacement ......................................... 22-99
A/T Shift Cable
Replacement ....................................... 14-120 Audio/Entertainment
A/C Adjustment ......................................... 14-123 Component Location Index ................. 22-96
Component Location Index ................. 21-31 Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-97
Description ........................................... 21-36 A/T Shift Lever
Circuit Diagram .................................... 21-37 Removal .............................................. 14-116 Automatic Transaxle
Test ........................................................ 21-57 Installation .......................................... 14-117 Description ........................................... 14-23
Disassembly/Reassembly ................. 14-119 Test ........................................................ 14-88
A/C Compressor
Replacement ......................................... 21-46 ABS Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting ................................... 19-49
A/C Compressor Clutch B
Inspection ............................................. 21-48 ABS Modulator-control Unit
Overhaul ............................................... 21-49 Removal/Installation ............................ 19-52
Back-up Light Switch
A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit ABS/TCS Components Test .......................................................... 13-3
Troubleshooting ................................... 21-40 Component Location Index ................. 19-28
How-to Information ............................. 19-29 Back-up Lights
A/C Compressor Relief Valve Description ........................................... 19-34 Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-71
Replacement ......................................... 21-51 Circuit Diagram .................................... 19-40
Ball Joint Boots
A/C Compressor Thermal Protector Accessory Power Socket, Front Replacement ......................................... 18-16
Replacement ......................................... 21-51 Test/Replacement .............................. 22-136
Ball Joints
A/C Condenser Accessory Power Sockets Removal ................................................ 18-10
Replacement ......................................... 21-52 Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-136
Battery
A/C Condenser Fan Circuit Air Cleaner Test ........................................................ 22-50
Troubleshooting ................................... 21-38 Replacement ....................................... 11-145 (cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/27 09:06:25 61S5N000_260_0002
(cont’d)
Blower Motor Carpet Coolant Temperature Gauge

Replacement ......................................... 21-27 Replacement ......................................... 20-62 Troubleshooting ................................... 22-62
Blower Power Transistor Catalytic Converter System Cooling System

Test ........................................................ 21-24 How-to Information ............................. 11-47 Component Location Index ................... 10-2
Test ...................................................... 11-152
Blower Unit Countershaft Bearing, A/T Housing
Removal/Installation ............................ 21-26 Ceiling Light Removal/Installation .......................... 14-142
Test/Replacement ................................ 22-94
Brake Booster Countershaft Bearing, Torque Converter
Adjustment ........................................... 19-15 Center Console Housing
Test ........................................................ 19-17 Removal/Installation ............................ 20-64 Replacement ....................................... 14-156
Replacement ......................................... 19-18
Center Console Rear Cover Countershaft Bearings
Brake Calipers Replacement ......................................... 20-65 Replacement ......................................... 13-40
Overhaul ......................................... 19-13, 22
Center Console Trim Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub
Brake Discs Replacement ......................................... 20-66 Removal .............................................. 14-161
Inspection ....................................... 19-12, 21 Installation .......................................... 14-162
Center Console Wood Trim Panel
Brake Fluid Level Switch Replacement ......................................... 20-65 Countershaft Speed Sensor
Test .......................................................... 19-9 Replacement ......................................... 14-98
Center Panel
Brake Lights Removal/Installation ............................ 20-69 Cowl Cover
Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-70 Replacement ....................................... 20-100
Charging System
Brake Lines and Hoses Component Location Index ................... 4-22 Crankshaft
Inspection ............................................. 19-23 Circuit Diagram ...................................... 4-23 Removal .................................................. 7-11
Replacement ......................................... 19-24 Troubleshooting ..................................... 4-24 Inspection ............................................... 7-13
Installation .............................................. 7-23
Brake Master Cylinder CKP (Crankshaft Position) Sensor
Replacement ......................................... 19-14 Replacement ........................................... 6-47 Crankshaft Main Bearings
Inspection ............................................. 19-15 Replacement ............................................. 7-7
Clutch
Brake Pads Component Location Index ................... 12-3 Crankshaft Oil Seal, Pulley End
Inspection/Replacement ................ 19-10, 19 Replacement ........................................... 12-7 Installation .............................................. 7-26
Brake Pedal Clutch Interlock Switch Crankshaft Oil Seal, Transmission End
Adjustment ............................................. 19-5 Test ............................................................ 4-6 Installation .............................................. 7-26
Brake Pedal Position Switch Clutch Master Cylinder Crankshaft Pulley

Test ........................................................ 22-80 Replacement ........................................... 12-5 Removal/Installation .............................. 6-11
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Clutch Pedal Cruise Control Actuator
Troubleshooting ................................ 11-123 Adjustment ............................................. 12-4 Test .......................................................... 4-42
Replacement ........................................... 4-43
Brake System Indicator Circuit Clutch Pedal Position Switch
Circuit Diagram ...................................... 19-8 Test .......................................................... 4-44 Cruise Control Actuator Cable
Adjustment ............................................. 4-44
Bulb, Gauge Clutch Slave Cylinder
Replacement ......................................... 22-61 Replacement ........................................... 12-6 Cruise Control Communication Circuit
Troubleshooting ..................................... 4-38
Bulb, Headlight Combination Light Switch
Replacement ......................................... 22-77 Test/Replacement ................................ 22-76 Cruise Control Main Switch
Test/Replacement .................................. 4-41
Bumper, Front Connecting Rod Bearings
Removal/Installation ............................ 20-90 Replacement ............................................. 7-9 Cruise Control Set/Resume/Cancel Switch
Test/Replacement .................................. 4-41
Bumper, Rear Connecting Rods
Removal/Installation ............................ 20-91 Inspection ................................................. 7-6 Cruise Control System
Component Location Index ................... 4-34
Connectors Circuit Diagram ...................................... 4-35
(See first page of this Index)
C Cruise Control Unit
Conventional Brake Components Input Test ................................................ 4-39
Component Location Index ................... 19-3
Cable Reel Inspection ............................................... 19-4 Cylinder Head Assembly
Replacement ....................................... 23-135 Repair ...................................................... 19-7 Component Location Index ..................... 6-3
Inspection ................................................. 6-6
Camshaft Coolant Removal .................................................. 6-22
Inspection ............................................... 6-30 Inspection ............................................... 10-8 Installation .............................................. 6-40
Installation .............................................. 6-39 Replacement ........................................... 10-8
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/27 09:06:26 61S5N000_260_0003
Cylinder Head Cover Door Lock Knob Switches Engine Block Assembly
Installation .............................................. 6-45 Test .............................................. 22-146, 160 Component Location Index ..................... 7-3
Cylinder Head, Bare Door Lock Switches Engine Block, Bare

Inspection ............................................... 6-27 Test ...................................................... 22-146 Inspection ............................................... 7-14
Repair ...................................................... 7-16
Door Moldings
Replacement ....................................... 20-103 Entry Light Control System
D Component Location Index ................. 22-85
Door Outer Handles Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-86
Replacement
Dampers, Front Front Doors ......................................... 20-7 EVAP Control System
Replacement ......................................... 18-20 Rear Doors ........................................ 20-15 Component Location Index .............. 11-159
Dampers, Rear Door Panels EVAP Two-Way Valve

Replacement ......................................... 18-32 Removal/Installation Test ...................................................... 11-175
Front Doors ......................................... 20-6
Dash Vents Rear Doors ........................................ 20-14 Evaporator Core
Removal/Installation ............................ 20-71 Replacement ......................................... 21-45
Door Sash Trim
Dashboard Replacement Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Removal/Installation ............................ 20-72 Front Doors ....................................... 20-11 Replacement ......................................... 21-44
Rear Doors ........................................ 20-20 Test ........................................................ 21-44
Dashboard Center Lower Cover
Removal/Installation ............................ 20-69 Door Seals Exhaust Manifold
Replacement Removal/Installation ................................ 9-3
Dashboard Lower Cover Front Doors ....................................... 20-13
Removal/Installation ...................... 20-67, 70 Rear Doors ........................................ 20-22 Exhaust Pipe
Replacement ............................................. 9-4
Dashboard Under Cover Door Strikers
Removal/Installation ............................ 20-68 Adjustment ........................................... 20-26
Differential Carrier Bearings, A/T Door Weatherstrips F

Replacement ....................................... 14-187 Replacement
Inspection ........................................... 14-189 Front Doors ....................................... 20-12
Rear Doors ........................................ 20-21 Fan Controls
Differential Carrier Bearings, M/T Component Location Index ................. 10-13
Replacement ......................................... 13-51 Drive Plate Circuit Diagram .................................... 10-15
Removal/Installation ................................ 7-5
Differential Carrier, A/T Fender Fairing, Front
Replacement ....................................... 14-186 Driver’s Pocket Replacement ....................................... 20-107
Removal/Installation ............................ 20-68
Differential Oil Seals, A/T Final Driven Gear, A/T
Replacement ....................................... 14-188 DRL (Daytime Running Lights) Control Replacement ....................................... 14-187
Unit
Differential Oil Seals, M/T Input Test .............................................. 22-72 Final Driven Gear, M/T
Replacement ......................................... 13-52 Replacement ......................................... 13-50
DTCs
Differential Pinion Gears, A/T (See first page of this Index) Flywheel
Inspection ........................................... 14-185 Removal/Installation ................................ 7-5
Dust and Pollen Filter
Differential Pinion Gears, M/T Replacement ......................................... 21-25 Frame
Inspection ............................................. 13-50 Repair Chart ........................................ 20-118
Door Glass Front Doors

Replacement ......................................... 20-10 E Component Location Index ................... 20-2
Adjustment ........................................... 20-23 Adjustment ........................................... 20-25
Door Glass Weatherstrips ECT Sensor Front Driveshaft Assembly

Replacement Replacement ......................................... 10-12 Inspection ............................................... 16-3
Front Doors ....................................... 20-12 Removal .................................................. 16-3
Rear Doors ........................................ 20-21 Emblems Disassembly ........................................... 16-5
Replacement ....................................... 20-105 Resassembly .......................................... 16-9
Door Key Cylinder Switches Installation ............................................ 16-17
Test ...................................................... 22-161 End Cover, A/T
Removal .............................................. 14-137 Front Impact Sensors
Door Latches Installation .......................................... 14-180 Replacement ....................................... 23-141
Replacement
Front Doors ......................................... 20-9 Engine Assembly Front Speakers
Rear Doors ........................................ 20-17 Removal .................................................... 5-2 Replacement ....................................... 22-101
Installation .............................................. 5-10
Door Lock Actuators
Test ...................................................... 22-145 (cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/27 09:06:27 61S5N000_260_0004
(cont’d)
Front Suspension Hubs
Component Location Index ................... 18-3 Replacement ......................................... 18-24
H
Fuel and Emissions
Description ........................................... 11-12
Hazard Warning Switch I
Fuel Fill Door Test ........................................................ 22-84
Adjustment ........................................... 20-98
Headlight Idle Control System
Fuel Filter Adjustment ........................................... 22-74 Component Location Index .............. 11-115
Replacement ....................................... 11-137 Replacement ......................................... 22-75 Inspection ........................................... 11-124
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Headlights Ignition Coil(s)

Test ...................................................... 11-140 Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-68 Removal/Installation .............................. 4-20
Fuel Injection System (PGM-FI) Headliner Ignition Key Light

Component Location Index ................. 11-50 Removal/Installation ............................ 20-60 Test ........................................................ 22-87
Fuel Injectors Heater Control Panel Ignition Key Switch

Replacement ....................................... 11-112 How-to Information ............................... 21-4 Test ........................................................ 22-87
Removal/Installation ............................ 21-24
Fuel Lines and Hoses Ignition Switch
Inspection ........................................... 11-131 Heater Control Power and Ground Circuits Test ........................................................ 22-53
Removal .............................................. 11-134 Troubleshooting ................................... 21-20
Installation .......................................... 11-135 Ignition System
Heater Unit Component Location Index ................... 4-17
Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement ......................................... 21-28 Circuit Diagram ...................................... 4-18
Replacement ....................................... 20-108 Inspection ............................................... 4-19
Heater Valve Cable
Fuel Pressure Regulator Adjustment ........................................... 21-30 Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver
Replacement ....................................... 11-137 Replacement ....................................... 22-168
Heating/Ventilation
Fuel Pump Component Location Index ................... 21-3 Immobilizer System
Replacement ....................................... 11-138 Description .............................................. 21-7 Component Location Index .............. 22-164
Circuit Diagram ...................................... 21-8 Description ......................................... 22-165
Fuel Pump Circuit Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-166
Troubleshooting ................................ 11-126 High Mount Brake Light Troubleshooting ................................ 22-167
Replacement ......................................... 22-80
Fuel Supply System Inner Fender, Front
Component Location Index .............. 11-125 Hood Replacement ....................................... 20-106
Adjustment ......................................... 11-129 Adjustment ........................................... 20-92
Test ...................................................... 11-130 Inside Rearview Mirror
Hood Insulator Replacement ......................................... 20-29
Fuel Tank Replacement ......................................... 20-94
Replacement ....................................... 11-139 Instrument Panel
Hood Latch Removal/Installation ............................ 20-67
Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Replacement ....................................... 20-113
Test ...................................................... 11-176 Intake Air System
Replacement ....................................... 11-178 Hood Opener Cable Component Location Index .............. 11-143
Fuses Replacement ....................................... 20-110 Intake Manifold
(See first page of this Index) Removal/Installation ................................ 9-2
Hood Seal
Replacement ......................................... 20-93 Interlock System
G Hood Switch Circuit Diagram .................................. 14-133
Test ...................................................... 22-163
Intermittent Wiper Control Circuit
Gauge Assembly Horn Input Test ............................................ 22-130
Replacement ......................................... 22-62 Test/Replacement .............................. 22-117
Gauges Horn Switch

Component Location Index ................. 22-54 Test ...................................................... 22-118 K
Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-56
Horns
General Information Component Location Index .............. 22-116 Key Interlock Solenoid
(See section 1) Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-117 Test ...................................................... 14-134
Glove Box HO2S, Primary Key Interlock System Circuit

Removal/Installation ............................ 20-70 Replacement ....................................... 11-114 Troubleshooting ................................... 14-86
Grille HO2S, Secondary

Replacement ......................................... 20-99 Replacement ....................................... 11-114
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/27 09:06:27 61S5N000_260_0005
Keyless Entry Transmitter M/T Differential Moonroof Motor

Repair .................................................. 22-147 Component Location Index ................. 13-49 Replacement ......................................... 20-49
Test ...................................................... 22-147 Adjustment ........................................... 13-53 Test ...................................................... 22-108
Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System M/T Mainshaft Assembly Moonroof Position Switches
Component Location Index ...... 22-137, 152 Inspection ....................................... 13-24, 27 Adjustment ........................................... 20-54
Circuit Diagram .......................... 22-138, 154 Disassembly ......................................... 13-26
Resassembly ........................................ 13-28 Moonroof Sunshade
Keyless Receiver Unit Adjustment ........................................... 13-40 Replacement ......................................... 20-48
Input Test ............................................ 22-140
M/T Reverse Shift Fork Moonroof Switch
Knock Sensor Inspection ............................................. 13-20 Test/Replacement .............................. 22-108
Replacement ........................................... 7-27
M/T Shift Lever Moonroof Wind Deflector
Knuckles Inspection ............................................. 13-20 Replacement ......................................... 20-46
Replacement Disassembly/Reassembly ................... 13-21
Front Suspension ............................. 18-11 Replacement ......................................... 13-48 Moonroof/Sunroof
Rear Suspension .............................. 18-26 Component Location Index ... 20-43, 22-106
Main Valve Body Test ........................................................ 20-55
Removal .............................................. 14-144 Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-107
Repair .................................................. 14-146
L Installation .................................. 14-147, 174 MTF
Disassembly/Inspection Inspection/Replacement ........................ 13-3
/Reassembly ....................................... 14-148
License Molding Multiplex Control System
Replacement ....................................... 20-104 Mainshaft Bearing, Torque Converter Component Location Index .............. 22-169
Housing Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-170
License Plate Light Replacement ....................................... 14-155 Description ......................................... 22-172
Replacement ......................................... 22-78 Troubleshooting ................................ 22-173
Mainshaft Bearings
Lights, Exterior Replacement ......................................... 13-39 Multiplex Control Unit
Component Location Index ................. 22-66 Input Test
Mainshaft Sealing Rings Entry Light Control System ............. 22-88
Lights, Interior Replacement ....................................... 14-159 Keyless Entry/Security Alarm
Component Location Index ................. 22-90 System ............................................ 22-142
Circuit Diagram .............................. 22-91, 92 Mainshaft Speed Sensor Multiplex Control System ............. 22-177
Replacement ......................................... 14-98
Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve
Test ........................................................ 14-91 Mainshaft 2nd Gear
Inspection ........................................... 14-158 O
Lock-up Valve Body
Disassembly/Inspection/Reassembly .... 14- Maintenance
154 (See section 3) Oil Filter
Replacement ............................................. 8-6
Low Fuel Indicator Map Light/Spotlight
Test ...................................................... 11-142 Test/Replacement .......................... 22-93, 94 Oil Pan
Installation .............................................. 7-25
Lower Arms MIL Circuit
Replacement ......................................... 18-19 Troubleshooting ................................... 11-98 Oil Pressure Switch
Test ............................................................ 8-4
Lubrication System Mirrors Replacement ........................................... 8-11
Component Location Index ..................... 8-3 Component Location Index ................. 20-27
Test ............................................................ 8-4 Oil Pump, Engine
Mode Control Motor Overhaul ................................................... 8-8
Replacement ......................................... 21-22
Test ........................................................ 21-22 Oil, Engine
M Replacement ............................................. 8-5
Moonroof Drain Channel
Replacement ......................................... 20-47 Oil/Air Separator
M/T Assembly Installation .............................................. 8-11
Removal .................................................. 13-4 Moonroof Drain Channel Slider
Installation .............................................. 13-9 Replacement ......................................... 20-52 OPDS Unit
Disassembly ......................................... 13-15 Replacement ....................................... 23-140
Resassembly ........................................ 13-43 Moonroof Frame
Replacement ......................................... 20-50 Outside Mirror Holders
M/T Countershaft Assembly Replacement ......................................... 20-29
Inspection ....................................... 13-30, 33 Moonroof Glass
Disassembly ......................................... 13-32 Adjustment ........................................... 20-45 Outside Power Mirror Actuators
Resassembly ........................................ 13-34 Replacement ......................................... 20-45 Test ...................................................... 22-113
Replacement ....................................... 22-114
Moonroof Limit Switch
Test ...................................................... 22-109
(cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/27 09:06:28 61S5N000_260_0006
(cont’d)
Outside Power Mirror Switch PSP (Power Steering Pressure) Switch Refrigerant Oil
Test ...................................................... 22-113 Signal Circuit Replacement ......................................... 21-33
Troubleshooting ................................ 11-122
Outside Power Mirrors Regulator Valve Body
Replacement ......................................... 20-28 Disassembly/Inspection
Component Location Index .............. 22-110 /Reassembly ....................................... 14-151
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-111 Q
Test ...................................................... 22-112 Resonator
Replacement ....................................... 11-147
Quarter Window Glass
Replacement ......................................... 20-18 Rocker Arm Assembly
P Removal .................................................. 6-27
Disassembly/Reassembly ..................... 6-28
Park Lever Position Stop R Rocker Arms

Inspection/Adjustment ...................... 14-139 Test ............................................................ 6-7
Inspection ............................................... 6-29
Park Pin Switch Radiator
Test ...................................................... 14-135 Test .......................................................... 10-5 Roof Drip Moldings
Replacement ....................................... 14-136 Replacement ......................................... 10-11 Replacement ....................................... 20-102
Parking Brake Radiator and Condenser Fans Common Roof Moldings

Inspection/Adjustment .......................... 19-6 Circuit Replacement ....................................... 20-101
Parking Brake Cable
Replacement ......................................... 19-25 Radiator Cap
Test .......................................................... 10-5 S
Parking Brake Switch
Test .......................................................... 19-9 Radiator Fan Assembly
Test .......................................................... 10-6 Seat Armrest, Front
PCV Valve Replacement ......................................... 20-81
Test ...................................................... 11-158 Radiator Fan Circuit
Troubleshooting ................................... 10-16 Seat Belts
Piston Rings Component Location Index ................... 23-3
Replacement ........................................... 7-20 Radiator Fan Switch
Replacement ......................................... 10-19 Seat Belts, Front
Pistons Test ........................................................ 10-19 Replacement ........................................... 23-4
Replacement ........................................... 7-17 Inspection ............................................... 23-9
Installation .............................................. 7-22 Radiator Fan Switch Circuit
Troubleshooting ................................... 10-18 Seat Belts, Rear
Power Steering Fluid Replacement ........................................... 23-7
Replacement ......................................... 17-14 Rear Air Outlet
Replacement ....................................... 20-108 Seat Cover, Front
Power Steering Lines and Hoses Replacement ......................................... 20-82
Replacement ......................................... 17-15 Rear Door Hook Pin
Replacement ......................................... 20-22 Seat Cushion Cover, Rear
Power Steering Pump Replacement ......................................... 20-89
Test .................................................... 17-9, 10 Rear Doors
Replacement ......................................... 17-16 Component Location Index ................... 20-4 Seat Heater Elements
Overhaul ............................................... 17-17 Test ...................................................... 22-150
Power Steering Pump Belt Component Location Index .............. 22-102 Seat Heater Relay
Inspection/Adjustment ........................ 17-12 Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-103 Test ...................................................... 22-150
Power Window Motor, Driver’s Rear Window Defogger Wires Seat Heater Switches
Test ...................................................... 22-125 Repair .................................................. 22-104 Test/Replacement .............................. 22-151
Test ...................................................... 22-104
Power Window Motors, Passenger’s Seat Heaters
Test ...................................................... 22-126 Rear Window Glass Component Location Index .............. 22-148
Replacement ......................................... 20-37 Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-149
Power Window Relay
Test ........................................................ 22-51 Recirculation Control Motor Seat Side Bolster Cover, Rear
Power Window Switch, Master Test ........................................................ 21-23
Input Test ............................................ 22-122 Seat, Driver’s
Test/Replacement .............................. 22-124 Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Disassembly/Reassembly ................... 20-79
Power Window Switch, Passenger’s Seat, Front
Test/Replacement .............................. 22-126 Refrigerant Removal/Installation ............................ 20-77
Replacement ............................. 21-53, 54, 55
Power Windows Test ........................................................ 21-56 Seat, Front Passenger’s
Component Location Index .............. 22-119 Disassembly/Reassembly ................... 20-80
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-120
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/27 09:06:29 61S5N000_260_0007
Seat, Rear Rear Suspension .............................. 18-28 TDC Sensors

Removal/Installation ............................ 20-85 Replacement ........................................... 6-47
Stabilizer Links
Seat-back Cover, Rear Replacement Thermostat
Replacement ......................................... 20-87 Front Suspension ............................. 18-18 Test .......................................................... 10-6
Rear Suspension .............................. 18-29 Replacement ......................................... 10-10
Seat-back Latch, Rear
Replacement ......................................... 20-86 Starter Throttle Body
Test ............................................................ 4-8 Test ...................................................... 11-144
Seat-back Lock Cylinder, Rear Replacement ............................................. 4-9 Removal/Installation .......................... 11-150
Replacement ......................................... 20-86 Overhaul ................................................. 4-10 Disassembly/Reassembly ................. 11-151
Seats Starter Solenoid Throttle Cable

Component Location Index ................. 20-76 Test ............................................................ 4-7 Adjustment ......................................... 11-148
Removal/Installation .......................... 11-149
Secondary Valve Body Starting System
Disassembly/Inspection Component Location Index ..................... 4-3 Tie-rod Ball Joint Boots
/Reassembly ....................................... 14-152 Circuit Diagram ........................................ 4-4 Replacement ......................................... 17-57
Troubleshooting ....................................... 4-5
Security Control Unit Timing Belt
Input Test ............................................ 22-157 Steering Inspection ............................................... 6-12
Component Location Index ................... 17-3 Removal .................................................. 6-12
Security Horn Troubleshooting ..................................... 17-6 Installation .............................................. 6-15
Test ...................................................... 22-161 Inspection ......................................... 17-7, 11
Timing Belt Auto-tensioner
Servo Body Steering Column Removal/Installation .............................. 6-19
Disassembly/Inspection/Reassembly .... 14- Removal/Installation ............................ 17-27
153 Inspection/Adjustment ........................ 17-29 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
Replacement ......................................... 14-94
Shift Control Solenoid Valves Steering Gearbox Test ........................................................ 14-94
Replacement ......................................... 14-95 Removal ................................................ 17-32
Test ........................................................ 14-95 Overhaul ............................................... 17-36 Trailing Arms
Installation ............................................ 17-54 Replacement ......................................... 18-31
Shift Forks
Inspection ............................................. 13-22 Steering Hanger Beam Transmission Housing
Disassembly/Reassembly ................... 13-23 Replacement ......................................... 20-75 Removal .............................................. 14-140
Installation .......................................... 14-177
Shift Lock Solenoid Steering Linkage
Test ...................................................... 14-134 Inspection ............................................... 17-8 Transmission Range Switch
Replacement ....................................... 14-135 Test ...................................................... 14-127
Steering Lock Replacement ....................................... 14-128
Shift Lock System Circuit Replacement ......................................... 17-30
Troubleshooting ................................... 14-83 Trim
Steering Rack Guide Component Location Index ................. 20-56
Side Airbag, Driver’s Adjustment ........................................... 17-31 Removal/Installation ................ 20-57, 58, 59
Replacement ....................................... 23-131
Steering Wheel Troubleshooting
Side Impact Sensors Inspection ............................................... 17-7 (See first page of this Index)
Replacement ....................................... 23-139 Removal ................................................ 17-24
Disassembly/Reassembly ................... 17-25 Trunk Latch Switch
Side Sill Seals Installation ............................................ 17-26 Test ........................................................ 22-95
Replacement ......................................... 20-13
Sub-frames Trunk Lid
Spark Plugs Replacement ....................................... 20-116 Adjustment ........................................... 20-95
Inspection ............................................... 4-21
Suspension Trunk Lid Latch
Specifications Adjustment ............................................. 18-4 Replacement ....................................... 20-115
(See section 2)
Synchro Ring, Dual-cone Trunk Lid Opener
SRS Inspection ............................................. 13-37 Replacement ....................................... 20-114
Component Location Index ................. 23-10
Description ........................................... 23-28 Synchro Sleeve Trunk Lid Opener Cable
Circuit Diagram .................................... 23-30 Inspection/Reassembly ....................... 13-37 Replacement ....................................... 20-111
SRS Indicator Circuit Trunk Lid Opener Solenoid

Troubleshooting ................................ 23-117 Test ...................................................... 22-162
T
SRS Unit Trunk Lid Torsion Bar
Replacement ....................................... 23-138 Replacement ......................................... 20-96
Taillight
Stabilizer Bar Replacement ......................................... 22-79 Trunk Lid Weatherstrip
Replacement Replacement ......................................... 20-97
Front Suspension ............................. 18-17 (cont’d)
-DYNOMITE 2009-
00/10/27 09:06:29 61S5N000_260_0008
(cont’d)
Trunk Light Assembly Water Pump
Test/Replacement ................................ 22-95 Inspection ............................................... 10-7
Replacement ........................................... 10-7
Trunk Security Latch Switch
Test ...................................................... 22-162 Wheel Bearings
Inspection ............................................... 18-8
Turn Signal Light
Replacement ......................................... 22-78 Wheel Speed Sensors
Inspection ............................................. 19-53
Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Replacement ......................................... 19-53
Test ........................................................ 22-83
Wheels and Tires
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights Inspection ............................................... 18-9
Component Location Index ................. 22-81
Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-82 Window Antenna Coil
Test ...................................................... 22-105
Window Antenna Wires

U Repair .................................................. 22-100
Test ...................................................... 22-100
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Windows

Removal/Installation ............................ 22-49 Component Location Index ................. 20-30
Upper Arms Windshield Glass

Wiper Motor, Windshield

Test ...................................................... 22-132
V Replacement ....................................... 22-133
Wiper/Washer
Valve Guides Component Location Index .............. 22-127
Inspection ............................................... 6-33 Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-128
Replacement ........................................... 6-34
Wiper/Washer Switch
Valve Seats Test/Replacement .............................. 22-129
Repair ...................................................... 6-36
Wire Harnesses
Valves (See first page of this Index)
Adjustment ............................................... 6-9
Removal .................................................. 6-32 Wiring System
Inspection ............................................... 6-33 How-to Information ............................... 22-3
Installation .............................................. 6-38 Relay and Control Unit
Locations ....................................... 22-7, 8, 11
Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit
VSS 1
Replacement ......................................... 22-65
VTEC Oil Pressure Switch 1st Clutch Assembly

Replacement ............................................. 6-7 Disassembly ....................................... 14-166
Inspection ........................................... 14-168
VTEC Solenoid Valve Resassembly ...................................... 14-170
Test ...................................................... 11-111
1st Gear One-way Clutch
Disassembly/Inspection
/Reassembly ....................................... 14-165
W
Washer Fluid Level Switch

Test ...................................................... 22-134
Washer Fluid Reservoir

Replacement ....................................... 22-134
Washer Motor, Windshield

Test ...................................................... 22-132
Washer Tube, Windshield

Replacement ....................................... 22-135
-DYNOMITE 2009-

SEO-OPTIMIZED MANUAL SECTION TITLE

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEO-OPTIMIZED MANUAL SECTION TITLE

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

00/10/27 13:32:20 61S5N000_000_0002

Pour avoir le supplement des models 2002-2005 contactez moi b_i_h_3_2@hotmail.com

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if

A Few Words About Safety

Some of the most important general service safety

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

Chassis and Paint Codes

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

Vehicle Identification Number

1-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Identification Number Locations

Vehicle Identification Engine Number

Transmission Number Transmission Number

-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-3

Warning/Caution Label Locations

SRS WARNING INFORMATION

FRONT PASSENGER MODULE DANGER

STEERING COLUMN NOTICE

SEAT BELT BUCKLE

CABLE REEL CAUTION

DRIVER MODULE DANGER

1-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

ENGINE COOLANT INFORMATION

-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-5

Under-hood Emission Control Label

1-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Lift and Support Points

2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle

3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift

5. Position the safety stands under the support points

6. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.

-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-7

It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80

• Improper towing preparation will damage the

1-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

-DYNOMITE 2009- 1-9

Standards and Service Limits

Standards and Service Limits

2-2 -DYNOMITE 2009-

-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-3

Standards and Service Limits

2-4 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Fuel and Emissions

-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-5

Standards and Service Limits

2-6 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit

Reverse idler I.D. 15.016−15.043 mm 15.080 mm

-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-7

Standards and Service Limits

2-8 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit

-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-9

Standards and Service Limits

2-10 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit

-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-11

Standards and Service Limits

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New

2-12 -DYNOMITE 2009-

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit

-DYNOMITE 2009- 2-13